Infragistics2.Win.v9.2 Returns the localized category name Name of the category to retreive The localized string value Return the list of products that this control can be licensed with Represents an object that will expose information via accessibility.

The AccessibleObjectWrapper is a thread safe object for providing accesible information. The is used to synchronize calls made from the accessible object interface to the wrapper object.

 Initializes a new Returns the control used to synchronize accessibility calls. The used to synchronize accessibility calls. Invoked when the accessible object that represents the accessible object is to be created. An accessible object that represents the wrapper Performs the default action associated with this accessible object. Retrieves the accessible child corresponding to the specified index The zero-based index of the accessible child An AccessibleObject that represents the accessible child corresponding to the specified index Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Retrieves the object that has the keyboard focus An AccessibleObject that specifies the currently focused child. This method returns the calling object if the object itself is focused. Returns a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no object has focus. Gets an identifier for a Help topic identifier and the path to the Help file associated with this accessible object. On return, this property contains the path to the Help file associated with this accessible object. An identifier for a Help topic, or -1 if there is no Help topic. On return, the fileName parameter contains the path to the Help file associated with this accessible object. Retrieves the currently selected child An AccessibleObject that represents the currently selected child. This method returns the calling object if the object itself is selected. Returns a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic) if is no child is currently selected and the object itself does not have focus. Retrieves the child object at the specified screen coordinates. The horizontal screen coordinate The vertical screen coordinate. Navigates to another accessible object One of the AccessibleNavigation values An AccessibleObject that represents one of the AccessibleNavigation values Modifies the selection or moves the keyboard focus of the accessible object One of the AccessibleSelection values Returns the wrapper that provides the accessible information for the accessible instance. Accessible object to evaluate An AccessibleObjectWrapper that provides the accessible information or null if one is not available Returns the control used to marshal calls to the ui thread. Returns the accessible object that represents the object. Indicates if the default action can be performed. Gets the location and size of the accessible object Gets a string that describes the default action of the object. Not all objects have a default action. Gets a string that describes the visual appearance of the specified object. Not all objects have a description Gets a description of what the object does or how the object is used. Gets the shortcut key or access key for the accessible object Returns the name of the accessible object. Gets the parent of an accessible object Returns the role of the accessible object. Returns the state of the accessible object. Gets or sets the value of an accessible object. A synchronized child accessible object Initializes a new Object that will provide the accessible information Performs the default action associated with this accessible object. Retrieves the accessible child corresponding to the specified index The zero-based index of the accessible child An AccessibleObject that represents the accessible child corresponding to the specified index Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Retrieves the object that has the keyboard focus An AccessibleObject that specifies the currently focused child. This method returns the calling object if the object itself is focused. Returns a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no object has focus. Gets an identifier for a Help topic identifier and the path to the Help file associated with this accessible object. On return, this property contains the path to the Help file associated with this accessible object. An identifier for a Help topic, or -1 if there is no Help topic. On return, the fileName parameter contains the path to the Help file associated with this accessible object. Retrieves the currently selected child An AccessibleObject that represents the currently selected child. This method returns the calling object if the object itself is selected. Returns a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic) if is no child is currently selected and the object itself does not have focus. Retrieves the child object at the specified screen coordinates. The horizontal screen coordinate The vertical screen coordinate. The child object at the specified coordinates, or null if no object could be located. Navigates to another accessible object One of the AccessibleNavigation values An AccessibleObject that represents one of the AccessibleNavigation values Modifies the selection or moves the keyboard focus of the accessible object One of the AccessibleSelection values Returns the object that provides the accessible information Gets the location and size of the accessible object Gets a string that describes the default action of the object. Not all objects have a default action. Gets a string that describes the visual appearance of the specified object. Not all objects have a description Gets a description of what the object does or how the object is used. Gets the shortcut key or access key for the accessible object Returns the name of the accessible object. Gets the parent of an accessible object Returns the role of the accessible object. Returns the state of the accessible object. Gets or sets the value of an accessible object. Base accessible object for representing a Initializes a new Associated UIElement Accessible role of the object Default name for the accessible object Default description for the accessible object Initializes a new Associated UIElement Accessible role of the object Default name for the accessible object Initializes a new Associated UIElement Default name for the accessible object Default description for the accessible object Initializes a new Associated UIElement Default name for the accessible object Initializes a new Associated UIElement Accessible role of the object Initializes a new Associated UIElement Returns the control used to synchronize accessibility calls. The used to synchronize accessibility calls. Retrieves the child accessible object at the specified screen coordinates. The horizontal screen coordinate The vertical screen coordinate. The child at the specified coordinates. Navigates to another accessible object One of the AccessibleNavigation values An AccessibleObject that represents one of the AccessibleNavigation values Retrieves the accessible child corresponding to the specified index The zero-based index of the accessible child An AccessibleObject that represents the accessible child corresponding to the specified index Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Gets the location and size of the accessible object Gets the parent of an accessible object Returns the role of the accessible object. Returns the state of the accessible object. Returns the name of the accessible object. Gets a string that describes the visual appearance of the specified object. Not all objects have a description Returns the associated Indicates if the associated object is displayed. Abstract base class derived by classes that want to support letting the user resize or move the element via the mouse Base class for all user interface elements. The collection of child elements The rect of this elements in client coordinates of the control The parent UIElement (will be null for the ControlUIElementBase derived classes Indicates if the child elements for this element need to be repositioned/created Constructor Constructor, initializes a new instance of the UIElement class. The parent element Called when element is disposed of. The default implementation calls Dispose on all child elements and then clears the child elements collection. Makes sure that the child elements for this element are in the ChildElements array and that they are positioned properly. This needs to be overridden if the element has any child elements. Called to ensure that all child elements are created and positioned properly. If the ChildElementsDirty flag is true then the PositionChildElements will be called and the dirty flag will be reset. This method gets called recursively for all descendant elements. Called to ensure that all child elements are created and positioned properly. If the ChildElementsDirty flag is true then the PositionChildElements will be called and the dirty flag will be reset If true will call this method on all descendant elements Called during a drawing operation to ensure that all child elements are created and positioned properly. If the ChildElementsDirty flag is true then the default implementation will call PositionChildElements and reset the flag The control's main UIElement If true will call this method on all descendant elements Offsets this element rect and all of its child elements The number of pixels to offset left/right The number of pixels to offset up/down Offsets this element's rect and (optionally) all of its descendant elements. The number of pixels to offset left/right The number of pixels to offset up/down If true will offset all descendant elements as well Sets the parent element The new parent element. Default implementation just walks up the parent chain. This is overriden by the ControlUIElementBase class which maintains a flag that some descendant element may have changed Sets the dirty flag so that the next time the element is drawn it will reposition its child elements Invalidates and calls InternalSetElementsChanged True if control should invalidate graphics immediately, False to wait for next paint message. Extracts the cursor from the appearance object this method is overridden by an element with a mousepointer set The to extract the cursor from. A This method is called from as an optimization to prevent searching down element paths that can't possibly contain the element that is being searched for. The (or base class type) of the UIElement to look for. The contexts that must all match with the contexts of the UIElement. True if there is any possiblity that the element being sought is a descendant of this element. If this method returns false then descendant elements of this element will be excluded from the search.

The default implementation does not make use of the type parameter. It will always return true except if this element has a and its type matches the type of one of the passed in contexts but the context objects are't the same.

For example, if the search was for a CellUIElement in an UltraGrid control and this is a RowUIElement and its is its corresponding UltraGridRow object and one of the contexts passed in was of type UltraGridRow but was a different UltraGridRow then we could safely ignore all descendant elements of this other row since the cell we are searching for couldn't possibly be a descendant.

However, if the is of type then the default implementation will always return true. This is because it can't make any assumptions based on equality since the significance of the DateTime context could be its date portion, its time portion or both.

This method is normally overridden by classes that override the method or that can provide additional optimizations based on the type or contexts.

 Returns an element of the requested type or null. The (or base class type) of the UIElement to look for. Returns the element of the requested type that satisfies the of the passed in contexts The (or base class type) of the UIElement to look for. The context that must match with the context of the element. Descendent element of this element that matches the specified type and context. Returns the element of the requested type that satisfies all of the passed in contexts The type (or base class type) of the UIElement to look for. The contexts that must all match with the contexts of the element. Descendent element of this element that matches the specified type and contexts. Returns true if this element (or any of its ancestors) has this context context of object True if this element (or any of its ancestors) has this context, False otherwise. Returns true if this element (or any of its ancestors) has this context context of object If true will walk up the parent chain looking for the context. True if this element (or any of its ancestors) has this context, False otherwise. Returns the primary context object. If there is no primary context object the default implementation walks up the parent element chain until it finds one. Returns an object of requested type that relates to the element (or one of its parent elements) or null. The requested type or null to pick up primary context object. If there is no context object of the requested type the default implementation walks up the parent element chain until it finds one. Returns an object of requested type that relates to the element or null. The requested type or null to pick up default context object. If true will walk up the parent chain looking for the context. Classes that override this method normally need to override the method as well. Called when the mouse down message is received over the element. Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Called on a mouse move message Mouse event arguments Called when the mouse is released over an element Mouse event arguments Returning true will ignore the next click event Called when the mouse hovers over an element. This method will only be called if the WantsMouseHoverNotification property is overriden and returns true. Called when the mouse enters this element Called when the mouse leaves this element Called when the mouse is clicked on this element. The default implementatiun just walks up the parent element chain. Called when the mouse is double clicked on this element. The default implementatiun just walks up the parent element chain. True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. Called when mouse capture has been aborted, for example, when the 'escape' key is pressed during a drag operation. Invalidates this element Invalidates this element True to force an immediate update Static method that returns the deepest nested element that is a common ancestor element of both the passed in elements. The first to check. The second to check. The that is a common ancestor of both elements. Walks up the parent chain until it reaches the parent of the requested type. Also, if this element is of the passed in type then this elemnt will be returned. The to look for. that matches the requested type. Returns true if the passed in element is in this elment's parent chain Element to check True if element is in the parent chain. False otherwise. Returns the range limits for adjusting the element in either or both dimensions. It also returns the initial rects for the vertical and horizontal bars that will need to be inverted during the mouse drag operation. Default implementation sets everything to zero. to check. The to populate. The adjustable cursor is used by any element that can be moved or resized. Returning null means the element can not be adjusted by clicking on the passed in point. The where the mouse currently lies. The to use over the adjustable area, or null if the area is not adjustable. Draws the element into a printer dc. DC to render into True if text needs to be clipped/truncated when printing becuase some printer drivers don't clip text correctly. Draws the element. DC to render into Area to paint True means a memory graphics object will always be created to cache drawing untilthe end. True to support alpha blending. If true, the element will be drawn with a focus rect if DrawsFocusRect is true, regardless of whether its parent control has input focus. Draws the element. DC to render into Area to paint True means a memory graphics object will always be created to cache drawing untilthe end. True to support alpha blending. Draws the element. DC to render into Area to paint True means a memory graphics object will always be created to cache drawing untilthe end. Determines which alphablend algorithm is used If true, the element will be drawn with a focus rect if DrawsFocusRect is true, regardless of whether its parent control has input focus. Draws the element. DC to render into Area to paint True means a memory graphics object will always be created to cache drawing untilthe end. Determines which alphablend algorithm is used A virtual method that gets called before the element draw process starts. This is for notification purposes, the default implementation does nothing. A virtual method that gets called after the element draw operation finishes. This is for notification purposes, the default implementation does nothing. The used to provide rendering information. Renders the element into the graphics object of the specified . This method will recursively invoke itself for rendering the descendant elements. UIElementDrawParams structure used as the default values for rendering the element.

Normally, rendering of the the element is done using the various method overloads. However, when performing lots of separate draw operations of different elements within the same control at the same time, this method is will provide better performance then invoking the method multiple times.

Note: It is up to the caller to manage the lifetime of the for which the is created.

 Initialize the appearance structure for this element The appearance structure to initialize The properties that are needed Default backcolor drawing just does a FillRectangle with the backcolor. The used to provide rendering information. Default background picture drawing The used to provide rendering information. Returns the widths of all four borders The of the element. A object describing which borders are present. A object. Checks if the point is over the element and is not over an overlapping sibling element. In client coordinates Returns true if the point is over the element. Checks if the point is over the element. In client coordinates Check to see if overlapping siblings contain this point Returns true if the point is over the element. Checks if the point is over the element. In client coordinates Check to see if overlapping siblings contain this point Specifies if we should ignore clipping or not Returns true if the point is over the element. Checks if the point is over the element. This may be overridden in derived classes for specialized hit test logic. In client coordinates Returns true if the point is over the element. Checks if the point is over the element. This may be overridden in derived classes for specialized hit test logic. In client coordinates Specifieds if we should ignore clipping or not Returns true if the point is over the element. Returns true if the passed in point is over an area of this element that would require the AdjustableCursor to be displayed In client coordinates Returns an element reference if the passed in point is over the AdjustableArea of this element (or any of its child elements) In client coordinates A if the passed in point is over the adjustable area of this element, or null. Returns an element reference if the passed in point is over the AdjustableArea of this element (or any of its child elements) In client coordinates Specifies the type of input for which this method is being called A if the passed in point is over the adjustable area of this element, or null. Returns the lowest level element that contains the passed in point In client coordinated of control Returns the lowest level element that contains the passed in point In client coordinated of control Specifies if we should ignore clipping or not Returns the lowest level element that contains the passed in point In client coordinated of control Specifies the type of input for which this method is being called Returns the lowest level element that contains the passed in point In client coordinated of control Specifies if we should ignore clipping or not Specifies the type of input for which this method is being called Returns the lowest level element that contains the passed in point In client coordinated of control Specifies if we should ignore clipping or not Specifies the type of input for which this method is being called A boolean indicating whether the should be honored when locating the element. Check to see if overlapping siblings contain this point Returns true if this ui element is interested in getting notificaions of type inputType at the specified location. Default implementation always returns true. The type of notification. Point of interest. True if the element wants to recieve notifications of the specified input type. Default border rendering The used to provide rendering information. Default foreground rendering - does nothing The used to provide rendering information. Default image rendering - does nothing The used to provide rendering information. Default drawfocus method draws a focus rect inside the element's borders The used to provide rendering information. Static method that searches thru the passed in collection and returns the first object of the requested type that it finds Collection to search Type of element to locate True to remove the element from the arraylist. The size of the arraylist will remain constant. The first object of the requested type that is found int he passed in collection. Static method that searches thru the passed in collection and returns the first object of the requested type that it finds Collection to search Type of element to locate True to remove the element from the arraylist. The size of the arraylist will remain constant. Context that the element should contain or null if the context should not be considered. The first object of the requested type that is found int he passed in collection. Gets the desktop area. In a multi-monitor setup, it gets the desktop area of the monitor that most of the rect resides in. The used to check to see which screen area should be returned. The Rectangle describing the desktop area that most of the provided rect resides in. Virtual method that is called each time the mouse pans horizontally Derived classes should override this method The number of pixels between the cursor position and the origin mark. This value is positive when the cursor is to the right of the origin mark, negative when it is left of the origin mark, and zero if it is within the origin mark threshold Virtual method that is called each time the mouse pans vertically Derived classes should override this method The number of pixels between the cursor position and the origin mark. This value is positive when the cursor is below the origin mark, negative when it is above the origin mark, and zero if it is within the origin mark threshold Notification handler for the Tick event fired by the vertical timer The object that sent the event Event arguments Notification handler for the Tick event fired by the horizontal timer The object that sent the event Event arguments Used by an element to render using the system theme. This method will not be invoked if the themes are not supported. The used to provide rendering information. Returning true will prevent the invocation of the DrawBackColor, DrawImageBackground, DrawBorders, DrawImage and DrawForeground. Return false when themes are not supported by the element or if unable to render using the system theme. Default child element rendering - draws each of the child elements. The used to provide rendering information. Returns the intersection of the element's rect with the invalid rect for the current draw operation. Invalid rect The intersection of the element's rect with the invalid rect. Determines if the context is of the specified type. The object to check. The type to check.

The method returns the following:

If either parameter is null it returns false.

If the context type is equal to the passed in type or if it is a subclass of the type the method returns true.

If the passed in type is an interface and if the object implements the interface then true is returned. Otherwise, false is returned.

 Navigates to another accessible object One of the AccessibleNavigation values An AccessibleObject that represents one of the AccessibleNavigation values Navigates to another accessible object One of the AccessibleNavigation values A list of types to which the navigation will be limited. An AccessibleObject that represents one of the AccessibleNavigation values Retrieves the child accessible object at the specified screen coordinates. The horizontal screen coordinate The vertical screen coordinate. Returns true if this element is the same as the specified element or if this element is a descendant of the specified element. The element to compare against. True if the element is the same as the specified element of if it is a descendant of the specified element. Returns the component role that the element should be using to obtain its role information. Helper method for obtaining a for a particular role name. Name of the role to obtain from the containing . The associated with provided role name. Gets the WM_NCHITTEST code for special ui elements that simulate non-client areas, e.g. caption, resizing border etc. The to hit-test. The default implemenation walks up the parent chain until there is no parent and returns HTCLIENT. Initiates a transition from the previous rendering of the element to the current display. Provides information about the transition Indicates the type of transition that should occur Find the closest element to this one in the element's control element.

The distance between elements is measured only in the direction of the search operation.

The element found must overlap this element when moving in the direction of the find operation.

The element found must also be completely past this element in the direction of the find operation.

If there are two elements found with the same distance to this element, the element whose edge is closest to the center line drawn thourgh this element in the direction of the find operation is chosen.

The direction in which the find operation should look. The starting element where the find operation originates. The best matching element found, or null if no element was found. Find the closest element to this one in the element's control element base on the criteria defined by the evaluator.

The distance between elements is measured only in the direction of the search operation.

The element found must overlap this element when moving in the direction of the find operation.

The element found is only allowed to overlap this element in the direction of the find operation by the amount specified by the evaluator.

If there are two elements found with the same distance to this element, the element whose edge is closest to the center line drawn thourgh this element in the direction of the find operation is chosen.

The direction in which the find operation should look. The class that defines the search criteria for the find operation. The best matching element found, or null if no element was found. Return true if this element wants to be notified when the mouse hovers over it. This property is read-only. The default implemenation returns false. This should be overridden by elements that want their OnMouseHover method to be called. True if this element is in a drawing operation (read-only). Returns the expected number of child elements for this element The element's bounding rectangle in client coordinates The parent/containing element (will be null for a top level/control element). Walks up the parent chain until it reaches a Control element (which overrides this method) If the context for this element is a selectable item (e.g. a grid row, cell or header) it is returned. The default implementation walks up the parent chain calling this method recursively until a selectable item is found or the control element is reached Returns true if there are any child elements (read-only) Returns the cursor that should be used when the mouse is over the element. By default this just walks up the parent chain by returning its parent's cursor The nesting depth, 0 for top level control elements, 1 for their direct child elements, 2 for those element's child elements etc. (read-only) Returns the child elements array (read-only) Used to keep track of the primary context for this element (e.g. its Row, Cell, Header etc.). Since most elements need only one context this property is usually adequate. Returns the top level/control element. Read-only. Returning true causes all drawing of this element to be expicitly clipped to its region Returning true causes all drawing of this element's child elements to be expicitly clipped to the area inside this elements borders Returns the rect inside borders as the default Returns true if the entire elment is visible or false if any part is clipped Gets/sets whether this element is enabled. Note: this will return false the element or any of its ancestors are disabled. Returns the intersection of this element's rect's with all of its parent element's rects Returns the region of this element. The default returns the element's Rect as a region. This method can be overriden to supply an irregularly shaped region True if this element is drawn normally. The default implementation of this property returns true. It may be overidden by some elements who don't do any rendering (e.g. scrollbars since they are actually scrollbar windows that render themselves) Returns true if this element needs to draw a focus rect. This should be overridden since the default implementation always returns false. Even if this property returns true the focus will not be drawn unless the control has focus. BorderStyle of the element. Returns flags indicating which borders will be drawn Returns the rectangle after adjusting for any borders Returns true is this element can be moved or resized by the user True indicates that the child elements need to be created/adjusted on the next draw operation (read-only) Gets whether this Element supports vertical mouse panning Default implementation returns false; derived elements that want to support panning must override this property implementation and return true If a derived element returns true, the mouse is captured when the middle button is pressed. The virtual 'OnMousePanVertical' method will be called during the capture. Derived elements that want to support panning should override OnMousePanVertical, and perform scrolling operations from within that method Gets whether this Element supports horizontal mouse panning Default implementation returns false; derived elements that want to support panning must override this property implementation and return true If a derived element returns true, the mouse is captured when the middle button is pressed. The virtual 'OnMousePanHorizontal' method will be called during the capture. Derived elements that want to support panning should override OnMousePanHorizontal, and perform scrolling operations from within that method Indicates if the element has capture. Indicates if capture for this element should be terminated if the escape key is pressed. Returns or sets an object that provides tooltip information for the element. Returns the InkProvider registered for our control's container. Indicates if the element supports accessibility. Returns the accessible object associated with the element.

Note Derived elements that plan to return an accessible object must override the member.

 Returns the accessible object associated with this element or one of its parent elements. Returns the region of this element that themed drawing should be clipped to. The default implementation returns null. Returns the associated with this element. Returns the used by this element or an element higher up the parent chain. Defines all constants and member variables used for mouse panning support Indicates which border was clicked on to start the up/down adjustment Indicates which border was clicked on to start the left/right adjustment Constructor initializes a new instance of AdjustableUIElement. (requires a parent element ) Parent UIElement True for vertical bar adjustments True for horizonatl bar adjustments Returns true if the element can be moved or resized vertically by clicking on the passed in mouse point In client coordinates True if the element can be moved or resized vertically from the point, false otherwise. Returns true if the element can be moved or resized horizontally by clicking on the passed in mouse point in client coordinates Returns true if the point is in the adjustable area. The point used to check whether it is in the element's adjustable area. True if the point is in the element's adjustable area, false otherwise. The cursor to use over the adjustable area of the element. The point that should be used to determine if the area is adjustable. The cursor that should be used to represent an adjustable region. Returns the range limits for adjusting the element in either or both dimensions. It also returns the initial rects for the vertical and horizontal bars that will need to be inverted during the mouse drag operation. The point where the mouse is in client coordinates Returned limits Invoked when the mouse is pressed down on the adjustable area before an adjustment begins. Mouse event args from the MouseDown True if an adjustment can be started Called when the mouse down message is received over the element. Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Called when a mousedown is received and a resize operation is started.. Specifies whether we're adjusting the element vertically. Specifies whether we've started the adjustment from the bottom border. Specifies whether we're adjusting the element horizontally. Specifies whether we've started the adjustment from the right border. Inverts the horizontal bar (for up/down adjustments) Inverts the vertical bar (for left/right adjustments) inverts the passed in rect (calling it twice with the same rect removes it) The rectangle that represents the area that should be filled, in client coordinates. Inverts the line from the top/left to the right/bottom of the passed in rect (calling it twice with the same rect removes it). This should only be called when the rect has a zero width or height. The rectangle describing the area and location of the line. Called when the mouse is moved over the element or during capture Called when the the X delta has changed. The change in direction along the x-axis. Called when the the Y delta has changed. The change in direction along the y-axis. Called when the mouse is released Returning true will ignore the next click event Called after a move/resize operation. A point containing the x and y-coordinate adjustments relative to the original position. Called after a CaptureAborted is received and the adjustment is canceled. Called after a move/resize operation to notify any listeners A point containing the x and y-coordinate adjustments relative to the original position. Called if escape is pressed to cancel an adjustment operation Fired after the element has been adjusted True if this element supports up and down adjustments True if this element supports up and down adjustments by grabbing the top border. True if this element supports up and down adjustments by grabbing the bottom border. True if this element supports left to right adjustments True if this element supports left to right adjustments by grabbing the left border True if this element supports left to right adjustments by grabbing the right border True if Adjustment Bar should be drawn while sizing. Returns true if this element can be moved or resized by the mouse For Infragistics internal use only. Used to determine if the delta calculated during an adjustment operation should be adjusted to account for the repositioning of the containing control in the screen - e.g. if the control may be repositioned during the adjustment. Summary description for AlphaLevelEditorForm. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Event fired when the user selects a new alpha level. Delegate for handling the event that is fired when the user selects a new alpha level. Eventargs for the AlphaLevelChanged event. Constructor The new alpha level. An abstract base class that is used to expose apperance related properties. An internal id used during serialization/de-serialization Constructor, initializes a new instance of AppearanceBase class. Constructor, initializes a new instance of AppearanceBase class. Key into the appearances collection Constructor, initializes a new instance of AppearanceBase class. Key into the appearances collection Internal ID used during serialization/deserialization. Constructor Internal ID used during serialization/deserialization. If object is of the same type, compares contents to determine equality. to compare to. Trueif objects are equal, otherwise False. Returns a hash code for the object. Hash code for this object Returns true if any appearance property is set to a non-default value True if any appearance property is set to a non-default value. Merges/copies the non-default appearance property settings from this object into the target AppearanceData structure based on the properties requested. The target appearance structure (copy to). Bit flags identifying the properties to be merged. Only those properties that are still set to their default values on the target structure will be merged. Resets all properties back to their defaults Returns a clone of the object Returns true if the value is not the default True if the back color is set to a non-default value. Returns true if the value is not the default True if the secondary back color is set to a non-default value. Returns true if the value is not the default True if the disabled back color is set to a non-default value. Returns true if the value is not the default True if the secondary disabled back color is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Resets the property back to its default value Resets the property back to its default value Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the value is not the default. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the back gradient alignment is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns the image property as an image. If it was set as an index into an imagelist control it will return the image at that index. If the image property was set to an image it will return that image. The image list to search The associated image, or null if none was found. Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the alpha-level is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the requested property has been set Only one bit representing a single property should be set True if the property has been set, false otherwise. Returns true if any of the requested properties have been set One or more bits representing multiple properties can be passed in. True if any of the requested properties have been set, false otherwise. Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value This creates a font based on the FontData settings and the passed in base font. This is the font used to supply default values for the created font. This parameter can not be null. The scaling factor used to determine the size of the font. The created font. It is the caller's responsibility to dispose of this font when no longer needed. Note: if no FontData properties have been set or the property values are the same as the base font then this method will return null. This creates a font based on the FontData settings and the passed in base font. This is the font used to supply default values for the created font. This parameter can not be null. The created font. It is the caller's responsibility to dispose of this font when no longer needed. Note: if no FontData properties have been set or the property values are the same as the base font then this method will return null. Returns true if the value is not the default True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the is not set to its default value. True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns the image from the appearance that should be used to render the element based on the specified enabled state. Enabled state to evaluate If enabled is false and the is specified, then that is returned, otherwise the value of the is returned. Returns true if the is not set to its default value. True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the is not set to its default value. True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value An internal id used during serialization/de-serialization The key of the item in the appearances collection The internal structure that actually holds the property values The primary color used to fill the background. The second color used in a gradient fill of the background. The primary color used to fill the background of disabled elements. The second color used to gradient fill the background of disabled elements. Specifies what alpha level (opacity) is applied to the background color. Specifies if a hatch brush will be used to fill the background. If a is specified the BackHatchStyle will be ignored. Determines how the BackGradientStyle is aligned with respect to its origin and extent. Specifies if and how a color gradient will be used to fill the background. The color of text. The color of text for disabled elements. An enumeration that specifies what alpha level (opacity) is applied to text. The color used to draw 2D borders. The second color used to draw 2D borders. The color used as the base for calculating the shadow and highlight colors when drawing 3D borders. An enumeration that specifies what alpha level (opacity) is applied to the borders. Specifies how text will be rendered when there is not enough room to display the entire string. The alignment of text horizontally. This property is not serialized directly at design time. Instead the property is serialized as a string with a setting of 'Center, 'Left', 'Right' or 'Default'. The alignment of text vertically. This property is not serialized directly at design time. Instead the property is serialized as a string with a setting of 'Middle, 'Top', 'Bottom' or 'Default'. The alignment of the Image horizontally. The alignment of the Image vertically. The font override settings to be used for displaying text. The mouse cursor. The foreground image. Can be either an image or an index into the imagelist's collection An enumeration that specifies what alpha level (opacity) is applied to the foreground image. The background image. An enumeration that specifies what alpha level (opacity) is applied to the background image. The origin of the background image. The style of the background image. The level (0 to 255) used for alpha blending (0 means default). This value is used when the BackColorAlpha, BorderAlpha, ForegroundAlpha, ImageAlpha, or ImageBackgroundAlpha properties are set to 'UseAlphaLevel'. Returns true if any of the fontdata properties are not set to their default values Specifies what alpha level (opacity) is applied to a themed element. Determines the margins for drawing a stretched image. Bit flags that indicate which properties have non-default values. Property used to serialize the property as a string at design time.

The property get will return "Default", "Center", "Left" or "Right".

The property set will set the property to HAlign.Default for the string 'Default', to HAlign.Center for the string 'Center', to HAlign.Left for the string 'Left', or to HAlign.Right for the string 'Right', or to HAlign.Default for all other string values.

The reason for this parallel string property is to allow version independent serialization of the setting into the form's .resx file for forms whose Localizable property is true.

 Property used to serialize the property as a string at design time.

The property get will return "Default", "Middle", "Top" or "Right".

The property set will set the property to VAlign.Default for the string 'Default', to VAlign.Middle for the string 'Middle', to VAlign.Top for the string 'Top', or to VAlign.Right for the string 'Right', or to VAlign.Default for all other string values.

The reason for this parallel string property is to allow version independent serialization of the setting into the form's .resx file for forms whose Localizable property is true.

 Determines the background image for a disabled image. Returns or sets the name of the library from which the style resource should be obtained.

The is used to indicate the name of the resource whose style information should be included when the method is used to obtain the appearance information. The StyleLibraryName indicates the name under which the application style library that will be used to obtain the resource has been loaded. To obtain a resource from the default/main style library, the StyleLibraryName can be left set to null (Nothing in VB), which is the default value, or empty string. Therefore, by default, the resource identified by the will be retrieved from the default style library.

The properties set on the Appearance itself (e.g. , etc.) will take precedence over the values set in the associated application style resource. So when the is invoked, the information from the appearance properties are merged in first and any remaining properties to be resolved will be picked up from the associated resource.

Note: The and will return true for properties that will be provided by the associated application style resource. However, the properties of the appearance (e.g. , etc.) will not return the values from the associated application style resource. To obtain the property values, whether they be set on the properties or set in the associated application style resource, you must use the method.

Since the has no reference to the control(s) that may be using it, the controls may need to be explicitly invalidated (e.g. using Control.Invalidate) in order to see the style information provided by the resource if an application style library is loaded after the control has rendered. Likewise, for cases where the appearance information was used to calculate metrics, the control's metrics may need to be dirtied when the application style library from which the resource is obtained has been changed. In cases where the control/component using the appearance is using application style information from the same application style library, you will likely not need to do anything as the control should invalidate its display/metrics when the event is invoked in that case.

Since the has no reference to the control(s) that may be using it, it is not possible to honor the . Therefore, when the is set to ControlOnly, the style information from the resource will still be used when the appearance information is obtained. Likewise, when it is set to ApplicationThenControl, the property values from the appearance will still be merged in before those of the appearance. Lastly, if the ResolutionOrder is set to ApplicationOnly, the MergeData methood of the appearance will not be invoked and therefore the resource information will not be used.

 Returns or sets the name of the application styling resource whose appearance information should be included when the MergeData method is invoked.

The StyleResourceName is used to indicate the name of the resource whose style information should be included when the method is used to obtain the appearance information. The indicates the name under which the application style library that will be used to obtain the resource has been loaded. To obtain a resource from the default/main style library, the StyleLibraryName can be left set to null (Nothing in VB), which is the default value, or empty string. Therefore, by default, the resource identified by the will be retrieved from the default style library.

The properties set on the Appearance itself (e.g. , etc.) will take precedence over the values set in the associated application style resource. So when the is invoked, the information from the appearance properties are merged in first and any remaining properties to be resolved will be picked up from the associated resource.

Note: The and will return true for properties that will be provided by the associated application style resource. However, the properties of the appearance (e.g. , etc.) will not return the values from the associated application style resource. To obtain the property values, whether they be set on the properties or set in the associated application style resource, you must use the method.

Since the has no reference to the control(s) that may be using it, the controls may need to be explicitly invalidated (e.g. using Control.Invalidate) in order to see the style information provided by the resource if an application style library is loaded after the control has rendered. Likewise, for cases where the appearance information was used to calculate metrics, the control's metrics may need to be dirtied when the application style library from which the resource is obtained has been changed. In cases where the control/component using the appearance is using application style information from the same application style library, you will likely not need to do anything as the control should invalidate its display/metrics when the event is invoked in that case.

Since the has no reference to the control(s) that may be using it, it is not possible to honor the . Therefore, when the is set to ControlOnly, the style information from the resource will still be used when the appearance information is obtained. Likewise, when it is set to ApplicationThenControl, the property values from the appearance will still be merged in before those of the appearance. Lastly, if the ResolutionOrder is set to ApplicationOnly, the MergeData methood of the appearance will not be invoked and therefore the resource information will not be used.

 A class that contains a set of properties related to the visual appearance of an object. The internal structure that actually holds the property values Constructor, initializes a new instance of Appearance class. Constructor, initializes a new instance of Appearance class. The appearance properties will be initialized to the values in this structure. Constructor Key into the appearances collection Constructor, initializes a new instance of Appearance class. Key into the appearances collection Internal ID used during serialization/deserialization. Constructor, initializes a new instance of Appearance class. Internal ID used during serialization/deserialization. Returns true if any appearance property is set to a non-default value True if any appearance property is set to a non-default value. Called when a property has changed on a sub object The that contains the property change information. Returns a clone of the appearance object A clone of this object. Constructor used during deserialization. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Serialize the appearance object Returns the number of non-default properties. A string representing the number of non-default properties. Merges/copies the non-default appearance property settings from this object into the target AppearanceData structure based on the properties requested. The target appearance structure (copy to). Bit flags identifying the properties to be merged. Only those properties that are still set to their default values on the target structure will be merged. Resets all properties back to their defaults Returns true if the value is not the default True if the font data is non-default. Resets the property back to its default value Returns the image property as an image. If it was set as an index into an imagelist control it will return the image at that index. If the image property was set to an image it will return that image. The image list to search The associated , or null if none was found. Called when and active object is Disposed to notify a derived class when the object has been Disposed. The default implmentation does nothing Returns true if the requested property has been set Only one bit representing a single property should be set Returns true if any of the requested property have been set One or more bits representing multiple properties can be passed in. This creates a font based on the FontData settings and the passed in base font. This is the font used to supply default values for the created font. This parameter can not be null. The scaling factor used to determine the size of the font. The created font. It is the caller's responsibility to dispose of this font when no longer needed. Note: if no FontData properties have been set or the property values are the same as the base font then this method will return null. This creates a font based on the FontData settings and the passed in base font. This is the font used to supply default values for the created font. This parameter can not be null. The created font. It is the caller's responsibility to dispose of this font when no longer needed. Note: if no FontData properties have been set or the property values are the same as the base font then this method will return null. Invoked during the serialization of the object. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Invoked after the entire object graph has been deserialized. The object that initiated the callback. The functionality for the this parameter is not currently implemented. Returns the image from the appearance that should be used to render the element based on the specified enabled state. Enabled state to evaluate If enabled is false and the is specified, then that is returned, otherwise the value of the is returned. The internal structure that actually holds the property values The primary color used to fill the background. The second color used in a gradient fill of the background. The primary color used to fill the background of disabled elements. The second color used to gradient fill the background of disabled elements. Specifies what alpha level (opacity) is applied to the background color. Specifies if a hatch brush will be used to fill the background. Determines how the BackGradientStyle is aligned with respect to its origin and extent. Specifies if and how a color gradient will be used to fill the background. The color of text. The color of text for disabled elements. An enumeration that specifies what alpha level (opacity) is applied to text. The color used to draw 2D borders. The second color used to draw 2D borders. The color used as the base for calculating the shadow and highlight colors when drawing 3D borders. An enumeration that specifies what alpha level (opacity) is applied to the borders. Specifies how text will be rendered when there is not enough room to display the entire string. The alignment of text horizontally. The alignment of text vertically. The alignment of the Image horizontally. The alignment of the Image vertically. The font override settings to be used for displaying text. The mouse cursor. The foreground image. Can be either an image or an index into the imagelist's collection An enumeration that specifies what alpha level (opacity) is applied to the foreground image. The background image. An enumeration that specifies what alpha level (opacity) is applied to the background image. JAS 5/25/05 - Derived classes shouldn't re-apply the LocalizedDescription attribute. The origin of the background image. The style of the background image. The level (0 to 255) used for alpha blending (0 means default). This value is used when the BackColorAlpha, BorderAlpha, ForegroundAlpha, ImageAlpha, or ImageBackgroundAlpha properties are set to 'UseAlphaLevel'. An enumeration that specifies what alpha level (opacity) is applied to a themed element. Returns true if any of the fontdata properties are not set to their default values Determines the margins used when drawing an when is set to Stretched.

Defines a set of margins for use when drawing a stretched . The area outside the margins will not be stretched. This allows the background image to display a "border" area that does not stretch (and thus does not get degraded) when the image is stretched.

 Bit flags that indicate which properties have non-default values. Determines the background image for a disabled image. Returns or sets the name of the library from which the style resource should be obtained.

The is used to indicate the name of the resource whose style information should be included when the method is used to obtain the appearance information. The StyleLibraryName indicates the name under which the application style library that will be used to obtain the resource has been loaded. To obtain a resource from the default/main style library, the StyleLibraryName can be left set to null (Nothing in VB), which is the default value, or empty string. Therefore, by default, the resource identified by the will be retrieved from the default style library.

The properties set on the Appearance itself (e.g. , etc.) will take precedence over the values set in the associated application style resource. So when the is invoked, the information from the appearance properties are merged in first and any remaining properties to be resolved will be picked up from the associated resource.

Since the has no reference to the control(s) that may be using it, the controls may need to be explicitly invalidated (e.g. using Control.Invalidate) in order to see the style information provided by the resource if an application style library is loaded after the control has rendered. Likewise, for cases where the appearance information was used to calculate metrics, the control's metrics may need to be dirtied when the application style library from which the resource is obtained has been changed. In cases where the control/component using the appearance is using application style information from the same application style library, you will likely not need to do anything as the control should invalidate its display/metrics when the event is invoked in that case.

Since the has no reference to the control(s) that may be using it, it is not possible to honor the . Therefore, when the is set to ControlOnly, the style information from the resource will still be used when the appearance information is obtained. Likewise, when it is set to ApplicationThenControl, the property values from the appearance will still be merged in before those of the appearance. Lastly, if the ResolutionOrder is set to ApplicationOnly, the MergeData methood of the appearance will not be invoked and therefore the resource information will not be used.

 Returns or sets the name of the application styling resource whose appearance information should be included when the MergeData method is invoked.

The StyleResourceName is used to indicate the name of the resource whose style information should be included when the method is used to obtain the appearance information. The indicates the name under which the application style library that will be used to obtain the resource has been loaded. To obtain a resource from the default/main style library, the StyleLibraryName can be left set to null (Nothing in VB), which is the default value, or empty string. Therefore, by default, the resource identified by the will be retrieved from the default style library.

The properties set on the Appearance itself (e.g. , etc.) will take precedence over the values set in the associated application style resource. So when the is invoked, the information from the appearance properties are merged in first and any remaining properties to be resolved will be picked up from the associated resource.

Since the has no reference to the control(s) that may be using it, the controls may need to be explicitly invalidated (e.g. using Control.Invalidate) in order to see the style information provided by the resource if an application style library is loaded after the control has rendered. Likewise, for cases where the appearance information was used to calculate metrics, the control's metrics may need to be dirtied when the application style library from which the resource is obtained has been changed. In cases where the control/component using the appearance is using application style information from the same application style library, you will likely not need to do anything as the control should invalidate its display/metrics when the event is invoked in that case.

Since the has no reference to the control(s) that may be using it, it is not possible to honor the . Therefore, when the is set to ControlOnly, the style information from the resource will still be used when the appearance information is obtained. Likewise, when it is set to ApplicationThenControl, the property values from the appearance will still be merged in before those of the appearance. Lastly, if the ResolutionOrder is set to ApplicationOnly, the MergeData methood of the appearance will not be invoked and therefore the resource information will not be used.

 Appearance object type converter. Returns true if the object can convert to that type. A that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert to. True if the object can be converted to the requested type. Converts the object to the requested type. A that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. The to convert the value parameter to. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. Appearance Image property type converter. Returns true if the object can convert to that type. A that provides a format context. A that specifies the type you want to convert to. True if the object can convert to the specified type. Converts the object to the requested type. A formatter context. A object that specifies formatting conventions used by a particular culture. The to convert the to. The to convert. This method returns the converted object. Custom class Converts the given object to the type of this converter, using the specified context and culture information. An that provides a format context. The to use as the current culture. The object to convert An object that represents the converted value. An object that exposes the properties of an Appearance object. This class is used for serializing/deserializing a reference to an appearance that exists in the control's Appearances collection. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the LinkedAppearance class. Internal ID used during serialization/deserialization. Returns true always since we need to maintain the link to the appearance in the collection even if the appearance has all default properties. Called when a property has changed on a sub object. Returns the index in the collection and the key value. Merges/copies the non-default appearance property settings from this object into the target AppearanceData structure based on the properties requested. The target appearance structure (copy to). Bit flags identifying the properties to be merged. Only those properties that are still set to their default values on the target structure will be merged. Resets all properties back to their defaults Returns a clone of the object An copy of the current instance. Returns true if the value is not the default Resets the property back to its default value Returns the image property as an image. If it was set as an index into an imagelist control it will return the image at that index. If the image property was set to an image it will return that image. The image list to serach Returns true if the requested property has been set Only one bit representing a single property should be set Returns true if any of the requested properties have been set One or more bits representing multiple properties can be passed in. True if any of the requested properties have been set. This creates a font based on the FontData settings and the passed in base font. This is the font used to supply default values for the created font. This parameter can not be null. The created font. It is the caller's responsibility to dispose of this font when no longer needed. Note: if no FontData properties have been set or the property values are the same as the base font then this method will return null. This creates a font based on the FontData settings and the passed in base font. This is the font used to supply default values for the created font. This parameter can not be null. The created font. It is the caller's responsibility to dispose of this font when no longer needed. Note: if no FontData properties have been set or the property values are the same as the base font then this method will return null. Returns the image from the appearance that should be used to render the element based on the specified enabled state. Enabled state to evaluate If enabled is false and the is specified, then that is returned, otherwise the value of the is returned. The key of the item in the appearances collection Returns the Appearance object that this object is linked to (read-only). Returns true if the RootAppearance has been set. The internal structure that actually holds the property values The primary color used to fill the background. The second color used in a gradient fill of the background. The primary color used to fill the background of disabled elements. The second color used to gradient fill the background of disabled elements. Specifies what alpha level (opacity) is applied to the background color. Specifies if a hatch brush will be used to fill the background. Determines how the BackGradientStyle is aligned with respect to its origin and extent. Specifies if and how a color gradient will be used to fill the background. The color of text. The color of text for disabled elements. An enumeration that specifies what alpha level (opacity) is applied to text. The color used to draw 2D borders. The second color used to draw 2D borders. The color used as the base for calculating the shadow and highlight colors when drawing 3D borders. An enumeration that specifies what alpha level (opacity) is applied to the borders. Specifies how text will be rendered when there is not enough room to display the entire string. The alignment of text horizontally. The alignment of text vertically. The alignment of the Image horizontally. The alignment of the Image vertically. The font override settings to be used for displaying text. The mouse cursor. The foreground image. Can be either an image or an index into the imagelist's collection An enumeration that specifies what alpha level (opacity) is applied to the foreground image. The background image. An enumeration that specifies what alpha level (opacity) is applied to the background image. The origin of the background image. The style of the background image. The level (0 to 255) used for alpha blending (0 means default). This value is used when the BackColorAlpha, BorderAlpha, ForegroundAlpha, ImageAlpha, or ImageBackgroundAlpha properties are set to 'UseAlphaLevel'. Specifies what alpha level (opacity) is applied to a themed element. Returns true if any of the fontdata properties are not set to their default values Determines the margins used when drawing an when is set to Stretched.

Defines a set of margins for use when drawing a stretched . The area outside the margins will not be stretched. This allows the background image to display a "border" area that does not stretch (and thus does not get degraded) when the image is stretched.

 Bit flags that indicate which properties have non-default values. Determines the background image for a disabled image. Returns or sets the name of the library from which the style resource should be obtained.

The is used to indicate the name of the resource whose style information should be included when the method is used to obtain the appearance information. The StyleLibraryName indicates the name under which the application style library that will be used to obtain the resource has been loaded. To obtain a resource from the default/main style library, the StyleLibraryName can be left set to null (Nothing in VB), which is the default value, or empty string. Therefore, by default, the resource identified by the will be retrieved from the default style library.

The properties set on the Appearance itself (e.g. , etc.) will take precedence over the values set in the associated application style resource. So when the is invoked, the information from the appearance properties are merged in first and any remaining properties to be resolved will be picked up from the associated resource.

Note: The and will return true for properties that will be provided by the associated application style resource. However, the properties of the appearance (e.g. , etc.) will not return the values from the associated application style resource. To obtain the property values, whether they be set on the properties or set in the associated application style resource, you must use the method.

Since the has no reference to the control(s) that may be using it, the controls may need to be explicitly invalidated (e.g. using Control.Invalidate) in order to see the style information provided by the resource if an application style library is loaded after the control has rendered. Likewise, for cases where the appearance information was used to calculate metrics, the control's metrics may need to be dirtied when the application style library from which the resource is obtained has been changed. In cases where the control/component using the appearance is using application style information from the same application style library, you will likely not need to do anything as the control should invalidate its display/metrics when the event is invoked in that case.

Since the has no reference to the control(s) that may be using it, it is not possible to honor the . Therefore, when the is set to ControlOnly, the style information from the resource will still be used when the appearance information is obtained. Likewise, when it is set to ApplicationThenControl, the property values from the appearance will still be merged in before those of the appearance. Lastly, if the ResolutionOrder is set to ApplicationOnly, the MergeData methood of the appearance will not be invoked and therefore the resource information will not be used.

 Returns or sets the name of the application styling resource whose appearance information should be included when the MergeData method is invoked.

The StyleResourceName is used to indicate the name of the resource whose style information should be included when the method is used to obtain the appearance information. The indicates the name under which the application style library that will be used to obtain the resource has been loaded. To obtain a resource from the default/main style library, the StyleLibraryName can be left set to null (Nothing in VB), which is the default value, or empty string. Therefore, by default, the resource identified by the will be retrieved from the default style library.

The properties set on the Appearance itself (e.g. , etc.) will take precedence over the values set in the associated application style resource. So when the is invoked, the information from the appearance properties are merged in first and any remaining properties to be resolved will be picked up from the associated resource.

Note: The and will return true for properties that will be provided by the associated application style resource. However, the properties of the appearance (e.g. , etc.) will not return the values from the associated application style resource. To obtain the property values, whether they be set on the properties or set in the associated application style resource, you must use the method.

Since the has no reference to the control(s) that may be using it, the controls may need to be explicitly invalidated (e.g. using Control.Invalidate) in order to see the style information provided by the resource if an application style library is loaded after the control has rendered. Likewise, for cases where the appearance information was used to calculate metrics, the control's metrics may need to be dirtied when the application style library from which the resource is obtained has been changed. In cases where the control/component using the appearance is using application style information from the same application style library, you will likely not need to do anything as the control should invalidate its display/metrics when the event is invoked in that case.

Since the has no reference to the control(s) that may be using it, it is not possible to honor the . Therefore, when the is set to ControlOnly, the style information from the resource will still be used when the appearance information is obtained. Likewise, when it is set to ApplicationThenControl, the property values from the appearance will still be merged in before those of the appearance. Lastly, if the ResolutionOrder is set to ApplicationOnly, the MergeData methood of the appearance will not be invoked and therefore the resource information will not be used.

 Appearance object type converter. Returns true if the object can convert to that type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert to. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the object to the requested type. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. A that represents the type you want to convert to. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. Class that defines margins for drawing an when the is set to Stretched.

This object defines a set of margins for use when drawing a stretched . The area outside the margins will not be stretched. This allows the background image to display a "border" area that does not stretch (and thus does not get degraded) when the image is stretched.

 Initializes a new object. The size of the left margin in pixels. The left margin extends from the left edge of the image rightwards. The value of left must be greater than or equal to 0. The size of the top margin in pixels. The top margin extends from the top edge of the image downwards. The value of top must be greater than or equal to 0. The size of the right margin in pixels. The right margin extends from the right edge of the image leftwards. The value of right must be greater than or equal to 0. The size of the bottom margin in pixels. The bottom margin extends from the bottom edge of the image upwards. The value of bottom must be greater than or equal to 0. Constructor used during deserialization. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Returns true if the property should be serialized. True if the Left property is set to a non-default value. Returns true if the property should be serialized. True if the Top property is set to a non-default value. Returns true if the property should be serialized. True if the Right property is set to a non-default value. Returns true if the property should be serialized. True if the Bottom property is set to a non-default value. Returns a string representation of the object.

The format of the string is "(left), (top), (right), (bottom)".

 A string representing the object. If object is of the same type, compares contents to determine equality. to compare to. Trueif objects are equal, otherwise False. Returns a hash code for the object. Hash code for this object The size of the left margin in pixels.

The left margin extends from the left edge of the image rightwards. The value of left must be greater than or equal to 0.

If a left margin is specified (greater than 0), then when the image is stretched, the left part of the image before the margin will not be stretched horizontally.

 The size of the top margin in pixels.

The top margin extends from the top edge of the image downwards. The value of top must be greater than or equal to 0.

If a top margin is specified (greater than 0), then when the image is stretched, the to part of the image up to the margin will not be stretched vertically.

 The size of the right margin in pixels.

The right margin extends from the right edge of the image leftwards. The value of right must be greater than or equal to 0.

If a right margin is specified (greater than 0), then when the image is stretched, the right part of the image before the margin will not be stretched horizontally.

 The size of the bottom margin in pixels.

The bottom margin extends from the bottom edge of the image upwards. The value of bottom must be greater than or equal to 0.

If a bottom margin is specified (greater than 0), then when the image is stretched, the bottom part of the image up to the margin will not be stretched vertically.

 Returns whether the Margins are empty (all for margins are set to 0). Returns a singleton instance representing an empty stretch margins instance. ImageBackgroundStretchMarginsConverter Returns true if the object can convert to that type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert to. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the object to the requested type. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. A that represents the type you want to convert to. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. Returns true if the object can be converted from the speficied type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert from. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the given object to the type of this converter, using the specified context and culture information. An that provides a format context. The to use as the current culture. The object to convert An object that represents the converted value. The AppearanceData structure contains the properties that are used to render an object Static method for converting an VAlign and an HAlign value into a ContentAlignment enumerator The to convert. The to convert. A new based on the provided parameters. Converts from a enumeration and returns a value that is equivalent. The style to convert from. The converted value. The enumeration values are offset by 2 to accomodate the Default and None values of the enumeration. Converts from a enumeration and returns a value that is equivalent. The style to convert from. The converted value. The enumeration values are offset by 2 to accomodate the Default and None values of the enumeration. If the passed in value is Default or None Static method for converting a ContentAlignment alignment enumerator value into a VAlign and an HAlign value The to convert. The that should be assigned to. The that should be assigned to. Merges/copies properties from the source to the target structure based on the properties requested The target appearance structure (copy to). The source appearance structure (copy from). Bit flags identifying the properties to be merged. Merges/copies properties from the source to the target structure based on the properties requested The target appearance structure (copy to). The source appearance structure (copy from). Bit flags identifying the properties to be merged. This creates a font based on the FontData settings and the passed in base font. This is the font used to supply default values for the created font. This parameter can not be null. The created font. It is the caller's responsibility to dispose of this font when no longer needed. Note: if no FontData properties have been set or the property values are the same as the base font then this method will return null. This creates a font based on the FontData settings and the passed in base font. This is the font used to supply default values for the created font. This parameter can not be null. The scaling factor used to determine the size of the font. The created font. It is the caller's responsibility to dispose of this font when no longer needed. Note: if no FontData properties have been set or the property values are the same as the base font then this method will return null. Checks if the font we would create is the same as would be created by the passed in AppearanceData. The AppearanceData structure to compare. Returns true if the font that would be created is the same. Checks if the font we would create is that same as the passed in font The base font to use for default values. The font to check Returns true if the font that would be returned from CreateFont is the same as the passed in font. Checks if the font we would create is that same as the passed in font The base font to use for default values. The font to check The scaling factor Returns true if the font that would be returned from CreateFont is the same as the passed in font. Checks if the font we would create is the same as the one that would be created by passed in appData. The base font to use for default values. The AppearanceData structure to check Returns true if the font that would be returned from CreateFont is the same as the one that would be returned by CreateFont when appData is passed in. Resets the property back to its default value Returns the back color to use for an element True if the element is enabled The appropriate color Returns the second back color to use for an element when doing a gradient fill. True if the element is enabled The appropriate color Returns the color to use for an element's text True if the element is enabled The appropriate color Returns the image property as an image. If it was set as an index into an imagelist control it will return the image at that index. If the image property was set to an image it will return that image. The image list to search The associated image, or null if none was found. Returns the image from the appearance that should be used to render the element based on the specified enabled state. Enabled state to evaluate If enabled is false and the is specified, then that is returned, otherwise the value of the is returned. Returns true if the requested property has been set Only one bit representing a single property should be set True if the requested property has been set, false otherwise. Returns true if any of the requested property have been set One or more bits representing multiple properties can be passed in. True if any of the specified properties have been set, false otherwise. Returns a copy of the structure. A copy of the structure. Gets/sets an enumeration that specifies which alpha level to apply to the background color Gets/sets an enumeration that specifies if a hatch brush will be used to fill the background. Gets/sets an enumeration that determines how the BackGradientStyle is aligned with respect to its origin and extent. Gets/sets an enumeration that specifies if and how a color gradient will be used to fill the background. The primary color used to fill the background The second color used in a gradient fill of the background. The color of the background for disabled elements The second color used in a gradient fill of the background for disabled elements. The level (0 to 255) used for alpha blending (0 means default). Gets/sets an enumeration that specifies which alpha level to apply to the foreground text. The color of text The color of text in a disabled element Gets/sets an enumeration that specifies which alpha level to apply to the borders The border color for non-3D borders The second border color for non-3D borders The base color used to create the shadow and highlight colors for raised or inset 3d border styles. If BorderColor3DBase is not set then the BackColor will be used. The fontdata properties used to draw text Returns true if any of the fontdata properties are not set to their default values Gets/sets an enumeration that specifies the origin of the background image Gets/sets an enumeration that specifies the style of the background image The mouse cursor Specifies how text will be rendered when there is not enough room to display the entire string. The alignment of text horizontally The aligmnent of text vertically The horizontal alignment of the image The vertical aligmnent of the image Gets/sets the background image Gets/sets an enumeration that specifies which alpha level to apply to the background image The foreground image. Can be either an image or an index into the imagelist's collection Gets/sets an enumeration that specifies which alpha level to apply to the foreground image Gets/sets an enumeration that specifies which alpha level to apply to the themed element. Bit flags that indicate which properties have non-default values. Determines the margins used when drawing an when is set to Stretched.

Defines a set of margins for use when drawing a stretched . The area outside the margins will not be stretched. This allows the background image to display a "border" area that does not stretch (and thus does not get degraded) when the image is stretched.

 Gets/sets the background image when the associate element is disabled. Delegate for appearance resolution. AppearanceHolder is used internally by a class that will expose one or more Appearance properties and an Appearances collection. During serialization the AppearanceHolder will serialize either the Appearance object or, if the Appearance is a member of the collection, its key or id. This is because the Appearance object will get serialized as part of the collection. Initializes a new Called when another sub object that we are listening to notifies us that one of its properties has changed. Returns a clone of the collection Returns true is any of the properties have been set to non-default values True if any of the properties have been set to non-default values, false otherwise. Resets all properties back to their default values Constructor used during deserialization. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Serialize the appearnce object Initializes the state of this object from a source object of the same type Fired when a property is changed on this object or any of its sub objects Returns the event handler that notifies OnSubObjectPropChanged Gets/sets the associated appearances collection For Appearance objects returns the object, for LinkedAppearances, returns the Appearance that it is linked to (read-only). Appearance object Returns true if an appearance object has been created. Class for managing multiple appearance properties. Initializes a new Array of enums associated with each item in the collection Initializes a new Appearances collection with which that appearance holder collection property should be initialized. Array of enums associated with each item in the collection Constructor used during deserialization to initialize a new object with the serialized property values. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Returns the appearance at the specified index. Index of the appearance to return An at the specified index. Returns true if an has been allocated for specified index. Index to evaluate True if an appearance exists at the specified location This method is used to initialize the stored property ids after the object has been deserialized. Appearances collection with which that appearance holder collection property should be initialized. Array of property ids to associate with the appearances Resets the appearances. Removes the appearance object The index of the appearance to reset. Merges the appearance information from the appearance at the specified index into the specified structure Index of the appearance whose appearance information should be merged AppearanceData that should be updated with the information from the appearance. Appearance properties that should be merged into the Sets the appearance of the at the specified index. Index of the appearance holder whose property should be set. The to assign at the specified index. Returns true if any appearance properties need to be persisted. True if any appearances are set to non-default values, false otherwise. Returns true if the appearance object at the specified index needs to be persisted True if the appearance object at the specified index has been set to a non-default value. Called when this object is Disposed of Called when another sub object that we are listening to notifies us that one of its properties has changed. The that contains the property change information. Returns or sets the with which the contained instances should be associated. Dialog used to choose a color. Required designer variable. Creates a new instance of the class. Clean up any resources being used. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Gets/sets the color to be displayed in the color wheel. Custom control for displaying a color palette. Creates a new instance of the class. Clean up any resources being used. Specifies whether managed and unmanaged resources should be cleaned up. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Reevaluates the appropriate values for the scrollbar's Minimum, Maximum, and Enabled properties. Returns the color at the specified point, or Color.Empty if the specified point does not coincide with a color box. The horizontal component of the location to be evaluated, expressed in client coordinates. The vertical component of the location to be evaluated, expressed in client coordinates. The at the specified point, or Color.Empty if the point does not coincide with a color box. Returns the color at the specified point, or Color.Empty if the specified point does not coincide with a color box. The location to be evaluated, expressed in client coordinates. The at the specified point, or Color.Empty if the point does not coincide with a color box. Adds the specified color to the palette. If the color has already been added, this method does nothing and returns.

Colors added via this method will always appear after the control's default colors.

 The color to add Indicates if the property should be serialized. True if the collection contains any items Clears the Returns the preferred size for the control based on the specified size. Proposed size of the control The recommended size for the control based on the proposed size. Invokes the control's Resize event. The event args. Override the sizing of the control when autosized. The new height of the control. A bitwise combination of the values. The new width of the control. The new property value of the control. The new property value of the control. Initializes the control upon creation. Called when the mouse wheel is rotated. The . Invokes the control's DoubleClick event. Used to invoke the MouseDown event. Event arguments Returns true if the palette contains the specified color. The to search for in the palette. True if the palette contains the specified color. Returns the index of the color at the specified point, or -1 if the specified point does not coincide with a color box. The horizontal component of the location to be evaluated, expressed in client coordinates. The vertical component of the location to be evaluated, expressed in client coordinates. The index of the color at the specified point, or -1 if the specified point does not coincide with a color box. Returns the index of the color at the specified point, or -1 if the specified point does not coincide with a color box. The location to be evaluated, expressed in client coordinates. Shows a Color Chooser dialog so that the user can choose a custom color. The chosen color will be added to the list of user-defined colors. True if the user is setting the ForeColor. False for setting the BackColor. Shows a Color Chooser dialog so that the user can choose a custom color. The chosen color will be added to the list of user-defined colors. True if the user is setting the ForeColor. False for setting the BackColor. The initial selected color. If this is set to Color.Empty, then the ForeColor or BackColor will be used, based on the useForeColor parameter. Fires the ColorClicked event. Determines if two colors are the same. The first to compare. The to compare against the first provided color. True if the colors are the same, false if they are not.

The Equals method of the color object is restrictive in that a Named color will not equal an unnamed color even if their ARGB values are the same. This method is less restrictive and will return that such colors are the same.

 Overrides the control's determination of what is considered an input key. Key A boolean indicating if this key is an input key for the control. Fired when a color is selected. Fired when a color is clicked.

This event only fires when a color is selected by clicking on it. Unlike the event, this event only fires in response to a click. It will not fire when the selected color is changed for by any other methods such as setting the SelectedForeColor in code or using the arrow keys.

If the ColorSelectorMode is set to ColorSelectorMode.Single then this event will only fire for the left mouse button (ForeColor) or when a color is selected via the ColorChooser.

 Returns or sets the currently selected forecolor. Returns or sets the currently selected backcolor. Returns or sets the size of the color box. Returns or sets whether tooltips should be displayed as the mouse moves over a color box. Returns or sets a custom palette used to provide the colors for the control.

When set to null (Nothing in VB), a default set of colors is used to populate the palette.

 Returns or sets whether the items are added to the palette. Returns a collection containing the colors defined by the end user. Returns or sets whether the control automatically adjusts the size to ensure that partial color boxes are not displayed. Returns or sets whether the control can receive focus. Returns the default size for the control. Returns or sets the default cursor for the component. Determines whether the ColorSelector is being used for both a ForeColor and BackColor such as in a paint application or if it is being used to select a single color like in a Color Picker. Whether the control should use applicaton styling. Modifiable colors collection. Initializes a new Overriden. Adds the default colors to the collection. Overriden. Invoked after the collection has been cleared. Overriden. Invoked when an item is inserted into the collection. Index of the item New item Overriden. Invoked when an item is removed from the collection. Index of the item Item being removed Overriden. Invoked after an item in the collection has been set. Index of the item Old value New value Overriden. Used to validate the items added to the collection. Value to evaluate Adds a color to the collection. Color to add Inserts a color into the collection. Index at which to insert the color Color to insert Removes a color from the collection. Color to remove Sorts the collection using the specified comparer. Object used to sort the collection Used to invoke the event. Invoked when the collection's contents have changed. Initializes a new Overriden. Invoked when the control is disposed. Disposing Invoke when the mouse is pressed down on the control. MouseEventArgs e Invoked when the mouse is moved over the control. MouseEventArgs Invoked when the mouse is released over the control. Mouse event args Overriden. Invokes the Paint event. Paint event arguments Used to invoked the Resize event. Event arguments Initializes the color property with the specified hue, saturation and luminosity. A value between 0 and 255 that represents the hue. A value between 0 and 255 that represents the saturation, A value between 0 and 255 that represents the brightness. Used to invoke the event Event args Returns or sets the current selected color. Invoked when the color has changed. Summary description for AppearanceImageEditorForm. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Returns the Returns the resolved value of the current image. Returns the resolved value of the selected image. Dialog for setting the image dimensions. Creates a new instance of the class. Creates a new instance of the class. Initial Dimensions Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Displays the dialog. The dimensions with which to initially populate the dialog fields. Returns the new image dimensions. Returns or sets the maximum size for the image. Creates a new instance of the class. Clean up any resources being used. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. The main entry point for the application. Returns the Image that resulted from the dialog session, or null if the session was canceled. Control used to select a forecolor and backcolor. Initializes a new Used to invoke the EventArgs Used to invoke the EventArgs Used to invoke the EventArgs Used to invoke the Paint event Event arguments Overriden. Used to adjust the size of the control Left Top Width Height Indicates the type of size change. Used to invoke the MouseDown MouseEventArgs Initializes the control upon creation. Returns or sets the currently selected backcolor. Returns or sets the currently selected forecolor. Returns or sets the maximum extent of the color boxes Returns or sets the maximum extent of the swap color arrow. Returns or sets whether the control will automatically adjust its size. Invoked when the backcolor has been changed. Invoked when the forecolor has been changed Invoked when the and have been switched Clean up any resources being used. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Returns the style of the font reflected by this dialog. Returns the name of the font reflected by this dialog. Returns the size of the font reflected by this dialog. This is used by the object's property's uieditor to selecting images from the list. Returns the or null. A collection of Appearance objects. Constructor, initializes a new instance of AppearancesCollection class. The image list provider (usually the control or component). Constructor The image list provider (usually the control or component). The expected number of entries Called after de-serialization to set the imagelistProvider. The image list provider (usually the control or component). Returns a clone of the collection Clones each appearance in the source collection and appends it to this collection. The collection of Appearance objects to clone. Constructor used during deserialization. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Serialize the collection Add the appearance to the colection Must be a Appearance object The index Removes the appearance from the colection Must be a appearance Removes the appearance from the collection at the specified index The index of the item that should be removed. Inserts the appearance into the colection The index where to insert the item The Appearance object Inserts the appearance into the colection The index where to insert the item The Appearance object Adds a new appearance object to the collection The argument was . The newly added appearance object Adds a new appearance object to the collection the unique key to identify the new appearance The newly added appearance object Clears the collection Removes an appearance from the collection Removes this from the collection. Removes an appearance from the collection Key of the appearance to remove. Removes an appearance from the collection index of the appearance to remove. IEnumerable Interface Implementation returns a type safe enumerator The type safe enumerator Called when a property has changed on an appearance in the collection The structure containing the property change information. Invoked during the serialization of the object. SerializationInfo StreamingContext A collection of Appearance objects.

Returns the ImagelistProvider for this collection.

This is used by the object's property's uieditor to selecting images from the list.

 True if the collection is read-only Returns false denoting that the collection is not fixed in size. Indexer (0 based index) Indexer (by string key) Specifies the initial capacity of the collection The collection as an array of objects (read-only) Enumerator for the AppearanceCollection Constructor Type-safe version of Current The editor for a property of type .

Assuming the object has a reference to an , this editor will drop down a list of the s in the collection.

After selecting an from the collection, changing any properties on that will affect all properties that share that .

 Used to determine the type of UIEditor that will be displayed. ITypeDescriptorContext UITypeEditorEditStyle specifying the type of UIEditor. Used to edit the value and convert the value as needed. ITypeDescriptorContext IServiceProvider Current value Edited value. UITypeEditor for the enumeration of objects. Abstract base class type editor for appearance related enumeration members Used to determine the type of UIEditor that will be displayed. ITypeDescriptorContext UITypeEditorEditStyle specifying the type of UIEditor. Used to edit the value and convert the value as needed. ITypeDescriptorContext IServiceProvider Current value Edited value. Indicates if the a small representation of the value is rendered in the property grid. Context information about the property to render True to indicate that a value will be rendered Invoked when a small representation of the value should be rendered. Event arguments Invoked when the member variables should be initialized from the context Context from which to initialize Invoked when the listbox used to display the enum values is created. Invoked when the item in the listbox should be rendered Object invoking the event Draw item event arguments Used to paint the representation of the enum value Enumeration value to render Location to render into Graphics object Primary backcolor Secondary backcolor Returns the type of enumeration supported. Used to paint the representation of the enum value Enumeration value to render Location to render into Graphics object Returns the type of enumeration supported. UITypeEditor for the BackHatchStyle enumeration of objects. Used to paint the representation of the enum value Enumeration value to render Location to render into Graphics object Returns the type of enumeration supported. UITypeEditor for selecting an image from a file, an imagelist or creating/editing an image. Used to determine the type of UIEditor that will be displayed. ITypeDescriptorContext UITypeEditorEditStyle specifying the type of UIEditor. Used to edit the value and convert the value as needed. ITypeDescriptorContext IServiceProvider Current value Edited value. Indicates if the a small representation of the value is rendered in the property grid. Context information about the property to render True to indicate that a value will be rendered Invoked when a small representation of the value should be rendered. Event arguments Used to obtain the imagelist that will be used by the image editor dialog. The that provides type information about the object. The used to retrieving a service object. This parameter is not used in this implementation. The ImageList associated with the provided context. Type editor for the appearance Image property Returns the associated with the context. The that provides type information about the object. This parameter is not used in this override. This parameter is not used in this override. The ImageList associated with the provided context. Type editor for the appearance Image property Used to determine the type of UIEditor that will be displayed. ITypeDescriptorContext UITypeEditorEditStyle specifying the type of UIEditor. Used to edit the value and convert the value as needed. ITypeDescriptorContext IServiceProvider Current value Edited value. Indicates if the a small representation of the value is rendered in the property grid. Context information about the property to render True to indicate that a value will be rendered Type editor for Image properties that can show items from an ImageList. Constructor. The that the object will show images from. Returns the associated with the editor. The that provides type information about the object. The used to retrieving a service object. This parameter is not used in this implementation. The ImageList associated with the provided context. An object that provides style information to a component for a specific styleset. Initializes a new Component utilizing the style information. Name of the component role that was registered and that will be used to obtain the associated style information Returns a structure that provides information about whether the control settings or application style information should take predence based on the . Returns a structure that provides information about whether the control settings or application style information should take predence based on the of the specified . The ComponentRole used to determine the resolution order. A object, or if the role is null. Returns the value for the specified property name. Case insensitive name of the property whose value should be returned. The value for the specified property. The value could be null. Returns the value for the specified property name. Case insensitive name of the property whose value should be returned. The value for the specified property. The value could be null. Indicates if the component role has a value for the specified custom property. Name of the custom property to evaluate True if there is a Returns the role with the specified name. Name of the uirole to return A for the specified role name. Returns the cached role at the specified index. Index of the cached role to return. This must be at least 0 and less than the length of the . The cached UIRole at the specified index. Used by the associated to determine which instances should be cached. An array of strings containing the names of the role names that should be cached. Invoked when the component role is disposed. Invoked when the style information for the component has changed. Returns cached resolved value for the property identified by the propertyIndex. The propertyIndex parameter must be less than the value set on the PropertiesCacheCount property of this component role. Also note that whenever the control property value changes, the cache needs to be cleared using the method. The index that uniquely identifies the property whose cached resolved value to get. The propertyIndex parameter must be less than the value set on the PropertiesCacheCount property of this component role. This out parameter will be assigned the cached resolved value of the property. Returns true if the resolved value of the property is cached. If false then you need to cache it using the method. Clears the cached resolved property values. Caches the resolved value of the specified property. The index that uniquely identifies the property whose cached resolved value to get. The propertyIndex parameter must be less than the value set on the PropertiesCacheCount property of this component role. The custom property name. Control property's value. Default value for the property. If both the control and the style values are default then resolve the value to this value. Return the cached property value. Caches the resolved value of the specified property. The index that uniquely identifies the property whose cached resolved value to get. The propertyIndex parameter must be less than the value set on the PropertiesCacheCount property of this component role. The custom property name. Control property's value. Array of one or more default values for the property. If both the control and the style values are default then resolve the value to this value. Return the cached property value. Caches the resolved value of the specified property. The style property value. Control property's value. Default value for the property. If both the control and the style values are default then resolve the value to this value. The index that uniquely identifies the property whose cached resolved value to get. The propertyIndex parameter must be less than the value set on the PropertiesCacheCount property of this component role. Return the cached property value. Caches the resolved value of the specified property. The style property value. Control property's value. Array of one or more default values for the property. If both the control and the style values are default then resolve the value to this value. The index that uniquely identifies the property whose cached resolved value to get. The propertyIndex parameter must be less than the value set on the PropertiesCacheCount property of this component role. Return the cached property value. Returns the associated component or control. Returns the name of the component role that will be used to locate the associated application style information for the component level properties. Returns the recommended resolution order when resolving the application style information. Returns the recommended flat mode state for the component. Returns the recommended state for whether the component should use the os themes to render its elements. Returns the recommended button style for the component. Returns the recommended header style for the component. Returns the recommended view style for the component. Returns or sets the name of the associated styleset. Returns the resolved name of the styleset that the component will use. Returns the instance that represents the styleset used by the component. Returns an object that can be used to synchronize calls to the associated component's thread. Number of properties whose resolved values will be cached by the CachePropertyValue and GetCachedProperty methods. The propertyIndex parameter passed into those methods must be less than this count. Returns or sets whether the associated component should use application styling. Returns the name of the library from which the application styling information should be obtained.

By default, this property defaults to an empty string and as such will obtain its style information from the default style library that is loaded into memory using the StyleManager.Load() method. However, there is also an overload of that method which will accept a string name which will be used to identify the library (). Any controls/components that have their StyleLibraryName set to that name will obtain their style information from that library.

Note: If this property is set and the name does not match up with the name of a loaded style library, the control/component will not have any style information.

 Returns the glyph info used to draw check boxes. Returns the glyph info used to draw radio buttons. A structure used to provide information about whether the control specific settings or application style information should take precedence. Initializes a new based on the specified The resolution order used to initialize the settings for the struct. The application style information should be merged before using the control specific appearances. The application style information should be merged after using the control specific appearances. Indicates whether the control specific appearances/settings should use merged. When false, only the application style information should be used. Component role used by an derived control for its application styling information. Initializes a new Associated control for which the component role is being created. Name of the component role that will be used to locate the associated application style information for the component level properties. Invoked when the style information for the component has changed. Returns an object that can be used to synchronize calls to the associated component's thread. Component role used by an Inbox control for its application styling information. Initializes a new InboxControlStyleSettings for the the associated control for which the component role is being created. Name of the component role that will be used to locate the associated application style information for the component level properties. Invoked when the style information for the component has changed. Returns an object that can be used to synchronize calls to the associated component's thread. Inbox Control - 'Button' Inbox Control - 'CheckBox' Inbox Control - 'ComboBox' Inbox Control - 'Control' Inbox Control - 'DateTimePicker' Inbox Control - 'Form' Inbox Control - 'GroupBox' Inbox Control - 'Label' Inbox Control - 'LinkLabel' Inbox Control - 'ListBox' Inbox Control - 'ListView' Inbox Control - 'MonthCalendar' Inbox Control - 'Panel' Inbox Control - 'PictureBox' Inbox Control - 'PropertyGrid' Inbox Control - 'RadioButton' Inbox Control - 'RichTextBox' Inbox Control - 'SplitContainer' Inbox Control - 'Splitter' Inbox Control - 'TabControl' Inbox Control - 'TextBox' Inbox Control - 'TreeView' Inbox Control - 'TreeView' Inbox Control - 'UserControl' A class used to define a custom property for a Initializes a new for which there is a known encoder. Name of the property Type of the property Initializes a new Name of the property Type of the property Object used to parse and serialiez the value of the property to/from an xml string. Initializes a new Name of the property Type of the property Object used to parse and serialiez the value of the property to/from an xml string. A collection attributes that provides the attributes for this property. Returns the name of the custom property. Returns the property type for the custom property. Returns or sets an instance of the converter that can be used to serialize the property value to/from xml. Returns or sets the description of the property. Returns or sets a instance that is used to validate the value. Returns or sets the default value for the property. Returns the display name of the custom property. A collection attributes that provides the attributes for this property. Base class for a class that can be used to manage the conversion of a custom application style property to/from string.

Note:The implementations of these methods should be thread safe.

 Initializes a new Invoked when a property value should be converted to a string. Associated property. Value to convert A string representation of the specified value. Invoked when the serialized property value needs to be converted back into a custom object. Associated property. String value to convert from The object represented by parsing the specified string. Returns a value that represents the unset value - i.e. a value that indicates the property has not been set. Associated property. Indicates if the property should be serialized. Associated property. The value to evaluate True if the value should be serialized, otherwise false. Used to determine if the specified value is valid for the property. Associated property. By Ref. The value to evaluate. This can be modified to provide a different value; for example, if the value is null, the default value may be returned. By Ref. The message that should be displayed if the value is invalid. True if the value is valid, otherwise false. Class used by the app styling infrastructure that provides the role, component role and shared object definitions used by the assembly.

Note: A parameterless constructor is required for all derived classes.

 Initializes a new Returns an array of objects that define the roles provided by an assembly. An array of objects that define the roles. Returns an array of objects that define the shared objects provided by an assembly. An array of objects that define the shared objects provided by an assembly. Returns an array of objects that define the component roles provided by an assembly. An array of object that define the component roles. Attribute class used to identify the derived class that registers the application style information for an assembly. Initializes a new Type derived from that is used to provide the application style information for an assembly. Serves as a hash function for a particular type, suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a hash table. A hash code for this instance. Determines whether the specified is equal to the current Object. The to compare with the current Object. true if the specified see cref="System.Object"/> is equal to the current Object; otherwise, false. Returns the type that contains the application style information to register for the assembly. Class used to provide the definition of a . Initializes a new Name of the component being defined. Type used to identify the component. Represents the type that should be returned by the property to indicate that the component can use any editor. Returns a string that uniquely identifies the component role and is used to locate/identify component style information.

Note: The name must be unique amongst all controls.

 Returns a type that identifies the component for which the definition represents. Returns or sets what type of editor the component may use.

Standalone editor controls like UltraTextEditor would return the specific editor that they use - e.g. EditorWithText. Controls such as UltraGrid that can use any editor can return the constant value . Controls that do not utilize editors would return null. The default implementation returns null assuming that the component does not utilize editors.

 Return or sets a boolean indicating whether the component uses uielement scrollbars. Gets or sets an array of the roles that the control uses. Gets or sets an array of custom property definitions that the component role exposes.

Note: The is case insensitive so property names must be unique with respect to the other instances in the for the component being defined.

 Indicates which of the stock properties are supported by the component. Gets or sets an array of the names of custom shared objects that the component uses. Return or sets a boolean indicating whether the component uses the class. Returns an that handles most common types. Converter class that handles common types - Image, Cursor, Color, Enum, Used to determine if the specified value is valid for the property. Associated property. By Ref. The value to evaluate. This can be modified to provide a different value; for example, if the value is null, the default value may be returned. By Ref. The message that should be displayed if the value is invalid. True if the value is valid, otherwise false. Used to determine if the specified value is valid for the property. Associated property. By Ref. The value to evaluate. This can be modified to provide a different value; for example, if the value is null, the default value may be returned. By Ref. The message that should be displayed if the value is invalid. True if the value is valid, otherwise false. Class used to provide the definition of an embeddable editor. Initializes a new Type of embeddable editor being registered Initializes a new Type of embeddable editor being registered Array of role names indicating the roles used by an editor. Returns a type used to determine the specific editor that is being defined. Returns or sets an array of role names indicating which roles the editor uses. Enumeration used by a to indicate which properties are supported. The does not support any properties. The will utilize a . The will utilize a . Enumeration used by a to indicate which properties are supported. The does not support any properties. The will utilize the property. The will utilize the property. The will utilize the property. The will utilize the property. The will utilize the property. The will utilize the property. The will utilize the property. The will utilize the property. Class used to provide the definition of an object that may be used by multiple controls and may support custom properties.

A shared object is an object that may be used by one or more controls. This includes objects such as EmbeddableEditorBase derived classes.

 Initializes a new Name of the shared object being registered. This is used to identify the object in the xml and must be unique across all shared objects. Type of shared object being registered Initializes a new Name of the shared object being registered. This is used to identify the object in the xml and must be unique across all shared objects. Type of shared object being registered Array of role names indicating the roles used by an editor. Initializes a new Name of the shared object being registered. This is used to identify the object in the xml and must be unique across all shared objects. Type of shared object being registered Array of role names indicating the roles used by an editor. Array of component role names indicating the component roles used by an editor. Returns a string that uniquely identifies the shared object and is used to locate/identify shared object style information.

Note: The name must be unique amongst all shared objects.

 Returns a type used to determine the specific shared object that is being defined. Returns or sets an array of role names indicating which roles the shared object uses. Returns or sets an array of component role names indicating which component roles the shared object uses. Gets or sets an array of custom property definitions that the shared object exposes.

Note: The is case insensitive so property names must be unique with respect to the other instances in the for the component being defined.

 Returns or sets an array of shared object names indicating which shared object roles the shared object being defined utilizes. Class used to provide the definition of a Initializes a new Name of the role being defined. Name of the parent role. Initializes a new Name of the role being defined. Name of the parent role. Flagged enumeration indicating which roles are supported by the role being defined Initializes a new Name of the role being defined. Name of the parent role. Flagged enumerating indicating the state for which the role will be used. Initializes a new Name of the role being defined. Name of the parent role. Flagged enumerating indicating the state for which the role will be used. Flagged enumeration indicating which roles are supported by the role being defined Returns the name of the role being defined. The name of the role's base/parent role from which it will inherit. Returns or sets an enumeration indicating which states will be used by the role. Returns or sets the description of the role. Returns or sets a value indicating which properties are supported by the role being defined. Determines the order in which the control and app style properties will be resolved. Use the default resolution order - ApplicationThenControl Use the control properties first and then the properties of the application style. Use the application style properties then those of the control Only use the application style properties Only use the control properties. Neither the control settings nor the application style information will be used. Enumeration indicating the state of role The object is in its default state The object is selected The mouse is currently over the object The object is currently pressed The object represents an item with focus The object is currently in edit mode The object currently has data error. This typically applies to a cell. The object currently has formula error. This typically applies to cells of a formula column. The object is part of or associated with an empty row. The object is part of or associated with a filter row. The object is part of or associated with a row that passed filter criteria when using filter row functionality. The object is part of or associated with a row that did not pass filter criteria when using filter row functionality. This state applies to filter row and filter cell that has active filter conditions. This object is part of or associated with a fixed column. See grid's fixed column functionality. This object is part of or associated with a fixed row. See grid's fixed row functionality. This object is part of or associated with a group-by column. This object is part of or associated with a row that's currently hot-tracked. This object is part of or associated with a merged cell. This object is part of or associated with an item that's alternate. This is analogous to RowAlternateAppearance of the UltraGrid, and the alternate month appearances of WinSchedule's UltraCalendarLook component. This object is part of or associated with an add-row. This object is part of or associated with a template add-row. This object is part of or associated with a group-by row. This object is expanded. The associated control is focused. The editor is read-only. This state represents a link that has already been visibled. Check state of checked. Check state of unchecked. Check state of Indeterminate. This object is on a floating window. This object is in a vertical orientation. This object is in a horizontal orientation. This object has been recently used. This object has activity, for example, a day with appointments, notes or holidays in WinSchedule. This thumbnail page is active in the associated print preview control. The object is in card-view mode. The object is in collapsed state. Note that this state applies to only select few roles. Most roles support only the Expanded state, and not this state. The object is selected and the mouse is currently over it. The object is expanded and the mouse is currently over it. The object is associated with an ActiveCell. Enumeration indicating the current viewstyle. No view style specified Display using the object's default look. Render using an Office 2000 style. Render using an Office Xp style. Render using an Office 2003 style Render using a Visual Studio 2005 style Render using an Office 2007 style Event arguments for the event. Initializes a new Initializes a new for the specified namespace. Name of the style library that has been changed or null to indicate that all libraries have changed. Returns the name of the application style library that has been updated or null to indicate that all libraries have been changed.

Note: When the StyleSetLibrary is set to null it indicates that all libraries have changed.

 Initializes a new Array of that have been loaded. Returns a copy of the array containing the assembly info instances. An array of derived instances. Delegate for the event. Class used to provide application style metadata for the win assembly. Returns the role definitions for the win assembly. An array of objects that define the roles. Returns the editor definitions for the win assembly. An array of editor definitions for the win assembly. Returns the component definitions for the win assembly. An array of object that define the component roles. Interface implemented by a class that uses application styling. Returns a reference to the used by the object. Enumeration used to identify the list of named colors. Office XP colors Office 2003 colors Visual Studio 2005 colors Office 2007 colors Windows Vista colors Static class used to manage a set of custom named colors based on the , , and classes. Returns a color with the current rgb value for the specified named color. Color to evaluate A color whose argb value is set to the current resolved color for the specified named color. The is returned if the color is not a named color or is a known color. Color.Empty is returned for an unrecognized named color. Returns an array of named colors that correspond with the specified color group. Enumeration indicating the color group to return. An array of named colors. Returns the custom named color or Color.Empty if the color is not a recognized custom color. Name of the color to evaluate Returns a string representation of the object. A string representing the object. If object is of the same type, compares contents to determine equality. to compare to. Trueif objects are equal, otherwise False. Returns a hash code for the object. Hash code for this object Operator overload used to return a that represents the current ARGB value. Named color instance to convert The actual Class used to provide information about registered components that use application style information. Indicates if the specified property is supported by the component that was registered. Component property to evaluate True if the component indicated the specified property is supported when it was registered. Returns the name of the component. Returns the Type of the component. Returns a collection of instances that represent the roles used by the component. Returns a collection of instances that represent the shared objects used by the component. A collection of objects Returns the initial capacity for the collection Returns true to indicate that the collection is read-only. Returns the at the specified index in the collection. Returns the in the collection with the specified name. Class used to access/modify the custom properties for a particular component role or shared object. Returns the for a specified property that identifies the hue/saturation grouping whose values will be used to manipulate the hue/saturation of an Image or Color property when the library is used as the template of the ISL generator. Name of the property whose color category should be returned. The color category or null, if one was not set for the property Sets a for a specified property that identifies the hue/saturation grouping whose values will be used to manipulate the hue/saturation of an Image or Color property when the library is used as the template of the ISL generator. Name of the property whose color category is to be changed. The new color category Returns an array of the names of the custom properties An array of the names of the custom properties. Resets the values of all the properties. Used to invoke the event. Event arguments indicating the property that was changed. Overriden. Returns an empty string. An empty string. Returns or sets the value of the specified property. Returns an integer indicating the current count of the custom properties available. Event invoked when one of the property values have been changed. Enumeration of settings for the enumeration Always apply AppStyling to inbox controls, regardless of the extender property on each control. Never apply AppStyling to inbox controls, regardless of the extender property on each control. Apply AppStyling to inbox controls based on the setting of the extender property on each control. If is set to Default, enable AppStyling for the control. Apply AppStyling to inbox controls based on the setting of the extender property on each control. If is set to Default, disable AppStyling for the control. Enumeration of categories for the enumeration Commonly used states States used by embeddable editors States used by a grid Other states Enumeration used to indicate the state of the component role for which the selection ui will be displayed. The component role is available and its roles may be selected via the The component role is affected by the currently selected styleset but is currently not displayed because the filter is being used to restrict the display to a single component. The component role is targeted by a different styleset then the currently selected one. An enumeration of actions that should be performed when the associated key is pressed while the tooltip of the is displayed. The specified ui role should be selected The specified component role should be selected The component filter list should be changed to filter by the specified component role. Flagged enumeration used to indicate what information should be saved in an Identifies that the resources of an application style library should be included. Identifies that the stylesets of an application style library should be included. Identifies that all the information of an application style library should be included. Event arguments for sending a property change notification. Initializes a new The name of the property that has changed. Event arguments for an event when a role is selected Initializes a new Name of the role that was selected or null if the component role was selected. Name of the component role that was selected. Component role whose role was selected. Action that should be performed by the listener. Returns the action that should be taken by the listener. Returns the name of the associated UIRole. Returns the name of the associated . Returns the for which the role or component role is being selected. Event arguments used to determine if the role selection ui can be displayed for a given control. Initializes a new Control which is being evaluated ComponentRole associated with the control Returns the control for which the ui role selection will be displayed. Returns the ComponentRole associated with the for which the event is being fired. Returns or sets whether the selection ui may be displayed for the specified . Returns or sets an enumeration indicating the current filtered state of the component role. Event arguments used to determine obtain the reference for a given control. Initializes a new The control for which the is being requested. Returns the control for which the is being requested. Returns or sets the for the specified . Delegate for an event involving a Delegate for an event involving a Delegate for an event involving a Delegate for an event involving a Component used to apply application styling information to the controls included in the System.Windows.Forms assembly. Base class for component classes.

In design mode notifies the that the component has changed so that it can mark the component dirty.

At runtime this method does nothing.

 Invokes the PropertyChanged event. This event is fired to notify listeners of a property changes on the component or a subobject. The property changed event args. Notifies any listeners when the state of an object has changed An ID that denotes the property. Notifies any listeners when the state of an object has changed An ID that denotes the property. Optional. Used during a prop change notification to create a complete context chain of what triggered the change. Fired after a property has changed. Setting the property to false will cause the component to not fire any designer change notifications. If a designer change notification was suppressed after setting this property to false, then it will be fired when this property is set back to true again. Returns the list of event handlers that are attached to this component. Manages AppStyling services for an application at runtime. Manages AppStyling services for an application at runtime. Called when the component is being disposed. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. Invoked when a property on a sub object has changed. A structure containing the property change information. Indicates which controls can have a StyleSettings extender property. Object to check if it can be extended. True if the control can have a StyleSettings property. Gets the for the specified control.

Use this method to get the for a particular control. If a for the control already exists, then it will be returned. If it does not exist, a new object will be created for the control.

 The control for which to obtain the StyleSettings setting. The object for the specified control. This sets the extender property for the specified control.

This method associates an object with a particular control. If there is already an existing associated with the specified control, then the existing is removed and replaced by the new .

 The control whose property is being set. An object which will be associated with the control. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if a StyleSettings object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 The control whose are being queried. Resets the of the passed in control.

This method resets the of a particular control. If the control does not have a object in the calculation network, then this method does nothing.

 The control whose will be reset. Display the about dialog Returns/sets the option that determines when to apply AppStyling to inbox controls. Returns/sets the StyleLibraryName to be used for all controls that do not have the StyleLibraryName Extender property explicitly set. Returns/sets the StyleSetName to be used for all controls that do not have the StyleSetName Extender property explicitly set. Handler for a SubObjectPropChange event Component designer for the Invoked when the designer is first initialized so it may set default values on the component its managing. A name/value dictionary of default values to apply to properties. May be null if no default values are specified. Invoked when the designer is first initialized so it may set default values on the component its managing. A name/value dictionary of default values to apply to properties. May be null if no default values are specified. Enumeration of Property identifiers for the class. StyleSetName UseAppStyling StyleLibraryName Holds settings that determine if and how an Inbox Control will be styled by the . Constructor Constructor The name of the styleset. Specifies whether the controls affected by this styleset should use AppStyling. Returns true if the property has been modified needs to be serialized. True if the StyleSetName property is set to a non-default value.

Use this method to determine if the property has been modified and needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Invoke this method to reset the property to its default value.

Once this method is invoked, the method will return False until the property is set again.

 Returns true if the property has been modified needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if the property has been modified and needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Invoke this method to reset the property to its default value.

Once this method is invoked, the method will return False until the property is set again.

 Resets all StyleSettings properties to their defaults.

This method will reset all properties of the to their default values.

 Returns whether the StyleSettings object should be serialized Returns true if any property of the StyleSettings differs from the default. Called when an active object is Disposed to notify a derived class when the object has been Disposed. Returns/sets the name of the style library whose should be used to apply Application Styles to the control being extended.

If this property is not set then the Application Styling framework will look at the property on the .

If that property is not set, the the Application Styling framework will use the default style library specified for the application.

 Returns the resolved value of the and properties. Returns/sets the name of the StyleSet to use when applying Application Styles to the control being extended.

If this property is not set then the Application Styling framework will look at the property on the .

If that property is not set, the the Application Styling framework will use the default style specified for the application

 Returns the resolved value of the and properties. Returns/sets whether Application Styling should be applied to the control being extended.

If this property is not set then the Application Styling framework will look at the property on the .

If that property is not set, the the Application Styling framework will use the default style specified for the application

 Returns the resolved value of the and properties. Type converter for the class.

This is used to convert a object to and from an InstanceDescriptor for the purposes of serialization / deserialization.

It also allows expanding the properties of the object in the PropertyGrid.

 Gets a value indicating whether this converter can convert an object to the given destination type using the context. An ITypeDescriptorContext that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert to. This method returns true if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the specified object to the specified type. A formatter context. This object can be used to get additional information about the environment this converter is being called from. This may be null, so you should always check. Also, properties on the context object may also return null. An object that contains culture specific information, such as the language, calendar, and cultural conventions associated with a specific culture. It is based on the RFC 1766 standard. The type to convert the object to. The object to convert. The converted object. Returns a collection of instances that represent the root roles that have been registered. Returns a collection of instances that represent the component roles that have been registered. Returns a collection of instances that represent the shared objects that have been registered. An object that represents a Returns a that contains the states used by this role and all of its descendant roles. A rolestate containing only the states that this role and every child roles contains in common. Returns a that contains a combination of the states used by this role and all of its descendant roles. A rolestate containing all the states that this role and every child roles contains in common. Indicates if the specified property is supported by the role that was registered. Role property to evaluate True if the role indicated the specified property is supported when it was registered. Returns a description for the role. Returns the name of the role. Returns a collection of the child nodes. Return the parent role or null (Nothing in VB) if this is the root role. Returns an enumeration indicating which states may be used by the role. A collection of objects Returns the initial capacity for the collection Returns true to indicate that the collection is read-only. Returns the at the specified index in the collection. Returns the in the collection with the specified name. Static class that provides events Determines whether the ui for selecting a role is enabled. Event invoked when a is selected via the role selection ui presented when is set to true and the mouse is hovered over an element associated with a .

The event is only invoked when the is set to true.

 Event invoked when a new control is encountered to determine if the role selection ui may be displayed for that control.

The event is only invoked when the is set to true.

 Event invoked when a new control is encountered to obtain its associated .

The event is only invoked when the is set to true.

 Implemented by an object that can embed an EmbeddableEditor to render a value. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase class. If true is returned, the editor will enter edit mode on either MouseDown or MouseUp, depending on the nature of the editor The owner context The default implemenation returns true Returns the owner's control. The context that was passed into the method. The owner's control. This is used e.g. to re-parent the edit control. The default implementation returns null (Nothing in VB) Returns the data type. The context that was passed into the method. The of the owner. The default implementation returns type of string. Returns information needed to format a string. The context that was passed into the method. Returns the format string or null. Returns the IFormatProvider or null. The default implementation returns null (Nothing in VB) Returns the value that should be rendered. The context that was passed into the method. The to be rendered. Returns whether the value is enabled for editing. The context that was passed into the method. True if the value is enabled for editing. The default implementation returns true Returns whether the value can be set to null. The context that was passed into the method. True if the value can be set to null. The default implementation returns true Resolves the appearance for an element. The context that was passed into the method. The appearance structure to initialize.. The appearance properties to resolve. True if the owner supplies an appearance. Resolves the appearance for an element. The context that was passed into the method. The appearance structure to initialize.. The appearance properties to resolve. Boolean indicating whether the owner should apply its 'HotTrackingAppearance' True if the owner supplies an apperance. Resolves the appearance for an element. The context that was passed into the method. The appearance structure to initialize.. The appearance properties to resolve. Enumeration of type describing the area of the embeddable element to which the appearance will be applied Boolean indicating whether the owner should apply its 'HotTrackingAppearance' True if the owner supplies an appearance. Resolves the appearance for an element. The context that was passed into the method. The appearance structure to initialize.. The appearance properties to resolve. Enumeration of type describing the area of the embeddable element to which the appearance will be applied True if the owner supplies an appearance. Resolves the appearance for an element. The context that was passed into the method. The appearance structure to initialize. The appearance properties to resolve. Enumeration of type describing the area of the embeddable element to which the appearance will be applied Boolean indicating whether the owner should apply its 'HotTrackingAppearance' A string that denotes which appearance to resolve. Applicable only when the 'area' parameter is set to Custom. True if the owner recognizes and supports the named appearance. The default implementation returns false Determines if a focus rect should be drawn. The context that was passed into the method. Returns true if a focus rect should be drawn. The default implementation returns false Returns the editor for the passed in ownerContext. This is used by the base implementation of EmbeddableOwnerBase. The context that was passed into the method. Indicates whether the editor should respond to the mouse wheel. Object used to identify the object represented by the editor True if the editor should respond to the mouse wheel. Determines how the text will be cased. The context that was passed into the method. The CharacterCasing to be applied to the text The default implementation returns CharacterCasing.Normal. Returns masking information. This is only of ibterest to a editor that supports masking. The context that was passed into the method. The string used for masking the value or null if there is no mask. Determines whether literals and prompt characters are included in Value property of the Editor. Determines whether literals and prompt characters are displayed when not in edit mode. Determines whether literals and prompt characters are included when the editor copyies text to the clipboard. True only if masking info is available. The default implementation returns false. Returns the maximum length for a string. The context that was passed into the method. (out) The maximum value or 0 if there is no maximum. A boolean indicating whether a meaningful value was returned. The default implementation returns 0. Returns the maximum number of text lines displayed. The context that was passed into the method. (out) The maximum value or 0 if there is no maximum. A boolean indicating whether a meaningful value was returned. The default implementation returns 0. Returns the maximum allowable value. The context that was passed into the method. The maximum value or null if there is no maximum. The default implementation returns null. Returns the minimum allowable value. The context that was passed into the method. The minimum value or null if there is no minimum. The default implementation returns null. The string to display for a null value. The context that was passed into the method. (out) The string that should be used if the value is null or DB_Null. A boolean indicating whether a meaningful value was returned. The default implementation returns false. Returns character used as a substitute for spaces. The context that was passed into the method. Pad character. True only if pad character info is available. The default implementation returns false. Returns the character used as prompt during editing (e.g. '_'). The context that was passed into the method. Prompt character. True only if prompt character info is available. The default implementation returns false Returns the character used to mask characters. The context that was passed into the method. The character to display when entering a password. True only if passwordChar character info is available. The default implementation returns false. Gets the spell checker A compoment that implements the inteface or null. interface or null. Returns a list of predefined values. The context that was passed into the method. Returns a list of predefined values or null. The default implementation returns null. Returns whether this editor is always in edit mode The EmbeddableEditorBase-derived instance True if the editor never leaves edit mode. The default implementation returns false. Returns whether the key is used by the owner. The EmbeddableUIElementBase-derived element True if the key is used by the owner (e.g. an arrow or tab key used for internal navigation). The default implementation returns false. Returns whether the text is multiline. The context that was passed into the method. A boolean indicating whether the text is multiline The default implementation returns false. Returns whether the element should display vertical. The context that was passed into the method. A boolean indicating whether the display is vertical The default implementation returns false. Returns true is the value is read-only The context that was passed into the method. A boolean indicating whether the value is read only The default implementation returns false. Returns whether a selection can only be made from the value list. The context that was passed into the method. If true will act as a combo with a style of DropDownList. The default implementation returns false. Returns whether the text an element displays must correspond to the text of an item in a list The context that was passed into the method. If true and the editor's Value does not match an item in the list, an empty string will be displayed. The default implementation returns true, meaning that if an editor's Value does not correspond to an item in the list, and returns true, an empty string will be displayed. Note:The base class implementation will always return false when returns false. Returns whether an editor's value must correspond to an item in its ValueList The context that was passed into the method. True if an editor's value must correspond to an item in its ValueList. The default implementation returns false. When an instance of an EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class returns true from this method, the editor will validate its text against the items in its ValueList and return false from the IsValid property if the text does not match any items. Returns whether the text should be wrapped if it doesn't fit. The context that was passed into the method. A boolean indicating whether the text should be wrapped The default implementation calls the IsMultiLine method and returns its value Returns the horizontal and vertical offset to apply to the DropDown's list The context that was passed into the method. The additional offset to apply to the dropdown Since it is implied that a ValueList's DropDown is displayed at the bottom left

corner of the element that displays it, this property provides a way to compensate for

control borders, etc. The default implementation returns Size.Empty Returns the number of pixels by which to increase the dropdown list's width to compensate for borders, etc. The context that was passed into the method. The additional width to apply to the dropdown If the owner returns a non-zero value from the GetDropDownListOffset method, the dropdown list's width might need to be increased so that it covers the width of the owner; this method allows that.

The owner will typically return the sum of the widths of its left and right borders. The default implementation returns 0 Returns an object that may be provided to the programmer using an editor. The context that was passed into the method. An object that the programmer may use to determine which object was associated with an action.

The is provided to the editor when it creates or reinitializes an embeddable uielement. The embeddable element in turn uses that information when making requests to the owner for information but the editor. That object is opaque to the editor but provides context to the owner so that it knows which object the editor is dealing with. An owner may change the contents of the OwnerContext or the object may not be useful to the programmer using an editor. For example, a CellUIElement may be the OwnerContext for a grid's cell editor but that isn't normally the level of information that the programmer would need. The programmer needs a Cell object and shouldn't be expected to extract that from the OwnerContext. Instead, an editor will ask the owner via this method to translate the OwnerContext to something that the programmer can use.

 Returns the image list to be used by the editor's ValueList, or null The context that was passed into the method. An ImageList, or null if not supported The default implementation returns null. Returns the image list to be used by the editor's ValueList, or null The context that was passed into the method. An ValueListsCollection, or null if not supported The default implementation returns null. Returns the size of images to be used by the editor's ValueList The context that was passed into the method. The size of the images A boolean indicating whether a meaningful value was supplied The default implementation returns false, with sizeOfImages set Size.Empty. Returns the BorderStyle to be used by the editor's embeddable element The context that was passed into the method. The BorderStyle to be used by the editor's embeddable element The default implementation returns false, with borderStyle set to UIElementBorderStyle.Default. Returns the ButtonStyle to be used by the embeddable element's button The context that was passed into the method. The ButtonStyle to be used by the embeddable element's buttons True if a non-default value is returned. The default implementation returns false, with buttonStyle set to UIElementButtonStyle.Default. Returns the DisplayStyle to be used by the embeddable element The context that was passed into the method. The DisplayStyle to be used by the embeddable element The default implementation returns EmbeddableElementDisplayStyle.Standard. Returns whether "hot tracking" effects should be enabled The context that was passed into the method. The default implementation returns true. When one embeddable element is in edit mode, others might want to disable hot tracking effects; in that case, the owner should return false from this method. Returns whether the element should be drawn as if it were in its "active" state. Only applicable if the return from the DisplayStyle property is not Standard. The context that was passed into the method. The default implementation returns DefaultableBoolean.Default The default implementation returns DefaultableBoolean.Default, for which the element should follow the cursor position. Indicates whether AutoEdit should enabled. The context that was passed into the method. Indicates whether AutoEdit should enabled. The default implementation returns false Returns the constant which determines the automatic completion mode for the editor. The context that was passed into the method. The default implementation returns 'None'.

Note: This method only has significance to the and derived editors.

Note: MRU(Most recently used) functionality is suspended when the owner returns 'Suggest' or 'SuggestAppend' from this method, since in those modes the dropdown can only contain the filtered items.

 The padding to place around the value to display. The context that was passed into the method. (out) The padding to place around the value to display. A boolean indicating whether a meaningful value was returned. The default implementation returns false Called when focus is entering the editor. The editor who is getting focus. Called when focus is leaving the editor. The editor who is losing focus. Called when the editor gets focus. The editor who is getting focus. Called when the editor loses focus. The editor who is losing focus. The editor calls this method whenever any of its embeddable elements gets a mouse down. The that received the mouse down. The . The editor calls this method whenever any of its embeddable elements gets a mouse up. The that received the mouse up. The . The editor calls this method whenever any of its embeddable elements gets a double click. The that was clicked. The . Called before edit mode has been entered. The editor about to enter edit mode. The element entering edit mode. False to cancel the operation. Sets the out parameters to values relating to the overflow indicator's existence and if it should show a tooltip. Not used in this override. Will be set to true if the overflow indicator should be shown. Will be set to true if the overflow indicator should show a tooltip. Set to null by default. Returns a object associated with the owner context, if any. An object which represents the context for which the constraints should be returned. A object. Returns a GlyphInfo object which assists in the drawing of glyphs such as CheckBoxes and Radio buttons. This method returns null for standard glyph drawing. The type of glyph (Checkbox, radio button, etc.) An object which represents the context for which the constraints should be returned. A variable into which the glyphInfo is returned. Resolves the default appearance for an element. The context that was passed into the method. The appearance structure to initialize. The appearance properties to resolve. Enumeration of type describing the area of the embeddable element to which the appearance will be applied Boolean indicating whether the owner should apply its 'HotTrackingAppearance' A string that denotes which appearance to resolve. Applicable only when the 'area' parameter is set to Custom. True if the owner recognizes and supports the named appearance. The default implementation returns false The editor calls this method whenever any of its embeddable elements gets a click. The that was clicked. The . True if the click event was handled; False if the default click processing should be done. Rases KeyDown event. Raises KeyUp event. Raises KeyPress event. Returns the color that is used as the transparent color for images displayed by the editor The context that was passed into the method. The color that is used as the transparent color for images displayed by the editor The default implementation returns Color.Transparent Returns the ContextMenu that will be displayed by the editor The context that was passed into the method. A ContextMenu The default implementation returns null Returns the ContextMenuStrip that will be displayed by the editor The context that was passed into the method. A ContextMenuStrip The default implementation returns null Returns the AutoSizeEdit information to be used by editors that support AutoSizing The context that was passed into the method. (out) Indicates whether the owner supports AutoSizeEditing. (out) A Size struct containing the starting width and height to which the editor should be set. (out) A Size struct containing the maximum width and height to which the editor should be allowed to grow. A boolean indicating whether AutoSizeEdit functionality is supported by the owner. The default implementation returns false. Returns owner-specific information to an editor The context that was passed into the method. The information requested by the editor and returned from the owner. A boolean indicating whether the specified information is supported by the owner. The default implementation returns false.

Typically, an editor will set the info parameter to a string or enumeration that identifies the information it is trying to obtain from the owner. The owner will then set the info parameter to a value that is meaningful to the editor, and return true to indicate that the request was recognized and a meaningful value was returned. Returns whether the editor should use its default cursor

By default, an editor might display a custom cursor, appropriate to the type of editor it is; for example, the editor displays an "I-Beam" cursor when it is enabled to indicate that it supports selection of text.

If the editor's owner does not want the editor to display its default cursor, it must return false from this method.



The default implementation returns true.

The context that was passed into the method. A boolean indicating whether the editor should use its default cursor. Returns which scrollbars should appear in an editor's multiline TextBox. The context that was passed into the method. A boolean indicating which scrollbars should appear in an editor's multiline TextBox.

The default implementation returns true.

Note: This method is only applicable when the owner returns true from the method.

Also, when the owner returns true from the method, horizontal scrollbars are not displayed, regardless of the value returned from this method.

Gets the editor context that was set with SetEditorContext method. Editor context that was last set with SetEditorContext for the passed in ownerContext.

GetEditorContext and can be used to cache objects per owner context.

Implementing owner will return the object that was last cached using SetEditorContext method.

 Sets the editor context for the passed in ownerContext. The owner context, used to provide additional information. The editor context to assign.

and SetEditorContext can be used to cache objects per owner context.

Implementing owner will return the object that was last cached using SetEditorContext method.

 Returns whether the ampersand character is interpreted as a hotkey prefix. The context that was passed into the method. A boolean indicating whether the ampersand character is interpreted as a hotkey prefix.

When the owner returns true from the ShowHotkeyPrefix method, and there exists an ampersand character in the string representation of its value, the character following the ampersand is displayed as a hotkey. When the owner returns false from the ShowHotkeyPrefix method, ampersands are treated as standard characters.

The default implementation returns false.

 Returns the embeddable uielement associated with a particular object or null if none is available. Context used to identify the object to reference The embeddable uielement representing the specified owner context. Determines when to show the Ink Button on the editor. The context that was passed into the method. A ShowInkButton value indicating when the InkButton will be shown.

The default implementation returns ShowInkButton.Default.

 Notifies the owner that an accessible event has occurred. Context used to identify the object to reference Enumeration indicating the event that occurred. Called to get a graphics object suitable for doing metrics calculations only. A graphics object suitable for doing metrics calculations only. This graphics object shouldn't be rendered on. The owner context which will be used to get the Control this owner is associated with.

Do NOT call the Dispose method on the graphics object returned from this method.

Instead, each call to this method should be paired with a call to .

During graphics caching calls to will return a single cached graphics object and calls to will be ignored.

 Called to release a graphics object that was returned from a prior call to . The graphics object to release.

Do NOT call the Dispose method on the graphics object returned from . Use this method instead.

During graphics caching calls to will return a single cached graphics object and calls to will be ignored.

 Returns true if the editor is being used in printing. The default is false. Object used to identify the object represented by the editor True if the editor is being used in printing. Returns the text rendering mode to use. Default implementation returns Default value. Object used to identify the object represented by the editor The to use. Invoked by an editor to determine if an area of the element that performs an action is supported. Context used to identify the object to reference Enum indicating the type of actionable area Returns true by default. Invoked by an editor to obtain the application style information. Context used to identify the object to reference An instance that should be used by the editor. Returns the to be used by the scrollbars displayed by the embeddable editor. Context used to identify the object to reference A instance.

Note: This method is currently only used by the embeddable editor for the scrollbars displayed in the dropdown list. The default implementation returns null.

 This method indicates whether editor buttons should always fire editor button events even if the editor is not in edit mode. Default implementation returns false. Object used to identify the object represented by the editor True if editor buttons should always fire their events. Returns the that the editor should utilize for any scrollbars that it displays. Object used to identify the object represented by the editor A ScrolBarViewStyle that the editor should use as its default view style for the scrollbars it displays. By default the editors will invalidate the embeddable editor elements as the mouse enters and leaves them. This method can be used to suppress this behavior. Default implementation returns false. The owner context, used to provide additional information. True if the editor's enter/leave notification should be suppressed. Returns whether the UI is in a proper state to show keyboard accelerators. Context used to identify the object to reference. A boolean indicating if keyboard accelerators should be shown. Returns the type converter to use to convert values. The default implementation returns the type converter associated with the data type of the owner. The owner context Specifies whether to ignore type converters associated with the data types and only use the one, if any, returned by this method. Returns an object which determines whether checkboxes are displayed for the items in a ValueList, and defines the properties and behavior for the checkboxes. The context that was passed into the GetEmbeddableElement method. A EditorCheckedListSettings object which determines whether checkboxes should be displayed.

Checkboxes are only displayed by the standard dropdown used by the EditorWithCombo embeddable editor. The return value from this method is not applicable to any other embeddable editor.

 Gets the ImeMode value used for the editor. The context that was passed in. A System.Windows.Forms.ImeMode value specific for the owner Returns true if in design mode, false otherwise. Occurs on a key down while the editor is in edit mode and the owner has focus. Occurs on a key press while the editor is in edit mode and the owner has focus. Occurs on a key up while the editor is in edit mode and the owner has focus. Enumeration indicating a type of actionable editor area. Link Attribute class used to identify the category to which a enum member belongs. Initializes a new Category that the role state belong to. Serves as a hash function for a particular type, suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a hash table. Determines whether the specified is equal to the current Object. The to compare with the current Object. true if the specified see cref="System.Object"/> is equal to the current Object; otherwise, false. Returns the category defined for this attribute. Class used to provide information about the registered shared objects that use application style information. Returns the internal shared object definition that this object is based upon. Returns the name of the shared object. Returns the Type of the object that the shared object represents. Returns a collection of instances that represent the roles used by the shared object. Returns a collection of instances that represent the component roles used by the shared object. A collection of objects Returns the initial capacity for the collection Returns true to indicate that the collection is read-only. Returns the at the specified index in the collection. Returns the in the collection with the specified name. Class used to programatically create or modify a style library used by the Initializes a new Returns a boolean indicating if there is a resource in the clipboard. True if there is a resource in the clipboard, otherwise false is returned. Creates a new instance based on the specified resource. A new ResourceSettings objects. Returns the instance that is currently the target styleset for the specified component role. Name of the component role to evaluate The target instance or null if there is no target styleset specified. Imports all the resources from the specified library into the current library. The path to the file that contains the xml style information Boolean indicating whether the stream should be validated when read. An array of representing the resources that were imported. Imports all the resources from the specified library into the current library. Stream containing the style library that contains the resources to import. Boolean indicating whether the stream should be validated when read. An array of representing the resources that were imported. Imports all the specified resources. Resources from another ApplicationStyleLibrary instance. The objects that were added to this style library instance. Resets the contents of the object based on the style information in the specified xml file. The path to the file that contains the xml style information Resets the contents of the object based on the style information in the specified xml file. The path to the file that contains the xml style information Boolean indicating whether the file should be validated when read. Resets the contents of the object based on the style information in the specified xml stream. Stream containing the xml style information Resets the contents of the object based on the style information in the specified xml stream. Stream containing the xml style information Boolean indicating whether the stream should be validated when read. Initializes the library file using the application style information currently loaded into the static StyleManager class. Initializes the library file using the application style information currently loaded into the static StyleManager class. Name of the loaded style library whose information should be loaded into the ApplicationStyleLibrary. Creates a new instance based on the resource currently in the clipboard. The resource that is created or null if one could not be created from the clipboard information. Saves the style information to the specified file. Name of the file to create Saves the style information to the specified file. Name of the file to create Indicates the information from the library that should be saved. Saves the style information to the specified file. Name of the file to create Indicates the information from the library that should be saved. Boolean indicating whether the last modified date should be updated to the current time Saves the style information to the specified stream. Stream to which the style information should be written Saves the style information to the specified stream. Stream to which the style information should be written Indicates the information from the library that should be saved. Saves the style information to the specified stream. Stream to which the style information should be written Indicates the information from the library that should be saved. Boolean indicating whether the last modified date should be updated to the current time before the save. If false, the last modified date time will be saved or no modified date will be saved if the library has not been saved with this option enabled. Applies the information from the style library to the StyleManager class.

This method is equivalent to saving the style library information into a stream and then calling with that stream.

 Applies the information from the style library to the StyleManager class. Name under which the style library information should be registered. Controls whose is set to this value will obtain their style information from the updated info.

This method is equivalent to saving the style library information into a stream and then calling with that stream.

 Returns or sets a string representing the author of the library. Returns a collection of the instances describing the currently registered component roles. Returns or sets a string representing the copyright information for the library. Returns or sets the name of the default styleset that will be used to provide application style information to components. Returns or sets a string representing a description of the library contents. Returns a collection of instances that can be associated with and instances via their property. Returns a boolean indicating if the library currently contains any style information. Returns or sets the Office 2007 color scheme that should be used by the application when this style library has been loaded as the default style library. Returns or sets the color that should be blended with the when this style library has been loaded as the default style library. Returns a collection of the root instances Returns a collection of the instances describing the currently registered shared objects. Returns a collection of instances used to initialize application style information. Returns a collection of instances used to initialize resources for the application style. Returns the last at which the contents were saved. If the file has not yet been saved then DateTime.MinDate will be returned. Returns or sets a string representing the permitted usage of the library. Returns or sets a string representing a version of the library contents. Collection of instances that will be used to create a style file for use by a . Returns a string representation of the object. Adds a for the specified name. The name of the style for which the should be created. A new that can be used to alter the settings for the style. Removes all the from the collection. Returns the styleset with the specified name and optionally creates the styleset if it doesn't exist in the collection. Name of the styleset A boolean indicating whether the styleset should be created if it doesn't exist. A instance that represents the specified name; otherwise null (Nothing in VB). Removes the with the specified name Name of the to be removed Removes the specified The to be removed Removes the at the specified index. Index of the item to be removed Returns false since each instance must have a unique key. Specifies the initial capacity of the collection A string representing the object and the number of items in the collection. Returns true if the collection is read-only Returns the at the specified index Returns the with the specified name Abstract base class for a style settings class that uses a key. Returns a string representation of the object. A string containing the name of the The name of the associated stylable object Returns or sets an object value that is stored on the control.

Note: The Tag property is not saved with the style information.

 Returns the owning instance Class used to create/initialize settings that will be used by the Overriden. The key of a styleset cannot be null Returns a string representation of the object. A string containing the name of the Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. True if the ComponentStyles property is set to a non-default value. Clears the contents. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. True if the RoleStyles property is set to a non-default value. Clears the contents. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. True if the SharedObjects property is set to a non-default value. Clears the contents. Indicates that the specified component role should use this styleset as its default styleset. Returns an array containing the names of all the component roles that are currently set up to use this styleset as their default styleset. An array of the names of the component roles using this styleset. Clears the list of components that are set up to automatically use this styleset as its default styleset. Removes the specified component role name from the list of components that use this styleset as their default styleset. The name of the component role to remove. Indicates if the object has any information to serialize. True if the object contains any information to serialize for the style; otherwise false is returned. The name of the style Returns or sets an object value that is stored on the control.

Note: The Tag property is not saved with the style information.

 Returns or sets the name of the styleset from which this styleset inherits its style settings. Returns a collection of instances used to initialize settings for instances of a Returns the owning instance Returns or sets the default for components using this styleset that support buttons. Returns or sets the default for components using this styleset that support headers. Returns or sets the default order in which the control and app style properties will be resolved for components using this styleset. Returns a collection of instances used to initialize settings for instances of a Returns a collection of instances used to initialize settings for shared objects of a Returns or sets the recommended value for whether the components that use this styleset should use a flat appearance. Returns or sets the recommended value for whether the components that use this styleset should render using the operating system themes. Returns or sets the recommended for the components that use this styleset. Returns the glyph info used to draw check boxes. Returns the glyph info used to draw radio buttons. Collection of used to initialize the settings that will ultimately be used by a Returns a string representation of the object. A string representing the object and the number of items in the collection. Adds a for the specified name. The name of the shared object for which the should be created. A new that can be used to alter the settings for a shared object with the specified name. Removes all the from the collection. Returns the with the specified name and optionally creates one if it doesn't exist in the collection. Name of the shared object A boolean indicating whether the shared object should be created if it doesn't exist. A instance that represents the specified name; otherwise null (Nothing in VB). Removes the with the specified key Key of the to be removed Removes the specified The to be removed Removes the at the specified index. Index of the item to be removed Indicates if the object has any information to serialize. True if the object contains any information to serialize for the style; otherwise false is returned. Returns false since each instance must have a unique key. Specifies the initial capacity of the collection Returns true if the collection is read-only Returns the at the specified index Returns the at the specified index Class used to initialize settings for a style object that manages custom properties Resets the properties of the object to their default values. Indicates if the object has any information to serialize. True if the object contains any information to serialize for the style; otherwise false is returned. Returns an object that can be used to view/modify the custom properties associated with a particular component. Class used to initialize settings for a shared object Collection of used to initialize the settings that will ultimately be used by a Returns a string representation of the object. Adds a for the specified name. The name of the for which the should be created. A new that can be used to alter the settings for a role with the specified name. Removes all the from the collection. Returns the with the specified name and optionally creates one if it doesn't exist in the collection. Name of the component style A boolean indicating whether the component style should be created if it doesn't exist. A instance that represents the specified name; otherwise null (Nothing in VB). Removes the with the specified key Key of the to be removed Removes the specified The to be removed Removes the at the specified index. Index of the item to be removed Indicates if the object has any information to serialize. True if the object contains any information to serialize for the style; otherwise false is returned. Returns false since each instance must have a unique key. Specifies the initial capacity of the collection Returns true if the collection is read-only Returns the at the specified index Returns the at the specified index Class used to initialize settings for a Resets the properties of the object to their default values. Returns or sets the default for the component.

Note: This property is only supported for components that indicate they utilize ButtonStyle when they are registered.

 Returns or sets the default for the component.

Note: This property is only supported for components that indicate they utilize headers when they are registered.

 Returns or sets the for the associated component. Returns or sets the recommended for the associated component.

Note: This property is only supported for components that indicate they utilize ViewStyle when they are registered.

 Returns or sets the recommended value for whether the control should use a flat appearance. Returns or sets the recommended value for whether the component should render using the operating system themes. Returns or sets the default which is used to draw check boxes for the component.

Note: This property is only supported for components that indicate they utilize CheckBoxGlyphInfo when they are registered.

 Returns or sets the default which is used to draw radio buttons for the component.

Note: This property is only supported for components that indicate they utilize RadioButtonGlyphInfo when they are registered.

 Collection of used to initialize the settings that will ultimately be used by a Returns a string representation of the object. A string representing the object and the number of items in the collection. Adds a for the specified name. The name of the for which the should be created. A new that can be used to alter the settings for a role with the specified name. Removes all the from the collection. Returns the with the specified name and optionally creates one if it doesn't exist in the collection. Name of the style A boolean indicating whether the style should be created if it doesn't exist. A instance that represents the specified name; otherwise null (Nothing in VB). Removes the with the specified key Key of the to be removed Removes the specified The to be removed Removes the at the specified index. Index of the item to be removed Indicates if the object has any information to serialize. True if the object contains any information to serialize for the style; otherwise false is returned. Returns false since each instance must have a unique key. Specifies the initial capacity of the collection Returns true if the collection is read-only Returns the at the specified index Returns the at the specified index Class used to initialize the settings of a particular that will ultimately be used by a . Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. Clears the contents. Resets the properties of the object to their default settings. Indicates if the object has any information to serialize. True if the object contains any information to serialize for the style; otherwise false is returned. Returns or sets the border style for the role. Returns or sets the button style for the role. Returns a collection of instances used to initialize settings for a particular of a specific of a . Collection of used to initialize the information for a particular state of a that will ultimately be used by a . Returns a string representation of the object. A string representing the object and the number of items in the collection. Adds a for the specified to the collection. The for which the should be created. A new that can be used to alter the settings for the specified state. Removes all the from the collection. Indicates if the specified role state exists in the collection. RoleState to evaluate True if a instance exists with the specified state; otherwise false is returned. Returns the representing the specified and optionally creates one if it doesn't exist in the collection. RoleState to return A boolean indicating whether the state should be created if it doesn't exist. A instance that represents the specified role state; otherwise null (Nothing in VB). Returns the index of the instance that represents the specified state or -1 if a StateSettings with the specified state does not exist. RoleState to evaluate The index of the instance in the collection with the specified ; otherwise -1 if the item doesn't exist in the collection Removes the with the specified of the to be removed Removes the specified The to be removed Removes the at the specified index. Index of the item to be removed Indicates if the object has any information to serialize. True if the object contains any information to serialize for the style; otherwise false is returned. Specifies the initial capacity of the collection Returns true if the collection is read-only Returns the at the specified index Returns the at the specified index Base class used to manage the settings for application style info that relates to an appearance object. Called when an active object is Disposed to notify a derived class when the object has been Disposed. Resets the properties of the class to their default values. Resets the property Indicates if the object has any information to serialize. True if the object contains any information to serialize for the style; otherwise false is returned. Indicates if the has any information to serialize. True if the appearance contains any non-default information; otherwise false is returned. Returns the to which the object belongs. Returns the containing the appearance information for the object. Returns or sets the that identifies the hue/saturation grouping whose values will be used to manipulate the hue/saturation of its Image and Color properties when the library is used as the template of the ISL generator. Class used to initialize the settings for a particular of a particular that will be used by a . Resets the properties of the class to their default values. Returns a string representation of the object. A string containing the name of the Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. True if the Resources property has non-default values, false otherwise. Clears the contents. Creates a resource using the specified properties of the state. Name of the new resource to be created Flags indicating which properties should be used to create the resource. True to clear those properties from the state object and have it reference the new source; false to just create a new resource without affecting the state instance. The new object that is created. Creates an appearance using the information from the current state. Indicates whether style information from resources should be included Indicates whether style information from descendant roles should be included Indicates whether style information from stylesets that the containing styleset is based upon should be included. A object created from the specified parameters. Returns the to which the object belongs. Returns the owning instance Returns a collection of references to resources in the collection that are used when resolving the appearance of the state.

Note: The collection contains references to the same objects that are in the collection so modifying any properties of objects in this collection will affect any objects that reference the same object.

 Returns the that the object represents. Base class for a collection of instances. Returns a string representation of the object. A string representing the object and the number of items in the collection. Adds a for the specified name to the collection. The name of the resource for which the instance should be created. The that was added. Removes all the from the collection. Indicates if the specified resource exists in the collection. Name of the resource to evaluate True if a instance exists with the specified name; otherwise false is returned. Returns the index of the instance that represents the specified named resource or -1 if a ResourceSettings with the specified name does not exist. Resource name to evaluate The index of the instance in the collection with the specified name; otherwise -1 if the item doesn't exist in the collection Removes the with the specified name. Name of the instance to be removed Removes the specified The to be removed Removes the at the specified index. Index of the item to be removed Indicates if the object has any information to serialize. True if the object contains any information to serialize for the style; otherwise false is returned. Specifies the initial capacity of the collection Returns true if the collection is read-only Returns the at the specified index Returns the at the specified index Collection of used to initialize the information for a particular resource that will ultimately be used by a . Adds a for the specified name to the collection. The name of the resource for which the instance should be created. A new that can be used to alter the settings for a resource. Removes all the from the collection. Removes the at the specified index. Index of the item to be removed Collection of referenced by a particular . Adds a for the specified name to the collection. The name of the resource for the from the collection of the associated . The that was added to the collection.

A instance with this name must already exist in the collection to prevent an exception from being raised. In addition, if a resource with the specified name already exists in the collection, an exception will be thrown.

 Adds a for the specified name to the collection. The name of the resource for which the instance should be created. The index of the object in the collection. Removes all the from the collection. Adds a for the specified name to the collection at the specified index. Index at which the item should be inserted The name of the resource for the from the collection of the associated . The that was added to the collection.

A instance with this name must already exist in the collection to prevent an exception from being raised. In addition, if a resource with the specified name already exists in the collection, an exception will be thrown.

 Adds a for the specified name to the collection at the specified index. Index at which the item should be inserted The name of the resource for which the instance should be created. The index of the object in the collection. Moved the resource up in the list. Name of the resource to move Moved the resource down in the list. Name of the resource to move Removes the at the specified index. Index of the item to be removed Class used to initialize the settings for a resource that will be used in an Returns a string representation of the object. A string containing the name of the Copies the resource to the clipboard. Overwrites/copies the appearance information in the from that of the specified resource. Resource whose appearance information should be copied. Returns the to which the object belongs. Returns or sets the name of the resource that the object represents. The key is not used for the style appearance The tag is not used for the style appearance A collection of instances that may be assigned to the property of derived classes. Returns a string representation of the object. A string representing the object and the number of objects in the collection. Creates a new with the specified string value as its String that will be used to initialize the property of the new . This value must be unique with regards to the other instances within the collection. Returns the new that was created and added to the collection. Removes all the instances within the collection. Indicates if a exists within the collection. String that identifies the of the that should be located True if a with the specified name exists; otherwise false is returned. Returns the index of the with the specified string as the value of its property. String that identifies the of the that should be located The index at which a whose matches exists. Creates a new with the specified string value as its and positions it at the specified index within the collection. Index at which the object should be inserted. String that will be used to initialize the property of the new . This value must be unique with regards to the other instances within the collection. Returns the new that was created and added to the collection. Changes the index at which the exists so that it is 1 position closer to the beginning of the collection. String that identifies the of the that should be relocated within the collection Changes the index at which the exists so that it is 1 position closer to the end of the collection. String that identifies the of the that should be relocated within the collection Removes the specified object from the collection. The object instance to remove from the collection. Removes the instance with the specified name. Name of the to remove Removes the at the specified index from the collection. The index of the item to remove. Specifies the initial capacity of the collection Returns true if the collection is read-only Returns the at the specified index. Index of the object to return The instance that currently exists at the specified index. Returns the with the specified name. String that identifies the of the that should be returned The instance with the specified name. An object that is used to group identify the hue/saturation grouping that will be used to adjust the hue/saturation of color and image properties of associated and instances when the style library is used as a template in the ISL generator portion of StyleStyleSupport and AppStylist. Called when an active object is Disposed to notify a derived class when the object has been Disposed. Returns a static instance that is used to identify objects whose color and image properties should be manipulated by the ISL generator when the library is used as a custom ISL generator template but have not been assigned a specific named . Returns a boolean indicating if this instance represents the instance that is used to identify objects whose image and color properties should not be manipulated. Returns a boolean indicating if this instance represents the instance that is used to identify objects whose image and color properties should be manipulated but have not been assigned a specific named . Returns or sets the name of the Returns a static instance that is used to identify objects whose color and image properties should not be manipulated by the ISL generator when the library is used as a custom ISL generator template. Static class containing constants for the shared objects defined in the win assembly. The shared object representing the scrollbar elements. The shared object representing the progress bar elements. The shared object for the The shared object for the The shared object for the The shared object for the The shared object for the The shared object for the The shared object for the The shared object for the The shared object for the The shared object for the The shared object for the The shared object for the The shared object for the The shared object for the The shared object for the . Class used to provide appearance information for controls and components. Returns the current default styleset name for the specified library Name of the loaded style library whose default style set name should be returned. The name of the styleset that represents the default styleset in the specified style library Changes the default style set name for the specified style library Name of the loaded style library whose default style set name should be changed. Name of the style set that should be used as the default styleset for objects using the specified styleset This member supports the Infragistics infrastructure and is not meant to be invoked externally. This member supports the Infragistics infrastructure and is not meant to be invoked externally. This member supports the Infragistics infrastructure and is not meant to be invoked externally. This member supports the Infragistics infrastructure and is not meant to be invoked externally. Returns the style manager with the specified name.

Note: If the specified style name does not exist or if is null, a stylemanager that represents the default style will be used.

Note: You must use the returned StyleManager from the thread on which you retreived it.

 The name of the style whose associated stylemanager should be returned or null to obtain the default style manager. A instance that represents the specified name. Returns the style manager with the specified name.

Note: If the specified style name does not exist or if is null, a stylemanager that represents the default style will be used.

Note: You must use the returned StyleManager from the thread on which you retreived it.

 The name of the style whose associated stylemanager should be returned or null to obtain the default style manager. The name of the loaded library from which the stylemanager should be returned or null to obtain the style manager from the default library. A instance that represents the specified name and library. Returns the style manager for the specified component role. The component role whose associated stylemanager should be returned or null to obtain the default style manager. A instance for the specified component role. Returns the parsed custom property value for the specified component role and property name. Name of the component that defined the custom property Name of the custom property whose value is to be returned. The parsed value or null. Returns the parsed custom property value for the specified shared object and property name. Component using the shared object Name of the shared object whose custom property is to be retreived. Name of the custom property whose value is to be returned. The parsed value or null. Returns the for the specified name. Component requesting the role Name of the role being requested A that represents the specified name Returns a schema instance True if the definitions for the node types should include all the possible enum values based on the current definition of the enumerations used for the properties. When false, the types are defined as strings. A Schema instance that represents the application style schema Loads style information from the specified file into the default library. File containing the application style information Loads style information from the specified file into the default library. File containing the application style information Boolean indicating whether the file should be validated when read. Loads style information from the specified file and registers the library under the specified library name. File containing the application style information Boolean indicating whether the file should be validated when read. Name used to identify the library. Controls whose is set to this name will use the library being loaded. Loads style information from the specified stream into the default library. Stream containing the application style information Loads style information from the specified stream into the default library. Stream containing the application style information Boolean indicating whether the file should be validated when read. Loads style information from the specified stream and registers the library under the specified library name. Stream containing the application style information Boolean indicating whether the file should be validated when read. Name used to identify the library. Controls whose is set to this name will use the library being loaded. Resets/clears the style information that is currently loaded into memory for the default style library. Resets/clears the style information that is currently loaded into memory. Name of the style library whose information should be unloaded or null to clear the default style library. This member supports the Infragistics infrastructure and is not meant to be invoked externally. The temporary default styleset used by the NetAdvantage AppStylist executable. True to invoke a style change notification if the specified name differs from the current value. This member supports the Infragistics infrastructure and is not meant to be invoked externally. The temporary default styleset used by the NetAdvantage AppStylist executable. True to invoke a style change notification if the specified name differs from the current value. Name of the loaded library whose default styleset name is to be updated. This member supports the Infragistics infrastructure and is not meant to be invoked externally. Type whose assembly style information should be evaluated. Returns the that is associated with the default style of the default library.

Note: You must use the returned StyleManager from the thread on which you retreived it.

 Returns or sets the name of the default application style set. Returns or sets the current Office 2007 color scheme.

When set to Default, which is the default value, the value from the will be used. This properties are updated based on the last Infragistics Style Library that was loaded using the default/unspecified style library name.

 Returns or sets the color that should be blended with the colors of the current .

When set to Color.Default, which is the default value, the value from the will be used. This properties are updated based on the last Infragistics Style Library that was loaded using the default/unspecified style library name.

 Returns the version of the style manager. Invoked when the style information has been changed. Returns true if any of the requested property have been set One or more bits representing multiple properties can be passed in. Static class with helper methods and constants. A constant indicating the StyleLibraryName that will be used to style the Infragistics support dialogs and designers. Helper method to calculate a resolved value based on a specified resolution order. Resolution order used to determine the precedence of the values Property value from the application style Property value from the control Value to compare against the control and style value to determine if they are set to their default value. The value to return if all the values are set to the defaultValue. The resolved value. Verifies that the specified cached role is still valid. If not it regets it and assigns it to the role which is passed by ref. Also for convenience it returns the same role. By reference role that should be verified to be up to date and if not, updated with the current role Owner whose component role should be used to access the role Owner context used to obtain the component role Name of the role to obtain An out parameter ResolutionOrder that is set to the current resolution order of the component role The current uirole or null if one could not be obtained. Verifies that the specified cached role is still valid. If not it regets it and assigns it to the role which is passed by ref. Also for convenience it returns the same role. By reference role that should be verified to be up to date and if not, updated with the current role The component role used to obtain the role and resolution order Name of the role to obtain An out parameter ResolutionOrder that is set to the current resolution order of the component role The current uirole or null if one could not be obtained. Returns a based on the specified check state. Check state to evaluate A RoleState of either Checked, Unchecked or Indeterminate. Helper method to synchronize component role settings on child controls The parent whose children will be synchronized. True to enable application styling The name of the styleset to use. If true will call this method recursively on the child controls, effectively synchronizing all descendants. Helper method to synchronize component role settings on child controls The parent whose children will be synchronized. True to enable application styling The name of the styleset to use. If true will call this method recursively on the child controls, effectively synchronizing all descendants. The new value for the . This name is used to obtain the style library that is loaded into memory from which the control should obtain its application styling information. Helper method to synchronize component role settings on child controls The parent whose children will be synchronized. True to enable application styling The name of the styleset to use. If true will call this method recursively on the child controls, effectively synchronizing all descendants. The new value for the . This name is used to obtain the style library that is loaded into memory from which the control should obtain its application styling information. Controls which shouldn't have their component role settings synchronized. However, if is True, the children of the controls in this collection will be synchronized. Helper method to convert a enum value to the corresponding . Component role whose view style is to be arranged. A corresponding EmbeddableElementDisplayStyle. Helper method to convert a enum value to the corresponding . ViewStyle to evaluate A corresponding EmbeddableElementDisplayStyle A helper class for caching resolved property values. Constructor. The number of properties whose resolved values will be cached by the CachePropertyValue and GetCachedProperty methods. Returns cached resolved value for the property identified by the propertyIndex. The propertyIndex parameter must be less than the value set on the PropertiesCacheCount property of this component role. Also note that whenever the control property value changes, the cache needs to be cleared using the method. The index that uniquely identifies the property whose cached resolved value to get. The propertyIndex parameter must be less than the value set on the PropertiesCacheCount property of this component role. This out parameter will be assigned the cached resolved value of the property. Returns true if the resolved value of the property is cached. If false then you need to cache it using the method. Clears the cached resolved property values. Cached the specified property value. The index that uniquely identifies the property whose cached resolved value to get. The propertyIndex parameter must be less than the value set on the PropertiesCacheCount property of this component role. The cached resolved value of the property. Number of properties whose resolved values will be cached by the CachePropertyValue and GetCachedProperty methods. The propertyIndex parameter passed into those methods must be less than this count. Helper class for caching property values in editors. Constructor. Editor whose cached properties are to be managed. Array of the names of the properties that will be cached. Clears the cached resolved property values. Gets the cached property value for an editor. Owner that is using the editor. This is used to obtain the appropriate component role Owner context of the editor. This is used to obtain the appropriate component role Index of the property that contains the cached value to evaluate Out parameter that is set to the cached value. True if there is a cached value, otherwise false is returned. Calculates the resolved value for the specified property index using the specified owner and default value information and then caches it at the specified index. Owner that is using the editor. This is used to obtain the appropriate component role Owner context of the editor. This is used to obtain the appropriate component role Index of the property at which the value should be cached Current editor value Default value for the property that can be used to compare against the editor value and application style value. Resolved value that should be returned/cached if all the values are default or unspecified. The cached value. An object that represents a discrete area within a control. Returns the merged for the specified component. Component role that contains this role. This is used to obtain the button style from the component and if necessary, the associated styleset. This parameter can be null to return the button style explicitly set on the role or its ancestor roles. The associated UIElementButtonStyle. Indicates if the role has any appearance information for the specified state. Role state to evaluate True if the role has any appearance information for the state; otherwise false is returned. Indicates if the role has the specified appearance property set for the specified state. Role state to evaluate Appearance property to evaluate True if the role has the specified property set for the state; otherwise false is returned. Indicates if the uses the same style information as the component role. ComponentRole to evaluate True if the role is using the same style information; otherwise false is returned. Resolves the appearance for the role. Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Enum indicating the state that should be resolved Resolves the appearance for the role. Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Enum indicating the state that should be resolved Will only attempt to resolve properties whose bits are set in this parameter Returns the name of the role. Returns the border style for the role. Identifies if there was appearance information defined for any state of this specific role regardless of whether there is any appearance information defined for the base roles. Helper class for managing a reference for a specific role of a given Constructor The component role The anme of the UIRole Constructor The UIElement that will spully the component role The anme of the UIRole Resets the cache to an empty state. The role instance (read-only) The component role (read-only) Indicates if the object represents an empty instance. Static class used to provide the names of the common ui roles defined in the win assembly. Root role for all roles. Role for headers (column header, group header, band header, grid caption header etc...). Role for cells. Role for rows. Role for buttons. Role for splitter bar. Role for the splitter bar intersection. Role for split box. Represents the main control area of a control. Role for expansion indicators. Role for the . Role for the tool tip title. Role for the when it's used as a balloon tooltip. Role for the tool tip title when the tooltip is used as a balloon tooltip. Base role from which all the editor roles derive. Base role for editor control roles. UltraTextEditor, UltraComboEditor, UltraCheckEditor etc... and all other editor control roles derive from this role. Roles derived from this affect only the associated editor control. Role for the ProgressBarEditor. Role used by the main area of a progress bar control. Role used by the filled area of a progress bar. Role for mask literal characters. Role for mask prompt characters. Role for resolving the appearance of the null text in the editors. Null text is displayed when the NullText property of the editor is set and the value in the editor is null and the editor doesn't have focus. The role for the .NET month drop down used by the DateTimeEditor. The role for the title area of the .NET month drop down used by the DateTimeEditor. The role for the value list drop down used by combo editor and related editors. The role for the value list. The role for the value list item. The role fora drop down button. The role for a combo editor drop down button. The role for a combo editor drop down button. The role for a link. Base role for the check editor. CheckEditor and CheckEditorWithButton derive from this role. Role for the check editor. Role for the check editor that's in Button style mode. Role for the a toggle button. Role for the check editor that's in Button style mode. Represents an item (option) in option set editor. Spin button. Horizontal spin button. Left spin button. Left spin button that is typically used to move to the previous item or decrement the value by 1. Left spin button that is typically used to move to the previous page or decrement the value by a 'large change' amount. Left Min spin button that is typically used to move to the first item or minimum value. Right spin button. Right spin button that is typically used to move to the next item or increment the value by 1. Right spin button that is typically used to move to the next page or increment the value by a 'large change' amount. Right Max spin button that is typically used to move to the last item or maximum value. Vertical spin button. Up spin button. Up spin button that is typically used to move to the previous item or decrement the value by 1. Up spin button that is typically used to move to the previous page or decrement the value by a 'large change' amount. Up Min spin button that is typically used to move to the first item or minimum value. Down spin button. Down spin button that is typically used to move to the next item or increment the value by 1. Down spin button that is typically used to move to the next page or increment the value by a 'large change' amount. Down Max spin button that is typically used to move to the last item or maximum value. Represents the EditorButton (part of Editor-Buttons functionality exposed via the editor's ButttonsLeft and ButtonsRight collections. Represents the DropDownEditorButton (part of Editor-Buttons functionality exposed via the editor's ButttonsLeft and ButtonsRight collections. Represents the AutoRepeatEditorButton (part of Editor-Buttons functionality exposed via the editor's ButttonsLeft and ButtonsRight collections. Represents the SpinEditorButton (part of Editor-Buttons functionality exposed via the editor's ButttonsLeft and ButtonsRight collections. Represents the StateEditorButton (part of Editor-Buttons functionality exposed via the editor's ButttonsLeft and ButtonsRight collections. Role for the track in a TrackBar. Role for a horizontal track in a TrackBar. Role for a vertical track in a TrackBar. Role for a thumb in a TrackBar. Role for a thumb on a horizontal TrackBar. Role for a thumb on a vertical TrackBar. Role for a button on the TrackBar. Role for the decrement button on a TrackBar. Role for a horizontal decrement button on a TrackBar. Role for a vertical decrement button on a TrackBar. Role for the increment button on a TrackBar. Role for a horizontal increment button on a TrackBar. Role for a vertical increment button on a TrackBar. Role for the maximum button on a TrackBar. Role for a horizontal maximum button on a TrackBar. Role for a vertical maximum button on a TrackBar. Role for the minimum button on a TrackBar. Role for a horizontal minimum button on a TrackBar. Role for a vertical minimum button on a TrackBar. Role for a tickmark in a TrackBar. Role for a major tickmark in a TrackBar. Role for a minor tickmark in a TrackBar. Role for a midpoint tickmark in a TrackBar. Role for the intersection of a horizontal and vertical scrollbar. Role for a scrollbar. Role for a track in a scrollbar. Role for the section of the scrollbar track before or after the thumb. Role for a button in a scrollbar. Role for the thumb of a scrollbar. Role for the scrollbar arrow buttons Role for the scrollbar minimum/maximum buttons. Role for a vertical scrollbar. Role for a track in a vertical scrollbar. Role for a section of the track in a vertical scrollbar. Role for section of a track before the thumb in a vertical scrollbar Role for section of a track after the thumb in a vertical scrollbar Role for the thumb of a vertical scrollbar. Role for the min/max buttons in a vertical scrollbar. Role for the minimum button in a vertical scrollbar. Role for the maximum button in a vertical scrollbar. Role for the arrow buttons in a vertical scrollbar. Role for the up scroll arrow button in a vertical scrollbar. Role for the down scroll arrow button in a vertical scrollbar. Role for a horizontal scrollbar. Role for a track in a horizontal scrollbar. Role for a section of the track in a horizontal scrollbar. Role for section of a track before the thumb in a horizontal scrollbar Role for section of a track after the thumb in a horizontal scrollbar Role for the thumb of a horizontal scrollbar. Role for the min/max buttons in a horizontal scrollbar. Role for the minimum button in a horizontal scrollbar. Role for the maximum button in a horizontal scrollbar. Role for the arrow buttons in a horizontal scrollbar. Role for the left scroll arrow button in a horizontal scrollbar. Role for the right scroll arrow button in a horizontal scrollbar. Role for a tab item Role for a tab item when it is horizontal Role for a tab item when it is on the top Role for a tab item when it is on the bottom Role for a tab item when it is vertical Role for a tab item when it is on the left Role for a tab item when it is on the right Role for the area that contains tab items Role for the area that contains tab items whose tabs are on the left or right of the client area Role for the area that contains tab items whose tabs are on the left of the client area Role for the area that contains tab items whose tabs are on the right of the client area Role for the area that contains tab items whose tabs are on the top or bottom of the client area Role for the area that contains tab items whose tabs are on the top of the client area Role for the area that contains tab items whose tabs are on the bottom of the client area Role for the client area portion of a set of tabs (excludes the tab header area). Role for the client area portion of a set of tabs that are on the left or right of the client area (excludes the tab header area). Role for the client area portion of a set of tabs that are on the top or bottom of the client area (excludes the tab header area). The base role for a button displayed in the tab area. Role for a button used to close tab items. Role for a button used to display a list of visible tab items. Helper method to return a list of the horizontal and vertical leaf roles for the specified type of spin buttons. Types of spin button items supported. An array of strings containing the list of spin button roles for the specified spin button types. Controls class loading and mandates what class to load. Controls the binding of a serialized object to a type Specifies the Assembly name of the serialized object Specifies the Type name of the serialized object. The type of the object the formatter creates a new instance of. Abstract base class for button elements. Initializes the check state of the state button. If the value changes, the click event will not be invoked. True if the state button is checked. Initializes the check state of the state button. If the value changes, the click event will not be invoked. The check state of the state button Changes the check state of the button to the next value. Performs a button click.

If the method returns true, the will be invoked and the event will be raised. Also, if the is Toggle, the method will be invoked to change the .

 Invoked when the button has been clicked. Invoked when the button has been clicked. True to prevent the base implementation from being invoked. Renders the state button using the System theme. The used to provide rendering information. True if the element was able to be rendered using the system themes. Invoked when the checked state of the button changes other than when it is initialized. Invoked when the state of the button changes. Renders the backcolor for the element. The used to provide rendering information. Member used to maintain the button state. True when the last mouse button depressed was the logical left mouse button. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the ButtonUIElementBase class. Parent element Merges the appearance object into the passed in structure The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. Resolves the control specific appearances for this button. Default implementation merges in its . This method should only merge in the appearance properties exposed by the controls. It should not merge in any defaults. The InitAppearance method calls this method in between the calls that resolve app-style appearance settings. In other words this method should itself not resolve any app-style appearance settings. Also note that the InitAppearance method will check UseControlInfo setting of the app-style and if it's false it will not call this method. Therefore the overridden implementations do no need to check for UseControlInfo app-style setting. The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. Sets the appearance data needed for the element to have the WindowsXPCommand button look. Provides default values for BackColor, BackColor2, BackGradientStyle, and BorderColor3DBase. BorderColor is set here if the mouse is over the element. The ApperanceData struct to modify. The requested properties to be set. The current state of the button being rendered. Invoked during the to resolve any remaining appearance values after the style specific appearance information has been initialized. AppearanceData structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Draws the button borders The used to provide rendering information. Called when the mouse enters this element Called when the mouse leaves this element Called on a mouse move message Mouse event arguments Buttons capture the mouse. So this method sets captureMouse to true and returns true Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Invalidates the area of the element that needs to be redrawn when the button's state changes. For a command button this is the entire element but for a checkbox or radio button it is just the indicator Called to give control focus control to give focus to Clear internal flags and invalidate the button Mouse event arguments. Returning true will ignore the next click event clear the internal flags and invalidate Called when mouse capture has been aborted, for example, when the 'escape' key is pressed during a drag operation. Triggers the ElementClick event Resets the button state and checks if the mouse is currently over the element. Checks if the mouse is over the button and updates the ButtonState. If the state differs from that before the check is made, the element is invalidated. Returns the widths of all four borders The of the element. A object describing which borders are present. A object. DoubleClick calls OnClick since a command button treats a doubleclick as a second click. True if left-clicked over an adjustable area. Checks if the point is over the element. This may be overridden in derived classes for specialized hit test logic. In client coordinates Specifieds if we should ignore clipping or not Returns true if the point is over the element. Resolves the appearance data of a button for Office2007 Ribbon button style. The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. Whether the appearance should be resolved as enabled. Whether the mouse is down over the control. Specifies whether the button is a state button. Specifies whether the buttons is a pressed state button. Specifies whether the mouse is over the button area. Resolves the appearance data of a button for Office2007 Ribbon button style. The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. Whether the appearance should be resolved as enabled. Whether the mouse is down over the control. Specifies whether the button is a state button. Specifies whether the buttons is a pressed state button. Specifies whether the mouse is over the button area. The that should be used. Resolves the appearance data of a button for Office2007 Ribbon button style. Returns the type of button. Gets/sets if the state button supports an indeterminate state. Determines if the state button is checked. If the value changes, the ElementClick event will be invoked. To initialize the state of the check, use the method. Determines the check state of the state button. If the value changes, the ElementClick event will be invoked. To initialize the state of the check, use the method. Returns the next check state that the button will have when clicked. Fired when the button is clicked Returns the default backcolor for the button Returns the default forecolor for the button Indicates if the button style requires invalidation of the element on the mouse enter and exit. Returns whether the button may be pressed. An optional appearance object Gets the button style for the element. Returns or sets a value whether the button will support hottracking. Returns information regarding the mouse in relation to the element. Returns the rect of the element inside the button borders that is always available regardless of the current button state. Indicates if capture for this element should be terminated if the escape key is pressed. Indicates if the mouse is currently over the button. Indicates if the button is currently pressed by the logical left mouse button. Indicates if the logical left mouse button is currently pressed and over the button. Indicates if the state button is currently in the down position. Gets/sets the enabled state of the element. Gets or sets whether the button is rendered as the default button.

A default button is usually rendered with an additional

Gets or sets whether the space for the default button outline will be reserved Gets or sets the object used to provide the region for the shaped button. Returns the region of this element. The deafult returns the element's Rect as a region. This method can be overriden to supply an irregularly shaped region Returning true causes all drawing of this element to be expicitly clipped to its region Returns the ui role for the element. Indicates if the button is considered as being in the pressed state. Indicates if the button is considered as being in the hot track state. Accessible object that represents a button element. Initializes a new Associated UIElement Default name for the accessible object Default description for the accessible object Initializes a new Associated UIElement Default name for the accessible object Initializes a new Associated UIElement Performs the default action associated with this accessible object. Returns the role of the accessible object. Returns the state of the accessible object. Gets a string that describes the default action of the object. Not all objects have a default action. Indicates if the default action can be performed. Abstract base class for button elements that can have text (e.g. command buttons, checkboxs and option buttons. The text uielement Constructor Parent element Initialize the appearance The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The that specify which properties should be initialized. Creates and positions child elements Called when the button is clicked Returns the rectangle for the text element The button text (caption) Determines whether the button text is drawn vertically. Determines how the button text is aligned horizontally. Determines how the button text is aligned vertically. Infragistics simple Button class, derived from System.Windows.Forms.Button. Overrides ProcessMnemonic to provide correct processing when the control is disabled or not visible. Processes a mnemonic character. The mnemonic character entered. True if the mnemonic was processed; otherwise, false. Infragistics simple CheckBox class, derived from System.Windows.Forms.CheckBox. Overrides ProcessMnemonic to provide correct processing when the control is disabled or not visible. Processes a mnemonic character. The character to process. True if the character was processed as a mnemonic by the control; otherwise, false. Infragistics simple RadioButton class, derived from System.Windows.Forms.RadioButton. Overrides ProcessMnemonic to provide correct processing when the control is disabled or not visible. Processes a mnemonic character. The character to process. True if the character was processed as a mnemonic by the control; otherwise, false. Infragistics simple ListBox class, derived from System.Windows.Forms.ListBox.

Overrides OnCreateControl and OnHandleCreated to ensure that an owner drawn listbox is set to redraw its contents when resized and provides. It also provides basic functionality for rendering an insertion mark while dragging over the listbox and also for automatically initiating a drag when pressing down on selected items.

 Initializes a new Calculates the insertion point based on the specified client coordinates. The in client coordinates. The insertion point based on the specified point. Invoked when the mouse is pressed down on a selected item when using a multi select style. Note, this requires unmanaged code rights. True to prevent processing of the mouse down message (i.e. if a drag operation was started) Invoked when the insertion mark is rendered or cleared Index at which the insertion mark was rendered True if the insertion mark was above the specified item or false if it was below the specified item Invoked when the handle for the control is created. Invoked when the control is first created. Invoked during a drag operation while the mouse is over the control. Invoked to determine if the drag operation should continue. The . Invoked when the drag operation is over. Invoked when mouse leaves the bounds of the control during a drag operation. Invoked when an owner draw item should be rendered. Returns or sets whether an insertion mark is rendered under an item during a drag operation. Indicates if selected items are automatically dragged. Note, this requires unmanaged code rights and does not handle the repositioning of items within the group. Returns the location of the current insertion point. Invoked when a message for the associated control is processed. Message to process Element that behaves like a command button. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the ButtonUIElement class. Parent element Invalidates the area of the element that needs to be redrawn when the button's state changes. For a command button this is the entire element. Returns the rectangle for the text element Interface implemented by a class that supplies the button draw state to an indicator element Returns the state of the button Returns the check state of the element. Returns the UIElement button state of the source. The element that renders itself a the check indicator in a checkbox Constructor, initializes a new instance of the CheckIndicatorUIElement class. The Parent UIElement that is hosting this element Override DrawBackColor and do nothing Override DrawImageBackground and do nothing Override DrawBorders and do nothing Override DrawForeground to draw the check box Handles the rendering of the element using the system themes. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element was able to successfully render with the system theme. Used to determine whether the remaining draw methods are invoked. Returning true causes all drawing of this element to be expicitly clipped to its region Returns the region of this element. The default returns the element's Rect as a region. This method can be overriden to supply an irregularly shaped region Element that behaves like a check box control. Controls where the check mark is placed in relation to the element rect Constructor, initializes a new instance of the CheckBoxUIElement class. The parent element Used to Initialize the states of the CheckBox True for a triple state checkbox, False for dual state. The initial of the checkbox. Creates and positions child elements Called when the button is clicked Invalidates just the check indicator merges the appearance object into the passed in structure The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. Renders the backcolor for the element. The used to provide rendering information. Returns information regarding the mouse in relation to the element. Returns the checkstate of the element. Returns the state of the button. Returns the buttonstate used for drawing the check box The size of the check image in pixels (read-only) Returns the rectangle for the checkbox element (read-only) Returns the rectangle for the text element The checked state of the btn element Controls where the check mark is placed in relation to the element rect Indicates whether clicking on the element will cycle thru 3 states (checked/unchecked/indeterminate) or just 2 states (checked/unchecked) Gets the button style for the element. Indicates if the button style requires invalidation of the element on the mouse enter and exit. Determines if the element will draw its own back color Returns the rect surrounding the text of the text element Controls whether or not the element responds to mouse clicks Controls whether or not button can be clicked Summary description for CheckBoxUIElementWithImage. This class adds image support to the CheckBoxUIElement Summary for CheckBoxWithImageUIElement: Contains and positions CheckBox and Image UIElements. The parent element of this element. Summary for CheckBoxWithImageUIElement: Contains and positions CheckBox and Image UIElements. The parent UIElement This is the standard winforms behavior. Setting this to false will position the image outside of the optionbutton+text element rect. Clean up resources used Position and Size the Child UIElements Gets the 'preferred' size needed to render the entire element. The base control font. The size necessary to render the control. Gets the 'preferred' size needed to render the entire element. The base control font. Include image dimensions in calculation. The size necessary to render the control. Returns the imageElement, creating it if necessary Determines if image should be positioned inside of the text rect. This is the standard winforms behavior. Setting this to false will position the image outside of the optionbutton+text element rect. Set/Get the image to be displayed by the control Sets the alignment of the image that will be displayed in the face of the element Enumeration of Property identifiers for the UltraScrollBar. Display as check Display as State Button Display using custom images Embeddable CheckBox Editor class. An abstract base class for embeddable editors. This member supports the Infragistics framework and is not intended to be used externally. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the EmbeddableEditorBase class. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the EmbeddableEditorBase class. An instance of the default EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class from which to obtain owner-specific information Determines if the type can be edited. to test. Returns true if the type can be edited. Determines if the type can be rendered. to test. Returns true if the type can be rendered. Called to have the dropdown close up. Called to drop down the dropdown. Returns true if successful. The editor must already be in edit mode otherwise this method will return false. Called to place the editor in edit mode. The element that was returned from . Returns true if successful. Called to have the editor exit edit mode. If true will force an exit even if exit event is cancelled. If true any changes made while in edit mode will be applied. Returns true if successful. Sets input focus to the editor. Returns true if the editor successfully took focus. Returns information about whether the dropdown is dropped down. The element that was passed into . True if currently dropped down. Called from inside the method of the parent element to create and position the embedded element or elements. The element that will contain the embedded element. An object that derives from the class. Context information that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method. The element returned the prior time the parent element's method was called. An instance of a class derived from EmbeddableUIElementBase.

The owner and ownerContext values are saved by the added element to get value and state information later.

 Called from inside the method of the parent element to create and position the embedded element or elements. The element that will contain the embedded element. An object that derives from the class. Context information that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders The element returned the prior time the parent element's method was called. An instance of a class derived from EmbeddableUIElementBase.

The owner and ownerContext values are saved by the added element to get value and state information later.

 Called from inside the method of the parent element to create and position the embedded element or elements. The element that will contain the embedded element. An object that derives from the class. Context information that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. The element returned the prior time the parent element's method was called. An instance of a class derived from EmbeddableUIElementBase.

The owner and ownerContext values are saved by the added element to get value and state information later.

 Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Returns information about whether the object is in edit mode. The element that was returned from . True if the value has been changed since entering edit mode. True if currently in edit mode. Is called to get the size needed to render a value. An object that derives from the class. An object that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method.\ If false will include space needed for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will return the size required to completely render the value otherwise the size returned should be the preferred size. If true will include the borders Returns the size needed to render a value and optionally its associated elements. Is called to get the size needed to render a value. An object that derives from the class. An object that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method.\ If false will include space needed for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will return the size required to completely render the value otherwise the size returned should be the preferred size. If true will include the borders Maximum width of the string. Returns the size needed to render a value and optionally its associated elements. The default implementation ignores the width parameter, and calls the overload that doesn't take width Is called to get the size needed to render a value. An object that derives from the class. An object that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method.\ If false will include space needed for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will return the size required to completely render the value otherwise the size returned should be the preferred size. If true will include the borders Maximum width of the string. The constraining height. For most editors, this parameter is not applicable; editors that wrap items based on the available vertical space (i.e., ) use this parameter to determine how the items wrap. A value of zero implies no limit. Returns the size needed to render a value and optionally its associated elements.

The default implementation ignores the height parameter, and calls the overload that doesn't take height

 Used to determine the size preferred/required by the editor. Structure that provides information regarding the size calculation including the owner for which the size calculation is occuring, whether to exclude edit elements, whether to include borders, etc. The size needed to render the value by the editor based upon the specified options. Gets the current spell check target A control that derives from TextBoxBase or an object that implements the interface or null. The default implementation returns null. Derived classes that override this method and a non-null value must also override the property and return true. Returns whether the key is used by the editor. Key data True only if the editor is in edit mode and the key is used by the editor. Converts data value to text making use of any format provider and format strings that owner may provide. If unsuccessful, returns null. The value to be converted An object that derives from the class. An object that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method. A string representation of the provided value. Converts data value to text making use of any format provider and format strings that owner may provide. If unsuccessful, returns null. The value to be converted An object that derives from the class. An object that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method. Specifies whether the format string returned by the owner via the method should be used when formatting the text. The format string should not be applied to embeddable elements that are currently in edit mode. A string representation of the provided value. Returns the string representation of the specified value. The value to convert. A string representation of the value. Converts val to an object of type returned by owner's GetDataType method. If it can not convert, it returns null. It makes use of any format provided and format string off the owner. The value to convert. The of the editor. The owner context, used to provide additional information. The to try to convert the specified value to. Converted value, null if unsuccessfull. Converts val to an object of type returned by owner's GetDataType method. If it can not convert, it returns null. It makes use of any format provided and format string off the owner. The value to convert. The currently being edited. Converted value, null if unsuccessfull. Converts val to an object of type returned by owner's GetDataType method. If it can not convert, it returns null. It makes use of any format provided and format string off the owner. The value to convert. The of the editor. The owner context, used to provide additional information. Converted value, null if unsuccessfull. Returns whether the owner should compare items based on their underlying value rather than their display text. The EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived owner The context that was passed into the method. True if the owner should compare items based on their underlying value. The default implementation returns true, implying that the owner should sort by the underlying data value.

Editors that support ValueLists will look at the owner's return from GetValueList; if an IValueList is supplied, the value of the SortByValue property will be returned. Applies any appearance associated with the dataVal data value. Base implementation does nothing. The to resolve. Properties to resolve. Data value. The of the editor. The owner context, used to provide additional information. A derived class can override this method to apply any appearance settings assoicated with the data value to this object. For example, an editor that makes use fo value list items can apply appearance of the value list item associated with dataVal. Creates a copy of the embeddable editor with the specified default owner. An instance of the default EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class from which to obtain owner-specific information A copy of the editor Used by an editor owner to create an accessible object for a specific object managed by an editor. Parent accessible object for the accessible object to create Editor owner Owner context that can be supplied to the editor owner to obtain information about the object represented by the accessible instance. An accessible object that represents the specified owner context for the editor. Returns whether this editor displays an ink button. The IInkProvider implementor that provides the inking capabilities. An object that derives from the class. Context information that is used by the specified owner. A boolean indicating whether the editor displays an ink button.

The default implementation returns false.

 Returns true if the edited value is valid (read-only). If the value is invalid, the 'errorMessage' out parameter can contain an error message. If the value is invalid, this out parameter can contain an error message. Accessing this property when the editor is not in edit mode will throw an exception. True if the editor's value is valid, else false. Selects all text in the editor. Exception thrown if editor is not in edit mode. Exception thrown if editor does not override and return true from the property. Drops down the dropdown. True if successful. The method must be overidden in derived classes that override and return true from the property. Closes the dropdown. The method must be overidden in derived classes that override and return true from the property. Gets the InkProvider registered for the owner's container. An object that derives from the class. An object that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method.\ The InkProvider registered for the owner control's container or null if no InkProvider is registered. Start listening to the owner's key events Called after the dropdown has been dropped down. The base implementation raises the AfterDropDown event. Called after the dropdown has been closed up. The base implementation raises the AfterCloseUp event. Called after edit mode has been entered. The base implementation raises the AfterEnterEditMode event. Called after edit mode has been exited. The base implementation raises the AfterExitEditMode event. Called before the dropdown has been dropped down. Set to true to cancel the operation. The base implementation raises the BeforeDropDown event. Called before edit mode has been entered. Set to true to cancel the operation. The base implementation raises the BeforeEnterEditMode event. Called before edit mode has been exited. Set to true to cancel the operation. If true must exit even if exit event is cancelled. If true any changes made while in edit mode will be applied. The base implementation raises the BeforeExitEditMode if fireEvent is true. Occurs when the owner gets a key down while in edit mode. The key event args describing which key was pressed. The default implementation does nothing. Derived editor classes that are interested in keystrokes from the owner when it has focus should override this method. Occurs when the owner gets a key press while in edit mode. The key event args describing which key was pressed. The default implementation does nothing. Derived editor classes that are interested in keystrokes from the owner when it has focus should override this method. Occurs when the owner gets a key up while in edit mode. The key event args describing which key was pressed. The default implementation does nothing. Derived editor classes that are interested in keystrokes from the owner when it has focus should override this method. Raises the SelectionChanged Raises the ValueChanged event and sets the value changed flag Raises the KeyDown event Raises the KeyPress event Raises the KeyUp event Called when the editor is disposed Unhook from the owner's key events Initializes the state of this object from a source object of the same type The to initialize this instance from. Returns the size required to render the editor's value for the specified owner and ownerContext. An object that derives from the class. An object that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method.\ Determines whether the value returned from the method is honored. The constraining width The size required to render the editor's value for the specified owner and ownerContext.

Note: If the editor is in edit mode for the specified owner and ownerContext, the value of the editor's property is used rather than the value returned via the method.

 Adjusts (increases) the specified size for the owner padding. The EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived owner The owner context A reference to the Size to be adjusted If owner doesn't provide padding, use this as the default padding. Adjusts the specified Size to account for the owner-specified borders The EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived owner The owner context A reference to the Size to be adjusted Applies tooltip backcolor, forecolor and BackGradientStyle to the specified appearance. It also strips those flags from the requestedPropFlags parameter. The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. Internal. The to check. A indicating if the conversion can be performed. Shorter overload of GetDataFilteredDestinationValue, throws exception in the case of invalid conversion. Conversion direction. Owner. Owner context. Converted value. Shorter overload of GetDataFilteredDestinationValue. Conversion direction. True if the source data was valid. Owner. Owner context. Converted value. Shorter overload of GetDataFilteredDestinationValue. Conversion direction. True if the source data was valid. Owner. Owner context. Additional error information for IsDestinationValueValid(...). Converted value. Shorter overload of GetDataFilteredDestinationValue, throws exception in the case of invalid conversion. Source value. Conversion direction. Owner. Owner context. Converted value. Converts source data to destination using data filter or editor-specific automatic conversion. Source value. Conversion direction. True if the source data was valid. Owner. Owner context. Converted value. Converts source data to destination using data filter or editor-specific automatic conversion. Source value. Conversion direction. True if the source data was valid. Owner. Owner context. Additional error information for IsDestinationValueValid(...). Converted value. Converts source data to destination using data filter or editor-specific automatic conversion. Source value. Conversion direction. True if the source data was valid. Owner. Owner context. Additional error information for IsDestinationValueValid(...). Perform auto-conversion. Perform validation check. Converted value. Gets default source value for specific conversion. Conversion direction. Owner. Owner context. Source value. Gets default destination type for specific conversion. Conversion direction. Owner. Owner context. Source value. Internal. Updates DataFilter cache if needed (first call or changed source value). Type of conversion. Source value. Destination type. Owner. Owner context. True if DataFilter handles specific conversion. Override this in specific editor to provide display value. Display string. Override this in specific editor to provide editor value. Editor value. Internal. New editor value. Override this in specific editor to check if converted value is valid. Note, this value does not use the ValueConstraint object returned by the owner's GetConstraints method during validation. Type of conversion. Value to check. Owner. Owner context. Additional information in the case of failure. True if the destination value is valid. Override this in specific editor to provide automatic conversions for that editor. Type of conversion. Value to convert. Type of converted value True if conversion was valid. Owner. OwnerContext. Converted value. Returns the default embeddable editor owner, which may provide default owner-specific values for an editor A standalone editor will return its own EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class instance as the default owner Returns true if the editor can take focus while in edit mode (read-only). Returns the embeddable element that is currently in edit mode. If the editor is not in edit mode then this property returns null. Returns true if the editor has focus (read-only). Returns true if in edit mode and dropped down Returns true if the editor is in edit mode Returns true if the edited value is valid (read-only). Accessing this property when the editor is not in edit mode will throw an exception. Gets or sets the number of characters selected in the editor. Exception thrown if editor is not in edit mode. Exception thrown if editor does not override and return true from the property. Gets or sets the starting point of text selected in the editor. Exception thrown if editor is not in edit mode. Exception thrown if editor does not override and return true from the property. Gets or sets the currently selected text in the editor. Exception thrown if editor is not in edit mode. Exception thrown if editor does not override and return true from the property. Returns true if this editor supports a dropdown. The default implementation returns false. Derived classes that override this property and return true must also override the and methods. Returns true if this editor supports selecting text. The default implementation returns false. Derived classes that override this property and return true must also override the , , and properties. Returns true if this editor supports spell checking. The default implementation returns false. Derived classes that override this property and return true must also override the method. Gets the length of the text in the editor. Exception thrown if editor is not in edit mode. Exception thrown if editor does not override and return true from the property. The current value being edited. Type matches editor owner data type. Accessing this property when the editor is not in edit mode will throw an exception. Returns the current text being edited without doing any validation. This will return the text currently typed in. If the editor does not have an textbox-like control, it will return the current edit value in form of text. Accessing this property when the editor is not in edit mode will throw an exception. Specifies whether the editor wants to receive key events from the owner while in edit mode (read-only).

If the editor doesn't take focus when it is in edit mode then it may want to listens in to keystrokes while the owner retains focus.

The default implemenation returns the opposite of the CanFocus property.

 Specifies whether the editor supports value list (read-only).

If the editor makes use of value list returned by EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase, it returns true.

The default implemenation returns false.

 Specifies whether the editor supports AutoSizeEdit (read-only).

If the editor supports automatically sizing itself to accommodate the data it contains, it returns true

The default implementation returns false.

 Indicates if the editor is about to enter edit mode. Specifies name of the shared object that was defined for this editor. Property which should be overriden by derived editors which have their own default Context Menu, so an ancestor's ContextMenu would be prevented from showing. Gets or sets the number of characters selected in the editor. The property must be overidden in derived classes that override and return true from the property. Gets or sets the starting point of text selected in the editor. The property must be overidden in derived classes that override and return true from the property. Gets or sets the currently selected text in the editor. The property must be overidden in derived classes that override and return true from the property. Gets the length of the text in the editor. The property must be overidden in derived classes that override and return true from the property. Occurs when a new value is selected from the dropdown. Occurs when the value is changed in edit mode. Occurs before dropping down the dropdown. Occurs after dropping down the dropdown. Occurs after closing up the dropdown. Occurs before entering edit mode. Occurs after entering edit mode. Occurs before exiting edit mode. Occurs after exiting edit mode. Occurs on a key down while the editor is in edit mode and the editor has focus. Occurs on a key press while the editor is in edit mode and the editor has focus. Occurs on a key up while the editor is in edit mode and the editor has focus. If different than null, specifies custom data filter used by the editor. Default type used by the editor in the case of data filter. Null means that editor supports multiple data types and expects type to be set or provided by the owner. Type converter used to determine which controls should appear in the type editor for an EditorControl property. Creates a new instance of the class. Type Returns true if the value is a valid component An that provides an additional context. The value to check. True if the value is a valid component. Data filter cache. Base class for the accessible object that will represent an editor for a specific instance of an owner's object. Initializes a new Parent accessible object Associated editor Associated owner Owner context that identifies the object which the accessible instance represents Returns the control used to synchronize accessibility calls. Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Retrieves the child object at the specified screen coordinates. The horizontal screen coordinate The vertical screen coordinate An AccessibleObject that represents the child object at the given screen coordinates. This method returns the calling object if the object itself is at the location specified. Returns a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no object is at the tested location. Returns the object that has the keyboard focus. An AccessibleObject that specifies the currently focused child. This method returns the calling object if the object itself is focused. Returns a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no object has focus. Navigates to another accessible object. Direction of the navigation The accessible object based on the specified navigation direction. Attempts to put the object associated with this specific instance of the accessible object into edit mode. A boolean indicating if the editor was able to enter edit mode for this accessible object. Returns the UIElement associated with a particular child accessible object. Accessible object representing the child whose uielement should be returned. The uielement used to display the child or null if the element is not available. Causes the accessible object to retrieve and cache the uielement.

The first time that the UIElement property is invoked after calling this method, the element will be cached until the method has been invoked. The ReleaseUIElementCache method must be invoked once for each time that the CacheUIElement is invoked. The method is used to prevent the uielement from being retreived from the owner each time that it is requested - e.g. when checking the bounds of the child accessible objects.

 Releases a reference to a cached uielement for the accessible object's editor instance.

Note This method must be invoked once for each time that the method is invoked.

 Processes the navigation request of the child accessible object. Child accessible object whose navigate method is being invoked. Indicates the direction of the navigation. The accessible object based on the navigation direction. Returns the index of the specified child accessible object. Child accessible object to evaluate -1 if the child was not found. Otherwise the index of the child is returned. Indicates if the accessible object or one of its children may have the input focus. True if the editor is in edit mode for this instance and the control is focused. Otherwise false is returned. Returns the associated editor. Returns the associated owner Returns the owner context that can be used by the owner to identify the object that the accessible instance represents. Indicates if the associated editor is in edit mode for the owner and owner context represented by the accessible object. Returns the UIElement associated with the accessible object instance. Returns the valuelist used by the editor. Returns the parent accessible object. Returns the location and size of the object represented by the accessible object. Returns the state of the accessible object. Returns the value of the editor. Indicates if the default action can be performed. Base accessible object for children of an embeddable editor. Initializes a new Parent accessible object Returns the control used to synchronize accessibility calls. The used to synchronize accessibility calls. Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Navigates to another accessible object. Direction of the navigation The accessible object based on the specified navigation direction. Returns the UIElement associated with the accessible instance. Returns the parent accessible object. Returns the location and size of the object represented by the accessible object. Accessible object representing the dropdown button of an editor. Initializes a new Parent accessible object Performs the default action associated with this accessible object. Returns the role of the accessible object. Returns the state of the accessible object. Returns the name of the accessible object. Gets a string that describes the default action of the object. Indicates if the default action can be performed. Indicates if the object represented by the accessible object is dropped down. Accessible object representing the dropdown button of an editor. Initializes a new Parent accessible object Performs the default action associated with this accessible object. Indicates if the ink input panel is dropped down. Returns the name of the accessible object. Gets a string that describes the default action of the object. Accessible object representing the spin button of an editor. Initializes a new Parent accessible object Retrieves the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. The zero-based index of the accessible child. An AccessibleObject that represents the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Invoked when the default action of the child spin button item is invoked. True if the up/more spin button is pressed, otherwise false. Used to determine the available state of the spin button item True to determine the state of the up/more spin button, otherwise false to determine the state of the down/less spin button item. True if the value can be changed by the specified spin button direction Returns the UIElement for the specified spin button item Direction of the spin button item whose element should be returned. The uielement representing the spin button item or null if one is not available Returns the role of the accessible object. Returns the state of the accessible object. Returns the control used to synchronize accessibility calls. Performs the default action associated with this accessible object. Navigates to another accessible object. Direction of the navigation The accessible object based on the specified navigation direction. Returns the role of the accessible object. Returns the parent accessible object. Returns the name of the accessible object. Returns the location and size of the object represented by the accessible object. Returns the state of the accessible object. Gets a string that describes the default action of the object. Indicates if the default action can be performed. Accessible object representing an IValueList Initializes a new Parent accessible object Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Retrieves the object that has the keyboard focus. Returns null. The accessible object represents a hidden valuelist. Retrieves the currently selected child. Returns null. The accessible object represents a hidden valuelist. Retrieves the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. The zero-based index of the accessible child. An AccessibleObject that represents the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. Returns the location and size of the object represented by the accessible object. Returns the role of the accessible object. Returns the name of the accessible object. Returns the control used to synchronize accessibility calls. Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Navigates to another accessible object. Direction of the navigation The accessible object based on the specified navigation direction. Performs the default action associated with this accessible object. Returns the parent accessible object. Returns the location and size of the object represented by the accessible object. Returns the role of the accessible object. Returns the state of the accessible object. Returns the name of the accessible object. Gets a string that describes the default action of the object. Indicates if the default action can be performed. Structure used to calculate the size of the embeddable editor instance. Initializes a new The for which the size calculation is being requested. An object that should be passed back to the associated so that the owner can identify the object whose size is being calculated. If false will include space needed for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will return the size required to completely render the value otherwise the size returned should be the preferred size. If true will include the borders Indicates if the size is being calculated for displaying a tooltip for the editor. Returns the for which the size calculation is being requested. Returns an object that should be passed back to the associated so that the owner can identify the object whose size is being calculated. Returns a boolean indicating if edit elements (e.g. spin buttons) should be excluded from the size calculation. A boolean indicating whether to calculate the size required to show the entire value (true) or just the preferred size (false). Returns a boolean indicating whether the borders should be included in the calculation. Returns or sets an integer indicating the max width for the editor size or 0 if there is no limit on the width. Returns or sets a boolean indicating the constraining height or 0, if there is no limit on the height returned. For most editors, this parameter is not applicable; editors that wrap items based on the available vertical space (i.e., ) use this parameter to determine how the items wrap. Returns a boolean indicating if the size is being calculated for use in displaying a tooltip for the editor. Type converter used to determine which components should appear in the type editor for an EditorComponent property. Creates a new instance of the class. Type Returns true if the value is a valid component An that provides an additional context. The value to check. True if the value is a valid component. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the CheckEditor class. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the CheckEditor class. The default . Invoked when a property has changed on a sub object PropChangeInfo object containing information about the property change Fired after control enters edit mode. This editor only edits boolean and string values. Type we are attempting to convert. true if type is boolean, false otherwise Handles keyUp of owner Only Boolean and string types can be rendered by this editor Type we are attempting to convert. true if type is boolean, false otherwise Sets input focus to the editor. Returns true if the editor successfully took focus. Used to determine the size preferred/required by the editor. Structure that provides information regarding the size calculation including the owner for which the size calculation is occuring, whether to exclude edit elements, whether to include borders, etc. The size needed to render the value by the editor based upon the specified options. Returns whether the key is used by the editor. True only if the editor is in edit mode and the key is used by the editor. Internal. New editor value. Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Called from inside the method of the parent element to create and position the embedded element or elements. The element that will contain the embedded element. An object that derives from the class. Context information that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. The element returned the prior time the parent element's method was called. An instance of a class derived from EmbeddableUIElementBase.

The owner and ownerContext values are saved by the added element to get value and state information later.

 Resolves the elements appearance. Structure to receive the updated appearance info. Flag enumeration indicating which properties need to be resolved. is item hottracking Resolves the elements appearance. Structure to receive the updated appearance info. Flag enumeration indicating which properties need to be resolved. is item hottracking Value of the checkbox to resolve Incremenets the state based on the threeState property Clean up any resources being used. Called to determine if Appearance should be serialized Called to determine if Appearance should be serialized Called to determine if Appearance should be serialized Called by environment to reset property. Called by environment to reset property. Called by environment to reset property. Invoked before the exits edit mode. By reference boolean indicating whether the exit should be cancelled. True if the editor is being forced out of edit mode. True to apply changes. Creates a copy of the embeddable editor with the specified default owner. An instance of the default EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class from which to obtain owner-specific information A copy of the editor Initializes the state of this object from a source object of the same type Object whose properties should be copied Used by an editor owner to create an accessible object for a specific object managed by an editor. Parent accessible object for the accessible object to create Editor owner Owner context that can be supplied to the editor owner to obtain information about the object represented by the accessible instance. An accessible object that represents the specified owner context for the editor. Override this in specific editor to provide editor value. Editor value. Override this in specific editor to provide automatic conversions for that editor. Type of conversion. Value to convert. Type of converted value True if conversion was valid. Owner. OwnerContext. Converted value. Returns the the value of the Owner as a CheckState The of the editor. The owner context, used to provide additional information. A object. Returns the the value of the Owner as a CheckState The of the editor. The owner context, used to provide additional information. The value of the editor. A object. Event to notify controls that checkstatus has changed Event to notify controls that checkstatus has changed Fired before a change to the property is committed. The editor can take focus while in edit mode Returns true if the editor has focus (read-only). Returns true if the edited value is valid (read-only). Accessing this property when the editor is not in edit mode will throw an exception. The current value being edited. Accessing this property when the editor is not in edit mode will throw an exception. Returns the current text being edited without doing any validation. This will return the text currently typed in. If the editor does not have an textbox-like control, it will return the current edit value in form of text. Accessing this property when the editor is not in edit mode will throw an exception. Checked appearance for the object Down Checkbox appearance for the object Indeterminate Checkbox appearance for the object Returns whether or not the control has a hot tracking appearance Returns whether or not the control has a checked appearance Returns whether or not the control has an check indeterminate appearance Controls the text of the caption that will be displayed with the check Set/Get the view style of the editor Controls the alignment of the checkbox WantsOwnerKeyEvents The current state of the checkbox Used to determine if the control allows for the indeterminate state Fired before checkstate change Fired after checkstate change Handles the event. Accessible object representing an progress bar editor instance. Initializes a new Parent accessible object Associated check editor Associated owner Owner context that identifies the object which the accessible instance represents Performs the default action associated with this accessible object. Returns the role of the accessible object. Returns the state of the accessible object. Returns the name of the accessible object. Gets a string that describes the default action of the object. Contains information about the editor's event. Creates a new instance of the class. The new value for the editor's property. Gets/sets the new value for the editor's property. CheckEditorCheckBoxUIElement, derived from CheckBoxWithImageUIElement provides customized UI functionality for the CheckEditor class. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the CheckEditorCheckBoxUIElement class. Parent Called when the mouse down message is received over the element. Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Fired when the checkstate of the Check element changes Makes sure that the child elements for this element are in the ChildElements array and that they are positioned properly. This needs to be overridden if the element has any child elements. EmbeddableCheckUIElement, an embeddable check user interface element. Can be embedded in any UI that supports embeddable elements. An abstract base class used by objects that implement EmbeddableEditor to embed an element to render a value. Constructor The parent element. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditorOwner interface. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditor interface. Context information used by the owner to identify the value. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is responsible for drawing the outer borders). If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. Called when the mouse down message is received over the element. Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Called when the mouse is released over an element Mouse event arguments Returning true will ignore the next click event Called when the mouse is double clicked on this element. The default implementatiun just walks up the parent element chain. True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. For internal use only The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. For internal use only True if the element should draw in an active state. For internal use only THe of the element. True if the element should draw in an active state. Called to initialize the element. An object that implements the EmbeddableEditorOwner interface. An object that implements the EmbeddableEditor interface. Context information used by the owner to identify the value. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. Raises the mouse down event The element that was actually clicked on The mouse arguments True if the element that was clicked on operates as a button. If this method returns true, then the embeddable ui element must return true from the OnMouseDown method. If this method returns false, then do the default processing. Raises the mouse down event The embeddable mouse arguments. Raises the MouseUp event The element that was actually clicked on The mouse arguments True if the element that was clicked on operates as a button. Raises the double click event The element that was actually clicked on True is the element that was clicked on operates as a button. Called when the mouse is clicked on this element. Called before edit mode has been entered. An object that implements the EmbeddableEditorOwner interface (read-only). An object that implements the EmbeddableEditor interface (read-only). Context information used by the owner to identify the value (read-only). If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). This property is read-only. If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). This property is read-only.. If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders. This property is read-only..

Note: Some embeddable elements must render borders in order to support WindowsXP themes. Consequently, when the DrawOuterBorders property is false, certain elements may not fully support themes.

 If true the element should draw as a tooltip Returns whether this element is hot tracking This method returns true when the owner returns true from the IsHotTrackingEnabled method, and the cursor is currently positioned over the element Returns true if the mouse is over the element, otherwise it returns false.

Note: This is not based upon the

Returns whether the data this element displays is fully visible. This method is typically used to determine whether a tooltip needs to be displayed.

The default implementation returns true Returns whether this embeddable element is currently in edit mode. The default implementation returns true only when this element's editor is in edit mode, and the editor's property references this element. Returns whether the associated editor is always in edit mode Occurs when the user clicks on an embeddable element. Occurs when the user clicks on an embeddable element. Occurs when the user double clicks on an embeddable element. Constructor The parent element. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditorOwner interface. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditor interface. Context information used by the owner to identify the value. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is responsible for drawing the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. Default drawfocus method draws a focus rect inside the element's borders The used to provide rendering information. Initialize the appearance structure for this element The appearance structure to initialize The properties that are needed Makes sure that the child elements for this element are in the ChildElements array and that they are positioned properly. This needs to be overridden if the element has any child elements. Dispose of created objects Invoked before the element is rendered. Called when the mouse enters this element Called when the mouse leaves this element Returns true if this element needs to draw a focus rect. This should be overridden since the default implementation always returns false. Even if this property returns true the focus will not be drawn unless the control has focus. Returns the ui role for the element. returns parent editor casted to a check editor CheckEditorImageAndTextButtonUIElement, provides statebutton functionality for CheckEditor. A button element that displays text and an image. ImageAndTextButtonUIElementBase Initializes a new ImageAndTextButtonUIElementBase. Parent element Initializes a new ImageAndTextButtonUIElementBase. Parent element Type of button Invoked when the image attributes for the child ImageUIElement are requested. The used to provide rendering information. The used. This method can be overridden in derived classes to supply the image attributes. Positions any child elements. Initializes the appearance for the button. Struct to update with the appearance info. Appearance properties to initialize Determines whether the button should use its internal appearance property to initialize the appearance for the element. Gets the button style for the element. Gets the button style for the element. Returns the ImageAndTextUIElement contained by the button. Returns the object that implements the IUIElementImageAndTextProvider which provides the information for rendering the text and image in the button. UIElement for displaying both an image and text. IUIElementImageAndTextProvider imageAndtextProvider Parent uielement IUIElementImageAndTextProvider Parent uielement Invoked when the image attributes for the child ImageUIElement are requested. The used to provide rendering information. The used. This method can be overridden in dervied classes to supply the image attributes. Initializes the appearance for the element. Struct to update with the appearance information. Appearance properties to resolve. Initialize the provider The Makes sure that the child elements for this element are in the ChildElements array and that they are positioned properly. This needs to be overridden if the element has any child elements. Overriden. Only draws the imagebackground if is set to true. The used to provide rendering information. Overriden. Only draws the imagebackground if is set to true. The used to provide rendering information. Invoked by the child elements to determine the intersection of the child element's rectangle with the invalid rect. Child elements whose intersecting rect is to be returned Invalid rect The intersection of the child element's rect with the invalid rect. Invoked before a phase of the child elements is invoked. The used to provide rendering information. Phase being rendered Invoked after a phase of the child elements is invoked. The used to provide rendering information. Phase being rendered Calculates the size of a single line text string for use by an ImageAndTextUIElement String to measure. Determines how hotkeys are displayed Whether the text is rendered vertically. Control from which to obtain a base font. Resolved appearance data structure for obtaining the font information for the element. The size required by the text. Calculates the size of a single line text string for use by an ImageAndTextUIElement String to measure. Determines how hotkeys are displayed Whether the text is rendered vertically. Control from which to obtain a base font. Resolved appearance data structure for obtaining the font information for the element. The constraining area for the text. The size required by the text. Calculates the size of a single line text string for use by an ImageAndTextUIElement String to measure. Determines how hotkeys are displayed Whether the text is rendered vertically. Control from which to obtain a base font. Resolved appearance data structure for obtaining the font information for the element. True if text can be wrapped. The constraining area for the text. The size required by the text. Calculates the size of a single line text string for use by an ImageAndTextUIElement String to measure. Determines how hotkeys are displayed Whether the text is rendered vertically. Graphics object used to calculate the text size Base font used to calculate the text size Resolved appearance data structure for obtaining the font information for the element. A callback used to measure the string or null to use the default routine. This may be used if you have to run through a number of strings to determine which is the largest, etc. The size required by the text. Calculates the size of a single line text string for use by an ImageAndTextUIElement String to measure. Determines how hotkeys are displayed Whether the text is rendered vertically. Graphics object used to calculate the text size Base font used to calculate the text size Resolved appearance data structure for obtaining the font information for the element. A callback used to measure the string or null to use the default routine. This may be used if you have to run through a number of strings to determine which is the largest, etc. The constraining area for the text. The size required by the text. Calculates the size of a single line text string for use by an ImageAndTextUIElement String to measure. Determines how hotkeys are displayed Whether the text is rendered vertically. EmbeddableUIElementBase object used to get the Graphics object which can be used to get the text size Base font used to calculate the text size Resolved appearance data structure for obtaining the font information for the element. A callback used to measure the string or null to use the default routine. This may be used if you have to run through a number of strings to determine which is the largest, etc. True if text can be wrapped The size required by the text. Calculates the size of a single line text string for use by an ImageAndTextUIElement String to measure. Determines how hotkeys are displayed Whether the text is rendered vertically. Graphics object used to calculate the text size Base font used to calculate the text size Resolved appearance data structure for obtaining the font information for the element. A callback used to measure the string or null to use the default routine. This may be used if you have to run through a number of strings to determine which is the largest, etc. True if text can be wrapped The size required by the text. Calculates the size of a single line text string for use by an ImageAndTextUIElement String to measure. Determines how hotkeys are displayed Whether the text is rendered vertically. Graphics object used to calculate the text size Base font used to calculate the text size Resolved appearance data structure for obtaining the font information for the element. A callback used to measure the string or null to use the default routine. This may be used if you have to run through a number of strings to determine which is the largest, etc. True if text can be wrapped The constraining area for the text. The size required by the text. Calculates the size of a single line text string for use by an ImageAndTextUIElement String to measure. Determines how hotkeys are displayed Whether the text is rendered vertically. Control from which to obtain a base font. Resolved appearance data structure for obtaining the font information for the element. A callback used to measure the string or null to use the default routine. This may be used if you have to run through a number of strings to determine which is the largest, etc. The size required by the text. Calculates the size of a single line text string for use by an ImageAndTextUIElement String to measure. Determines how hotkeys are displayed Whether the text is rendered vertically. Control from which to obtain a base font. Resolved appearance data structure for obtaining the font information for the element. A callback used to measure the string or null to use the default routine. This may be used if you have to run through a number of strings to determine which is the largest, etc. True if text can be wrapped. The size required by the text. Calculates the size of a single line text string for use by an ImageAndTextUIElement String to measure. Determines how hotkeys are displayed Whether the text is rendered vertically. Control from which to obtain a base font. Resolved appearance data structure for obtaining the font information for the element. A callback used to measure the string or null to use the default routine. This may be used if you have to run through a number of strings to determine which is the largest, etc. True if text can be wrapped. The constraining area for the text. The size required by the text. Calculates the size required by the image in an ImageAndTextUIElement. Image If and when images should be scaled. Size to scale images when indicated to do so by the value of True if the image may be shadowed. The size of the image Calculates the size required to completely display an ImageAndTextUIElement. Size of the image. If there is no image, Size.Empty may be used. Size of the text. If there is no text, Size.Empty may be used. Amount of padding around the image - only added in if the image size is at least 1,1 Amount of padding around the text - only added in if the text size is at least 1,1 Amount of padding around the text and image. This is always added in. Indicates if the element is displayed vertically. Border style Which borders are used. Indicates how the text is placed in relation to the image. Size of the image and text element. Calculates the size required to completely display an ImageAndTextUIElement. Size of the image. If there is no image, Size.Empty may be used. Size of the text. If there is no text, Size.Empty may be used. Amount of padding around the image - only added in if the image size is at least 1,1 Amount of padding around the text - only added in if the text size is at least 1,1 Amount of padding around the text and image. This is always added in. Indicates if the element is displayed vertically. Border style Which borders are used. Alignment of the image. When set to CenterMiddle, the image and text will overlap. Size of the image and text element. Calculates the size required to completely display an ImageAndTextButtonUIElement. Size of the image. If there is no image, Size.Empty may be used. Size of the text. If there is no text, Size.Empty may be used. Amount of padding around the image - only added in if the image size is at least 1,1 Amount of padding around the text - only added in if the text size is at least 1,1 Amount of padding around the text and image. This is always added in. Indicates if the element is displayed vertically. Button style Type of button - push button or state button Which borders are used. Alignment of the image. When set to CenterMiddle, the image and text will overlap. Size of the image and text element. Calculates the size required to completely display an ImageAndTextButtonUIElement. Size of the image. If there is no image, Size.Empty may be used. Size of the text. If there is no text, Size.Empty may be used. Amount of padding around the image - only added in if the image size is at least 1,1 Amount of padding around the text - only added in if the text size is at least 1,1 Amount of padding around the text and image. This is always added in. Indicates if the element is displayed vertically. Button style Type of button - push button or state button Which borders are used. Indicates how the text is placed in relation to the image. Size of the image and text element. The provider for the element The border style of the element (read-only) Bits flags that specify which borders to draw (read only) Returns the TextUIElement associated with the ImageAndTextUIElement Returns the ImageUIElement associated with the ImageAndTextUIElement Overriden. The child elements must be clipped if the image element is larger than the panel. Overriden. Returns the cursor displayed when the mouse is over the element. Determines whether the element renders its backcolor. Determines whether the element renders its backcolor. Indicates whether the alignment properties should be translated when dealing with vertical elements. Some element can be displayed either vertically or horizontally at different stages. For these types of elements, it makes sense to adjust the alignment of the text and image to maintain their relationship and not leave the programmer to switch these properties. Returns the rectangle to use when positioning the child elements Determines whether child element draw notifications should be invoked on the element. An image uielement for use by an An abstract UIElement used to draw a foreground image. Constructor The parent of this element. Called during draw so that the Image rect can be adjusted. This may be needed, for example, with the Image on a button that is pressed. In this case the Image may be offset 1 pixel right and down. The that should be adjusted. No backgground is drawn for a Image element The used to provide rendering information. Override DrawImageBackground and do nothing Render the Image Gets the image attributes used for drawing the image The used to provide rendering information. This method can be overridden in dervied classes to supply the image attributes. The image Returns true so that the image doesn't spill outside of the element Determines if the image will centered in the element. Gets or Sets the border shadow's base color. Gets or Sets the depth of the border shadow. Gets or Sets the value indicating whether a shadow will be drawn around the image. Gets or Sets the value indicating whether the aspect ratio of the image should be maintained upon scaling. Returns true if the image is to be scaled to the size of the element Gets the image Rectangle (read-only) Gets/sets and array of color mappings for the image element. Determines if the image is rendered with a shadow. When true, a disabled copy of the image is rendered down and to the right 1 pixel and another copy is rendered up and to the left 1 pixel. Determines if space is reserved for a shadow when the image is scaled. Determines whether the element's image will be rendered as disabled when the element is not enabled. By default this is true but this should be overriden in classes that either do not want images to honor the enabled property. e.g. When a class overrides the and remaps the colors in the image to specific colors based on the enabled state. Accessible object that represents a text element. Initializes a new Associated UIElement Default name for the accessible object Default description for the accessible object Initializes a new Associated UIElement Default name for the accessible object Initializes a new Associated UIElement Returns the role of the accessible object. Initializes a new dependent textelement for use by an . Parent ImageAndTextUIElement Called during draw so that the Image rect can be adjusted. This may be needed, for example, with the Image on a button that is pressed. In this case the Image may be offset 1 pixel right and down. Gets the image attributes used for drawing the image The used to provide rendering information. This method can be overridden in dervied classes to supply the image attributes. Initializes the appearance for the element. Appearance struct to update Appearance properties to initialize Returns the intersection of the element's rect with the invalid rect for the current draw operation. Invalid rect The intersection of the element's rect with the invalid rect. Invoked when the image for the Image element is to be rendered The used to provide rendering information. The image Determines whether the image is clipped to the element's rect. A text uielement for use by an An abstract base class for text uielements Constructor Called when the mouse down message is received over the element. Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing When the mouse moves onto and off of the button when the mouse is captured the default button behavior is to toggle the button's up/down appearance Clear internal flags and invalidate the button Returning true will ignore the next click event clear the internal capture flags Called when mouse capture has been aborted, for example, when the 'escape' key is pressed during a drag operation. Triggers the ElementClick event Called when the element is clicked Called during draw so that the text rect can be adjusted. This may be needed, for example, with the text on a button that is pressed. In this case the text may be offset 1 pixel right and down. No background is drawn for a text element unless DrawsBackColor returns true The used to provide rendering information. No background is drawn for a text element unless DrawsImageBackground returns true The used to provide rendering information. Render the text in the foreground The used to provide rendering information. Returns an object of requested type that relates to the element or null. The requested type or null to pick up default context object. If true will walk up the parent chain looking for the context. The of the specified type, or null if none was found. The number of spaces between the beginning of the text and the first tab stop. When set to a value below 0, tab stops are not set when drawing the text. An array of floats indicating the number of spaces between tab stops. Gets/sets whether the element should maintain the count of characters when rendering the text. Specifies whether to track the text area (). Default is true. Returns the number of characters rendered during the last draw operation.

Note: This value is only maintained if the is set to true.

 Returns the cached size of the string calculated in the last DrawForeground invocation. Controls the mouse buttons that will cause the control to take focus defaults to all. Determines if the text should be rotated 180 degrees. Text Angle: Rotated = false and Vertical = false0 degrees Rotated = true and Vertical = false180 degrees Rotated = false and Vertical = true90 degrees clockwise Rotated = true and Vertical = true90 degrees counter-clockwise We cache a rectangle during DrawForeground that keeps track of the text area. If on the last DrawForeground there was no text an empty rect will be returned by this method. Fired when the button is clicked Determines if the backcolor is drawn (read-only) The default implementation returns false. Determines if the backgroud image is drawn (read-only) The default implementation returns false. Abstract property to get/set the text Abstract property to get/set the multiline property Returns true if the text is to be wrapped. Abstract property to get/set the text padding Abstract property to get/set the vertical property The rect inside the borders and padding (read-only) Abstract property to determine whether mnemonics are displayed in the text. Specifies whether to display the tooltip if the text element is not able to render the tooltip completely. Returns true if the text is fully displayed in the text element. Note that this method relies on TrackCharactersRendered and TrackTextArea properties being true, which they are by default.

Returns true if the text is fully displayed in the text element. Note that this method relies on TrackCharactersRendered and TrackTextArea properties being true, which they are by default.

Overridden. Returns or sets an object that provides tooltip information for the element. Returns whether the element should use the GdiDrawStringFlags.NoPadding flag when drawing GDI text. Gets or sets the text orientation to use when drawing the text. If this is not null, and will be ignored. A instance describing the rotation and flow direction of the text, or null to use the default rotation and flow direction. Interface returned by a UIElement that should display a tooltip. Invoked when the tooltip information for an element is required. Current mouse position Element for which the tooltip will be displayed Previous element that the tooltip was displayed for or null. Default ToolTipInfo structure initialized based on the mouse position. The structure may be modified and returned from the method. The for the requested element. Accessible object that represents a text element. Initializes a new Associated UIElement Default name for the accessible object Default description for the accessible object Initializes a new Associated UIElement Default name for the accessible object Initializes a new Associated UIElement Returns the role of the accessible object. Returns the state of the accessible object. Returns the name of the accessible object. Initializes a new dependent textelement for use by an . Parent ImageAndTextUIElement Adjusts the rect used to render the text. By reference rectangle to adjust. Returns the intersection of the element's rect with the invalid rect for the current draw operation. Invalid rect The intersection of the element's rect with the invalid rect. Invoked when the text for the element should be rendered. The used to provide rendering information. Indicates how mnemonics in the text are rendered. Indicates if multiple lines of text are displayed. Returns the padding around the text. Returns the text displayed by the element. Indicates if the text should be rendered vertically. Indicates if text should be wrapped to multiple lines. Delegate for measure string callbacks. This can be used when you need to use the autosize calculations but need to iterate through more than one string to find the largest, etc. Invoked when the image attributes for the child ImageUIElement are requested. This method can be overridden in dervied classes to supply the image attributes. Interface for providing information to an ImageAndTextUIElement. This is the interface used to supply borderstyle and appearance settings for drawing a dependent UIElement Returns the border style for the element The whose border style should be retrieved. The of the specified element. Returns the border sides flags for the element The whose border sides should be retrieved. The of the specified element. Returns the cursor to use for the element The whose cursor should be retrieved. A for the specified element. Initializes the element's appearance The to initialize. The whose appearances should be initialized. The indicating which appearances should be resolved. Maximum size for a scaled image. ImageAndTextUIElement A object representing the maximum size for a scaled image. Determines how the text is placed in relation to the image. ImageAndTextUIElement A enumeration indicating how the text should be placed relative to the image. Indicates if the image should be scaled. ImageAndTextUIElement A enumeration indicating if the image should be scaled. Determines whether the image should be shadowed. ImageAndTextUIElement True if the image should be shadowed. Determines whether space should be reserved for a shadow of the image. ImageAndTextUIElement True if the image may be shadowed. Gets the image to be displayed. May be null if there is no image to display. ImageAndTextUIElement The to be displayed. Gets the text to display The associated . The text to display. Indicates if multiple lines of text are to be rendered. The associated . True if multiple lines of text are to be rendered. Returns the padding around the text. The associated . A object describing the padding around the text. Returns the padding around the image. The associated . A object describing the padding around the image. Returns the padding around the entire element. The associated . A object representing the padding aroudn the entire element. Adjusts the text's rect for special cases (e.g. a button down shift) The that should be adjusted. The that relates to the provided display rectangle. Adjusts the image's rect for special cases (e.g. a button down shift) The that should be adjusted. The that relates to the provided display rectangle. Returns true if the text is to be displayed vertically The associated . True if the text is to be displayed vertically. Determines how mnemonics in the text are rendered. The associated . A describing how mnemonics are rendered. Returns true if the text is to be wrapped The associated . True if the text is to be wrapped. Determines whether the text placement is used to position the text and image elements. The associated . False to use the image and text horizontal and vertical alignment. Indicates whether the text should be rotated 180 degrees. Note, this rotation is in addition to that caused by setting Vertical to true. The associated . True if the text should be rotated 180 degrees. Initializes a new ImageAndTextButtonUIElement. Parent element Initializes a new ImageAndTextButtonUIElement. Parent element Type of button Initializes the appearance for the button. Struct to update with the appearance info. Appearance properties to initialize Called when the state of the button changes. Invoked when the checked state of the button changes other than when it is initialized. Makes sure that the child elements for this element are in the ChildElements array and that they are positioned properly. This needs to be overridden if the element has any child elements. Invoked when the button has been clicked. Determines if space should be reserved for an image shadow. ImageAndTextUIElement True if the image element may need to display a shadowed version of the image underneath the actual image. Determines if the button image has a shadow rendered underneath. ImageAndTextUIElement True if the image should display a shadowed version of the image underneath the actual image. Maximum size for a scaled image. ImageAndTextUIElement Determines how the text is placed in relation to the image. ImageAndTextUIElement Indicates if the image should be scaled. ImageAndTextUIElement Gets the image to be displayed. May be null if there is no image to display. ImageAndTextUIElement Gets the text to display Indicates if multiple lines of text are to be rendered. Returns the padding around the text. Returns the padding around the image. Adjusts the text's rect for special cases (e.g. a button down shift) Adjusts the image's rect for special cases (e.g. a button down shift) Returns true if the text is to be displayed vertically Determines how mnemonics in the text are rendered. Returns true if the text is to be wrapped Returns the amount of padding around the element. Indicates whether the text placement property should be used to determine the placement for the text element. True to use the text placement. Otherwise, the alignment properties are used. Returns true if the text should be rotated 180 degrees Gets/sets whether the text is rotated 180 degrees. Gets/sets whether the appearance alignments or the text placement takes precedence when positioning the text and image elements. Determines the padding around the image. Gets/sets whether the space should be reserved for an image shadow. Gets/sets whether the image in the button displays a shadowed version under the actual image. Determines the placement of the text in relation to the image. Determines the scaled size of an image. Image displayed in the button. Determines the padding around the image. Determines if the image is scaled. Text displayed in the button. Padding around the text. Determines how mnemonics in the text are rendered. Determines if the text is displayed in multiple lines. Determines if the text is rendered vertically. Determines if the text can be wrapped to multiple lines. Returns the IUIElementImageAndTextProvider provider Returns a boolean indicating whether shadowing of the image is supported by the button element. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the CheckEditorImageAndTextButtonUIElement class. parent UIElement The the element uses. Called when the mouse down message is received over the element. Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Fired when the checkstate of the Check element changes Invoked when the button has been clicked. Initialize the appearance structure for this element The appearance structure to initialize The properties that are needed Makes sure that the child elements for this element are in the ChildElements array and that they are positioned properly. This needs to be overridden if the element has any child elements. The button style of a state button style checkbox will be retreived from the editor owner. Returns whether the button may be pressed. Enumeration of Property identifiers for the Check Editor. Appearance of the editor CheckedAppearance of the Editor HotTrackingAppearance of the Editor HotTrackingAppearance of the Editor ColorBoxUIElement, provides color 'box' area in ColorPicker editor. Color of element Constructor, initializes a new instance of the ColorBoxUIElement class. Parent UIElement Initialize the appearance structure for this element The appearance structure to initialize. The properties that are needed Provide a solid border at all times. ColorListBox, emulates the visual studio color listbox designer. CTor Disposal releasing unmanaged resources. Overriden so that we can draw our own listItems A that contains the event data. The colors to be Displayed. We shadow the items collection because we never want this persisted by the designer Get/Set the selected color of the control Returns or sets the height for each item in the list. Display Style of the control Uses the Web Color collection Uses the System Color collection ColorPickerEditor facilitates the choosing of colors. A generic Text Editor with a non-list dropdown portion. Allows the user to drop down any Control based class. EditorWithText class implementation Abstract base class for an embeddable editor class that displays a collection of buttons to the left and right of its edit area.

The EmbeddableEditorButtonBase is the base class for an editor that displays a custom collection of buttons to the left and right of an edit area. The buttons are exposed via the and properties.

 Constructor, initializes a new instance of the EmbeddableEditorButtonBase class. Initializes a new instance of the EmbeddableEditorButtonBase class. An instance of the default EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class from which to obtain owner-specific information Indicates if the property should be serialized Returns true if the collection has been created and has at least one item. Used to reset the collection Indicates if the property should be serialized Returns true if the collection has been created and has at least one item. Used to reset the collection Used to calculate the extent required for the buttons. Editor owner Owner context The extent required to display the buttons Initializes the state of this object from a source object of the same type Editor whose properties should be copied Called when the editor is disposed Invoked when a property on a subobject has changed. Provides information about the change Used to invoke the event BeforeCheckStateChangedEventArgs Used to invoke the event EditorButtonEventArgs Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used by an editor owner to create an accessible object for a specific object managed by an editor. Parent accessible object for the accessible object to create Editor owner Owner context that can be supplied to the editor owner to obtain information about the object represented by the accessible instance. An accessible object that represents the specified owner context for the editor. Returns of a collection of instances displayed on the left side of the editor. Indicates if there are any buttons in the collection. Returns of a collection of instances displayed on the right side of the editor. Indicates if there are any buttons in the collection. Invoked when an editor button is clicked Invoked when an spin editor button is clicked Invoked when a dropdown editor button has closed. Invoked before a dropdown editor button has been displayed. Invoked when the checkstate of an editor button should be initialized. Invoked before the has changed. Invoked after the has changed. Invoked when an editor button is added to the collection Accessible object representing an progress bar editor instance. Initializes a new Parent accessible object Associated editor Associated owner Owner context that identifies the object which the accessible instance represents Returns the accessible object for the editor button at the specified index. 0 based index with 0 being the left most button The accessible object associated with the specified index. Returns the accessible object for the editor button at the specified index. 0 based index with 0 being the left most button The accessible object associated with the specified index. Returns the UIElement associated with a particular child accessible object. Accessible object representing the child whose uielement should be returned. The uielement used to display the child or null if the element is not available. Returns the number of editor button displayed on the left side of the editor. Returns the number of editor button displayed on the right side of the editor. Summary description for IEmbeddableTextBoxListener. Called by the EmbeddableTextBox when its OnKeyDown method is called The EmbeddableTextBox class calls this method from its OnKeyDown method. It gives the callee an opportunity to handle special keystrokes; for example, F4, arrow keys, Enter, Escape. The value returned by the callee is passed to the 'Handled' property of the KeyEventArgs. Key event arguments Called by the EmbeddableTextBox when its OnKeyPress method is called The EmbeddableTextBox class calls this method from its OnKeyPress method. Key event arguments Called by the EmbeddableTextBox when its OnKeyUp method is called The EmbeddableTextBox class calls this method from its OnKeyUp method. Key event arguments Called by the EmbeddableTextBox when its text changes Called by the EmbeddableTextBox when its OnLeave method is called Called by the EmbeddableTextBox when its OnMouseWheel method is called The mouse event args. Invoked by the when its OnClick method is invoked. Invoked by the when its OnDoubleClick method is invoked. Invoked by the when its OnMouseMove method is invoked. The mouse event args. Invoked by the when its OnMouseHover method is invoked. Invoked by the when its OnMouseDown method is invoked. The mouse event args. Invoked by the when its OnMouseUp method is invoked. The mouse event args. editorValue Constructor - creates a new instance of the EditorWithText class The EditorWithText class provides basic TextBox-like editing functionality Constructor - creates a new instance of the EditorWithText class The default owner associated with this editor The EditorWithText class provides basic TextBox-like editing functionality Sets input focus to the editor. Returns true if the editor successfully took focus. Internal. New editor value. Called by the EmbeddableTextBox when a keystroke is received Since each editor might have different actions to perform for a given keystroke, this should be overridden by derived classes Key event arguments A boolean indicating whether the keystroke was handled Listens to the embeddableTextBox keyUp messages The key event args. Called by the EmbeddableTextBox when its text has changed Called by the EmbeddableTextBox when its OnLeave method is called Called by the EmbeddableTextBox when its OnKeyPress method is called 12.20.02 DA Called by the EmbeddableTextBox when the mouse wheel is moved Determines if the type can be edited. The data type to test Returns true if the type can be edited. Determines if the type can be rendered. The data type to test Returns true if the type can be edited. Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Called from inside the method of the parent element to create and position the embedded element or elements. The element that will contain the embedded element. An object that derives from the class. Context information that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. The element returned the prior time the parent element's method was called. An instance of a class derived from EmbeddableUIElementBase.

The owner and ownerContext values are saved by the added element to get value and state information later.

 Called before edit mode has been entered. Set to true to cancel the operation. The base implementation raises the BeforeEnterEditMode event. Called after edit mode has been entered. The base implementation raises the AfterEnterEditMode event. Called before edit mode has been exited Set to true to cancel the operation. If true must exit even if exit event is cancelled. If true any changes made while in edit mode will be applied. The base implementation raises the BeforeExitEditMode if fireEvent is true. Used to determine the size preferred/required by the editor. Structure that provides information regarding the size calculation including the owner for which the size calculation is occuring, whether to exclude edit elements, whether to include borders, etc. The size needed to render the value by the editor based upon the specified options. Gets the current spell check target A TextBox if the editor is in edit mode, otherwise null. Returns whether the key is used by the editor. The key to test True only if the editor is in edit mode and the key is used by the editor. Initializes the state of this object from a source object of the same type The EmbeddableEditorBase-derived object to be initialized Returns a copy of this instance A copy of this instance of the EditorWithText class Returns whether the element will display the EmbeddableTextBox when it enters edit mode. Default implementation returns true. Editors that do not always display the EmbeddableTextBox must override this property and return a value that is appropriate (e.g., if the owner returns true from MustSelectFromList, the EditorWithComboUIElement returns false.) The element for which the EmbeddableTextBox will be displayed when it enters edit mode. A boolean indeicating whether the EmbeddableTextBox is displayed for the specified element when it enters edit mode. Converts data value to text making use of any format provider and format strings that owner may provide. If unsuccessful, returns null. The value to be converted An object that derives from the class. An object that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method. A string representation of the provided value. The EditorWithCombo class overrides this method because it supports ValueLists; if a DataValue corresponds to a ValueListItem, that item's DisplayText is returned. Returns an IValueList from the specified embeddable element, or null if none is provided. The EmbeddableUIElementBase-derived element from which to obatin the owner info. An IValueList interface implementor, or null if the owner does not provide one. Called to place the editor in edit mode. The element that was returned from . Determines whether the editor will take the input focus upon entering edit mode. Returns true if successful. Returns whether this editor displays an ink button. The IInkProvider implementor that provides the inking capabilities. An object that derives from the class. Context information that is used by the specified owner. A boolean indicating whether the editor displays an ink button. Called when the EditorWithText class is disposed Returns the text that the specified element should display The EmbeddableUIElementBase-derived element If true, the owner-provided PasswordChar will not be applied to the returned string. The string that should be displayed by the element Sets the position of, initializes, and displays the EmbeddableTextBox Sets the position of the EmbeddableTextBox. Only applicable when in edit mode. Called by the EmbeddableTextBox when it is being disposed Provides editor-specific display value. Display string. Provides editor-specific editor value. Editor value. Checks validity of converted values. Type of conversion. Value to check. Owner. Owner context. Additional information in the case of failure. True if the destination value is valid. Automatic data conversions specific to this editor. Type of conversion. Value to convert. Type of converted value True if conversion was valid. Owner. OwnerContext. Converted value. Applies the owner-provided PasswordChar to the specified string, if applicable The EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase which will be used to get the password character. The owner context which will be used to get the password character. A reference to the string to be modified A boolean indicating whether the text was modified Applies the owner-provided CharacterCasing to the specified string, if applicable The EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase which will be used to get the password character. The owner context which will be used to get the password character. A reference to the string to be modified A boolean indicating whether the text was modified Creates a copy of the embeddable editor with the specified default owner. An instance of the default EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class from which to obtain owner-specific information A copy of the editor Determines the border style to be displayed by the specified embeddable element based on the display style, active state and other information available from the editor and owner. Embeddable element to evaluate The borderstyle that should be displayed by the element. Used by an editor owner to create an accessible object for a specific object managed by an editor. Parent accessible object for the accessible object to create Editor owner Owner context that can be supplied to the editor owner to obtain information about the object represented by the accessible instance. An accessible object that represents the specified owner context for the editor. Returns a boolean indicating whether the should be displayed within the editor. An object that derives from the class. An object that provides additional information to about the element. True if the EditorWithTextDisplayTextUIElement should be shown. Returns a boolean indicating if the editor is acting as a dropdown list. An object that derives from the class. An object that provides additional information to about the element. True if the editor is acting as a dropdown list. Returns a boolean indicating whether the text element should automatically dropdown the list when clicking into the edit area of a DropDownList style editor. An object that derives from the class. An object that provides additional information to about the element. True if the element should automatically drop down the list when clicking into the edit area. Invoked from the if the editor must handle the automatic conversion from the editor value to the display text. Editor value to be used to perform the update of the textbox A boolean indicating whether the change was processed Used to initialize the text of the associated textbox. Text that should be displayed by the textbox Boolean indicating whether the ValueChanged event should be prevented while the change is being made. Gets/Sets the editor value. Returns whether the editor can receive input focus while in edit mode Returns whether the editor currently has input focus Returns true Returns whether the editor supports selecting text. Returns true always since the EditorWithText supports text selection. Gets/sets a string that represents the currently selected text in the text box. Gets/sets the number of characters selected in the text box. Gets/sets The starting position of text selected in the text box. Gets the length of the text in the editor. Gets/sets the value being edited. Returns the current text being edited without doing any validation. This will return the text currently typed in. If the editor does not have an textbox-like control, it will return the current edit value in form of text. Accessing this property when the editor is not in edit mode will throw an exception. Indicates whether the editor supports AutoSizeEdit Returns the EmbeddableTextBox used by this class Returns the contained by the or null Gets or sets a value indicating whether pressing ENTER in a mutiline editor creates a new line of text in the editor. Gets or sets a value indicating whether pressing the TAB key in a multiline editor types a TAB character in the editor. Gets/sets whether vertical scrollbars are displayed for the editor Gets/sets the BorderStyle for the EmbeddableTextBox displayed by the editor when in edit mode. The default value is None, because typically the EmbeddableTextUIElement handles the border drawing. Determines when to show the Ink Button on the editor This property determines when to show the Ink Button on the editor Gets/sets whether the value returned from the owner's method is used to determine whether the editor's current value is valid. Returns whether the editor applies the format string returned from the owner's method when it is in edit mode.

Typically, format strings are not applied to the value when the editor is in edit mode. Returning true from this property will cause the editor to apply the format string when it is in edit mode.

 Returns whether text should be selected when the editor receives the input focus Accessible object representing an progress bar editor instance. Initializes a new Parent accessible object Associated text editor Associated owner Owner context that identifies the object which the accessible instance represents Retrieves the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. The zero-based index of the accessible child. An AccessibleObject that represents the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Returns the role of the accessible object. Returns the state of the accessible object. Constructor - creates a new instance of the EditorWithTextAndDropDownBase class This is for a generic Text Editor with a non-list dropdown portion. Constructor - creates a new instance of the EditorWithTextAndDropDownBase class The default owner associated with this editor This is for a generic Text Editor with a non-list dropdown portion. Sets input focus to the editor. Returns true if the editor successfully took focus. Called by the EmbeddableTextBox when its text has changed Called by the EmbeddableTextBox class when its OnLeave method is called Called by the EmbeddableTextBox when a keystroke is received Since each editor might have different actions to perform for a given keystroke, this should be overridden by derived classes Key event arguments A boolean indicating whether the keystroke was handled Listens to the embeddableTextBox keyUp messages Called by the EmbeddableTextBox when the mouse wheel is moved Occurs when the owner gets a key down while in edit mode. Occurs when the owner gets a key up while in edit mode. Called after edit mode has been entered. The base implementation raises the AfterEnterEditMode event. Used to determine the size preferred/required by the editor. Structure that provides information regarding the size calculation including the owner for which the size calculation is occuring, whether to exclude edit elements, whether to include borders, etc. The size needed to render the value by the editor based upon the specified options. Gets the type of the embeddable element. A describing the embeddable element. Called from inside the method of the parent element to create and position the embedded element or elements. The element that will contain the embedded element. An object that derives from the class. Context information that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. The element returned the prior time the parent element's method was called. An instance of a class derived from EmbeddableUIElementBase.

The owner and ownerContext values are saved by the added element to get value and state information later.

 Creates the embeddable element The parent element. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditorOwner interface. Context information used by the owner to identify the value. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. A new instance based on the specified parameters. Initialize the value of the dropped control Drops down the dropdown. True if successful. Closes the dropdown. Called before the dropdown has been dropped down. Set to true to cancel the operation. Called after the dropdown has been dropped down. The base implementation raises the AfterDropDown event. Called after the dropdown has been closed up. Handles the actual implementation of the IEmbeddableTextBoxListener.OnKeyDown method Key event arguments A boolean indicating whether the keystroke was handled Initializes the state of this object from a source object of the same type Object whose properties should be copied Used by an editor owner to create an accessible object for a specific object managed by an editor. Parent accessible object for the accessible object to create Editor owner Owner context that can be supplied to the editor owner to obtain information about the object represented by the accessible instance. An accessible object that represents the specified owner context for the editor. Checks validity of converted values. Type of conversion. Value to check. Owner. Owner context. Additional information in the case of failure. True if the destination value is valid. Gets the control that will be dropped down when the user presses the dropdown arrow. Gets current value Gets whether or not the editor should commit the value returned by the control. Returns whether the editor can receive input focus while in edit mode Returns whether the editor currently has input focus Returns whether the value being edited is valid (passes basic editing) Returns the current text being edited without doing any validation. This will return the text currently typed in. If the editor does not have an textbox-like control, it will return the current edit value in form of text. Accessing this property when the editor is not in edit mode will throw an exception. Returns whether text should be selected when the editor receives the input focus Indicates whether the editor supports AutoSizeEdit Returns true to indicate that the editor supports a dropdown Returns whether the editor supports selecting text. Returns the contained by the or null Gets/sets whether the edit control should receive the input focus when the list portion is closed Gets/sets the alignment for the dropdown button Returns or sets whether the dropdown button should be displayed when edit elements are displayed by the element. Accessible object representing an progress bar editor instance. Initializes a new Parent accessible object Associated editor Associated owner Owner context that identifies the object which the accessible instance represents Retrieves the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. The zero-based index of the accessible child. An AccessibleObject that represents the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Returns the UIElement associated with a particular child accessible object. Accessible object representing the child whose uielement should be returned. The uielement used to display the child or null if the element is not available. Returns the role of the accessible object. Instantiates a new instance of the ColorPickerEditor class. An instance of the default EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class from which to obtain owner-specific information Instantiates a new instance of the ColorPickerEditor class. Called when the object is disposed Returns the text that the specified element should display The EmbeddableUIElementBase-derived element If true, the owner-provided PasswordChar will not be applied to the returned string. The string that should be displayed by the element Creates the embeddable element The parent element. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditorOwner interface. Context information used by the owner to identify the value. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. A new instance based on the specified parameters. Initializes the value of the dropped control Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Returns the string representation of the specified value The object to convert to a string. Returns whether the key is used by the editor. The key information used to determine whether the key is used by the editor. True only if the editor is in edit mode and the key is used by the editor. Internal. New editor value. Converts Color to display text using DataFilter if needed. Color to convert. Owner. Owner context. Display text. Renders any type convertable to color The data type to test true if type is color, false otherwise Edits any type convertable to color The data type to test true if type is color, false otherwise Default implementation, does not do anything. The key event args. Called by the EmbeddableTextBox when its OnKeyPress method is called Key event arguments Determines whether the provided string can be converted to a color. The string to try to parse. True if the string can be converted into a . Returns a Color value from the specified text. String to convert Default value in case of failure Determines whether clearing the edit portion results in the value reverting to Color.Empty. If false, the editor's value reverts to the value of the DefaultColor property. A based on the specified text, or the original color if the string cannot be parsed.

In the case where an empty string is specified in the 'text' parameter, Color.Empty is returned.

 Returns a Color value from the specified text. String to convert Default value in case of failure A based on the specified text, or the original color if the string cannot be parsed.

In the case where an empty string is specified in the 'text' parameter, Color.Empty is returned.

 Checks to see if string is Hexidecimal string to test True if hex, False otherwise. Called to determine if default color should be serialized True if property should be serialized, False otherwise. Called to determine if Color should be serialized True if property should be serialized, False otherwise. Sets the property to it's default value. Sets the property to it's default value. Creates a copy of the embeddable editor with the specified default owner. An instance of the default EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class from which to obtain owner-specific information A copy of the editor Initializes the state of this object from a source object of the same type Object whose properties should be copied Used to determine the size preferred/required by the editor. Structure that provides information regarding the size calculation including the owner for which the size calculation is occuring, whether to exclude edit elements, whether to include borders, etc. The size needed to render the value by the editor based upon the specified options. Returns the size required to render the editor's value for the specified owner and ownerContext. An object that derives from the class. An object that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method.\ Determines whether the value returned from the method is honored. The constraining width The size required to render the editor's value for the specified owner and ownerContext. Fired after the editor enters edit mode. Parses the specified stringVal and attempts to get a Color out of it. Returns true if the specified stringVal was successfully parsed into a Color; false otherwise. The string that to be parsed. On return, will contain the resulting Color from the parsed string, if the operation was successful. If not successful, contains Color.Empty. A boolean indicating whether a valid Color was successfully parsed out of the string. Provides editor-specific display value. Display string. Provides editor-specific editor value. Editor value. Checks validity of converted values. Type of conversion. Value to check. Owner. Owner context. Additional information in the case of failure. True if the destination value is valid. Automatic data conversions specific to this editor. Type of conversion. Value to convert. Type of converted value True if conversion was valid. Owner. OwnerContext. Converted value. Returns an instance of the tabbed color picker control used when the control is dropped down Used to determine if the base should commit the value in the dropped control Returns an array of custom Colors Default color for the control. The editors value as a Color Gets/sets whether clearing the edit portion results in a value of Color.Empty.

When set to true (default), and the edit portion is cleared, the new value is assumed to be Color.Empty.

When set to false and the edit portion is cleared, the value of the property is applied instead.

Note: In the case where the property is set to Color.Empty, clearing the edit portion will result in a value of Color.Empty, regardless of the value of the AllowEmpty property.

 Gets/Sets the value of the editor Gets the control to drop when dropdown arrow or F4 is pressed Gets the value of the control to drop Default type used by the editor in the case of data filter. Null means that editor supports multiple data types and expects type to be set or provided by the owner. Summary description for ColorPickerPropertyIds. Appearance Borderstyle Provides designer support for properties of type ICondition. Creates a new instance of the class. The ICondition implementation that the dialog will initially contain, or null if no particular implementation is available. Initializes the user interface to begin a new dialog session.. The ICondition implementation that the dialog will initially contain, or null if no particular implementation is available. Handles the Click event for the command buttons. Handles the SelectedIndexChanged event for the listbox. Handles the PropertyGrid's PropertyValueChanged event. Updates the class description label to display the description for the currently selected ICondition implementor. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Returns the concrete implementation of the ICondition interface that was selected by the end developer or null if it was cleared. For Interal Use Only Returns a previously-registered INamedComponent The container of the component. The name of the component. Registers an INamedComponent to the list for later retrieval. The component UnRegisters an INamedComponent, removing it from the list. The component Interface for a component with a Name The name of the component. The Form or UserControl that contains the component. Property Ids for the component. The property. The property. The property. The property. The property. The property. The property. Component which provides an embeddable ControlContainerEditor.

The ControlContainerEditor is used to embed a control within a control that supports embeddable editors, such as the WinGrid or WinTree.

 Implemented by a control that exposes an embeddable editor The object that implements the IEmbeddableEditor interface (read-only) Constructor for the UltraControlContainerEditor component. Constructor for the UltraControlContainerEditor component. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if a ApplyOwnerAppearanceToEditingControl object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the ApplyOwnerAppearanceToEditingControl property. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if a EditingControl object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the EditingControl property. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if a EditingControlPropertyName object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the EditingControlPropertyName property. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if a ApplyOwnerAppearanceToRenderingControl object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the ApplyOwnerAppearanceToRenderingControl property. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if a RenderingControl object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the RenderingControl property. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if a RenderingControlPropertyName object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the RenderingControlPropertyName property. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if a EnterEditModeMouseBehavior object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the EnterEditModeMouseBehavior property. Returns true if the ContainingControl property should be serialized Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Gets or sets whether or not the owner's appearance properties that apply to Control (such as BackColor, ForeColor, and ImageBackground) are applied to the EditingControl before it is displayed. Gets or set the control which will be used for editing when the editor goes into edit mode. The EditingControl is the control that will be displayed when the editor enters edit mode. Before the EditingControl is displayed, the editor will set it's value, location, size, and appearance (see ). Any changes to the value of the value of the EditingControl will be written to the owning object when the editor exits edit mode (or discared if the owner cancels the edit). If EditingControl is null, then the editor will not enter edit mode and thus will not allow the user to edit. It will act only as a renderer using the . Gets or sets the name of the property on the which will be used to determine the value of the owning object. In order for the editor to function, it must deal with a single property of the as specified by this property. If no EditingControlPropertyName is specified, the editor will look for a property named Value on the control. Failing that, the Text property will be used. If neither a Value nor a Text property are found, the editor will not be able to function properly. The ControlContainerEditor needs to know when the specified property on the control is changed. To do this, it will attempt to hook an event on the specified control with a name that matches the property (i.e. ValueChanged or TextChanged). If no such event exists or is not fired when the property changes, the editor will be unable to write changes to the owner. In the rare case where this happens, it is recommend that the developer derive a class from ControlContainerEditor and override the EditorValue property and set this property any time the editor value changes. Gets or sets whether or not the owner's appearance properties that apply to Control (such as BackColor, ForeColor, and ImageBackground) are applied to the RenderingControl before it is drawn. Gets or set the control which will be used for rendering the editor when not in edit mode. When the editor is not in edit mode, the editor will set the value, size, and appearance (see ) of the control and render it to a bitmap for display. If RenderingControl is null, the editor will display the editor value as text. Gets or sets the name of the property on the which will be used to determine the value of the owning object. In order for the renderer to function, it must deal with a single property of the as specified by this property. If no RenderingControlPropertyName is specified, the editor will look for a property named Value on the control. Failing that, the Text property will be used. If neither a Value nor a Text property are found, the editor will not be able to function properly. Determines what happens when the editor enters edit mode via the mouse. By default, clicking on an editor will place it into edit mode, and the click message is consumed in this process. The EnterEditModeMouseBehavior allows you to change this behavior so that the mouse message is forwarded to the such that the click puts the editor into edit mode and also causes a Click event on the control. Returns the Form or UserControl that this component is servicing. The component's site (set at design time only). Display the about dialog Returns the cached license for the control The name of the component The designer class for the component.

For Internal use only.

 Initializes the Designer The component being designed. Clean up any resources being used. true to release both managed and unmanaged resources; false to release only unmanaged resources. Gets the for this designer's control/component. Provides DesignerActionItems for the SmartTag associated with the UltraCalcManager. Provides shared functionality used by a DesignerActionList-derived class. Constructor The component/control for which the SmartTag is being created. Abstract method which derived classes must override to provide the DesignerActionItems to be displayed in the SmartTag Panel. The collection to fill with DesignerActionItem objects. Returns a sorted list of objects which define the layout of the smart tag. Derived classes should not override this method. Instead, use the CreateActionItems method. Returns the category that the specified property is in, or null if it is not in a category. Pass an underscore delimited list of property names if the property is on a sub-object. The property or underscore-delimited list of property names of a sub-object. The name of the category to which the member belongs. Returns the description of the specified property, or null if it is not described. Pass an underscore delimited list of property names if the property is on a sub-object. The name of the property or underscore-delimited list of property names of a sub-object. The description of the specified member. Returns a PropertyDescriptor for the specified property. Pass an underscore-delimited list of property names if the property is on a sub-object. The name of the property or an underscore-delimited list of property named of sub-object. A for the specified property. Gets the value of a property whose data type is a reference type. Pass an underscore-delimited list of property names if the property is on a sub-object. A reference type data type. The name of the property to get the value of. Gets the value of a property whose data type is a value type. Pass an underscore-delimited list of property names if the property is on a sub-object. A value type data type. The name of the property to get the value of. Invokes the method associated with the designer verb with the specified text. The string passed in should be the return value of a call to SR.GetString(). Returns true if the verb was found and invoked, else false. The localized display text associated with the verb. Invokes the method associated with the designer verb with the specified text. The string passed in should be the return value of a call to SR.GetString(). Returns true if the verb was found and invoked, else false. The localized display text associated with the verb. An optional argument for use by the command being invoked. Returns true if a property with the specified name exists on the control/component. Pass an underscore-delimited list of property names if the property is on a sub-object. The name of the property to check for. Forces the SmartTag Panel to refresh the values of its child controls and resize/reposition itself. Use this method if one action taken in the SmartTag Panel requires that another property value be updated immediately in the Panel. Helper method that sets the value of the specified property on the control or the appropriate sub-object. Pass an underscore-delimited list of property names if the property is on a sub-object. The name of the property to set. The value to set the property to. Helper method that sets the value of the specified property on the control or the appropriate sub-object. Pass an underscore-delimited list of property names if the property is on a sub-object. The name of the property to set. The value to set the property to. Pass true if the SmartTag Panel should be refreshed after the value is set. Displays the UITypeEditor associated with the specified property. Pass an underscore-delimited list of property names if the property is on a sub-object. The name of the property to show the UITypeEditor for. Adds a property item to the specified list. The list to populate. The case-sensitive name associated with this panel item. The panel text for this item. The key shared by and . Adds a property item to the specified list. The list to populate. The case-sensitive name associated with this panel item. The panel text for this item. The key used by . The key used by . Adds a property item to the specified list. The list to populate. The case-sensitive name associated with this panel item. The panel text for this item. The key used by . The key or text of the description for this item Specifies whether the value passed into description is a key or the text Adds a method item to the specified list. The list to populate. The DesignerActionList that contains the method this item is associated with. The case-sensitive name of the method in the class derived from DesignerActionList to invoke through the panel item. The panel text for this item. The case-sensitive category used to group similar items on the panel. Supplemental text for this item, used in ToolTips or the status bar Returns the designer associated with the product, or null if it is not available. Returns a reference to the control/component which the SmartTag is being created for. Used by SmartTag Panel. Used by SmartTag Panel. Used by SmartTag Panel. Used by SmartTag Panel. Constructor The UltraCalcManager component. Overrides CreateActionItems. The list to populate. Used by SmartTag Panel. Used by SmartTag Panel. Used by SmartTag Panel. Used by SmartTag Panel. Used by SmartTag Panel. Used by SmartTag Panel. An abstract class representing the main element of a control. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the class. A derived class whose client area displays this ControlUIElementBase element. A class that implements the interface Constructor A derived class whose client area displays this ControlUIElementBase element. A class that implements the interface If true listen to control's mouse and key events Constructor A derived class whose client area displays this ControlUIElementBase element. A class that implements the interface A flagged Enum telling the ControlUIElement which events to hook. Draws the control. object to render into. Invalid that will be drawn. True creates an offscreen buffer object. All rendering is done to that and the result is copied to the screen. False all drawing is done directly to the screen. Enumeration indicating the mode of alphablending to use when rendering the control Draws the control after sizing the element to the specified size. object to render into. Invalid that will be drawn. True creates an offscreen buffer object. All rendering is done to that and the result is copied to the screen. False all drawing is done directly to the screen. Enumeration indicating the mode of alphablending to use when rendering the control The width and height that should be used to size the element. Pass Size.Empty to use the control size. Returns an object of requested type that relates to the element or null. The requested or null to pick up default context object. If true will walk up the parent chain looking for the context. An object of the requested type that relates to the element or null. Initialize the appearance structure for this element. The default implementation sets the backcolor to the system color for controls. The appearance structure to initialize. The properties that are needed Dirties a flag that some descendant element have changed. Called when the mouse capture is aborted (e.g. if the user presses escape Called when the object is disposed Called when the control's font changes. The default implemention calls DirtyChildElements and invalidates this element. Called when a mouse down message is received. Returning true will cause normal mouse down processing to be skipped The providing mouse information. True if the mouse processing has been handled. Captures the mouse for the passed in element. The element to capture the mouse for.

During mouse capture all mouse messages will be routed to the element.

In other words, the elements and virtual methods will be called.

 Is thrown if the passed in element is null. Is thrown if the passed in element isn't a descendant of this ControlUIElementBase derived element. Gets and caches the InkProvider registered for the control's container. The InkProvider registered for the control's container. Cancels the mouse capture and notifies the selection strategy or element that has captured the mouse. Used to validate that the current is currently in the uielement parent chain and if not causes the mouse element enter/leave events to be invoked as required. Returns a GlyphInfo object which assists in the drawing of glyphs such as CheckBoxes and Radio buttons. This method returns null for standard glyph drawing. The type of glyph (Checkbox, radio button, etc.) A variable into which the glyphInfo is returned. A boolean indicating whether the glyphInfo was resolved. Recalculates the element at the current mouse location and synchronizes the mouse enter/leave for the control element. Invoked before the control element utilizes the current mouse position to allow a derived control element to offset the position if necessary. Point to evaluate The default implementation returns the original point GotFocus event handler. Gets called when the control takes focus. Called when an InkProvider has been registered or unregistered. The whose registration has changed. The version used to keep track of the ink provider internally. Called when the InkProvider's state hase changed (e.g. when its Visble or Enabled property has changed). If true the control should invalidate itself. The default implementation calls . GotFocus event handler. Gets called when the control takes focus. Performs the specified action The action to perform True to behave as if the shift key is down True to behave as if the ctl key is down True if the action was performed successfully Suspends the control element from calling SyncMouseEntered method. For every call to SuspendSyncMouseEnter there should be a corresponding call to ResumeSyncMouseEnter to properly resume the sync-mouse-entered logic. Resumes the control element from calling SyncMouseEntered method. For every call to SuspendSyncMouseEntered there should be a corresponding call to ResumeSyncMouseEntered to properly resume the sync-mouse-entered logic. Resumes the control element from calling SyncMouseEntered method. For every call to SuspendSyncMouseEntered there should be a corresponding call to ResumeSyncMouseEntered to properly resume the sync-mouse-entered logic. Specifies whether to call SyncMouseEntered on resumption. Gets called when any verification process of contained elements completes The highest level element which began verifying its elements. True if the element's children were recursively verified; False if only the specified element was verified. Returns whether selection is supported for the specified mouse state. The UIElement returned from the ElementFromPoint method prior to the invocation of this method. A MouseEventArgs instance which describes the state of the mouse. A boolean which indicates whether selection is supported based on the state of the mouse.

This method is called by the framework when a MouseDown is received by the associated control. The default implementation returns true if the left mouse button is pressed.

 keydown event handler keydown event handler Invoked when the parent property of the associated has been changed. Object invoking the event. This should be the associated Event arguments Invoked when the Visible property of the associated has changed Object invoking the event. This should be the associated Event arguments Notifies this instance that a tooltip is about to be displayed. The IUltraControl interface implementor for which the tooltip is being displayed. The UIElement for which the tooltip is being displayed. The ToolTipInfo struct containing information about the tooltip. Specifies the event that triggered the tooltip, i.e., a MouseHover or MouseEnter notification.

The default implementation returns true unconditionally. This method can be overridden for the purpose of receiving a notification immediately before a tooltip is about to be displayed.

Note: The structure is passed by reference to prevent a memberwise copy from being made, in the interest of conserving memory; however, no properties of this structure should be modified.

A boolean indicating whether the tooltip should be displayed. Returns the accessible object associated with the control. Returns the associated with this element. Gets/sets whether this element is enabled. Note: this will return false the element or any of its ancestors are disabled. Returns the cursor that should be used when the mouse is over the element. Indicates if the element supports accessibility. The control element that captured the mouse or null if the mouse hasn't been captured by any control element. (read-only)

The is a static property that returns the control element that has capture.

If this is not null, the property off the returned control element with return the element that actually captured the mouse.

 Returns the used to obtain the application style information for the associated component. The element that captured the mouse or null if the mouse hasn't been captured by an element. (read-only) Returns the last element that was entered with the mouse or null (read-only). Indicates how colors and images are rendered when printed.

Note: This property only affects how a control element is rendered when its returns true.

 Returns the control's IUltraControl interface Returns the current cursor that will be used based on the current position of the mouse. (read-only) Returns bit flags indicating the current state of the control (used to get appropriate key actions on keyDown) The default used when the control element displays a tooltip via the element's Returns true if this element is used for print rather than normal screen display operations (read-only). The default implementation returns false. It must be overriden in a derived class to return true. Returns the control's key mappings collection Returns the current mouse position relative to the associated

Note: If the control is disposed or the handle has not yet been created, the coordinates returned will be invalid.

 Indicates whether the sync-mouse-entered logic has been suspended. For Infragistics internal use only. A flags enum for listed possible events that the ControlUIElement will hook into on the control. Process No Events Process Click Event Process Disposed Event Process DoubleClick Event Process FontChanged Event Process GotFocus Event Process KeyDown Event Process LostFocus Event Process MouseDown Event Process MouseEnter Event Process MouseHover Event Process MouseLeave Event Process MouseMove Event Process MouseUp Event Process ParentChanged Event Process Resized Event Process VisibleChanged Event Process all events Constants which describe the event that caused a tooltip to be displayed. The tooltip was triggered by the OnMouseHover method. The tooltip was triggered by the OnMouseEnter method. Invoked when a control's events should be hooked. This will be called for each control and each child control. Control being hooked Invoked when a control's events should be unhooked. This will be called for each control and each child control. Control being unhooked Creates a new instance of the EmbeddableTextBox class Owning Creates a new instance of the EmbeddableTextBox class Owning Custom Color is a serializable color item. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the Custom Color class. to initialize to. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the Custom Color class. Initializes color to white. Index of color in parent collection Constructor, initializes a new instance of the Custom Color class. to initialize to. Index of color in parent collection Set/Get the Color. This control simulates the functionality of the Office 2000/XP color chooser. Abstract base class for controls that want to inherit from a Win control and want to expose the MouseEnterElement/MouseLeaveElement events as well as the UIElement draw/cursor/creation filters Implemented by the System.Windows.Forms.Control derived control Called when an element is entered (the mouse is moved over the element) Called when an element is left (the mouse is moved off the element) Returns true if borders should be displayed as flat. Returns true if elements may be render using the System themes. Returns a draw filter or null. Returns a creation filter or null. Returns a cursor filter or null. Returns the selection manager or null. Returns the cursor that should be used when the mouse is over the element and that element (and all of the elements in its parent chain) don't supply their own. Note: this is normally supplied by returning the Control's cursor property. Returns the that the component uses to obtain its application style information. Implemented by the System.Windows.Forms.Control derived control Returns the control's main UI element. Constructor, initializes a new instance of UltraControlBase. Will call ther native windows ScvrollWindowEx api if the caller has securoty permissions to call unmanaged code. If not this method will just invalidate the control. The amount to scroll left to right. The amount to scroll up and down. The portion of the client area to be scrolled Only device bits within the clipping rectangle are affected. Bits scrolled from the outside of the rectangle to the inside are painted; bits scrolled from the inside of the rectangle to the outside are not painted. Receives the boundaries of the rectangle invalidated by scrolling. Erases the newly invalidated region by sending a WM_ERASEBKGND message to the window when specified with the invalidate flag is true. Invalidates the exposed region after scrolling. Scrolls all child windows that intersect the scrollRect parameter. The child windows are scrolled by the number of pixels specified by the xAmount and yAmount parameters. The system sends a WM_MOVE message to all child windows that intersect scrollRect, even if they do not move. If greatern than 0 scrolls using smooth scrolling. The amount is in milliseconds. If the function succeeds, the return value is 2 for SIMPLEREGION (rectangular invalidated region), 3 for COMPLEXREGION (nonrectangular invalidated region; overlapping rectangles), or 1 for NULLREGION (no invalidated region). If the function fails, the return value is 0. Sets the flag to true which prevents painting. This is used to optimize performanance while setting a number of properties or adding a number of items (e.g. nodes in a tree control) so that all paint messages are ignored until is called. Resets the flag to false and invalidates the control

This method must be called after . If BeginUpdate was called without a subsequent call to EndUpdate the control will not draw itself.

 Resets the flag to false and optionally invalidates the control. True to invalidate the control and dirty the child elements; otherwise false.

This method must be called after . If BeginUpdate was called without a subsequent call to EndUpdate the control will not draw itself.

Note: Calling this method passing in false should only be done when it is known that the changes made between the and EndUpdate calls did not require invalidation or dirtying of the elements or when the invalidation is being handled by the programmer.

 Invalidates the control and causes a paint message to be sent to the control. Invalidates the specified region of the control and causes a paint message to be posted to the control. Represents the region to invalidate. Invalidates the specified region of the control and causes a paint message to be posted to the control. Represents the region to invalidate. Indicates whether to invalidate the child controls as well. Invalidates the specified region of the control and causes a paint message to be posted to the control. Indicates whether to invalidate the child controls as well. Invalidates the specified region of the control and causes a paint message to be posted to the control. Represents the region to invalidate. Indicates whether to invalidate the child controls as well. Invalidates the specified region of the control and causes a paint message to be posted to the control. Represents the region to invalidate. Causes the control to redraw the invalidated regions. Returns the ISelectionManager. The default implementation tries to cast this object to an ISelectionManager. Called when an element is entered (the mouse is moved over the element) Called when an element is entered (the mouse is moved over the element)

In design mode notifies the that the component has changed so that it can mark the component dirty.

At runtime this method does nothing.

 Called when a property or subobject's property value has changed. Notifies any listeners when the state of an object has changed An ID denoting the property. Notifies any listeners when the state of an object has changed An ID that denotes the property. Optional. Used during a prop change notification to create a complete context chain of what triggered the change. Called when an element is entered (the mouse is moved over the element) Called when an element is left (the mouse is moved off the element) Calls the ControlUIElement's draw method The Determines if the control should receive mouse notifications at design time for the specified point. Point in client coordinates. True if the control should receive any mouse notifications for the specified point. Used to forward mouse move messages to the control. Used to invoke the KeyDown event. KeyEventArgs Key press event handler. The key event args. Sets focus the next/previous control in the tab order. True to set focus to the next control; false to set focus to the previous control. A boolean indicating whether the next/previous control was successfully given the focus. Draws a control (and all of its descendant controls). The control to draw. The graphics object to draw the control on. The destination rectangle. The clipping area. Draws a control (and all of its descendant controls). The control to draw. The graphics object to draw the control on. The destination rectangle. The clipping area. The opacity (1.0 is completely opague, 0.0 is completely transparent). Draws a control (and all of its descendant controls). The control to draw. The graphics object to draw the control on. The destination rectangle. The clipping area. The image attributes to use. If the parameter is not null then an off-screen bitmap will be created regardless of the parameter value. Invoked when the property of the control has been changed. Event arguments Plays the specified sound file. Path to the sound file to be played.

The specified sound file is played asynchronously, meaning that the main thread is not blocked while the sound file is being played.

 Plays the specified sound file. Path to the sound file to be played. The enumeration value that specifies how the sound file is to be played. Plays the specified system sound event. The enumeration value that specifies which system-defined sound event is to be played.

The specified system sound event is played asynchronously, meaning that the main thread is not blocked while the sound file is being played.

Plays the specified system sound event. The enumeration value that specifies which system-defined sound event is to be played. The enumeration value that specifies how the sound file is to be played. Called when the current Windows theme has changed. Invoked when the control is created. Handles disposing the control's resources. Boolean indicating if managed and unmanaged resources should be released. Invoked when the handle of the control is created. Event arguments Invalidates and updates the control immediately. For internal infrastructure use only. Factory method used to create the component role that provides the style information for the control. The created. Override in derived classes to be notified when the Office 2007 color scheme has changed. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Copies over any relevent information that would not be copied by a DataRepeater. The control to initialize. Calls InitializeDataRepeaterClone on any UltraControlBase-derived items in the specified collections. The DataRepeaterItem provided in by the DataRepeater in the ItemCloned event. The collection that is being cloned by the DataRepeater.

Note: The clone is mapped to the original template through the Name property, so if this value is changed, this method will not be able to function. In cases where the Name property is changed for clones, it is recommended to call the method manually.

Fired when the mouse enters a UIElement Fired when the mouse leaves a UIElement Fired after a property has changed Returns true between and method calls. Indicates whether the control has a flat appearance. Indicates whether the control has a flat appearance. Indicates whether the control has a flat appearance. Indicates whether the elements of a control may be rendered using system themes. Indicates whether the elements of a control may be rendered using the operating system theme rendering. Indicates whether the elements of a control may be rendered using system themes. Gets/sets the draw filter property Gets/sets the creation filter property Gets/sets the cursor filter property Gets the selection manager (read-only) Returns true if borders should be displayed as flat. Returns true if the system themes should be used to render elements when possible. Returns the cursor that should be used when the mouse is over the element and that element (and all of the elements in its parent chain) don't supply their own. Note: this is normally supplied by returning the Control's cursor property. Returns the control's main UI element.. Overrides the Cursor to return the cursor from the UIElement Returns the Control's base cursor property (read-only). Abstract property for getting the control's main UI element Determines whether alpha blending is enabled Returns or sets how alpha blending is performed. Setting the property to true will cause the control to not fire any designer change notifications. If a designer change notification was suppressed after setting this property to true, then it will be fired when this property is set back to false again. Returns the list of event handlers that are attached to this component. This member supports the Infragistics infrastructure and is not meant to be invoked externally.

Indicates whether the control can utilize an

This member supports the Infragistics infrastructure and is not meant to be invoked externally.

Indicates whether the control can utilize an

The Padding property is shadowed and hidden. It is not supported by this class. The BackgroundImageLayout property is shadowed and hidden. It is not supported by this class. Specifies the text rendering mode that will be used by this control.

Note that not all user interface entities may use the specified text rendering mode. For example, if the user interface entity happens to make use some .NET control that doesn't support the specified text rendering mode.

Also note that when printing GDIPlus will be used, even if this property is set otherwise. This is because .NET printing infrastructure does not support drawing text using GDI.

Returns or sets the name of the styleset in the that should be used by the control. Returns the that the control uses to provide its style information. Returns or sets whether the control should use application styling. Returns or sets the name of the styleset library in the that should be used by the control.

By default, this property defaults to an empty string and as such will obtain its style information from the default style library that is loaded into memory using the method. However, there is also an overload of that method which will accept a string name which will be used to identify the library (). Any controls/components that have their StyleLibraryName set to that name will obtain their style information from that library.

Note: If this property is set and the name does not match up with the name of a loaded style library, the control/component will not have any style information.

 Accessible object representing a control Initializes a new Associated control Returns the accessible object of a child control that contains focus. Returns the accessible object of a child control that contains focus. Returns the accessible object of a child control at the specified index. The index of the child control. Returns the accessible object of a child control at the specified index. Returns the accessible object of a child control at the specified coordinates. The horizontal screen coordinate The vertical screen coordinate. Returns the accessible object of a child control at the specified coordinates. Returns the child at the specified index. Index of the child whose accessible object should be returned. The control accessible object at the specified index Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. Returns the number of visible child controls. Retrieves the object that has the keyboard focus Returns the control that contains the input focus Retrieves the child object at the specified screen coordinates. The horizontal screen coordinate The vertical screen coordinate. Returns the child control at the specified location or the Owner. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the CustomColorBox class. Clean up any resources being used. Specifies whether managed and unmanaged resources should be cleaned up. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Performs the work of setting the specified bounds of this control. The control is NOT sizable The new Left property value of the control. The new Top property value of the control. The new Width property value of the control. The new Height property value of the control. A bitwise combination of the BoundsSpecified values. Handles Key Down Messages KeyEventArgs Used to determine which keys we are interested in Keys Returns true if the key is a valid input key for this control Creates a new accessibility object for the control. A new accessibility object for the control. Fires When mouse is released on color Fires when color is changed or selected Fires before more colors button is pressed Fires after more colors button is pressed Returns Control UIElement The controls default size Visual Style for the control An array of user defined colors that are used in the show more colors dialog. Currently selected color Indicates whether or not custom colors should be shared across all instances of the control Returns or sets whether a button representing Color.Transparent is displayed.

Note: This property does not affect the control when the is set to VisualStudio

 Returns or sets whether a button representing SystemColors.WindowText is displayed.

Note: This property does not affect the control when the is set to VisualStudio

 Accessibility object representing a Initializes a new Associated CustomColorBox control Retrieves the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. The zero-based index of the accessible child. An AccessibleObject that represents the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Returns the role of the accessible object. Returns the control used to synchronize accessibility calls. Performs the default action associated with this accessible object. Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Navigates to another accessible object. Direction of the navigation The accessible object based on the specified navigation direction. Returns the index of the option set item. Returns the parent accessible object. Returns the role of the accessible object. Returns the state of the accessible object. Returns the name of the accessible object. Gets a string that describes the default action of the object. Returns the location and size of the object represented by the accessible object. Indicates if the default action can be performed. Controls the display style of the colorbox Display like the visual Studio color picker show custom color boxes Display like Office XP flat, has custom color button Display like the Office2000 3D, has custom color button Office 2003 style color box Visual Studio 2005 style color box Office 2007 style color box CustomColorBoxAutomaticTrackingButtonUIElement. A color box that highlights/draws border around itself when the mouse is over it. Button element for a that displays a color box and some associated text. Base class for a button element displayed in a custom colorbox control. Constuctor initializes a new instance of the CustomColorBoxChildElement class. Parent Element Custom color represented by the element Indicates if the color is customizable. Fired when mouse leaves the element Fired when mouse enters the element Invoked during the to resolve any remaining appearance values after the style specific appearance information has been initialized. AppearanceData structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Used by an element to render using the system theme. This method will not be invoked if the themes are not supported. The used to provide rendering information. Returning true will prevent the invocation of the DrawBackColor, DrawImageBackground, DrawBorders, DrawImage and DrawForeground. Return false when themes are not supported by the element or if unable to render using the system theme. Buttons capture the mouse. So this method sets captureMouse to true and returns true Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Invoked when the button state of the element changes. Called on a mouse move message Mouse event arguments Handles the borderstyle for the element Returns whether the button may be pressed. Returns or sets the color represented by the element. Return true if this element wants to be notified when the mouse hovers over it. This property is read-only. If we are not in visual studio mode we want this notification. The default implemenation returns false. This should be overridden by elements that want their OnMouseHover method to be called. True if we have a color false otherwise Returns information regarding the mouse in relation to the element. Initializes a new CustomColorBoxSpecialButtonUIElement Parent Element Color to be displayed Initializes a new CustomColorBoxSpecialButtonUIElement Parent Element Color to be displayed Indicates if the color is customizable Called when the mouse is released over an element Mouse event arguments Returning true will ignore the next click event Makes sure that the child elements for this element are in the ChildElements array and that they are positioned properly. This needs to be overridden if the element has any child elements. Returns or sets the tooltip that is displayed by the element. Constructor, initializes a new instance of CustomColorBoxAutomaticTrackingButtonUIElement Parent Element Color to be displayed Constructor, initializes a new instance of CustomColorBoxAutomaticTrackingButtonUIElement Parent Element Color to be displayed Summary description for CustomColorBoxHotTrackingButtonUIElement. Constuctor initializes a new instance of the CustomColorBoxHotTrackingButtonUIElement class. Parent Element Constuctor initializes a new instance of the CustomColorBoxHotTrackingButtonUIElement class. Parent Element Color to be displayed True if color is customizable Constuctor initializes a new instance of the CustomColorBoxHotTrackingButtonUIElement class. Parent Element Color to be displayed Default drawfocus method draws a focus rect inside the element's borders. Draw focus around the currently selected bucket. The used to provide rendering information. Draw the foreground of the element The used to provide rendering information. Called when the mouse is released over an element Mouse event arguments Returning true will ignore the next click event Returns the string associated with this element from the string res Invalidates this element True to force an immediate update merges the appearance object into the passed in structure The appearance structure to initialize. The properties that are needed Draws the background for this UIElement. Handles rendering the borders for the element. The used to provide rendering information. Handles whether or not we draw focus True if we have a color false otherwise Summary description for UltraCustomColorChooserUIElement. Constructor The associated . Called when a mouse down message is received. Returning true will cause normal mouse down processing to be skipped The providing mouse information. True if the mouse processing has been handled. Position Child Elements On Dispose GotFocus event handler. Gets called when the control takes focus. GotFocus event handler. Gets called when the control takes focus. Returns the element that has focus Summary Description for Custom toggle button Initializes a new ImageAndTextButtonUIElement. Parent element Type of button Init appearance for the toggle button The appearance structure to initialize. The properties that are needed OnMouseDown Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Invoked when the checked state of the button changes other than when it is initialized. Makes sure that the child elements for this element are in the ChildElements array and that they are positioned properly. This needs to be overridden if the element has any child elements. Custom Toggle buttons will have no border Returns the ui role for the element. Internal. Gets the collection of property descriptors. Binding manager. Property descriptor creator method. Property collection. Checks if the type is a known type (to Infragistics controls). The to check. True if the specified type is recognizable to Infragistics controls. Used to strip out all characters that are before the last period of the passed in value. The string to strip down. A string that only contains the characters after the last period of the passed in value. This method returns the object that will be compared against when syncing data bound items with the underlying bound list. The object from which to objecain the sync object. An object that will be used for comparison. Converts source value to destination type using specific culture. Value to convert. Can be null or DBNull. Type to convert to. Specific culture used for conversion. If null, default culture is used. Format string. Format provider. True if the conversion was valid. Converted value. Returns some sample data to be displayed in the cell for columns of type type. The of sample data to obtain. An object of the requested type that can be used as sample data. Returns the CurrencyManager for the specified dataSource and dataMember based on the bindingContext. The used to retrieve the CurrencyManager. The data source associated with a particular The name of a specific data member in a multitier data source. The CurrencyManager for the specified dataSource and dataMember based on the bindingContext. Returns whether the specified property type implements IEnumerable<> in the inheritance hierarchy. The type to check. True if the type implements IEnumerable<> Returns whether the specified property type implements IEnumerable<> in the inheritance hierarchy. The type to check. The underlying type stored by the typed enumerable object. True if the type implements IEnumerable<> Delegate for property descriptor creators. Represents a pseudo property to deal with arrays of primitive types. Constructor. The of the property. The name of the property. Returns false. The component to check. True if the value of the specified component can be reset. Returns the passed in object. The component to check. The passed in object. Does nothing. Returns true. The component to check. True. Gets component type. Gets property type. Interface for custom data filters. Data filter is used for conversion between Display (user), Editor and Owner (data source). Converts data between Display (user), Editor and Owner (data source). Input arguments. Converted data. Custom exception thrown if user code in throws an exception. Constructor. The error message that explains the reason for the exception. The exception that is the cause of the current exception. Different types of conversion requested in custom data filter (). Conversion from user entered data to data used by the editor. Conversion from data used by the editor to data displayed to the user. Conversion from owner data to data used by the editor. Conversion from data used by the editor to owner data. Method arguments for data filter Convert() method. Constructor. Specifies direction of conversion which is taking place. Set to true if data filter handles conversion. Source object for conversion. Type of destination object. Set to false if source data was invalid. Editor which requests the conversion. Owner context. Base class used to derive all Infragistics DataGridView Editor Columns Initializes a new Initializes a new The that this object should be added to. Factory method for creating an editor A new object. Factory method for creating the editor's Owner A new object. Called when a sub object property change notification is recieved. PropChangeInfo Called when an element is associated with a different DataGridView. Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. Specifies whether managed and unmanaged resources should be cleaned up. Returns a clone of the column. A copy of the column with the same property settings. Calculates the ideal width of the column based on the specified criteria. A value that specifies an automatic sizing mode. true to calculate the width of the column based on the current row heights; false to calculate the width with the expectation that the row heights will be adjusted. The ideal width of the column in pixels. Determines if edit mode should be started based on the given key. A KeyEventArgs that represents the key that was pressed. true if edit mode should be started; otherwise, false. The default is false. Proscribes common functionality for a cell that allows the manipulation of its value. Whether to select the contents of the cell. The to prepare. Gets the formatted value of the cell's data. A DataGridViewDataErrorContexts that describes the context in which any formatting errors occur. The UltraDataGridViewCell whose value should be formatted. The value of the cell's data after formatting has been applied. Returns a rect indicating the area of the cell which contains the value, excluding buttons. The whose area should be determined. A indicating the area of the cell that contains the value, excluding buttons. Returns true if the key is a valid input key for this control The value specifying which keys were pressed. True if the should be notified. True if the key is used by the editor. Converts a value into its formatted string equivalent. The value to be parsed. A DataGridViewCellStyle that specifies the cell style used for formatting. The formatted string equivalent of the provided value. Called when the mouse button is held down while the pointer is on a cell. A DataGridViewCellMouseEventArgs that contains the event data. Called when the mouse button is released while the pointer is on a cell. A DataGridViewCellMouseEventArgs that contains the event data. Called when a key is pressed while the focus is on a cell. A KeyPressEventArgs that contains the event data. The index of the cell's parent row. Called when a character key is pressed while the focus is on a cell. A KeyEventArgs that contains the event data. The index of the cell's parent row. For internal infrastructure use only For internal infrastructure use only For internal infrastructure use only For internal infrastructure use only Get the Embeddable element for a particular cell An UltraDataGridViewCell The associated EmbeddableUIElementBase Get the Embeddable element for a particular cell in a a particular elements collection An UltraDataGridViewCell The Collection of UIElements to look in The associated EmbeddableUIElementBase Called after a entering edit mode Called after a Exiting edit mode Called when an element is entered (the mouse is moved over the element) The . Called when an element is left (the mouse is moved off the element) The . Resolves the appearance for an element. The context that was passed into the method. The appearance structure to initialize. The appearance properties to resolve. Enumeration of type describing the area of the embeddable element to which the appearance will be applied Boolean indicating whether the owner should apply its 'HotTrackingAppearance' A string that denotes which appearance to resolve. Applicable only when the 'area' parameter is set to Custom. Performs a phase of a tool's appearance resolution process. The context that was passed into the method. The appearance structure to initialize. The appearance properties to resolve. Enumeration of type describing the area of the embeddable element to which the appearance will be applied Boolean indicating whether the owner should apply its 'HotTrackingAppearance' A string that denotes which appearance to resolve. Applicable only when the 'area' parameter is set to Custom. Represents the phase of the resolution process. Determines whether or not the specified appearance property should be set by the resolution process The Appearance The properties that the resolution process requested to be set The property in question Safely checks for nulls and then dirties the Child Elements, if possible. Called after the creation of the editor to allow initializion such as hooking events or setting default properties Used to copy the settings of the specified The column whose properties should be copied

Returns a Boolean value that determines whether the property is set to its default value.

Returns True if the property is not set to its default value; otherwise, it returns False.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

Invoke the method to reset this property to its default value.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Invoke this method to reset the property to its default value.

Once this method is invoked, the method will return False until the property is set again.

Returns a Boolean value that determines whether the property is set to its default value.

Returns True if the property is not set to its default value; otherwise, it returns False.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

Invoke the method to reset this property to its default value.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Invoke this method to reset the property to its default value.

Once this method is invoked, the method will return False until the property is set again.

Returns a Boolean value that determines whether the property is set to its default value.

Returns True if the property is not set to its default value; otherwise, it returns False.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

Invoke the method to reset this property to its default value.

 True if the property is set to a non-default value. Resets the property to its default value.

Invoke this method to reset the property to its default value.

Once this method is invoked, the method will return False until the property is set again.

Returns a Boolean value that determines whether the property is set to its default value.

Returns True if the property is not set to its default value; otherwise, it returns False.

Invoke the method to reset this property to its default value.

 Boolean indicating whether the property should be serialized Resets the property to its default value.

Invoke this method to reset the property to its default value.

Once this method is invoked, the method will return False until the property is set again.

Returns a Boolean value that determines whether the property is set to its default value.

Returns True if the property is not set to its default value; otherwise, it returns False.

Invoke the method to reset this property to its default value.

 Boolean indicating whether the property should be serialized Resets the property to its default value.

Invoke this method to reset the property to its default value.

Once this method is invoked, the method will return False until the property is set again.

 Called when an element is entered (the mouse is moved over the element) Called when an element is entered (the mouse is moved over the element) Occurs after a cell enters edit mode.

This event is generated after a cell enters edit mode, meaning that the cell is prepared to accept input from the user.

 Occurs after a cell exits edit mode. Fired when the mouse enters a UIElement Fired when the mouse leaves a UIElement Gets the class type of the formatted value associated with the cell. The Type of the cell's formatted value. Gets the formatted value of the cell. An Object that contains the value of the cell. Returns the list of event handlers that are attached to this component. Handles the SubObjectPropChange notifications for Sub-object properties of this object The columns Editor Owner The ControlUIElement used by the column Return the default ValueType of cells in this column. Default appearance for the cells in the column Returns whether or not the control has a CellAppearance Determines the style of buttons used in the cells. Gets/sets the creation filter property Gets/sets the cursor filter property Gets the default value for a cell in a newly created row. An Object representing the default value. Returns or sets the display style used by the column.

The buttons in the column can visually emulate the display styles seen in Office2000, OfficeXP, or Office2003 by setting the DisplayStyle property appropriately, regardless of the operating system on which the control is running.

 Gets/sets the draw filter property Default appearance for the cells when in edit mode Returns whether or not the control has a CellAppearance The Embeddable Editor being used by the column [Description("")] Indicates whether the control cells have a flat appearance.

Note that the cells do not draw borders, so this propertly will only affect buttons and other UIElements contained within the cell.

 Default appearance for the Selected cells in the column Returns whether or not the control has a CellAppearance Gets / sets whether the column will display using Windows XP Themes. Gets/sets the color that will be masked out of the image displayed by the control. The Default SortMode for the column. Gets or sets the sort mode for the column.

A DataGridViewColumnSortMode that specifies the criteria used to order the rows based on the cell values in a column.

If the Value assigned to this property conflicts with the , an will occur.

 Returns the cached license for the control Enumeration used in the ResolveAppearancePhase method to indicate phases of appearance resolution. Edit Mode phase Selected phase Normal phase Column Owner ColumnOwner Constructor The associated . If true is returned, the editor will enter edit mode on either MouseDown or MouseUp, depending on the nature of the editor The owner context The default implemenation returns false. Returns the owner's control. The context that was passed into the method. The owner's control. This is used e.g. to re-parent the edit control. The default implementation returns null (Nothing in VB) Returns the BorderStyle to be used by the editor's embeddable element The default implementation returns false, with borderStyle set to UIElementBorderStyle.Default. The context that was passed into the Infragistics.Win.EmbeddableEditorBase.GetEmbeddableElement(Infragistics.Win.UIElement,Infragistics.Win.EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase,System.Object,Infragistics.Win.EmbeddableUIElementBase) method. the BorderStyle to be used by the editor's embeddable element A boolean indicating whether a meaningful value was returned. Returns the ButtonStyle to be used by the embeddable element's button The owner context. The ButtonStyle to be used by the embeddable element's buttons True. Returns the data type. The owner context. Returns the DisplayStyle to be used by the embeddable element The owner context. The DisplayStyle to be used by the embeddable element Returns the editor for the passed in ownerContext. This is used by the base implementation of EmbeddableOwnerBase. The context that was passed into the Infragistics.Win.EmbeddableEditorBase.GetEmbeddableElement(Infragistics.Win.UIElement,Infragistics.Win.EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase,System.Object,Infragistics.Win.EmbeddableUIElementBase) method. The associated with the passed in ownerContext. Gets the editor context that was set with SetEditorContext method. The Owner Context Editor context that was last set with SetEditorContext for the passed in ownerContext.

GetEditorContext and can be used to cache objects per owner context.

 Returns the embeddable uielement associated with a particular object or null if none is available. Context used to identify the object to reference The embeddable uielement representing the specified owner context. Returns information needed to format a string. The owner context. Returns the format string or null. Returns the IFormatProvider or null. Returns the color that is used as the transparent color for images displayed by the editor The owner context. The color that is used as the transparent color for images displayed by the editor The string to display for a null value. The owner context. (out) The string that should be used if the value is null or DB_Null. A boolean indicating whether a meaningful value was returned. Returns the value that should be rendered. The context that was passed into the Infragistics.Win.EmbeddableEditorBase.GetEmbeddableElement(Infragistics.Win.UIElement,Infragistics.Win.EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase,System.Object,Infragistics.Win.EmbeddableUIElementBase) method. System.Object Returns true is the value is read-only The owner context. A boolean indicating whether the value is read only Resolves the appearance for an element. The context that was passed into the method. The appearance structure to initialize.. The appearance properties to resolve. Enumeration of type describing the area of the embeddable element to which the appearance will be applied Boolean indicating whether the owner should apply its 'HotTrackingAppearance' A string that denotes which appearance to resolve. Applicable only when the 'area' parameter is set to Custom. True if the owner supplies an appearance. Sets the editor context for the passed in ownerContext. The owner context, used to provide additional information. The editor context to assign.

and SetEditorContext can be used to cache objects per owner context.

Implementing owner will return the object that was last cached using SetEditorContext method.

 Returns whether the text should be wrapped if it doesn't fit. The owner context. A boolean indicating whether the text should be wrapped The associates UltraDataGridViewColumnBase Returns true if in design mode, false otherwise. Base class used to derive all Infragistics DataGridView Editor Columns which support EditorButtons Initializes a new Initializes a new The that this object should be added to. Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. Specifies whether managed and unmanaged resources should be cleaned up. Called after the creation of the editor to allow initializion such as hooking events or setting default properties Called when the mouse button is held down while the pointer is on a cell. A DataGridViewCellMouseEventArgs that contains the event data. Proscribes common functionality for a cell that allows the manipulation of its value. Whether to select the contents of the cell. The to prepare. Performs a phase of a tool's appearance resolution process. The context that was passed into the method. The appearance structure to initialize. The appearance properties to resolve. Enumeration of type describing the area of the embeddable element to which the appearance will be applied Boolean indicating whether the owner should apply its 'HotTrackingAppearance' A string that denotes which appearance to resolve. Applicable only when the 'area' parameter is set to Custom. Represents the phase of the resolution process. Used to copy the settings of the specified The column whose properties should be copied Returns true if this property is not set to its default value Reset appearances to null Indicates if the should be serialized. True if the contains any items Clears the collection Indicates if the should be serialized. True if the contains any items Clears the collection

Returns a Boolean value that determines whether the property is set to its default value.

Returns True if the property is not set to its default value; otherwise, it returns False.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

Invoke the method to reset this property to its default value.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Invoke this method to reset the property to its default value.

Once this method is invoked, the method will return False until the property is set again.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Invoke this method to reset the property to its default value.

Once this method is invoked, the method will return False until the property is set again.

Returns a Boolean value that determines whether the property is set to its default value.

Returns True if the property is not set to its default value; otherwise, it returns False.

Invoke the method to reset this property to its default value.

 Boolean indicating whether the property should be serialized Closes any DropDownEditorButtonBase instances that are currently dropped down. Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to invoke the event Event arguments Invoked after the CheckState of a StateEditorButton has been changed. Invoked when a dropdown editor button has closed. Invoked before the CheckState of a StateEditorButton has been changed. Invoked before a dropdown editor button has been displayed. Invoked when an editor button is clicked Invoked when an spin editor button is clicked Invoked when the check state of a state editor button for an element should be initialized. A collection of all the Appearance objects created for use with this column.

The Appearances collection is used to contain Appearance objects that you have created and added to the control as pre-defined formatting templates. It does not represent a collection of all the Appearance objects that exist in the control. The intrinsic Appearance objects that are stored by objects such as the UltraGridBand, UltraGridRow, UltraGridCell are not included in the grid's Appearances collection.

 Returns a collection of editor buttons displayed on the left side of the edit area. Returns a collection of editor buttons displayed on the right side of the edit area. Default appearance for the buttons in the column Returns whether or not the control has a CellAppearance Returns or sets the ImageList associated with the column. Determines when to show the Ink Button on the editor This property determines when to show the Ink Button on the editor Column Owner Constructor UltraEditorButtonColumnBase Returns the image list to be used by the editor's ValueList, or null The owner context. An ImageList, or null if not supported Determines when to show the Ink Button on the editor. The owner context. A ShowInkButton value indicating when the InkButton will be shown. Base class used to derive all Infragistics DataGridView Editor Columns that use Masking Interface meant to be implemented mask based editor controls as well as objects that expose a mask input property (like UltraGridColumn object in the grid). This interface is meant to be used in conjuction with MaskPropertyConvertor type convertor for displaying a default list of input masks in the designer for the mask input properties. Gets the data type (edit type). Initializes a new Initializes a new The that this object should be added to. Called when a character key is pressed while the focus is on a cell. A KeyEventArgs that contains the event data. The index of the cell's parent row. Called when a key is pressed while the focus is on a cell. A KeyPressEventArgs that contains the event data. The index of the cell's parent row. Returns true if the key is a valid input key for this control The value specifying which keys were pressed. True if the should be notified. True if the key is used by the editor. Used to copy the settings of the specified The column whose properties should be copied Returns a rect indicating the area of the cell which contains the value, excluding buttons. The that contains the value. A indicating the area of the cell that contains the value. Performs a phase of a tool's appearance resolution process. The context that was passed into the method. The appearance structure to initialize. The appearance properties to resolve. Enumeration of type describing the area of the embeddable element to which the appearance will be applied Boolean indicating whether the owner should apply its 'HotTrackingAppearance' A string that denotes which appearance to resolve. Applicable only when the 'area' parameter is set to Custom. Represents the phase of the resolution process. Determines if edit mode should be started based on the given key. A KeyEventArgs that represents the key that was pressed. true if edit mode should be started; otherwise, false. The default is false. Gets the class type of the formatted value associated with the cell. The Type of the cell's formatted value. Gets / set the input Mask. Returns or sets the mask that is applied to the text displayed by the cells.

This property is used to determine how mask literals and prompt characters are displayed when the control is not in edit mode. Based on the setting of this property, the text displayed in the control will contain no prompt characters or literals (just the raw data), the data and just the literals, the data and just the prompt characters, or all the text including both prompt characters and literals. The formatted spacing of partially masked values can be preserved by indicating to include literals with padding, which includes data and literal characters, but replaces prompt characters with spaces.

Generally, prompt characters disappear when the control is no longer in edit mode, as a visual cue to the user. In some cases, however, it may be appropriate in your application to display mask literals as well as data when the control is no longer in edit mode.

The property is used to specify how data input will be masked for the control. The mask usually includes literal characters that are used to delimit the data entered by the user. This property has no effect unless the property is set, meaning that data masking is enabled.

 Returns or sets the mask that is applied to the cell's text when it is copied to the clipboard.

This property is used to determine how mask literals and prompt characters are handled when the text of the control is copied to the Windows clipboard. Based on the setting of this property, the text in the clipboard will contain no prompt characters or literals (just the raw data), the data and just the literals, the data and just the prompt characters, or all the text including both prompt characters and literals. The formatted spacing of partially masked values can be preserved by indicating to include literals with padding, which includes data and literal characters, but replaces prompt characters with spaces.

The property is used to specify how data input will be masked for the control. The mask usually includes literal characters that are used to delimit the data entered by the user. This property has no effect unless the InputMask property is set, meaning that data masking is enabled.

 Gets/sets the prompt character. The default prompt character is the underscore (_).

Note:Because the column requires a prompt character to indicate unpopulated mask positions, the PromptChar property cannot be set to the null character ('\x00'). If the property is set to the null character, the value will be changed to the space character ('\x32') instead.

 Returns or sets the alignment for the control's spin buttons. Column Owner ColumnOwner Constructor An UltraDataGridViewColumn Returns masking information. This is only of ibterest to a editor that supports masking. The context that was passed into the method. The string used for masking the value or null if there is no mask. Determines whether literals and prompt characters are included in Value property of the Editor. Determines whether literals and prompt characters are displayed when not in edit mode. Determines whether literals and prompt characters are included when the editor copyies text to the clipboard. True only if masking info is available. The default implementation returns false. Base class used to derive all Infragistics DataGridView Editor Columns which have text and a DropDown. Base class used to derive all Infragistics DataGridView Editor Columns which display editable Text. Initializes a new Initializes a new The that this object should be added to. Determines if edit mode should be started based on the given key. A KeyEventArgs that represents the key that was pressed. true if edit mode should be started; otherwise, false. The default is false. Called when a character key is pressed while the focus is on a cell. A KeyEventArgs that contains the event data. The index of the cell's parent row. Called when a key is pressed while the focus is on a cell. A KeyPressEventArgs that contains the event data. The index of the cell's parent row. Returns true if the key is a valid input key for this control The value specifying which keys were pressed. True if the should be notified. True if the key is used by the editor. Used to copy the settings of the specified The column whose properties should be copied Returns a rect indicating the area of the cell which contains the value, excluding buttons. The that contains the value. A indicating the area of the cell that contains the value. Gets the class type of the formatted value associated with the cell. The Type of the cell's formatted value. Gets or sets whether the control modifies the case of characters as they are typed. Column Owner Constructor UltraTextEditorColumnBase Determines how the text will be cased. The owner context. The CharacterCasing to be applied to the text Initializes a new Initializes a new The that this object should be added to. Used to close up the dropdown window. Called to drop down the dropdown. Returns true if successful. A cell in the column must already be in edit mode otherwise this method will return false. Used to copy the settings of the specified The column whose properties should be copied Column Owner Constructor UltraTextDropDownEditorColumnBase DataGridViewCell object used with all UltraDataGridViewColumns. Paints the current DataGridViewCell. The Graphics used to paint the DataGridViewCell. A Rectangle that represents the area of the DataGridView that needs to be repainted. A Rectangle that contains the bounds of the DataGridViewCell that is being painted. The row index of the cell that is being painted. A bitwise combination of the DataGridViewElementState values. The data of the DataGridViewCell that is being painted. The formatted data of the DataGridViewCell that is being painted. An error message that is associated with the cell. A DataGridViewCellStyle that contains formatting and style information about the cell. A DataGridViewAdvancedBorderStyle that contains border styles for the cell that is being painted. Determines which parts of the cell to paint. Called when the mouse button is held down while the pointer is on a cell. A DataGridViewCellMouseEventArgs that contains the event data. Called when the mouse button is released while the pointer is on a cell. A DataGridViewCellMouseEventArgs that contains the event data. Determines if edit mode should be started based on the given key. A KeyEventArgs that represents the key that was pressed. true if edit mode should be started; otherwise, false. The default is false. Called when a character key is pressed while the focus is on a cell. A KeyEventArgs that contains the event data. The index of the cell's parent row. Called when a key is pressed while the focus is on a cell. A KeyPressEventArgs that contains the event data. The index of the cell's parent row. Converts a value into its formatted string equivalent. The display value of the cell. A TypeConverter for the display value type, or null to use the default converter. A TypeConverter for the cell value type, or null to use the default converter. The DataGridViewCellStyle in effect for the cell. The formatted string equivalent of the provided value. Calculates the preferred size, in pixels, of the cell. Graphics object used for measurements Style for the cell The zero-based row index of the cell. The cell's maximum allowable size. A that represents the preferred size, in pixels, of the cell. Returns the bounding rectangle that encloses the cell's content area. The graphics context for the cell. The DataGridViewCellStyle to be applied to the cell. The index of the cell's parent row. The Rectangle that bounds the cell's contents. Returns the bounding rectangle that encloses the cell's error icon, if one is displayed. The graphics context for the cell. The DataGridViewCellStyle to be applied to the cell. The index of the cell's parent row. The that bounds the cell's error icon, if one is displayed; otherwise, . Creates a new accessible object for the DataGridViewCell. The associated . Returns a string that describes the current object. A string that represents the current object. Proscribes common functionality for a cell that allows the manipulation of its value. Returns the column to which the cell belongs An UltraColumn which the cell is in. Gets the default value for a cell in a newly created row. An Object representing the default value. Gets the type of the cell's hosted editing control. Returns null Gets the class type of the formatted value associated with the cell. The Type of the cell's formatted value. Gets the class type of the formatted value associated with the cell. The Type of the cell's formatted value. Gets or sets the formatted value of the cell. An Object that contains the value of the cell. ControlUIElement for an UltraDataGridViewColumn UltraColumnControlUIElement constructor The DataGridView An IUltraControl Returns the EmbeddableElement for a cell An UltraDataGridViewCell The Collection of UIElements from which to retrieve the EmbeddableElement. The associated with the provided cell. Handles positioning and creation of the child elements. A DataGridViewColumn which displays a CheckBox. Initializes a new Initializes a new The that this object should be added to. Factory method for creating an editor A new . Called after the creation of the editor to allow initializion such as hooking events or setting default properties Factory method for creating the editor's Owner A new object. Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. Specifies whether managed and unmanaged resources should be cleaned up. Proscribes common functionality for a cell that allows the manipulation of its value. This parameter is not used in this overload. The to prepare. Called when the mouse button is held down while the pointer is on a cell. A DataGridViewCellMouseEventArgs that contains the event data. Performs a phase of a tool's appearance resolution process. The context that was passed into the method. The appearance structure to initialize. The appearance properties to resolve. Enumeration of type describing the area of the embeddable element to which the appearance will be applied Boolean indicating whether the owner should apply its 'HotTrackingAppearance' A string that denotes which appearance to resolve. Applicable only when the 'area' parameter is set to Custom. Represents the phase of the resolution process. Used to copy the settings of the specified The column whose properties should be copied Fire the AfterCheckStateChanged Event The event args. Fire the BeforeCheckStateChanged Event The . Fire the ValidateCheckState Event Gets the class type of the formatted value associated with the cell. The Type of the cell's formatted value. Set/Get Check Alignment of control Appearance of the cell when Checked Appearance of the cell when HotTracking Returns whether or not the control has an appearance Appearance of the cell when the CheckState is Indeterminate Set/Get the EditCheckStyle of the CheckBox Cells Controls whether or not the user can select the indeterminate state of the checkbox. Occurs after the CheckState has changed in any cell in the column. Occurs before the CheckState changes in any cell in the column. Occurs before a change to the CheckState property is committed.

The ValidateCheckState event can be used to force the cell's CheckState property to a certain value when the control is clicked, overriding the next value in the cycle.

 Column Owner ColumnOwner Constructor An UltraDataGridViewColumn A DataGridViewColumn which displays a ColorPicker dropdown. Initializes a new Initializes a new The that this object should be added to. Factory method for creating an editor Called after the creation of the editor to allow initializion such as hooking events or setting default properties Factory method for creating the editor's Owner Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. Specifies whether managed and unmanaged resources should be cleaned up. Used to copy the settings of the specified The column whose properties should be copied Fires the AfterCloseUp event. Fires the AfterDropDown event. Fires the BeforeDropDown event. Gets/sets whether clearing the edit portion results in a value of Color.Empty.

When set to true (default), and the edit portion is cleared, the new value is assumed to be Color.Empty.

When set to false and the edit portion is cleared, the value of the property is applied instead.

Note: In the case where the property is set to Color.Empty, clearing the edit portion will result in a value of Color.Empty, regardless of the value of the AllowEmpty property.

 Array of custom colors Gets/sets the default value for the control's property. Fired after the dropdown list is displayed . Fired after the dropdown list closes. Fired before the dropdown list is displayed

The BeforeDropDown event can be canceled; when this happens, the dropdown list is not displayed, and the event does not fire.

Column Owner ColumnOwner Constructor An UltraDataGridViewColumn A DataGridViewColumn which displays a DropDown List. Initializes a new Initializes a new The that this object should be added to. Factory method for creating an editor Called after the creation of the editor to allow initializion such as hooking events or setting default properties Factory method for creating the editor's Owner Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. Specifies whether managed and unmanaged resources should be cleaned up. Performs a phase of a tool's appearance resolution process. The context that was passed into the method. The appearance structure to initialize. The appearance properties to resolve. Enumeration of type describing the area of the embeddable element to which the appearance will be applied Boolean indicating whether the owner should apply its 'HotTrackingAppearance' A string that denotes which appearance to resolve. Applicable only when the 'area' parameter is set to Custom. Represents the phase of the resolution process. Used to copy the settings of the specified The column whose properties should be copied Fires the AfterCloseUp event. The event args. Fires the AfterDropDown event. The event args. Fires the BeforeDropDown event. The event args. Determines whether the property should be serialized Boolean indicating whether the property should be serialized Resets the property to its default value.

Invoke this method to reset the property to its default value.

 Fired after the dropdown list is displayed. Fired after the dropdown list closes. Fired before the dropdown list is displayed.

The BeforeDropDown event can be canceled; when this happens, the dropdown list is not displayed, and the event does not fire.

Gets/sets the alignment for the dropdown button

The column provides the ability to situate the dropdown button on either the right (default) or left side of the cell.

 Gets/sets the display style for the dropdown button

The column provides the ability to control whether the dropdown button is displayed.

When set to Always (default), the dropdown button is always displayed, as is the case with an intrinsic ComboBox control.

When set to Never, the dropdown button is never displayed. Note that this does not affect whether the list portion of the control can be displayed.

When set to OnMouseEnter, the dropdown button is displayed when the cursor passes into the boundaries of the cell, and hidden when it passes outside.

 Gets/sets the alignment for the dropdown list Gets/sets the width of the dropdownlist When set to 0, the width will be the same as the edit portion. When set to -1, the width will automatically adjust to accommodate the longest item text. Gets / Sets whether the edit portion of the control is editable. Gets/sets whether the editor has an MRU (most recently used) list associated with it. Gets/sets the maximum number of items that will be displayed in the dropdown. Gets/sets the maximum number of items that will be displayed in the editor's MRU list.

When this property is set to a value that is less than the current number of items in the MRUList, all items whose index is >= MaxMRUItems are removed; i.e., this property supercedes the addition of members to the collection.

 Gets/sets the MRU (most recently used) list associated with the control's dropdown list.

MRU is an acronym for 'Most Recently Used'. The column's MRU list contains the text of the items that were most recently selected by the end user.

When the property is set to true, as items are selected, a copy of the item is added to the top of the MRU portion of the list. The other items contained in the MRU list, if any, are moved down. This process continues until the number of items in the MRU portion exceeds the value specified by the property. When this happens, the 'oldest' item is removed from the list.

Note: While the MRUList can be set, items that do not match the text of an item in the columns's collection have no relevance and are discarded.

 Gets/sets the sorting style applied to the control's dropdown list of items.

The column provides the ability to sort the items in its dropdown list. The value of the SortStyle property dictates the order in which items will appear.

 Gets/sets the ValueList used by the column.

This property returns a reference to a ValueList object that can be used to set properties of, and invoke methods on, the valuelist that is associated with a column. You can use this reference to access any of the returned valuelist's properties or methods.

This property is also used to assign a particular valuelist object to a column. Once assigned, the valuelist enables a column to use the dropdown list styles and intelligent data entry, specified by the Style and AutoEdit properties, respectively, of the column for which this property is set.

 Column Owner ColumnOwner Constructor An UltraDataGridViewColumn Returns a list of predefined values. The owner context. Returns a list of predefined values or null. Returns whether a selection can only be made from the value list. The owner context

If true will act as a combo with a style of DropDownList.

 If true will act as a combo with a style of DropDownList. A DataGridViewColumn which displays data that requires an Input Mask. A DataGridViewColumn which displays data that requires an Input Mask. Initializes a new Initializes a new The that this object should be added to. Factory method for creating an editor A new . Called after the creation of the editor to allow initializion such as hooking events or setting default properties Factory method for creating the editor's Owner A new object. Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. Specifies whether managed and unmanaged resources should be cleaned up. Used to copy the settings of the specified The column whose properties should be copied Performs a phase of a tool's appearance resolution process. The context that was passed into the method. The appearance structure to initialize. The appearance properties to resolve. Enumeration of type describing the area of the embeddable element to which the appearance will be applied Boolean indicating whether the owner should apply its 'HotTrackingAppearance' A string that denotes which appearance to resolve. Applicable only when the 'area' parameter is set to Custom. Represents the phase of the resolution process.

Returns a Boolean value that determines whether the property is set to its default value.

 True if the property is set to a non-default value.

Returns True if the property is not set to its default value; otherwise, it returns False.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

Invoke the method to reset this property to its default value.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Invoke this method to reset the property to its default value.

Once this method is invoked, the method will return False until the property is set again.

Returns a Boolean value that determines whether the property is set to its default value.

 True if the property is set to a non-default value.

Returns True if the property is not set to its default value; otherwise, it returns False.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

Invoke the method to reset this property to its default value.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Invoke this method to reset the property to its default value.

Once this method is invoked, the method will return False until the property is set again.

 Return the default ValueType of cells in this column. Returns or sets the character that will be used as the pad character. Default is space character (' ').

The pad character is the character that is used to replace the prompt characters when getting the data from the Masked Edit control with DataMode.

 Returns the appearance that will be applied to the literal characters displayed in the prompt text. Returns whether or not the control has a MaskLiteralsAppearance Returns the appearance that will be applied to the prompt characters displayed in the prompt text. By default, the underscore character (_) is used as the prompt character. Returns whether or not the control has a PromptCharAppearance Column Owner ColumnOwner Constructor An UltraDataGridViewColumn Returns character used as a substitute for spaces. The context that was passed into the method. Pad character. True only if pad character info is available. The default implementation returns false. Returns the character used as prompt during editing (e.g. '_'). The context that was passed into the method. Prompt character. True only if prompt character info is available. The default implementation returns false Initializes a new Initializes a new The that this object should be added to. Return the default ValueType of cells in this column. A DataGridViewColumn which displays DateTime values. Initializes a new Initializes a new The that this object should be added to. Factory method for creating an editor A new object. Called after the creation of the editor to allow initializion such as hooking events or setting default properties Factory method for creating the editor's Owner A new object. Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. Specifies whether managed and unmanaged resources should be cleaned up. Used to copy the settings of the specified The column whose properties should be copied Displays the calendar portion of the control. A boolean indicating whether the dropdown calendar was displayed. Called after the list has closed The event args. Called after list is dropped down The event args. Called before the list is dropped down. The event args.

Returns a Boolean value that determines whether the property is set to its default value.

Returns True if the property is not set to its default value; otherwise, it returns False.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

Invoke the method to reset this property to its default value.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Invoke this method to reset the property to its default value.

Once this method is invoked, the method will return False until the property is set again.

 Gets/sets the object used by the column's dropdown calendar. Returns whether or not the control has a DropDownAppearance Gets/sets the alignment for the control's dropdown calendar.

When the control's dropdown button is clicked, a calendar is displayed. Its selected date is preset to the date in the edit portion, or, if no valid date is set, the current date. When the control's dropdown calendar closes up, the edit portion is set to display the date that was selected in the calendar portion. The DropDownCalendarAlignment property determines which side of the control the dropdown calendar will be aligned with.

Fired after the dropdown list is displayed. Fired after the dropdown list closes. Fired before the dropdown list is displayed.

The BeforeDropDown event can be canceled; when this happens, the dropdown list is not displayed, and the event does not fire.

Column Owner ColumnOwner Constructor An UltraDataGridViewColumn A DataGridView column which shows a dropdown list of Font Names Initializes a new Initializes a new The that this object should be added to. Factory method for creating an editor A new object. Used to copy the settings of the specified The column whose properties should be copied Gets/sets the ValueList used by the column.

This property returns a reference to a ValueList object that can be used to set properties of, and invoke methods on, the valuelist that is associated with a column. You can use this reference to access any of the returned valuelist's properties or methods.

This property is also used to assign a particular valuelist object to a column. Once assigned, the valuelist enables a column to use the dropdown list styles and intelligent data entry, specified by the Style and AutoEdit properties, respectively, of the column for which this property is set.

 Gets or sets whether the font names in the list will be displayed in the font they represent.

By default, each font name in the dropdown list is displayed in the font that it represents. The ShowFontNamesInFont property provides the ability to disable this feature.

Gets or sets whether the font's type indicator icon will be displayed for items in the dropdown list. Column Owner ColumnOwner Constructor An UltraDataGridViewColumn UltraDataGridViewColumn which can render Images in a cell

The cells in this column will automatically detect images if the column contains System.Drawing.Bitmap or Byte[] data and display it in the cell.

 Initializes a new Initializes a new The that this object should be added to. Factory method for creating an editor A new object. Called after the creation of the editor to allow initializion such as hooking events or setting default properties Factory method for creating the editor's Owner A new object. Used to copy the settings of the specified The column whose properties should be copied The Default SortMode for the column. Gets the class type of the formatted value associated with the cell. The Type of the cell's formatted value. Returns/sets the color of the border shadow. Returns/sets the extent of the border shadow. Returns or sets the image that is displayed when the property is null. Returns/sets whether a shadow is rendered around the image. DrawBorderShadow creates a rectangular shadow based on the size of the image. It will not properly create borders for non-rectangular images. Returns/sets whether the aspect ratio should be maintained when scaling the image. Returns/sets when the image should be scaled. Column Owner Constructor A DataGridViewColumn which displays data that requires an Input Mask. Initializes a new Initializes a new The that this object should be added to. Returns or sets the type of numeric data the column supports.

The column will support either integer or double-precision decimal numeric entry.

 Return the default ValueType of cells in this column. UltraDataGridViewColumn which renders an editable OptionSet in a cell

The OptionSet will display items based on the ValueList property of the column.

 Initializes a new Initializes a new The that this object should be added to. Factory method for creating an editor A new . Factory method for creating the editor's Owner A new object. Performs application-defined tasks associated with freeing, releasing, or resetting unmanaged resources. Specifies whether managed and unmanaged resources should be cleaned up. Determines if edit mode should be started based on the given key. A KeyEventArgs that represents the key that was pressed. true if edit mode should be started; otherwise, false. The default is false. Called when a character key is pressed while the focus is on a cell. A KeyEventArgs that contains the event data. The index of the cell's parent row. Proscribes common functionality for a cell that allows the manipulation of its value. This parameter is not used in this overload. The to prepare. Returns true if the key is a valid input key for this control The value specifying which keys were pressed. True if the should be notified. True if the key is used by the editor. Called when the mouse button is held down while the pointer is on a cell. A DataGridViewCellMouseEventArgs that contains the event data. Used to copy the settings of the specified The column whose properties should be copied Performs a phase of a tool's appearance resolution process. The context that was passed into the method. The appearance structure to initialize. The appearance properties to resolve. Enumeration of type describing the area of the embeddable element to which the appearance will be applied Boolean indicating whether the owner should apply its 'HotTrackingAppearance' A string that denotes which appearance to resolve. Applicable only when the 'area' parameter is set to Custom. Represents the phase of the resolution process. Gets the class type of the formatted value associated with the cell. The Type of the cell's formatted value. Determines the origin of the option buttons relative to the top/left of the control. Controls the horizontal spacing between item columns. Controls the vertical spacing between item columns. Controls the space between the option button and the text. Gets/sets the ValueList used by the column.

This property returns a reference to a ValueList object that can be used to set properties of, and invoke methods on, the valuelist that is associated with a column. You can use this reference to access any of the returned valuelist's properties or methods.

This property is also used to assign a particular valuelist object to a column. Once assigned, the valuelist enables a column to use the dropdown list styles and intelligent data entry, specified by the Style and AutoEdit properties, respectively, of the column for which this property is set.

 Column Owner ColumnOwner Constructor An UltraDataGridViewColumn Returns a list of predefined values. The owner context. Returns a list of predefined values or null. UltraDataGridViewColumn which display a ProgressBar. Initializes a new Initializes a new The that this object should be added to. Factory method for creating an editor A new . Factory method for creating the editor's Owner A new object. Used to copy the settings of the specified The column whose properties should be copied Performs a phase of a tool's appearance resolution process. The context that was passed into the method. The appearance structure to initialize. The appearance properties to resolve. Enumeration of type describing the area of the embeddable element to which the appearance will be applied Boolean indicating whether the owner should apply its 'HotTrackingAppearance' A string that denotes which appearance to resolve. Applicable only when the 'area' parameter is set to Custom. Represents the phase of the resolution process.

Returns a Boolean value that determines whether the property is set to its default value.

 True if the property is set to a non-default value.

Returns True if the property is not set to its default value; otherwise, it returns False.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

Invoke the method to reset this property to its default value.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Invoke this method to reset the property to its default value.

Once this method is invoked, the method will return False until the property is set again.

 Indicates if the property needs to be serialized True if the PercentSettings collection contains any items Clears the contents of the property Gets the class type of the formatted value associated with the cell. The Type of the cell's formatted value. Default appearance for the filled area of the progress bar.

The FillAppearance property is used to determine appearance of the filled area of the ProgressBar.

 Returns whether or not the control has a FillAppearance Maximum value of the progress bar.

The and Maximum values determine the range used to calculate the percentage of the flood fill. The Maximum value must be greater than or equal to the .

 Minimum value of the progress bar.

The Minimum and values determine the range used to calculate the percentage of the flood fill. The Minimum value must be less than or equal to the .

 Determines the orientation of the ProgressBar.

The ProgressBar can be oriented vertically or horizontally. When rendering horizontally, the fill increases from left to right as the percent increases. When oriented vertically, the fill increases from bottom to top as the percent increases. The default value for the Orientation is horizontal.

 Returns a collection of value based appearances. Gets/sets the width of the segments in a Segmented style progress bar. When set to UltraProgressBar.DefaultSegmentWidth (-1), the default segment width is used. The default segment width is equal to 2/3 the size relative to the orientation. e.g. The width of a progress bar segment in a horizontal progress bar is approximately 2/3 the height of the control. Determines the style of the progress bar.

The Style property determines the type of fill that is rendered. The fill may be a continuous block or be rendered in segments.

 Indicates whether to display the label. Column Owner ColumnOwner Constructor An UltraDataGridViewColumn Returns information needed to format a string. The context that was passed into the method. Returns the format string or null. Returns the IFormatProvider or null. The default implementation returns null (Nothing in VB) Indicates if the element should be displayed vertically Context identifying the element True if the editor should be displayed vertically UltraDataGridViewColumn which renders text. Initializes a new Initializes a new The that this object should be added to. Factory method for creating an editor A new . Factory method for creating the editor's Owner A new object. Used to copy the settings of the specified The column whose properties should be copied Determines if the cell's data should be displayed in a multi-line format.

This property controls the display of multiple lines of text in edit cells in the band or the grid controlled by the specified override. When True, text will wrap in the area of the cell. If the RowSizing property is set to automatically resize the row, the row will expand in height until all lines of text are displayed (or the number of lines specified by the RowSizingAutoMaxLines property is reached).

The CellMultiLine property does not pertain to multi-line editing, only display. Also, you should note that setting a cell to multi-line mode will disable data masking. Only single-line cells can be masked (using the MaskInput and MaskDisplayMode properties.)

 Gets/sets the character to be used to mask the actual typed character.

When the column's Multiline property is true, the PasswordChar property is not applicable.

 Gets or sets which scrollbars, if any, should appear in a Multiline cell.

When the property is false, the Scrollbars property is not applicable.

Note:The control's scrollbars are only displayed when the control is in edit mode.

 Column Owner ColumnOwner Constructor An UltraDataGridViewColumn Returns the character used to mask characters. The context that was passed into the method. The character to display when entering a password. True only if passwordChar character info is available. The default implementation returns false. Returns which scrollbars should appear in an editor's multiline TextBox. The context that was passed into the method. A boolean indicating which scrollbars should appear in an editor's multiline TextBox.

The default implementation returns true.

Note: This method is only applicable when the owner returns true from the method.

Also, when the owner returns true from the WrapText method, horizontal scrollbars are not displayed, regardless of the value returned from this method.

Returns whether the text is multiline. The context that was passed into the method. A boolean indicating whether the text is multiline The default implementation returns false. UltraDataGridViewColumn which displays a Time Zone. Initializes a new Initializes a new The that this object should be added to. Factory method for creating an editor Gets/sets the ValueList used by the column.

This property returns a reference to a ValueList object that can be used to set properties of, and invoke methods on, the valuelist that is associated with a column. You can use this reference to access any of the returned valuelist's properties or methods.

This property cannot be set on the TimeZoneEditorColumn.

 Column Owner Constructor DateTimeEditor class implementation MaskedEdit class constructor, initializes a new instance of the EditorWithMask class. constructor, initializes a new instance of the EditorWithMask class. The default owner associated with this editor Sets input focus to the editor. Returns true if the editor successfully took focus. Determines if the type can be edited. Returns true if the type can be edited. Determines if the type can be rendered. The type to test. Returns true if the type can be rendered. Used to determine the size preferred/required by the editor. Structure that provides information regarding the size calculation including the owner for which the size calculation is occuring, whether to exclude edit elements, whether to include borders, etc. The size needed to render the value by the editor based upon the specified options. Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Called from inside the method of the parent element to create and position the embedded element or elements. The element that will contain the embedded element. An object that derives from the class. Context information that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. The element returned the prior time the parent element's method was called. An instance of a class derived from EmbeddableUIElementBase.

The owner and ownerContext values are saved by the added element to get value and state information later.

 Returns whether the key is used by the editor. A object representing which key to check. True only if the editor is in edit mode and the key is used by the editor. Returns whether this editor displays an ink button. The IInkProvider implementor that provides the inking capabilities. An object that derives from the class. Context information that is used by the specified owner. A boolean indicating whether the editor displays an ink button. Returns true if the edited value is valid (read-only). If the value is invalid, the 'errorMessage' out parameter can contain an error message. If the value is invalid, this out parameter can contain an error message. Accessing this property when the editor is not in edit mode will throw an exception. True if the editor's value is valid, else false. Occurs when the owner gets a key down while in edit mode. The key event args describing which key was pressed. Occurs when the owner gets a key press while in edit mode. Occurs when the owner gets a key up while in edit mode. Called when the editor is disposed Called after edit mode has been entered. It raises the AfterEnterEditMode event. Called before edit mode has been exited. Set to true to cancel the operation. If true must exit even if exit event is cancelled. If true any changes made while in edit mode will be applied. The base implementation raises the BeforeExitEditMode if fireEvent is true. Called after edit mode has been exited. It raises the AfterExitEditMode event. resets all the properties to their original values Returns the default mask used for editing values of dataType. If the dataType is not supported then returns null. Default masks are used in case where no input mask is specified. The to acquire a mask for. A CultureInfo or DateTimeFormatInfo or NumberFormatInfo A string representing the default mask for the specified type. Sets the text to sections collection. The of the editor. The text that should be assigned to the sections collection. The prompt character of the editor. The padding character of the editor. Number of characters from text that matched. Reset SpinButtonDisplayStyle Calls the MessageBeep api Returns true if the data type is supported by the EditorWithMask, false otherwise. True if type is supported, false otherwise. Calculates the default mask for currency based on the cultureInfo. Can be a CultureInfo or a NumberFormatInfo. The default mask for a time. Calculates the default mask for a date based on the specified IFormatProvider implementation, optionally including culture-specific separator/formatting characters. Can be a CultureInfo or a DateTimeFormatInfo. If null is specified, the current culture settings are used. Specifies whether to use only the ShortDatePattern of the specified culture's DateTimeFormatInfo when deriving the mask. If false, culture-specific separator/formatting characters are included. A string representing the default date mask. Calculates the default mask for a date based on the specified IFormatProvider implementation, including culture-specific separator/formatting characters. Can be a CultureInfo or a DateTimeFormatInfo. If null is specified, the current culture settings are used. A string representing the default date mask. Calculates the default mask for currency based on the cultureInfo. Format provider to use to construct a default mask with. Can be a CultureInfo or a NumberFormatInfo. A string representing the default currency mask. Calculates the default mask for currency based on the cultureInfo. Format provider to use to construct a default mask with. Can be a CultureInfo or a NumberFormatInfo. Number of digits in integer section. -1 means use a default. Can be 0 in which case there won't be an integer portion. Number of digits in fraction section. -1 means use one specified by culture info. Can be 0 in which case there won't be fraction section. If '-' or '+' then negative numbers are allowed. '-' specifies that the minus sign should be displayed only when the number is negative. '+' specifies that the plus or minus sign will always be displayed depending on whther the number is negative or positive. If this parameter is any other character then it's ignored. A string representing the default currency mask. Calculates the default mask for double mask based on the CultureInfo Can be a CultureInfo or a NumberFormatInfo. The default mask for a double type. Calculates the default mask for double mask based on the CultureInfo Format provider to use to construct a default mask with. Can be a CultureInfo or a NumberFormatInfo. Number of digits in integer section. -1 means use a default. Can be 0 in which case there won't be an integer portion. Number of digits in fraction section. -1 means use one specified by culture info. Can be 0 in which case there won't be fraction section. If '-' or '+' then negative numbers are allowed. '-' specifies that the minus sign should be displayed only when the number is negative. '+' specifies that the plus or minus sign will always be displayed depending on whther the number is negative or positive. If this parameter is any other character then it's ignored. The default mask for a double type. Returns true if mask is valid for the type. The to compare the specified mask against. The input mask to check against the specified data type. Can be a CultureInfo or a NumberFormatInfo. True if mask is valid, false otherwise. Returns true if mask is valid for the type. The to compare the specified mask against. The input mask to check against the specified data type. The of the editor. The owner context used to provide additional information about the element. True if mask is valid, false otherwise. Returns the text for the object using the specified mask mode. The mode that determines how literals and prompt characters are accounted for. Sets the text. The text to assign to the editor. Reset TextSlectionBackColor Reset TextSlectionForeColor Selects all the text in the control. Deletes currently selected text if possible and shifts characters accordingly.

When you invoke this method, the control tries to delete the currently selected text and shift characters. If nothing is selected, it tries to delete the character at the current input position.

This method returns True if the operation was successful. If the operation fails because characters after the selection could not be shifted, the method returns False.

 True if the operation was successful. Performs a Copy edit operation on the currently selected text, placing it on the clipboard. Performs a Cut edit operation on the currently selected text, removing it from the control and placing it on the clipboard. Performs a Paste edit operation. Toggles between insert and overstrike mode. Simulates user interaction with the control. The that the editor should execute. Specifies whether the Shift key was pressed. Specifies whether the Ctrl key was pressed. True if the action has completed successfully.

Invoke this method to simulate an action the user can perform.

Many actions are only appropriate in certain situations; if an action is inappropriate, it will not be performed.

You can use the property to determine the state of the control when the action is about to be performed.

 Indicates if the specified character is valid for use as a prompt character for the . Character to evaluate False if the character is a tab, new line or carriage return. Otherwise true is returned. Gets the default mask for the editor. When the owner doesn't provide any mask, value of this property will be used as the default mask. Default value is null. You should only override this property if your editor only supports a specific type. For example, DateTimeEditor only supports Date. Editing numbers, or strings do not make sense for a date time editor. So for such editors, override and return a default mask for that editor. Can be a CultureInfo or a DateTimeFormatInfo. A string representing the editor's default input mask. Invoked when a property on a subobject has changed. Provides information about the change Clones the editor Used to initialize the state of the object based on another editor instance. Editor whose property values are to be copied Converts data value to text making use of any format provider and format strings that owner may provide. If unsuccessful, returns null. The value to be converted to text. The of the editor. The owner context used to provide additional information about the element. A string representing the converted value. Creates a copy of the embeddable editor with the specified default owner. An instance of the default EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class from which to obtain owner-specific information A copy of the editor Used by an editor owner to create an accessible object for a specific object managed by an editor. Parent accessible object for the accessible object to create Editor owner Owner context that can be supplied to the editor owner to obtain information about the object represented by the accessible instance. An accessible object that represents the specified owner context for the editor. Provides editor-specific display value. Display string. Provides editor-specific editor value. Editor value. Checks validity of converted values. Type of conversion. Value to check. Owner. Owner context. Additional information in the case of failure. True if the destination value is valid. Occurs when the user attempts to perform an operation that cannot be completed.

Event that is fired when user performs an action that can not be executed because the state of the control (caret position, selection and other properties) does not allow it. For example, when the user presses left arrow key when caret is already at the first display character in the MaskedEdit, the left arrow key action (which is to move the caret to previous display character) can not be performed. In this case such an action is cosidered an invalid operation and this event is fired.

 Occurs when the user types a character that fails mask validation. The InvalidChar event is fired when user types a character that does not match the input mask associated with the current input position. Returns true if the editor can take focus while in edit mode (read-only). Returns true if the editor has focus (read-only). The current value being edited. Accessing this property when the editor is not in edit mode will throw an exception. Returns the current text being edited without doing any validation. This will return the text currently typed in. If the editor does not have an textbox-like control, it will return the current edit value in form of text. Accessing this property when the editor is not in edit mode will throw an exception. Returns true if the edited value is valid (read-only). Accessing this property when the editor is not in edit mode will throw an exception. Returns true if this editor supports selecting text. The default implementation returns false. Derived classes that override this property and return true must also override the , , and properties. Gets or sets the number of characters selected in the editor. Gets or sets the starting point of text selected in the editor. Gets or sets the currently selected text in the editor. Gets the length of the text in the editor. Determines if the SpinIncrement has been set. Returns True if the SpinIncrement does not equal null and is not a Zeroed DateTimeIncrement. SpinButtonDisplay style dictates whether to show spin buttons and where to show them. Spin buttons allow the user to increment and decrement values in current section ( section where the caret is ). This can be used for editing numbers for example. Returns or sets a value indicating whether the control's spin buttons should wrap its value.

If true the spin button will wrap the value incremented/decremented based on its Min/Max value.

 A collection of the sections used in the control. Only returns a valid collection if currently in edit mode and if mask has been parsed. A collection of the display characters used in the control. Only returns a valid collection if currently in edit mode and if mask has been parsed. Returns or sets the background color of selected text. gets or sets the fore color of the selected text Returns or sets the editing mode (insert or overstrike) of the control.

When this property is set to True, characters typed will be inserted at the current text caret position and any following characters will be moved. When set to false, typing at an insertion point that contains an existing character will replace that character. The value of this flag also affects how characters are deleted using either The Delete key or the Backspace key. When in insert mode, characters after the character being deleted will be shifted by one to the left within the section.

 Returns bit flags that signify the current editing state of the control. Gives you the ability to reconfigure the way the control responds to user keystrokes.

The KeyActionMappings property provides access to the control's mechanism for handling keyboard input from users. All keystrokes for actions such as selection, navigation and editing are stored in a table-based system that you can examine and modify using this property. Through the KeyActionsMappings property, you can customize the keyboard layout of the control to match your own standards for application interactivity.

For example, if you wanted users to be able to navigate between cells by pressing the F8 key, you could add this behavior. You can specify the key code and any special modifier keys associated with an action, as well as determine whether a key mapping applies in a given context.

KeyCode ActionCode StateRequired StateDisallowed SpecialKeysRequired SpecialKeysDisallowed
RightNextCharacterCharacterNoneNoneCtrl
RightNextSectionCharacterLastSectionCtrlNone
RightAfterLastCharacterLastSectionNoneCtrlNone
RightSetPivotNoneUnInitializedNoneShift
LeftPrevCharacterNoneFirstCharacterNoneCtrl
LeftPrevSectionNoneFirstSectionCtrlNone
LeftFirstCharacterFirstSectionFirstCharacterCtrlNone
LeftSetPivotNoneUnInitializedNoneShift
HomeFirstCharacterNoneFirstCharacterNoneNone
HomeSetPivotNoneUnInitializedNoneShift
EndAfterLastCharacterNoneAfterLastCharacterNoneNone
EndSetPivotNoneUnInitializedNoneShift
TabNextSectionCharacterLastSectionNoneShift
TabSetPivotCharacterLastSectionNoneShift
TabSelectSectionCharacterLastSectionNoneShift
TabNextControlLastSectionNoneNoneShift
TabNextControlAfterLastCharacterNoneNoneShift
TabNextControlUnInitializedCharacter, AfterLastCharacterNone
TabPrevSectionNoneFirstSectionShiftNone
TabSetPivotNoneFirstSectionShiftNone
TabSelectSectionNoneFirstSectionShiftNone
TabPrevControlFirstSectionNoneShiftNone
TabPrevControlUnInitializedCharacter, AfterLastCharacterShift
DeleteDeleteSelectedNoneNoneNone
DeleteDeleteCharacterSelectedNoneShift
DeleteBackspaceNoneNoneShiftCtrl
DeleteAfterLastCharacterCharacterSelectedCtrlShift
DeleteDeleteCharacterSelectedCtrlShift
BackBackspaceSelectedNoneNoneNone
BackBackspaceNoneFirstCharacter, SelectedNoneNone
CCopySelectedNoneCtrlNone
XCutSelectedNoneCtrlNone
VPasteNoneNoneCtrlNone
InsertToggleInsertionModeNoneNoneNoneNone
UpUpKeyActionNoneUnInitializedNoneNone
DownDownKeyActionNoneUnInitializedNoneNone

 Indicates whether the mask editor displays NullText if the value entered is null and the control doesn't have focus. Indicates whether the mask editor displays NullText if the value entered is null and the control doesn't have focus. Determines when to show the Ink Button on the editor This property determines when to show the Ink Button on the editor Determines whether the Tab key will tab between number sections in a masked editor control. Specifies whether to shift characters across section boundaries when deleting characters. Indicates that this editor has its own default ContextMenu, so a ContextMenu from an ancestor control is ignored Returns or sets a value indicating the amount the control's Value will be incremented/decremented by when the control's spin functionality. Default type used by the editor in the case of data filter. Null means that editor supports multiple data types and expects type to be set or provided by the owner. If is used for conversions between Owner and Editor, this property should also be set. EditorWithMask will use specified type to set default mask in editor constructor (before first call to ). Specifies whether to select only the entered characters or all the characters (including prompt characters) when the editor performs the operation of select all text. The default value of the property is SelectAllCharacters.

When this property is set to SelectEnteredCharacters, the select-all-text operation will select text starting from the first entered character to the last entered character, including adjacent literals.

Specifies whether to auto-fill empty date components when the user attempts to leave the editor. The default is None. Delegate associated with the InvalidOperation event. Delegate associated with the InvalidChar event. Indicates whether this object is equal to the passed in obj. Rerturns thehas code of the object. Accessible object representing an progress bar editor instance. Initializes a new Parent accessible object Associated mask editor Associated owner Owner context that identifies the object which the accessible instance represents Retrieves the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. The zero-based index of the accessible child. An AccessibleObject that represents the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Returns the UIElement associated with a particular child accessible object. Accessible object representing the child whose uielement should be returned. The uielement used to display the child or null if the element is not available. Returns the selected object. An AccessibleObject that specifies the currently focused child. This method returns the calling object if the object itself is focused. Returns a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no object has focus. Returns the role of the accessible object. Accessible object representing the spin button for a masked editor. Initializes a new Parent accessible object Invoked when the default action of the child spin button item is invoked. True if the up/more spin button is pressed, otherwise false. Used to determine the available state of the spin button item True to determine the state of the up/more spin button, otherwise false to determine the state of the down/less spin button item. True if the value can be changed by the specified spin button direction Returns the UIElement for the specified spin button item Direction of the spin button item whose element should be returned. The uielement representing the spin button item or null if one is not available Accessible object representing the area containing the mask display characters. Initializes a new Parent accessible object Retrieves the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. The zero-based index of the accessible child. An AccessibleObject that represents the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Returns the object that has the keyboard focus. An AccessibleObject that specifies the currently focused child. This method returns the calling object if the object itself is focused. Returns a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no object has focus. Returns the role of the accessible object. Returns the text of the masked edit. Returns the state of the accessible object. Returns the name of the accessible object. Accessible object representing a display character. Initializes a new Parent accessible object Index of the display character associated with the accessible instance Returns the control used to synchronize accessibility calls. Navigates to another accessible object One of the AccessibleNavigation values An AccessibleObject that represents one of the AccessibleNavigation values Modifies the selection or moves the keyboard focus of the accessible object One of the AccessibleSelection values Returns the role of the accessible object. Returns the text of the masked edit. Returns the state of the accessible object. Gets the location and size of the accessible object Gets the parent of an accessible object Returns the name of the accessible object. Accessible object representing a text selection in a masked editor. Initializes a new Parent accessible object Returns the control used to synchronize accessibility calls. Modifies the selection or moves the keyboard focus of the accessible object One of the AccessibleSelection values Navigates to another accessible object One of the AccessibleNavigation values An AccessibleObject that represents one of the AccessibleNavigation values Returns the role of the accessible object. Gets the parent of an accessible object Returns the name of the accessible object. Returns the state of the accessible object. Gets the location and size of the accessible object Custom exception thrown in the case of invalid masked editor value. Constructor. The error message that explains the reason for the exception. The exception that is the cause of the current exception. Creates a new instance of the DateTimeEditor class Constructor - creates a new instance of the DateTimeEditor class The default owner associated with this editor Called when the FontNameEditor class is disposed Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Called from inside the method of the parent element to create and position the embedded element or elements. The element that will contain the embedded element. An object that derives from the class. Context information that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. The element returned the prior time the parent element's method was called. An instance of a class derived from EmbeddableUIElementBase.

The owner and ownerContext values are saved by the added element to get value and state information later.

 Used to determine the size preferred/required by the editor. Structure that provides information regarding the size calculation including the owner for which the size calculation is occuring, whether to exclude edit elements, whether to include borders, etc. The size needed to render the value by the editor based upon the specified options. Called after edit mode has been entered. The base implementation raises the AfterEnterEditMode event. Drops down the dropdown. True if successful. Closes the dropdown. Determines if the type can be edited. The data type to test Returns true if the type can be edited. Determines if the type can be rendered. The data type to test Returns true if the type can be edited. Returns whether the key is used by the editor. True only if the editor is in edit mode and the key is used by the editor. Sets input focus to the editor. Returns true if the editor successfully took focus. Returns the default input mask for the DateTimeEditor. The owner-supplied format information. The input mask to use by default. Returns the display style for the DateTimeEditor's spin buttons Infragistics.Win.ButtonDisplayStyle Sets the display style for the DateTimeEditor's spin buttons The new to assign to the editor. Called when the MonthDropDown's OnLeave event fires Right after this returns, the MonthDropDown hides itself Occurs when the owner gets a key down while in edit mode. The key event args describing which key was pressed. Called before the editor exits edit mode Set to true to cancel the operation. If true must exit even if exit event is cancelled. If true any changes made while in edit mode will be applied. Clones the editor Used to initialize the state of the object based on another editor instance. Editor whose property values are to be copied Creates a copy of the embeddable editor with the specified default owner. An instance of the default EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class from which to obtain owner-specific information A copy of the editor Used by an editor owner to create an accessible object for a specific object managed by an editor. Parent accessible object for the accessible object to create Editor owner Owner context that can be supplied to the editor owner to obtain information about the object represented by the accessible instance. An accessible object that represents the specified owner context for the editor. Gets/sets the value being edited. Returns whether the editor currently has input focus Returns whether the editor can receive input focus while in edit mode Gets/sets the display style for the dropdown button Gets/sets the alignment for the dropdown button Gets/sets the alignment for the spin buttons Gets/sets the alignment for the dropdown list Returns whether the editor wants to receive the owner's key events The DateTimeEditor always returns true because the EditorWithMaskEmbeddableUIElement does not take input focus Returns true to indicate that the editor supports a dropdown Accessible object representing an progress bar editor instance. Initializes a new Parent accessible object Associated datetime editor Associated owner Owner context that identifies the object which the accessible instance represents Retrieves the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. The zero-based index of the accessible child. An AccessibleObject that represents the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Returns the UIElement associated with a particular child accessible object. Accessible object representing the child whose uielement should be returned. The uielement used to display the child or null if the element is not available. Returns the role of the accessible object. Constructor Constructor Holds a reference to the control returned from the EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase's GetControl method Constructor The DateTimeEditor associated with this MonthDropDown Called when a key is pressed down OnKeyUp Key event arguments OnKeyPress KeyPress event arguments Overrides the OnMouseDown base method. Called when a mouse button is released Raises the System.Windows.Forms.MonthCalendar.DateSelected event. A System.Windows.Forms.DateRangeEventArgs that contains the event data. Called when the selected date range changes The event args. Returns whether the specified key is used by the control The object indicating which keys were pressed. A boolean indicating whether the specified key is used by the control Called when the control is disposed of. Specifies whether managed and unmanaged resources should be cleaned up. Non-Vista, as such undefined. MCMV_MONTH on Vista MCMV_YEAR on Vista MCMV_DECADE on Vista MCMV_CENTURY on Vista Constructor The DateTimeEditor associated with this MonthDropDown Overridden method. Applies solid border to the month calendar. DateTimeEditorUIElement class Implemented by UIElements that support "active borders" Returns the resolved ButtonAppearance The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. The of the button. The of the button. Returns the DisplayStyle to be applied to the dropdown button Returns whether the cursor is currently positioned over the element Returns the resolved BackColor Constructor The parent element. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditorOwner interface. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditor interface. Context information used by the owner to identify the value. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. Initializes the appearance of the EditorWithTextUIElement and descendants. AppearanceData AppearancePropFlags Makes sure that the child elements for this element are in the ChildElements array and that they are positioned properly. Called before the element draw process starts. Resolves the ButtonAppearance OnMouseEnter OnMouseLeave OnMouseDown Mouse event arguments True if the mouse button was pressed while the cursor was positioned over the adjustable area If not null, contains a reference to the element that has captured the mouse Handles the rendering of the element using the system themes. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element was able to successfully render with the system theme. Used to determine whether the remaining draw methods are invoked. Returns the DisplayStyle provided by the EmbeddableEditorOwnerInfoBase-derived owner Returns whether the cursor is currently positioned over the element Returns the BackColor Returns the border style of the element. Gets/sets whether this element is enabled. Returns whether the data this element displays is fully visible. The UIElement used to represent the DateTimeEditor's dropdown button The UIElement used to represent the EditorWithCombo's dropdown button A drop down button UI element Constructor, initializes a new instance of the DropDownButtonUIElement class. Draws the element in its pressed state Default drawfocus method draws a focus rect inside the element's borders. Do not draw the focus. The used to provide rendering information. Called when the mouse is pressed over the button Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Overrides the rendering of the dropdown button arrow. The used to provide rendering information. Handles the rendering of the element using the system themes. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element was able to successfully render with the system theme. Used to determine whether the remaining draw methods are invoked. Returns the ui role for the element. The width of the dropdown button when the method returns a value other than Standard. Constructor OnMouseDown Mouse event arguments True if the mouse button was pressed while the cursor was positioned over the adjustable area If not null, contains a reference to the element that has captured the mouse True if the action has been handled. Called when the mouse is released over an element Mouse event arguments Returning true will ignore the next click event Called when the element is double clicked If true the mouse was double-clicked over the adjustable area of the element Draws the button's borders The used to provide rendering information. Overrides the rendering of the dropdown button arrow. The used to provide rendering information. Since the actual button style is flat when the display style is Office2000 or OfficeXP, we need to override this so the arrow indicator shifts when it is clicked Initializes the appearance of the EditorWithTextUIElement and descendants. AppearanceData AppearancePropFlags Position this element's child elements. Indicates if the button is aligned to the left of the edit area. Gets the button style for the element. We override this so that we can change style on the fly, based on the owner's display style, and whether the mouse is over the parent Gets/sets whether the button appears in a pressed state Editor element. Indicates if the button is considered as being in the pressed state. Indicates if the button style requires invalidation of the element on the mouse enter and exit. Constructor Parent element Returns the ui role for the element. Constructor The parent element of this element. OnMouseDown Mouse event arguments True if the mouse button was pressed while the cursor was positioned over the adjustable area If not null, contains a reference to the element that has captured the mouse Indicates if the button is aligned to the left of the edit area. An structure that contains an immutable integer value which can also be marked as default (no value). Constructor Initial value Constructor Initial value Compares this instance to a specified object and returns an indication of their relative values. Compares this instance to a specified object and returns an indication of their relative values. A signed number indicating the relative values of this instance and value. Converts the integer to a DefaultableInteger equivalent. An integer. A DefaultableInteger equivalent of the integer. Converts the string representation of a number to its DefaultableInteger equivalent. A string to convert. A DefaultableInteger equivalent to the string. Converts the string representation of a number to its DefaultableInteger equivalent. A string to convert. An that supplies culture-specific formatting information about s. A DefaultableInteger equivalent to the string. Converts the string representation of a number to its DefaultableInteger equivalent. A string to convert. The combination of one or more constants that indicates the permitted format of s. An that supplies culture-specific formatting information about s. A DefaultableInteger equivalent to the string. Converts the string representation of a number to its DefaultableInteger equivalent. A string to convert. The combination of one or more constants that indicates the permitted format of s. A DefaultableInteger equivalent to the string. Determines whether the specified is equal to the current Object. The to compare with the current Object. true if the specified see cref="System.Object"/> is equal to the current Object; otherwise, false. Serves as a hash function for a particular type, suitable for use in hashing algorithms and data structures like a hash table. Returns a string that represents the object. A string representation of the object. Equality operator The left-hand argument in the operation. The right-hand argument in the operation. True if the integer values of both parameters are equal. Inequality operator The left-hand argument in the operation. The right-hand argument in the operation. True if the integer values of both parameters are not equal. Addition operator The first value to sum. The value to add to the first value. The sum of the two integers, or a new DefaultableInteger if both values are defaults. Subtraction The left-hand argument in the operation. The right-hand argument in the operation. A new DefaultableInteger resulting in the subtraction of the two parameters. Multiplication operator The left-hand argument in the operation. The right-hand argument in the operation. A new DefaultableInteger that is the result of the multiplication of the integer values of the parameters. Division operator The first operand in the operation. The value that the first parameter is being divided by. A DefaultableInteger whose value is the result of the integral division of the parameters, or a new instance if both are defaults. Implicit conversion operator. The source value. An integer value. If the defaultableInteger was defualt then 0 is returned. Implicit conversion operator. The source value. A DefaultableInteger set to value. Returns a string that represents the object. A string that represents the formatting that should be applied to the object. A string representation of the object. Returns a string that represents the object. A that provides culture-specific formatting. A string representation of the object. Returns a string that represents the object. A string that represents the formatting that should be applied to the object. A that provides culture-specific formatting. A string representation of the object. Returns a new instance of DefaultableInteger which is marked as default. Returns whether the is marked as default. Returns the integer value. TypeConverter for the structure. Returns true if the object can convert to that type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert to. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the object to the requested type. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. A that represents the type you want to convert to. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. Returns true if the object can convert from the type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert from. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts from one type to another. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. UITypeEditor for entering multiple lines of text. Used to determine the type of UIEditor that will be displayed. ITypeDescriptorContext UITypeEditorEditStyle specifying the type of UIEditor. Used to edit the value and convert the value as needed. ITypeDescriptorContext IServiceProvider Current value Edited value. Indicates if the a small representation of the value is rendered in the property grid. Context information about the property to render True to indicate that a value will be rendered Invoked when a small representation of the value should be rendered. Event arguments UITypeEditor for selecting a numeric value from a range using a slider/trackbar. Used to determine the type of UIEditor that will be displayed. ITypeDescriptorContext UITypeEditorEditStyle specifying the type of UIEditor. Used to edit the value and convert the value as needed. ITypeDescriptorContext IServiceProvider Current value Edited value. Invoked when the trackbar is created so that minimum and maximum values can be initialized. TrackBar control to be displayed Invoked when the edit has been cancelled Invoked when the value changes Invoked when the preview needs to be updated The paint event args. Returns the current edited value. Returns the context specified during the editing of the value. Returns the service provider specified in the editing of the value. Used to indicate if a preview window should be displayed Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Invoked when a dialog key such as Escape or Enter are pressed. Key True if the key is processed Top-level form used to host instances of the window displayed by the UltraDesktopAlert component. Creates a new instance of the class. The associated control that will be hosted by the form. Called when this instance is closed. Called when this instance's size changes. Called when this instance's location changes. Shows the form at the specified size and location, with the speficied opacity. The describing the bounds of the window. The degree of transparency of the form, between 0.0f and 1.0f. Clean up any resources being used. Specifies whether managed and unmanaged resources should be cleaned up. Returns Size.Empty so this thing will not be shown at some arbitrary size when it has already been set to a different value. Returns true if the window was created in a full trust environment. Top-level form used to host instances of the window displayed by the UltraDesktopAlert component. Creates a new instance of the class. The associated control that will be hosted by the form. Override WndProc to trap the WM_MOUSEACTIVATE message and return NOACTIVATE A reference to the that is being processed. Overridden. Returns true if the window was created in a full trust environment. The DockingAreaManager class exposes static methods for registering and unregistering windows with multiple docking areas. Docked windows are inside both toolbars and unpinned dockings areas. The unpinned tab areas used by dockable windows are inside the toolbar docking areas. The vertical unpinned tab areas are placed outside the horizontal ones. The unpinned tab areas used by dockable windows are inside the toolbar docking areas. The vertical unpinned tab areas are placed outside the horizontal ones. The toolbar docking areas are inside the status bar but outside the unpinned tab areas used by dockable windows. The horizontal toolbar docking areas are placed outside the vertical ones. The toolbar docking areas are inside the status bar but outside the unpinned tab areas used by dockable windows. The horizontal toolbar docking areas are placed outside the vertical ones. Since the status bar is normally docked to the bottom of the window it has the highest priority and is therefore placed outside all other docking areas. Registers a parent control to ensure that the position of docked child controls takes into account the of the docking areas.> The control or form whose child docking areas positions are to be maintained.

Controls that are docked and implement the interface will positioned so that the ones with the highest will be placed outsied ones with lower priorties.

 Unregisters the parent control. The control or form to unregister.

Register calls need to be matched with unregister calls.

Each call to adds to a 'register' count and each call to UnregisterDockingAreaParent decrements it.

The parent control is monitored until the 'register' count goes to 0 or the control is disposed.

 Returns the docking priority level assigned to the specified control. Control whose priority level should be checked. If the control implements the IDockingArea interface, the is returned. If the control is a or control, the corresponding priority level will be returned. For all other controls, 0 is returned to indicate that it has no docking priority specified. ctor Implemented by a control that needs to expose the priority the should use when adjusting the z-order of its docked sibling controls. The priority used to control which areas are docked outside of other areas.

The higher the priority the farther outside the docking area is placed.

Any control that implements IDockingArea and returns a PriorityLevel > 0 will be placed outside of all docked controls that don't implement IDockingArea.

Note: Controls that implement and return a of Front will be positioned at the highest z-order positions in the containing control.

Note: This interface is used by the when a container has been registered using the .

 Indicates where in the z-order the control will be positioned relative to other controls. The control is positioned in the back of the z-order. A docked control with the highest z-order is positioned closer to the edge of the container then other docked controls with the same dock style. The control is positioned in the front of the z-order. Implemented by a control that needs to expose the priority and placement the should use when adjusting the z-order of its sibling controls. Returns a indicating where in the z-order, the controls should be positioned relative to one another.

The is still used to determine which control has a higher z-order but the position in the z-order of the controls collection at which the control implementing this interface will be placed will be based on the Position. When implementing only IDockingArea or when returning Back, the controls are positioned at the bottom of the z-order list with the control in that grouping that has the highest priority level being further back. Similarly, when Front is returned, the control with the higher priority level is further back in the z-order.

 Implemented by a control that does not support being docked by an UltraDockManager Indicates if the control should be allowed to be docked by an UltraDockManager Control used to display a drop point indication. Interface for implementing layout items. Gets the preferred size of the layout item. Gets the minimum size of the layout item. Indicates whether the item is visible or not. Items that are not visible are ignored. Initializes a new Initializes a new ComponentRole that will provide the custom properties used to initialize the drop indicator. Invoked when the region for the control should be created. Raises the event PaintEventArgs Called when the control is first created Returns the location that the indicators should be positioned at based on the specified item rect. Location and size of the item Alignment of the indicator The location where the control should be positioned. Invoked when the indicator is being disposed. Indicates the size of the item that where the indicator will be displayed. Indicates the orientation of the indicator arrows Returns or sets the current brush. Determines the size of drop indicator arrows Determines the shape of the drop indicator. Arrows or a rectangle Gets or sets the encapsulating object for custom Drop Indicator settings. Determines if the DragDropIndicatorSettings has been created. Control used to display an element that is being dragged Initializes a new Initializes the image that will be rendered by the drag indicator UIElement used to create the display Initializes the image that will be rendered by the drag indicator An array of UIElements used to create the display Initializes the image that will be rendered by the drag indicator An image used to create the display Initializes the image that will be rendered by the drag indicator An image used to create the display Can be null. The region of the image to display. The complement will be made transparent. Raises the event PaintEventArgs Dispose any resources used by the control Specifies whether managed and unmanaged resources should be cleaned up. Enumeration of arrow alignments Near Far Center Class for managing the display of drag drop indicators Initializes a new for use only as a DropIndicator. The DragIndicator will not work using this constructor. Orientation of the drop indicators Root control that the drag operation will be over Initializes a new for use only as a DropIndicator. The DragIndicator will not work using this constructor. Orientation of the drop indicators Root control that the drag operation will be over The opacity of the drag indicator. Initializes a new Amount that the drag indicator should be offset from the mouse location when displayed Element that should be rendered in the drag indicator Orientation of the drop indicators Root control that the drag operation will be over Initializes a new Amount that the drag indicator should be offset from the mouse location when displayed An array of Elements that should be rendered in the drag indicator Orientation of the drop indicators Root control that the drag operation will be over Initializes a new Amount that the drag indicator should be offset from the mouse location when displayed An array of Elements that should be rendered in the drag indicator Orientation of the drop indicators Root control that the drag operation will be over The opacity to use when displaying the drag indicator. Initializes a new Amount that the drag indicator should be offset from the mouse location when displayed An array of Elements that should be rendered in the drag indicator Orientation of the drop indicators Root control that the drag operation will be over ComponentRole that will be used to obtain the custom properties for the 'DragDropIndicatorManager' shared object. Creates a new A new DropIndicatorControl. Creates a new A new DragIndicatorControl. Hides the drag indicator Hides the drop indicator Initializes the with the specified element Element that should be rendered in the drag indicator Initializes the with the specified element An array of Elements that should be rendered in the drag indicator Initializes the with the specified image The image that should be rendered in the drag indicator Initializes the with the specified image The image that should be rendered in the drag indicator Can be null. The region of the image to display. The complement will be made transparent. Initializes the with the specified brush Brush that should be used to render the indicator arrows Initializes the with the custom drop indicator images and brush The custom drop indicator settings Invoked when the object is disposed and should released any resources used by the class. Positions and displays the drag indicator based on the specified screen location Positions and displays the drag indicator based on the specified screen location Location of the mouse in screen coordinates Positions and displays the drop indicator based on the specified drop rect in screen coordinates Drop rect in screen coordinates Alignment of the indicator with respect to the drop rect Positions and displays the drop indicator based on the specified drop rect in screen coordinates Drop rect in screen coordinates Alignment of the indicator with respect to the drop rect Orientation of the drop indicator Amount that the drag indicator should be offset from the mouse location when displayed Orientation of the drop indicator Root control that the drag operation will be over Determines the size of drop indicator arrows Determines the size of drop indicator arrows Returns the managed Returns the managed Indicates if the drag indicator is currently visible Indicates if the drop indicator is currently visible Returns the current location of the indicator in screen coordinates Returns the current location of the indicator in screen coordinates Used to determine the size of Drop Indicator arrows when dragging and dropping column in an UltraWinGrid using RowLayouts. Use small arrows Use large arrows Determines the shape of the Drop Indicator Dislpay arrows Display a Rectangle Display a custom Image Indicates the bottom indicator Indicates the left indicator Indicates the right indicator Indicates the top indicator Overriden. Receives message notifications for the tooltip form. By reference message This class encapsulates all the customization information related to the drop indicators Default color for the Drop Indicators Default constructor for the DropIndicatorCustomizationInfo class. Constructor which provides the ability to assign custom drop indicator images, as well as the color of the brush used used to draw the default arrows and drop rectangle. Image used for the bottom drop indicator Image used for the left drop indicator Image used for the right drop indicator Image used for the top drop indicator Color used for the brush Constructor which provides the ability to assign custom drop indicator images, as well as the color of the brush used used to draw the default arrows and drop rectangle. Image used for the bottom drop indicator Image used for the left drop indicator Image used for the right drop indicator Image used for the top drop indicator Color used for the brush Indicates if the Image should be colorized Constructor used to deserialization to initialize a new instance of the class with the serialized property values The used to obtain the serialized properties of the object Context for the deserialization Returns true if the object is set to any non-default values. Returns true if the object is set to any non-default values Resets the properties back to their defaults Returns true if the property is set to a non-default value. Returns true if this property is not set to its default value Resets the property to its default value. Returns true if the property is set to a non-default value. Returns true if this property is not set to its default value Resets the property to its default value. Returns true if the property is set to a non-default value. Returns true if this property is not set to its default value Resets the property to its default value. Returns true if the property is set to a non-default value. Returns true if this property is not set to its default value Resets the property to its default value. Returns true if the property is set to a non-default value. Returns true if this property is not set to its default value Resets the property to its default value. Created a shallow copy. Returns the clone DragDropIndicatorSettings Invoked when the DragDropIndicatorSettings is being disposed. Gets or sets the image used for the left drop indicator If this property has not been specifically set, an attempt to resolve the image will be made using the other image properties. A resolved image is rotated appropriately. Resolution order: If the left image is not set, the right image will be checked. If the right image is not set, the top image will be checked. If the top image is not set, the bottom image will be checked. If none of the images are set, null is returned. Gets or sets the image used for the right drop indicator If this property has not been specifically set, an attempt to resolve the image will be made using the other image properties. A resolved image is rotated appropriately. Resolution order: If the right image is not set, the left image will be checked. If the left image is not set, the bottom image will be checked. If the bottom image is not set, the top image will be checked. If none of the images are set, null is returned. Gets or sets the image used for the top drop indicator If this property has not been specifically set, an attempt to resolve the image will be made using the other image properties. A resolved image is rotated appropriately. Resolution order: If the top image is not set, the bottom image will be checked. If the bottom image is not set, the left image will be checked. If the left image is not set, the right image will be checked. If none of the images are set, null is returned. Gets or sets the image used for the bottom drop indicator If this property has not been specifically set, an attempt to resolve the image will be made using the other image properties. A resolved image is rotated appropriately. Resolution order: If the bottom image is not set, the top image will be checked. If the top image is not set, the right image will be checked. If the right image is not set, the left image will be checked. If none of the images are set, null is returned. Gets or sets the color used for the default drop indicator arrows and drop rectangle Determines if any of the image properties were set. The DrawCache class is used during a drawing operation to cache pens and brushes. It also provides alpha blending staging and consolidation. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the DrawCache class. The graphics object to render on The element to be drawn True to support alphablending (ignored if print is true) True means a memory graphics object will always be created to cache drawing untilthe end. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the DrawCache class. The graphics object to render on The element to be drawn The mode of alpha blending used (ignored if print is true) True means a memory graphics object will always be created to cache drawing untilthe end. Finalizer Cleans up (disposes) the cached resources Draws the arrow for a scroll button, dropdown button, etc. Graphics object used to render the arrow. Rect in which the arrow will be centered. Maximum size for the arrow to be rendered. Direction of the scroll arrow. Size indicating how much to offset the arrow. Color used to render the outline for the arrow. Color used to fill the arrow. Boolean indicating if a line at the head of the arrow should be rendered (i.e. for indicating first/last or min/max). Draws a Windows XP-style arrow for a scroll button, dropdown button, etc. Graphics object used to render the arrow. Rect in which the arrow will be centered. Direction of the scroll arrow. The amount by which to offset the placement of the arrow indicator. Color used to draw the arrow.

Note: The values Min and Max are not supported for the 'direction' parameter.

 Determines how much the image should be offset based on the button type, state and style. State of the button. Style of the button. Type of button. The amount the image should be offset. Determines how much the image should be offset based on the button type, state and style. State of the button. Style of the button. Type of button. Indicates if the maximum offset for the button style should be returned. The amount the image should be offset. Determines how much the text should be offset based on the button type, state and style. State of the button. Style of the button. Type of button. The amount the text should be offset. Determines how much the text should be offset based on the button type, state and style. State of the button. Style of the button. Type of button. Indicates if the maximum offset for the button style should be returned. The amount the text should be offset. Returns the value of property. Note that this is not the resolved value. An enumerator specifying the pen type A 1 pixel wide solid pen A dashed line pen A dotted line pen A pen in a hilighted color (based on the original requetsed color) A pen in a very hilighted color (based on the original requetsed color) A pen in a dark color (based on the original requetsed color) A pen in a very dark color (based on the original requetsed color) A pen in the 3D face color A pen in the 3D hilite color A pen in the 3D very hilite color A pen in the 3D shadow color A pen in the 3D very shadow color A 2 pixel wide solid pen A 1 pixel wide solid pen Provides a means of passing parameters to DrawUtility.DrawString or DrawUtility.MeasureString through a single instance. Creates a new instance. The graphics object used to draw or measure the text. The text to draw or measure. The font to use when drawing or measuring the text. The SolidBrush that determines the color of the drawn text. The location and size of the area used to draw or measure the text. The string format used to draw or measure the text. The flags which determine what kind of special consideration, if any, is given to the measuring or drawing of text. The orientation to use when measuring or drawing the text. Gets or sets the SolidBrush that determines the color of the drawn text. Gets or sets the flags which determine what kind of special consideration, if any, is given to the measuring or drawing of text. Gets or sets the font to use when drawing or measuring the text. Gets or sets the string format used to draw or measure the text. Gets or sets the graphics object used to draw or measure the text. Gets or sets the location and size of the area used to draw or measure the text. Gets or sets the location of the area used to draw or measure the text. Gets or sets the size of the area used to draw or measure the text. Gets or sets the text to draw or measure. Gets or sets the orientation to use when measuring or drawing the text. Contains some static utility drawing methods Called at the start of operations that may require multiple calls to to do metrics calculations.

Each call to this method must be eventually paired with a call to .

During graphics caching calls to will return a single cached graphics object and calls to will be ignored.

 Called at the end of operations that may require multiple calls to to do metrics calculations.

Each call to this method must be paired with a prior call to .

During graphics caching calls to will return a single cached graphics object and calls to will be ignored.

 Called to get a graphics object suitable for doing metrics calculations only. A graphics object suitable for doing metrics calculations only. This graphics object shouldn't be rendered on. The control to base the graphics on.

Do NOT call the Dispose method on the graphics object returned from this method.

Instead, each call to this method should be paired with a call to .

During graphics caching calls to will return a single cached graphics object and calls to will be ignored.

 Called to release a graphics object that was returned from a prior call to . The graphics object to release.

Do NOT call the Dispose method on the graphics object returned from . Use this method instead.

During graphics caching calls to will return a single cached graphics object and calls to will be ignored.

 Will call ther native windows ScvrollWindowEx api if the caller has securoty permissions to call unmanaged code. If not this method will just invalidate the control. The control to scroll. The amount to scroll left to right. The amount to scroll up and down. The portion of the client area to be scrolled Only device bits within the clipping rectangle are affected. Bits scrolled from the outside of the rectangle to the inside are painted; bits scrolled from the inside of the rectangle to the outside are not painted. Receives the boundaries of the rectangle invalidated by scrolling. Erases the newly invalidated region by sending a WM_ERASEBKGND message to the window when specified with the invalidate flag is true. Invalidates the exposed region after scrolling. Scrolls all child windows that intersect the scrollRect parameter. The child windows are scrolled by the number of pixels specified by the xAmount and yAmount parameters. The system sends a WM_MOVE message to all child windows that intersect scrollRect, even if they do not move. If greatern than 0 scrolls using smooth scrolling. The amount is in milliseconds. If the function succeeds, the return value is 2 for SIMPLEREGION (rectangular invalidated region), 3 for COMPLEXREGION (nonrectangular invalidated region; overlapping rectangles), or 1 for NULLREGION (no invalidated region). If the function fails, the return value is 0. Obsolete. Use and instead. Control to base graphics on. A graphics object It is the callers responsibility to dispose of this object when done. Static method that calculates the widths of all 4 borders. The style of the borders A UIElementBorderWidth structure which contains the width of each border. Static method that calculates the widths of all 4 borders. The style of the borders True if the element the borders are on use flat mode, false otherwise. A UIElementBorderWidth structure which contains the width of each border. Static method that calculates the widths of all 4 borders. The style of the borders Flags indicating which sides the borders will be drawn on. A UIElementBorderWidth structure which contains the width of each border. Static method that calculates the widths of all 4 borders. The style of the borders Flags indicating which sides the borders will be drawn on. The element with the borders. A UIElementBorderWidth structure which contains the width of each border. The element parameter is used because solid borders are substituted for 3D borders during a printing operation and the element's ControlElement's IsPrint property can be checked. Static method that calculates the widths of all 4 borders. The style of the borders Flags indicating which sides the borders will be drawn on. True if the element the borders are on use flat mode, false otherwise. A UIElementBorderWidth structure which contains the width of each border. The element parameter is used because solid borders are substituted for 3D borders during a printing operation and the element's ControlElement's IsPrint property can be checked. Static method that calculates the widths of all 4 button borders The button style of the element The button state of the element. A UIElementBorderWidths structure which contains the width of each border. Static method that calculates the widths of all 4 button borders. The button style of the element. The button state of the element. Flags indicating which sides the borders will be drawn on. The element with the borders. A boolean indicating if the smallest area for the specified button style that is always available is returned. A UIElementBorderWidth structure which contains the width of each border. The element parameter is used because solid borders are substituted for 3D borders during a printing operation and the element's ControlElement's IsPrint property can be checked. Calculates the area inside the button borders that is available regardless of the button state. UIElementButtonStyle Rectangle to adjust based on the border widths Element A rectangle which includes the client area always available based on the rect and button style specified. Some button style has different thickness borders depending on the state however, it is often necessary to know what the rect will be regardless of the state - especially when offsetting images and text. Returns the border style based on the state (i.e. IsPrint, FlatMode, etc.) of the element. BorderStyle UIElement from the control A UIElementBorderStyle based on the state of the element. Returns the border style based on the state (i.e. IsPrint, FlatMode, etc.) of the element. BorderStyle Boolean indicating if the borderstyle should be mapped to flat (e.g. if FlatMode is true or the element is being printed). A UIElementBorderStyle based on the state of the element. Returns the button style based on the state (i.e. IsPrint, FlatMode, etc. ) of the element. ButtonStyle UIElement from the control. A UIElementButtonStyle based on the state of the element. Returns the button style based on the state (i.e. IsPrint, FlatMode, etc. ) of the element. ButtonStyle Boolean indicating if the borderstyle should be mapped to flat (e.g. if FlatMode is true or the element is being printed). A UIElementButtonStyle based on the state of the element. Adjusts one rect relative to another horizontally. The alignment enumeration value to use The rectangle to adjust The reference rectangle Adjusts one rect relative to another horizontally. The alignment enumeration value to use The rectangle to adjust The reference rectangle "Obsolete method. Use overload that takes a Control as its 1st parameter. This is required to support the new GradientAlignment property on Appearance. Helper method that draws the backcolor based on the setting in the appearance data structure. The control (required for GradiantAlignment support). The graphics object to render on. Contains backcolor and gradient settings. The overall rect the area that's going to contain the gradient.. The area to fill. False will used the BackColorDisabled. "Obsolete method. Use overload that takes a Control as its 1st parameter. This is required to support the new GradientAlignment property on Appearance. Helper method that draws the backcolor based on the setting in the appearance data structure. The control (required for GradiantAlignment support). The graphics object to render on. Contains backcolor and gradient settings. The overall rect the area that's going to contain the gradient.. The area to fill. False will used the BackColorDisabled. Determines whether alphablending is enabled Helper method that draws the backcolor based on the setting in the appearance data structure. The control (required for GradiantAlignment support). The graphics object to render on. Contains backcolor and gradient settings. The overall rect the area that's going to contain the gradient.. The area to fill. False will used the BackColorDisabled. Determines whether alphablending is enabled Determines how colors are rendered Helper method that draws the backcolor based on the setting in the appearance data structure. The control (required for GradiantAlignment support). The graphics object to render on. Contains backcolor and gradient settings. The overall rect the area that's going to contain the gradient.. The area to fill. False will used the BackColorDisabled. Determines whether alphablending is enabled Determines how colors are rendered Defines a blend pattern for a LinearGradientBrush Converts the horizontal and vertical alignments to the appropriate corresponding alignments to support vertical elements. Horizontal alignment to convert Vertical alignment to convert Converts the horizontal and vertical alignments to the appropriate corresponding alignments to support vertical elements. Horizontal alignment to convert Vertical alignment to convert True if the text is rotated Converts the TextPlacement to the appropriate TextPlacement to support vertical elements. TextPlacement to convert Converts the TextPlacement to the appropriate TextPlacement to support vertical elements. TextPlacement to convert True if the text is rotated 180 degrees Returns a color with the alpha channel set based on the specified alpha level. If the color already has its alpha channel set, it will be adjusted based on the specified alpha level. e.g. If the color's A = 100 and the alphaLevel is 123, the new color's A will be approximately 50. Color to modify Alpha level by which the color should be adjusted The specified color with its modified. Renders the for the in the specified graphics object. Graphics object to render into AppearanceData containing the ImageBackground properties AlphaBlendMode indicating whether alpha blend is enabled and if so, how it is being rendered Invalid rect Element used to determine the location of the rendered image Existing image attributes used when rendering the image. Renders the for the in the specified graphics object. Graphics object to render into AppearanceData containing the ImageBackground properties AlphaBlendMode indicating whether alpha blend is enabled and if so, how it is being rendered Invalid rect Control used to determine the origin of the image background Rectangle where the image will be rendered. e.g. Element.RectInsideBorders Existing image attributes used when rendering the image. Renders the for the in the specified graphics object. Graphics object to render into AppearanceData containing the ImageBackground properties AlphaBlendMode indicating whether alpha blend is enabled and if so, how it is being rendered Invalid rect Control used to determine the origin of the image background Rectangle where the image will be rendered. e.g. Element.RectInsideBorders Existing image attributes used when rendering the image. True if the object being rendered is enabled. If false and the ImageBackgroundDisabled is set, that will be used; otherwise the ImageBackground setting is used. Renders the for the in the specified graphics object. Graphics object to render into AppearanceData containing the ImageBackground properties AlphaBlendMode indicating whether alpha blend is enabled and if so, how it is being rendered Invalid rect Control used to determine the origin of the image background Rectangle where the image will be rendered. e.g. Element.RectInsideBorders Existing image attributes used when rendering the image. Determines how the colors of the image are rendered. Renders the for the in the specified graphics object. Graphics object to render into AppearanceData containing the ImageBackground properties AlphaBlendMode indicating whether alpha blend is enabled and if so, how it is being rendered Invalid rect Control used to determine the origin of the image background Rectangle where the image will be rendered. e.g. Element.RectInsideBorders Existing image attributes used when rendering the image. Determines how the colors of the image are rendered. True if the object being rendered is enabled. If false and the ImageBackgroundDisabled is set, that will be used; otherwise the ImageBackground setting is used. Renders the for the in the specified graphics object. Graphics object to render into AppearanceData containing the Image information AlphaBlendMode indicating whether alpha blend is enabled and if so, how it is being rendered True if the image should be scaled to the specified rect Rect into which the image should be rendered Invalid rect Existing image attributes used when rendering the image. Renders the for the in the specified graphics object. Graphics object to render into Image to render AppearanceData struct containing information about the image rendering AlphaBlendMode indicating whether alpha blend is enabled and if so, how it is being rendered True if the image should be scaled to the specified rect Rect into which the image should be rendered Invalid rect Existing image attributes used when rendering the image. Renders the for the in the specified graphics object. Graphics object to render into Image to render AppearanceData struct containing information about the image rendering AlphaBlendMode indicating whether alpha blend is enabled and if so, how it is being rendered True if the image should be scaled to the specified rect Rect into which the image should be rendered Invalid rect Existing image attributes used when rendering the image. If scaled is true will maintain original aspect ratio. Renders the for the in the specified graphics object. Graphics object to render into Image to render AppearanceData struct containing information about the image rendering AlphaBlendMode indicating whether alpha blend is enabled and if so, how it is being rendered True if the image should be scaled to the specified rect Rect into which the image should be rendered Invalid rect Existing image attributes used when rendering the image. If scaled is true will maintain original aspect ratio. True if a shadow should be drawn around the image Renders the for the in the specified graphics object. Graphics object to render into Image to render AppearanceData struct containing information about the image rendering AlphaBlendMode indicating whether alpha blend is enabled and if so, how it is being rendered True if the image should be scaled to the specified rect Rect into which the image should be rendered Invalid rect Existing image attributes used when rendering the image. If scaled is true will maintain original aspect ratio. True if a shadow should be drawn around the image The color of the shadow to be drawn around the image The alpha level of the start of the shadow around the image The alpha level of the end of the shadow around the image The depth, or width, of the shadow around an image Renders the for the in the specified graphics object. Graphics object to render into Image to render AppearanceData struct containing information about the image rendering AlphaBlendMode indicating whether alpha blend is enabled and if so, how it is being rendered True if the image should be scaled to the specified rect Rect into which the image should be rendered Invalid rect Existing image attributes used when rendering the image. If scaled is true will maintain original aspect ratio. True if a shadow should be drawn around the image The color of the shadow to be drawn around the image The alpha level of the start of the shadow around the image The alpha level of the end of the shadow around the image The depth, or width, of the shadow around an image Determines how colors are rendered in the image. Renders the for the in the specified graphics object. Graphics object to render into Image to render Actual alpha level to use when rendering the image. This value should be calculated using the method. Rect into which the image should be rendered Portion of the image that should be rendered Invalid rect Existing image attributes used when rendering the image. True to tile the image Renders the for the in the specified graphics object. Graphics object to render into Image to render Actual alpha level to use when rendering the image. This value should be calculated using the method. Rect into which the image should be rendered Portion of the image that should be rendered Invalid rect Existing image attributes used when rendering the image. True to tile the image Determines how colors in the image are rendered. Draws a shadow around an image rectangle Graphics object to render into The rect that this shadow should be restricted to The Rectangle wher the image will be drawn The color of the shadow The starting alpha The ending alpha The depth of the shadow Creates a disabled copy of the specified image Original image Backcolor used to fill the background of the image A copy of the specified image rendered as disabled Creates a disabled copy of the specified image Original image Backcolor used to fill the background of the image Image Attributes used to copy the image. A copy of the specified image rendered as disabled Creates a copy of the specified image using the specified Image attributes Image to copy Image attributes to use when copying the image A copy of the original image Creates a copy of the specified image using the specified Image attributes Image to copy Image attributes to use when copying the image Size of the image copy. A copy of the original image Creates an image 2 pixels wider and taller than the original that contains the original image above a shadowed copy of the image Image to shadow Backcolor used when rendering the shadow ImageAttributes or null An image with a shadow of the original down and to the right of the original Creates a new image using a scaled portion of the original image. Original image containing the image area to scale Size of the new bitmap Portion of the original image to scale A new bitmap or null if there was no portion of the original to scale Returns the alpha level to use when rendering based upon the current alpha blend mode, alpha setting and alpha level. Current alpha blend mode Alpha setting to evaluate Resolved alpha level The adjusted alpha level based on the AlphaBlendMode, Alpha setting and resolved alpha level. Creates a new dark color from the specified base color. The to darken A darkened Creates a new dark color from the specified base color. The to darken A darkened Creates a new light color from the specified base color. The to lighten A lightened Creates a new light color from the specified base color. The to lighten A lightened Creates a for a rectangle with rounded corners Rectangle whose corners should be rounded Radius of the corner arcs A GraphicsPath for the rounded rectangle Creates a for a rectangle with the specified rounded corners Rectangle whose corners should be rounded Radius of the corner arcs Enumeration indicating which corners should be rounded A GraphicsPath for the rounded rectangle Renders the specified borderstyle into the graphics object. Graphics object into which the borders will be rendered BorderStyle to render Indicates which sides should be rendered Appearance information used to determine the color of the borders Determines the current alphablend setting The location where the rectangle should be rendered The invalid area to render Determines how colors are rendered Converts the specified Color to a grayscale color. Color to convert Returns a color representing the grayscale version of the specified color. Wraps the MeasureText method of the TextRenderer class. The Graphics object The text to measure The font to use for the measurement A SizeF struct that describes the size required to contain the text. Wraps the MeasureText method of the TextRenderer class. The Graphics object The text to measure The font to use for the measurement The embeddable editor owner. The embeddable editor owner context. A SizeF struct that describes the size required to contain the text. Wraps the MeasureText method of the TextRenderer class. The Graphics object The text to measure The font to use for the measurement The embeddable editor owner. The embeddable editor owner context. The StringFormat to use for the measurement A SizeF struct that describes the size required to contain the text. Wraps the MeasureText method of the TextRenderer class. The Graphics object The text to measure The font to use for the measurement The StringFormat to use for the measurement Flags which specify the special consideration, if any, that should be given to the measurement. A SizeF struct that describes the size required to contain the text. Wraps the MeasureText method of the TextRenderer class. The Graphics object The text to measure The font to use for the measurement The constaining width for the measurement The StringFormat to use for the measurement The embeddable editor owner. The embeddable editor owner context. A SizeF struct that describes the size required to contain the text. Wraps the MeasureText method of the TextRenderer class. The Graphics object The text to measure The font to use for the measurement The constaining width for the measurement The embeddable editor owner. The embeddable editor owner context. A SizeF struct that describes the size required to contain the text. Wraps the MeasureText method of the TextRenderer class. The Graphics object The text to measure The font to use for the measurement The constaining width for the measurement A SizeF struct that describes the size required to contain the text. Wraps the MeasureText method of the TextRenderer class. The Graphics object The text to measure The font to use for the measurement The constaining width for the measurement The StringFormat to use for the measurement A SizeF struct that describes the size required to contain the text. Wraps the MeasureText method of the TextRenderer class. The Graphics object The text to measure The font to use for the measurement The maximum layout area for the measurement A SizeF struct that describes the size required to contain the text. Wraps the MeasureText method of the TextRenderer class. The Graphics object The text to measure The font to use for the measurement This parameter is used only to mimic the signature of the overload of Graphics.MeasureString that takes a PointF. This overload has no GDI equivalent; the overload that takes a SizeF is called in its place, and SizeF.Empty is specified. The StringFormat to use for the measurement A SizeF struct that describes the size required to contain the text. Wraps the MeasureText method of the TextRenderer class. The Graphics object The text to measure The font to use for the measurement The maximum layout area for the measurement The StringFormat to use for the measurement A SizeF struct that describes the size required to contain the text. Wraps the MeasureText method of the TextRenderer class. The Graphics object The text to measure The font to use for the measurement The maximum layout area for the measurement The StringFormat to use for the measurement [out] The number of characters that were fitted into the layoutArea [out] The number of text lines that were filled into the layoutArea. A SizeF struct that describes the size required to contain the text. Wraps the MeasureText method of the TextRenderer class. The Graphics object The text to measure The font to use for the measurement Flags which specify the special consideration, if any, that should be given to the measurement. A SizeF struct that describes the size required to contain the text. Wraps the MeasureText method of the TextRenderer class. The Graphics object The text to measure The font to use for the measurement The constaining width for the measurement Flags which specify the special consideration, if any, that should be given to the measurement. A SizeF struct that describes the size required to contain the text. Wraps the MeasureText method of the TextRenderer class. The Graphics object The text to measure The font to use for the measurement The constaining width for the measurement The StringFormat to use for the measurement Flags which specify the special consideration, if any, that should be given to the measurement. A SizeF struct that describes the size required to contain the text. Wraps the MeasureText method of the TextRenderer class. The Graphics object The text to measure The font to use for the measurement The maximum layout area for the measurement Flags which specify the special consideration, if any, that should be given to the measurement. A SizeF struct that describes the size required to contain the text. Wraps the MeasureText method of the TextRenderer class. The Graphics object The text to measure The font to use for the measurement This parameter is used only to mimic the signature of the overload of Graphics.MeasureString that takes a PointF. This overload has no GDI equivalent; the overload that takes a SizeF is called in its place, and SizeF.Empty is specified. The StringFormat to use for the measurement Flags which specify the special consideration, if any, that should be given to the measurement. A SizeF struct that describes the size required to contain the text. Wraps the MeasureText method of the TextRenderer class. The Graphics object The text to measure The font to use for the measurement The maximum layout area for the measurement The StringFormat to use for the measurement Flags which specify the special consideration, if any, that should be given to the measurement. A SizeF struct that describes the size required to contain the text. Wraps the MeasureText method of the TextRenderer class. The Graphics object The text to measure The font to use for the measurement The maximum layout area for the measurement The StringFormat to use for the measurement [out] The number of characters that were fitted into the layoutArea [out] The number of text lines that were filled into the layoutArea. Flags which specify the special consideration, if any, that should be given to the measurement. A SizeF struct that describes the size required to contain the text. Draws the specified string at the specified location with the specified brush and font. The Graphics object. The string to draw. The Font that defines the text format of the string. The SolidBrush that determines the color of the drawn text. The left corner of the drawn text. The top corner of the drawn text. Draws the specified string at the specified location with the specified brush and font. The Graphics object. The string to draw. The Font that defines the text format of the string. The left corner of the drawn text. The top corner of the drawn text. The color of the drawn text. Draws the specified string at the specified location with the specified brush and font. The Graphics object. The string to draw. The Font that defines the text format of the string. The SolidBrush that determines the color of the drawn text. The PointF that represents the upper-left corner of the drawn text. Draws the specified string at the specified location with the specified brush and font. The Graphics object. The string to draw. The Font that defines the text format of the string. The Point that represents the upper-left corner of the drawn text. The color of the drawn text. Draws the specified string at the specified location with the specified brush and font. The Graphics object. The string to draw. The Font that defines the text format of the string. The SolidBrush that determines the color of the drawn text. The RectangleF that specifies the location of the drawn text. Draws the specified string at the specified location with the specified brush and font. The Graphics object. The string to draw. The Font that defines the text format of the string. The RectangleF that specifies the location of the drawn text. The color of the drawn text. Draws the specified string at the specified location with the specified brush and font. The Graphics object. The string to draw. The Font that defines the text format of the string. The SolidBrush that determines the color of the drawn text. The left corner of the drawn text. The top corner of the drawn text. The StringFormat that specifies formatting attributes. Draws the specified string at the specified location with the specified brush and font. The Graphics object. The string to draw. The Font that defines the text format of the string. The left corner of the drawn text. The top corner of the drawn text. The color of the drawn text. The StringFormat that specifies formatting attributes. Draws the specified string at the specified location with the specified brush and font. The Graphics object. The string to draw. The Font that defines the text format of the string. The SolidBrush that determines the color of the drawn text. The PointF that represents the upper-left corner of the drawn text. The StringFormat that specifies formatting attributes. Draws the specified string at the specified location with the specified brush and font. The Graphics object. The string to draw. The Font that defines the text format of the string. The Point that represents the upper-left corner of the drawn text. The color of the drawn text. The StringFormat that specifies formatting attributes. Draws the specified string at the specified location with the specified brush and font. The Graphics object. The string to draw. The Font that defines the text format of the string. The SolidBrush that determines the color of the drawn text. The RectangleF that specifies the location of the drawn text. The StringFormat that specifies formatting attributes. Draws the specified string at the specified location with the specified brush and font. The Graphics object. The string to draw. The Font that defines the text format of the string. The SolidBrush that determines the color of the drawn text. The left corner of the drawn text. The top corner of the drawn text. Flags which specify the special consideration, if any, that should be given to the rendering. Draws the specified string at the specified location with the specified color and font. The Graphics object. The string to draw. The Font that defines the text format of the string. The left corner of the drawn text. The top corner of the drawn text. The color of the drawn text. Flags which specify the special consideration, if any, that should be given to the rendering. Draws the specified string at the specified location with the specified brush and font. The Graphics object. The string to draw. The Font that defines the text format of the string. The SolidBrush that determines the color of the drawn text. The PointF that represents the upper-left corner of the drawn text. Flags which specify the special consideration, if any, that should be given to the rendering. Draws the specified string at the specified location with the specified color and font. The Graphics object. The string to draw. The Font that defines the text format of the string. The Point that represents the upper-left corner of the drawn text. The color of the drawn text. Flags which specify the special consideration, if any, that should be given to the rendering. Draws the specified string at the specified location with the specified brush and font. The Graphics object. The string to draw. The Font that defines the text format of the string. The SolidBrush that determines the color of the drawn text. The RectangleF that specifies the location of the drawn text. Flags which specify the special consideration, if any, that should be given to the rendering. Draws the specified string at the specified location with the specified color and font. The Graphics object. The string to draw. The Font that defines the text format of the string. The RectangleF that specifies the location of the drawn text. The color of the drawn text. Flags which specify the special consideration, if any, that should be given to the rendering. Draws the specified string at the specified location with the specified brush and font. The Graphics object. The string to draw. The Font that defines the text format of the string. The SolidBrush that determines the color of the drawn text. The left corner of the drawn text. The top corner of the drawn text. The StringFormat that specifies formatting attributes. Flags which specify the special consideration, if any, that should be given to the rendering. Draws the specified string at the specified location with the specified color and font. The Graphics object. The string to draw. The Font that defines the text format of the string. The left corner of the drawn text. The top corner of the drawn text. The color of the drawn text. The StringFormat that specifies formatting attributes. Flags which specify the special consideration, if any, that should be given to the rendering. Draws the specified string at the specified location with the specified brush and font. The Graphics object. The string to draw. The Font that defines the text format of the string. The SolidBrush that determines the color of the drawn text. The PointF that represents the upper-left corner of the drawn text. The StringFormat that specifies formatting attributes. Flags which specify the special consideration, if any, that should be given to the rendering. Draws the specified string at the specified location with the specified color and font. The Graphics object. The string to draw. The Font that defines the text format of the string. The Point that represents the upper-left corner of the drawn text. The color of the drawn text. The StringFormat that specifies formatting attributes. Flags which specify the special consideration, if any, that should be given to the rendering. Draws the specified string at the specified location with the specified brush and font. The Graphics object. The string to draw. The Font that defines the text format of the string. The SolidBrush that determines the color of the drawn text. The RectangleF that specifies the location of the drawn text. The StringFormat that specifies formatting attributes. Flags which specify the special consideration, if any, that should be given to the rendering. Draws the specified string at the specified location with the specified color and font. The Graphics object. The string to draw. The Font that defines the text format of the string. The color of the drawn text. The RectangleF that specifies the location of the drawn text. The StringFormat that specifies formatting attributes. Flags which specify the special consideration, if any, that should be given to the rendering. Returns the GdiDrawStringFlags based on the specified parameters. Note that when working with embeddable editor, the overload that takes in the embeddable owner and owner context should be used. Control to evaluate A series of describing how text should be rendered. Returns the GdiDrawStringFlags based on the specified parameters. Note that when working with embeddable editor, the overload that takes in the embeddable owner and owner context should be used. Component to evaluate A series of describing how text should be rendered. Returns the GdiDrawStringFlags based on the specified parameters. The used to determine the flags. A series of describing how text should be rendered. Returns the GdiDrawStringFlags based on the specified parameters. The of the element that is being drawn, or null if not applicable. The context used to provide additional information about the object. A series of describing how text should be rendered. Returns the GdiDrawStringFlags based on the specified parameters. Note that when working with embeddable editor, the overload that takes in the embeddable owner and owner context should be used. The that should be used for determining which flags are applicable. A series of describing how text should be rendered. Draws a rounded border with only a single pixel missing on the outside. The graphics object with which to draw the border. Describes which sides to draw on the border. The pen with which to draw the border. The rectangle of the border The invalid rectangle on the control where the border is being drawn. Specifies which corners should be drawn rounded. True to draw a pixel inset at each rounded corner, false otherwise. Creates a which defines the region within the specified border style. The rect which defines the border area. The style of the border which will enclose this region. Creates a which defines the region within the specified border style. The rect which defines the border area. The style of the border which will enclose this region. Enumeration indicating which corners of a rounded border style should be rounded. Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified border style is rounded. The style of the border to evaluate True if the border style is not rendered over the entire edge of the rect on which the border is drawn. Returns a from the specified rect, with rounded corners with the specified radius. The on which the returned is based. The radius of the circle whose quadrants create the rounded corners. A with the same dimensions as the specified rect and rounded corners. Note that the caller is responsible for disposal of the returned object. Returns a from the specified rect, with rounded corners with the specified radius. The on which the returned is based. The radius of the circle whose quadrants create the rounded corners. The bitflags value which define the corners that are to be rounded in the returned Region. Note that the corners which are not included in this value are completed by perpendicular lines. A with the same dimensions as the specified rect and rounded corners. Note that the caller is responsible for disposal of the returned object. Draws a rounded glow gradient at the specified orientation of the provided. The to draw within. The location of the glow effect. The graphics object with which to draw the glow. The inner glow color. The color that the gradient ultimately resolves to. The percentage of the height/width, depending on the orientation, of the to draw the top of the glow. The percentage used to draw the inner glow, based on the distance from the edge of the tab, or the middle of the circle, whichever is closer, to the edge of the circle. The percentage used to draw the outer glow, based on the distance from the edge of the tab, or the middle of the circle, whichever is closer, to the edge of the circle. Returns true if the specified button style includes hot tracking by default. The of the associated button. True if the specified button style supports hot-tracking. Blends the specified colors into a single color, using the specified percentages for each color. The first to use. The percentage of color1 to use. The second to use. The percentage of color2 to use. A color based on the specified parameters. Blends the specified colors into a single color, using the specified percentages for each color. The first to use. The percentage of color1 to use. The second to use. The percentage of color2 to use. The third to use. The percentage of color3 to use. A color based on the specified parameters. Draws a border in the style of an an Office2007 Ribbon Button. The used to provide rendering information. The of the button. Specifies whether the buttons is enabled. Office2007 Ribbon button borders are characterized by an outer border which is drawn with a vertical gradient and an inner border which is partially transparent and modifies the color of the Background. The border colors are taken from the drawParams. The outer colors are determined by the BorderColor and BorderColor2. The BorderColor3DBase is used as the inner border color. Draws a border in the style of an an Office2007 Ribbon Button. The used to provide rendering information. The of the button. Specifies whether the buttons is enabled. An enumeration specifying which corners should be rounded. Office2007 Ribbon button borders are characterized by an outer border which is drawn with a vertical gradient and an inner border which is partially transparent and modifies the color of the Background. The border colors are taken from the drawParams. The outer colors are determined by the BorderColor and BorderColor2. The BorderColor3DBase is used as the inner border color. Draws a border in the style of an an Office2007 Ribbon Button. The used to provide rendering information. An enumeration specifying which corners should be rounded. The of the darker border color gradient. The lighter Color of the gradient. The Color of the inner button border. Office2007 Ribbon button borders are characterized by an outer border which is drawn with a vertical gradient and an inner border which is partially transparent and modifies the color of the Background. The border colors are taken from the drawParams. The outer colors are determined by the BorderColor and BorderColor2. The BorderColor3DBase is used as the inner border color. Draws a border in the style of an an Office2007 Ribbon Button. The object used to perform the drawing operation. A describing the total area of the button. A Rectangle describing the area to fill. An enumeration specifying which corners should be rounded. The of the darker border color gradient. The lighter Color of the gradient. The Color of the inner button border. Office2007 Ribbon button borders are characterized by an outer border which is drawn with a vertical gradient and an inner border which is partially transparent and modifies the color of the Background. Draws a border in the style of an an Office2007 Ribbon Button. The object used to perform the drawing operation. A describing the total area of the button. A Rectangle describing the area to fill. An enumeration specifying which corners should be rounded. The used to draw the outer borders of the button. The Pen used to draw the inner borders of the button. Office2007 Ribbon button borders are characterized by an outer border which is drawn with a vertical gradient and an inner border which is partially transparent and modifies the color of the Background. Converts the specified to a , preserving transparency. The to convert. A with the same image as the specified .

There is a limitation in the method (.NET framework v1.x only) whereby the opacity of the pixels which comprise the icon is not properly represented in the returned Bitmap. The IconToBitmap method overcomes this limitation by accessing the Icon's pixel data directly.

The IconToBitmap method will only function correctly on a computer which has the right to execute unmanaged code; this is determined by using the class.

The IconToBitmap method catches any exceptions that are thrown during the process of accessing the Icon's pixel data; when an exception is thrown, the method is used as a fallback. If the method itself throws an exception, the IconToBitmap method will surface the exception.

The returned by the IconToBitmap method is a limited system resource and should be disposed of when it is no longer in use.

The limitation in the method does not exist in v2.x of the .NET framework, so on that platform, this method calls directly into the method.

 Converts pixels to points based on the screen DPI. Value in pixels. Determines whether the measurement is based on horizontal or vertical DPI. Value in points. Converts points to pixels based on the screen DPI. Value in points. Determines whether the measurement is based on horizontal or vertical DPI. Value in pixels. Draws a border in the style of a Windows Vista Toolbar Button Button. The used to provide rendering information. Windows Vista Toolbar button borders are characterized by an outer border and an inner border which are partially transparent and modify the color of the Background. The border colors are taken from the drawParams. The outer color is determined by the BorderColor and the inner color is determined by BorderColor2. Draws a border in the style of a Windows Vista Toolbar Button Button. The used to provide rendering information. Windows Vista Toolbar button borders are characterized by an outer border and an inner border which are partially transparent and modify the color of the Background. The border colors are taken from the drawParams. The outer color is determined by the BorderColor and the inner color is determined by BorderColor2. Draws a border in the style of a Windows Vista Toolbar Button Button. The used to provide rendering information. Windows Vista Toolbar button borders are characterized by an outer border and an inner border which are partially transparent and modify the color of the Background. Draws a border in the style of a Windows Vista Toolbar Button Button. Windows Vista Toolbar button borders are characterized by an outer border and an inner border which are partially transparent and modify the color of the Background. Draws a border in the style of a Windows Vista Toolbar Button Button. Windows Vista Toolbar button borders are characterized by an outer border and an inner border which are partially transparent and modify the color of the Background. Draws an alphablended layer of color over the button to highlight it when hot tracked or pressed. The used to provide rendering information. Draws an alphablended layer over the button to simulate the Windows Vista Aero theme for buttons. The used to provide rendering information. Draws a string with the specified parameters. The parameters which contain the string to draw, information on how to layout the text, and what to draw it with. For Infragistics internal use only. Measures a string with the specified parameters. The parameters which contain the string to measure, information on how to layout the text, and what to measure it with. The size of the text specified with the specified text drawing parameters. Measures a string with the specified parameters. The parameters which contain the string to measure, information on how to layout the text, and what to measure it with. [out] The number of characters that were fitted into the layout area. [out] The number of text lines that were filled into the layout area. The size of the text specified with the specified text drawing parameters. This member supports the Infragistics infrastructure and is not meant to be invoked externally.

Returns an object for the current thread that can be used to synchronize calls to this thread.

 Gets/sets whether GDI+ should be used to render/ measure text.

Version 2.0 of the .NET framework contains support for GDI text measurement and rendering, which is employed for Infragistics controls by default. This flag can be set to true to force the use of GDI+ for text measurement and rendering.

 Gets or sets the value that indicates whether the rendering optimizations introduced in 7.3 for rendering to invalid rects should be disabled.

In 7.3, performance enahancements were made to the PLF's drawing logic so when the invalid area of the paint operation is not the full size of the control, the internal drawing buffer created for painting is only the size of the invalid area. Previously, the buffer's size was increased so its top-left corner matched the top-left corner of the control. This made paint operations like this slower, but did have the benefit of having all Graphics objects in all drawing situations backed by buffers with the same origin.

With the invalid rect performance optimizations enabled, any code changing the Transform or RenderingOrigin of a Graphics object must first determine the current Transform or RenderingOrigin and offset them instead of replacing them. Likewise, if unmanaged drawing methods are being used and an hDC created from the Graphics object is passed into these unmanaged methods with a location or rect to draw to, the locations and rects must be transformed with the TransformPoints method of the Transform on the Graphics object.

Note: If it is not possible or too time consuming to make the changes necessary for the drawing logic to be correct as described above, this property should be set to True.

True if the old style invalid rect rendering should be performed; False to enable the more performant style of invalid rect rendering. An enumerator for specifying position of the dropdown window with respect to the exclusion rect. Align below the exclusion rect. Will automatically align above the exclusion rect if there is not enough space below. Align to the left of the exclusion rect. Will automatically align to the right of the exclusion rect if there is not enough space on the left. Align to the Right of the exclusion rect. Will automatically align to the left of the exclusion rect if there is not enough space on the right. Align above the exclusion rect. Will automatically align below the exclusion rect if there is not enough space above. The DropDownManagerParameters struct provides a means of passing parameters through a single instance. Constructor. The control that owns the dropdown The control that will be placed on the dropdown form to take up its entire client area. An optional edit control. Clicking on this edit window with the mouse will not cause the dropdown to closeup. The method will be called after the dropdown closes up. This rect (in screen coordinates) will not be obscured by the dropdown. The requested size of the dropdown. Where to try to place the dropdown (in screen coordinates) . If true wil attempt to place the dropdown's upper right corner at the location point. The control that owns the dropdown The control that will be placed on the dropdown form to take up its entire client area. An optional edit control. Clicking on this edit window with the mouse will not cause the dropdown to closeup. The method will be called after the dropdown closes up. This rect (in screen coordinates) will not be obscured by the dropdown. The requested size of the dropdown. Where to try to place the dropdown (in screen coordinates). If true wil attempt to place the dropdown's upper right corner at the location point. If any currently dropped down windows should be closed. If dropdown should be automatically closed when mouse is clicked outside of dropdown. If false then clicks inside the exclusion area should automatically close the dropdown. Determines where to place the dropdown with respect to the exclusion rect. If true will eat the mouse message that caused the closeup Gets/Sets which corners will be drawn rounded. Callback that should be invoked when the dropdown is being automatically closed. Gets or sets the information needed to reposition the drop down if there is not enough room for it on screen. Returns or sets a boolean indicating whether the message filter used by the dropdownmanager should attempt to be inserted at the head of the chain.

Note: This will only be in relation to other objects that add their message filter via the method.

 This method will be called before the dropdown is closed. A struct containing information needed when repositioning a drop rect that spans across multiple monitors Constructor The action to use when the drop rect spans across multiple monitors Gets or sets the value indicating the location of the grab handle, if any, on the drop down form. Gets the sets the value indicating whether to allow room for shadows when repositioning the drop rect Gets or sets the minimum size available for the drop down. Gets or sets the action to use when the drop rect spans across multiple monitors. The enumeration of the various reposition options available when the drop down spans across multiple monitors Shift the drop rect into the monitor containing the largest portion of the exclusion rect Shift the drop rect into the monitor containing the cursor Use the portion of the drop rect that exists in the monitor with the mouse cursor Use the portion of the drop rect in the monitor that contains the largest protion of it. Don't make any changes to the requested drop down rectangle The DropDownManager class exposes static properties, methods and events for creating a dropdown window and closing it up when the user clicks outside of the owning control. Calculates the rect where a drop down will actually be when requested to be in the specified rect The rect (in screen coordinates) which will not be obscured by the dropdown. Where to try to place the dropdown (in screen coordinates). The control that owns the dropdown. If true will attempt to place the dropdown's upper right corner at the location point. The position relative to the exclusion rect where the drop down should be placed. The information needed to reposition the drop down when there is not enough room for it. The actual rectangle where the drop down would reside if it were dropped down with the specified values. Calculates the rect where a drop down will be restricted to. The rect (in screen coordinates) which will not be obscured by the dropdown. Where to try to place the dropdown (in screen coordinates). The control that owns the dropdown. If true will attempt to place the dropdown's upper right corner at the location point. The position relative to the exclusion rect where the drop down should be placed. The information needed to reposition the drop down when there is not enough room for it. A describing where the drop-down will be restricted to. Static method that returns whether the drop down is dropped down Used to compare to the owner that was passed into the DropDown method. If it is the same or null it will the dropdown state,. Otherwise it will return false. True if the drop down window is dropped down. Static method that returns the actual position of the dropdown. Used to compare to the owner that was passed into the DropDown method. The position of the dropdown, or BelowExclusionRect if the drop down is not found. Static method that returns the align right preference of the dropdown. Used to compare to the owner that was passed into the DropDown method. The align right preferenceof the dropdown, or False if the drop down is not found. Static method that returns the current dropdown control. Used to determine the associated dropdown. The current dropdown control, or null if none found. Static method that returns the position of the dropdown. Used to compare to the owner that was passed into the DropDown method. The position of the dropdown, or BelowExclusionRect if the drop down is not found. Static method that returns the rect of the dropdown in screen coordinates. Used to compare to the owner that was passed into the DropDown method. If it is the same or null it will the dropdown state,. Otherwise it will return false. The rect of the dropdown in screen coordinates, or an empty rect if a dropdown with the specified owner was not found. Static method that returns the rect of the exclusion area in screen coordinates. Used to compare to the owner that was passed into the DropDown method. If it is the same or null it will the dropdown state,. Otherwise it will return false. The rect of the dropdown in screen coordinates, or an empty rect if a dropdown with the specified owner was not found. Static method that sets the rect of the exclusion area in screen coordinates. Used to compare to the owner that was passed into the DropDown method. If it is the same or null it will the dropdown state,. Otherwise it will return false. The new value for the exclusion rect in screen coordinates Static method that returns the original requested rect of the dropdown in screen coordinates. This rect can differ from the dropdown rect if the window had to be repositioned by the manager due to screen size limitations. Used to compare to the owner that was passed into the DropDown method. If it is the same or null it will the dropdown state,. Otherwise it will return false. The original requested rect of the dropdown in screen coordinates, or an empty rect if a dropdown with the specified owner was not found. Static method that returns the reposition information of the dropdown. Used to compare to the owner that was passed into the DropDown method. If it is the same or null it will the dropdown state,. Otherwise it will return false. The original requested rect of the dropdown in screen coordinates, or an empty rect if a dropdown with the specified owner was not found. Static method that resizes and repositions the dropdown based on the supplied screen rect. Used to compare to the owner that was passed into the DropDown method. If it is the same or null it will the dropdown state,. Otherwise it will return false. The new rect of the dropdown in screen coordinates. Pass Rectangle.Empty to keep the current dropdown rect. The new exclusion rect of the dropdown in screen coordinates. Pass Rectangle.Empty to keep the current exclusion rect. The actual new rect of the dropdown in screen coordinates, or null if a dropdown with the specified owner was not found. Static method that resizes and repositions the dropdown based on the supplied screen rect. Used to compare to the owner that was passed into the DropDown method. If it is the same or null it will the dropdown state,. Otherwise it will return false. The new rect of the dropdown in screen coordinates. Pass Rectangle.Empty to keep the current dropdown rect. The new exclusion rect of the dropdown in screen coordinates. Pass Rectangle.Empty to keep the current exclusion rect. True to attempt to maintain the position of the drop down relative to the exclusion rect. The actual new rect of the dropdown in screen coordinates, or null if a dropdown with the specified owner was not found. Static method that resizes and repositions the dropdown based on the supplied screen rect. Used to compare to the owner that was passed into the DropDown method. If it is the same or null it will the dropdown state,. Otherwise it will return false. The new rect of the dropdown in screen coordinates. Pass Rectangle.Empty to keep the current dropdown rect. The new exclusion rect of the dropdown in screen coordinates. Pass Rectangle.Empty to keep the current exclusion rect. True to attempt to maintain the position of the drop down relative to the exclusion rect. The information needed to reposition the drop down when there is not enough room for it. The actual new rect of the dropdown in screen coordinates, or null if a dropdown with the specified owner was not found. Static method that resizes and repositions the dropdown based on the supplied screen rect. Used to compare to the owner that was passed into the DropDown method. If it is the same or null it will the dropdown state,. Otherwise it will return false. The new rect of the dropdown in screen coordinates. Pass Rectangle.Empty to keep the current dropdown rect. The new exclusion rect of the dropdown in screen coordinates. Pass Rectangle.Empty to keep the current exclusion rect. True to attempt to maintain the position of the drop down relative to the exclusion rect. True to prevent the location of the drop down from changing if the drop down is already shown. The information needed to reposition the drop down when there is not enough room for it. The actual new rect of the dropdown in screen coordinates, or null if a dropdown with the specified owner was not found. Static method that closes the dropdown Used to compare to the owner that was passed into the DropDown method. If it is the same or null it will close the dropdown. Walks down the list closing each item until it finds the specified owner or the top of the list. Owning control for which to close the dropdown. Static method that creates and displays a dropdown window The control that owns the dropdown The control that will be placed on the dropdown form to take up its entire client area. An optional edit control. Clicking on this edit window with the mouse will not cause the dropdown to closeup. The method will be called after the dropdown closes up. This rect (in screen coordinates) will not be obscured by the dropdown. The requested size of the dropdown. Where to try to place the dropdown (in screen coordinates) . If true wil attempt to place the dropdown's upper right corner at the location point. Static method that creates and displays a dropdown window The control that owns the dropdown The control that will be placed on the dropdown form to take up its entire client area. An optional edit control. Clicking on this edit window with the mouse will not cause the dropdown to closeup. The method will be called after the dropdown closes up. This rect (in screen coordinates) will not be obscured by the dropdown. The requested size of the dropdown. Where to try to place the dropdown (in screen coordinates) . If true wil attempt to place the dropdown's upper right corner at the location point. If any currently dropped down windows should be closed. If dropdown should be automatically closed when mouse is clicked outside of dropdown. If false then clicks inside the exclusion area should automatically close the dropdown. Determines where to place the dropdown with respect to the exclusion rect. Static method that creates and displays a dropdown window The control that owns the dropdown The control that will be placed on the dropdown form to take up its entire client area. An optional edit control. Clicking on this edit window with the mouse will not cause the dropdown to closeup. The method will be called after the dropdown closes up. This rect (in screen coordinates) will not be obscured by the dropdown. The requested size of the dropdown. Where to try to place the dropdown (in screen coordinates) . If true wil attempt to place the dropdown's upper right corner at the location point. If any currently dropped down windows should be closed. If dropdown should be automatically closed when mouse is clicked outside of dropdown. If false then clicks inside the exclusion area should automatically close the dropdown. Determines where to place the dropdown with respect to the exclusion rect. If true will eat the mouse message that caused the closeup. Static method that creates and displays a dropdown window Gets the grab handle location which should be used for a drop down given the specified information. This will only return the following values: TopLeft, TopRight, BottomLeft, and BottomRight. If the drop down has restrictions on sizing vertically or horizontally, you will need to convert these values to either Left, Top, Right, or Bottom depending on the restrictions. The rect (in screen coordinates) which will not be obscured by the dropdown. Where to try to place the dropdown (in screen coordinates). The control that owns the dropdown. If true will attempt to place the dropdown's upper right corner at the location point. The position relative to the exclusion rect where the drop down should be placed. The information needed to reposition the drop down when there is not enough room for it. The grab handle location which would be most logcal to use based on the way the drop down needs to open. Static method that hides the dropdown. Used to compare to the owner that was passed into the DropDown method. Static method that unhides (shows) the dropdown. It is not necessary to call this method after calling the DropDown static method. The DropDown method will automatically show the window. This method is meant to be called to show the dropdown after calling HideDropDown. Used to compare to the owner that was passed into the DropDown method. Static method that resumes close up requests based on mouse clicks outside the dropdown areas. The location, in screen coordinates, of the last mouse click that would have triggered a closeup. This can be used to determine if the method should be called.

This is called for example when a combo is closed up on a popup menu.

If the user had clicked on the combo list's scroll bar we wanted to postpone the menu close up until after the combo closes up. This is accomplished by calling when the combo dropped down its list.

 Static method that suspends close up requests based on mouse clicks outside the dropdown areas.

This is used for example when a combo is dropped down on a popup menu.

If the user clicks on the combo list's scroll bar we want to postpone the menu close up until after the combo closes up. This is accomplished by calling

fired after the list is closed up Raised when a WM_ACTIVATEAPP or a WM_MDIACTIVATE message is received.

Adding a listener here will cause a message hook to be added.

Only one hook is created no matter how many event listeners there are. The hook is removed when there are no more listeners.

 Returns true between calls to and . The message that triggered the ActivationChange event A WM_ACTIVATE message was received. A WM_ACTIVATEAPP message was received. A WM_MDIACTIVATE message was received. Event handler used ActivationChanged event Event parameters used for the ActivationChanged event Constructor The code passed into the SetWindowsHookEx API. The handle of the window being activated. The handle of the window being deactivated. Identifies the message that triggered the ActivationChanged event. The code passed into the hook procedure. Refer to API documentation for SetWindowsHookEx.. Identified the message that triggered the ActivationChanged event. The handle of the window being activated The handle of the window being de-activated A form used as a parent for controls that will be dropped down. Interface implemented by a top level form. Returns the owning control. Constructor The that will perform the drop-down logic. Called when the form is being disposed. Specifies whether managed and unmanaged resources should be cleaned up. Called when the form is deactivated. This member overrides One of the values that represent the key to process true for Alt-F4 to prevent the form from closing Called when the form has been resized. Returns true if the window was created in a full truct environment. A form used as a parent for controls that will be dropped down.

Clicking on this form with the mouse will not automatically activate it.

It returns MA_NOACTIVATE for the WM_MOUSEACTIVATE message.

 Constructor Override WndProc to trap the WM_MOUSEACTIVATE message and return NOACTIVATE Overridden. Returns true if the window was created in a full trust environment. Used to determine if the mouse message that caused a close up should be Returns the control that was clipped upon. Returns a boolean indicating if the action causing the close up was the result of a non-client area message. Returns or sets a boolean indicating if the mouse message should be eaten. Returns the mouse button associated with the action Delegate used to callback to the dropdown owner to determine if the mouse message that is causing a close up should be be consumed. Provides a grab handle UI element that interacts with a form implementing to provide resize functionality; this class should only be instantiated as a child element of this form. Defines the bounds of the grab handle. Constructor initializes a new instance of DropDownResizeHandleUIElement. Parent UIElement Initializes this element for reuse. Draw the grab handle in the location specified by The used to provide rendering information. Gets the that should be the parent. Calculates the maximum vertical distance that the element can be resized. The point from which to perform the calculation. Maximum allowed change in direction. Calculates the maximum horizontal distance that the elemenet can be resized. The point from which to perform the calculation. Maximum allowed change in direction. Inverts the borders of the specified rect (calling it twice with same rect removes it). The rect used to draw the frame Resize the specified according to which border is handling the resizing The to adjust. The change in size on the X-axis The change in size on the Y-axis Called after a move/resize operation, or from and when "show window contents while dragging" is enabled. A point containing the x and y-coordinate adjustments relative to the original position. Invoked when the mouse is pressed down on the adjustable area before an adjustment begins. Mouse event args from the MouseDown True if an adjustment can be started Overrides the rendering of the foreground to draw the grab handle. The used to provide rendering information. Called when a mousedown is received and a resize operation is started. Specifies whether we're adjusting the element vertically. Specifies whether we've started the adjustment from the bottom border. Specifies whether we're adjusting the element horizontally. Specifies whether we've started the adjustment from the right border. Called after a move/resize operation to notify any listeners A point containing the x and y-coordinate adjustments relative to the original position. Called when the mouse down message is received over the element. Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Called when the mouse is released The mouse event args. Returning true will ignore the next click event Called when the the X delta has changed. The change in direction along the x-axis. Called when the the Y delta has changed. The change in direction along the y-axis. Returns the range limits for adjusting the element in either or both dimensions. The point where the mouse is in client coordinates Returned limits The cursor to use over the adjustable area of the element. The point that should be used to determine if the area is adjustable. The cursor that should be used to represent an adjustable region. Returns true if the point is in the adjustable area. The point used to check whether it is in the element's adjustable area. True if the point is in the element's adjustable area, false otherwise. Gets or sets the value indicating whether the drop down should automatically repaint when a resize occurs. Specifies the location of the grab handle, which also determines its behavior. The maximum size to which the form can be resized. The minimum size to which the form can be resized. The resolved minimum size. The smallest size that this element will allow, based on its location. True if the element allows vertical resizing. True if the element allows horizontal resizing. Returns true if the vertical adjustment is done from the bottom. Returns true if the horizontal adjustment is done from the right. Used to determine if the delta calculated during an adjustment operation should be adjusted to account for the repositioning of the containing control in the screen - e.g. if the control may be repositioned during the adjustment. True if Adjustment Bar should be drawn while sizing. True if this element supports left to right adjustments by grabbing the left border True if this element supports left to right adjustments by grabbing the right border True if this element supports up and down adjustments by grabbing the bottom border. True if this element supports up and down adjustments by grabbing the top border. Used to provide default owner information to an editor.

The DefaultEditorOwner class may be used to provide default values to an editor. Each editor class takes a "default owner" to one of its constructors. When the editor requests a property value of its owner, the owner may or may not provide the value for that property. When the owner does not provide the value for the editor, the value used is returned from the default owner, if there is one.

The DefaultEditorOwner overrides several of the members of the base class and returns a value from its object. An instance of a should be provided either in the constructor of the DefaultEditorOwner or by setting the property directly. Then when the editor class is created, the constructor overload that takes an EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase should be used and an instance of the DefaultEditorOwner provided for that parameter. If the owner that actually utilizes the editor does not provide a value for a property value requested, the DefaultEditorOwner will then be queried, which will return the value from its associated property.

 Initializes a new Object used to provide the default owner settings for an editor Initializes a new This member supports the Editor infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code. The context that was passed into the method. The to be rendered. This member supports the Editor infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code. The context that was passed into the method. The of the object. Returns the data type. The context that was passed into the method. The . The default implementation returns type of string. Returns the embeddable uielement associated with a particular object or null if none is available. Context used to identify the object to reference The embeddable uielement representing the specified owner context. Returns a list of predefined values. The context that was passed into the method. A list of predefined values. Returns information needed to format a string. The context that was passed into the method. Returns the format string or null. Returns the IFormatProvider or null. The default implementation returns null (Nothing in VB) Returns masking information. This is only of ibterest to a editor that supports masking. The context that was passed into the method. The string used for masking the value or null if there is no mask. Determines whether literals and prompt characters are included in Value property of the Editor. Determines whether literals and prompt characters are displayed when not in edit mode. Determines whether literals and prompt characters are included when the editor copyies text to the clipboard. Returns the maximum length for a string. The context that was passed into the method. (out) The maximum value or 0 if there is no maximum. A boolean indicating whether a meaningful value was returned. Returns the maximum allowable value. The context that was passed into the method. The maximum allowable value. Returns the minimum allowable value. The context that was passed into the method. The minimum value or null if there is no minimum. Returns the ButtonStyle to be used by the embeddable element's button The context that was passed into the method. The ButtonStyle to be used by the embeddable element's buttons True if a non-default value is returned. Returns the color that is used as the transparent color for images displayed by the editor The context that was passed into the method. The that is used as the transparent color for images displayed by the editor. Returns which scrollbars should appear in an editor's multiline TextBox. The context that was passed into the method. A objects detailing which scrollbars should appear. Returns the object associated with the column. The context associated The ValueConstraint associated with the column. Returns or sets the object that provides the default owner settings for an editor. This member supports the Editor infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code. Defaultable owner settings for an editor.

The DefaultEditorOwnerSettings is essentially a property bag of settings for a to return to an editor when a property is requested of the editor's owner, that is, the object that is utilizing the editor.

 Initializes a new Returns or sets the used by an editor. Returns or sets the string used to format the value. Returns or sets the instance that supplies culture-specific formatting information. Returns or sets the input mask for the editor. Returns or sets whether literals and prompt characters are included in the editor value. Returns or sets whether literals and prompt characters are displayed when the editor is not in edit mode. Returns or sets whether literals and prompt characters are included when the editor copies the value to the clipboard. Returns or sets the maximum length for a string. Returns or sets the maximum value for the editor. Returns or sets the minimum value for the editor. Returns or sets the button style for the editor. Returns or sets the color that is used as the transparent color for images displayed by the editor. Returns or sets which scroll bars are displayed by a multiline editors textbox. Returns or sets the data type. When the owner doesn't have information on the DataType this data type will be used by the editor. Gets or sets the ValueConstraint. Returns true if ValueConstraint has been allocated. Abstract base class for editor buttons

The EditorButtonBase is the base class for an editor button. An editor button provides a way to display a generic button within a text or mask editor. Many of the editor classes already provide their own buttons that relate specifically to their value and are controlled by the editor itself. The editor buttons allow you to add additional buttons and affect the editor as required. For example, you can use an to display a custom control in a dropdown window.

As well as providing several basic properties (e.g. , , etc), there are also several members that must be overriden. The member is used to determine the size requested by the editor button to display its contents. The method is used to obtain the that will provide the display for the button. The member should return the type of UIElement that will be used to display the button. Implements should also override the and methods.

Implements that provide events should derive their event arguments from or to provide both the button instance related to the event as well as the .

Note The editor buttons do not automatically affect the value of the editor in any way. The property is provided from the button so that you can manipulate the editor as required.

Note Implementors must override the if the object is to be properly serialized at design time.

 Initializes a new Initializes a new Unique key for the button Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Returns the description of the default action of the button. The associated of the button. The description of the default action of the button. Used to notify the object that it is being disposed. Invoked when a property has changed on a sub object PropChangeInfo object containing information about the property change Used to obtain the uielement that will be used to display the button. Previous uielement or null The parent element If the may be used, that can be returned. Otherwise a new uielement with the specified parent should be returned. Used to determine if the specified key is used by the button. Key to evaluate True if the key is used by the button. Otherwise false is returned. Used to notify the button that its input key was pressed Key event information Used to notify the button that its input key was released Key event information Invoked when the Appearances collection of the object changes. Used to create a deep copy of the button. A deep copy of the button. Initializes the button with the values from the specified object. Button whose values should be copied. Sets the associated Owning editor Invoked from the type converter when an instance descriptor is needed to serialize the object. Type descriptor context An instance descriptor that can be used to create a new instance of the button Returns the string representation of the button A string containing the name of the button type Invoked when the preferred size of button should be calculated. Provides information that can be used to calculate the size A size structure containing the preferred size for the button This method is used to have the editor button calculate and cache its preferred size. Owner of the element for which the calculation is occuring Object instance for the editor instance that is being measured Creates an accessible object representing the editor button. Parent accessible object An accessible object representing the editor button Invoked when the default action of the accessible object representing the button is invoked. Accessible object representing a button instance. Gets the UIRole instance associated with this editor button. The embeddable editor owner. The owner context. The UIRole instance. Default appearance for the button Indicates whether an object has been created. Returns true when the Appearance object for the property has been created.

Use this property to determine if an object has been created. Appearance objects in general are not created until the properties associated with them are accessed.

 Returns or sets the collection that provides appearance information for the appearance properties Returns the owning Editor Returns or sets whether the button is enabled. Returns or sets whether the button is visible. Returns or sets the width of the button. Returns the resolved width of the button. Returns the type of uielement that is used to represent the button. Returns or sets the name used by accessibility clients to identify the button.

The AccessibleName property is used by accessibility clients to identify the object to the user.

 Returns or sets the description of the button used by accessibility client applications. Returns the accessible role for the button. The name of the ui role associated with the editor. Type converter for classes Returns true if the object can convert to that type. A that provides a format context. A that specifies the type you want to convert to. True if the object can convert to the specified type. Converts the object to the requested type. A formatter context. A object that specifies formatting conventions used by a particular culture. The to convert the to. The to convert. This method returns the converted object. Base accessible object for an Editor button Initializes a new Parent accessible object Associated button Performs the default action associated with this accessible object. Returns the role of the accessible object. Returns the state of the accessible object. Returns the name of the accessible object. Gets a string that describes the default action of the object. Indicates if the default action can be performed. Associated button Standard button style editor button.

The EditorButton is an editor button designed to display image and/or text. The button acts as a standard button invoking its event when the button is released.

 Initializes a new Initializes a new with the specified key. Unique key for the button Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Returns the description of the default action of the button. The of the button. The description of the default action of the button. Used to notify the object that it is being disposed. Invoked when a property has changed on a sub object PropChangeInfo object containing information about the property change Used to obtain the uielement that will be used to display the button. Previous uielement or null The parent element If the may be used, that can be returned. Otherwise a new uielement with the specified parent should be returned. Invoked when the Appearances collection of the object changes. Used to create a deep copy of the button. A deep clone of the button. Initializes the button with the values from the specified object. Button whose values should be copied. Used to invoke the event. EditorButtonEventArgs Invoked from the type converter when an instance descriptor is needed to serialize the object. Type descriptor context An instance descriptor that can be used to create a new instance of the button Resolves the appearance for the button. Current button state Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to resolve The associated UIRole instance. The associated ComponentRole instance. Invoked when the preferred size of button should be calculated. Provides information that can be used to calculate the size A size structure containing the preferred size for the button Calculates the size of the button's text. Editor button size information Invoked when the default action of the accessible object representing the button is invoked. Accessible object representing a button instance. Appearance for the button when pressed down Indicates whether an object has been created. Returns true when the Appearance object for the property has been created.

Use this property to determine if an object has been created. Appearance objects in general are not created until the properties associated with them are accessed.

 Returns the type of uielement that is used to represent the button. Returns or sets the style of the button border. Returns or sets the text displayed by the button. Returns the accessible role for the button. Fired when the button is clicked Editor button class with auto-repeat functionality.

The AutoRepeatEditorButton is similar to the in that it may display image and/or text. The button displayed is different, however, in that the event is invoked when the button is pressed down and will continue to invoke the event at regular intervals (see ).

 Initializes a new Initializes a new with the specified key. Unique key for the button Used to create a deep copy of the button. A deep copy of the button. Initializes the button with the values from the specified object. Button whose values should be copied. Invoked from the type converter when an instance descriptor is needed to serialize the object. Type descriptor context An instance descriptor that can be used to create a new instance of the button Used to obtain the uielement that will be used to display the button. Previous uielement or null The parent element If the may be used, that can be returned. Otherwise a new uielement with the specified parent should be returned. Returns or sets the delay before entering autorepeat mode when the button is pressed. Returns or sets the delay between click events after entering auto repeat mode The name of the ui role associated with the editor. Editor button class for a button that displays a checked state.

The StateEditorButton is used to display a checkbox, state button or option set within a text or mask editor. The type of display used is based on the property.

The class provides 4 events. The event is invoked before the property is changed. The event may be cancelled or the CheckState may be modified. If the event is not cancelled, the event is invoked. When the button is clicked via the ui, the event will also be invoked. The other event is the event. This event is primarily available for when the editor is used by a control that will display multiple instances of the element - e.g. UltraGrid. The event is invoked when the of the button is required by the element to initialize the value it will display. The property of the passed to that event should be used to determine for which object the check state is being initialized.

 Initializes a new Initializes a new with the specified key. Unique key for the button Returns the description of the default action of the button. Accessible object representing an instance of the state editor button Used to create a deep copy of the button. Initializes the button with the values from the specified object. Button whose values should be copied. Invoked from the type converter when an instance descriptor is needed to serialize the object. Type descriptor context An instance descriptor that can be used to create a new instance of the button Used to obtain the uielement that will be used to display the button. Previous uielement or null The parent element If the may be used, that can be returned. Otherwise a new uielement with the specified parent should be returned. Invoked when the preferred size of button should be calculated. Provides information that can be used to calculate the size A size structure containing the preferred size for the button Initializes the without invoking the and events Invoked when the default action of the accessible object representing the button is invoked. Accessible object representing a button instance. Used to invoke the event. InitializeCheckStateEventArgs Used to invoke the event Used to invoke the event Returns or sets the check state of the button. Returns or sets whether the button is checked or unchecked. Returns or sets the style used to display the check state. Returns the accessible role for the button. The name of the ui role associated with the editor. Fired when the checkstate for the element needs to be determined. Fired when the checkstate for a has changed Fired before the checkstate for a has changed Abstract base class for an editor button that displays a dropdown.

The DropDownEditorButtonBase is a base editor button class for displaying a dropdown window. It exposes common events relating to dropping down a separate window including the and events. It also exposes methods for programatically displaying () or hiding () the dropdown window.

 Initializes a new Initializes a new with the specified key. Unique key for the button Returns the description of the default action of the button. Accessible object representing an isntance of the dropdown editor button. Used to create a deep copy of the button. Initializes the button with the values from the specified object. Button whose values should be copied. Invoked from the type converter when an instance descriptor is needed to serialize the object. Type descriptor context An instance descriptor that can be used to create a new instance of the button Used to close up the dropdown window. Used to display the dropdown window Used to invoke the event. EditorButtonEventArgs Used to invoke the event. EditorButtonEventArgs Invoked when the preferred size of button should be calculated. Provides information that can be used to calculate the size A size structure containing the preferred size for the button Invoked when the default action of the accessible object representing the button is invoked. Accessible object representing a button instance. Indicates if the associated dropdown is currently displayed Returns or sets whether the dropdown is aligned to the right edge of the editor. Returns the accessible role for the button. The name of the ui role associated with the editor. Fired when the dropdown has been closed Fired when the dropdown window is about to be displayed Editor button class for displaying a in a dropdown window.

The DropDownEditorButton represents an editor button that is capable of displaying a in a separate window.

The method may be used to display the dropdown window while the editor is in edit mode. The method can be used to hide the dropdown window. There is also a static method, , that may be used to determine the DropDownEditorButton that is displaying a specified control or child control.

 Initializes a new Initializes a new with the specified key. Unique key for the button Used to create a deep copy of the button. A deep clone of the button. Initializes the button with the values from the specified object. Button whose values should be copied. Invoked from the type converter when an instance descriptor is needed to serialize the object. Type descriptor context An instance descriptor that can be used to create a new instance of the button Used to close up the dropdown window. Used to display the dropdown window Returns a dropped down that contains the specified control. Control to evaluate. May be the control dropped down from the button or a child of that control. The DropDownEditorButton displaying the specified control in a dropdown window or null if the control is not contained in a dropdown from an DropDownEditorButton Returns or sets the control to dropdown.

Note Attempting to set the Control property while the associated dropdown window is displayed will result in an exception.

 Indicates if the associated dropdown is currently displayed Returns or sets whether or not the DropDownEditorButton will set focus to the contained control when it is dropped down. Type converter used to determine which controls should appear in the type editor for a Control property. Creates a new instance of the class. Type Returns true if the value is a valid component. An that provides an additional context. The value to check. True if the value is a valid component. Spin button style editor button.

The SpinEditorButton class is an editor button used to provide spin button style functionality. Two or more buttons are displayed depending on the property. The "Can" properties are used to determine whether the buttons should be enabled or disabled.

When the spin button is clicked, the event is invoked. The will indicate which button was clicked so that the appropriate action can be taken.

 Initializes a new Initializes a new with the specified key. Unique key for the button Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to obtain the uielement that will be used to display the button. Previous uielement or null The parent element If the may be used, that can be returned. Otherwise a new uielement with the specified parent should be returned. Used to create a deep copy of the button. A deep copy of the button. Initializes the button with the values from the specified object. Button whose values should be copied. Invoked from the type converter when an instance descriptor is needed to serialize the object. Type descriptor context An instance descriptor that can be used to create a new instance of the button Invoked when the preferred size of button should be calculated. Provides information that can be used to calculate the size A size structure containing the preferred size for the button Resolves the appearance for the button. Current button state Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to resolve The associated UIRole instance. The associated ComponentRole instance. Creates an accessible object representing the editor button. Parent accessible object An accessible object representing the editor button Invoked when the default action of the accessible object representing the button is invoked. Accessible object representing a button instance. Indicates which spin button item's action should be performed. Returns or sets when the 'NextItem' spin button is enabled. Returns or sets when the 'PreviousItem' spin button is enabled. Returns or sets when the 'NextPage' spin button is enabled. Returns or sets when the 'PreviousPage' spin button is enabled. Returns or sets when the 'First' spin button is enabled. Returns or sets when the 'Last' spin button is enabled. Returns or sets the orientation of the spin buttons Returns or sets which spin button items are displayed. Returns the type of uielement that is used to represent the button. Returns or sets the style of the button border. Returns the accessible role for the button. The name of the ui role associated with the editor. Fired when the button is clicked Base accessible object for an Editor button Initializes a new Parent accessible object Associated button Retrieves the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. The zero-based index of the accessible child. An AccessibleObject that represents the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Returns the control used to synchronize accessibility calls. Performs the default action associated with this accessible object. Navigates to another accessible object. Direction of the navigation The accessible object based on the specified navigation direction. Returns the role of the accessible object. Returns the parent accessible object. Returns the location and size of the object represented by the accessible object. Returns the state of the accessible object. Returns the name of the accessible object. Gets a string that describes the default action of the object. Indicates if the default action can be performed. Abstract base control class for a control that utilizes an type editor

The EditorButtonControlBase is the base control class for editor controls that provide editor button functionality. The editor buttons are accessible via the and properties and are displayed to the left and right of the edit area respectively.

The control exposes events corresponding to the current events exposed from the various derived classes.

Note The events exposed by this control (, , etc.) differ from those normally exposed from an editor control in that they will also be fired when the buttons of an externally provided editor instance (e.g. when the editor control is set as the EditorControl of an UltraGrid Column object) are affected. While this deviates from the previous behavior that only the events for the editors displayed by the standalone editor control, it does allow for the events of the externally provided editor to be hooked at design time. The property may be used to determine the source of the event.

 Initializes a new Indicates if the should be serialized. True if the contains any items Clears the collection Indicates if the should be serialized. True if the contains any items Clears the collection Returns true if this property is not set to its default value True if the property is not set to its default value. Reset appearances to null Resets the property to its default value.

Invoke this method to reset the property to its default value.

Once this method is invoked, the method will return False until the property is set again.

Returns a Boolean value that determines whether the property is set to its default value.

Returns True if the property is not set to its default value; otherwise, it returns False.

Invoke the method to reset this property to its default value.

 Boolean indicating whether the property should be serialized Resets the property to its default value.

Invoke this method to reset the property to its default value.

Returns a Boolean value that determines whether the property is set to its default value.

Returns True if the property is not set to its default value; otherwise, it returns False.

Invoke the method to reset this property to its default value.

 Boolean indicating whether the property should be serialized Invoked when the control's editor has been created. Editor created for the control True if the editor is that used by the control. False if it is the editor provided to controls requesting the editor via the IProvidesEmbeddableEditor interface. Invoked when a property on the editor has changed. A structure containing the property change information. Closes any instances that are currently dropped down. Creates a new accessibility object for the control. A new accessibility object for the control. Used to notify accessible clients that an accessible event for the editor has occurred. Enumeration indicating the event that occurred. Used to invoke the GotFocus event. The event args. Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to invoke the event Event arguments Returns the control's editor Indicates if the editor provided to an external control has been created. Returns the editor provided to an external control. Indicates if the editor provided to an external control has been created. Returns a collection of editor buttons displayed on the right side of the edit area.

You can use the or collection to add buttons to the left or right side of an editor, respectively. There are several types of buttons available including , , , , , and .

 Returns a collection of editor buttons displayed on the right side of the edit area.

You can use the or collection to add buttons to the left or right side of an editor, respectively. There are several types of buttons available including , , , , , and .

 Returns the editor owner used by the control to provide information to the internal editor instance. Determines when to show the Ink Button This property determines when to show the Ink Button A collection of all the Appearance objects created for use with this control.

The Appearances collection is used to contain Appearance objects that you have created and added to the control as pre-defined formatting templates. It does not represent a collection of all the Appearance objects that exist in the control. The intrinsic Appearance objects that are stored by objects such as the UltraGridBand, UltraGridRow, UltraGridCell are not included in the grid's Appearances collection.

 Returns or sets the ImageList associated with the control. Returns or sets the color that will be masked out of the image displayed by the control. Invoked when an editor button is clicked Invoked when an spin editor button is clicked Invoked when a dropdown editor button has closed. Invoked before a dropdown editor button has been displayed. Invoked when the check state of a state editor button for an element should be initialized. Invoked before the CheckState of a StateEditorButton has been changed. Invoked after the CheckState of a StateEditorButton has been changed. If different than null, specifies custom data filter used by the editor. Accessible object representing an Initializes a new Control which is represented by the accessible object Retrieves the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. The zero-based index of the accessible child. An AccessibleObject that represents the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Returns the object that has the keyboard focus. An AccessibleObject that specifies the currently focused child. This method returns the calling object if the object itself is focused. Returns a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no object has focus. Returns the object that has the keyboard focus. An AccessibleObject that specifies the currently focused child. This method returns the calling object if the object itself is focused. Returns a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no object has focus. Returns the name of the accessible object. Returns the role of the accessible object. Gets or sets the value of an accessible object. Embeddable editor owner class for an Initializes a new Associated control Notifies the owner that an accessible event has occurred. Context used to identify the object to reference Enumeration indicating the event that occurred. Determines when to show the Ink Button on the editor. The context that was passed into the method. A ShowInkButton value indicating when the InkButton will be shown.

The default implementation returns ShowInkButton.Default.

 Returns the editor for the passed in ownerContext. This is used by the base implementation of EmbeddableOwnerBase. The context that was passed into the method. The for the passed in context. Returns the embeddable uielement associated with a particular object or null if none is available. Context used to identify the object to reference The embeddable uielement representing the specified owner context. Returns the owner's control. The context that was passed into the method. The owner's control. This is used e.g. to re-parent the edit control. Returns whether the value is enabled for editing. The context that was passed into the method. True if the value is enabled for editing. The editor calls this method whenever any of its embeddable elements gets a mouse down. The associated . The providing event information. If true is returned, the editor will enter edit mode on either MouseDown or MouseUp, depending on the nature of the editor The owner context The default implemenation returns true Returns true if in design mode, false otherwise. UIElement for an Element that behaves like a scrollbar button. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the ScrollButtonUIElement class. Parent UIElement type Constructor, initializes a new instance of the ScrollButtonUIElement class. Parent UIElement type int millisecond delay before next hit is fired Constructor, initializes a new instance of the ScrollButtonUIElement class. Parent UIElement type int millisecond delay before next hit is fired initial delay before autorepeat Makes sure that the child elements for this element are in the ChildElements array and that they are positioned properly. This needs to be overridden if the element has any child elements. Called when the button is clicked Called when the mouse down message is received over the element. Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Called when the button released The mouse event args. Returning true will ignore the next click event Overrides the rendering of the dropdown button arrow. The used to provide rendering information. Handles the rendering of the element using the system themes. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element was able to successfully render with the system theme. Used to determine whether the remaining draw methods are invoked. Overriden. Cancels the timer if capture is aborted. Reinitializes this . The new value for the property. The delay in milliseconds before the next auto repeat 'hit' occurs. The new value for the property. Invoked when the element has been clicked twice within the double click threshold Specifies whether the mouse was clicked over an adjustable element. Called when the mouse enters this element Called when the mouse leaves this element Returns or sets whether the button acts as a repeatable button.

When set to true, the default value, the button will fire the initial click when the button is pressed down and fires at the specified interval thereafter until the mouse is release. When false, the auto repeat logic is bypassed and the button will act as a standard button element.

 Gets/sets whether the scroll arrow should be filled when rendered. If this is set to false, only the arrow's outline is rendered. Determines whether the element can render an image background. Indicates if the arrow indicator for the scroll button should be limited to the system's scroll arrow size. Overridden. Scroll buttons do not cancel capture when pressing escape. Gets/sets the delay between notifications when holding down the scroll button. Determines whether callbacks made during a scroll occur synchronously or asynchronously. When true, callbacks during a scroll operation occur synchronously with the control's thread. Gets/sets the initial delay between pressing down the button and starting the auto repeat cycle. During the auto repeat cycle, the button click will be fired while the mouse is pressed and over the button at intervals defined by the AutoRepeatDelay. Gets/sets the type of this , for example, Up, Down, etc. Indicates if the element should automatically scroll when the mouse hovers over the element. Initializes a new Parent element Invoked when a property on the associated button has changed. A structure containing the property change information. Invoked when the button has been clicked. True to prevent the base implementation from being invoked. Invoked when the checked state of the button changes other than when it is initialized. Handles the rendering of the element using the system themes. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element was able to successfully render with the system theme. Used to determine whether the remaining draw methods are invoked. Draws the button's borders The providing rendering information. Overrides the rendering of the dropdown button arrow. The used to provide rendering information. Since the actual button style is flat when the display style is Office2000 or OfficeXP, we need to override this so the arrow indicator shifts when it is clicked Initializes the appearance of the EditorWithTextUIElement and descendants. AppearanceData AppearancePropFlags Handles the creation and positioning of the child elements OnMouseDown Mouse event arguments True if the mouse button was pressed while the cursor was positioned over the adjustable area If not null, contains a reference to the element that has captured the mouse Called when the mouse is released over an element Mouse event arguments Returning true will ignore the next click event Called when the element is double clicked If true the mouse was double-clicked over the adjustable area of the element Overrides ButtonUIElementBase OnControlFocus control to give focus to Returns or sets the associated Indicates if the button area is invalidated when the mouse enters and leaves the element. Gets the button style for the element. Returns the ui role for the element. UIElement class for the SpinButtonUIElement Constructor, initializes a new instance of the SpinButtonUIElement class. Parent UIElement Interval between click event when holding down the mouse button over the element. Interval before initiating the first autorepeat click. Orientation of the spin buttons. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the SpinButtonUIElement class. Parent UIElement Interval between click event when holding down the mouse button over the element. Interval before initiating the first autorepeat click. Orientation of the spin buttons. Determines which spin buttons are displayed Used to recreate the spin buttons based on the orientation. Invoked when the spin buttons need to be created. Direction of the spin scroll button Delay before starting the autorepeat Delay between clicks while in autorepeat mode Type of spin button being created A new SpinScrollButtonUIElement Initializes the appearance of the spin buttons. AppearanceData AppearancePropFlags Handles the creation and positioning of the child elements. Used to notify that the spin button's click has fired. Direction of the spin button. Used to determine whether a spin button should be disabled during a spin operation and when the elements are positioned. Direction of the spin button. A boolean indicating whether the button should be enabled or disabled. Used to notify that the spin button's click has fired. Direction of the spin button. Type of spin button Used to determine whether a spin button should be disabled during a spin operation and when the elements are positioned. Direction of the spin button. Type of spin button A boolean indicating whether the button should be enabled or disabled. Invoked when the method is invoked to allow the spin button owner to render the individual buttons The used to provide rendering information. True if the draw operation was handled Invoked when the method is invoked to allow the spin button owner to render the individual buttons The used to provide rendering information. True if the draw operation was handled Returns the extent of the element to contain within the spin buttons The number of buttons. The total extend of the element. The extent of the element within the spin buttons. Returns the increment spin button (up for vertical, right for horizontal). Returns the decrement spin button (down for vertical, left for horizontal). Returns the increment page spin button (up for vertical, right for horizontal). Returns the decrement page spin button (down for vertical, left for horizontal). Returns the move first button (up for vertical, right for horizontal). Returns the move last button (down for vertical, left for horizontal). Determines the orientation of the spin buttons. Returns or sets a flagged enumeration indicating the types of spin buttons to display. Returns the ui role for the element. Determines the button style of the spin buttons. Returns the element to contain within the spin buttons Constructor, initializes a new instance of the EditorButtonSpinButtonUIElement class. Parent UIElement Interval between click event when holding down the mouse button over the element. Interval before initiating the first autorepeat click. Orientation of the spin buttons. Determines which spin buttons are displayed Invoked when a property on the associated button has changed. A structure containing the property change information. Used to notify that the spin button's click has fired. Direction of the spin button. Type of spin button Used to determine whether a spin button should be disabled during a spin operation and when the elements are positioned. Direction of the spin button. Type of spin button A boolean indicating whether the button should be enabled or disabled. Invoked when the spin buttons need to be created. Direction of the spin scroll button Delay before starting the autorepeat Delay between clicks while in autorepeat mode Type of spin button being created A new SpinScrollButtonUIElement Handles the creation and positioning of the child elements. Returns or sets the associated Determines the button style of the spin buttons. Returns the ui role for the element. Scroll button item for the Scroll buttons for the spin button uielement. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the SpinScrollButtonUIElement class. Parent UIElement Direction of the scroll arrow. Delay before initiating auto repeat. Delay before first click. Determines the type of spin button displayed Constructor, initializes a new instance of the SpinScrollButtonUIElement class. Parent UIElement Direction of the scroll arrow. Delay before initiating auto repeat. Delay before first click. Invoked during the to resolve any remaining appearance values after the style specific appearance information has been initialized. AppearanceData structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Handles the rendering of the element using the system themes. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element was able to successfully render with the system theme. Used to determine whether the remaining draw methods are invoked. Overrides the rendering of the spin button arrow. The used to provide rendering information. Creates a new accessibility object for the UIElement. A new for the UIElement. Determines the style of the spin buttons. Returns the direction of the scroll spin button. Indicates if the scroll arrow should be limited to the system's scroll arrow size. Returns or sets the type of spin button that the scroll button represents. Returns the accessible object that represents the element or its associated object. Indicates if the element supports accessibility. Returns the ui role for the element. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the EditorButtonSpinScrollButtonUIElement class. Parent UIElement Direction of the scroll arrow. Delay before initiating auto repeat. Delay before first click. Determines the type of spin button displayed Constructor, initializes a new instance of the EditorButtonSpinScrollButtonUIElement class. Parent UIElement Direction of the scroll arrow. Delay before initiating auto repeat. Delay before first click. OnMouseDown Mouse event arguments True if the mouse button was pressed while the cursor was positioned over the adjustable area If not null, contains a reference to the element that has captured the mouse Called when the mouse is released over an element Mouse event arguments Returning true will ignore the next click event Called when the element is double clicked If true the mouse was double-clicked over the adjustable area of the element Overrides ButtonUIElementBase OnControlFocus control to give focus to Handles the rendering of the element using the system themes. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element was able to successfully render with the system theme. Used to determine whether the remaining draw methods are invoked. Initializes the appearance of the EditorWithTextUIElement and descendants. AppearanceData AppearancePropFlags Overridden. Draws the button borders The used to provide rendering information. Returns the ButtonStyle to be used by the embeddable element's button Indicates if the button style requires invalidation of the element on the mouse enter and exit. Scroll button item for the Constructor, initializes a new instance of the EditorButtonSpinScrollButtonUIElement class. Parent UIElement Direction of the scroll arrow. Delay before initiating auto repeat. Delay before first click. Determines the type of spin button displayed Constructor, initializes a new instance of the EditorButtonSpinScrollButtonUIElement class. Parent UIElement Direction of the scroll arrow. Delay before initiating auto repeat. Delay before first click. Initializes the appearance of the EditorWithTextUIElement and descendants. AppearanceData AppearancePropFlags Returns the ButtonStyle to be used by the embeddable element's button The to be used by the embeddable element's button. Event arguments class for an event involving a single Initializes a new Button associated with the event Provides information about hosting the button. For example, if the button is in a cell in the grid, this would be a Cell object. Initializes a new Button associated with the event Owner of the editor whose button event is being invoked. The editor context from the editor.

This constructor is used to provide the owner and owner context so that the can be obtained only when it is requested. This is for efficiency in case the context is lazily created by the owner.

 Returns the associated with the event. Returns an object that provides some information about where the button is being used.

Since the may hosted within a single standalone editor control (such as an UltraTextEditor or used by a control that hosts editors (e.g. UltraGrid), the event may be invoked from multiple sources. The Context is used to provide some context about the source of the action. For stand alone controls, the value will usually be null but for external objects, an object identifying the source should be returned. For example, a Cell object should be returned when the button is hosted in an editor in a grid cell.

 Event arguments class for a cancelable event involving a single Initializes a new Button associated with the event Provides information about hosting the button. For example, if the button is in a cell in the grid, this would be a Cell object. Initializes a new Button associated with the event Owner of the editor whose button event is being invoked. The editor context from the editor.

This constructor is used to provide the owner and owner context so that the can be obtained only when it is requested. This is for efficiency in case the context is lazily created by the owner.

 Returns the associated with the event. Returns an object that provides some information about where the button is being used.

Since the may hosted within a single standalone editor control (such as an UltraTextEditor or used by a control that hosts editors (e.g. UltraGrid), the event may be invoked from multiple sources. The Context is used to provide some context about the source of the action. For stand alone controls, the value will usually be null but for external objects, an object identifying the source should be returned. For example, a Cell object should be returned when the button is hosted in an editor in a grid cell.

 An event argument class for the event Initializes a new instance Dropdown button Location where the dropdown will be displayed Provides information about hosting the button. For example, if the button is in a cell in the grid, this would be a Cell object. Initializes a new instance Dropdown button Location where the dropdown will be displayed Owner of the editor whose button event is being invoked. The editor context from the editor.

This constructor is used to provide the owner and owner context so that the can be obtained only when it is requested. This is for efficiency in case the context is lazily created by the owner.

 Returns or sets the location at which the dropdown will be displayed. Event argument class for the the Initializes a new Spin button associated with the event Type of spin button clicked Provides information about hosting the button. For example, if the button is in a cell in the grid, this would be a Cell object. Initializes a new Spin button associated with the event Type of spin button clicked Owner of the editor whose button event is being invoked. The editor context from the editor.

This constructor is used to provide the owner and owner context so that the can be obtained only when it is requested. This is for efficiency in case the context is lazily created by the owner.

 Returns the type of spin button that was clicked. Event arguments class for the InitializeCheckState event. Initializes a new Button associated with the event Provides information about hosting the button. For example, if the button is in a cell in the grid, this would be a Cell object. Default state for the checkbox Initializes a new Button associated with the event Default state for the checkbox Owner of the editor whose button event is being invoked. The editor context from the editor.

This constructor is used to provide the owner and owner context so that the can be obtained only when it is requested. This is for efficiency in case the context is lazily created by the owner.

 Returns or sets the displayed check state of the button. Event arguments class for the event. Initializes a new Button associated with the event Potential new state of the button. Provides information about hosting the button. For example, if the button is in a cell in the grid, this would be a Cell object. Initializes a new Button associated with the event Potential new state of the button. Owner of the editor whose button event is being invoked. The editor context from the editor.

This constructor is used to provide the owner and owner context so that the can be obtained only when it is requested. This is for efficiency in case the context is lazily created by the owner.

 Returns or sets the new Delegate for an event involving a single Delegate for a cancelable event involving a single Delegate for the event Delegate for the event Delegate for the event Delegate for the event A collection of instances Initializes a new Initializes a new Initial capacity for the collection Virtual method used by the All 'get' method to create the array it returns. The newly created object array This is normally overridden in a derived class to allocate a type safe array. Invoked when a property has changed on an in the collection The that contains the property change information. Clears the collection. Removes the item at the specified index. Index of the item to remove Removes the specified item from the collection. Button to remove Inserts an at the specified index Index at which the item should be inserted Button to insert into the collection Adds the specified to the collection Button that should be added to the collection The index of the button in the collection. IEnumerable interface implementation returns a type safe enumerator The type safe enumerator Initializes the collection from the specified buttons collection. Collection from which this collection should copy the buttons. Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to invoke the event Event arguments A collection of instances The collection as an array of objects Returns true if the collection is read-only Specifies the initial capacity of the collection Returns the at the specified index. Returns the with the specified key Invoked when the collection has been cleared Invoked when the collection is about to be cleared Invoked when an item is added to the collection Invoked before an item is added to the collection Invoked after an item is removed from the collection Invoked before an item is removed from the collection Enumerator for the EditorButtonsCollection Initializes a new Collection of buttons to enumerate Type-safe version of Current UITypeEditor for the Initializes a new for the specified type. Type Creates an array of types that can be created for the collection Provides information to the editor button Invoked when the object has been disposed Returns the size images displayed by the edit button. Returns the owner's control Returns the editor owner Returns the owner context Abstract base uielement class for a derived class. Constructor The parent element. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditorOwner interface. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditor interface. Context information used by the owner to identify the value. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is responsible for drawing the outer borders). If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. Used to position the instances in the collections. Area available for positioning the buttons True to add the elements. False will cause the rect to be calculate but the buttons will not be added. DisplayStyle for the buttons Area available in the editor for the client elements A collection of old uielements The remaining area available for positioning the remaining elements. Enumeration of display styles for a The state button is displayed as a checkbox The state button is displayed as a three state checkbox The state button is displayed as a radio/option button. The state button is displayed as a button that may be checked or unchecked. The state button is displayed as a three state button. Enumeration of spin button types Previous item button Next item button Previous page button Next page button First page button Last page button Enumeration of property ids for the properties property property property property property property property property EditorButton property property property property property property property property property property property property property property property property property property Enumeration of property ids for the properties Identifies the DataFilter property. EditorWithTextUIElement class Called before the element draw process starts. Constructor The parent element. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditorOwner interface. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditor interface. Context information used by the owner to identify the value. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. Initializes the appearance of the EditorWithTextUIElement and descendants. AppearanceData AppearancePropFlags Makes sure that the child elements for this element are in the ChildElements array and that they are positioned properly. Invoked during the method to allow derived classes to insert additional elements. ByRef current working rectangle. This should be modified to exclude the space used by the elements added. Current phase of elements being added. Previous ChildElements collection or null (Nothing in VB) if there was no previous child elements collection. The of the working area after the elements are positioned. Returns a dropdown button element to be added to the ChildElements collection Previous child elements collection A EditorWithTextBaseDropDownButtonUIElement instance. OnMouseEnter OnMouseLeave Resolves the ButtonAppearance Handles the rendering of the element using the system themes. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element was able to successfully render with the system theme. Used to determine whether the remaining draw methods are invoked. Initializes the appearance for the displayed buttons ByRef AppearanceData structure to update ByRef enumeration flags indicating the appearance properties to resolve Returns the editor associated with this element Determines whether to invoke the routine during the processing of the Gets/sets whether this element is enabled. Returns whether the data this element displays is fully visible. Returns the DisplayStyle provided by the EmbeddableEditorOwnerInfoBase-derived owner Returns whether the cursor is currently positioned over the element Returns the BackColor Returns the alignment used to position the dropdown button Indicates if the dropdown button should be displayed when edit elements are displayed for the editor. Enumeration of child element phases. Occurs before the edit element(s) have been added. Occurs after the edit element(s) have been added. Occurs before the text element has been added. Occurs after the text elements has been added. -derived editor which provides the functionality of a ComboBox.

The EditorWithCombo class uses the existing class to realize most of its functionality. EditorWithCombo implements the interface, which makes it a self-contained ValueList in that its owner (-derived implementation) need not implement the IValueListOwner interface to utilize the ValueList's functionality.

Interface that defines the communication layer between an interface implementor and the owner that uses it to populate a dropdown list. Called when the dropdown is closed up Called when a swapdropdown item has changed Called when a new item is selected and that change to that item is completed Resolves the value list's appearance The to initialize. The indicating which appearances should be resolved. Called when the list portion receives focus. Returns the owner's control Returns the IUltraControl associated with the owner. Returns the active edit control (if any) Returns the imagelist of the control True if this is a drop down list type where there is no edit control Returns the size of images in the image list collection. Returns a ValueList Collection Returns the instance which defines the appearance for the scrollbar displayed by the dropdown. Returns the that indicates the default look and feel for the scrollbar displayed by the dropdown. Returns the EmbeddableElementDisplayStyle that indicates the default look and feel of the ValueList items. IMRUListProvider interface Provides support for an MRU (most recently used) list Notifies the IMRUListProvider implementor that a selection change was committed The IMRUListProvider implementor will typically check its current count of items and determine whether to remove the last one, as well as add the specified item to the top of its list. Returns whether the implementor supports an MRU (most recently used) list Returns the MRU list associated with the implementor Returns the maximum number of items the MRU list will display Constructor - creates a new instance of the EditorWithCombo class The EditorWithCombo class provides basic ComboBox-like editing functionality Constructor - creates a new instance of the EditorWithCombo class The default owner associated with this editor The EditorWithCombo class provides basic ComboBox-like editing functionality Called by the EmbeddableTextBox when its text has changed Called by the EmbeddableTextBox class when its OnLeave method is called Called by the EmbeddableTextBox when a keystroke is received Since each editor might have different actions to perform for a given keystroke, this should be overridden by derived classes Key event arguments A boolean indicating whether the keystroke was handled Called by the EmbeddableTextBox when its OnKeyPress method is called Listens to the embeddableTextBox keyUp messages Called by the EmbeddableTextBox when the mouse wheel is moved Called after edit mode has been entered. The base implementation raises the AfterEnterEditMode event. Called before edit mode has been exited Set to true to cancel the operation. If true must exit even if exit event is cancelled. If true any changes made while in edit mode will be applied. The base implementation raises the BeforeExitEditMode if fireEvent is true. Called after edit mode has been exited Returns whether the owner should compare items based on their underlying value rather than their display text. The EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived owner The context that was passed into the method. True if the owner should compare items based on their underlying value. Applies any appearance associated with the dataVal data value. Base implementation does nothing. The AppearanceData structure to be resolved Properties to resolve. Data value. The of the editor. The owner context used to provide additional information about the element. A derived class can override this method to apply any appearance settings assoicated with the data value to this object. For example, an editor that makes use fo value list items can apply appearance of the value list item associated with dataVal. Returns whether the element will display the EmbeddableTextBox when it enters edit mode. The element for which the EmbeddableTextBox will be displayed when it enters edit mode. A boolean indeicating whether the EmbeddableTextBox is displayed for the specified element when it enters edit mode. Resets the editor's MRUList by removing all entries Automatic data conversions specific to this editor. Type of conversion. Value to convert. Type of converted value True if conversion was valid. Owner. OwnerContext. Converted value. Checks validity of converted values. Type of conversion. Value to check. Owner. Owner context. Additional information in the case of failure. True if the destination value is valid. Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Called from inside the method of the parent element to create and position the embedded element or elements. The element that will contain the embedded element. An object that derives from the class. Context information that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. The element returned the prior time the parent element's method was called. An instance of a class derived from EmbeddableUIElementBase.

The owner and ownerContext values are saved by the added element to get value and state information later.

 Used to determine the size preferred/required by the editor. Structure that provides information regarding the size calculation including the owner for which the size calculation is occuring, whether to exclude edit elements, whether to include borders, etc. The size needed to render the value by the editor based upon the specified options. Drops down the dropdown. True if successful. Closes the dropdown. Called before the dropdown has been dropped down. Set to true to cancel the operation. Called after the dropdown has been dropped down. The base implementation raises the AfterDropDown event. Called after the dropdown has been closed up. Called when the EditorWithText class is disposed Handles the actual implementation of the IEmbeddableTextBoxListener.OnKeyDown method Key event arguments A boolean indicating whether the keystroke was handled Allows the editor to handle the owner's mouse wheel event The mouse event args. Called when the dropdown is closed up Called when the selected item has changed Called when a new item is selected and that change to that item is completed Note that this is called when the dropdown closes as a result of a item being clicked on (or selected via ENTER key). It seems to be the only notification we get when the list closes. It also gets called when the list is hidden, and a new item is selected via the arrow keys, but we won't get that one since the textbox will be getting those keystrokes Resolves the value list's appearance Provides a mechanism by which derived editors can provide different ultimate default values for Appearance properties. The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. InternalResolveValueListAppearance The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. Called when the list portion receives focus. Handles firing of the SelectionChangeCommitted Event Event arguments Sets input focus to the editor. Returns true if the editor successfully took focus. Occurs when the owner gets a key down while in edit mode. The key event args. Occurs when the owner gets a key press while in edit mode. The key event args. Occurs when the owner gets a key up while in edit mode. The key event args. Returns whether the key is used by the editor. The key to test True only if the editor is in edit mode and the key is used by the editor. Returns the text that the specified element should display The EmbeddableUIElementBase-derived element If true, the owner-provided PasswordChar will not be applied to the returned string. The string that should be displayed by the element Sets the position, initializes, and displays the EmbeddableTextBox If the is DropDownList, this method does nothing Clones the editor Used to initialize the state of the object based on another editor instance. Editor whose property values are to be copied Creates a copy of the embeddable editor with the specified default owner. An instance of the default EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class from which to obtain owner-specific information A copy of the editor Invoked when the MouseWheel event of the associated embedded textbox is invoked. Mouse event arguments Used by an editor owner to create an accessible object for a specific object managed by an editor. Parent accessible object for the accessible object to create Editor owner Owner context that can be supplied to the editor owner to obtain information about the object represented by the accessible instance. An accessible object that represents the specified owner context for the editor. Returns a boolean indicating whether the should be displayed within the editor. The of the editor. The owner context used to provide additional information about the element. Returns a boolean indicating if the editor is acting as a dropdown list. The of the editor. The owner context used to provide additional information about the element. True if the editor is acting as a dropdown list. Invoked when the text of the associated has been changed and the datafilter has not been used to handle the change. Returns a boolean indicating whether the event should be invoked. Invoked when the text of the associated has been changed and the datafilter has not been used to handle the change. Returns a boolean indicating whether the event should be invoked. Returns the EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase.GetCheckedListSettings from the specified embeddable element. Returns the EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase.GetCheckedListSettings from the specified owner/owner context Called to initialize the ICheckedItemList implementor when entering or exiting edit mode. Specifies whether edit mode is being entered or exited; true indicates that the editor is entering edit mode, and false indicates that it is exiting. Returns whether the editor's value is determined by the ICheckedItemList implementation. Fired when a selection change is committed. Returns the current text being edited without doing any validation. This will return the text currently typed in. If the editor does not have an textbox-like control, it will return the current edit value in form of text. Accessing this property when the editor is not in edit mode will throw an exception. Specifies whether the editor supports value list (read-only).

If the editor makes use of value list returned by EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase, it returns true.

The default implemenation returns false.

 Returns whether text should be selected when the editor receives the input focus Indicates whether the editor supports AutoSizeEdit Returns the IValueList to be used by this instance of the editor Gets/sets the display style for the dropdown button Gets/sets the alignment for the dropdown button Returns whether the edit portion of the control is editable Gets/sets the index of the currently selected item. Available only at runtime. Note that if the dropdown list contains MRU items, the SelectedIndex

property gets/sets the index of the item in the ValueListItems collection, not the dropdown list. Gets/sets whether the editor has an MRU (most recently used) list associated with it

Note: The HasMRUList property is not applicable when the editor owner returns 'Suggest' or 'SuggestAppend' from the GetAutoCompleteMode method. Since the dropdown can only contain the filtered items in that scenario, MRU list functionality is suspended.

 Returns the MRU (most recently used) list associated with the editor Returns the MRU (most recently used) list associated with the editor

MRUItems must correspond to an item in the editor's to have relevance.

When the MRUList property is set, the contents of the array is checked to verify that each items correspond

Note: The MRUList property is not applicable when the editor owner returns 'Suggest' or 'SuggestAppend' from the GetAutoCompleteMode method. Since the dropdown can only contain the filtered items in that scenario, MRU list functionality is suspended.

 Gets/sets the maximum number of items that will be displayed in the editor's MRU list

When this property is set to a value that is less than the current number of items in the MRUList, all items whose index is >= MaxMRUItems are removed; i.e., this property supercedes the addition of members to the collection

Note: The MaxMRUItems property is not applicable when the editor owner returns 'Suggest' or 'SuggestAppend' from the GetAutoCompleteMode method. Since the dropdown can only contain the filtered items in that scenario, MRU list functionality is suspended.

 Gets/sets DrawMode used by the dropdown list Gets/sets whether the edit control should receive the input focus when the list portion is closed Returns the instance which determines the appearance of the scrollbar displayed by the dropdown.

The ScrollBarLook property provides a way for the end developer to customize the look of the vertical scrollbar which appears in the dropdown list when the number of items exceeds the value of the property. Note that when the -derived editor owner specifies a ScrollBarLook to be used by the editor, the editor's ScrollBarLook property is not applicable, i.e., the owner-provided value is given precedence. This means that when embedded in a control that exposes a ScrollBarLook property of its own, the host control's ScrollBarLook will be used, and not the editor's.

Returns true when the DropDownStyle property is set to DropDownList so that the editor receives keystrokes such as F4 and the arrow keys Returns true to indicate that the editor supports a dropdown Returns whether the editor supports selecting text. Returns true if the DropDownStyle property is DropDown Returns the contained by the or null This member supports the Infragistics framework and is not intended to be used externally. Returns the owner's control Returns the IUltraControl associated with the owner. Returns the active edit control (if any) Returns the imagelist of the control True if this is a drop down list type where there is no edit control Returns the size of images in the image list collection. Returns a ValueList Collection Returns the instance which determines the appearance of the scrollbar displayed by the dropdown. Returns the preferred scrollbar viewstyle for this editor. Returns the preferred displaystyle for this editor. Returns whether the implementor supports an MRU (most recently used) list Returns the MRU list associated with the implementor Returns the maximum number of items the MRU list will display Returns whether the editor can receive input focus while in edit mode Returns whether the editor currently has input focus Determines whether the valuelist's selected item index should be reset to -1 when exiting edit mode. Returns the internal ValueList object used by the editor Returns whether the editor raises the ValueChanged event in response to the ICheckedItemList implementor's CheckStateChanged event. Accessible object representing an progress bar editor instance. Initializes a new Parent accessible object Associated combo editor Associated owner Owner context that identifies the object which the accessible instance represents Retrieves the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. The zero-based index of the accessible child. An AccessibleObject that represents the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Returns the UIElement associated with a particular child accessible object. Accessible object representing the child whose uielement should be returned. The uielement used to display the child or null if the element is not available. Returns the object that has the keyboard focus. An AccessibleObject that specifies the currently focused child. This method returns the calling object if the object itself is focused. Returns a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no object has focus. Returns the role of the accessible object. Returns the valuelist used by the editor. This class supports the Infragistics framework and is not intended to be used externally. Returns true if the owner's return from the GetAutoCompleteMode method was either 'Append' or 'SuggestAppend'. Returns true if the owner's return from the GetAutoCompleteMode method was either 'Suggest' or 'SuggestAppend'. Returns true if the dropdown is visible (between calls to IValueList.DropDown and IValueListOwner.CloseUp), and the contents have been filtered as is the case when in "suggest" mode. Returns true when processing was triggered by the TextChanged event of the EmbeddableTextBox. Returns true when the filtered list is closed because the string typed by the end user matches an item's text exactly. Returns true when the filtered list is closed because the filter resulting from the string typed by the end user caused the filtered list to be empty. Returns true when the selected item index is being cleared because the filtered dropdown is about to be shown. Sets all members to their default values. EmbeddableEditorUIElement for the class Constructor The parent element. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditorOwner interface. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditor interface. Context information used by the owner to identify the value. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. Called to initialize the element. An object that implements the EmbeddableEditorOwner interface. An object that implements the EmbeddableEditor interface. Context information used by the owner to identify the value. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. Returns a dropdown button element to be added to the ChildElements collection Previous child elements collection A EditorWithTextBaseDropDownButtonUIElement instance. Initializes the appearance for the displayed buttons ByRef AppearanceData structure to update ByRef enumeration flags indicating the appearance properties to resolve Returns the alignment used to position the dropdown button Indicates if the dropdown button should be displayed when edit elements are displayed for the editor. EditorWithTextUIElement class Constructor The parent element. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditorOwner interface. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditor interface. Context information used by the owner to identify the value. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. Initializes the appearance of the EditorWithTextUIElement and descendants. AppearanceData AppearancePropFlags Handles rendering the background. The used to provide rendering information. Overridden. The used to provide rendering information. Called before the element draw process starts. Makes sure that the child elements for this element are in the ChildElements array and that they are positioned properly. Called before edit mode has been entered. OnMouseDown Mouse event arguments True if the mouse button was pressed while the cursor was positioned over the adjustable area If not null, contains a reference to the element that has captured the mouse True if the event has been handled. Returns the image this element should display The text that will be displayed by the element. Used to find the ValueListItem to use Appearance data structure that contains the owner's resolved appearance. Image If the owner provides us with a ValueList, we should use it; otherwise use what the owner returns from ResolveAppearance If the IValueList implementor returns false from ShouldDisplayImage, we return null OnMouseEnter OnMouseLeave Handles the rendering of the element using the system themes. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element was able to successfully render with the system theme. Used to determine whether the remaining draw methods are invoked. Invoked during the positioning of the EditorWithTextUIElement when additional elements from a derived editor should be included. By reference work rectangle that should be used for the editor elements and updated to not include the area used by those elements. A collection of uielements previously used by the element. It is recommended that you reuse elements whenever possible. A collection of elements that should be positioned or null if there are no additional elements to position. Called to initialize the element. An object that implements the EmbeddableEditorOwner interface. An object that implements the EmbeddableEditor interface. Context information used by the owner to identify the value. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. Returns the cursor that should be used when the mouse is over the element. By default this just walks up the parent chain by returning its parent's cursor Gets/sets whether this element is enabled. Returns whether this element is the one that is in edit mode Returns whether the data this element displays is fully visible. EditorWithTextDisplayTextUIElement class A text UIElement that exposes a text property. Constructor The parent element The initial text Initialize the appearance The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. Gets/sets the horizontal text alignment Gets/sets the vertical text alignment The text string. Determines if the text is displayed one one or more lines Determines if the text should be wrapped if it doesn't fit Determines if the text is displayed vertically Number of pixels in the X dimension (left/right) and the Y dimension (above/below) of extra space to leave around the text Returns the style of border that will be drawn. Returns flags indicating which borders will be drawn Indicates how mnemonics in the text are rendered. By default, the text will be rendered as is. EditorWithTextDisplayTextUIElement constructor The parent element of this element. The initial text. Fired when a mouse button is pressed down. Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Fired when a mouse button is released. The mouse event args. True if the event has been handled. Initializes the appearance of the EditorWithTextDisplayTextUIElement and descendants. AppearanceData AppearancePropFlags No background is drawn for a text element unless DrawsBackColor returns true Returns true if this element needs to draw a focus rect. This should be overridden since the default implementation always returns false. Even if this property returns true the focus will not be drawn unless the control has focus. Gets/sets whether this element is enabled. Returns whether the element should use the GdiDrawStringFlags.NoPadding flag when drawing GDI text. Displays an overflow indicator in the when appropriate. An element that displays a foreground image. ImageUIElement constructor The that the element should display. The parent of this element. initializes ImageUIElement with image The with which this element should be initialized. The Image value. Returns the style of border that will be drawn. Returns flags indicating which borders will be drawn Constructor The parent element of this object. The text to show in a tooltip. Disposes of this element's tooltip. Called when the mouse enters this element. Called when the mouse leaves this element. Used in the call to GetAdjustmentRange for elements that can be sized or moved with the mouse Should either be zero or a negative number Should either be zero or a negative number Should either be zero or a positive number Should either be zero or a positive number This is the inversion bar used for sizing or moving an element up and/or down. The rectangle is usually a horizontal bar. This is the inversion bar used for sizing or moving an element left and/or right. The rectangle is usually a vertical bar. Returned from call to GetBorderWidths Width of the left border Width of the top border Width of the right border Width of the bottom border Structure passed around during a drawing operation Constructor The element to draw The object that caches resources needed during a drawing operation The invalidate area Appearance data to start with For print runs whether we need to clip the text True if the elements will be allowed to render using the system theme. If true, the element will be drawn with a focus rect if DrawsFocusRect is true, regardless of whether its parent control has input focus. The appearance data structure for this element This method is used internally to initialize the when rendering a specific element. The to initialize. The specifying which areas should not be drawn. Returns a cached pen of the requested type. This pen should not be disposed of. It will be cleaned up eventually when the dispose method of this class is called. The type of pen (e.g. solid, dotted, dashed etc. The desired color The returned pen (do not dispose) Draws button borders around the element. UIElementButtonStyle State of the button. Draws button borders around the element. UIElementButtonStyle State of the button. Sides to be rendered Draws button borders around the element. UIElementButtonStyle State of the button. Sides to be rendered Rect for the borders. Nothing is drawn outside this rect. Draws button borders around the element. UIElementButtonStyle State of the button. Sides to be rendered Rect for the borders. Nothing is drawn outside this rect. True if the button is the default button. This will cause an extra line to be rendered around the button border Draws the borders around the current element. Draws borders around the element The style of the borders Bit flags indiating which sides to draw Draws borders around the element The style of the borders Bit flags indiating which sides to draw The borders are drawn inside this rectangle Draws borders around a supplied rect The style of the borders Bit flags indiating which sides to draw The border color The borders are drawn inside this rectangle Nothing is drawn outside of this area Draws borders around a supplied rect The style of the borders Bit flags indiating which sides to draw The border color The base color to use when rendering 3D style borders The borders are drawn inside this rectangle Nothing is drawn outside of this area Draws borders around a supplied rect The style of the borders Bit flags indiating which sides to draw The corners that should be rounded. This is ignored for non-rounded border styles The border color The base color to use when rendering 3D style borders The borders are drawn inside this rectangle Nothing is drawn outside of this area Draws borders around a supplied rect The style of the borders Bit flags indiating which sides to draw The border color The second border color. The base color to use when rendering 3D style borders The borders are drawn inside this rectangle Nothing is drawn outside of this area Draws borders around a supplied rect The style of the borders Bit flags indiating which sides to draw The corners that should be rounded. This is ignored for non-rounded border styles The border color The second border color. The base color to use when rendering 3D style borders The borders are drawn inside this rectangle Nothing is drawn outside of this area Draws borders around a supplied rect The style of the borders Bit flags indiating which sides to draw The corners that should be rounded. This is ignored for non-rounded border styles The pen which will be used to draw the left and top of the outer border. The pen which will be used to draw the right and bottom of the outer border. The pen which will be used to draw the left and top of the inner border. The pen which will be used to draw the right and bottom of the inner border. The borders are drawn inside this rectangle Nothing is drawn outside of this area Fills back color into a supplied rect (based on the current appearance settings. The rect to fill. Fills the specified rect with the backcolor information from the specified appearance data structure. AppearanceData structure containing the color information to render. Area into which the backcolor should be rendered The area to fill. Indicates whether to use the enabled colors of the Fills the specified rect with the backcolor information from the specified appearance data structure. AppearanceData structure containing the color information to render. Area into which the backcolor should be rendered The area to fill. Indicates whether to use the enabled colors of the Defines a blend pattern for a LinearGradientBrush Draws the arrow for a scroll button, dropdown button, etc. Direction of the arrow to render. Rect available for the arrow to be rendered. State of the button. Draws the arrow for a scroll button, dropdown button, etc. Direction of the arrow to render. Rect available for the arrow to be rendered. Size indicating how much to offset the arrow. Boolean indicating if the size should be limited to the size of the scroll bars. Boolean indicating if a line is to be rendered at the top of the arrow (i.e. to indicate first/last or min/max). Draws the arrow for a scroll button, dropdown button, etc. Direction of the arrow to render. Area in which to render the arrow. Maximum size to render the arrow. State of the button. Boolean indicating if the size should be limited to the size of the scroll bars. Draws the arrow for a scroll button, dropdown button, etc. Direction of the arrow to render. Area in which to render the arrow. Maximum size to render the arrow. State of the button. Style of the button. Type of button. Boolean indicating if the size should be limited to the size of the scroll bars. Boolean indicating if a line is to be rendered at the top of the arrow (i.e. to indicate first/last or min/max). Draws the arrow for a scroll button, dropdown button, etc. Direction of the arrow to render. Area in which to render the arrow. Maximum size to render the arrow. State of the button. Style of the button. Type of button. Boolean indicating if the size should be limited to the size of the scroll bars. Boolean indicating if a line is to be rendered at the top of the arrow (i.e. to indicate first/last or min/max). True if only the outline of the arrow should be rendered. Draws the arrow for a scroll button, dropdown button, etc. Direction of the arrow to render. Area in which to render the arrow. Maximum size to render the arrow. Size indicating how much to offset the arrow. Boolean indicating if the size should be limited to the size of the scroll bars. Boolean indicating if a line is to be rendered at the top of the arrow (i.e. to indicate first/last or min/max). Draws the arrow for a scroll button, dropdown button, etc. Direction of the arrow to render. Area in which to render the arrow. Maximum size to render the arrow. Size indicating how much to offset the arrow. Boolean indicating if the size should be limited to the size of the scroll bars. Boolean indicating if a line is to be rendered at the top of the arrow (i.e. to indicate first/last or min/max). True if only the outline of the arrow should be rendered. Renders the specified image on the graphics object. Image to render Rectangle into which the image should be rendered True if the image should be scaled or false to use the appearance image horizontal and vertical alignments ImageAttributes instance or null If scaled is true will maintain original aspect ratio. If true, a shadow is drawn around the image The base color of the border shadow The alpha level of the start of the border shadow The alpha level of the end of the border shadow The depth of the border shadow Renders the specified image on the graphics object. Image to render Rectangle into which the image should be rendered True if the image should be scaled or false to use the appearance image horizontal and vertical alignments ImageAttributes instance or null If scaled is true will maintain original aspect ratio. Renders the specified image on the graphics object. Image to render Rectangle into which the image should be rendered True if the image should be scaled or false to use the appearance image horizontal and vertical alignments ImageAttributes instance or null Renders the specified image on the graphics object. Image to render Rectangle into which the image should be rendered Portion of the image to render ImageAttributes instance or null Renders the for the current Renders the for the current AppearanceData structure containing the image information to render. Area into which the image should be rendered The area to fill. Indicates whether to use the enabled image of the Returns a color with a modified Alpha channel based on whether AlphaBlending is supported and the current DrawPhaseAlphaLevel Color to modify A struct where the alpha channel () has been re-set based on the current draw phase' alpha level Draws a focus rectangle within the bounds of the element's borders. Draws a focus rectangle at the specified location. Location where the focus rect should be rendered Draws a focus rectangle at the specified location. Location where the focus rect should be rendered The forecolor of the area to draw the focus rect upon The backcolor of the area to draw the focus rect upon Creates a with specified color adjusted based on the alpha settings Color to adjust based on the AlphaBlend settings that is used to create the brush A SolidBrush instance whose color is based upon the specified color Creates a with the specified colors adjusted based on the alpha settings Style of hatch brush to create Forecolor of the brush. The color is adjusted based on the AlphaBlendMode and current Backcolor of the brush. The color is adjusted based on the AlphaBlendMode and current A HatchBrush whose colors are based upon the specified colors Renders a checkbox into the object using the current alphablend settings. Rectangle where the checkbox should be rendered State of the checkbox Renders a checkbox into the object using the current alphablend settings. Rectangle where the tristate checkbox should be rendered State of the checkbox Renders a radion/option button into the object using the current alphablend settings. Rectangle where the option button should be rendered State of the option button Draws textToRender in specified rectangle. The of the element that the text should be rendered into. The text that should be drawn. True if the text should be drawn on multiple lines. True if the text should be wrapped. Renders button borders using the specified ImageRegion object that provides the region from which the borders are rendered Button style to render State of the button True if the button is the default button. This will generate an extra border around the button region Renders a checkbox into the object using the current alphablend settings. Rectangle where the checkbox should be rendered An IButtonDrawStateSource which indicates the state of the checkbox Renders a checkbox into the object using the current alphablend settings. Rectangle where the tristate checkbox should be rendered An IButtonDrawStateSource which indicates the state of the checkbox Renders a radion/option button into the object using the current alphablend settings. Rectangle where the option button should be rendered An IButtonDrawStateSource which indicates the state of the checkbox Attempts to determine the glyph size for an element by walking up the parent chain and looking for the editor element or the ControlElement and calling GetGlyphInfo. TheUIElement. The type of glyph. Attempts to determine the glyph size for an element by walking up the parent chain and looking for the editor element or the ControlElement and calling GetGlyphInfo. The ControlUIelementBase. The EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase. The owner context. The type of glyph. Returns the text rendering mode. Note that this can be Default, in which case the value. The current phase of the drawing operation (read-only). Returns a font True if we are drawing to a printer (read-only). True if alpha blending is supported (read-only). True if the themes are supported (read-only). True if the element draws a focus rect even when its parent control does not have the input focus (read-only). The graphics object (read-only) Returns the alpha level that is operational based on the current phase of the drawing operation and the settings in AppearanceData. This will return a value between 0 and 255 (0 is transparent, 255 is completely opague). This property is read-only. The brush used to draw the back color (read-only) The brush used to draw text (read-only) The main control, top level element (read-only). The UIElement (read-only). The intersection of the original invalid rect, this element's rect and all of its parent rects (read-only). Returns the current Returns a boolean indicating if the element is being rendered as part of a transition. When true, elements should not perform any rendering operations. Returns the default CheckBoxGlyphInfo object for Office2007 CheckBox glyphs. Returns the default CheckBoxGlyphInfo object for Office2007 RadioButton glyphs. Determines how glyphs such as check boxes and radio buttons are drawn.

This property will affect all Infragistics WinForms controls that draw glyphs (checkboxes or radio buttons).

The setting may be overriden on indivual controls. For example, the UltraCheckEditor control and UltraOptionSet control have a GlyphStyle property. The setting on the indivudual control will override this global setting.

Note: Setting this property will not force a repaint of controls. Therefore it is recommended that this property be set when the applicaiton starts, before the controls have pained, such as in the Load event of the main application form.

 Returns the default CheckBoxGlyphInfo object for standard CheckBox glyphs. Returns the default CheckBoxGlyphInfo object for standard radio button glyphs. Determines how check boxes are drawn.

This property will affect all Infragistics WinForms controls that draw checkboxes.

The setting may be overriden on individual controls. For example, the UltraCheckEditor control has a GlyphInfo property. The setting on the indivudual control will override this global setting.

Note: Setting this property will not force a repaint of controls. Therefore it is recommended that this property be set when the applicaiton starts, before the controls have pained, such as in the Load event of the main application form.

 Determines how radio buttons are drawn.

This property will affect all Infragistics WinForms controls that draw RadioButtones.

The setting may be overriden on individual controls. For example, the UltraOptionSet control has a GlyphInfo property. The setting on the indivudual control will override this global setting.

Note: Setting this property will not force a repaint of controls. Therefore it is recommended that this property be set when the applicaiton starts, before the controls have pained, such as in the Load event of the main application form.

 Class that specifies information for drawing a glyph. Creates a new instance of the GlyphDrawingInfo class. The Graphics object onto which the glyph will be drawn. The desitnation rect into which the glyph will be drawn. The UIElementButtonState of the glyph. The AlphaLevel to use when drawing the glyph. The AlphaBlendMode to use when drawing the glyph. The ColorRenderMode to use when drawing the glyph. The invalid rect. This specifies the area that needs to be redrawn. Specifies whether to draw the glyph in flat mode. The Graphics object onto which the glyph will be drawn. The desitnation rect into which the glyph will be drawn. The UIElementButtonState of the glyph. The ButtonState of the glyph. This is essentially generated from the UIElementButtonState and FlatMode properties. The AlphaLevel to use when drawing the glyph. The AlphaBlendMode to use when drawing the glyph. The ColorRenderMode to use when drawing the glyph. The invalid rect. This specifies the area that needs to be redrawn. Specifies whether to draw the glyph in flat mode. Base class that handles the drawing of CheckBox and / or Radio button glyphs in various states. The default size of a glyph. (13,13) Base class that handles the drawing of CheckBox and / or Radio button glyphs in various states. Indicates the type of glyph (CheckBox or RadioButton). The size of the glyphs. A string description of the glyphs. Constructor used during deserialization. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Draws a glyph The Graphics object onto which the glyph will be drawn The Destination rectangle The UIElementButtonState which indicates which glyph to draw. Draws a glyph The Graphics object onto which the glyph will be drawn The Destination rectangle The UIElementButtonState which indicates which glyph to draw. The alphalevel/ The ColorRenderMode/ The Invalid rect of the desination graphics object. Draws a glyph A struct containing the information needed to draw the glyph Returns a System.String that represents the current System.Object. A System.String that represents the current System.Object. Cleans up (disposes) the cached resources Cleans up (disposes) the cached resources A string description of the glyphs. Returns the size of the glyphs. Returns the type of glyph. GlyphInfo type converter. Returns whether this converter can convert the object to the specified type, using the specified context. An that provides a format context. A System.Type that represents the type you want to convert to. true if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the given value object to the specified type, using the specified context and culture information. An that provides a format context. A System.Globalization.CultureInfo. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. The System.Object to convert. The System.Type to convert the value parameter to. An System.Object that represents the converted value. Base class for glyph info objects that draw standard windows-style glyphs. Base class for glyph info objects that draw standard windows-style glyphs. Draws a glyph A struct containing the information needed to draw the glyph Base class that handles the drawing of CheckBox and / or Radio button glyphs in various states. Creates an GlyphInfoBase using the specified combined image. Indicates the type of glyph (CheckBox or RadioButton). The size of the glyphs. A bitmap containing all possible states of the glyph. Creates an GlyphInfoBase using the specified combined image. Indicates the type of glyph (CheckBox or RadioButton). The size of the glyphs. A bitmap containing all possible states of the glyph. A string description of the glyphs. Constructor used during deserialization. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Initializes the GlyphInfo based on the combined glyph image. A bitmap containing all possible states of the glyph.

The combinedGlyphImage is a single image which contains all of the possisble states that the glyph a may draw. The images must all be the same size (13x13) and are arranged in a grid.

There must be 5 columns in the grid.

Column 0 is the CheckBox in it's disabled state.

Column 1 is the CheckBox in it's normal state.

Column 2 is the CheckBox in it's MouseOver state.

Column 3 is the CheckBox in it's MouseDown state.

Column 4 is the CheckBox in it's MouseOver and MouseDown state.

The number of rows varies based on the property. Each row indicates a different CheckState of a CheckBox or the selected / unselected state of a radio button.

 Returns the appropriate glyph for the specified UIElementButtonState The used in determining the proper glyph. The glyph for the specified UIElementButtonState. Saves the combined image to a file.

This method will save the combined image of all possible states into a Bitmap file.

 The file name to save to. Erases a glyph in the combined image with the system Window color. The UIElementButtonState indicating which glyph to erase Sets the glyph image specified by the buttonState to the specified image. The button state indicating which image to set. The image to apply to the specified button state. Cleans up (disposes) the cached resources Draws a glyph A struct containing the information needed to draw the glyph Serialize the glyph info object The number of rows in the combined glyph images. This is the same as the number of states that the glyph supports in terms of CheckState or selected / unselected state. The CheckBoxGlyphInfo object handles the drawing of CheckBox glyphs in various states Creates a new CheckBoxGlyphInfo using the images specified. Specifies the size of the glyphs. The radio button in it's disabled unchecked state. The radio button in it's disabled checked state. The radio button in it's disabled indeterminate state. The radio button in it's normal unchecked state. The radio button in it's normal checked state. The radio button in it's normal indeterminate state. The radio button in it's mouseover unchecked state. The radio button in it's mouseover checked state. The radio button in it's mouseover indeterminate state. The radio button in it's mousedown unchecked state. The radio button in it's mousedown checked state. The radio button in it's mousedown indeterminate state. The radio button in it's mousedown and mouseover unchecked state. The radio button in it's mousedown and mouseover checked state. The radio button in it's mousedown and mouseover indeterminate state. Creates a new CheckBoxGlyphInfo using the images specified. Specifies the size of the glyphs. The radio button in it's disabled unchecked state. The radio button in it's disabled checked state. The radio button in it's disabled indeterminate state. The radio button in it's normal unchecked state. The radio button in it's normal checked state. The radio button in it's normal indeterminate state. The radio button in it's mouseover unchecked state. The radio button in it's mouseover checked state. The radio button in it's mouseover indeterminate state. The radio button in it's mousedown unchecked state. The radio button in it's mousedown checked state. The radio button in it's mousedown indeterminate state. The radio button in it's mousedown and mouseover unchecked state. The radio button in it's mousedown and mouseover checked state. The radio button in it's mousedown and mouseover indeterminate state. A string description of the glyphs. Creates a new CheckBoxGlyphInfo using the combined image specified. A bitmap containing all possible states of the CheckBox. A string description of the glyphs.

The combinedGlyphImage is a single image which contains all of the possisble states that a CheckBox Glyph may draw. The images must all be the same size (glyphSize) and are arranged in a grid.

There must be three rows in the grid.

Row 0 is the CheckBox in it's unchecked state.

Row 1 is the CheckBox in it's checked state.

Row 2 is the CheckBox in it's indeterminate state.

There must be 5 columns in the grid.

Column 0 is the CheckBox in it's disabled state.

Column 1 is the CheckBox in it's normal state.

Column 2 is the CheckBox in it's MouseOver state.

Column 3 is the CheckBox in it's MouseDown state.

Column 4 is the CheckBox in it's MouseOver and MouseDown state.

 Constructor used during deserialization. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Gets or sets the image drawn when the checkbox is checked, but disbled. Gets or sets the image drawn when the checkbox is checked and the mouse is not over the element. Gets or sets the image drawn when the checkbox is checked and the mouse is over the element, but the mouse button is not depressed. Gets or sets the image drawn when the checkbox is checked and the mouse button is depressed, but the mouse is not over the element. Gets or sets the image drawn when the checkbox is checked and the mouse button is depressed and the mouse is over the element. Gets or sets the image drawn when the checkbox is unchecked, but disbled. Gets or sets the image drawn when the checkbox is unchecked and the mouse is not over the element. Gets or sets the image drawn when the checkbox is unchecked and the mouse is over the element, but the mouse button is not depressed. Gets or sets the image drawn when the checkbox is unchecked and the mouse button is depressed, but the mouse is not over the element. Gets or sets the image drawn when the checkbox is unchecked and the mouse button is depressed and the mouse is over the element. Gets or sets the image drawn when the checkbox is in the indeterminate state, but disbled. Gets or sets the image drawn when the checkbox is in the indeterminate state and the mouse is not over the element. Gets or sets the image drawn when the checkbox is in the indeterminate state and the mouse is over the element, but the mouse button is not depressed. Gets or sets the image drawn when the checkbox is in the indeterminate state and the mouse button is depressed, but the mouse is not over the element. Gets or sets the image drawn when the checkbox is in the indeterminate state and the mouse button is depressed and the mouse is over the element. The RadioButtonGlyphInfo object handles the drawing of Radiobutton glyphs in various states. Creates a new RadioButtonGlyphInfo using the images specified. Specifies the size of the glyphs. The radio button in it's disabled unchecked state. The radio button in it's disabled checked state. The radio button in it's normal unchecked state. The radio button in it's normal checked state. The radio button in it's mouseover unchecked state. The radio button in it's mouseover checked state. The radio button in it's mousedown unchecked state. The radio button in it's mousedown checked state. The radio button in it's mousedown and mouseover unchecked state. The radio button in it's mousedown and mouseover checked state. Creates a new RadioButtonGlyphInfo using the images specified. Specifies the size of the glyphs. The radio button in it's disabled unchecked state. The radio button in it's disabled checked state. The radio button in it's normal unchecked state. The radio button in it's normal checked state. The radio button in it's mouseover unchecked state. The radio button in it's mouseover checked state. The radio button in it's mousedown unchecked state. The radio button in it's mousedown checked state. The radio button in it's mousedown and mouseover unchecked state. The radio button in it's mousedown and mouseover checked state. A string description of the glyphs. Creates a new RadioButtonGlyphInfo using the combined image specified. A bitmap containing all possible states of the CheckBox. A string description of the glyphs.

The combinedGlyphImage is a single image which contains all of the possisble states that a RadioButton Glyph may draw. The images must all be the same size (glyphSize) and are arranged in a grid.

There must be two rows in the grid.

Row 0 is the Radiobutton in it's unchecked (unselected) state.

Row 1 is the Radiobutton in it's checked (selected) state.

There must be 5 columns in the grid.

Column 0 is the Radiobutton in it's disabled state.

Column 1 is the Radiobutton in it's normal state.

Column 2 is the Radiobutton in it's MouseOver state.

Column 3 is the Radiobutton in it's MouseDown state.

Column 4 is the Radiobutton in it's MouseOver and MouseDown state.

 Constructor used during deserialization. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Gets or sets the image drawn when the radio button is selected, but disbled. Gets or sets the image drawn when the radio button is selected, the mouse button is not depressed, and the mouse is not over the element. Gets or sets the image drawn when the radio button is selected, the mouse button is not depressed, and the mouse is over the element. Gets or sets the image drawn when the radio button is selected, the mouse button is depressed, and the mouse is not over the element. Gets or sets the image drawn when the radio button is selected, the mouse button is depressed, and the mouse is over the element. Gets or sets the image drawn when the radio button is selected, but disabled. Gets or sets the image drawn when the radio button is selected, the mouse button is not depressed, and the mouse is not over the element. Gets or sets the image drawn when the radio button is not selected, the mouse button is not depressed, but the mouse is over the element. Gets or sets the image drawn when the radio button is not selected, the mouse button is depressed, but the mouse is not over the element. Gets or sets the image drawn when the radio button is not selected, the mouse button is depressed, and the mouse is over the element. A collection of UIElements. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the UIElementsCollection class. The initial capacity of the collection. Adds the element to the collection. Element to add to collection. The index of the added element Adds the element to the collection Element to add to collection. The index of the added element Inserts the element to the collection Index of insertion point. Element to insert into the collection. Inserts the element to the collection Index of insertion point. UIElement to add to collection[ must be UIElement] Copies the elements of the collection into the array. The array to receive the elements. The array index to begin inserting the elements. Removes an element from the collection. The element to remove. Gets the index of the element in the collection. The element to check. The index in the collection. Sees if the element is in the collection. The element to check. True if the element is in the collection. Disposes non-null elements of the collection and clears the collection. IEnumerable Interface Implementation returns a type safe enumerator Hides the ArrayList's indexer so that the collection can expose a type safe indexer Inner class implements IEnumerator interface IEnumerator.MoveNext True if the end of the collection has not been reached. IEnumerator.Reset Type safe version of Current IEnumerator.Current Event handler used for a click on an embeddable element event Event handler used for a mouse event over an embeddable element Event handler used for a mouse down event over an embeddable element Event handler used for a mouse event over an embeddable element Event parameters used for when an event is raised by an embeddable element. Constructor The that was clicked. True if the element is a button. Constructor The that was clicked. The of the specified element. The EmbeddableUIElementBase derived object. Returns true if the element clicked on is a button. Specifies what type of element was clicked. Enum for specifying the area that was clicked up. Text. Button. Link. Event parameters used for when an event is raised by an embeddable element. Constructor The that has raised the event. True if the element is a button. The associated with the event. Constructor The that has raised the event. The associated with the event. The of the specified element. The mouse arguments. Event parameters used for when an event is raised by an embeddable element. Creates a new instance of the class The EmbeddableUIElementBase-derived element raising the MouseDOwn event If true, listeners should react as if the element that was clicked is a button. The underlying mouse event arguments. Determines whether default processing will be bypassed; return true to bypass default processing. Creates a new instance of the class The EmbeddableUIElementBase-derived element raising the MouseDOwn event If true, listeners should react as if the element that was clicked is a button. The underlying mouse event arguments. Determines whether default processing will be bypassed; return true to bypass default processing. Determines whether the parent element of the specified embeddableElement will be notified of the MouseDown. Applicable only when eatMessage is false. Creates a new instance of the class The EmbeddableUIElementBase-derived element raising the MouseDOwn event The type of element that was clicked on. The underlying mouse event arguments. Indicates whether to eat the message or not. When set to true, the EmbeddableUIElementBase-derived element will return true from its OnMouseDown method, causing default mouse processing to be bypassed for ancestor elements. Determines whether the parent element will receive a notification when the EmbeddableUIElementBase-derived element's OnMouseDown method is called.

By default, -derived elements do not pass the MouseDown notification to their parent element. When the NotifyParentElement property is set to true, and the property is false, the parent element's method is called.

This property is only applicable when the property is false.

 Event parameters used for when an event is raised by an embeddable element. Constructor Boolean indicating if the changes will be applied. Initializes a new Boolean indicating if the changes will be applied. Boolean indicating if the edit mode is being forced to exit and therefore cannot be cancelled. Returns true if the changes made while in edit mode should be applied (read-only). This property will return false if, for example, the user pressed the escape key to exit exit mode. Returns true if the exit operation cannot be cancelled because the editor is being forced to exit edit mode. Interface that an editor implements to support auto size edit. Gets or sets the whether the editor should autosize. Default should be false. Gets or sets the starting width of the edit control. Editor sets its underlying control's width to this width when going into edit mode. If this is 0, then it should be ignored. Gets or sets the starting height of the edit control. Editor sets its underlying control's height to this height when going into edit mode. If this is 0, then it should be ignored. Gets or sets the max width the edit control can be resized to. If it's 0, then it should be ignored. Gets or sets the max height the edit control can be resized to. If it's 0, then it should be ignored. The class used to provide an embeddable element for the . Constructor The parent element. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditorOwner interface. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditor interface. Context information used by the owner to identify the value. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. Translates Color to string. The to convert to a string. A string representation of the specified color. Invoked during the method to allow derived classes to insert additional elements. ByRef current working rectangle. This should be modified to exclude the space used by the elements added. Current phase of elements being added. Previous ChildElements collection or null (Nothing in VB) if there was no previous child elements collection. Determines whether to invoke the routine during the processing of the An embeddable editor class which can contain other controls to allow any control to be used in a grid cell or other editor host. Creates a new Creates a new An instance of the default EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class from which to obtain owner-specific information Applies the appearance of the owning object to the control. The AppearanceData to apply to the control. Indicates whether the control is the Rendering or Editing control. Before a control is displayed or rendered, the owning object's appearances may be applied to it depending on the or properties for the or respectively. This method can be overriden for finer control over the control's appearance. Get an image of the RenderingControl using the value and appearance as determined by the owner and ownerContext. The size of the image. The editor owner the owner's editor context A ControlContainerEmbeddableUIElement which will be used to determine the background when the control contains transparent areas. Determines if the type can be edited. Returns true if the type can be edited. Determines if the type can be rendered. The data type to test Returns true if the type can be edited. Not supported for this editor. Sets input focus to the editor. Returns true if the editor successfully took focus. Override this in specific editor to provide automatic conversions for that editor. Type of conversion. Value to convert. Type of converted value True if conversion was valid. Owner. OwnerContext. Converted value. Returns the text that the specified element should display The EmbeddableUIElementBase-derived element If true, the owner-provided PasswordChar will not be applied to the returned string. The string that should be displayed by the element Provides editor-specific editor value. Editor value. Called from inside the method of the parent element to create and position the embedded element or elements. The element that will contain the embedded element. An object that derives from the class. Context information that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. The element returned the prior time the parent element's method was called. An instance of a class derived from EmbeddableUIElementBase.

The owner and ownerContext values are saved by the added element to get value and state information later.

 Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Used to determine the size preferred/required by the editor. Structure that provides information regarding the size calculation including the owner for which the size calculation is occuring, whether to exclude edit elements, whether to include borders, etc. The size needed to render the value by the editor based upon the specified options. Returns whether the key is used by the editor. The key to test True only if the editor is in edit mode and the key is used by the editor. Called after edit mode has been entered. The base implementation raises the AfterEnterEditMode event. Called before edit mode has been entered. Set to true to cancel the operation. The base class implementation raises the BeforeEnterEditMode event. Called before edit mode has been exited. Set to true to cancel the operation. If true, edit mode is exited even if the BeforeExitEditMode event is canceled. If true, any changes made while in edit mode will be applied. Called when the editor is disposed Internal method for Infragistics infrastructure purposes only. New editor value. Gets or sets whether or not the owner's appearance properties that apply to Control (such as BackColor, ForeColor, and ImageBackground) are applied to the EditingControl before it is displayed. Gets or sets whether or not the owner's appearance properties that apply to Control (such as BackColor, ForeColor, and ImageBackground) are applied to the RenderingControl before it is drawn. Gets or set the control which will be used for editing when the editor goes into edit mode. The EditingControl is the control that will be displayed when the editor enters edit mode. Before the EditingControl is displayed, the editor will set it's value, location, size, and appearance. Any changes to the value of the of the EditingControl will be written to the owning object when the editor exits edit mode (or discared if the owner cancels the edit). If EditingControl is null, then the editor will not enter edit mode and thus will not allow the user to edit. It will act only as a renderer using the . Gets or sets the name of the property on the which will be used to determine the value of the owning object. In order for the editor to function, it must deal with a single property of the as specified by this property. If no EditingControlPropertyName is specified, the editor will look for a property named Value on the control. Failing that, the Text property will be used. If neither a Value nor a Text property are found, the editor will not be able to function properly. The ControlContainerEditor needs to know when the specified property on the control is changed. To do this, it will attempt to hook an event on the specified control with a name that matches the property (i.e. ValueChanged or TextChanged). If no such event exists or is not fired when the property changes, the editor will be unable to write changes to the owner. In the rare case where this happens, it is recommend that the developer derive a class from ControlContainerEditor and override the EditorValue property and set this property any time the editor value changes. Determines what happens when the editor enters edit mode via the mouse. By default, clicking on an editor will place it into edit mode, and the click message is consumed in this process. The EnterEditModeMouseBehavior allows you to change this behavior so that the mouse message is forwarded to the such that the click puts the editor into edit mode and also causes a Click event on the control. Gets or set the control which will be used for rendering the editor when not in edit mode. When the editor is not in edit mode, the editor will set the value, size, and appearance of the control and render it to a bitmap for display. If RenderingControl is null, the editor will display the editor value as text. Gets or sets the name of the property on the which will be used to determine the value of the owning object. In order for the renderer to function, it must deal with a single property of the as specified by this property. If no RenderingControlPropertyName is specified, the editor will look for a property named Value on the control. Failing that, the Text property will be used. If neither a Value nor a Text property are found, the editor will not be able to function properly. Returns the ControlHostContainer used by this class Gets or sets the value of the . This property will get or set the value of the EditorControl. The value is the property specified by Gets or sets the value of the . This property will get or set the value of the RendererControl. The value is the property specified by Returns whether the editor can receive input focus while in edit mode Returns the current text being edited without doing any validation. This will a string representation of the . Accessing this property when the editor is not in edit mode will throw an exception. Returns whether the editor currently has input focus Gets/sets the value being edited. Enum indicating the type of control (Rendering or Editing). Indicates the . Indicates the . The embeddable editor UIElement for the class. Constructor The parent element. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditorOwner interface. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditor interface. Context information used by the owner to identify the value. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is responsible for drawing the outer borders). If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. Initializes the appearance of the EditorWithTextUIElement and descendants. AppearanceData AppearancePropFlags Called when a mouse button is pressed while the cursor is positioned over the element. Mouse event arguments True if the mouse button was pressed while the cursor was positioned over the adjustable area If not null, contains a reference to the element that has captured the mouse Internal accessor for the method. Mouse event arguments True if the mouse button was pressed while the cursor was positioned over the adjustable area If not null, contains a reference to the element that has captured the mouse Handles positioning of child UIElements. Returns whether the data this element displays is fully visible. This method is typically used to determine whether a tooltip needs to be displayed.

 Returns the to which this instance is associated. Returns a Rectangle that describes the area where the is to be displayed or where the will be drawn. UIElement that displays an image of the control when its associated is not in edit mode. Creates a new instance of the class. The to which this instance is associated. Initializes this instance for use by a new . The to which this instance is associated. Draws the element's foreground. Overridden for the purpose of drawing an image of the control when the element is not in edit mode. The UIElementDrawParams struct that contains the drawing information. Draws the element's background. Overridden to prevent the background from being drawn, since we draw an image of the when the element is not in edit mode. Called when a mouse button is pressed while the cursor is positioned over the element. Mouse event arguments True if the mouse button was pressed while the cursor was positioned over the adjustable area If not null, contains a reference to the element that has captured the mouse Fired when a mouse button is released. The mouse event args. True if the event has been handled. True if this element is drawn normally. The default implementation of this property returns true. It may be overidden by some elements who don't do any rendering (e.g. scrollbars since they are actually scrollbar windows that render themselves) Summary description for EmbeddableImageRenderer. Constructor. Constructor. An instance of the default EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class from which to obtain owner-specific information Tries to contruct an image from the owner's value and returns it. If no image can be constructed, then returns null. The editor owner the owner's editor context A stream representation of the image. If the image has a TransparentColor, then the stream must be maintained until the image is disposed. Returns whether or not the caller is responsible for disposing the image. The image constructed from the owner's value, or null this has failed. Gets an image from the val. Val can be an Image instance in which case it will return val. If it's a byte[] then it will try to convert that into an Image using Image.FromStream static method by constructing a stream from the byte array. Returns null if an image can't be constructed from the passed in data. The value to convert into an image The editor owner the owner's editor context A stream representation of the image. If the image has a TransparentColor, then the stream must be maintained until the image is disposed. Returns whether or not the caller is responsible for disposing the image. The image constructed from the owner's value, or null this has failed. Sets input focus to the editor. Returns true if the editor successfully took focus. Returns false since the image renderer does not support editing. The to check. False, since the image renderer does not support editing. Determines if the type can be rendered. The type to test. Returns true if the type can be rendered. Used to determine the size preferred/required by the editor. Structure that provides information regarding the size calculation including the owner for which the size calculation is occuring, whether to exclude edit elements, whether to include borders, etc. The size needed to render the value by the editor based upon the specified options. Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Called from inside the method of the parent element to create and position the embedded element or elements. The element that will contain the embedded element. An object that derives from the class. Context information that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. The element returned the prior time the parent element's method was called. An instance of a class derived from EmbeddableUIElementBase.

The owner and ownerContext values are saved by the added element to get value and state information later.

 Returns false since the image renderer does not support editing. The object indicating which keys were pressed. False since the image renderer does not support editing. Called when the editor is disposed Called before edit mode has been entered. Set to true to cancel the operation. The base implementation raises the BeforeEnterEditMode event. Creates a copy of the embeddable editor with the specified default owner. An instance of the default EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class from which to obtain owner-specific information A copy of the editor Initializes the state of this object from a source object of the same type Object whose properties should be copied Used by an editor owner to create an accessible object for a specific object managed by an editor. Parent accessible object for the accessible object to create Editor owner Owner context that can be supplied to the editor owner to obtain information about the object represented by the accessible instance. An accessible object that represents the specified owner context for the editor. Returns false since the image renderer does not support editing and thus does not get focus. Returns false since the image renderer does not support editing and does not get focus. Always throws NotSupportedException since the image renderer does not support editing. Returns the current text being edited without doing any validation. This will return the text currently typed in. If the editor does not have an textbox-like control, it will return the current edit value in form of text. Accessing this property when the editor is not in edit mode will throw an exception. Returns true if the edited value is valid (read-only). Accessing this property when the editor is not in edit mode will throw an exception. Returns false since the image renderer does not support editing. Gets or Sets the border shadow's base color. Gets or Sets the depth of the border shadow. Gets or Sets a value indicating whether a border shadow will be drawn around the image. Gets or Sets a value indiciating whether the aspect ratio of the image should be maintained when scaling. Specifies how to scale the images. Gets/sets the transparent color. This color will be mapped to the back color when drawing images. Gets/sets the default image. If an image can't be constructed from the data supplied by the owner, then this image will be drawn. Accessible object representing an progress bar editor instance. Initializes a new Parent accessible object Associated image editor Associated owner Owner context that identifies the object which the accessible instance represents Returns the role of the accessible object. Returns the text of the masked edit. Embeddable ui element for the EmbeddableImageRenderer. Constructor The parent element. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditorOwner interface. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditor interface. Context information used by the owner to identify the value. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. Returns an object of requested type that relates to the element or null. The requested type or null to pick up default context object. If true will walk up the parent chain looking for the context. An object of the requested type that relates to the element, or null if none was found. Overridden method. Initialzes the appearance used by this element. The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. Creates the child elements A virtual method that gets called before the element draw process starts. This is for notification purposes, the default implementation does nothing. Overridden. The used to provide rendering information. Called when the mouse enters this element Called when the mouse leaves this element Renders the backcolor for the element The used to provide rendering information. Called when the element is disposed off. Returns true causing all drawing of this element to be expicitly clipped to its region Returns whether the data this element displays is fully visible. Overridden property that returns the border style this ui element is going to have. Summary description for EmbeddableTextBox. This interface is implemented by a control that is intended to be treated as part of an element in a parent control. Returns the that is embedding the control. Returns the additional height required to render the spell checker's error marker, in pixels (3). Creates a new instance of the EmbeddableTextBox class Creates a new instance of the EmbeddableTextBox class Owning Determines whether the specified key is a regular input key or a special key that requires preprocessing. One of the Keys values true if the specified key is a regular input key; otherwise, false. Called when the control gets focus Handles disposing the control's resources. Boolean indicating if managed and unmanaged resources should be released. Applies the passed-in AppearanceData to the control Note that the only relevant properties here are ForeColor, BackColor, FontData, TextHAlign, TextVAlign, and Cursor. The AppearanceData to be applied to the EmbeddableTextBox Initializes the TextBox properties to the values obtained from the new owning element The EmbeddableUIElementBase-derived class currently associated with the control UnInitializes the EmbeddableTextBox by setting the OwingElement property to null Sets the control's bounds, using the OwningElement's RectInsideBorders property and the TextVAlign property The rectangle that the control must be fit into Sets the Text property and suppresses the firing of the ValueChanged event The new value for the Text property OnKeyDown Key event arguments OnKeyUp Key event arguments OnKeyPress KeyPress event arguments OnTextChanged Event arguments Called when the control gets the input focus Called when the control loses the input focus The . Called when the control is left The . Called when a mouse button is pressed down while the cursor is positioned over the control The . Called when a mouse button is released while the cursor is positioned over the control The . Called when the cursor enters the control Event arguments Called when the cursor leaves the control Event arguments Called when the mouse wheel is moved Mouse event arguments Called when the value of the ReadOnly property changes Accessor for the protected IsInputKey method The key to test A boolean indicating whether the key is used by the control Invoked when the textbox is clicked Event arguments Invoked when the textbox is double clicked Event arguments Invoked when the textbox is double clicked Event arguments Invoked when the mouse is moved over the textbox Mouse event arguments Gets/sets the vertical text alignment for the control. Only relevant when Multiline == true. Note that the TextBox does not actually support vertical text alignment; we simulate alignment by positioning the control with respect to its OwningElement. Gets/sets the horizontal text alignment for the control (Read only) Returns the EmbeddableUIElementBase-derived class currently associated with the control Gets/sets whether to disregard the usual events that cause the IEmbeddableOwner's OnLeaveEditor method to be called (i.e., OnLeave, OnLostFocus) This is necessary because the ValueList's ComboBox-derived dropdown grabs the focus whenever it closes up This member supports the Infragistics infrastructure and is not meant to be invoked externally. Derives from EmbeddableTextBox. The only difference between the two is that this class overrides PreProcessMessage to prevent beeping when the TAB, ENTER or ESCAPE keys are pressed. If the user has appropriate UI permissions, this class should be used rather than the EmbeddableTextBox class Creates a new instance of the EmbeddableTextBoxWithUIPermissions class Creates a new instance of the EmbeddableTextBoxWithUIPermissions class Owning Processes a key message ref Message A boolean indicating whether the key was processed Processes Windows messages. The Windows Message to process. This member supports the Infragistics infrastructure and is not meant to be invoked externally. Sets the AutoSize property to true, and sets the StartSize and MaxSize properties to the values specified by startSize and maxSize, respectively. The new value for the StartSize property. The new value for the MaxSize property. Resets all properties to their default values Returns whether AutoSize is supported Returns the initial size of the edit window. Returns the maximum size of the edit window. Returns whether a maximum size was stipulated Returns whether a start size was stipulated Gets/sets whether auto editing is currently in progress, i.e., in edit mode and the textbox has been autosized at least once. An enumerator for specifying which alpha level to use Use the current default Use the alpha level value Render opaque (255) Render transparent (0) Use bit flags to uniquely identify each property of the AppearanceData structure. The background color The color used for the foreground text The color of the borders The font name used for text The horizontal alignment of text The vertical alignment of text The horizontal alignment of the image The vertical alignment of the image The foreground image The origin of the background image The style of the background image The background image The image background alpha property The image alpha property The alpha level property The alpha level property for back color The alpha level property for text color The alpha level property for borders foreground color of disabled element background color of disabled element The font bold attribute used for text The font italic attribute used for text The font underline attribute used for text The font strikeout attribute used for text The font size attribute used for text All font data The color to use when doing a gradient fill of the background The color to use when doing a gradient fill of the background when the elemtn is disabled. The style of gradient fill to use for the background The font size attribute used for text The base color used to create the shadow and highlight colors for raised or inset 3d border styles. If BorderColor3DBase is not set then the BackColor will be used. The alpha level property for themed elements. The style of the hatch brush used to fill the background Determines how the BackGradient is aligned with respect to its origin and extent. Determines the margins used when drawing an when is set to Stretched. Determines the margins used when drawing an when is set to Stretched. The second color of the borders used for gradients Combined flag for Image properties like Image, ImageAlpha, ImageHAlign, ImageVAlign, and ThemedElementAlpha. Does not include ImageBackground properties. Combined flag for ImageBackground properties like ImageBackground, ImageBackgroundDisabled, ImageBackgroundAlpha, ImageBackgroundOrigin, ImageBackgroundStretchMargins, and ImageBackgroundStyle All properties but the cursor The cursor property All properties uniquely identify each property of the AppearanceData structure. The background color property The text color property The border color property The font property The horizontal text alignment property The vertical text alignment property The horizontal image alignment property The vertical text alignment property The foreground image property The background image origin property The background image style property The background image property The background image alpha property The image alpha property The alpha level property The back color alpha property The forecolor alpha property The border color alpha property The cursor property foreground color of disabled element background color of disabled element The color to use when doing a gradient fill of the background The color to use when doing a gradient fill of the background when the elemtn is disabled. The style of gradient fill to use for the background The font size attribute used for text The base color used to create the shadow and highlight colors for raised or inset 3d border styles. If BorderColor3DBase is not set then the BackColor will be used. The alpha level to use when rendering a themed element. The style of the hatch brush used to fill the background. Determines how the BackGradient is aligned with respect to its origin and extent. Determines the margins used when drawing an when is set to Stretched. The background image for a disabled element The second color of the borders The appearances collection property The appearance object. The property The property Specifies if and how a hatch brush will be used to fill the background of a UIElement. The default style. No hatch. Use solid or gradient backcolor. /// A pattern of horizontal lines. A pattern of vertical lines. A pattern of lines on a diagonal from upper left to lower right. A pattern of lines on a diagonal from upper right to lower left. Specifies the hatch style Cross Specifies horizontal and vertical lines that cross. Specifies forward diagonal and backward diagonal lines that cross. The lines are antialiased. Specifies a 5-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background color is 5:100. Specifies a 10-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background color is 10:100. Specifies a 20-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background color is 20:100. Specifies a 25-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background color is 25:100. Specifies a 30-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background color is 30:100. Specifies a 40-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background color is 40:100. Specifies a 50-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background color is 50:100. Specifies a 60-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background color is 60:100. Specifies a 70-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background color is 70:100. Specifies a 75-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background color is 75:100. Specifies a 80-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background color is 80:100. Specifies a 90-percent hatch. The ratio of foreground color to background color is 90:100. Specifies diagonal lines that slant to the left from top points to bottom points and are spaced 50 percent closer together than BackwardDiagonal, but they are not antialiased. Specifies diagonal lines that slant to the right from top points to bottom points, are spaced 50 percent closer together than, and are twice the width of ForwardDiagonal. This hatch pattern is not antialiased. Specifies diagonal lines that slant to the left from top points to bottom points, are spaced 50 percent closer together than BackwardDiagonal, and are twice its width, but the lines are not antialiased. Specifies diagonal lines that slant to the right from top points to bottom points, have the same spacing as hatch style ForwardDiagonal, and are triple its width, but are not antialiased Specifies diagonal lines that slant to the left from top points to bottom points, have the same spacing as hatch style BackwardDiagonal, and are triple its width, but are not antialiased. Specifies vertical lines that are spaced 50 percent closer together than Vertical. Specifies horizontal lines that are spaced 50 percent closer together than Horizontal. Specifies vertical lines that are spaced 75 percent closer together than hatch style Vertical (or 25 percent closer together than LightVertical). Specifies horizontal lines that are spaced 75 percent closer together than hatch style Horizontal (or 25 percent closer together than LightHorizontal). Specifies vertical lines that are spaced 50 percent closer together than Vertical and are twice its width. Specifies horizontal lines that are spaced 50 percent closer together than Horizontal and are twice the width of HatchStyleHorizontal. Specifies dashed diagonal lines, that slant to the right from top points to bottom points. Specifies dashed diagonal lines, that slant to the left from top points to bottom points. Specifies dashed horizontal lines. Specifies dashed vertical lines. Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of confetti. Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of confetti, and is composed of larger pieces than SmallConfetti. Specifies horizontal lines that are composed of zigzags. Specifies horizontal lines that are composed of tildes. Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of layered bricks that slant to the left from top points to bottom points. Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of horizontally layered bricks. Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of a woven material. Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of a plaid material. Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of divots. Specifies horizontal and vertical lines, each of which is composed of dots, that cross. Specifies forward diagonal and backward diagonal lines, each of which is composed of dots, that cross. Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of diagonally-layered shingles that slant to the right from top points to bottom points. Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of a trellis. Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of spheres laid adjacent to one another. Specifies horizontal and vertical lines that cross and are spaced 50 percent closer together than hatch style Cross. Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of a checkerboard. Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of a checkerboard with squares that are twice the size of SmallCheckerBoard. Specifies forward diagonal and backward diagonal lines that cross but are not antialiased. Specifies a hatch that has the appearance of a checkerboard placed diagonally. Where the button will be displayed The dropdown button is displayed to the right of the edit portion The dropdown button is displayed to the left of the edit portion DropDownButtonDisplayStyle The dropdown button is never displayed The dropdown button is always displayed The dropdown button is displayed when the cursor is positioned over the editor Identifies the phases of an element's drawing operation Used in IUIElementDrawFilter.GetPhasesToFilter to indicate that no draw phases should be filtered. Called before an element is drawn. Returning true from the IUIElementDrawFilter.DrawElement method on this phase will prevent all default drawing for this element. It also prevents default drawing operations to start for any child elements which means that the IUIElementDrawFilter.DrawElement will not be called for any of those child elements. Called before an element attempts to render using the system's themes. Returning true from the IUIElementDrawFilter.DrawElement on this phase will prevent the element from attempting to render using the system themes. If the element can render itself using the system themes, the main rendering phases (BackColor, ImageBackground, Borders, Image, and Foreground) will not be invoked. Called after an element has an opportunity to render itself using the system theme. Called before an element's BackColor is drawn. Returning true from the IUIElementDrawFilter.DrawElement method on this phase will prevent default BackColor drawing. Called after an element's BackColor has been drawn. Called before an element's ImageBackground is drawn. Returning true from the IUIElementDrawFilter.DrawElement method on this phase will prevent default ImageBackground drawing. Called after an element's ImageBackground has been drawn. Called before an element's borders are drawn. Returning true from the IUIElementDrawFilter.DrawElement method on this phase will prevent default border drawing. Called after an element's Borders have been drawn. Called before an element's foregroung Image is drawn. Returning true from the IUIElementDrawFilter.DrawElement method on this phase will prevent default Image drawing. Called after an element's foreground Image has been drawn. Called before an element's foreground (e.g. text) is drawn. Returning true from the IUIElementDrawFilter.DrawElement method on this phase will prevent default foreground drawing. Called after an element's Foreground has been drawn. Called before an element's child elements are drawn. Returning true from the IUIElementDrawFilter.DrawElement method on this phase will prevent default drawing operations to start for any child elements which means that the IUIElementDrawFilter.DrawElement will not be called for any of those child elements. Called after an element's child elements have been drawn. Called before an element's focus rect is drawn. Returning true from the IUIElementDrawFilter.DrawElement method on this phase prevents the default drawing of the focus. Called after all drawing of the element and its children elements have been completed. DropDownStyle Edit portion is modifiable Edit portion is not modifiable DropDownListAlignment The dropdown list is aligned with the left edge of the edit portion The dropdown list is aligned with the right edge of the edit portion The dropdown list is aligned with the center of the edit portion An enumerator for a boolean type property that allows for a default setting. This is used in property override situations. Use the current default True False Determines the style of display for embeddable editor elements. Default is resolved to Standard. Emulate Office2000 appearance Emulate OfficeXP appearance Emulate Office2003 appearance Emulate VisualStudio2005 appearance Standard Emulate Office2007 appearance Emulate Windows Vista toolbar buttons uniquely identify each property of the FontData class. The name of the font The size of the font in points Determines if the font is bold Determines if the font is itailc Determines if the font has a strikout line thru it Determines if the font is underlined Determines how a gradient is aligned with respect to its origin and extent. The default alignment. The gradient is aligned with respect to the element that is being drawn. The gradient is aligned with respect to the form it is on. The gradient is aligned with respect to the control's container. The gradient is aligned with respect to the control client area. Specifies if and how a color gradient will be used to fill the background of a UIElement. The default style. No gradient. Use solid or hatch backcolor. Specifies a gradient from top to bottom. Specifies a gradient from left to right. Specifies a gradient from upper right to lower left. Specifies a gradient from upper left to lower right. Specifies a gradient that starts with the secondary color in the center and migrates toward the primary color on the left and right. Specifies a gradient that starts with the secondary color in the center and migrates toward the primary color on the top and bottom. Specifies a gradient that starts with the primary color in the center point and migrates toward the secondary color on the edges in a circular pattern. Specifies a gradient that starts with the primary color in the center point and migrates toward the secondary color on the edges in a rectangular pattern. Specifies a gradient that starts with the primary color in the center point and migrates toward the secondary color on the edges in a elliptical pattern. Specifies a vertical gradient that provides a glass like appearance with 20% highlight at the top. Specifies a vertical gradient that provides a glass like appearance with 37% highlight at the top. Specifies a vertical gradient that provides a glass like appearance with 50% highlight at the top. Specifies a vertical gradient that provides a glass like appearance with 20% highlight at the bottom. Specifies a vertical gradient that provides a glass like appearance with 37% highlight at the bottom. Specifies a vertical gradient that provides a glass like appearance with 50% highlight at the bottom. Specifies a horizontal gradient that provides a glass like appearance with 20% highlight on the left. Specifies a horizontal gradient that provides a glass like appearance with 37% highlight on the left. Specifies a horizontal gradient that provides a glass like appearance with 50% highlight on the left. Specifies a horizontal gradient that provides a glass like appearance with 20% highlight on the right. Specifies a horizontal gradient that provides a glass like appearance with 37% highlight on the right. Specifies a horizontal gradient that provides a glass like appearance with 50% highlight on the right. Specifies a vertical gradient that provides a glass like appearance with a bright 20% highlight at the top. Specifies a vertical gradient that provides a glass like appearance with a bright 37% highlight at the top. Specifies a vertical gradient that provides a glass like appearance with a bright 50% highlight at the top. Specifies a vertical gradient that provides a glass like appearance with a bright 20% highlight at the bottom. Specifies a vertical gradient that provides a glass like appearance with a bright 37% highlight at the bottom. Specifies a vertical gradient that provides a glass like appearance with a bright 50% highlight at the bottom. Specifies a horizontal gradient that provides a glass like appearance with a bright 20% highlight on the left. Specifies a horizontal gradient that provides a glass like appearance with a bright 37% highlight on the left. Specifies a horizontal gradient that provides a glass like appearance with a bright 50% highlight on the left. Specifies a horizontal gradient that provides a glass like appearance with a bright 20% highlight on the right. Specifies a horizontal gradient that provides a glass like appearance with a bright 37% highlight on the right. Specifies a horizontal gradient that provides a glass like appearance with a bright 50% highlight on the right. Specifies a horizontal gradient with a vertical glass overlay similar to the Windows Vista Explorer toolbar. Specifies a vertical gradient with a horizontal glass overlay similar to the Windows Vista Explorer toolbar. Specifies a horizontal gradient with a vertical glass overlay similar to the Windows Vista Explorer toolbar. Specifies a vertical gradient with a horizontal glass overlay similar to the Windows Vista Explorer toolbar. An enumerator for aligning text or images Use the current default Align to the left Align in the center Align to the right Different display styles for column headers and row selectors. The default style. The borders are drawn according to the border style. The look and feel of a Windows XP command button. The themed XP look and feel. The Windows Vista style. An enumerator for background image origin Orient the image relative to the element Orient the image relative to the form Orient the image relative to the containing control Orient the image relative to the control's client area An enumerator for background image style Use the current default Center the image Stretch the image Tile the image Enumeration of options for scaling images. Images are never scaled. Images are always scaled to the specified size. Images are only scaled if they exceed the scaled image size. Bit flags indicating on of the special keys (shift, ctrl and alt) The 'Shift' key is down The 'Ctrl' key is down The 'Shift' and 'Ctrl' keys are both down The 'Alt' key is down The 'Shift' and 'Alt' keys are both down The 'Alt' and 'Ctrl' keys are both down The 'Shift', 'Ctrl' and 'Alt' keys are all down Enum for specifying whether to show a spin button and where to show it. Don't display any spin buttons. Position the spin buttons on the left. Position the spin buttons on the right. Enumeration of possible text placements. The default text placement should be used. The text is placed above the image. The text is placed below the image. The text is placed to the left of the image. The text is placed to the right of the image. Enum for specifying the text rendering mode. Use the default text rendering mode. This typically means that the mode will be resolved using higher level property settings. Use GDI for text rendering. Note that while printing GDIPlus will be used this setting will not have any effect. Use GDIPlus for text rendering. Specifies how text will be rendered when there is not enough room to display the entire string. The default trimming. No trimming The text is trimmed to the nearest character. The text is trimmed to the nearest character, and an ellipsis is inserted at the end of a trimmed line. The center is removed from trimmed lines and replaced by an ellipsis. The algorithm keeps as much of the last slash-delimited segment of the line as possible. The text is trimmed to the nearest word, and an ellipsis is inserted at the end of a trimmed line. The text is trimmed to the nearest word. No trimming The text is trimmed to the nearest character. The text is trimmed to the nearest character, and an ellipsis is inserted at the end of a trimmed line. The center is removed from trimmed lines and replaced by an ellipsis. The algorithm keeps as much of the last slash-delimited segment of the line as possible. The text is trimmed to the nearest word, and an ellipsis is inserted at the end of a trimmed line. The text is trimmed to the nearest word. Returns or sets a value that determines the border style of an object. The border style of cells, rows, and headers can be set by the BorderStyleCell, BorderStyleRow, and BorderStyleHeader properties respectively. The border style of the AddNew box buttons can be set by the ButtonBorderStyle property. Note that not all styles are available on all operating systems. If the version of the OS that your program is running on does not support a particular border style, borders formatted with that style will be drawn using solid lines. The default border style No borders Dotted line Dashed line A solid line A 2 pixel wide inset border A 2 pixel wide raised border A 1 pixel wide inset border A 1 pixel wide raised border A 2 pixel wide etched line A 1 pixel wide rounded border with a rounding radius of 1. A 2 pixel wide etched rounded border with a rounding radius of 1. A 1 pixel wide rounded border with a rounding radius of 4. A 2 pixel wide rounded border with a rounding radius of 4. A 2 pixel wide line with two different colors A Windows Vista style border. BorderColor is used as the top border, and the other three borders sides are drawn with varying (ligher) shades of the BorderColor. A 1 pixel wide rounded border with a rounding radius of 3. Enumeration of button states. The logical left mouse was pressed on the element. The cursor is over the element. The logical left mouse button was pressed and the mouse is over the element. The element (or one of its ancestors) is disabled. The element is in a pushed/checked state. The state button is in an indeterminate state. Enumeration of button styles. Default Standard 2 pixel raised border unless the mouse is down over the element in which case it draws a 1 pixel flat border. Single pixel raised border unless the mouse is down over the element. Always uses a single pixel solid border. Uses a single pixel solid border when the mouse is down or over the element. Single pixel solid border when not active, otherwise responds like ButtonSoft. Borderless when not active, otherwise responds like ButtonSoft. Single pixel solid border when not active, otherwise responds like Button. Borderless when not active, otherwise responds like Button. No border is rendered around the button. A raised 2 pixel border (e.g. scroll buttons). A single pixel soft border when inactive but a 2 pixel 3D border when active. Emulates an OfficeXP toolbar button Standard 2 pixel raised border unless the mouse is down over the element in which case it draws a 2 pixel inset border (e.g. like old style command button). Emulates a WindowsXP themed command button, but with square edges. Emulates an Office2003 toolbar button. Essentially the same as an OfficeXPToolbarButton but without shadowed images. Emulates a Visual Studio 2005 toolbar button. Emulates an Office2007 ribbon button. Emulates an Office2007 scrollbar button. Emulates a Windows Vista toolbar button. Emulates a Windows Vista button. Enumeration of button types. Standard button State button An enumerator for UIElement display styles The default Display Style Win 95/98/2000 standard 3D Display Style Win XP Flat Display Style uniquely identify each property of UltraControlBase. Whether alpha blending is enabled A custom filter used to control UIElement creation and positioning. A custom filter used to control which cursor is used over UIElements. A custom filter used to override or supplement the drawing of UIElements. Indicates whether the control has a flat appearance. Indicates when elements of the controls may render using the system themes. Determines the style of alpha blending Determines whether GDI is used to measure and render text. Determines the text rendering mode. Determines the application styleset that is used to obtain the application style information. Determines whether the control will try to use the operating system theme support when rendering its elements. Determines whether the control will render with a flat appearance. Determines if the control should use application styling information. Determines the name of the loaded application style library from which the control should obtain its styling information. An enumerator for aligning text or images Use the current default Align to the top Align in the middle Align to the bottom style for specifying what property of a value list item will be displayed in each item of the DropDown list This applies to value list items collection associated with each value list for various drop down column styles. default value list display style text associated with the data value is display in the drop down list text associated with the data value and also picture that a value list item's appearance object is assigned to will be displayed display text value assigned to the value list item will be displayed in each item of the drop down list display text and also picture that a value list item's appearance object is assigned to will be displayed only the picture will be displayed in each item of the drop down list uniquely identify each property of the ValueList. The appearance object. property id identifying Add property property id identifying Clear property property id identifying DataValue, property property id identifying DisplayStyle, property property id identifying DisplayText, property property id identifying Remove property property id identifying SortStyle, property property id identifying Value property property id identifying ValueList property property id identifying ValueLists property property id identifying ValueListItem, property property id identifying ValueListItems, property property id identifying ValueListItems, property property id identifying CheckState, property property id identifying CheckStyle, property property id identifying CheckBoxAlignment, property enum for specifying how a value list items will be sorted when displaying value list items in a drop down list no sorting Sort ascending by display text. Sort descending by display text. Sort ascending by value. Sort descending by value. Enumeration describing the area of the embeddable UIElement Used by the EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase class ResolveAppearance method to indicate to the owner which area of the embeddable element the resolved appearance will be applied to The default area of the embeddable element The text area of the embeddable element The label area of the embeddable element The prompt characters of the embeddable element; i.e., a mask's prompt character The button area of the embeddable element The literal characters of the embeddable element; for example, a mask's literal character The fill area of the embeddable element, for example, a progress bar The DropDown area of the embeddable element Custom. Indicates that the stringName parameter of the ResolveAppearance method should be examined to determine the area. The text area of the embeddable element, when the value is null and the owner's return from the GetNullText method is a non-empty string. Enumeration of AlphaBlend modes Alphablending is disabled Alphablend using the system AlphaBlend api's Alphablend using GDI+ Enumeration of windows system colors. The color of the active window's border The color of the background of the active window's title bar. The color of the text in the active window's title bar. The color of the application workspace. The application workspace is the area in a multiple-document view that is not being occupied by documents. The face color of a 3-D element. The shadow color of a 3-D element. The shadow color is applied to parts of a 3-D element that face away from the light source. The dark shadow color of a 3-D element. The dark shadow color is applied to the parts of a 3-D element that are the darkest color. The light color of a 3-D element. The light color is applied to parts of a 3-D element that face the light source. The highlight color of a 3-D element. The highlight color is applied to the parts of a 3-D element that are the lightest color. The color of text in a 3-D element. The color of the desktop. The color of dimmed text. Items in a list that are disabled are displayed in dimmed text. The color of the background of selected items. This includes selected menu items as well as selected text. The color of the text of selected items. The color used to designate a hot-tracked item. The color of an inactive window's border. The color of the background of an inactive window's title bar. The color of the text in an inactive window's title bar. The color of the background of a ToolTip. The color of the text of a ToolTip. The color of a menu's background. The color of a menu's text. The color of the background of a scroll bar. The color of the background in the client area of a window. The color of a window frame. The color of the text in the client area of a window. Enumeration of spin button items that may be displayed Scroll to the first or last item Scrolling increments by one item Scrolling increments by one page Enumeration of relative positions Before the specified relative item After the specified relative item Specifies how sounds are played by the method. The sound is played synchronously. The sound is played asynchronously. If the specified sound file is not found, no default sound is played. The sound is played continuously until the next call to the PlaySound method. The currently playing sound, if any, will not be interrupted. If the sound driver is currently busy, the method will return without playing the sound. Enumerates the system-defined sound events. Plays the 'SystemAsterisk' sound event. Plays the 'SystemExclamation' sound event. Plays the 'SystemExit' sound event. Plays the 'SystemHand' sound event. Plays the 'SystemQuestion' sound event. Plays the 'SystemStart' sound event. Enumeration of corners No corners Upper left Upper right Bottom left Bottom right Left - Combination of TopLeft and BottomLeft Right - Combination of TopRight and BottomRight Top - Combination of TopLeft and TopRight Bottom - Combination of BottomLeft and BottomRight All four corners Enumerates when to show the Ink Button Default Show the Ink Button only if Ink Recognition is available. Always show the Ink Button Never show the Ink Button Enumeration of the various methods of printing colors. Colors and background images are rendered as they are on the screen. Colors and images are rendered using grayscale. Background colors and background images are not rendered. Foreground colors are rendered in black. Enumeration of the various formats to use when saving settings to the default store The SaveAsBinary method is used to get data from controls that allow configuration saving The SaveAsXml method is used to get data from controls that allow configuration saving Determines what type of mouse panning is supported. Default mouse panning mode Mouse panning is not allowed The middle mouse button may be used to pan horizontally. The middle mouse button may be used to pan vertically. The middle mouse button may be used to pan vertically and horizontally. Used for specifying inputType parameter to method. Unknwon notification. Notification associated with getting the current cursor. Mouse click notification. Mouse double click notification. Mouse down and up notifications. Mouse enter and leave notifications. Mouse hover notification. Mouse move notification. Used for specifying which constraints should be applied to the input value of the method. Specifies that all constraints, both implicit and explicit, should be applied during validation. Specifies that the constraint should be applied during validation. Specifies that the constraint should be applied during validation. Specifies that the implicit constraints imposed by the pseudo-datatype supplied by the property should be enforced during validation. Specifies that the implicit constraints imposed by the Type argument to the method should be enforced during validation. Specifies that the constraint should be applied during validation. Specifies that the constraint should be applied during validation. Specifies that the constraint should be applied during validation. Specifies that the constraint should be applied during validation. Specifies that the constraint should be applied during validation. Specifies that the constraint should be applied during validation. Specifies that the constraint should be applied during validation. Specifies that the constraint should be applied during validation. Used to specify how the class should validate a value. Each of these values represents a data type which has implicit constraints, such as a minimal value, etc. Those constraints are used by the method to enforce data validity. Represents an unrecognized or unspecified type. Represents a value which can either be true or false. Corresponds to System.Boolean. Represents a signed byte. Corresponds to System.SByte. Represents a date and time. Corresponds to System.DateTime. Represents a high precision floating point value. Corresponds to System.Decimal. Represents a high magnitude floating point value. Corresponds to System.Double. Represents a floating point value. Corresponds to System.Single. Represents a signed 16 bit integral value. Corresponds to System.Int16. Represents a signed 32 bit integral value. Corresponds to System.Int32. Represents a signed 64 bit integral value. Corresponds to System.Int64. Represents a signed 64 bit integral number whose maximal value is -1, inclusive. Corresponds to System.Int64. Represents a signed 64 bit integral number whose minimal value is 0, inclusive. Corresponds to System.Int64. Represents a signed 64 bit integral number whose maximal value is 0, inclusive. Corresponds to System.Int64. Represents a signed 64 bit integral number whose minimal value is -1, inclusive. Corresponds to System.Int64. Represents textual data. Corresponds to System.String. Represents a length of time. Corresponds to System.TimeSpan. Represents an unsigned byte value. Corresponds to System.Byte. Represents an unsigned 16 bit number. Corresponds to System.UInt16. Represents an unsigned 32 bit number. Corresponds to System.UInt32. Represents an unsigned 64 bit number. Corresponds to System.UInt64. Represents a Uniform Resource Identifier. Corresponds to System.Uri. Property identifiers for the class. Represents the property. Represents the property. Represents the property. Represents the property. Represents the property. Represents the property. Represents the property. Represents the property. Represents the property. Represents the property. Represents the property. Determine which Image a tooltip will display when is set to BalloonTip. The Balloontip will resolve it's image based on it's own property settings first. If it's own image resolved to null, it will get the image from the UltraToolTop component. The Balloontip will display the icon specified by the property. The Balloontip will display no icon. The Balloontip will display the Info icon. The Balloontip will display the Warning icon. The Balloontip will display the Error icon. Determines what style of tooltip to use. Display as a standard rectangular tooltip Default is resolved to Standard. Display as a Balloontip with a callout and possibly a title. Display with slightly rounded corners and a gradient background by default. Display Similar to Office2007 with rounded corners, but a differnt color background. Values that represent properties of the class. Represents the property. Represents the property. Represents the property. Represents the property. Represents the property. Represents the property. Enumeration of ToolTip Property IDs Represents the property. Represents the property. Represents the property. Represents the property. Represents the property. Represents the property. Represents the property. Represents the property. Represents the property. Represents the object. Represents the property. Represents the property. Determines whether the tooltip will display Formatted text. Default Display raw text with no formatting. Display as a Balloontip with a callout and possibly a title. Flags for specifying how text is to be measured/rendered. No special considerations are given to the measurement/rendering. The measurement/rendering is intended for text that is drawn with vertical orientation. The measurement/rendering is for printing. The preferred method of measurement/rendering should use GDI+. Note that if both the GDI+ and GDI flags are specified, GDI+ will be given preference. The preferred method of measurement/rendering should use GDI. Note that if both the GDI+ and GDI flags are specified, GDI+ will be given preference. The measurement/rendering is for themed text. Note that this flag will take precedence over GDI and GDI+. The measurement/rendering is for themed text with glow, available only on Vista. Note that this flag will take precedence over GDI and GDI+. Determines whether the ColorSelector control is being used to select multiple colors, such as in a paint application, or a single color like in a color picker. Multi-color mode. In this mode, the ColorSelector recogizes a ForeColor and BackColor. Single color mode. In this mode the ColorSelector is used to select a single color and has keyboard support. Represents the color schemes available with the Microsoft Office 2007 products. The default Windows blue color schem The Windows XP (blue) color scheme. The Windows Vista (grey) color scheme. The Windows Silver color scheme. Enumeration used to indicate the type of uielement transition that should occur. Alpha blending the new image over the old image. Enumeration used to indicate where the grab handle is placed relative to the parent form and the corresponding resizing behavior that the grab handle will provide. Located at the bottom of the form and is resizable vertically. Located at the bottom-left of the form and is resizable vertically and horizontally. Located at the bottom-right of the form and is resizable vertically and horizontally. Located at the left of the form and is resizable horizontally. Located at the right of the form and is resizable horizontally. Located at the top of the form and is resizable vertically. Located at the top-left of the form and is resizable vertically and horizontally. Located at the top-right of the form and is resizable vertically and horizontally. No grab handle is visible Enumeration used to indicate a type of glyph. CheckBox glyph Radio button glyph Enumeration used to indicate how glyphs such as check boxes and radio buttons are drawn. Default (Standard) Display glyphs in the standard style Display glyphs in Office2007 style Enumeration used to determine the positioning of the glow effect. Display glow at the bottom of the rect. Display glow at the left of the rect. Display glow at the top of the rect. Display glow at the right of the rect. Determines the direction of a find operation Find items above a relative item Find items below a relative item Find items to the left of a relative item Find items to the right of a relative item Binary enum for specifying logical 'and' or 'or'. Compare operands using a logical 'or'. Compare operands using a logical 'and'. Enum for specifying the comparision operator of a . Tests for two values being equal. Tests for two values being not equal. Tests for the condition's value being less than the value. Tests for the condition's value being less than or equal to the value. Tests for the condition's value being greater than the value. Tests for the condition's value being greater than or equal to the value. Will do a wildcard comparision of the condition's value to the comparision value taking comparision value as the string with wild cards. Will do a regular expression comparision of the condition's value to the comparision value taking comparision value as regular expression string. Complement of Like. Complement of Match. Tests to see if the condition value starts with the operand. Complement of StartsWith. Tests to see if the condition value ends with the operand. Complement of EndsWith. Tests to see if the condition value contains the operand. Complement of Contains. Tests to see if a value equal to null, DBNull.Value, or an empty string. Represents the color schemes available for Windows Vista styles. The default Windows Vista color scheme based on Windows Explorer The Windows Vista color scheme based on Windows Explorer The Windows Vista color scheme based on applications like Windows Mail, etc. Constants which specify the mode for the automatic completion feature used in the editor. The actual value is determined at a higher level of the property resolution hierarchy. Disables the automatic completion feature. Appends the remainder of the most likely candidate string to the existing characters, highlighting the appended characters.

With the 'Append' setting, characters are appended to the text typed in the edit portion so as to match the string representation of the "most likely" candidate in the list. For example, consider a list containing the strings "Apple", "Application", and "Apprehend". If the end user types an "A" into the edit portion when it is empty, the character string "pple" is appended to the "A" to produce "Apple", because that is the first entry in the list which matches the typed character string. The appended characters are selected. If the appended characters are overwritten to produce the character string "Appli", the character string "cation" is appended to produce "Application", since the presence of the character "i" now precludes "Apple" as a match.

Displays the dropdown list, which is populated with one or more suggested completion strings, and updated in real time as the end user changes the contents of the edit portion.

When set to 'Suggest', the contents of the list displayed to the end user is modified so as to only contain entries whose display text begins with the text in the edit portion of the control. For example, consider a list containing the strings "Apple", "Application", and "Apprehend". If the end user types an "A" into the edit portion when it is empty, all three list items appear in the dropdown list, since they all begin with the letter "A". If the end user continues typing to produce "Appl", the "Apprehend" item no longer appears in the dropdown list, since it is no longer a match candidate.

Combines the 'Suggest' and 'Append' settings. Constants which define whether to match on the data value or display text when attempting to locate an item in a list. DisplayText DataValue When the list is an implementor, the GetValue method is used to determine whether a matching item exists. When the list is an IList implementor, the ToString method is called on each member of the list, and that value is compared to the value in question, without regard to case. When the list is an implementor, the GetText method is used to determine whether a matching item exists. When the list is an IList implementor, the Contains is used to determine whether a matching item exists. Determines the flow direction of text. The text should flow horizontally and can be rotated. The text should flow vertically. Enumeration which determines whether a checkbox is displayed for each item in a ValueList. Checkboxes are not displayed for items. A 2-state (Checked, Unchecked) checkbox is displayed next to the item. A 3-state (Checked, Unchecked, Indeterminate) checkbox is displayed next to the item. Constants which specify how mouse clicks affect the selected and checked states of the item, and whether clicking on an item closes the dropdown list. Only clicks which are processed directly by the checkbox itself affect the check state of the item. Clicking directly on the checkbox does not close the dropdown list; clicking anywhere else selects the item and closes the dropdown. Clicking anywhere on the item changes its CheckState. With this setting, mouse clicking does not cause the dropdown list to close. Constants which specify how the value of the Value property for the EditorWithCombo embeddable editor is obtained. The value of the Value property is obtained from the currently selected ValueListItem. The Value property can in this case return either null, text as typed by the end user, or the DataValue of the selected item. The value of the Value property is obtained from the CheckedItems collection of the associated ValueList. When one or more items is checked, the DataValue of each ValueListItem that belongs to the CheckedItems collection is added to a generic object list, and that list is returned. Enumeration of DragDropIndicatorSettings Property IDs Represents the ImageBottom property. Represents the ImageLeft property. Represents the ImageRight property. Represents the ImageTop property. Represents the Color property. PropertyID DisplayStyle DisplayStyle DisplayStyle AcceptsReturn AcceptsTab AutoSize BorderStyle CharacterCasing HideSelection Lines MaxLength Modified Multiline PasswordChar ReadOnly Scrollbars SelectedText SelectionStart SelectionLength Text WordWrap NullText ContextMenu SelectedItem SelectedIndex ButtonAlignment ButtonStyle ButtonWidth DropDownListAlignment DropDownListWidth DropDownStyle HasMRUList MaxDropDownLines MaxDropDownItems MaxMRUItems SortStyle MRUList ShowFontTypeIndicator ShowFontNamesInFont FontSizeInPoints MinDate MaxDate DateTime MaskInput DataMode DisplayMode ClipMode FormatProvider FormatString DropDownCalendarAlignment DropDownButtonAlignment SpinButtonAlignment DropDownButtonDisplayStyle SpinButtonDisplayStyle Value MinValue MaxValue NumericType Appearance ImageList AlwaysInEditMode ImageTransparentColor AutoComplete Nullable PromptChar ValueObject UseMnemonics FocusedIndex CheckedValue TabNavigation SpinWrap LimitToList ShowOverflowIndicator OverflowIndicatorImage NullTextAppearance DataSource DataMember DisplayMember ValueMember SpellChecker InvalidTextBehavior GlyphStyle AutoCompleteMode GlyphInfo ThreeState CheckState Checked CheckAlign Style HotTrackingAppearance CheckedAppearance IndeterminateAppearance DataFilter CheckedItem CheckedIndex ValueList ItemAppearance ItemSpacingHorizontal ItemSpacingVertical TextIndentation ItemOrigin MinColumnWidth MaxColumnWidth DroppedDown ButtonAppearance SyncWithCurrencyManager CheckStyle CheckBoxAlignment CheckedListSettings Specifies the data type that the UltraNumericEditor will use to display and edit its data Integer Double Decimal Enumeration for the EnterEditModeMouseBehavior property. When clicked and not in edit mode, the editor will enter edit mode and the MouseDown message will be consumed. No MouseDown will be received by the EditingControl. When clicked and not in edit mode, the editor will enter edit mode and the MouseDown message will be forwarded to the control so it will respond to the click. Event handler used for any generic element event Event handler used for when an element has been adjusted/moved delegate for handling event that occurs when a property has changed. Event parameters used for the PropertyChanged event Constructor, initializes a new instance of the PropertyChangedEventArgs class. A structure containing the property change information. The PropChangeInfo object representing information about the property that changed. Event parameters used for any generic element event. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the UIElementEventArgs class. The . The appropriate element (read-only) Event parameters used for when an element's size or position has been adjusted via the mouse. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the UIElementAdjustedEventArgs class. The being adjusted. The object providing the change in the x and y directions. The change in the x and y direction (read-only). Event arguments class for the ValidationError event. Creates a new instance of the class. Creates a new instance of the class. The last value that met the constraints. Creates a new instance of the class. The last value that met the constraints. The control's invalid text. Gets/sets whether a beep will be generated

The default value is true.

 Gets/sets whether the control will stay focused.

The default value is true.

 Gets the control's last valid value. Gets the control's invalid text. ExpansionIndicatorUIElement. Best size to use for the indicator element. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the ExpansionIndicatorUIElement class. The parent . Notifies the derived class that the state of the indicator has been toggled. Invoked when the borders for the element should be rendered. The used to provide rendering information. Draws the image for this UIElement The used to provide rendering information. Handles the rendering of the element using the system themes. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element was able to successfully render with the system theme. Used to determine whether the remaining draw methods are invoked. Render the Expansion Indicator in the foreground The used to provide rendering information. Called when the mouse down message is received over the element. Expand/Collapse the indicator Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Called when the mouse enters this element Called when the mouse leaves this element Handles the double click response of the element. Since invoking the click would result in a net effect of returning to the original state and since the system tree does not respond to a double click of the expansion indicator, the double click will not be processed. Initialize the appearance structure for this element The appearance structure to initialize. The properties that are needed Indicates if the expansion indicator is open/expanded. This method should be overriden by derived classes to control the state of the item. Indicates whether the associated object can be expanded. Returns the border for the expansion indicator. Returns the ui role for the element. Returns true if the mouse is currently over this element; otherwise false. Interface supplied by the user of a control to perform custom drawing of one or more UIElements Called before each element is about to be drawn. The used to provide rendering information. Bit flags indicating which phases of the drawing operation to filter. The DrawElement method will be called only for those phases. Called during the drawing operation of a UIElement for a specific phase of the operation. This will only be called for the phases returned from the GetPhasesToFilter method. Contains a single bit which identifies the current draw phase. The used to provide rendering information. Returning true from this method indicates that this phase has been handled and the default processing should be skipped. Interface supplied by the user of a control to allow custom cursors to be supplied Called before the cursor is shown allowing a different cursor to be supplied. The element under the cursor. True if mouse is over the element's adjustable area. Initialized with the default cursor for this element. Interface supplied by the user of a control to allow custom creation/positioning of child elements Called before child elements are to be created/positioned. This is called during a draw operation for an element whose ChildElementsDirty is set to true. Returning true from this method indicates that the default creation logic should be bypassed. The whose child elements are going to be created/positioned. True if the default creation logic should be bypassed. Called after an element's ChildElements have been created. The child element's can be repositioned here and/or new element's can be added. The whose child elements have been created/positioned. Interface implemented by the user of a control to supply custom selection strategies. Called to get the selection strategy for a specific item. Returning null means that the control will supply its own implementation. The whose selection strategy should be determined. The for the specified item, or null if the control will supply its own implementation. The FontData class is used to hold font properties (e.g. Bold, Italic, Name etc.) on appearances. It allows the overriding of individual properties. For example, if a control's base font was set to "MS San Serif" 8.5pt. An appearance could override the Bold property to true and get a bold font without having to specify the name and size since that would be picked up from the base font. Constructor Serialize the fontdata object Resets the properties back to their default values Returns true if the font that would be returned from CreateFont is the same as the one that would be returned by CreateFont if fontData was passed in. The font that would be used to a CreateFont call. The FontData object to compare. Converts the object to a string based on its propety settings Returns a boolean indicating whether the property has been changed from its default value. Return true if the property has been set to a non-default value. Otherwise, false is returned. Resets the property to its default value. Returns a boolean indicating whether the property has been changed from its default value. Return true if the property has been set to a non-default value. Otherwise, false is returned. Resets the property to its default value. Returns a boolean indicating whether the property has been changed from its default value. Return true if the property has been set to a non-default value. Otherwise, false is returned. Resets the property to its default value. Returns a boolean indicating whether the property has been changed from its default value. Return true if the property has been set to a non-default value. Otherwise, false is returned. Resets the property to its default value. Returns a boolean indicating whether the property has been changed from its default value. Return true if the property has been set to a non-default value. Otherwise, false is returned. Resets the property to its default value. Returns a boolean indicating whether the property has been changed from its default value. Return true if the property has been set to a non-default value. Otherwise, false is returned. Resets the property to its default value. Gets/sets the name of the font Gets/sets the size of the font Gets/sets whether to make the font bold This property is not serialized directly at design time. Instead the property is serialized as a string with a setting of 'True, 'False' or 'Default'. Gets/sets whether to make the font italic This property is not serialized directly at design time. Instead the property is serialized as a string with a setting of 'True, 'False' or 'Default'. Gets/sets whether to make the font have a strikeout line thru it This property is not serialized directly at design time. Instead the property is serialized as a string with a setting of 'True, 'False' or 'Default'. Gets/sets whether to make the font is underlined This property is not serialized directly at design time. Instead the property is serialized as a string with a setting of 'True, 'False' or 'Default'. Property used to serialize the property as a string at design time.

The property get will return "True", "False" or "Default".

The property set will set the property to DefaultableBoolean.True for the string 'True', to DefaultableBoolean.False for the string 'False' or to DefaultableBoolean.Default for all other string values.

The reason for this parallel string property is to allow version independent serialization of the setting into the form's .resx file for forms whose Localizable property is true.

 Property used to serialize the property as a string at design time.

The property get will return "True", "False" or "Default".

The property set will set the property to DefaultableBoolean.True for the string 'True', to DefaultableBoolean.False for the string 'False' or to DefaultableBoolean.Default for all other string values.

The reason for this parallel string property is to allow version independent serialization of the setting into the form's .resx file for forms whose Localizable property is true.

 Property used to serialize the property as a string at design time.

The property get will return "True", "False" or "Default".

The property set will set the property to DefaultableBoolean.True for the string 'True', to DefaultableBoolean.False for the string 'False' or to DefaultableBoolean.Default for all other string values.

The reason for this parallel string property is to allow version independent serialization of the setting into the form's .resx file for forms whose Localizable property is true.

 Property used to serialize the property as a string at design time.

The property get will return "True", "False" or "Default".

The property set will set the property to DefaultableBoolean.True for the string 'True', to DefaultableBoolean.False for the string 'False' or to DefaultableBoolean.Default for all other string values.

The reason for this parallel string property is to allow version independent serialization of the setting into the form's .resx file for forms whose Localizable property is true.

 Bit flags that indicate which properties have non-default values. FontNameEditor class implementation Creates a new instance of the FontNameEditor class

Note that because each item is drawn using the font that it represents, the ValueListItem's Appearance in not honored.

Also note that only the following Appearance properties are honored at the ValueList level:

  • BackColor
  • ForeColor

 Creates a new instance of the FontNameEditor class The EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived associated with this editor

Note that because each item is drawn using the font that it represents, the ValueListItem's Appearance in not honored.

Also note that only the following Appearance properties are honored at the ValueList level:

  • BackColor
  • ForeColor

 Called when the FontNameEditor class is disposed Calls IsFontHumanReadable if the caller has the appropriate UI permissions; otherwise uses the FOnt object's GdiCharset property A boolean indicating whether the font is readable Handles the actual implementation of the IEmbeddableTextBoxListener.OnKeyDown method Key event arguments A boolean indicating whether the keystroke was handled Drops down the dropdown. True if successful. Provides a mechanism by which derived editors can provide different ultimate default values for Appearance properties. The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. InternalResolveValueListAppearance The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. Returns whether the font corresponding to the specified fontName is a symbol font. The value of the Name property of the font to be evaluated A boolean indicating whether the font corresponding to the specified fontName is a symbol font. The Font object has a 'GdiCharSet' property which always returns 1 (Default); this appears to be incorrect.

This method provides a means by which to determine whether a font is a symbol font. Causes the list to be repopulated with the names of available fonts Returns an IValueList from the specified embeddable element, or null if none is provided. The EmbeddableUIElementBase-derived element from which to obtain the owner info. Note that this parameter is ignored for the FontNameEditor. An IValueList interface implementor, or null if the owner does not provide one. Determines if the type can be edited. The data type to test Returns true if the type can be edited. Determines if the type can be rendered. The data type to test Returns true if the type can be edited. Returns the value to be used for the for the ItemHeight property based on the specified font. The FOnt to use for the text measurement. Handles the system InstalledFontsChanged event Called when the application finishes processing and is about to enter the idle state. OnDrawValueListItem The object that is sending the event DrawValueListItemEventArgs Clones the editor Used to initialize the state of the object based on another editor instance. Editor whose property values are to be copied Creates a copy of the embeddable editor with the specified default owner. An instance of the default EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class from which to obtain owner-specific information A copy of the editor Gets/sets whether to apply the corresponding font to items in the list Gets/sets whether to display images for items in the list Since true type fonts are the only types of fonts that appear in the list, the image that is applied is the "true type font" image Returns the internal ValueList object used by the editor Returns the IValueList to be used by this instance of the editor Returns the event handler that notifies OnInstalledFontsChanged Returns the event handler that notifies DrawItem FormatProviderPropertyEditor - TypeEditor for properties of type IFormatInfo Required designer variable. Creates a new instance of the FormatProviderPropertyEditor A reference to the IFormatProvider the dialog will be initialized with Clean up any resources being used. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Iterates the system cultures and adds their LCID, DisplayName, and NativeName to the ListView. Also populates an ArrayList with each culture's IFormatProvider Returns the currently selected IFormatProvider, or null Note that this property is only valid after the form is closed TypeConverter for IFormatProvider Indicates which types the class can be cast to. ITypeDescriptorContext Type A boolean indicating if the class can be converted to the specified type. Converts the object to the specified type. ITypeDescriptorContext CultureInfo Object to convert. Type to which the object is to be converted. The converted object. class to show dialog for nodes collection property Used to determine the type of UIEditor that will be displayed. ITypeDescriptorContext UITypeEditorEditStyle specifying the type of UIEditor. Used to edit the value and convert the value as needed. ITypeDescriptorContext IServiceProvider Current value Edited value. UI element that can render text with different formatting attributes assigned to different portions of the text. This element is used by the . SectionUIElement class. Constructor. Initializes a new instance of class. The parent . Overridden. Initializes the appearance. The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. Overridden. The used to provide rendering information. Overridden. Does nothing. The used to provide rendering information. Overridden. Creates and positions the child elements. Overridden. Returns flags indicating which borders will be drawn Overridden. BorderStyle of the element. Returns the ui role for the element. Constructor. Initializes a new instance of object. The parent ui element. Overridden. Returns true to indicate that the children should to be clipped. BRUIElement class. Constructor. Initializes a new instance of class. UI element that represents caret in the formatted text editor. Constructor. Overridden. Initialize the appearance. The to initialize. The indicating which appearances should be resolved. Overridden. Overridden. Always returns false. The type of notification. Point of interest. False. Overridden. IGContextMenu. Initializes a new IGContextMenu Initializes a new IGContextMenu Array of instances to be displayed in the context menu. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized True if the property differs from the default value Resets the value of the property to its default value Invoked before the context menu is going to be displayed Event arguments Invoked when the context menu is being disposed. True if unmanaged resources should be disposed Returns the widths of the non client areas of the menu. A UIElementBorderWidths structure containing the size of the borders. Invoked when the background of the window needs to be erased. Paint event arguments True if the default processing should be prevented. Invoked when the non client area of the context menu needs to be painted Paint event arguments Rectangle encompassing the context menu True if the default processing should be prevented. Returns or sets the style of the menu. Returns the resolved menu style used to render the context menu. Gets/sets whether disabled items will be appear highlight when the mouse moves over them. Returns the resolved value indicating whether disabled items are highlighted as the mouse moves over them. Gets/sets whether shortcuts are displayed in the context menu. Gets/sets the size of the image Returns or sets the imagelist used to obtain the images for the menu items. For inserting a link. For creating a link out of selected text. For changing the link settings of an existing link. Interface implemented by formatted text editor specific support dialogs in the Infragistics.Win.SupportDialogs assembly. Initializes the dialog with data. One or more pieces of data with which to initialize the dialog. What to pass in for this parameter is determined by the dialog. The event handler for the 'Apply' button on the dialog if the dialog supports it. This is an optional parameter. If the user of the dialog is not interested in apply callbacks, this may be passed in as null. Disposes of the dialog. Shows the dialog modally. This method behaves the same as Form's ShowDialog method. The owning . A object. The result of the dialog. The contents of the returned table are determined by the dialog. If the user cancels the dialog, this method may return null. However the DialogResult property should be checked to determine if the dialog was cancled. Class that exposes edit related properties and methods. Instances of this class are valid only when the associated formatted text editor element is in edit mode. Copies the selected content. Returns a value indicating whether the Copy operation succeeded. Performs a Cut operation on the selected content. Cut operation involves copying the selected contents into the clipboard and then deleting them. Returns a value indicating whether the Cut operation succeeded. Pastes the contents of the clipboard at the caret position. Returns a value indicating whether the Paste operation succeeded. Performs the 'Delete' edit operation. If some contents are selected then the selection is deleted. Otherwise the next item (character, image etc...) at current caret position is deleted. This method emulates Delete key press. Returns a value indicating whether the Delete operation succeeded. Selects the entire contents of the editor. Gets the caret position closest to the specified mouse location. The describing the mouse location. The caret position closest to the specified mouse location. Returns the location of the caret at the specified caret position. The caret position. A that specifies the location of the caret. Encodes the specified image into a string that can be embedded inside the formatted text. The returned value can be assigned to the 'data' attribute of the 'img' tag to embedd the image directly inside the formatted text value. The to encode. A string that can be embedded inside the formatted text.

Encodes the specified image into a string that can be embedded. The returned value can be assigned to the 'data' attribute of the 'img' tag to embedd the image directly inside the formatted text value. Note that you can also display an image from a file or URL by using the 'src' attribute of the 'img' tag without having to embedd it inside the formatted text value.

Decodes the specified image data that was encoded using into an image. The string returned by a call to EncodeImage. A decoded . See for more information. Inserts the specified value at the caret position. If the value cannot be inserted, an exception is thrown. The value to insert in the form of formatted text.

If the specified value has syntax error or if there is an error inserting the value, including when the control is read-only, this method will throw an exception.

Note: If some contents are selected, they will be deselected and the value will be inserted at the caret position.

Returns the current style. If some contents are selected, this will be the style attributes that are common to all of the selected contents. If nothing is selected, then gets the state style attributes. State style attributes are those state attributes that are maintained as a result of toggling bold, italic etc... when nothing is selected. These state style attributes are cleared when the caret is moved since when the caret is moved, the attributes of the content where the caret is moved into are assumed as the current state attributes.

Note that modifying the returned StyleInfo will not have any effect on the value being edited. To modify the style, use the method.

Clears all the style attributes on the selected contents. Clears the specified style attributes on the selected contents. A list of attributes that should be cleared. Clears the specified style attributes on the selected contents. A list of attributes that should be cleared. If true then applies to block elements that the current selection spans over. For example a paragraph is a block element. Applies the specified style to the current selection. The style to apply. If true then applies to block elements that the current selection spans over. For example a paragraph is a block element.

Applies the specified style to the current selection. If nothing is currently selected, then style will be stored for applying to any further input at this current location. If the caret is moved, the stored state style will be discarded.

Returns true if the current selection can be made into a link. True if the current selection can be made into a link. Makes the current selection into a link. The specified value is the anchor tag that specifies link. Returns true if operation succeeded.

Makes the current selection into a link. The specified value is the anchor tag that specifies link. The value must simply be the anchor tag. Example: ultraTextEditor.EditInfo.MakeSelectionIntoLink( "<a href=\"url\"></a>" );

Performs the specified action and returns true if the action can be performed. The to perform. True if the action was completed successfully. Returns true if the specified action can be performed based on the current state of the control. The to check. True if the specified action can be performed based on the current state of the control. Gets the selected value as formatted text. If nothing is selected, returns empty string. If false then returns the formatted text. If true then returns the raw text without the formatting tags. Also with raw as true, only text is returned. The selected value as formatted text, or an empty string if nothing is selected. Disposes the object. Displays the image dialog. Displays the font dialog changing the font. Displays the link dialog. Backward pointer to the instance. Start of the selection. Length of the selection. Gets the value which determines whether an IME composition is currently being edited by the user. Don't include any ancestor nodes. Includes all formatting ancestors. It also will include ancestor block nodes' formatting styles as well. Upto block node, with all the formatting nodes upto it, including block's formatting style as well. Include all the ancestor nodes. Interface implemented by a class which supports spell checking by a component that implements the IUltraSpellChecker interface. Begins an undoable update operation on the target. Ends an undoable update operation on the target. Ensures a certain character is in view of the control. The 0-based index of the character in the text. Gets the baseline offset for a character at the specified index. The position of the character in the text. The offset, in pixels, from the baseline of the text at the specified character position to the top of the text. Gets the poistion of the character in the text at the specified client coordinates of the control. The client coordinates at which to get the character position. The index of the character in the text at the specified location. Gets the width of a character when drawn to this control. The 0-based index of the character in the of which to get the width. Gets the width, in pixels, of hte character at the specified index in the text. Gets the character index of the first visible character in the control. The index in the text of the first character visible in the control. Gets the client coordinates of the character at the specified index of the text. The 0-based position of the character in the text of the control. The location, in client coordinates, of the upper-left corner of the character at the specified index in the text. Replaces text in the control. The start index of the text to replace. The length of the text to be replaced. The text to replace in the target. Undoes one operation on the spell check target. Occurs when a Control repaint occurs. Occurs when the control is scrolled. Occurs when the text on the spell check target has changed. Gets the value indicating whether an undo can be done on the target. Gets the control being spell checked. Gets the value indicating whether the target is updating. Gets the offset location of the spell checkable area of the control. Gets or sets the currently selected text in the control. Gets or sets the number of characters selected in the control. Gets or sets the starting position of the text selected in the control. Gets the size of the control being spell checked. Gets the text being spell checked. Gets the value indicating whether the target draws its own errors How to align lines. Default. Lines will be left aligned. Lines will be center aligned. Lines will be right aligned. Lines will be justified. Specifies the vertical alignment of an inline element in relation to the line it belongs to. Default. The element is aligned with the base-line of the line. The element is aligned with the top of the line. The element is aligned with the bottom of the line. The midpoint of the element is aligned with the midpoint of the line. Defaultable flagged enum for specifying border sides. No border sides. Default. Border sides will be determined based on the context. Left border side. Right border side. Top border side. Bottom border side. All border sides. Specifies whether to float the element and if so where. Default. Do not float the element. This will inline the element. Float the element on the left. Float the element on the right. Specifies whether to clear the floating objects and if so which ones. Default. None. Do not clear the floating elements. Clear all the objects floating on the left. Clear all the objects floating on the right. Clear all floating objects. Enum for identifying each property. Appearance property id. ActiveLinkAppearance property id. HotTrackLinkAppearance property id. LinkAppearance property id. VisitedLinkAppearance property id. AutoSize property id. BorderStyle property id. TreatValueAs property id. Padding property id. ShowTitleToolTips property id. UnderlineLinks property id. WrapText property id. ReadOnly property id. TextSmoothingMode property id. ScrollBarDisplayStyle property id. DisplayStyle property id. DisplayStyle property id. AlwaysInEditMode property id. HideSelection property id. BaseURL property id. SpellChecker property id. ScrollBarLook property id. TextSectionBreakMode property id. Used for specifying the UltraFormattedLinkLabel's TreatValueAs property. Treat values as formatted text. Auto-detect to see if the value is a URL or formatted text. Treat values as URL. Used for specifying the UltraFormattedLinkLabel's UnderlineLink property. Default is auto-detect what the IE does and follow that. Never underline the links. Always underline the links. Underline the link when the mouse hovers over it. Used for specifying . Default. Default is resolved to SystemSettings. Use the default text rendering settings. Text will be drawn antialiased. Enum for specifying the property. Don't display any context menu. Default is to display Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo, Redo and SelectAll menu items. Cut menu item. Copy menu item. Paste menu item. Delete menu item. Undo menu item. Redo menu item. Select All menu item. Display menu item(s) that allow the user to change font of the selected text.

Note that you must include reference to Infragistics.Win.SupportDialogs assembly in order for this option to work. SupportDialogs assembly has the actual dialogs that this menu option displays.

Display menu item(s) that allow the user to insert image and change the attributes of existing image.

Note that you must include reference to Infragistics.Win.SupportDialogs assembly in order for this option to work. SupportDialogs assembly has the actual dialogs that this menu option displays.

Display menu item(s) that allow the user to insert links and modify the existing links.

Note that you must include reference to Infragistics.Win.SupportDialogs assembly in order for this option to work. SupportDialogs assembly has the actual dialogs that this menu option displays.

Display menu items that allow the user change the line alignment. Display menu items that allow the user to change paragraph settings. Menu item for toggling the bold attribute of selected text. Menu item for toggling the italics attribute of selected text. Menu item for toggling the underline attribute of selected text. This will display list of suggested words in the context meny when it's displayed over a misspelled word. Note that in order for this option to have any effect, a spell-checker must be assigned to the editor control or the column. Menu item for toggling the strikeout attribute of selected text. Reserved. For internal use only. Display all menu items. Note that if you specify All, any new menu items that get implemented in the future will also be displayed when you upgrade your application to the newer version. Specifies how words are broken up into text sections. Determines which setting to use based on the Text Rendering mode and editor type in order to provide the best results. Create a section of each word. This method allows for more reliable selection and text measurement behavior when drawing text with GDI Plus. Create only as many sections as neccessary. This setting can result in problems with selection and text measurement when drawing text with GDI Plus. Delegate associated with the UltraFormattedLinkLabel's.LinkClicked event. Delegate associated with the UltraFormattedLinkLabel's.ParseError event. Delegate associated with the FormattedTextEditInfo's.EditStateChanged event. Event args associated with the event. Constructor. Initializes a new instance of class. The value of the href attribute of an anchor tag. The text enclosed inside the anchor tag. Editor context that specifies the object, for example a grid cell, that the action was performed on. Identifies the link that was clicked. This is the value of the href attribute of the anchor tag. If the href attribute was specified as relative url, then this will also be relative. The text enclosed inside the anchor tag. Editor context that specifies the object, for example a grid cell, that the action was performed on. Specifies whether to add the link to the visited links list. Default value is true.

AddToVisitedLinks property specifies whether the link should be added to the visited links collection. When a link is considered to be visited, it will be drawn using the visited link appearance. You would typically set this property to false if for example you cancel the opening of the link operation.

Specifies whether the control should open the link. The link will be opened using the .NET Process class. The default value is true.

OpenLink property is useful if you want to prevent the control from opening the link so you can open the link yourself, using some custom code.

Event args associated with the event. Constructor. Initializes a new instance of class. The value being parsed that has the error. Specifies how the value was parsed. The exception associated with the parse error. The associated context. This could be grid cell for example. The exception, if any, associated with the parse error. The value that had the parsing error. This property is settable. You can set it to a new value to display in place of the original value. Gets or sets the new method to treat the value with. Returns an object that provides some information about where the parse error occurred.

Since the may hosted within a single standalone editor control (such as an UltraFormattedLinkLabel) or used by a control that hosts editors (e.g. UltraGrid), the event may be invoked from multiple sources. The Context is used to provide some context about the source of parse error. For stand alone controls, the value will usually be null but for external objects, an object identifying the source should be returned. For example, a Cell object should be returned when the editor is hosted in a grid cell.

 Event args associated with the event. Constructor. Initializes a new instance of class. Embeddable editor class for displaying formatted text. It also has support for displaying hyper-links, images and horizontal lines. It also supports editing.

FormattedLinkEditor is an embeddable editor that lets you display and edit formatted text. Supported formatting attributes include bold, italic, underline, font, font size, text color, background color, line alignment of left, right, center and justified. It also supports displaying one or more links that the user can click to perform certain actions, typically open the associated URL. You can also embedd one or more images along with the text. Images can be embedded inline along with the text or they can be floated left or right where the text will wrap around the image. Images themselves can be links. Please consult the help topics for WinFormattedLinkLabel for more information and a listing of supported tags.

The syntax for accomplishing formatting as well as embedding images, hyper-links, horizontal lines is in XML. Examples include:
Click here to go to <a href="http://www.infragistics.com">Infragistics</a> website.
This an inline image <img src="image.bmp"/>.
<img src="image.bmp" align="left" />This is a floating image. Text will wrap around it.

Constructor. Constructor. An instance of the default EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class from which to obtain owner-specific information Constructor. Specifies whether this editor will support editing. Constructor. Specifies whether this editor will support editing. Default owner. Determines if the type can be edited. to test. Returns true if the type can be edited. Determines if the type can be rendered. to test. Returns true if the type can be rendered. Creates a copy of the embeddable editor with the specified default owner. An instance of the default EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class from which to obtain owner-specific information A copy of the editor Used by an editor owner to create an accessible object for a specific object managed by an editor. Parent accessible object for the accessible object to create Editor owner Owner context that can be supplied to the editor owner to obtain information about the object represented by the accessible instance. An accessible object that represents the specified owner context for the editor. Overridden. Always returns false since this editor never takes focus. Returns false. Called from inside the method of the parent element to create and position the embedded element or elements. The element that will contain the embedded element. An object that derives from the class. Context information that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. The element returned the prior time the parent element's method was called. An instance of a class derived from EmbeddableUIElementBase.

The owner and ownerContext values are saved by the added element to get value and state information later.

 Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Used to determine the size preferred/required by the editor. Structure that provides information regarding the size calculation including the owner for which the size calculation is occuring, whether to exclude edit elements, whether to include borders, etc. The size needed to render the value by the editor based upon the specified options. Returns whether the key is used by the editor. The object describing which keys are pressed. True only if the editor is in edit mode and the key is used by the editor. Overridden. The from which this object should be initialized. Returns whether the owner should compare items based on their underlying value rather than their display text. The EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived owner The context that was passed into the method. Overriden to return false. The default implementation returns true, implying that the owner should sort by the underlying data value.

Editors that support ValueLists will look at the owner's return from GetValueList; if an IValueList is supplied, the value of the SortByValue property will be returned. Converts data value to text making use of any format provider and format strings that owner may provide. If unsuccessful, returns null. The value to be converted An object that derives from the class. An object that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method. Specifies whether the format string returned by the owner via the method should be used when formatting the text. The format string should not be applied to embeddable elements that are currently in edit mode. The converted data value, or null if the conversion was unsuccessful. Override this in specific editor to provide editor value. Editor value. Override this in specific editor to provide display value. Display string. Called after edit mode has been entered. It raises the AfterEnterEditMode event. Called after edit mode has been exited. The base implementation raises the AfterExitEditMode event. Overridden. Returns the spell checker target. Called when the editor is disposed Returns the text. If true, returns the value without formatting. The text with or without formatting as specified. Parses the specified value. If an error is encountered then raises the ParseError event. This method never throws an exception. In the end it returns a value that will be displayed in the place of the original value. The value to parse. The editor owner. The owner context. Returns an object that contains the parsed value. Parses the specified value. If an error occurs it returns the value that will be displayed in the place of the original value. It also raises the ParseError event if raiseParseErrorEvent parameter is true. In case of an exception, this method never throws an exception. Instead it assigns the exception instance to the error out parameter. The value to parse. The editor owner. The owner context. Specifies whether to raise ParseError event if there is an error parsing. If an error occurs during parsing, this out param is assigned the associated exception. Returns an object that contains the parsed value. Fires event. The . Fires event. The . Fires event. The . For internal infrastructure use. Returns the base line of the first line of text. The associated . Simulates user interaction with the control. Action code to map to the KeyCode True if the Shift key is pressed. True if the Ctrl key is pressed. True if the specified action was successfully executed.

Invoke this method to simulate an action the user can perform.

Many actions are only appropriate in certain situations; if an action is inappropriate, it will not be performed.

You can use the property to determine the state of the control when the action is about to be performed.

 Occurs when the owner gets a key down while in edit mode. The . Occurs when the owner gets a key press while in edit mode. The . Occurs when the owner gets a key up while in edit mode. The . Encodes the specified image into a string that can be embedded inside the formatted text. The returned value can be assigned to the 'data' attribute of the 'img' tag to embedd the image directly inside the formatted text value. The to encode. A string that can be embedded inside the formatted text.

Encodes the specified image into a string that can be embedded. The returned value can be assigned to the 'data' attribute of the 'img' tag to embedd the image directly inside the formatted text value. Note that you can also display an image from a file or URL by using the 'src' attribute of the 'img' tag without having to embedd it inside the formatted text value.

Decodes the specified image data that was encoded using into an image. The string returned by a call to EncodeImage. A decoded . See for more information. Overridden. Returns whether this editor displays an ink button. The IInkProvider implementor that provides the inking capabilities. An object that derives from the class. Context information that is used by the specified owner. A boolean indicating whether the editor displays an ink button. Occurs when the user clicks a link. Fired when an error occurs parsing the value. This occurs when the formatted link editor encounters an invalid value.

This event is fired when the value specified to the formatted link editor has parsing errors.

Fired when state of the editor changes. for example when the SelectionStart or SelectionLength changes or undo/redo history changes etc...

This event is fired when the edit state of the formatted link editor changes. This event is only fired when the editor is in edit mode. Examples of changes that will lead to firing of this event are change in the SelectionStart, SelectionLength, Value, change in the formatting state (toggling of bold, italics etc...), change in undo/redo history etc....

Overridden. Returns false since this editor never takes focus. Returns the current text being edited without doing any validation. This will return the text currently typed in. If the editor does not have an textbox-like control, it will return the current edit value in form of text. Accessing this property when the editor is not in edit mode will throw an exception. The current value being edited. Accessing this property when the editor is not in edit mode will throw an exception. Overridden. Returns false since this editor never takes focus. Returns true if the edited value is valid (read-only). Accessing this property when the editor is not in edit mode will throw an exception. Overridden. Gets or sets the number of characters selected in the editor. The property must be overidden in derived classes that override and return true from the property. Overridden. Gets or sets the starting point of text selected in the editor. The property must be overidden in derived classes that override and return true from the property. Overridden. Gets or sets the currently selected text in the editor. The property must be overidden in derived classes that override and return true from the property. Overridden. Gets the length of the text in the editor. The property must be overidden in derived classes that override and return true from the property. Overridden. Returns true since this editor supports selecting contents. Overridden. Returns true since this editor supports spell checking. Returns an object that exposes edit related properties and methods. Instances of this class are valid only when the associated formatted text editor element is in edit mode. Indicates that this editor has its own default ContextMenu, so a ContextMenu from an ancestor control is ignored Returns a static instance of VisitedLinksCollection that the link editor uses as the default visited links manager. This property is read-only.

You can use the property to specify a custom visited links manager.

Specifies the visited links manager for managing visited links. Default value returned by this property is a static instance shared among all the link editors. Specifies whether the values rendered by this editor will be raw text, URL's or formatted text. Default is Auto, which specifies that the values should be auto-detected. Specifies when to underline the links.

By default the behavior is auto-detected from the MS Internet Explorer by reading settings from the registry. Use the UnderlineLinks property to explicitly set the behavior.

Specifies whether to show tool-tips specified in title attributes of the elements in formatted text values. Gives you the ability to reconfigure the way the control responds to user keystrokes.

The KeyActionMappings property provides access to the control's mechanism for handling keyboard input from users. All keystrokes for actions such as selection, navigation and editing are stored in a table-based system that you can examine and modify using this property. Through the KeyActionsMappings property, you can customize the keyboard layout of the control to match your own standards for application interactivity.

For example, if you wanted users to be able to navigate between cells by pressing the F8 key, you could add this behavior. You can specify the key code and any special modifier keys associated with an action, as well as determine whether a key mapping applies in a given context.

KeyCode ActionCode StateRequired StateDisallowed SpecialKeysRequired SpecialKeysDisallowed
RightNextCharacterCharacterNoneNoneCtrl
RightNextSectionCharacterLastSectionCtrlNone
RightAfterLastCharacterLastSectionNoneCtrlNone
RightSetPivotNoneUnInitializedNoneShift
LeftPrevCharacterNoneFirstCharacterNoneCtrl
LeftPrevSectionNoneFirstSectionCtrlNone
LeftFirstCharacterFirstSectionFirstCharacterCtrlNone
LeftSetPivotNoneUnInitializedNoneShift
HomeFirstCharacterNoneFirstCharacterNoneNone
HomeSetPivotNoneUnInitializedNoneShift
EndAfterLastCharacterNoneAfterLastCharacterNoneNone
EndSetPivotNoneUnInitializedNoneShift
TabNextSectionCharacterLastSectionNoneShift
TabSetPivotCharacterLastSectionNoneShift
TabSelectSectionCharacterLastSectionNoneShift
TabNextControlLastSectionNoneNoneShift
TabNextControlAfterLastCharacterNoneNoneShift
TabNextControlUnInitializedCharacter, AfterLastCharacterNone
TabPrevSectionNoneFirstSectionShiftNone
TabSetPivotNoneFirstSectionShiftNone
TabSelectSectionNoneFirstSectionShiftNone
TabPrevControlFirstSectionNoneShiftNone
TabPrevControlUnInitializedCharacter, AfterLastCharacterShift
DeleteDeleteSelectedNoneNoneNone
DeleteDeleteCharacterSelectedNoneShift
DeleteBackspaceNoneNoneShiftCtrl
DeleteAfterLastCharacterCharacterSelectedCtrlShift
DeleteDeleteCharacterSelectedCtrlShift
BackBackspaceSelectedNoneNoneNone
BackBackspaceNoneFirstCharacter, SelectedNoneNone
CCopySelectedNoneCtrlNone
XCutSelectedNoneCtrlNone
VPasteNoneNoneCtrlNone
InsertToggleInsertionModeNoneNoneNoneNone
UpUpKeyActionNoneUnInitializedNoneNone
DownDownKeyActionNoneUnInitializedNoneNone

 Returns bit flags that signify the current editing state of the control. Specifies whether to draw text antialiased. This property has effect only when drawing text using GDI+, which is the default text drawing mode. Specifies if and when to display the scrollbars. Default value is Never.

By default the editor doesn't display the scrollbars even if there is more content then the available space. Set this property to display the scrollbars.

Specifies the menu items that should be displayed in the context menu when in edit mode. Specifies whether to hide the selection when the control doesn't have focus. The default value of this property true. Specifies the base url for relative links and image sources. This can be a file path or an internet url.

You can specify relative sources for hyperlinks and images in the formatted text. The default behavior is to use the application's current path to resolve the url to access the associated resource. You can use the BaseURL property to control how relative URL's are resolved. Also note that the base URL can be set application-wide by setting the FormattedLinkEditor's property.

Specifies the base url for relative links and image sources. This can be a file path or an internet url.

You can specify relative sources for hyperlinks and images in the formatted text. The default behavior is to use the application's current path to resolve the url to access the associated resource. You can use the BaseURLDefault property to control how relative URL's are resolved. Note that this property is static and can be used to set the base URL for all instances of formatted text editors in an application. To set the base URL for a specific instance of FormattedLinkEditor, use it's property.

Determines when to show the Ink Button on the editor This property determines when to show the Ink Button on the editor Gets or sets the value which indicates whether formatted text editors will allow in place IME editing. True to allow in place IME editing in formatted text editors; False to use the default IME editor. Specifies how words are broken up into text sections. Accessible object representing an progress bar editor instance. Initializes a new Parent accessible object Associated mask editor Associated owner Owner context that identifies the object which the accessible instance represents Retrieves the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. The zero-based index of the accessible child. An AccessibleObject that represents the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Returns the UIElement associated with a particular child accessible object. Accessible object representing the child whose uielement should be returned. The uielement used to display the child or null if the element is not available. Returns the selected object. An AccessibleObject that specifies the currently focused child. This method returns the calling object if the object itself is focused. Returns a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no object has focus. Returns the role of the accessible object. Accessible object representing the area containing the formatted text. Initializes a new Parent accessible object Retrieves the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. The zero-based index of the accessible child. An AccessibleObject that represents the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Returns the object that has the keyboard focus. An AccessibleObject that specifies the currently focused child. This method returns the calling object if the object itself is focused. Returns a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no object has focus. Returns the role of the accessible object. Returns the text of the masked edit. Returns the state of the accessible object. Returns the name of the accessible object. Accessible object representing a text selection in a masked editor. Initializes a new Parent accessible object Returns the control used to synchronize accessibility calls. Modifies the selection or moves the keyboard focus of the accessible object One of the AccessibleSelection values Navigates to another accessible object One of the AccessibleNavigation values An AccessibleObject that represents one of the AccessibleNavigation values Returns the role of the accessible object. Gets the parent of an accessible object Returns the name of the accessible object. Returns the state of the accessible object. Gets the location and size of the accessible object EmbeddableUIElementBase implementation for editor. Constructor The parent element. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditorOwner interface. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditor interface. Context information used by the owner to identify the value. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. Overridden. Called to initialize the element. An object that implements the EmbeddableEditorOwner interface. An object that implements the EmbeddableEditor interface. Context information used by the owner to identify the value. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. Returns an object of requested type that relates to the element or null. The requested type or null to pick up default context object. If true will walk up the parent chain looking for the context. Overridden method. Initialzes the appearance used by this element. The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. Overridden. Creates and positions the child elements. Called during a drawing operation to ensure that all child elements are created and positioned properly. If the ChildElementsDirty flag is true then the default implementation will call PositionChildElements and reset the flag The control's main UIElement If true will call this method on all descendant elements Overridden. A virtual method that gets called before the element draw process starts. This is for notification purposes, the default implementation does nothing. Called on a double click. Called when the mouse down message is received over the element. Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Called when the mouse enters this element Called when the mouse leaves this element Renders the backcolor for the element The used to provide rendering information. Returns whether the data this element displays is fully visible. Returns true if this element needs to draw a focus rect. This should be overridden since the default implementation always returns false. Even if this property returns true the focus will not be drawn unless the control has focus. Overridden property that returns the border style this ui element is going to have. UI element that can render text with different formatting attributes assigned to different portions of the text. This element is used by the . Constructor. Initializes a new instance of object. The parent ui element. Called when a link is clicked. This method will not be called if method returns false. You can override this method to handle link using custom logic. The . Returns true if there is a mouse action at specified location. Typically used to find out if there is a link at the specified location. The location to check for. True if there is a mouse action at this location. This method is called to resolve custom area appearance. CustomArea parameter will be one of "Link", "ActiveLink", "HotTrackedLink" and "VisitedLink". The default implementation does nothing. The to initialize. The indicating which appearances should be resolved. Is either "Link", "ActiveLink", "HotTrackedLink", or "VisitedLink". Overridden. Initializes the appearance. The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. Overridden. Creates and positions the child elements. Overridden. Called on a mouse move message Mouse event arguments Called when the mouse leaves this element Overridden. Overridden.Called when the mouse is double clicked on this element. The default implementatiun just walks up the parent element chain. True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. Called when the mouse down message is received over the element. Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Called when the mouse down message is received over the element. Mouse event arguments If true then bypass default processing A virtual method that gets called after the element draw operation finishes. The used to provide rendering information. This is for notification purposes, the default implementation does nothing. Overridden. The used to provide rendering information. Gets a set of that determine how text should be rendered. Gets or sets the value that will be rendered by this ui element. Returns whether the data this element displays is fully visible. Indicates whether links are supported by this formatted text element instance. Default implementation returns true. By default the links will be processed and opened when they are clicked. If you want to prevent that, override this and return false from this method. Specifies whether to wrap the text or not. A data strcuture that represents parsed formatted text value. This is used for specifying a value to object. Constructor. Creates and instance of ParsedFormattedTextValue based on the specified formatted text. If there is an error parsing the specified formatted text, throws an exception. The formatted text to parse. Constructor. Initializes a new instance of class. Parses the specified value and returns the instance. If there is an error parsing then returns null and assigns the error a value. Value can be the formatted text, raw (not formatted) text or a URL. Specifies what kind of value is value parameter. If an error occurs while parsing the value then this out parameter is assigned the error. A based on the specified value, or null if an error occured. Gets the text representation of the parsed value. If true, returns the text without formatting tags. Otherwise it returns the text with the formatting tags. Overridden. Returns the text representation of this parsed formatted text value. Essentially the formatted text. The text representation of the parsed formatted text value. Gets image from a url or a file path specified by the imageURI parameter. The url or file path of the image. A that will be assigned to should an error occur. A based on the . Calculates the size necessary to fully display this formatted text. Graphics object to use for text measurements. Base font. This is typically the font of the control. This doesn't have to take into account the font settings on the default appearance. Default appearance. This is the appearance of parent element that will be hosting the formatted text element since appearances are inherited. The width constraint. Value of 0 means no width constraint. Note that the returned size can be bigger than the width constraint if formatted text value is as such that it requires larger area than the width constraint. For example, an image in formatted text could constraint the required minimum width necessary to display the formatted text. GDI draw flags. Returns the calculated size. Calculates the size necessary to fully display this formatted text. Graphics object to use for text measurements. Base font. This is typically the font of the control. This doesn't have to take into account the font settings on the default appearance. Default appearance. This is the appearance of parent element that will be hosting the formatted text element since appearances are inherited. The width constraint. Value of 0 means no width constraint. Note that the returned size can be bigger than the width constraint if formatted text value is as such that it requires larger area than the width constraint. For example, an image in formatted text could constraint the required minimum width necessary to display the formatted text. GDI draw flags. Specifies whether the formatted text is going to be rendered with wrapping enabled or disabled. Returns the calculated size. Calculates the size necessary to fully display this formatted text. Control that provides the base font and graphics object. Default appearance. This is the appearance of parent element that will be hosting the formatted text element since appearances are inherited. The width constraint. Value of 0 means no width constraint. Note that the returned size can be bigger than the width constraint if formatted text value is as such that it requires larger area than the width constraint. For example, an image in formatted text could constraint the required minimum width necessary to display the formatted text. Returns the calculated size. Calculates the size necessary to fully display this formatted text. Control that provides the base font and graphics object. Default appearance. This is the appearance of parent element that will be hosting the formatted text element since appearances are inherited. The width constraint. Value of 0 means no width constraint. Note that the returned size can be bigger than the width constraint if formatted text value is as such that it requires larger area than the width constraint. For example, an image in formatted text could constraint the required minimum width necessary to display the formatted text. Specifies whether the formatted text is going to be rendered with wrapping enabled or disabled. Returns the calculated size. Escapes XML special characters like &, <, > etc... in the text so the text is valid in XML. Indicates whether the formatted text is a link in its entirety. Returns true if the formatted text contains one or more links. Enum used for specifying the type of value. Auto detect the value. Whether the value is Raw text, URL or formatted text will be auto-detected by looking at the contents. Value is raw text. Value is a URL. A single link will be displayed. Value is formatted text. Formatted text contains formatting xml tags for formatting portions of the text with different formatting attributes. TypeConverter for the structure. Returns true if the object can convert to that type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert to. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the object to the requested type. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. A that represents the type you want to convert to. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. Returns true if the object can convert from the type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert from. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts from one type to another. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. Returns true if the a contains b horizontally. Returns true if the a contains b vertically. UI element used by the for rendering a horizontal rule. Constructor. Initializes a new instance of class. The parent . Overridden. The used to provide rendering information. Default border rendering The used to provide rendering information. Overridden. Draws the selected rect. The used to provide rendering information. UI element used by the for rendering images. Constructor. Initializes a new instance of class. Overridden. Creates and positions the child elements. Overridden. Draws the selected rect. Interface for specifying the UltraFormattedLinkLabel's VisitedLinksManager property. This interface is also implemented by the class which is also used as the default visited links manager by the UltraFormattedLinkLabel. Adds the specified link to the visited links collection. The value of the href attribute of an anchor tag. The text contained inside the anchor tag. Editor context that specifies the object, for example a grid cell, that the action was performed on. Retruns true if the specified link has been visited. The value of the href attribute of an anchor tag. The text contained inside the anchor tag. Editor context that specifies the object, for example a grid cell, that the action was performed on. Returns true if the link should be considered already visited. Enumerates the possible actions that can be performed on the FormattedLinkEditor. Moves to previous caret position. This action is typically associated with the Left arrow key. Moves to next caret position. This action is typically associated with the Right arrow key. Moves the caret postion to previous word. This action is typically associated with the Ctrl+Left arrow key. Moves the caret postion to next word. This action is typically associated with the Ctrl+Right arrow key . Moves to previous line. This action is typically associated with the Up arrow key. Moves to next line. This action is typically associated with the Down arrow key. Moves to the beginning of the current line. This action is typically associated with the Down Home key. Moves to the end of the current line. This action is typically associated with the End key. Moves to the beginning document. Moves to the beginning of the current line. For performing delete operation when delete key is pressed. For performing backspace operation when backspace key is pressed. Copy action. Cut action. Paste action. Undo action. Redo action. For inserting a line break. Toggles bold insert state. Toggles italics insert state. Toggles underline insert state. Moves caret one page down. Moves caret one page up. Selects all the contents of the editor. Cancels the current IME composition and removes all converted and unconverted text. Completed the current IME composition. Toggles strikeout insert state. Bit flags that describe the state of the control. Some contents are selected. Whether undo operation can be performed. Whether redo operation can be performed. Key/Action mapping object for UltraGrid. abstract base class that maps a keystroke to an action Constructor, initializes a new instance of the KeyActionMappingBase class. KeyCode to map Action code to map to the KeyCode These are bit flags that specify the state that the control MUST NOT be in for this mapping to be active. If the current state of the control has any of these bits turned on this mapping will be ignored. These are bit flags that specify the state that the control MUST be in for this mapping to be active. In a derived class this property should be hidden by one that returns an appropriate flagged enum. The special keys that are NOT allowed. If shift, ctrl or alt are pressed and their corresponding bit is turned on in this property the mapping will be ignored. These keys (any combination of shift/control/alt) MUST be pressed. Otherwise, this mapping will be ignored. Indicates whether to bypass trailing actions once this action matches the current state. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the KeyActionMappingBase class. KeyCode to map Action code to map to the KeyCode These are bit flags that specify the state that the control MUST NOT be in for this mapping to be active. If the current state of the control has any of these bits turned on this mapping will be ignored. These are bit flags that specify the state that the control MUST be in for this mapping to be active. In a derived class this property should be hidden by one that returns an appropriate flagged enum. The special keys that are NOT allowed. If shift, ctrl or alt are pressed and their corresponding bit is turned on in this property the mapping will be ignored. These keys (any combination of shift/control/alt) MUST be pressed. Otherwise, this mapping will be ignored. Called when the object is disposed Returns true if this KeyActionMappingBase is valid for the passed in state The key that was pressed Bit flags indicating the state of the control Bit flags indicating which special keys are pressed True if this mapping applies Indicates whether to bypass trailing actions once this action matches the current state. Default value is false.

If this property is set to true, the key action mappings logic will skip the actions after this action in the associated key action mappings collection if this action matches the state.

By default all the actions matching the of the control will be performed. If this property is set to true, only actions upto this action and including this action will be performed and the matching actions after this will be skipped.

 The key code Gets/sets the action code. In a derived class this property should be hidden by one that returns an appropriate enum. Gets/sets the disallowed state. These are bit flags that specify the state that the control MUST NOT be in for this mapping to be active. If the current state of the control has any of these bits turned on this mapping will be ignored. In a derived class this property should be hidden by one that returns an appropriate flagged enum. Gets/sets the required state. These are bit flags that specify the state that the control MUST be in for this mapping to be active. In a derived class this property should be hidden by one that returns an appropriate flagged enum. Gets/sets the special keys that are NOT allowed. If shift, ctrl or alt are pressed and their corresponding bit is turned on in this property the mapping will be ignored. Gets/sets the special keys that are required. These keys (any combination of shift/control/alt) MUST be pressed. Otherwise, this mapping will be ignored. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the KeyActionMapping class. KeyCode to map Action code to map to the KeyCode These are bit flags that specify the state that the control MUST NOT be in for this mapping to be active. If the current state of the control has any of these bits turned on this mapping will be ignored. These are bit flags that specify the state that the control MUST be in for this mapping to be active. In a derived class this property should be hidden by one that returns an appropriate flagged enum. The special keys that are NOT allowed. If shift, ctrl or alt are pressed and their corresponding bit is turned on in this property the mapping will be ignored. These keys (any combination of shift/control/alt) MUST be pressed. Otherwise, this mapping will be ignored. Gets/sets the action code. Gets/sets the disallowed state. These are bit flags that specify the state that the control MUST NOT be in for this mapping to be active. If the current state of the control has any of these bits turned on this mapping will be ignored. Gets/sets the required state. These are bit flags that specify the state that the control MUST be in for this mapping to be active. Summary description for KeyActionMappings. An abtract collection class of KeyActionMappingBase objects. Constructor Number of slots to allocate in the collection. Abstract class factory method creates an instance of a ActionStateMappingsCollection derived class. A . Determines if specified action is allowed based on state information Action Code Current State True if the specified action is allowed. Adds a new mapping to the end of the collection The mapping to add The index of the added mapping Clear all mappings in the collection Returns the first KeyActionMappingBase that matches the criteria. The key that was pressed Bit flags indicating the state of the control Bit flags indicating which special keys are pressed Array of all the mappings matching the criteria Static method that returns the current special key state The object indicating which keys were pressed. Inserts a new mapping into the collection the index where the mapping should be inserted The mapping to insert Determines if any key mapping exists for the key data. The keyData that was passed into IsInputKey or from KeyEventArgs. Bit flags indicating the state of the control. True if any mapping exists for the key data and state. Abstract method called the first time GetActionMapping is called. Allows for lazy loading of mappings Removes a mapping from the collection The mapping to remove Removes a mapping from the collection The index of the mapping to remove Removes a range of appearance objects Index of first mapping to remove Number of mappings to remove This method resets the KeyActionMappings collection. This method will clear all the mappings and reload the default mappings. If no keymappings have been loaded this method calls the abstract LoadDefaultMappings method Returns the number of mappings in the collection Abstract property that specifies the initial capacity of the collection True if the is a read-only collection Gets/ActionStateMappings collection Maps particular actions to required and disallowed states. Constructor, initializes a new instance of ActionStateMapping action code state disallowed state required Gets/sets the action code. Gets/sets the state disallowed. Gets/sets the state required. ActionStateMappingsCollection Contructcr Determines if specified action is allowed based on state information. Action code to map to the KeyCode Bit flags representing the current state of the control. True if the specified action is allowed. Abstract property that specifies the initial capacity of the collection True if the is a read-only collection Constructor, initializes a new instance of the KeyActionMappings class. Called the first time GetActionMapping is called (enables lazy loading of mappings) Copies the items of the collection into the array. The array to receive the items. The array index to begin inserting the items. Creates an instance of an ActionStateMappingsCollection derived class indexer Abstract base class. Classes derived from this class represent different tags in the formatted text. Constructor. Initializes a new instance of class. Returns true if this node is a trivial ancestor of the passed in node. Returns true if this node is a trivial descendant of the passed in node. Returns the ancestor node of specified type. Returns the next or previous sibling depending on the value of the next parameter. Gets the maximum node. Gets the minimum node. Adds the specified node to this node's child nodes collection. Returns the formatted or raw text according to the raw parameter. Specifies whether to get the raw text or include formatting xml tags. Appends attribute information to the passed in string builder. This method does not put the xml element name or the closing '>' character. Simply the attributes (example "wraptext=true align=right"). The default implementation appends the title attribute if any. Derived classes must call the base implementation if overriding this method. The string builder where to append the attribute information. Gets the contents within the xml element. This does NOT include the contents of the descendant nodes. The string builder where to append the text. Specifies whether to get the raw text or include formatting xml tags. Called before positioning of this element begins. Creates, if needed, the element for the specified line item and sets it to the line item's Elem property. The created ui element will be relative to (0, 0) point. The positioning logic will offset it recursively to position it at proper location. Trims trailing spaces. This method is called on line items that are the last on their lines. Splits the specified item into two, breaking it at the last break point within the item. For example, "AA BB CC" will be split into "AA BB" and "CC". This is called for purposes of wrapping an item on multiple lines. The original item is disposed by the caller after this operation. Called to clean up any resources allocated for the line item. Reads attributes of the current element from the reader and extracts. Reads the current attribute from the reader. Structure that contains name and value pair. Returns true if attribute was read successfully. Returns false if the attribute it not applicable or the value is not valid. Specifies whether the ui elements associated with this node need to be repainted when the speicifed input takes place. Default implementation walks up the ancestor chain. Information regarding associated ui elements. The type of input. Returns true if the ui elements associated with this node need to be invalidate when the specified inputType input occurs. Called when mouse is clicked on a ui element associated with this node. The default walks up the parent chain calling the method on the parent node. Information regarding associated ui elements. The ui element that was clicked. The mouse position at which the click occurred. The mouse button that was clicked. Returns true if the element will perform some kind of action in response to a mouse click, and wants the owners to know that this is such an area. For example links or buttons will return true from this method. Information regarding associated ui elements. The ui element that was clicked. The associated mouse event args. Returns true if some processing will be done if mouse were to be clicked at the specified location. Called when mouse is pressed down on a ui element associated with this node. The default walks up the parent chain calling the method on the parent node. Information regarding associated ui elements. The ui element that was clicked. The associated mouse event args. Clones the node itself, without cloning the child nodes. The returned clone will have no child nodes. Default implementation uses MemberwiseClone to clone the node. If this is a formatting node and has a span equivalent then returns the span equivalent. Otherwise returns null. If this is a formatting node and has a span equivalent then returns the span equivalent. Note that the return value must be a new style info - it can be modified by the caller. Returns the next sibling node if any. Returns the prev sibling node if any. Returns the first child node if any. Returns the last child node if any. The title attribute. Typically this will be shown as a tooltip whent the mouse is hovered over the contents enclosed by the associated tag. Returns the associated style info. NOTE: This will allocate a StyleInfo instance if it hasn't already been allocated. Xml element name associated with this node class. Can be null or empty string in which case this node is considered to have no associated xml element. Resolved Title. Walks up the ancestor chain and returns the first valid title. Indicates the line alignment of inner contents. Indicates whether to wrap the inner contents. Resolved border style. Default border style this node uses if none is specified. Border sides. Default border sides. Default line item offset type. Represents an anchor tag. Abstract base class. Classes derived from this class represent different tags in the formatted text. Appends attribute information to the passed in string builder. This method does not put the xml element name or the closing '>' character. Simply the attributes (example "wraptext=true, align=right"). The default implementation appends the title attribute if any. Derived classes must call the base implementation if overriding this method. The string builder where to append the attribute information. Overridden. Reads the current attribute from the reader. Structure that contains name and value pair. Returns true if attribute was read successfully. Returns false if the attribute it not applicable or the value is not valid. Specifies whether the ui elements associated with this node need to be repainted when the speicifed input takes place. Default implementation walks up the ancestor chain. Information regarding associated ui elements. The type of input. Returns true if the ui elements associated with this node need to be invalidate when the specified inputType input occurs. Overridden. Returns true if the element will perform some kind of action in response to a mouse click, and wants the owners to know that this is such an area. For example links or buttons will return true from this method. Information regarding associated ui elements. The ui element that was clicked. The associated mouse event args. Returns true if some processing will be done if mouse were to be clicked at the specified location. Overridden. Called when mouse is clicked on a ui element associated with this node. The default implementation does nothing. Information regarding associated ui elements. The ui element that was clicked. The mouse position at which the click occurred. The mouse button that was clicked. Xml element name associated with this node class. Can be null or empty string in which case this node is considered to have no associated xml element. Gets or sets the value of the href attribute. Represents a b (bold) tag. If this is a formatting node and has a span equivalent then returns the span equivalent. Otherwise returns null. Xml element name associated with this node class. Can be null or empty string in which case this node is considered to have no associated xml element. Represents a block level node. Appends attribute information to the passed in string builder. This method does not put the xml element name or the closing '>' character. Simply the attributes (example "wraptext=true, align=right"). The default implementation appends the title attribute if any. Derived classes must call the base implementation if overriding this method. The string builder where to append the attribute information. Overridden. Reads the current attribute from the reader. Structure that contains name and value pair. Returns true if attribute was read successfully. Returns false if the attribute it not applicable or the value is not valid. Called before positioning of this element begins. Specifies whether the text will be wrapped if it doesn't fit the available width. Default is true. Returns the default padding for this block node. Default implementation returns null. Indicates the line alignment of inner contents. Indicates whether to wrap the inner contents. Represents a br tag. Creates, if needed, the element for the specified line item and sets it to the line item's Elem property. The created ui element will be relative to (0, 0) point. The positioning logic will offset it recursively to position it at proper location. Gets the the contents within the xml element. This includes the child nodes contents as well. The string builder where to append the attribute information. Specifies whether to get the raw text or include formatting xml tags. Xml element name associated with this node class. Can be null or empty string in which case this node is considered to have no associated xml element. Represents series of non-breaking space characters. Represents text content. Gets the the contents within the xml element. This includes the child nodes contents as well. The string builder where to append the attribute information. Specifies whether to get the raw text or include formatting xml tags. Creates, if needed, the element for the specified line item and sets it to the line item's Elem property. The created ui element will be relative to (0, 0) point. The positioning logic will offset it recursively to position it at proper location. Trims trailing spaces. This method is called on line items that are the last on their lines. This method, if called, is called before CreateUIElement. Returns the trimmed line item. If null is returned, then the item will be removed. Null is typically returned for example when the item entirely consists of spaces. Splits the specified item into two, breaking it at the last break point within the item. For example, "AA BB CC" will be split into "AA BB" and "CC". This is called for purposes of wrapping an item on multiple lines. The original item is disposed by the caller after this operation. Called to clean up any resources allocated for the line item. Gets or sets the text that's associated with this node. This is the text that will be rendered. Size of this item. This includes padding, margins etc... and doesn't necessarily have to be the same size as the element's size. By default the height is calculated based on the size of the item. This property can be used to constraint th line height to a minimum height. Default value is 0. Gets the the contents within the xml element. This includes the child nodes contents as well. The string builder where to append the attribute information. Specifies whether to get the raw text or include formatting xml tags. Overridden. Gets or sets the number of space characters this node represents. Represents an em (emphasize) tag. Draws the text italicized. Represents an i (italics) tag. If this is a formatting node and has a span equivalent then returns the span equivalent. Otherwise returns null. Xml element name associated with this node class. Can be null or empty string in which case this node is considered to have no associated xml element. Xml element name associated with this node class. Can be null or empty string in which case this node is considered to have no associated xml element. Represents a font tag. Appends attribute information to the passed in string builder. This method does not put the xml element name or the closing '>' character. Simply the attributes (example "wraptext=true, align=right"). The default implementation appends the title attribute if any. Derived classes must call the base implementation if overriding this method. The string builder where to append the attribute information. Overridden. Reads the current attribute from the reader. Structure that contains name and value pair. Returns true if attribute was read successfully. Returns false if the attribute it not applicable or the value is not valid. If this is a formatting node and has a span equivalent then returns the span equivalent. Otherwise returns null. Xml element name associated with this node class. Can be null or empty string in which case this node is considered to have no associated xml element. Specifies the color with which to draw the text. Specifies the font face name. Contains the font size information. Represents a horizontal rule. Overridden. Reads the current attribute from the reader. Structure that contains name and value pair. Returns true if attribute was read successfully. Returns false if the attribute it not applicable or the value is not valid. Overridden. Appends attribute information to the passed in string builder. This method does not put the xml element name or the closing '>' character. Simply the attributes (example "wraptext=true, align=right"). The default implementation appends the title attribute if any. Derived classes must call the base implementation if overriding this method. The string builder where to append the attribute information. Creates, if needed, the element for the specified line item and sets it to the line item's Elem property. The created ui element will be relative to (0, 0) point. The positioning logic will offset it recursively to position it at proper location. Called before positioning of this element begins. Xml element name associated with this node class. Can be null or empty string in which case this node is considered to have no associated xml element. Specifies whether to draw grooved or solid horizontal rule. When set to True, the horizontal rule will be drawn solid. Indicates the line alignment of inner contents. Overridden. Default border style this node uses if none is specified. Overridden. Default border sides. Default line item offset type. Represents an image. Overridden. Reads the current attribute from the reader. Structure that contains name and value pair. Returns true if attribute was read successfully. Returns false if the attribute it not applicable or the value is not valid. Overridden. Appends attribute information to the passed in string builder. This method does not put the xml element name or the closing '>' character. Simply the attributes (example "wraptext=true, align=right"). The default implementation appends the title attribute if any. Derived classes must call the base implementation if overriding this method. The string builder where to append the attribute information. Creates, if needed, the element for the specified line item and sets it to the line item's Elem property. The created ui element will be relative to (0, 0) point. The positioning logic will offset it recursively to position it at proper location. Returns the cached image. Specifies the source of the image. Specifies whether the image should be embeded inside the formatted value or the 'src' attribute should be used to locate the image using .NET class. Xml element name associated with this node class. Can be null or empty string in which case this node is considered to have no associated xml element. Represents a paragraph tag. Xml element name associated with this node class. Can be null or empty string in which case this node is considered to have no associated xml element. Represents the root node of the tree structure formed by formatted text when it's parsed. Overridden. Xml element name associated with this node class. Can be null or empty string in which case this node is considered to have no associated xml element. Represents a span tag. Creates, if needed, the element for the specified line item and sets it to the line item's Elem property. The created ui element will be relative to (0, 0) point. The positioning logic will offset it recursively to position it at proper location. If this is a formatting node and has a span equivalent then returns the span equivalent. Xml element name associated with this node class. Can be null or empty string in which case this node is considered to have no associated xml element. Represents a strong tag. Text is drawn in bold. Xml element name associated with this node class. Can be null or empty string in which case this node is considered to have no associated xml element. Represents an underline tag. If this is a formatting node and has a span equivalent then returns the span equivalent. Otherwise returns null. Xml element name associated with this node class. Can be null or empty string in which case this node is considered to have no associated xml element. Represents an strikeout tag. If this is a formatting node and has a span equivalent then returns the span equivalent. Otherwise returns null. Xml element name associated with this node class. Can be null or empty string in which case this node is considered to have no associated xml element. Represents an unknown tag in the formatted text. Returns true if the Value is non-null and has length of greater than 0. Returns the old info. The returned item will be fully or partially on the current line. In other words the line will be wrapped from after the returned item or from the middle of the returned item. Gets the font height of the font associated with the current node. Returns true if adding the specified item to the line will cause the line height to increase and reduce the amount of horizontal area available for the line due to presence of adjacent floating objects. Shifts floating objects right so they don't intersect with the line. Gets the available horizontal area for laying out objects within the vertical area specified by verticalArea. This method takes into account the floating objects. Only Top and Height are used. This is set to the available area. If no area is available the it's Width will be set to 0 or less. Retruns true if the specified vertical area has any floating objects. Gets the available horizontal area for laying out objects within the vertical area specified by verticalArea. This method takes into account the floating objects. Top of the vertical area to test. The height of the vertical area to test. This is set to the available area. If no area is available the it's Width will be set to 0 or less. Retruns true if the specified vertical area has any floating objects. Gets the available horizontal area for laying out objects within the vertical area specified by verticalArea. This method takes into account the floating objects. Only Top and Height are used. This is set to the available area. If no area is available the it's Width will be set to 0 or less. Retruns true if the specified vertical area has any floating objects. Clears the necessary floating objects to accomodate area that's at least the width and height of the requiredArea. Upon return, it will modify the requiredArea's Left and Width to reflect the found area. Returns true if the required area was modified. False otherwise. Returns true if actually some floating objects were cleared. Returns false otherwise, for example if there were no floating objects. Returns true if actually some floating objects were cleared. Returns false otherwise, for example if there were no floating objects. This must of followed by either a RecalcBaseLinesAndRight call or AdjustBaseLines calls for each item in the line in order for the base line and right properties to reflect correct values. Returns the rect of the line taking into account the words that have been added so far. Returns true if there are ALREADY positioned floating objects adjacent to (vertically intersect) this line. ScrollableAreaUIElement class. Displays scrollbars and scrolls the client element contained inside this element. Scrolls the specified point into view. The point is absolute (relative to the control), not relative to this element or the client element. Returns true if scrolling took place otherwise false if the point was already in view. Location to bring into view. True if scrolling took place. Scrolls the specified point into view. The rect is absolute (relative to the control), not relative to this element or the client element. Returns true if scrolling took place otherwise false if the rect was already in view. Area to bring into view. True if the scrolling took place. Creates the child elements for the grid Called when element is disposed of. The default implementation calls Dispose on all child elements and then clears the child elements collection. Overridden. The used to provide rendering information. Overridden. Does nothing. The used to provide rendering information. The element that will contain the element to be scrolled. Container element is a child of this element. UIElement class that contains the client element (the element that's scrolled) of the scroll area element. Constructor. The parent . Overridden. Overridden. Overridden. Does nothing. Overridden. Returns true to clip the client element to the available visible space. Contains style related information. Constructor. Constructor. Overridden. Checks if the specified object is StyleInfo and contains the same information. The object to compare against. True if the specified object is a StyleInfo and contains the same information. Overridden. Returns the hash code. The hash code for the associated style string. Returns true if this style info has any non-default settings. Overridden. Returns the string representation of this object. Returns the attributes that are set on this style info object. An array of strings representing the attributes that are set on this object. Font size. Returns null if no value was previously specified. Specifies whether to anti-alias text or not. Specifies the border style. Specifies the border sides. Appearance object. This property will return null if margins hasn't been specified. Margins around the object. Padding around the contents of the object. Returns null if no value was previously specified. Width of the object. Returns null if no value was previously specified. Returns null if no value was previously specified. Height of the object. Whether the float the element and if so where. Whether this element should clear any floating objects. Specifies how the inline element should be vertically aligned. Specifies how lines should be alined. MarginsInfo class. Constructor. Constructs a object with all of its dimensions set to . Parses the specified string to a MarginsInfo object. This method will throw an exception if the margins string is in incorrect format. The string to parse. The MarginsInfo object based on the specified string. Overridden. Returns the string representation of this MarginsInfo object. Overridden. Returns true if the specified object is a MarginsInfo instance and contains the same margin values. The object to compare against. True if the specified object is a MarginsInfo instance and contains the same margin values. Overridden. Returns the hash code. Returns the left margin. Returns the right margin. Returns the top margin. Returns the bottom margin. MarginsInfoTypeConverter Returns true This parameter is not used. True. Returns a collection of property descriptors An that provides a format context. An object that specifies the type of array for which to get properties. An array of type System.Attribute that is used as a filter. A with the properties that are exposed for this data type, or null if there are no properties. Returns true if the object can convert to that type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert to. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the object to the requested type. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. A that represents the type you want to convert to. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. Returns true if the object can be converted from the speficied type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert from. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the given object to the type of this converter, using the specified context and culture information. An that provides a format context. The to use as the current culture. The object to convert An object that represents the converted value. DimensionInfo class. Constructor. Creates new instance with the specified value The dimension value. Indicates whether these dimensions are in percentages. Returns the string representation of this DimensionInfo object. Parses the specified string into a instance. This method will throw an exception if the specified string is in incorrect format. The string to parse. A DimensionInfo instance based on the specified string. Overridden. Returns true if the specified object is a DimensionInfo instance and represents the same value. The object to compare this instance with. True if the specified object is a DimensionInfo instance and represents the same value. Overridden. Returns the hash code. Returns a DimensionInfo instance that represents zero dimension. Returns a DimensionInfo instance that represents dimension that are calculated based on the context of the associated object. Dimension value as integer. Indicates whether these dimensions are in percentages. DimensionInfoTypeConverter Converts the object to the requested type. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. A that represents the type you want to convert to. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. Converts the given object to the type of this converter, using the specified context and culture information. An that provides a format context. The to use as the current culture. The object to convert An object that represents the converted value. FontSizeInfo class. Overridden. Returns the string representation of this FontSizeInfo object. The string representation of this object. Overridden. Returns true if the specified object is a FontSizeInfo instance and represents the same font size. The object to compare against. True if the specified object is a FontSizeInfo instance and represents the same font. Overridden. Returns the hash code. The hash code identifying this instance. Gets the font size. The size will be interpreted based on the settings of the IsFontSizeRelative and IsFontSizeInPoints properties. To set the size use the SetFontSize method. Returns true if the FontSize is relative. Use the SetFontSize method to set the value of this property. Returns true if the FontSize is in points units. Use the SetFontSize method to set the value of this property. Returns true if this font size info object represents default font size (no font size info). FontSizeInfoTypeConverter Converts the object to the requested type. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. A that represents the type you want to convert to. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. Converts the given object to the type of this converter, using the specified context and culture information. An that provides a format context. The to use as the current culture. The object to convert An object that represents the converted value. UI element used by the for rendering text. Constructor. Initializes a new instance of class. Render the text in the foreground The used to provide rendering information. Overridden. Returns the intersection of the element's rect with the invalid rect for the current draw operation. Invalid rect The intersection of the element's rect with the invalid rect. Specifies the text that will be rendered. Specifies the margins around the text. Default is to use no margins. A ui element for displaying ellipsis character. Constructor. The parent . Overridden. The to initialize. The indicating which appearances should be resolved. Render the text in the foreground The used to provide rendering information. Overridden. Overridden. Does nothing. Collection for maintaining the list of visited links. Constructor. Adds the specified link to the collection. The link to add to the collection. Removes the specified link from the collection. Clears the collection. Returns true if the specified link exists in the collection. The link whose presence should in the collection should be determined. True if the specified link exists in the collection. Returns an enumerator instance for enumerating this collection. Loads saved information from a stream containing the binary data.

The LoadFromBinary method is used in conjunction with the method to persist this object.

Stream containing the serialized . Loads saved information from a file containing the binary data.

The LoadFromBinary method is used in conjunction with the method to persist this object.

The name of the file containing the serialized . Loads saved information from a stream containing the Xml data.

The LoadFromXml method is used in conjunction with the method to persist the object.

Stream containing the serialized . Loads saved information from a file containing the Xml data.

The LoadFromXml method is used in conjunction with the method to persist the object.

The name of the file containing the serialized . Saves properties, structure, and data information to a binary stream.

The SaveAsBinary method is used in conjunction with the method to persist the object.

Stream containing the serialized . Saves properties, structure, and data information to a file in binary format.

The SaveAsBinary method is used in conjunction with the method to persist the object.

The name of the file containing the serialized . Saves properties, structure, and data information to an Xml/soap stream.

The SaveAsBinary method is used in conjunction with the method to persist the object.

Stream containing the serialized . Saves properties, structure, and data information to a file in xml/soap format.

The SaveAsBinary method is used in conjunction with the method to persist the object.

The name of the file containing the serialized . Returns the number of items in the collection. HeaderUIElementBase Constructor, initializes a new instance of the HeaderUIElementBase class. Parent element True for vertical bar adjustments True for horizonatl bar adjustments Called when the mouse enters this element Called when the mouse leaves this element Handles rendering the themed version of the element. The used to provide rendering information. override initappearance The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. Overridden. The used to provide rendering information. Draws the BackColor of the element. The used to provide rendering information. Indicates if the element needs to monitor the enter and exiting of the mouse over the element. Returns the current state of the header. Returns a boolean indicating if the item requires the rendering a separator. Returns true if this element can be moved or resized by the mouse Returns the HeaderStyle that this element should use while rendering. Returns the rectangle within the borders of the element. Interface for implementing a condition against which to compare a value. Determines whether the provided value matches the condition. The used to give additional information. Can be null. The value to compare against. True if the specified value satisfies the requirements of the condition. Fired when a property is changed that requires any listeners to be notified. An interface implemented by objects that want to provide contextual information to an Gets the context to provide; this property allows the lazy-creation of objects until they are requested, which is useful in the case of an that does not make use of the context. A class implementing that can contain multiple instances of . Creates a new ConditionGroup object. Constructor for Deserialization. The operator used in evaluating the conditions in the group. An array of conditions that should be added to the group. This constructor is for internal infrastructure purposes and should not be used. Add the provided ICondition to the collection. The to add to the collection. Remove the specified from the collection. Returns whether the CombineOperator should be serialized. Returns whether the list maintaining the condition group should be serialized. Raises the PropertyChanged event if there are any listeners. Determines whether the provided value matches one condition in the group, if is LogicalOperator.Or, or all values if is LogicalOperator.And. The used to give additional information. Can be null. The value to compare against. True if the specified value satisfies the requirements of the condition. Returns an enumerator to iterate over the 's. Clears the collection Returns whether the specified value is contained in the collection. The object whose presence in the collection should be determined. True if the specified object belongs to the collection. Returns the index of the item in the collection. The object to search for in the collection. The index of the specified value, or -1 if the item is not found. Inserts an into the colection The index where to insert the item The to add. Removes the from the collection at the specified index Returns a deep clone of the ConditionGroup. Constructor used for deserialization. Gets/sets the used to evalute whether one or all conditions need be met. Returns the number of conditions in the collection. Returns the at the specified index. Fired when a condition is added or removed from the group. Returns whether the collection is of a constant size. True if the collection is read-only Type converter for ConditionGroup. Returns true if the object can convert to that type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert to. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the object to the requested type. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. A that represents the type you want to convert to. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. A class implementing providing several common comparison types. Creates a new OperatorCondition instance. The used to evaluate a match. The value against which to compare. Creates a new OperatorCondition instance. The used to evaluate a match. The value against which to compare. Whether to evaluate a match as a case-sensitive operation. Constructor used for deserialization. The serialization information. The streaming context. Constructor used for deserialization. The used to evaluate a match. The value against which to compare. Whether to evaluate a match as a case-sensitive operation. The type that should be used for performing comparisons. This constructor is used for internal infrastructure purposes and should not be used. Returns a boolean which indicates whether the specified value meets the comparison criteria defined by the specified conditionOperator when it is compared the the specified compareValue. Constant which defines the comparison criteria. The value to be tested. The value to be tested against; typically the value of the CompareValue property. Specifies whether string comparisons should consider case. Cached instance member. Cached instance member. Cached instance member. Returns true if the object should be serialized. Returns true if the condition operator should be serialized. Returns true if IsCaseSensitive should be serialized. Raises the PropertyChanged event if there are any listeners. Returns a deep clone of the OperatorCondition. An identical object. Determines whether the provided value matches the based on the . The used to give additional information. Can be null. The value to compare against. True if the specified value satisfies the requirements of the condition. Gets/sets whether the comparison is case-sensitive. Gets/sets the value against which to compare.

When the property is set to 'Match', the CompareValue property defines the Regex pattern used to determine whether the value being compared constitutes a match.

 Gets/sets the used to perform the comparison.

The ConditionOperator property determines the logical operator that is used to make comparisons. The names of the constants are implied to mean that the CompareValue property is the target of the comparison. For example, if the ConditionOperator property is set to 'GreaterThan', the property is set to an integer value of one, and the value being compared is an integer value of two, the condition criteria is met because "the value being compared is greater than the value of the CompareValue property".

Fired when a property is changed on the . Type converter for OperatorCondition. Returns true if the object can convert to that type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert to. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the object to the requested type. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. A that represents the type you want to convert to. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. A class implementing providing a means of comparison through a formula. Creates a new FormulaCondition object. A reference to the object that will compile the formulas Creates a new FormulaCondition object. A reference to the object that will compile the formulas The formula to use to perform a comparison against. Constructor for Deserialization. The string representation of the forumla to use. This constructor is for internal infrastructure purposes and should not be used. Constructor used for deserialization. The serialization information. The streaming context. Returns whether the should be serialized. True if the formula is set to a non-default value. Raises the PropertyChanged event if there are any listeners. Returns a deep clone of the FormulaCondition. An identical object. Determines whether the provided value matches the . The used to give additional information. The value to compare against. True if the specified value satisfies the requirements of the condition. Gets/sets the formula used to perform a comparison against. Property used during deserialization. This property is for internal infrastructure purposes and should not be used. Gets the used to communicate with a CalcManager. This class is for internal infrastructure purposes and should not be used. Fired when a property is changed on the . Type converter for FormulaCondition. Returns true if the object can convert to that type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert to. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the object to the requested type. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. A that represents the type you want to convert to. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. Constructs a reference relative to this reference by walking all the elements of the specified parsed reference. If forceDataRef is true, then any IsDataReference references are forced to resolve to a specific data item when an incomplete identifier is specified. RefLoop is used to iterate over the specified parsed reference.

This method must be overridden by the Root reference object to deal with external or root references. The Root referece object must advance past the optional control name in a Fully Qualified Reference before calling RefLoop

 The parsed representation of the reference to construct Force resolution to a specific data item. The specified reference Returns the named reference relative to this reference with scope "All". The element name. The referenced element Returns the named indexed reference relative to this reference. If isRelative is true, then index is treated as a relative to this element index. Otherwise the index is treated as absolute. The element name. The index value. true if index is relative to this index The referenced element Returns the named indexed reference relative to this reference. The element name. The index name. The referenced element Returns the named reference relative to this reference. The element name. The referenced element Returns the Root reference of a reference hierarchy. The root reference is used to resolve the fully qualifed form of a reference. Note: Must be overridden by the Root reference to return "this". The Root Reference Returns the named SummaryItem reference relative to this reference. The element name. The referenced element Resolves a reference relative to this reference. For example, if this reference is a reference to a row, and inReference is a reference to a column, the resolved reference is the cell reference that is the intersection of this row and the input column. The reference to resolve. The resolved reference. The fully qualified unique name for the referenced element. Read Only. The RefBase Parent reference of this referenced element. Used to navigate the element hierarchy. If this referenced element is the root element, BaseParent returns null. Read Only. The unqualified name of this referenced element. Used to construct the fully qualified name by the AbsoluteName method. Read Only. The UltraCalcValue, if any, associated with this Reference. If this reference does not contain a Value then a UltraCalcErrorValue is returned. A class implementing that evaluates a value based on the opposite of another condition. Instantiates a new ComplementCondition instance. Instantiates a new ComplementCondition instance. The to complement. Constructor used for deserialization. The serialization information. The context information. Returns whether the condition to complement should be serialized. Returns a deep clone of the ComplementCondition. Determines whether the provided value is not a match of the . The used to give additional information. Can be null. The value to compare against. True if the specified value satisfies the requirements of the condition. Gets/sets the to complement. Fired when a property is changed on the . Type converter for ComplementCondition. Returns true if the object can convert to that type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert to. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the object to the requested type. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. A that represents the type you want to convert to. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. A class implementing that will always evaluate to a valid match. Returns true. The used to give additional information. Can be null. The value to compare against. True. Returns a clone of the An identical object. Constructor used during deserialization. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Creates a new instance of the class. This event of is not used. Type converter for ComplementCondition. Returns true if the object can convert to that type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert to. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the object to the requested type. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. A that represents the type you want to convert to. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. A class implementing which provides a way to determine whether a value lies within a given range. Creates a new instance of the class. Creates a new instance of the class. The minimum value of the range against which to be tested. The maximum value of the range against which to be tested. If either the or parameters contain null (Nothing in VB). Creates a new instance of the class. The minimum value of the range against which to be tested. The maximum value of the range against which to be tested. The Type to which values will be converted before determining whether the value lies within the range defined by the and properties. If null, no conversion is made prior to comparison. Constructor used for deserialization. The serialization information. The streaming context. Returns true if the property requires serialization. Returns true if the property requires serialization. Returns true if the property requires serialization. Raises the event if there are any listeners. Returns a deep clone of this instance. A deep clone of this instance Returns a instance with the same property values as this instance. Returns whether the specified lies within the range defined by the and properties. The value to test. True if the specified lies within range. Returns whether the specified lies within the range defined by the and properties. Not used. The value to test. True if the specified lies within range. Gets/sets the minimum value of the range against which to be tested. Values that are greater than or equal to this value, and also less than or equal to the , are considered to be within range.

The MinimumValue is inclusive, i.e., a value that is equal to the MinimumValue is within range.

 Gets/sets the maximum value of the range against which to be tested. Values that are less than or equal to this value, and also greater than or equal to the , are considered to be within range.

The MaximumValue is inclusive, i.e., a value that is equal to the MaximumValue is within range.

 Gets/sets the Type to which values are to be converted before determining whether the comparison value lies within range. The DataType property can be left at its default value, null (Nothing in VB), when the , , and the value to be tested are all known to be of the same data type. Note: Specifying a type which differs from the actual type of one or more of the values being compared can result in unexpected behavior. For example, consider the case where the MaximumValue property is set to the integer value 1, the MaximumValue property is set to the integer value 5, and the value to be tested is the integer value 10. If the DataValue property is left at null, the comparison will be made with the assumption that all values are of the same type, and the value 10 will be correctly found to lie outside the range of 1 to 5. If in the same scenario the DataType property is set to string, the values will first be converted to their respective string representations, and the value "10" will then be considered to be within the range of "1" to "5", since a string comparison works differently than a numeric comparison. Fired when a property is changed on this instance. Type converter for RangeCondition. Returns true if the object can convert to that type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert to. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the object to the requested type. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. A that represents the type you want to convert to. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. A class implementing which provides a way to determine whether a value matches the data value or display text of an item in a list. Creates a new instance of the class. Creates a new instance of the class. The IList implementor which will be checked to determine whether the comparison value exists therein. A constant which determines whether the comparison value will be checked against the data value or display text of the items in the list. Creates a new instance of the class. A ValueList instance which will provide the list to be checked to determine whether the comparison value exists therein. A constant which determines whether the comparison value will be checked against the data value or display text of the items in the list. Constructor used for deserialization. The serialization information. The streaming context. Returns true if the property requires serialization. Returns true if the property requires serialization. Raises the event if there are any listeners. Returns a clone of this instance. A clone of this instance

Note: A reference to the value of the property is copied to the cloned instance.

 Returns a instance with the same property values as this instance.

Note: A reference to the value of the property is copied to the cloned instance.

 Returns whether the specified is contained within the list referenced by the property, using the criteria defined by the value of the property. The value to test. True if the specified is contained within the list.

If the specified is a , the item's DataValue or the DisplayText is used, depending on the value of the property. In all other cases, the value itself is used for comparison when ListItemMatchMode is set to 'DataValue', and the value's string representation is used for comparison when ListItemMatchMode is set to 'DisplayText'.

Returns whether the specified is contained within the list referenced by the property, using the criteria defined by the value of the property. Not used. The value to test. True if the specified is contained within the list. Gets/sets the IList implementor which will be checked to determine whether the comparison value exists therein.

Designer support is provided for creating a ValueList, whose associated ValueListItems collection is used for validation.

 Gets/sets a constant which determines whether the comparison value will be checked against the data value or display text of the items in the . Fired when a property is changed on this instance. Type converter for ContainedInListCondition. Returns true if the object can convert to that type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert to. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the object to the requested type. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. A that represents the type you want to convert to. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. TypeConverter-derived class which provides support for converting objects that implement the interface. Used to determine what data types the converter can convert. ITypeDescriptorContext Type being checked for possible conversion. Boolean indicating if the converter can convert to the destinationType. Converts the value to the destination type specified. ITypeDescriptorContext CultureInfo Object to be converted. Type that the object should be converted to. New object of the destination type or null if the conversion failed. TypeConverter-derived class which provides support for a ValueList. Used by the List property of the class. Used to determine what data types the converter can convert. ITypeDescriptorContext Type being checked for possible conversion. Boolean indicating if the converter can convert to the destinationType. Converts the value to the destination type specified. ITypeDescriptorContext CultureInfo Object to be converted. Type that the object should be converted to. New object of the destination type or null if the conversion failed. Used to determine what data types the converter can convert from. ITypeDescriptorContext The type of the object to be converted. Boolean indicating whether conversion from the is supported. Converts the specified value. ITypeDescriptorContext CultureInfo Object to be converted. The coverted value. Provides a communication channel between the a TextBox-derived class and its parent control Called when the control's OnKeyDown method is called Key event arguments Called when the control's OnKeyPress method is called Key press event arguments Called when the control's OnKeyUp method is called Key event arguments Returns whether the ProcessDialogKey method should be called A boolean indicating whether the ProcessDialogKey method should be called Class used to define how to find an element Create a new instance. The starting element of the find operation for which this evaluator will be used. Gets the value indicating whether the specified element matches the find criteria. The element which could match the find criteria. True if the element matches the find criteria, false otherwise. Gets the value indicating whether the specified element's descendants should be searched for the element. The element whose descendants may be searched. True to search the descendants of the specified element, false otherwise. Gets the value indicating whether the specified element's parent should be searched for the element. The element whose parent may be searched. True to search the parent of the specified element, false otherwise. Gets the starting element of the find operation for which this evaluator will be used. Gets the value indicating whether elements overlapping the starting element are excluded from the search. The default implementation returns true. Gets the value which determines whether to continue walking up the parent chain to search parent siblings when an element has already been found. The default implementation returns false, meaning the search will stop after the best match is found in all descendants of an element. Gets the value which determines whether to wrap around to the other side of the control element and search for a matching element when no match is found in the find direction. An abstract class for creating menu structure. Constructor. Called when this menu item is clicked. A helper method for creating an array of IGMenuItem from the specified menu item definition array. An array of objects. The to associate with each new . An array of objects. Display text of the menu item. If this item represnets a submenu then this property will return an array of submenu items. Otherwise it will return null. Menu styles Standard menus Office 2000 style menu Office XP style menu Office 2003 style menu Visual Studio 2005 style menu The menu items are not owner drawn. Office 2007 style menu Windows Vista toolbar style menu Visual Studio 2008 style menu ContextMenuStrip class used internally to prevent the .NET Framework from displaying the ContextMenu/ContextMenuStrip of parent controls. Singleton pattern used. Retrieve the single allowable instance of IGEmptyContextMenuStrip. If one has not been created, a new one will be instantiated. Overriden Items collection to return a ReadOnlyToolStripItemCollection A custom ReadOnlyToolStripItemCollection which always contains zero items. Base constructor ToolStrip control which contains this collection Array of ToolStripItems to add to the control Overriden IsReadOnly property which always returns True to prevent adding of items to the collections IGMenuItem. Initializes a new IGMenuItem Initializes a new IGMenuItem with the specified parameters Merge type Merge order Shortcut Text to be displayed Click event handler Popup event handler Select event handler Array of menu items Initializes a new IGMenuItem with the specified parameter Text to be displayed Initializes a new IGMenuItem with the specified parameters Text to be displayed Click event handler Initializes a new IGMenuItem with the specified parameters Text to be displayed Click event handler Shortcut Initializes a new IGMenuItem with the specified parameters Text to be displayed Array of menu items Invoked when the size of the menu item should be returned for an owner drawn menu. Event arguments Invoked when the owner drawn menu is to be rendered. Event arguments containing information about the menu item to draw Invoked when a copy of the menu item should be created. A clone of the menu item Invoked from the OnMeasureItem to determine the size of the owner drawn menu item Event arguments for the The size of the menu item Invoked from the OnDrawItem to render the menu item. Event arguments for the event Indicates if the specified index is the end of a group of menu items. Index of the item to check True if the item is last menu item, or is before a break or separator Returns the object used to render the string True if the item is currently selected The StringFormat object used when measuring and drawing the text Returns the size of the images displayed The of the images displayed. Return the size of the area that contains the menu image The of the area that contains the menu image. Draws the specified menu glyph at the specified coordinates Graphics object to render into Rect of the glyph Glyph to render ForeColor Returns the image displayed in the menu. The image displayed in the menu. Used to render the text for the menu item Graphics object used to render the text Forecolor of the text Rectangle where the text should be rendered String format used to render the text Returns the style of menu being rendered Returns the height required for the separator tool Indicates if the menu item is a separator Indicates if the menu is oriented from right to left. Indicates if the menu item will display an arrow indicating it contains sub items Returns the width needed for the sub items arrow. Returns the amount of space before the text. Returns the string to render for the shortcut associated with the menu item Returns a value indicating whether a shortcut should be displayed Returns or sets the image displayed in the menu item. This property may be set to an object or an integer indicating the index of the item in the ImageList of the . Returns the amount of padding around the image. Base class derived from System.Windows.Forms.Panel that supports AutoScroll without scrolling the background. Requires unmanaged code rights to prevent flickering. Constructor Cleans up any resources being used.

Passed a boolean value called 'disposing' to determine if the resources should be cleaned up.

 Called when the control is created Called when determining how far to scroll to display the specified control The child control to scroll into view. The upper-left hand System.Drawing.Point of the display area relative to the client area required to scroll the control into view. Called when the Visible property changes. The event args. Will attempt to subclass the window if the property returns true. Renders the parent background into the specified paint event argument's Graphics object to render into Invalid rect Gets or sets a value indicating whether the container will allow the user to scroll to any controls placed outside of its visible boundaries. Returns true if this panel can scroll. The default implemenation returns true for created visible controls whose AutoScroll property is true at runtime only. Returns true until a security exception is thrown trying to subclass the control. An ImageAndTextUIElement that gets the information required to render from an object that implements the interface Initializes a new DependentImageAndTextUIElement Object implementing the interface. Parent UIElement Initializes a new DependentImageAndTextUIElement Object implementing the interface. Parent UIElement Type of button Initializes the object with the specified provider. Object implementing the interface. Returns the object that provides the information for rendering the element. Button uielement representing a button with image and text. Initializes a new Parent element Makes sure that the child elements for this element are in the ChildElements array and that they are positioned properly. This needs to be overridden if the element has any child elements. Returns the contained uielement that displays the image and text. Gets/sets the display style for the button Overriden. Returns the button style used when displaying the element. Returns the rectangle to use when positioning the child elements UIElement for displaying image and text. Initializes a new ImageAndTextUIElementEx Parent element Determines if space should be reserved for an image shadow. ImageAndTextUIElement True if the image element may need to display a shadowed version of the image underneath the actual image. Determines if the button image has a shadow rendered underneath. ImageAndTextUIElement True if the image should display a shadowed version of the image underneath the actual image. Maximum size for a scaled image. ImageAndTextUIElement Determines how the text is placed in relation to the image. ImageAndTextUIElement Indicates if the image should be scaled. ImageAndTextUIElement Gets the image to be displayed. May be null if there is no image to display. ImageAndTextUIElement Gets the text to display Indicates if multiple lines of text are to be rendered. Returns the padding around the text. Returns the padding around the image. Adjusts the text's rect for special cases (e.g. a button down shift) Adjusts the image's rect for special cases (e.g. a button down shift) Returns true if the text is to be displayed vertically Determines how mnemonics in the text are rendered. Returns true if the text is to be wrapped Returns the amount of padding around the element. Indicates whether the text placement property should be used to determine the placement for the text element. True to use the text placement. Otherwise, the alignment properties are used. Returns true if the text should be rotated 180 degrees Invoked by the child elements to determine the intersection of the child element's rectangle with the invalid rect. Child elements whose intersecting rect is to be returned Invalid rect The intersection of the child element's rect with the invalid rect. Invoked before a phase of the child elements is invoked. The used to provide rendering information. Phase being rendered Invoked after a phase of the child elements is invoked. The used to provide rendering information. Phase being rendered Used to determine if the element should invalidate itself when its properties are changed. Gets/sets whether the text is rotated 180 degrees. Gets/sets whether the appearance alignments or the text placement takes precedence when positioning the text and image elements. Determines the padding around the image. Gets/sets whether the space should be reserved for an image shadow. Gets/sets whether the image in the button displays a shadowed version under the actual image. Determines the placement of the text in relation to the image. Determines the scaled size of an image. Image displayed in the button. Determines the padding around the image. Determines if the image is scaled. Text displayed in the button. Padding around the text. Determines how mnemonics in the text are rendered. Determines if the text is displayed in multiple lines. Determines if the text is rendered vertically. Determines if the text can be wrapped to multiple lines. Gets/sets the horizontal alignment for the image. Gets/sets the vertical alignment for the image. Gets/sets the horizontal alignment for the text. Gets/sets the vertical alignment for the text. Gets/sets the angle at which the elements are rendered. Overriden. The child elements must be clipped if the image element is larger than the panel. Returns the rectangle by which the child elements should be clipped. Determines whether child element draw notifications should be invoked on the element. Summary description for ImageBackgroundStretchMarginsPreviewForm. Required designer variable. Initialize a new ImageBackgroundStretchMarginsPreviewForm The associated with the background The indicating the margins of the image background. Clean up any resources being used. Specifies whether managed and unmanaged resources should be cleaned up. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Summary description for ImageBackgroundStretchMarginsTypeEditor. Required designer variable. Initializes a new Clean up any resources being used. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. The resulting ImageBackgroundStretchMargins created from the settings in this dialog. Shows the ImageBackground Stretch Margins editor. Used to determine the type of UIEditor that will be displayed. ITypeDescriptorContext UITypeEditorEditStyle specifying the type of UIEditor. Used to edit the value and convert the value as needed. ITypeDescriptorContext IServiceProvider Current value Edited value. Dialog used to select an area of the screen to capture in a Bitmap Initializes a new ImageCaptureDialog Size of the image to capture Initializes a new ImageCaptureDialog Clean up any resources being used. Specifies whether managed and unmanaged resources should be cleaned up. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Returns the captured image This is used by the DependentImageUIElement class to get necessary information for rendering an image Returns the image Adjusts the rect to deal with special cases (e.g. button down shifting) The that should be adjusted. The associated with the provided display rectangle. An image UIElement that gets the image related information from an object that implements the IUIElementImageProvider interface. DependentImageUIElement constructor Parent UIElement interface Initializes the appearance The appearance structure to initialize. The properties that are needed Adjust's the display rect of the image A reference to the that should be adjusted. The provider of the image data (read-only). The text string. The get calls the provider's GetImage method. The set is not supported The border style of the element (read-only) Bits flags that specify which borders to draw (read only) Helper class for dealing with images. Creates a copy of the specified image and then adjusts the colors of the bitmap to use the specified hue and saturation preserving the current luminance. Image whose colors are to be updated The hue is measured in degrees, ranging from 0.0 through 360.0, in HSB color space. The saturation ranges from 0.0 through 1.0, where 0.0 is grayscale and 1.0 is the most saturated. Creates a region based on the masking out the specified color from the specified image Image used as the basis for the region Color that should be masked out A Region object Adjusts the colors of the specified bitmap to use the specified hue and saturation preserving the current luminance. Image whose colors are to be updated The hue is measured in degrees, ranging from 0.0 through 360.0, in HSB color space. The saturation ranges from 0.0 through 1.0, where 0.0 is grayscale and 1.0 is the most saturated. ImagePreview control Initializes a new ImagePreview control Calculates the size required to display an image at the specified scale factor Border style of the control Image size Width scale factor Height scale factor A object indicating the size required to display an image at the specified scale factor. Calculates the size of the control that can render the specified image size in the specified image area Borderstyle of the control Image size Area for the images within the border A object indicating the size of the control that can render the specified image size in the specified image area. Updates the size the control based on the current borderstyle, image size and image area. Invoked when the size and/or position of the control changes New x coordinate New y coordinate New width New height Indicates the type of change occuring Invoked when the control must be rendered. Paint event arguments Indicates if the control should automatically size itself. Returns the area within the control where the image is rendered. Gets/sets the borderstyle for the control. Gets/sets whether a grid is drawn for stretched images when autosized Gets/sets the image size Gets/sets the image to preview Invoked when the object is disposed A disposable class for managing region information created from an image. Initializes a new with the specified image and transparent color Image from which the base region is obtained. Color used to determine which part of the image should be masked out. Size to which the image should be resized before calculating the region information Initializes a new with the specified image and transparent color Image from which the base region is obtained. Size to which the image should be resized before calculating the region information Initializes a new with the specified image and transparent color Image from which the base region is obtained. Color used to determine which part of the image should be masked out. Initializes a new with the specified image Image from which the base region is obtained. Initializes a new Invoked when the Dispose method of the object is invoked. Used to invoke the event Event arguments Used to invoke the event Event arguments Invoked when the ImageRegion is created. Invoked when the ImageRegion is destroyed. Returns the region based on the image. Color which is masked out by the image. When set to Color.Empty, the color is obtained from the lower left hand pixel of the image. Returns or sets the size of the image shape. When set to Size.Empty, the size is based on the size of the image. Returns or sets the image used to create the region. Summary description for InkEditorPopupButtonUIElement. Constructor The parent element of this object. The displayed in the button. The of the button. Initializes the appearance for the element. OnMouseDown Mouse event arguments True if the mouse button was pressed while the cursor was positioned over the adjustable area If not null, contains a reference to the element that has captured the mouse Called when the mouse is released over an element Mouse event arguments Returning true will ignore the next click event Called when the element is double clicked If true the mouse was double-clicked over the adjustable area of the element Draws the button's borders Initialize the element. Gets the button style for the element. We override this so that we can change style on the fly, based on the owner's display style, and whether the mouse is over the parent Returns the ui role for the element. Indicates if the button style requires invalidation of the element on the mouse enter and exit. Summary description for InkProviderManager. Dirties all the UltraControls in the specified container. Returns the InkProvider registered for the specified container control. Registers an InkProvider. True if the InkProvider was successfully registered. UnRegisters an InkProvider. True if the InkProvider was successfully unregistered. Returns the version of the InkProviderList. Interface implemented by UltraInkProvider Returns the InkEditorPopupButtonUIElement. The parent . The previous UIElement. Returns the size of the InkEditorPopupButtonUIElement. The indicating the maximum size of the element. The of the . Causes the InkProvider's UltraPenInputPanel to popup. Does nothing if the UltraPenInputPanel is already popped up. Closes the pen input panel. True if changes made in the popup should be applied to the editor or false to close the popup without applying the changes. Returns whether the InkProvider's UltraPenInputPanel is popped up. Returns whether the InkProvider's Visible property is set to true. Returns the editor for which the popup is currently displayed or null if the popup is not dropped down. Returns whether Ink recognition is available. Returns when to show the Ink Button on the editor. Implemented by an object that provides instances Returns the for the specified key. The key of the IPopupItem to retrieve. The IPopupItem matching the specified key. Returns a list of keys for the contained popup items. An array of keys for the contained s. Used to verify that the specified key is a valid key for the popup provider Key to evaluate The key for the popup item or null if the popup item does not exist. Implemented by an object that can display a popup window. Displays the popup window. Object providing information about the popup Hides the popup window Indicates if the popup is currently displayed. Invoked when the popup window has been closed. Returns the control associated with the popup window. Implemented by an object that provides popup information to an Initializes a new instance Initializes a new instance Owner control for the popup window Returns or sets the area (in screen coordinates) over which the popup should not be displayed. Returns or sets the preferred location (in screen coordinates) for the upper left corner of the dropdown. Returns or sets the control that will own the popup If true wil attempt to place the dropdown's upper right corner at the location point. Returns or sets where to place the dropdown with respect to the exclusion rect. Returns or sets the control associated with the popup window.

The SourceControl is analogous of the SourceControl property of a context menu. It is used to identify which control is displaying the popup window. The IPopupItem should return this value from its SourceControl property.

 Interface implemented by a StatusBar control The interface is used to notify the status bar that a control has exclusive access to the value of the StatusText that should be displayed. This may be used by menu style controls to notify the statusbar that a menu is active. The status text may then be set to the value associated with the active menu item. Indicates if the statusbar should display the value. When set to false, the control implementing the interface should display the value of the property. Otherwise, the status text displayed should be the default status text - this is usually the status text associated with the control under the current mouse location. Text to display in a status bar when the property is set to false. Gets/sets the toolbars manager. Interface of a control that will extend glass into its region. Forces a recalculation of the transparent region. Returns whether there is a transparent region where glass will be rendered. Returns the region where glass will be rendered. Interface of a UIElement that has glass extended into its region. Returns whether text contained within the element should be drawn with a glow. Interface implemented by a class that displays mdi children as tab items. Returns the form Icon as an image or the image being used by the TabbedMDIManager for the specified form. The MDI child form whose Image will be returned. Returns the Text of the form The MDI child form whose Text will be returned. Returns the ToolTipText of the form The MDI child form whose ToolTipText will be returned. Returns or sets the enabled state of the tabbed mdi manager. When disabled, the mdi children will be represented as standard forms. When enabled, the mdichildren will be displayed as tab items. Returns the managed by the ITabbedMdiManager Gets/sets the toolbars manager. Occurs when the state is about to change Occurs when the state has changed Interface implemented by a form that provides custom mdi tab information. Invoked when the context menu for a tab is about to be displayed. to initialize Invoked when the tab should be closed or hidden. Used to resolve the appearance for the tab. Tab state that should be resolved. Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to resolve UIRole that should be used when resolving the appearance Resolution order that should be honored when resolving the appearance. Indicates whether the specified form may be closed. Indicates if the tab supports hot tracking. Returns information used to uniquely identify the item. This information should be constant across application instances for the object. The information will be serialized when the tab is serialized and used to reassociated the tab with a particular form after serialization. Returns the text displayed in the tab for the form. Returns the tooltip displayed in the tab for the form. Returns the extent for a fixed width tab. Used to notify the implementing class whether it is being displayed as an mdi tab. Used to determine if a custom tab will provide its own image in the appearance resolution. Returns the ImageList used to retreive images provided by the tab. Returns the color masked from the image provided by the tab. Class that maintains information about MdiParent forms Registers a tabbed mdi manager class with an mdi parent . TabbedMdiManager to associate with a specified form. MdiParent form that the mdi manager should be associated with. Unregisters a tabbed mdi manager and an mdi parent form. TabbedMdiManager that was associated with the specified form Form that was associated with a tabbed mdi manager Returns the that has registered with the specified Form to evaluate A class implementing the interface that is associated with the specified form or null if no class has registered for that form. Indicates if the specified is already associated with an Form to evaluate True if a class implementing the has registered with the specified form. Enumeration used determine if a form is displayed with rounded corners. If rhe ribbon is visible on the form or its MdiParent then the form displays with rounded corners. Otherwise, the form displays as standard. The form displays with rounded corners. The form can be resized by the user at runtime. The form displays with rounded corners. The form can not be resized by the user at runtime. The form displays normally based on its FormBorderStyle property settings. Enumeration indicating the type of border to draw on a form when UltraWinToolbars is doing the form border drawing. The toolbar is not handling the border drawing Office 2007-style form borders Themed borders Non-themed borders Interface implemented by a class that displays toolbars. Gets the for an mdi child form. The mdi child form to get the display style for. A value. Resolves the appearance for the form border A referance to AppearanceData that receives the resolved appearance settings. Bit flags representing the properties yet to be set. Gets the . Returns true if the form should display with active borders. This only returns true if the toolbar manager's DockWitinContainer is set to its Form and that form should display as active. Occurs when the toolbars manager is disposed Occurs when the has changed Occurs when the form goes from active to incative or vice versa. This event is raised only if the toolbar manager's DockWitinContainer is set to its Form. Returns the style of border the UltraToolbarsManager will draw when it is drawing the form's borders. Occurs when the has changed Gets the thickness of the rounded form border. Structure used to provide ToolTip information. Initializes a new based on the specified cursor location Location of the mouse in screen coordinates BackColor for the tooltip ForeColor for the tooltip Font used to display the tooltip. Borderstyle for the tooltip window Space between the edge of the tooltip window and the text. Text to display Location where the tooltip should be displayed If true will align the right edge of the tooltip Returns true if this tooltip info instance can be used to actually display a tooltip. Specifies the auto pop delay. Specify 0 for no auto pop and -1 for the default auto pop delay. Default is 0. Determines in what style tooltips are displayed (standard or balloontip). Gets / sets an enumerated value that determines which determines which image (if any) to display in the tooltip title.

Note that in order for the Appearance.Image or ToolTipAppearance.Image setting to apply, this property must be set to Custom or Default.

 Image displayed when is set to ToolTipImage.Custom. ; Returns/sets the font used to draw the ToolTip Title. If no font is set, then the Font property will be used in Bold (if possible). Determines whether the should be treated as plain text or as formatted text. Text to display in the title area of the tooltip Returns whether to display the tooltip if the owning form is inactive.

By default, a tooltip is not displayed for an item when the owning form is inactive. The ShowWhenOwningFormInactive can be set to true to override this behavior.

Area that the tooltip should not cover Size of the tooltip Maximum width of the tooltip Indicates whether to flip the tooltip rect across the x axis when the display rectangle intersects the exclusion rect Indicates whether to flip the tooltip rect across the y axis when the display rectangle intersects the exclusion rect Indicates whether the tooltip width may be adjusted. Indicates whether to adjust the X coordinate to ensure that it is within the screen rect. Indicates whether to adjust the Y coordinate to ensure that it is within the screen rect. Returns or sets a value indicating whether the size of the embeddable editor should be calculated. Returns or sets the owner context for the editor. Returns or sets the editor owner. Returns or sets the editor class. Specifies whether to display the tool-tip as soon as the mouse enters the element if another element was currently displaing its tooltip. Default value is false. An interface that allows a class to provide a logical mapping between a condition and an AppearanceData object. Resolve the requested appearance properties. The appearance structure to initialize. The appearance properties to resolve. The value against which to compare. Context of the element being resolved. Fired when a property or member of the collection has changed. A class that allows for maintaining a group of condition/appearance mappings. Instantiates a new ConditionValueAppearance object. Constructor for Deserialization. The list of appearances that should be added to the collection. The list of conditions that should be added to the collection. This constructor is for internal infrastructure purposes and should not be used. Returns a string describing the object with the number of conditions. A string representation of the object and the number of conditions it contains. Add the specified Condition/Appearance mapping. The to associate with the specified condition. The condition that should be added to the collection. Applies the specified to any that is contained in the collection. This function is for internal infrastructure purposes and should not be used. Removes all condition/appearance mappings from the collection. Remove the specified and its associated from the collection. Returns whether the table mapping conditions to appearances should be serialized. True if there are any appearances that need to be serialized. Returns whether ApplyAllMatchingConditions should be serialized. True if the property is set to a non-default value. Raises the PropertyChanged event if there are any listeners. Resolve the requested appearance properties. The appearance structure to initialize. The appearance properties to resolve. The value against which to compare. The used to lazily-load the context of the object. Returns a deep clone of the ConditionValueAppearance. A deep clone of the object. Constructor used for deserialization. Gets/sets whether will continue to resolve. Setting this property to false can help improve performance. Returns the number of condition/appearance mappings. Returns an enumerator for the range of maintained conditions. Gets/sets the associated with the provided . The condition used to evaluate a match. Note: If the condition does not exist in the collection when setting the property, it will be added. Fired when a property or member of the collection has changed. ConditionValueAppearance type converter. Returns true if the object can convert to that type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert to. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the object to the requested type. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. A that represents the type you want to convert to. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. ILayoutContainer interface. Called by the layout manager to position a layout item. The to position. The of the item. Context used in calls to the container. Returns the container bounds. Context used in calls to the container. A base class that implements the IEnumerator interface Constructor Implements the IEnumerator.MoveNext method Implements the IEnumerator.Reset method. Sets the position to before the first item in the collection Returns the current object being enumerated ILayoutItem collection. Constructor. The . Implementation should throw an exception if the passed in constraint is not a valid constraint for this layout manager. It usually checks the type. This method is called whenever a layout item is added, removed or the layout is cleared. Implementation of this method calls InvalidateLayout to invalidate any cached information. Sets the constraint for the item. If the item doesn't exist in the collection, its added. Specify -1 to add the item at the end of the list. Returns the constraint object associated with the item. Throws an exception if the item does not exist (ie. it hasn't been added through AddLayoutItem method has been removed). The whose constraint should be retrieved. The constraint object associated with the item. Sets the constraint for the item. If the item doesn't exist in the collection, its added. The whose constraint should be set. The constraint to assign to the specified object. Adds an item to be managed by this layout manager. It uses null as the constraint so the underlying layout manager must support null constraints. The item to add to the layout manager. Adds an item to be managed by this layout manager. The item to add to the layout manager. The constraint to assign to the item. Inserts the item at specified index. It uses null as the constraint so the underlying layout manager must support null constraints. Specify -1 to add the item at the end of the list. The to add to the collection. Inserts the item at specified index in with the specified constraint. Specify -1 to add the item at the end of the list. The to add to the collection. The constraint to apply to the specified item. Removes an item from this layout manager if it exists. The to remove. Removes the item at specified index. The index of the item to remove. Retruns the index of the passed in item in the layout items collection. The whose index should be retrieved. The index of the specified item, or -1 if the item was not found.

Layout manager keeps track of the order in which items are added. Some layout managers may layout items in the order in which they were added.

 Returns true if the passed in item contained in this layout manager. The to check for in the collection. True if the specified item is contained in this layout manager. Removes all the items. Gets the item at specified index. The index of the item to retrieve. The at the specified index. opies the items from the collection into the array. IEnumerable Interface Implementation. Returns a type safe enumerator. Layout items. Layout items with their constraints. Gets the item at specified index. Returns the number of items this LayoutItemsCollection contains. Gets a value indicating whether access to the ArrayList is synchronized (thread-safe). An object that can be used to synchronize access to the collection. Base class for others to implement their own layout managers. Constructor. Calculates the minimum size required to layout the items. Object that implements the ILayoutContainer to provide bounds information Context used in calls to the A object representing the minimum size required to layout the items. Calculates the preferred size required to layout the items. Object that implements the ILayoutContainer to provide bounds information Context used in calls to the A object representing the preferred size required to layout the items. Lays out items contained in this layout manager by calling PositionItem off the passed in container for each item. Object that implements the ILayoutContainer to provide bounds information Context used in calls to the Invalidates any cached information so the layout manager recalculates everything next. Implementation should throw an exception if the passed in constraint is not a valid constraint for this layout manager. It usually checks the type. The constraint to check. This method is called whenever a layout item is added, removed or the layout is cleared. Implementation of this method calls InvalidateLayout to invalidate any cached information. Layout items collection. Specifies whether to resize the item to fill any extra space. Don't resize to fill the extra space. Only resize horizontally to fill the extra horizontal space. Only resize vertically to fill the extra vertical space. Resize horizontally and vertically to fill the extra space. Specifies where to anchor an item. Centered horizontally and vertically. Left centered vertically. Top centered horizontally. Right cetered vertically. Bottom centered horizontally. Top left. Top right. Bottom left. Bottom right. Contains ids for properites. Used by the SubObjectPropChange mechanism. property property property property property property property property property property property property property Class to specify insets. Insets are the spacing at the edges of an item. Constructor. Creates an empty Insets object with left, top, right and bottom as 0. Constructor. Left inset. Top inset. Right inset. Bottom inset. Deserialization constructor. Serialization info. Streaming context. Creates a new object that is a copy of the current instance. A copy of the current instance. Returns a string representation of the object. Initializes the this Insets object with the passed in arguments. The left inset. The top inset. The right inset. The bottom inset. Copies from the passed in instance of insets. The object to copy from. Retruns true if one of the properties of this object is set to a non-default value. True if one of the properties is set to a non-default value. Returns true if the property is set to a non-default value. True if this property is set to a non-default value. Returns true if the property is set to a non-default value. True if this property is set to a non-default value. Returns true if the property is set to a non-default value. True if this property is set to a non-default value. Returns true if the property is set to a non-default value. True if this property is set to a non-default value. Resets the object. Resets Left to its default value of 0. Resets Right to its default value of 0. Resets Top to its default value of 0. Resets Bottom to its default value of 0. Left inset. Top inset. Right inset. Bottom inset. MarginsTypeConverter Returns true This parameter is not used. True. Returns a collection of property descriptors An that provides a format context. An object that specifies the type of array for which to get properties. An array of type System.Attribute that is used as a filter. A with the properties that are exposed for this data type, or null if there are no properties. Interface for providing constraints to the grid-bag layout manager. If the display area of the item is larger than the item, this property indicates where to anchor the item.

Fill indicates whether to resize the item to fill the extra space if the layout item's display area is larger than its size.

 Indicates the padding around the layout item.

OriginX and OriginY define where the layout item will be placed in the virtual grid of the grid-bag layout. OriginX specifies the location horizontally while specifies the location vertically. These locations are the coordinates of the cells in the virtual grid that the grid-bag layout represents.

The leftmost cell has OriginX of 0. The constant specifies that the item be placed just to the right of the item that was added to the layout manager just before this item was added.

The default value is . OriginX should be a non-negative value.

OriginX and OriginY define where the layout item will be placed in the virtual grid of the grid-bag layout. OriginX specifies the location horizontally while specifies the location vertically. These locations are the coordinates of the cells in the virtual grid that the grid-bag layout represents.

The topmost cell has OriginY of 0. The constant specifies that the item be placed just below the item that was added to the layout manager just before this item was added.

The default value is . OriginY should be a non-negative value.

Specifies the number of cells this item will span horizontally. The constant specifies that this item be the last one in the row and thus occupy remaining space.

Specifies the number of cells this item will span vertically. The constant specifies that this item be the last one in the column and thus occupy remaining space.

 Indicates how the extra horizontal space will be distributed among items. Default value is 0.0. Higher values give higher priority. The weight of the column in the virtual grid the grid-bag layout represents is the maximum WeightX of all the items in the row. Indicates how the extra vertical space will be distributed among items. Default value is 0.0. Higher values give higher priority. The weight of the column in the virtual grid the grid-bag layout represents is the maximum WeightY of all the items in the column. Defines constants used by grid-bag constraint object. This constant can be assigned to OriginX and OriginY to indicate that the cell be positioned relative to the last cell. This constant can be assigned to SpanX and SpanY to indicate that the cell occupy the rest of the row or the column respectively. Class for providing constraint objects to the grid-bag layout manager. Constructor Constructor Where the layout item will be placed horizontally in the virtual grid of the grid-bag layout. Where the layout item will be placed horizontally in the virtual grid of the grid-bag layout. Specifies the number of cells this item will span horizontally. Specifies the number of cells this item will span vertically. Constructor Where the layout item will be placed horizontally in the virtual grid of the grid-bag layout. Where the layout item will be placed horizontally in the virtual grid of the grid-bag layout. Specifies the number of cells this item will span horizontally. Specifies the number of cells this item will span vertically. Indicates how the extra horizontal space will be distributed among items. Indicates how the extra vertical space will be distributed among items. If the display area of the item is larger than the item, this indicates where to anchor the item. Indicates whether to resize the item to fill the extra space if the layout item's display area is larger than its size. Indicates the padding around the layout item. Creates a new object that is a copy of the current instance. A copy of the current instance. Resets the Anchor property to its default value of AnchorType.Center. Resets the Fill property to its default value of FillType.None. Resets the Insets property to its default value which is Insets of left, top, right, bottom being 0. Resets the OriginX property to its default value of GridBagConstraintConstants.Relative. Resets the OriginY property to its default value of GridBagConstraintConstants.Relative. Resets the SpanX property to its default value of 1. Resets the SpanY property to its default value of 1. Resets the WeightX property to its default value of 0.0. Resets the WeightY property to its default value of 0.0. Resets the properties of this object to their default values. Returns true is any of the properties have been set to non-default values True if any properties have been set to non-default values. Returns a string representation of the object The string representation of the object. Returns true if the property is set to a non-default value. True if the property is set to a non-default value. Returns true if the property is set to a non-default value. True if the property is set to a non-default value. Returns true if the property is set to a non-default value. True if the property is set to a non-default value. Returns true if the property is set to a non-default value. True if the property is set to a non-default value. Returns true if the property is set to a non-default value. True if the property is set to a non-default value. Returns true if the property is set to a non-default value. True if the property is set to a non-default value. Returns true if the property is set to a non-default value. True if the property is set to a non-default value. Returns true if the property is set to a non-default value. True if the property is set to a non-default value. Returns true if the property is set to a non-default value. True if the property is set to a non-default value. Invoked when a property on a subobject has changed. Contains information about the property change If the display area of the item is larger than the item, this property indicates where to anchor the item.

Fill indicates whether to resize the item to fill the extra space if the layout item's display area is larger than its size,

 Indicates the padding around the layout item.

OriginX and OriginY define where the layout item will be placed in the virtual grid of the grid-bag layout. OriginX specifies the location horizontally while specifies the location vertically. These locations are the coordinates of the cells in the virtual grid that the grid-bag layout represents.

The leftmost cell has OriginX of 0. The constant Relative specifies that the item be placed just to the right of the item that was added to the layout manager just before this item was added.

The default value is Relative. OriginX should be a non-negative value.

OriginX and OriginY define where the layout item will be placed in the virtual grid of the grid-bag layout. OriginX specifies the location horizontally while specifies the location vertically. These locations are the coordinates of the cells in the virtual grid that the grid-bag layout represents.

The topmost cell has OriginY of 0. The constant Relative specifies that the item be placed just below the item that was added to the layout manager just before this item was added.

The default value is Relative. OriginY should be a non-negative value.

Specifies the number of cells this item will span horizontally. The constant Remainder specifies that this item be the last one in the row and thus occupy remaining space.

Specifies the number of cells this item will span vertically. The constant Remainder specifies that this item be the last one in the column and thus occupy remaining space.

 Indicates how the extra horizontal space will be distributed among items. Default value is 0.0. Higher values give higher priority. The weight of the column in the virtual grid the grid-bag layout represents is the maximum WeightX of all the items in the row. Indicates how the extra vertical space will be distributed among items. Default value is 0.0. Higher values give higher priority. The weight of the column in the virtual grid the grid-bag layout represents is the maximum WeightY of all the items in the column. TypeConverter for a Returns true if the object can convert to that type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert to. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the object to the requested type. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. A that represents the type you want to convert to. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. For internal use. A class that contains dimensions of a layout item. Returns the OriginX of the item. Returns the OriginY of the item. Returns the SpanX of the item. Retruns the SpanY of the item. Item bounds relative to the container's bounds. For internal use. A class that contains GridBagLayoutItemDimensions instances each of which associated with a ILayoutItem. For Internal use. Returns true if the collection contains an entry for the passed in layout item. The to check for. True if the collection contains an entry for the specified key. For Internal use. Column dims relative to left of the container rect. These can be modified freely without effecting the layout. For Internal use. Row dims relative to top of the container rect. These can be modified freely without effecting the layout. For Internal use. Indexer. Returns an instance GridBagLayoutItemDimensions associated with passed in layout item. GridBagLayoutManager class. Constructor. Implementation should throw an exception if the passed in constraint is not a valid constraint for this layout manager. It usually checks the type. The constraint to validate. Calculates the minimum size required to layout the items. Object that implements the ILayoutContainer to provide bounds information Context used in calls to the A object representing the minimum size required to layout the items. Calculates the preferred size required to layout the items. Object that implements the ILayoutContainer to provide bounds information Context used in calls to the A object representing the preferred size required to layout the items. Lays out items contained in this layout manager by calling PositionItem off the passed in container for each item. Invalidates any cached information so the layout manager recalculates everything next time.

Gridbag layout manager caches layout information which needs to be invalidated any time a change is made that would effect how the items are laid out.

 For internal use. Returns dimensions of layout items. It contains entries for only the visible items. The context used in calls to the . The from which layout information should be determined. The dimensions of layout items. Returns the preferred column widths of the gridbag layout. You can change them however they get recalculated once the layout is invalidated. Layout also gets invalidated whenever a layout item is added or removed. Returns the preferred row heights of the gridbag layout. You can change them however they get recalculated once the layout is invalidated. Layout also gets invalidated whenever a layout item is added or removed. Indicates whether to proportionally resize widths of all the items to fit any extra width. This would only get applied if all the items had 0.0 weightX's. Indicates whether to proportionally resize heights of all the items to fit any extra height. This would only get applied if all the items had 0.0 weightY's. Internal property. GridBagLayout mode. Standard. Left to right. Used for specifying FlowLayout.Alignment property. Depending on whether the flow layout is horizontal or vertical, the items will be aligned left or top respectively. Items will be aligned in center. Depending on whether the flow layout is horizontal or vertical, the items will be aligned right or bottom respectively. Enumeration used to indicate the horizontal and vertical alignment in a flow layout. Default Depending on whether the property corresponds to horizontal or vertical, the items will be aligned left or top respectively. Items will be aligned in center. Depending on whether the property corresponds to horizontal or vertical, the items will be aligned right or bottom respectively. FlowLayoutManager class. Initializes a new Calculates the minimum size required to layout the items. Object that implements the ILayoutContainer to provide bounds information Context used in calls to the A object representing the minimum size required to layout the items. Calculates the minimum size required to layout the items. Object that implements the ILayoutContainer to provide bounds information Context used in calls to the The maximum extent before the items should be considered to wrap. This value will be used to calculate the wrap point even if the property is set to false A object representing the minimum size required to layout the items. Calculates the preferred size required to layout the items. Object that implements the ILayoutContainer to provide bounds information Context used in calls to the A object representing the preferred size required to layout the items. Calculates the minimum size required to layout the items. Object that implements the ILayoutContainer to provide bounds information Context used in calls to the The maximum extent before the items should be considered to wrap. This value will be used to calculate the wrap point even if the property is set to false A object representing the preferred size required to layout the items. Lays out items contained in this layout manager by calling PositionItem off the passed in container for each item. Object that implements the ILayoutContainer to provide bounds information Context used in calls to the Implementation should throw an exception if the passed in constraint is not a valid constraint for this layout manager. It usually checks the type. Calculates the size. True for minumum, false for preferred. Calculates the size. True for minumum, false for preferred. The maximum extent to flow the items before wrapping to another row Indicates whether the flow layout flows items in vertical direction or horizontal direction. The default value is false so the items flow horizontally. Set this to true to have the items flow vertically. Horizontal gap in pixels between each item as well as the border of the container and items. Vertical gap in pixels between each item as well as the border of the container and items. Returns or sets the alignment of the items. Indicates whether all the items should be wrapped to a new line when there is not enough room to position the items on a single line. Returns or sets the horizontal alignment of the items. Returns or sets the vertical alignment of the items. Returns or sets the horizontal alignment of the items. Returns or sets the vertical alignment of the items. Interface which provides information to a GridBagLayoutDragStrategy for the purpose of dragging and dropping objects in a GridBagLayout. Returns the type of UIElement that contains the layout. The of the that contains the layout. This is the type of UIElement that contains the layout object. For example, in a grid this may be a BandHeaderUIElement (when dragging a Header that is separate from the cells) or a RowCellAreaUIElement (when the headers are with the cells). Returns the Context to use when trying to determine the Container Element of a layout item. The Context is important so that when the DragManager attempts to find a Layout Container element at a certain point, it gets the correct one. For example, there may be many BandHeaderUIElements in the grid, but a drag operation is only valid within elements that have the same context (the same band). The context to used when trying to determine the container element of a layout item. Gets an an array of UIElements that represent a LayoutItem within the ContainingElement. This is for the purposes for determining the drop location. The to use. This method returns multiple elements and uses them to determine a drop rect. There may be multiple elements because when the headers and cells are together, both are treated as one. Returns an ILayoutItem that corresponds to a particular UIElement The to use to check for the layout item. The that corresponds to a particular UIElement. Returns the layout items that are visible in the row-layout in an array. An array of objects. Returns resolved GridBagConstraint objects for visible columns as a hashtable where the keys are the visible columns and the values are the GridBagConstraint objects. A containing GridBagConstraint objects for visible columns. Sets the OriginX, OriginY, SpanX and SpanY of each layout item to respective property values in the GridBagConstraint object. A hashtable where the keys are the visible ILayoutItems and the values are the GridBagConstraint objects. Indicates the new group into which the item being dragged will be placed. A value of null indicates that grouping is not supported and the group should be ignored. Returns the resolved spanX and spanY of the ILayoutItem being dragged. The integer to assign the resolved spanX to. The integer to assign the resolved spanY to. This is used when drawing the rectangle when an item is dragged over a hole in a layout. Returns dimensions of layout items. It contains entries for only the visible items. The context used in calls to the . The from which layout information should be determined. The for the visible items. Returns the valid rect of the container element. The whose rect should be determined. A indicating the valid rect of the container element. This is needed because the rect in which the Layout items are positioned isn't neccessarily the same as the rect of the UIElement. In the grid, for example, this rect should not include the area within the row taken up by the Row Selectors when they are present. Returns the resolved preferred size of the item. The to check. The indicating the preferred size of the item. The resolved PreferredSize may differ from the PreferredSize property when dragging multiple objects at once, like a cell and a header when the headers are with the cells in the grid. Sets the Consraint information on the item being dropped. A GridBagConstraint with the new settings to apply to the item being dragged This is called when an item is dropped onto a hole in the layout. Sets the Span and/or labelSpan properties on an item after a Span Resize. The item currently being dragged. The new SpanX to assign to the constraints of the item being dragged. The new SpanY to assign to the constraints of the item being dragged. The new LabeSpanX to assign to the constraints of the item being dragged. The new LabelSpanX to assign to the constraints of the item being dragged. The new preferredLabelWidth to assign to the constraints of the item being dragged. The new preferredLabelHeight to assign to the constraints of the item being dragged. The new preferredCellWidth to assign to the constraints of the item being dragged. The new preferredCellHeight to assign to the constraints of the item being dragged. This is called after a Span Resize operation to set the new constraints on the item. Determine whether the layoutItem can be moved. The to check. A specifying whether the item can be moved. Determine whether the layoutItem can be span sized. The to check. The object specifying whether the item can be span-sized. Returns true if the drop area is valid. Returns false if a location should be considered invalid drop area. Note that returning true will cause the drag strategy to use the default logic to determine whether a drop location is valid. In control coordinates. True if the drop area is valid. Returns the ILayoutGroup which contains the specified point. A point in control coordinates. An ILayoutGroup which contains the specified point or null if the point is outside any group or if groups are not supported. Gets the value which indicates whether the parent group of the specified item can be changed. The item to test. True if the parent group of the specified item can be changed; False otehrwise. Returns the ILayoutItem currently being dragged. The Control in which the drag starts Class to handle the dragging and dropping of IDraggableLayoutItems within a GridBagLayout Constructor An object which implements IGridBagLayoutDragManager. The IGridBagLayoutManager is used to provide information to the DragStrategy about what is being dragged and the other items in the layout. Constructor An object which implements IGridBagLayoutDragManager. The IGridBagLayoutManager is used to provide information to the DragStrategy about what is being dragged and the other items in the layout. Determines whether the Drag Strategy will show DragIndicators. When false, no DragIndicators will be shown. Called by the control to begin the Drag of a header for the purposes of repositioning it. A UIElement that will be rendered onto the dragIndicator. The offset of the mouse into the drag Element. This will be used to position the Drag Control relative to the mouse. This method is not used to being a Span Resize. Use DragSpanStart, instead. True if a drag opeation was successfully started. False if it failed. Called when the drag operation begins. An array of UIElements that will be rendered onto the dragIndicator. The offset of the mouse into the drag Element. This will be used to position the Drag Control relative to the mouse. This method is not used to being a Span Resize. Use DragSpanStart, instead. True if a drag opeation was successfully started. False if it failed. Called when the drag operation begins. An array of UIElements that will be rendered onto the dragIndicator. The offset of the mouse into the drag Element. This will be used to position the Drag Control relative to the mouse. The opacity of the drag indicator. The settings used to customized the display of the drop indicator This method is not used to being a Span Resize. Use DragSpanStart, instead. True if a drag opeation was successfully started. False if it failed. Called when the drag operation begins. An array of UIElements that will be rendered onto the dragIndicator. The offset of the mouse into the drag Element. This will be used to position the Drag Control relative to the mouse. The opacity of the drag indicator. This method is not used to being a Span Resize. Use DragSpanStart, instead. True if a drag opeation was successfully started. False if it failed. Called whenever a DragMove takes place on the source control The current drag position relative to the Control. Called when the Drag ends The where the drag ended, in client coordinates. Returns true if anything in the layout has changed. Hides the DragIndicator. This lets the control explicity hide the indicator. This is useful if, for example, the control wants to handle the dragging differently over certain parts of itself. Hides the DropIndicator. This lets the control explicity hide the indicator. This is useful if, for example, the control wants to handle the dragging differently over certain parts of itself. Called to begin a Span Resize drag Indicates whether the span resizing is a horizontal resize (true) or a vertical resize (false). Indicates whether the headers are separate from the cells (true) or inline with the cells (false). Indicates whether a header is being span resized (true) or a cell (false). Indicates whether the band is in CardView mode. Indicates whether the label is on the left/right side of the cell (true) or if it is on the top/bottm (false). Note that this is only significant when areColumnHeadersInSeparateArea is false. Returns true if the span drag operation started. False if it did not. Called to begin a Span Resize drag Indicates whether the span resizing is a horizontal resize (true) or a vertical resize (false). Indicates whether the headers are separate from the cells (true) or inline with the cells (false). Indicates whether a header is being span resized (true) or a cell (false). Indicates whether the band is in CardView mode. Indicates whether the label is on the left/right side of the cell (true) or if it is on the top/bottm (false). Note that this is only significant when areColumnHeadersInSeparateArea is false. Indicates whether the item being dragged is a group. Returns true if the span drag operation started. False if it did not. Called to begin a Span Resize drag Indicates whether the span resizing is a horizontal resize (true) or a vertical resize (false). Indicates whether the headers are separate from the cells (true) or inline with the cells (false). Indicates whether a header is being span resized (true) or a cell (false). Indicates whether the band is in CardView mode. Indicates whether the label is on the left/right side of the cell (true) or if it is on the top/bottm (false). Note that this is only significant when areColumnHeadersInSeparateArea is false. Indicates whether the item being dragged is a group. The color of the drop rectangle Returns true if the span drag operation started. False if it did not. Called when the mouse moves during a Span Resize drag The current position of the mouse in control coords. The UIElement being span resized. The ILayoutItem representing the header element. This may be the item being dragged or it may be the associated header if the item being dragged is a cell. If the item being dragged is a cell and the headers are not with the cells, this is not used and may be null. The ILayoutItem representing the cell element. This may be the item being dragged or it may be the associated cell if the item being dragged is a header. If the item being dragged is a header and the headers are not with the cells, this is not used and may be null. Called when a DragSpan operation ends. The current position of the mouse in control coords. The UIElement being span resized. The ILayoutItem representing the header element. This may be the item being dragged or it may be the associated header if the item being dragged is a cell. If the item being dragged is a cell and the headers are not with the cells, this is not used and may be null. The ILayoutItem representing the cell element. This may be the item being dragged or it may be the associated cell if the item being dragged is a header. If the item being dragged is a header and the headers are not with the cells, this is not used and may be null. For Infragistics internal use only. Returns a GridBagConstraint instance containing the originX, originY, spanX, and spanY that define the grid-bag coordinates that the item being dragged will occupy if dropped at passed in point p which is relative to the upper left corner of the row element. It returns null if the area underneath p is not empty or cannot accomodate the item being dragged. A GridBagLayoutItemDimensionsCollection The item being dragged. A point in control coords. The GridBagConstraint of the area at the specified point. For Internal Use Only. Shifts all the items to the right and below as necessary to ensure that the layoutItem doesn't overlap with any layoutItems to the right or below it. The LayoutItem being span resized An array of all the layout items in the layout A hashtable where the keys are the visible ILayoutItems and the values are the GridBagConstraint objects. Whether items should be shifted to the right. Whether items shoudl be shifted below. Whether items should be positioned below as the first action. For Internal Use Only For Infragistics internal use only. For Internal Use Only. Removes any columns and rows from the grid-bag that do not have any items. In other words, if there isn't any item that is on or goes through a row or a column, then the originX's and originY's of the items will be adjusted to get rid of such a column or a row. For internal use only. For Infragistics internal use only. Gridbag layout manager can have columns and rows (logical) with 0 width or height. This method distributes items' widths and heights among 0 pixel columns and rows by taking some away from non-zero columns or rows and assigning it to the 0 pixel columns or rows. It does this without effecting the layout in any way. So there still may be 0 pixel columns and rows once this method is done because those columns and rows could not be changed without effecting the layout. Returns true if the new layout violates any of the restrictions imposed by GetAllowMovingResolved. Returns true if the new layout violates any of the restrictions imposed by GetAllowMovingResolved. Returns true if the new layout has any changes from the original layout. Determines the drop rect when the item is dropped inside the containing element, but the exist layout area. Clean up any resources Returns a bounding Rectangle that encompasses all the UIElements in the array. An array of UIElements A rectangle containing all of the UIElements in the array. Returns the GridBagLayoutDragManager which was passed in to the constructor. Indicates whether to show the drag effect arrows on the left, top, right or bottom of the drag elem rect. Left Top Right Bottom Options for allowing the user to move columns in a GridBagLayout Default Do not allow moving items in the Layout Items in the layout can be moved without Restriction Only allow items in the layout to have their OriginX changed. This means an item is restricted to the same logical column. Only allow items in the layout to have their OriginY changed. This means an item is restricted to the same logical row. Options for allowing the user to span resize items in a GridBagLayout Default No span resizing is allowed The user can resize the span of items in the layout without restriction (both X and Y). The user can span resize items in the layout by chaning the spanX only. The user can span resize items in the layout by chaning the spanY only. An object that contains a group of ILayoutItems Returns the visible items within the group. Does not include the group header. Returns the resolved GridBagConstraints for the items in the header. Returns an ILayoutItem representing the group. Converts a client origin relative to the group into an absolute origin. Converts an absolute origin into a client origin relative to the group. Returns the label span size of the group. A LayoutItem that may be contained within an ILayoutGroup Returns the group into which an item will be dropped relative to this element. This methods takes a DropLocation and determines what group an item dropped at that location should be dropped into. If the item is a content, then the group is the parent group of that content. If the item is a group header, then the item may be dropped inside the group or into it's parent, depending on the DropLocation relative to the position of the header. For example, if the group header is on top, dropping an item on the bottom of the header should place that item inside the group while dropping the item to the left, right, or top of the header should place the item as a sibling of the group. Returns the group associated with this LayoutItem, or null, if the layoutitem does not represent a group. The ILayoutGroup which contains this ILayoutChildItem, or null if it is not contained in a group. Enumeration of Property identifiers for the Check Editor. Left margin property. Top margin property. Right margin property. Bottom margin property. Store margin information. Constructor Constructor Default left margin Default top margin Default right margin Default bottom margin Allow negative margin values Constructor used for de-serialization Returns whether the Left property should be serialized. True if the property has been set to a non-default value. Resets Left to its default value. Returns whether the Top property should be serialized. True if the property has been set to a non-default value. Resets Top to its default value. Returns whether the Right property should be serialized. True if the property has been set to a non-default value. Resets Right to its default value. Returns whether the Bottom property should be serialized. True if the property has been set to a non-default value. Resets Bottom to its default value. Adjusts the specified rectangle using the current Margins settings. The rectangle to be adjusted. If true, adds the margin values to the rectangle's dimensions. Otherwise, subtracts the margin values. A new rectangle with adjusted dimensions. Returns a clone of this object. A new Margins object with the same values. Resets the members to their default values. Returns whether the object should be serialized. True if the object should be serialized Returns a string representation of the object. A string containing the key and display style. Used to determine if the specified object is the same as this instance. Object to compare against. True if the values for the objects are the same. Returns the hashcode for the Margins object. A hash code for the structure. Returns/sets the left margin value. Returns/sets the top margin value. Returns/sets the right margin value. Returns/sets the bottom margin value. Internal property. This property is used internally as a workaround for a serialization bug in Visual Studio that was introduced in version 1.1. Gets the sum of the and margins. Gets the sum of the and margins. MarginsTypeConverter Returns true This parameter is not used. True. Returns a collection of property descriptors An that provides a format context. An object that specifies the type of array for which to get properties. An array of type System.Attribute that is used as a filter. A with the properties that are exposed for this data type, or null if there are no properties. Returns true if the object can convert to that type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert to. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the object to the requested type. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. A that represents the type you want to convert to. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. Returns true if the object can be converted from the speficied type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert from. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the given object to the type of this converter, using the specified context and culture information. An that provides a format context. The to use as the current culture. The object to convert An object that represents the converted value. base type for all CharacterPosition classes Called when a property has changed on a sub object The providing property change details. Called when the object is disposed of returns true if the specified character c matches the mask The character to check. True if the character matches the mask. Determines the appearance of the displayed characters. Returns true if an appearance object has been created. Returns or sets a value that specifies how MaskMode is used in deciding whether or not to include the character.

When IncludeMethod is set to Always, the display character will always be included except when it is empty, in which case normal processing takes effect. (The mask is examined to determine whether a prompt character ot a pad character should be used.) If this property is set to Never, it will never be included in the text. The default setting (DisplayCharIncludeMethod.Default) is to look at the MaskMode that's being applied to the text and determine which character to use accordingly.

 Indicates if the character position is an editable position, one that user can input a character into. returns the char associated with this character position. If it's an InputPositionBase derivative (character placeholder), it will return the character that the user has input, or 0 if it's empty For LiteralPosition and derivatives, it will return the associated literal character set will only work if IsEditable returns true, otherwise it will throw an exception Class that represents an editable position in the mask edit control Overridden, returns true to indicate that InputPositionBase derivatives are editable character positions. returns the char associated with this character position. If it's an InputPositionBase derivative (character placeholder), it will return the character that the user has input, or 0 if it's empty For LiteralPosition and derivatives, it will return the literal character that will be used in storing the text (if one of the DataMaskModes is to include literals) set will only work if IsEditable returns true, otherwise it will throw an exception returns true if the character passed in as parameter matches the the literal this instance represents returns the char associated with this character position. If it's an InputPositionBase derivative (character placeholder), it will return the character that the user has input, or 0 if it's empty For LiteralPosition and derivatives, it will return the literal character that will be used in storing the text (if one of the DataMaskModes is to include literals) set will only work if IsEditable returns true, otherwise it will throw an exception returns the char associated with this character position. If it's an InputPositionBase derivative (character placeholder), it will return the character that the user has input, or 0 if it's empty For LiteralPosition and derivatives, it will return the literal character that will be used in storing the text (if one of the DataMaskModes is to include literals) set will only work if IsEditable returns true, otherwise it will throw an exception Class for matching digits checks to see if specified character c mathces a digit The character to check. True if the character matches a digit. Class for matching alpha characters [A-Za-z] checks to see if specified character c matches The character to check. True if the specified character is a letter. Class for matching alpha and digits [A-Za-z0-9] checks to see if specified character c matches The character to check. True if the specified character is a match. checks to see if specified character c matches DisplayCharsCollection class Called when a property has changed on a sub object Called when the object is disposed of Copies the display characters of the collection into the array. The array to receive the display characters. The array index to begin inserting the display characters. Overridden method to return optimum initial capacity for DisplayCharsCollection Overridden method returns true to indicate that the collection is read only Indexer Returns the number of items in the collection. DisplayCharUIElement class Constructor, initializes a new instance of the DisplayCharUIElement class. The parent . The associated . Initialize the appearance structure for this element The appearance structure to initialize. The properties that are needed overridden. does nothing overridden. does nothing since background drawing is done in SectionUIElement overridden method for drawing the char The used to provide rendering information. returns the associated DisplayChar instance Returns the ui role for the element. EditAreaUIElement Initializes a new EditAreaUIElement Parent element Creates the child elements for the grid override initappearance The appearance structure to initialize. The properties that are needed overridden. does nothing overridden. does nothing overridden method that returns UIElementBorderStyle.None since EditAreaUIElement does not draw any borders. Overridden OnPopup method. Type converter for displaying standard masks. Constructor. Overridden. This implementation always returns true. This parameter is not used. True. Overridden. An that provides a format context that can be used to extract additional information about the environment from which this converter is invoked. This parameter or properties of this parameter can be null. A that holds a standard set of valid values, or null if the data type does not support a standard set of values. UITypeEditor for MaskInput property. Invoked when the listbox used to display the enum values is created. The to initialize. Returns the set of items to show on the list. An that can be used to gain additional context information. An that this editor can use to obtain services. The object to edit. The current entry in the list. An array of objects containing the list items. Validates an item selected by the user on the list and returns it. An that can be used to gain additional context information. An that this editor can use to obtain services. The object to edit. The currently selected object. The object. TypeConverter class for character properties. Constructor. Converts the given object to the type of this converter, using the specified context and culture information. An that provides a format context. The to use as the current culture. The object to convert An object that represents the converted value. EmbeddableUIElementBase implementation for EditorWithMask editor. Constructor The parent element. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditorOwner interface. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditor interface. Context information used by the owner to identify the value. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. Returns an object of requested type that relates to the element or null. The requested type or null to pick up default context object. If true will walk up the parent chain looking for the context. An object of the requested type, or null if nothing could be found. Overridden method. Initialzes the appearance used by this element. The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. Creates the child elements A virtual method that gets called before the element draw process starts. This is for notification purposes, the default implementation does nothing. Overridden. The used to provide rendering information. Called on a double click. Called when the mouse down message is received over the element. Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Called when the mouse enters this element Called when the mouse leaves this element Renders the backcolor for the element The used to provide rendering information. Default background picture drawing The used to provide rendering information. Handles the rendering of the element using the system themes. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element was able to successfully render with the system theme. Used to determine whether the remaining draw methods are invoked. Returns null if not in edit mode. Returns whether the data this element displays is fully visible. Returns true if this element needs to draw a focus rect. This should be overridden since the default implementation always returns false. Even if this property returns true the focus will not be drawn unless the control has focus. Overridden property that returns the border style this ui element is going to have. Scroll buttons for the spin button uielement. Constructor Parent UIElement Direction of the scroll arrow. Delay before initiating auto repeat. Delay before first click. Overridden. Resolves appropriate appearance data for this ui element. Called when the mouse down message is received over the element. Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Called when the mouse is released over an element Mouse event arguments Returning true will ignore the next click event Overrides ButtonUIElementBase OnControlFocus control to give focus to Overridden. Draws the button borders The used to provide rendering information. Overrides the rendering of the dropdown button arrow. The used to provide rendering information. Since the actual button style is flat when the display style is Office2000 or OfficeXP, we need to override this so the arrow indicator shifts when it is clicked Handles the rendering of the element using the system themes. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element was able to successfully render with the system theme. Used to determine whether the remaining draw methods are invoked. Determines the style of the spin buttons. Returns the direction of the scroll spin button. Indicates if the scroll arrow should be limited to the system's scroll arrow size. Returns the ui role for the element. Indicates if the button style requires invalidation of the element on the mouse enter and exit. Constructor Parent UIElement Used to determine whether a spin button should be disabled during a spin operation and when the elements are positioned. Direction of the spin button. A boolean indicating whether the button should be enabled or disabled. Handles the creation and positioning of the child elements. Determines the button style of the spin buttons. Overridden. Returns the border style. Returns the ui role for the element. This enumerates each property The appearance property id The Appearances property id DisplayChar property id DisplayChars collection property id Section property id Sections collection property id PadChar property id PromptChar property id AutoSize property id InsertMode property id InputMask property id Nullable property id SelectedTextBackColor property id SelectedTextForeColor property id BorderStyle property id ClipMode property id DataMode property id DisplayMode property id EditAs property id Padding property id Text property id Value property id SelectedText property id SelectionStart property id SelectionLengh property id MaskLiteralsAppearance property id PromptCharacterAppearance property id SpinButtonDisplayStyle property id SpinButtonStyle property id DisplayStyle property id MaxValue property MinValue property ReadOnly property NullText property ImageTransparentColor property TabNavigation SpinWrap AllowShiftingAcrossSections UltraMaskedEdit's FormatString property. UltraMaskedEdit's SelectAllBehavior property. SpinIncrement property This enumeration is used to specify the value for DisplayChar.IncludeMethod property. It dictates how a value of a DisplayChar is included when applying mask to get the text. Default is to look at the mask mode in deciding whether to include or not. Always include the DisplayChar Never include the DisplayChar used to specify whether a section is right-to-left ( number sections ) or left-to-right edit for regular sections usually used for number sections Used to specify the type of converting is to be done on an input character Unchanged, character will be unchanged character will be converted to lower case character will be converted to upper case specifies the mode to be applied when getting text from the masked edit control (Default) Raw Data Mode. Only significant characters will be returned. Any prompt characters or literals will be excluded from the text. Include Literal Characters. Data and literal characters will be returned. Prompt characters will be omitted. Include Prompt Characters. Data and prompt characters will be returned. Literals will be omitted. Include both Prompt Characters and Literals. Text will be returned exactly as it appears in the object when a cell is in edit mode. Data, prompt character and literals will all be included. Include Literals With Padding. Prompt characters will be converted into pad characters (by default they are spaces, which are then included with literals and data when text is returned. No sign support in the section, so the section will always contain positive numbers. Sign will only be displayed when the value is negative. Sign will always be displayed (+ when positive, - when negative). Determines the behavior of the tab key in masked editors. This only applies to masked editor controls where there are number sections defined. Tab to the next control Tab to the next section or to the next control if focus is in the last section. Used for specifying EditorWithMask's property. Select all characters. Select entered characters, including intervening empty characters and adjacent literals. Enum used for specifying EditorWithMask's property. Do not auto-fill. Auto-fill year. Auto-fill month and year. InvalidOperationEventArgs class for firing InvalidOperation event. You can prevent the default behaviour of MaskedEdit control which is to beep by setting the Beep property to false. gets the message associated with an illegal operation user was trying to perform you can set this property to false to prevent the masked edit from beeping. InvalidCharEventArgs class for firing InvalidChar event. You can prevent the default behaviour of MaskedEdit control which is to beep by setting the Beep property to false. gets the invalid char that the user attempted to input gets the display char instance associated with the illegal char input you can set this property to false to prevent the masked edit from beeping. If the current culture requires a non-standard mask for dates (such as in Japan) then this method inserts a '/' character after the last date section in the input mask. This allows the analyze method to successfully insert the special postfix character after that last date section. A reference to the input mask to be analyzed and modified, if appropriate. Enumerates the possible actions that can be performed on the masked edit control move to next character move to prev character move the caret to the beginning of the text move the caret to the end of the text move to next section move to prev section delete operation when delete key is pressed backspace operation when delete key is pressed Copy action Cut action Paste action toggle the insertion mode set's the position of pivot to current caret position Selects the current section. If there is some text already selected, it will deselect it and then select the current section. action associated with up arrow key action associated with down arrow key go to next control go to prev control Bit flags that describe the state of the control. caret is positioned right before a display char the caret is positioned right before the first display char the caret is positioned right before the last display char the caret is in the first section the caret is in the last section the caret is positioned right before the first character in a section the caret is positioned right before the last character in a section the caret is positioned after the last display character some text is selected Mask has not been initialized, and thus no sections or display chars collection exists the caret is in the first edit section the caret is in the last edit section State where the editor is not in edit mode. State where the editor permits tabbing by sections based on the TabNavigation proeprty. Next edit section is a fraction part. Key/Action mapping object for UltraGrid. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the KeyActionMapping class. KeyCode to map Action code to map to the KeyCode These are bit flags that specify the state that the control MUST NOT be in for this mapping to be active. If the current state of the control has any of these bits turned on this mapping will be ignored. These are bit flags that specify the state that the control MUST be in for this mapping to be active. In a derived class this property should be hidden by one that returns an appropriate flagged enum. The special keys that are NOT allowed. If shift, ctrl or alt are pressed and their corresponding bit is turned on in this property the mapping will be ignored. These keys (any combination of shift/control/alt) MUST be pressed. Otherwise, this mapping will be ignored. Gets/sets the action code. Gets/sets the disallowed state. These are bit flags that specify the state that the control MUST NOT be in for this mapping to be active. If the current state of the control has any of these bits turned on this mapping will be ignored. Gets/sets the required state. These are bit flags that specify the state that the control MUST be in for this mapping to be active. Summary description for KeyActionMappings. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the KeyActionMappings class. Called the first time GetActionMapping is called (enables lazy loading of mappings) Copies the items of the collection into the array. The array to receive the items. The array index to begin inserting the items. Creates an instance of an ActionStateMappingsCollection derived class A . indexer The main element for an editing area for the masked edit. Initializes a new MaskedEditUIElement Parent element Initialize the appearance structure for this element The appearance structure to initialize. The properties that are needed Creates the child elements for the grid Default background picture drawing The used to provide rendering information. overridden method for drawing the foreground of masked edit ui element. The used to provide rendering information. overridden method for drawing the foreground of masked edit ui element. The used to provide rendering information. Called when the mouse down message is received over the element. Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Called on a double click. It selects all the characters. Specifies whether the click occured over an adjustable area of the element. Called on a mouse move message Mouse event arguments Called when the mouse up message is received over the element. Mouse event arguments True if the event has been handled. Called when mouse capture has been aborted, for example, when the 'escape' key is pressed during a drag operation. Overrides the BorderStyle to return the BorderStyle from the UIElement overridden method that returns true to indicate that the children are to be clipped Overridden method. Returns the clip rectangle for all it's child ui elements. Overrides the Cursor to return the cursor from the UIElement overridden method that properly disposes of allocated resources Returns true if in edit mode and the associated control is focused. Returns true if in edit mode. Returns masking information. This is only of ibterest to a editor that supports masking. The context that was passed into the method. The string used for masking the value or null if there is no mask. Determines whether literals and prompt characters are included in Value property of the Editor. Determines whether literals and prompt characters are displayed when not in edit mode. Determines whether literals and prompt characters are included when the editor copyies text to the clipboard. True only if masking info is available. The default implementation returns false. Returns information needed to format a string. The context that was passed into the method. Returns the format string or null. Returns the IFormatProvider or null. The default implementation returns null (Nothing in VB) This member supports the Editor infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code. This member supports the Editor infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code. Returns the data type. The context that was passed into the method. The default implementation returns type of string. Returns the embeddable uielement associated with a particular object or null if none is available. Context used to identify the object to reference The embeddable uielement representing the specified owner context. This member supports the Editor infrastructure and is not intended to be used directly from your code. Class for applying a mask to a string without having to create a masked edit control Contructor, initializes a new instance of the ParsedMask class. Parsing of mask will be based on the settings on the maskedEdit. Contructor, initializes a new instance of the ParsedMask class. Parsing of mask will be based on the settings on the maskedEdit. CultureInfo settings to use to determine decimal seperator and comma chars. Applies the mask to str and returns the new string String to be masked The . Prompt characters Padding characters Masked string Applies the mask to str and returns the new string String to be masked The . Prompt characters Padding characters Returns number of chars that matched mask. Masked string Mask that this parsed mask object was created from abstract base class for all the different kinds of sections checks if str is a valid string for this section. Either returns str itself or returns a modified string that is to be displayed. Returns null to indicate that validation failed The string to check. True if the string is valid for this section. Returns the text for this section. The text for this section. Called when a property has changed on a sub object Called when the object is disposed of returns the edit sections collection this edit section belongs to returns the display chars collection for this edit section Finds the previous section. Returns the previous literal section, skipping any edit sections. Returns the next section. Returns the previous edit section. Returns the next edit section, skipping any literal sections. Returns the next literal section, skipping any edit sections. Returns the Appearance for this section. Returns true if an appearance object has been created. LiteralSection class constructor overridden method does nothing Validates the string for this section. This method checks to see if the specified string is a valid string for this section. It may modify the specified string in which case the new string will be close to the specified string, but one that matches the section. This method returns False to indicate that validation failed. string to validate True if string is valid, false otherwise base class for any non-literal sections Returns character in DisplayChars collection at index. index of char to display character at position or null if not found. Assigns the text to the section. Call to this method with an invalid text will result in an exception. The value to assign to the editor. Validates the section True if an appropriate value has been input in the section. This method is usually invoked when the input position is being removed from the section. It returns True if an appropriate value has been input in the section. This function may modify the values of display characters. Validates the section. This method is usually invoked when the input position is being removed from the section. It returns True if an appropriate value has been input in the section. This function may modify the values of display characters. Whether the implementation should modify the contents. True if an appropriate value has been input in the section. Returns whether editing is left-to-right or right-to-left. display charsedit section that is based constructor, initializes a new instance of the DisplayCharsEditSection class Assigns the text to the section. Call to this method with an invalid text will result in an exception. Checks if str is a valid string for this section. Either returns itself or returns a modified string that is to be displayed. Returns false to indicate that validation failed string to validate True if valid, false otherwise. checks to see if the so far input chars in the section satisfy the input requirement for the section Whether or not to allow content modification True if valid, false otherwise. indicates whether this section is a right-to-left edit section (number section) or a left-to-right (regular edit sections) a number section Assigns the text to the section. Call to this method with an invalid text will result in an exception. The value to assign to the section. Overridden. Throws an InvalidOperationException exception since this function is invalid for a number section Returns true if string str matches the mask associated with this section string to validate true if valid, false otherwise if the input in this section matches the mask. Whether or not modifications are allowed true if valid, false otherwise Creates display chars associated with this edit section to the passed in displayChars collection. min value for this section max value for this section overridden. returns RightToLeft to indicate that this section is to be edited right-to-left month section part of a date mask constructor, initializes a new instance of the MonthSection class. ValidateString string to validate True if valid, false otherwise ValidateSection Whether or not contents can be modified True if valid, false otherwise Assigns the text to the section. Call to this method with an invalid text will result in an exception. day section part of a date mask constructor, initializes a new instance of the DaySection class. ValidateString string to validate True if valid, false otherwise Assigns the text to the section. Call to this method with an invalid text will result in an exception. ValidateSection Whether or not contents can be modified True if valid, false otherwise year section of a date mask constructor, initializes a new instance of the YearSection class. indicates if year section is 4 digits or 2 digits ValidateSection Whether or not contents can be modified True if valid, false otherwise Assigns the text to the section. Call to this method with an invalid text will result in an exception. The value to assign to the section. hour section of a time mask constructor, initializes a new instance of the HourSection class. ValidateString string to validate True if valid, false otherwise Assigns the text to the section. Call to this method with an invalid text will result in an exception. ValidateSection Whether or not contents can be modified True if valid, false otherwise Class for AP-PM section of a time mask. ValidateSection Whether or not contents can be modified True if valid, false otherwise checks to see if specified character c matches Overridden minute section of a time mask constructor, initializes a new instance of the MinuteSection class. ValidateString string to validate True if valid, false otherwise ValidateSection Whether or not contents can be modified True if valid, false otherwise Assigns the text to the section. Call to this method with an invalid text will result in an exception. The value to assign to the section. second section of a time mask constructor, initializes a new instance of the SecondSection class. ValidateString string to validate True if valid, false otherwise Assigns the text to the section. Call to this method with an invalid text will result in an exception. ValidateSection Whether or not contents can be modified True if valid, false otherwise Edit section implementation for a fraction part. Assigns the text to the section. Call to this method with an invalid text will result in an exception. ValidateSection. Whether or not contents can be modified True if valid, false otherwise ValidateString. string to validate True if valid, false otherwise Returns whether editing is left-to-right or right-to-left. Edit section implementation for a fraction part. ValidateSection. Whether or not contents can be modified True if valid, false otherwise Returns whether editing is left-to-right or right-to-left. sections collection Copies the items of the collection into the array. The array to receive the items. The array index to begin inserting the items. Called when a property has changed on a sub object The providing property change details. Called when the object is disposed of Clones the sections collection. overriden property returns optimum initial capacity for sections collection overridden. indicates that the collection is read only read only indexer SectionUIElement. Used for drawing each section Initializes a new SectionUIElement Parent element Associated SectionBase Default backcolor drawing just does a FillRectangle with the backcolor. overridden. does nothing The used to provide rendering information. Default background picture drawing overridden. does nothing The used to provide rendering information. Creates the child elements for the grid Initialize the appearance structure for this element The appearance structure to initialize. The properties that are needed returns associated EditSection instance overridden method to return appropriated BorderStyle for SectionUIElement overridden method that returns true to indicate that the children are to be clipped SpinIncrementUITypeEditor. TypeEditor used for the SpinIncrement property to allow Int32, Double, Decimal and DateTimeIncrement types. Returns true if the type is supported and should be added to the drodpwn list. The type to check. Abstract base class for and Specifies that there is no known active theme. Fires when the non-themed colors need to be refreshed. AddRemoveHighlight AddRemoveHighlight DockAreaGradientLight DockAreaGradientDark FloatingControlContainerToolbar FloatingToolbarCaption FloatingToolbarCaptionText GrabHandleDarkSquare GrabHandleLightSquare HighlightMouseDownGradientLight HighlightMouseDownGradientDark HighlightNotPressedGradientLight HighlightNotPressedGradientDark HighlightNotPressedTaskPaneNavigationAreaButton HighlightPopupMenuItem HighlightPressedGradientLight HighlightPressedGradientDark HighlightPressedTaskPaneNavigationAreaButton HighlightQuickCustomizeFloating HighlightQuickCustomizeGradientLight HighlightQuickCustomizeGradientDark HighlightTaskPaneScrollButton HighlightTaskPaneScrollButtonBorder MainMenuBarGradientLight MainMenuBarGradientDark MainMenuToolDisabledForecolor MainMenuToolForecolor MainMenuToolHighlightForecolor MainMenuToolHighlightPressedForecolor MenuExpandButtonGradientLight MenuExpandButtonGradientDark MenuIconAreaGradientLight MenuIconAreaGradientDark MenuIconAreaExpandedGradientLight MenuIconAreaExpandedGradientDark MenuItemCheckmark MenuItemCheckmarkHighlight MenuDroppedBackColor OutlookNavPaneBorder OutlookNavPaneCurrentGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneCurrentGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneCurrentGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneHotGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneHotGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneHotGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneHotLabelItemGradientLight OutlookNavPaneHotLabelItemGradientDark OutlookNavPaneHotOverflowButtonGradientLight OutlookNavPaneHotOverflowButtonGradientDark OutlookNavPaneHotSelectedGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneHotSelectedGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneHotSelectedGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneItemAreaBackcolor OutlookNavPaneOverflowButtonBackcolor OutlookNavPanePressedGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPanePressedGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPanePressedGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPanePressedOverflowButtonGradientLight OutlookNavPanePressedOverflowButtonGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSelectedGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneSelectedGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSelectedGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneSelectedOverflowButtonGradientLight OutlookNavPaneSelectedOverflowButtonGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSplitterGradientLight OutlookNavPaneSplitterGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSplitterDarkSquare OutlookNavPaneSplitterLightSquare OutlookNavPaneSplitterMiddleSquare OutlookNavPaneLabelItemGradientLight OutlookNavPaneLabelItemGradientDark OutlookNavPaneItemWithNoImageForeColor PopupMenuBorder PopupMenuToolOpenGradientLight PopupMenuToolOpenGradientDark PopupMenuToolOpenForecolor PressedGradientLight PressedGradientDark QuickCustomizeForecolor QuickCustomizeGradientLight QuickCustomizeGradientDark QuickCustomizeOpenGradientLight QuickCustomizeOpenGradientDark QuickCustomizeOpen SeparatorLight SeparatorDark TaskPaneActiveCaptionLight TaskPaneActiveCaptionDark TaskPaneBorder TaskPaneContentArea TaskPaneNavigationArea TaskPaneNavigationToolSeparatorDark TaskPaneNavigationToolSeparatorLight TaskPaneScrollButton TaskPaneScrollButtonBorder TearawayStrip ToolbarCornerShadowDark ToolbarCornerShadowLight ToolbarCornerShadowMedium ToolbarGradientLight ToolbarGradientDark ToolbarUnderline ToolBorder ToolBorderHighlight ToolBorderMouseDown ToolDisabledForecolor ToolForecolor ToolHighlightForecolor ToolHighlightPressedForecolor ToolTipBorder ToolTipGradientLight ToolTipGradientDark ToolTipForecolor Defines the light shade of the gradient displayed for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button when the button is in the hot tracked state. Defines the dark shade of the gradient displayed for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button when the button is in the hot tracked state. Defines the light shade of the gradient displayed for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button when the button is in the pressed state. Defines the dark shade of the gradient displayed for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button when the button is in the pressed state. Defines the foreground color for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button. Defines the background color for the Outlook Navigation Pane collapsed group area. Defines the background color for the Outlook Navigation Pane collapsed group area when it is in the 'Pressed' state. Defines the background color for the Outlook Navigation Pane collapsed group area when it is in the 'Selected' state. Returns an index corresponding to the current XP theme. Used for indexing into the color arrays for each Office2003 color. Class containing color properties representing the colors used by the Microsoft Office 2003 products. Colors: Returns singleton instance of Office2003ColorTable class AddRemoveHighlight AddRemoveHighlight DockAreaGradientLight DockAreaGradientDark FloatingControlContainerToolbar FloatingToolbarCaption FloatingToolbarCaptionText GrabHandleDarkSquare GrabHandleLightSquare HighlightMouseDownGradientLight HighlightMouseDownGradientDark HighlightNotPressedGradientLight HighlightNotPressedGradientDark HighlightNotPressedTaskPaneNavigationAreaButton HighlightPopupMenuItem HighlightPressedGradientLight HighlightPressedGradientDark HighlightPressedTaskPaneNavigationAreaButton HighlightQuickCustomizeFloating HighlightQuickCustomizeGradientLight HighlightQuickCustomizeGradientDark HighlightTaskPaneScrollButton HighlightTaskPaneScrollButtonBorder MainMenuBarGradientLight MainMenuBarGradientDark MainMenuToolDisabledForecolor MainMenuToolForecolor MainMenuToolHighlightForecolor MainMenuToolHighlightPressedForecolor MenuExpandButtonGradientLight MenuExpandButtonGradientDark MenuIconAreaGradientLight MenuIconAreaGradientDark MenuIconAreaExpandedGradientLight MenuIconAreaExpandedGradientDark MenuItemCheckmark MenuItemCheckmarkHighlight MenuDroppedBackColor OutlookNavPaneBorder OutlookNavPaneCurrentGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneCurrentGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneCurrentGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneHotGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneHotGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneHotGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneHotLabelItemGradientLight OutlookNavPaneHotLabelItemGradientDark OutlookNavPaneHotOverflowButtonGradientLight OutlookNavPaneHotOverflowButtonGradientDark OutlookNavPaneHotSelectedGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneHotSelectedGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneHotSelectedGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneItemAreaBackcolor OutlookNavPaneOverflowButtonBackcolor OutlookNavPanePressedGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPanePressedGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPanePressedGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPanePressedOverflowButtonGradientLight OutlookNavPanePressedOverflowButtonGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSelectedGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneSelectedGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSelectedGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneSelectedOverflowButtonGradientLight OutlookNavPaneSelectedOverflowButtonGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSplitterGradientLight OutlookNavPaneSplitterGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSplitterDarkSquare OutlookNavPaneSplitterLightSquare OutlookNavPaneSplitterMiddleSquare OutlookNavPaneLabelItemGradientLight OutlookNavPaneLabelItemGradientDark OutlookNavPaneItemWithNoImageForeColor PopupMenuBorder PopupMenuToolOpenGradientLight PopupMenuToolOpenGradientDark PopupMenuToolOpenForecolor PressedGradientLight PressedGradientDark QuickCustomizeForecolor QuickCustomizeGradientLight QuickCustomizeGradientDark QuickCustomizeOpenGradientLight QuickCustomizeOpenGradientDark QuickCustomizeOpen SeparatorLight SeparatorDark TaskPaneActiveCaptionLight TaskPaneActiveCaptionDark TaskPaneBorder TaskPaneContentArea TaskPaneNavigationArea TaskPaneNavigationToolSeparatorDark TaskPaneNavigationToolSeparatorLight TaskPaneScrollButton TaskPaneScrollButtonBorder TearawayStrip ToolbarCornerShadowDark ToolbarCornerShadowLight ToolbarCornerShadowMedium ToolbarGradientLight ToolbarGradientDark ToolbarUnderline ToolBorder ToolBorderHighlight ToolBorderMouseDown ToolDisabledForecolor ToolForecolor ToolHighlightForecolor ToolHighlightPressedForecolor ToolTipBorder ToolTipForecolor ToolTipGradientDark ToolTipGradientLight Defines the light shade of the gradient displayed for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button when the button is in the hot tracked state. Defines the dark shade of the gradient displayed for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button when the button is in the hot tracked state. Defines the light shade of the gradient displayed for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button when the button is in the pressed state. Defines the dark shade of the gradient displayed for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button when the button is in the pressed state. Defines the foreground color for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button. Defines the background color for the Outlook Navigation Pane collapsed group area Defines the background color for the Outlook Navigation Pane collapsed group area when it is in the 'Pressed' state. Defines the background color for the Outlook Navigation Pane collapsed group area when it is in the 'Selected' state. Class containing color properties representing the colors used by the Microsoft Office 2007 products. Occurs when the static property has changed. Colors: Returns singleton instance of Office2007ColorTable class Gets or sets the current Office 2007 color scheme. Returns the current resolved Office 2007 color scheme. Returns or sets the color that will be blended with the colors of the selected .

By default, this property is set to Color.Empty or Color.Transparent which indicates that no color should be blended with the colors of the current . When set to a value other than Color.Empty or Color.Transparent, the colors in the color table will be blended with the CustomBlendColor.

 Returns or sets the color that will be blended with the colors of the selected .

By default, this property is set to Color.Empty or Color.Transparent which indicates that no color should be blended with the colors of the current . When set to a value other than Color.Empty or Color.Transparent, the colors in the color table will be blended with the CustomBlendColor.

 AddRemoveHighlight AddRemoveHighlight DockAreaGradientLight DockAreaGradientDark FloatingControlContainerToolbar FloatingToolbarCaption FloatingToolbarCaptionText GrabHandleDarkSquare GrabHandleLightSquare HighlightMouseDownGradientLight HighlightMouseDownGradientDark HighlightNotPressedGradientLight HighlightNotPressedGradientDark HighlightNotPressedTaskPaneNavigationAreaButton HighlightPopupMenuItem HighlightPressedGradientLight HighlightPressedGradientDark HighlightPressedTaskPaneNavigationAreaButton HighlightQuickCustomizeFloating HighlightQuickCustomizeGradientLight HighlightQuickCustomizeGradientDark HighlightTaskPaneScrollButton HighlightTaskPaneScrollButtonBorder MainMenuBarGradientLight MainMenuBarGradientDark MainMenuToolDisabledForecolor MainMenuToolForecolor MainMenuToolHighlightForecolor MainMenuToolHighlightPressedForecolor MenuExpandButtonGradientLight MenuExpandButtonGradientDark MenuIconAreaGradientLight MenuIconAreaGradientDark MenuIconAreaExpandedGradientLight MenuIconAreaExpandedGradientDark MenuItemCheckmark MenuItemCheckmarkHighlight MenuDroppedBackColor OutlookNavPaneBorder OutlookNavPaneCurrentGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneCurrentGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneCurrentGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneHotGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneHotGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneHotGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneHotLabelItemGradientLight OutlookNavPaneHotLabelItemGradientDark OutlookNavPaneHotOverflowButtonGradientLight OutlookNavPaneHotOverflowButtonGradientDark OutlookNavPaneHotSelectedGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneHotSelectedGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneHotSelectedGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneItemAreaBackcolor OutlookNavPaneOverflowButtonBackcolor OutlookNavPanePressedGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPanePressedGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPanePressedGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPanePressedOverflowButtonGradientLight OutlookNavPanePressedOverflowButtonGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSelectedGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneSelectedGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSelectedGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneSelectedOverflowButtonGradientLight OutlookNavPaneSelectedOverflowButtonGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSplitterGradientLight OutlookNavPaneSplitterGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSplitterDarkSquare OutlookNavPaneSplitterLightSquare OutlookNavPaneSplitterMiddleSquare OutlookNavPaneLabelItemGradientLight OutlookNavPaneLabelItemGradientDark OutlookNavPaneItemWithNoImageForeColor PopupMenuBorder PopupMenuToolOpenGradientLight PopupMenuToolOpenGradientDark PopupMenuToolOpenForecolor PressedGradientLight PressedGradientDark QuickCustomizeForecolor QuickCustomizeGradientLight QuickCustomizeGradientDark QuickCustomizeOpenGradientLight QuickCustomizeOpenGradientDark QuickCustomizeOpen SeparatorLight SeparatorDark TaskPaneActiveCaptionLight TaskPaneActiveCaptionDark TaskPaneBorder TaskPaneContentArea TaskPaneNavigationArea TaskPaneNavigationToolSeparatorDark TaskPaneNavigationToolSeparatorLight TaskPaneScrollButton TaskPaneScrollButtonBorder TearawayStrip ToolbarCornerShadowDark ToolbarCornerShadowLight ToolbarCornerShadowMedium ToolbarGradientLight ToolbarGradientDark ToolbarUnderline ToolBorder ToolBorderHighlight ToolBorderMouseDown ToolDisabledForecolor ToolForecolor ToolHighlightForecolor ToolHighlightPressedForecolor ToolTipBorder ToolTipGradientLight ToolTipGradientDark ToolTipForecolor EditorBorder EditorBackColor EditorBackColorDisabled EditorActiveBackColor EditorForeColor EditorForeColorDisabled EditorButtonActiveBorder EditorButtonPressedBorder EditorButtonActiveGradientLight EditorButtonActiveGradientDark EditorButtonGradientLight EditorButtonGradientDark EditorButtonPressedGradientLight EditorButtonPressedGradientDark EditorSpinUpButtonGradientLight EditorSpinUpButtonGradientDark EditorSpinDownButtonGradientLight EditorSpinDownButtonGradientDark EditorDropDownButtonArrow EditorSpinButtonArrow EditorSpinButtonActiveArrow EditorButtonActiveBorderInner EditorButtonPressedBorderInner ButtonBackColor ButtonBorderColor ButtonForeColor ButtonForeColorDisabled ButtonForeColorHighlight ButtonHighlightGradientDark ButtonHighlightGradientLight ButtonHighlightBorderGradientDark ButtonHighlightBorderGradientLight ButtonHighlightBorderInner ButtonHighlightGlow ButtonPressedGradientDark ButtonPressedGradientLight ButtonPressedBorderGradientDark ButtonPressedBorderGradientLight ButtonPressedBorderInner ButtonPressedGlow ButtonCheckedGradientDark ButtonCheckedGradientLight ButtonCheckedBorderGradientDark ButtonCheckedBorderGradientLight ButtonCheckedBorderInner ButtonCheckedGlow ContextMenuImageBorderColor RibbonGroupButtonGradientDark RibbonGroupButtonGradientLight RibbonGroupButtonBorderColor RibbonGroupButtonBorderColor2 RibbonGroupButtonBorderInner RibbonGroupButtonHotTrackedGradientDark RibbonGroupButtonHotTrackedGradientLight RibbonGroupButtonHotTrackedBorderColor RibbonGroupButtonHotTrackedBorderColor2 RibbonGroupButtonHotTrackedBorderInner RibbonGroupButtonPressedGradientDark RibbonGroupButtonPressedGradientLight RibbonGroupButtonPressedBorderColor RibbonGroupButtonPressedBorderColor2 RibbonGroupButtonPressedBorderInner ButtonGroupGradientDark ButtonGroupGradientLight ButtonGroupBorderColor ButtonGroupBorderColor2 ButtonGroupBorderInner ButtonGroupSeparatorDark ButtonGroupSeparatorLight RibbonCaptionButtonHotTrackedGradientDark RibbonCaptionButtonHotTrackedGradientLight RibbonCaptionButtonHotTrackedBorderColor RibbonCaptionButtonHotTrackedBorderColor2 RibbonCaptionButtonHotTrackedBorderInner RibbonCaptionButtonPressedGradientDark RibbonCaptionButtonPressedGradientLight RibbonCaptionButtonPressedBorderColor RibbonCaptionButtonPressedBorderColor2 RibbonCaptionButtonPressedBorderInner PagerButtonPressedBorderColor2 PagerButtonPressedBorderColor PagerButtonPressedGradientLight PagerButtonPressedGradientDark PagerButtonHotTrackedBorderColor2 PagerButtonHotTrackedBorderColor PagerButtonHotTrackedGradientLight PagerButtonHotTrackedGradientDark PagerButtonBorderColor2 PagerButtonBorderColor PagerButtonGradientLight PagerButtonGradientDark PagerButtonPressedBorderInner PagerButtonHotTrackedBorderInner PagerButtonBorderInner ColorBoxBorder ColorBoxHotTrackedBorder1 ColorBoxHotTrackedBorder2 ColorBoxSelectedBorder1 ColorBoxSelectedBorder2 ButtonHighlightCheckedGradientDark ButtonHighlightCheckedGradientLight ButtonHighlightCheckedBorderGradientDark ButtonHighlightCheckedBorderGradientLight ButtonHighlightCheckedBorderInner ButtonHighlightCheckedGlow ScrollBarThumbVerticalBackColor ScrollBarThumbVerticalBackColor2 ScrollBarHighlightBackColor ScrollBarThumbVerticalHighlightBackColor2 ScrollBarThumbVerticalPressedBackColor ScrollBarThumbVerticalPressedBackColor2 ScrollBarTrackVerticalBackColor ScrollBarTrackVerticalBackColor2 ScrollbarThumbBorderColor ScrollbarThumbHotTrackBorderColor ScrollBarThumbHorizontalBackColor ScrollBarThumbHorizontalBackColor2 ScrollBarHighlightBackColor ScrollBarThumbHorizontalHighlightBackColor2 ScrollBarThumbHorizontalPressedBackColor ScrollBarThumbHorizontalPressedBackColor2 ScrollBarTrackHorizontalBackColor ScrollBarTrackHorizontalBackColor2 ScrollBarButtonPressedBorderColor ScrollBarButtonHighlightBorderColor ScrollBarButtonBorderColor ScrollBarTrackSectionGradientDark ScrollBarTrackSectionGradientLight ScrollBarBorderColor ScrollBarButtonForeColor ContextMenuGlyphColor ContextMenuForeColor ContextMenuImageBackColor StatusBarGradientDark StatusBarGradientLight StatusBarForeColor StatusBarBorderColor StatusBarGrabHandleDarkSquare StatusBarGrabHandleLightSquare TabSelectedGradientDark TabSelectedGradientLight TabSelectedInnerBorderColor TabSelectedInnerBorderColorLight TabNonSelectedHotTrackedBorderColor TabBorderColor TabGlowBorderColor TabSelectedForeColor TabNonSelectedForeColor TabNonSelectedHotTrackedBackColor TabNonSelectedHotTrackedBackColor2 TabNonSelectedHotTrackedGlowColor TabHeaderAreaBackColor TabNonSelectedInnerGlowBorderColor TabNonSelectedOuterGlowBorderColorStart TabNonSelectedOuterGlowBorderColorEnd DockManagerCaptionActiveGradientLight DockManagerCaptionActiveGradientDark DockManagerCaptionInactiveGradientLight DockManagerCaptionInactiveGradientDark GroupBoxBorderColorDark GroupBoxBorderColorLight GroupBoxContentAreaGradientDark GroupBoxContentAreaGradientLight GroupBoxHeaderAreaGradientDark GroupBoxHeaderAreaGradientLight GroupBoxHotTrackedHeaderAreaGradientDark GroupBoxHotTrackedHeaderAreaGradientLight RibbonGroupBorderColor RibbonGroupBorderColor2 RibbonGroupHotTrackedBorderColor RibbonGroupHotTrackedBorderColor2 RibbonGroupHotTrackedContentAreaGradientDark RibbonGroupHotTrackedContentAreaGradientLight RibbonTabAreaBackColorGradientDark RibbonTabAreaBackColorGradientLight RibbonTabItemSeparatorLight RibbonTabItemSeparatorDark RibbonCaptionAreaBackColorGradientDark RibbonCaptionAreaBackColorGradientLight RibbonCaptionAreaForeColor RibbonCaptionAreaBottomInnerBorder RibbonCaptionAreaBottomOuterBorder RibbonCaptionAreaInactive RibbonQATBottomBackColorGradientDark RibbonQATBottomBackColorGradientLight RibbonQATTopBackColorGradientDark RibbonQATTopBackColorGradientLight RibbonQATGlyphDark RibbonQATGlyphLight RibbonQATBorderColor RibbonQATLowerBorderColor RibbonQATBottomBorderColor RibbonGroupDialogBoxLauncherOuterBorderColor RibbonGroupDialogBoxLauncherInnerBorderColor ExplorerBarBorderColor DropdownResizeGrabHandleDarkSquare DropdownResizeGrabHandleLightSquare RoundedFormBorderOuter RoundedFormBorderMiddle RoundedFormBorderInner RoundedFormBorderInnermost RoundedFormBorderOuterInactive RoundedFormBorderMiddleInactive RoundedFormBorderInnerInactive RoundedFormBorderInnermostInactive ContextualTabGroupBackColorFirstDefault ContextualTabGroupBackColorSecondDefault ContextualTabGroupBackColorThirdDefault ContextualTabGroupBackColorFourthDefault ContextualTabGroupBackColorFifthDefault ContextualTabGroupBackColorSixthDefault ContextualTabSelectedBorderColor ContextualTabClientAreaGradientDark ContextualTabClientAreaGradientLight ContextualTabGroupCaptionGradientDark ContextualTabGroupCaptionGradientLight ContextualTabGroupCaptionHotTrackGradientDark ContextualTabGroupCaptionHotTrackGradientLight OutlookScrollbarBorderColor OutlookScrollbarButtonHighlightGradientDark OutlookScrollbarButtonHotTrackBorderColor OutlookScrollbarButtonSemiHighlightGradientDark OutlookScrollbarButtonSemiHighlightGradientLight OutlookScrollbarButtonHighlightGradientLight OutlookScrollbarButtonPressedGradientDark OutlookScrollbarButtonPressedGradientLight OutlookScrollbarThumbBorderColor OutlookScrollbarThumbHotTrackBorderColor OutlookScrollbarThumbHorizontalGradientDark OutlookScrollbarThumbHorizontalGradientLight OutlookScrollbarThumbHorizontalHotTrackGradientDark OutlookScrollbarThumbHorizontalHotTrackGradientLight OutlookScrollbarThumbHorizontalPressedGradientDark OutlookScrollbarThumbHorizontalPressedGradientLight OutlookScrollbarTrackGradientDark OutlookScrollbarTrackGradientLight OutlookScrollbarTrackPressedGradientDark OutlookScrollbarTrackPressedGradientLight OutlookScrollbarThumbVerticalGradientDark OutlookScrollbarThumbVerticalGradientLight OutlookScrollbarThumbVerticalHotTrackGradientDark OutlookScrollbarThumbVerticalHotTrackGradientLight OutlookScrollbarThumbVerticalPressedGradientDark OutlookScrollbarThumbVerticalPressedGradientLight OutlookScrollbarButtonForeColor Defines the light shade of the gradient displayed for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button when the button is in the hot tracked state. Defines the dark shade of the gradient displayed for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button when the button is in the hot tracked state. Defines the light shade of the gradient displayed for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button when the button is in the pressed state. Defines the dark shade of the gradient displayed for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button when the button is in the pressed state. Defines the foreground color for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button. Defines the background color for the Outlook Navigation Pane collapsed group area Defines the background color for the Outlook Navigation Pane collapsed group area when it is in the 'Pressed' state. Defines the background color for the Outlook Navigation Pane collapsed group area when it is in the 'Selected' state. MenuHeaderBackColor MenuItemForeColor PopupGalleryItemHotTrackedGradientDark PopupGalleryItemHotTrackedGradientLight PopupGalleryItemHotTrackedBorderColor PopupGalleryItemHotTrackedSelectedGradientDark PopupGalleryItemHotTrackedSelectedGradientLight PopupGalleryItemPressedGradientDark PopupGalleryItemPressedGradientLight PopupGalleryItemSelectedGradientDark PopupGalleryItemSelectedGradientLight PopupGalleryItemImageHighlightBackColor PopupGalleryItemImageHighlightBorderColor PopupGalleryGroupHeaderBackColor PopupGalleryGroupHeaderBorderColor PopupGalleryGroupHeaderBorderColor2 PopupGalleryGroupHeaderForeColor PopupGalleryGroupAreaBackColor PopupGalleryPreviewBorderColor PopupGalleryControlBorderColor PopupGalleryPreviewItemAreaBackColor PopupGalleryFilterBarBackColor PopupGalleryFilterBarBorderColor PopupGalleryFilterBarForeColor PopupGalleryFilterBarHotTrackedForeColor PopupGalleryResizeHandleGradientLight PopupGalleryResizeHandleGradientDark PopupGalleryResizeHandleBorderColor PopupGalleryPreviewItemAreaHotTrackedBackColor PopupGalleryItemForeColor GalleryPreviewButtonBorderColor GalleryPreviewButtonBorderColor2 GalleryPreviewButtonForeColor GalleryPreviewButtonForeColor2 GalleryPreviewButtonGradientDark GalleryPreviewButtonGradientLight GalleryPreviewButtonInnerGradientDark GalleryPreviewButtonInnerGradientLight GalleryPreviewButtonDisabledBorderColor GalleryPreviewButtonDisabledBorderColor2 GalleryPreviewButtonDisabledForeColor GalleryPreviewButtonDisabledForeColor2 GalleryPreviewButtonDisabledGradientDark GalleryPreviewButtonDisabledGradientLight GalleryPreviewButtonDisabledInnerGradientDark GalleryPreviewButtonDisabledInnerGradientLight GalleryPreviewButtonHotTrackedBorderColor GalleryPreviewButtonHotTrackedBorderColor2 GalleryPreviewButtonHotTrackedForeColor GalleryPreviewButtonHotTrackedForeColor2 GalleryPreviewButtonHotTrackedGradientDark GalleryPreviewButtonHotTrackedGradientLight GalleryPreviewButtonHotTrackedInnerGradientDark GalleryPreviewButtonHotTrackedInnerGradientLight GalleryPreviewButtonPressedBorderColor GalleryPreviewButtonPressedBorderColor2 GalleryPreviewButtonPressedForeColor GalleryPreviewButtonPressedForeColor2 GalleryPreviewButtonPressedGradientDark GalleryPreviewButtonPressedGradientLight GalleryPreviewButtonPressedInnerGradientDark GalleryPreviewButtonPressedInnerGradientLight ApplicationMenuBorderColor ApplicationMenuBorderColor2 ApplicationMenuFooterGradientDark ApplicationMenuFooterGradientLight ApplicationMenuFooterToolGradientDark ApplicationMenuFooterToolGradientLight ApplicationMenuHeaderGradientDark ApplicationMenuHeaderGradientLight ApplicationMenuMainAreaBorderColor ApplicationMenuMainAreaBorderColor2 ApplicationMenuMainAreaLeftBackColor ApplicationMenuMainAreaRightBackColor ApplicationMenuSideStripGradientDark ApplicationMenuSideStripGradientLight PopupRibbonGroupButtonGradientDark PopupRibbonGroupButtonGradientLight PopupRibbonGroupButtonBorderColor PopupRibbonGroupButtonBorderColor2 PopupRibbonGroupButtonHotTrackedGradientDark PopupRibbonGroupButtonHotTrackedGradientLight PopupRibbonGroupButtonHotTrackedBorderColor PopupRibbonGroupButtonHotTrackedBorderColor2 PopupRibbonGroupButtonPressedGradientDark PopupRibbonGroupButtonPressedGradientLight PopupRibbonGroupButtonPressedBorderColor PopupRibbonGroupButtonPressedBorderColor2 PopupMenuScrollItemGradientDark PopupMenuScrollItemGradientLight PopupMenuScrollItemBorder PopupMenuScrollItemHotTrackedGradientDark PopupMenuScrollItemHotTrackedGradientLight PopupMenuScrollItemHotTrackedBorder MiniToolbarBackColor MiniToolbarBorderColor PopupMenuSegmentedBorderLight PopupMenuSegmentedBorderDark Color of the border displayed by the desktop alert window. Dark shade of the gradient displayed in the background of the desktop alert window. Light shade of the gradient displayed in the background of the desktop alert window. Dark shade of the gradient displayed in the background of the grip area of the desktop alert window. Light shade of the gradient displayed in the background of the grip area of the desktop alert window. The color to use when rendering the top portion of the track. The color to use when rendering the bottom portion of the track. The dark color in the gradient drawn on a TrackBar. The light color in the gradient drawn on a TrackBar. Gets the color used for the main portion of the midpoint tickmark. Gets the color used for the shadowed portion of the midpoint tickmark. Class containing common colors shared between Visual Studio 2005 and Visual Studio 2008. AddRemoveHighlight AddRemoveHighlight DockAreaGradientLight DockAreaGradientDark FloatingControlContainerToolbar FloatingToolbarCaption FloatingToolbarCaptionText GrabHandleDarkSquare GrabHandleLightSquare HighlightMouseDownGradientLight HighlightMouseDownGradientDark HighlightNotPressedGradientLight HighlightNotPressedGradientDark HighlightPressedTaskPaneNavigationAreaButton HighlightPopupMenuItem HighlightPressedGradientLight HighlightPressedGradientDark HighlightNotPressedTaskPaneNavigationAreaButton HighlightQuickCustomizeFloating HighlightQuickCustomizeGradientLight HighlightQuickCustomizeGradientDark HighlightTaskPaneScrollButton HighlightTaskPaneScrollButtonBorder MainMenuBarGradientLight MainMenuBarGradientDark MainMenuToolDisabledForecolor MainMenuToolForecolor MainMenuToolHighlightForecolor MainMenuToolHighlightPressedForecolor MenuExpandButtonGradientLight MenuExpandButtonGradientDark MenuIconAreaGradientLight MenuIconAreaGradientDark MenuIconAreaExpandedGradientLight MenuIconAreaExpandedGradientDark MenuItemCheckmark MenuItemCheckmarkHighlight MenuDroppedBackColor OutlookNavPaneBorder OutlookNavPaneCurrentGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneCurrentGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneCurrentGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneHotGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneHotGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneHotGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneHotLabelItemGradientLight OutlookNavPaneHotLabelItemGradientDark OutlookNavPaneHotOverflowButtonGradientLight OutlookNavPaneHotOverflowButtonGradientDark OutlookNavPaneHotSelectedGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneHotSelectedGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneHotSelectedGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneItemAreaBackcolor OutlookNavPaneOverflowButtonBackcolor OutlookNavPanePressedGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPanePressedGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPanePressedGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPanePressedOverflowButtonGradientLight OutlookNavPanePressedOverflowButtonGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSelectedGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneSelectedGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSelectedGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneSelectedOverflowButtonGradientLight OutlookNavPaneSelectedOverflowButtonGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSplitterGradientLight OutlookNavPaneSplitterGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSplitterDarkSquare OutlookNavPaneSplitterLightSquare OutlookNavPaneSplitterMiddleSquare OutlookNavPaneLabelItemGradientLight OutlookNavPaneLabelItemGradientDark OutlookNavPaneItemWithNoImageForeColor PopupMenuBorder PopupMenuToolOpenGradientLight PopupMenuToolOpenGradientDark PopupMenuToolOpenForecolor PressedGradientLight PressedGradientDark QuickCustomizeForecolor QuickCustomizeGradientLight QuickCustomizeGradientDark QuickCustomizeOpenGradientLight QuickCustomizeOpenGradientDark QuickCustomizeOpen SeparatorLight SeparatorDark TaskPaneActiveCaptionLight TaskPaneActiveCaptionDark TaskPaneBorder TaskPaneContentArea TaskPaneNavigationArea TaskPaneNavigationToolSeparatorDark TaskPaneNavigationToolSeparatorLight TaskPaneScrollButton TaskPaneScrollButtonBorder TearawayStrip ToolbarCornerShadowDark ToolbarCornerShadowLight ToolbarCornerShadowMedium ToolbarGradientLight ToolbarGradientDark ToolbarUnderline ToolBorder ToolBorderHighlight ToolBorderMouseDown ToolDisabledForecolor ToolForecolor ToolHighlightForecolor ToolHighlightPressedForecolor ToolTipBorder ToolTipForecolor ToolTipGradientDark ToolTipGradientLight Defines the light shade of the gradient displayed for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button when the button is in the hot tracked state. Defines the dark shade of the gradient displayed for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button when the button is in the hot tracked state. Defines the light shade of the gradient displayed for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button when the button is in the pressed state. Defines the dark shade of the gradient displayed for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button when the button is in the pressed state. Defines the foreground color for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button. Defines the background color for the Outlook Navigation Pane collapsed group area Defines the background color for the Outlook Navigation Pane collapsed group area when it is in the 'Pressed' state. Defines the background color for the Outlook Navigation Pane collapsed group area when it is in the 'Selected' state. ToolboxGroupHeaderGradientDark ToolboxGroupHeaderGradientLight ToolboxItemAreaGradientDark ToolboxItemAreaGradientLight ToolboxItemCheckedBackColor ToolboxItemHotTrackingBackColor ToolboxItemHotTrackingAndCheckedBackColor ToolboxItemBorderColor DockManagerCaptionActiveGradientDark DockManagerCaptionActiveGradientLight DockManagerCaptionInactiveGradientDark DockManagerCaptionInactiveGradientLight DockManagerCaptionTextActive DockManagerCaptionTextInactive DockManagerTabAreaGradientDark DockManagerTabAreaGradientLight DockManagerTabBorder DockManagerTabGradientDark DockManagerTabGradientLight TabGradientLight TabGradientDark TabBorderColor TabSelectedBorderColor The lighter color in the gradient for VisualStudio2005 dropdown buttons. The darker color in the gradient for VisualStudio2005 dropdown buttons. Class containing color properties representing the colors used by Visual Studio 2005. Colors: Returns singleton instance of VisualStudio2005ColorTable class Class containing color properties representing the colors used by Microsoft Windows Vista. Occurs when the static property has changed. Gets or sets the current Windows Vista color scheme. Colors: Returns singleton instance of WindowsVistaColorTable class AddRemoveHighlight AddRemoveHighlight DockAreaGradientLight DockAreaGradientDark FloatingControlContainerToolbar FloatingToolbarCaption FloatingToolbarCaptionText GrabHandleDarkSquare GrabHandleLightSquare HighlightMouseDownGradientLight (Not used for WindowsVista style) HighlightMouseDownGradientDark (Not used for WindowsVista style) HighlightNotPressedGradientLight HighlightNotPressedGradientDark HighlightNotPressedTaskPaneNavigationAreaButton HighlightPopupMenuItem HighlightPressedGradientLight HighlightPressedGradientDark HighlightPressedTaskPaneNavigationAreaButton HighlightQuickCustomizeFloating HighlightQuickCustomizeGradientLight HighlightQuickCustomizeGradientDark HighlightTaskPaneScrollButton HighlightTaskPaneScrollButtonBorder MainMenuBarGradientLight MainMenuBarGradientDark MainMenuToolDisabledForecolor MainMenuToolForecolor MainMenuToolHighlightForecolor MainMenuToolHighlightPressedForecolor MenuExpandButtonGradientLight MenuExpandButtonGradientDark MenuIconAreaGradientLight MenuIconAreaGradientDark MenuIconAreaExpandedGradientLight MenuIconAreaExpandedGradientDark MenuItemCheckmark MenuItemCheckmarkHighlight MenuDroppedBackColor OutlookNavPaneBorder OutlookNavPaneCurrentGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneCurrentGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneCurrentGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneHotGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneHotGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneHotGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneHotLabelItemGradientLight OutlookNavPaneHotLabelItemGradientDark OutlookNavPaneHotOverflowButtonGradientLight OutlookNavPaneHotOverflowButtonGradientDark OutlookNavPaneHotSelectedGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneHotSelectedGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneHotSelectedGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneItemAreaBackcolor OutlookNavPaneOverflowButtonBackcolor OutlookNavPanePressedGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPanePressedGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPanePressedGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPanePressedOverflowButtonGradientLight OutlookNavPanePressedOverflowButtonGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSelectedGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneSelectedGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSelectedGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneSelectedOverflowButtonGradientLight OutlookNavPaneSelectedOverflowButtonGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSplitterGradientLight OutlookNavPaneSplitterGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSplitterDarkSquare OutlookNavPaneSplitterLightSquare OutlookNavPaneSplitterMiddleSquare OutlookNavPaneLabelItemGradientLight OutlookNavPaneLabelItemGradientDark OutlookNavPaneItemWithNoImageForeColor PopupMenuBorder PopupMenuToolOpenGradientLight PopupMenuToolOpenGradientDark PopupMenuToolOpenForecolor PressedGradientLight PressedGradientDark QuickCustomizeForecolor QuickCustomizeGradientLight QuickCustomizeGradientDark QuickCustomizeOpenGradientLight QuickCustomizeOpenGradientDark QuickCustomizeOpen SeparatorLight SeparatorDark TaskPaneActiveCaptionLight TaskPaneActiveCaptionDark TaskPaneBorder TaskPaneContentArea TaskPaneNavigationArea TaskPaneNavigationToolSeparatorDark TaskPaneNavigationToolSeparatorLight TaskPaneScrollButton TaskPaneScrollButtonBorder TearawayStrip ToolbarCornerShadowDark (Not used for WindowsVista style) ToolbarCornerShadowLight (Not used for WindowsVista style) ToolbarCornerShadowMedium (Not used for WindowsVista style) ToolbarGradientLight ToolbarGradientDark ToolbarUnderline (Not used for WindowsVista style) ToolBorder ToolBorderHighlight ToolBorderMouseDown ToolDisabledForecolor ToolForecolor ToolHighlightForecolor ToolHighlightPressedForecolor ToolTipBorder (Not used for WindowsVista style) ToolTipGradientLight (Not used for WindowsVista style) ToolTipGradientDark (Not used for WindowsVista style) ToolTipForecolor (Not used for WindowsVista style) Defines the light shade of the gradient displayed for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button when the button is in the hot tracked state. Defines the dark shade of the gradient displayed for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button when the button is in the hot tracked state. Defines the light shade of the gradient displayed for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button when the button is in the pressed state. Defines the dark shade of the gradient displayed for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button when the button is in the pressed state. Defines the foreground color for the Outlook Navigation Pane expansion button. Defines the background color for the Outlook Navigation Pane collapsed group area Defines the background color for the Outlook Navigation Pane collapsed group area when it is in the 'Pressed' state. Defines the background color for the Outlook Navigation Pane collapsed group area when it is in the 'Selected' state. AddRemoveHighlight2 ButtonBackColor ButtonHighlightBackColor ButtonPressedBackColor ButtonDisabledBackColor ButtonBorderColor ButtonBorderColorInner ButtonForeColor ButtonForeColorDisabled ButtonDisabledBorderColor ButtonDisabledBorderColorInner ButtonPressedBorderColor ButtonPressedBorderColorInner ButtonHighlightBorderColor ButtonHighlightBorderColorInner ButtonHightlightOverlayColor ButtonPressedOverlayColor EditorActiveBorderColor MenuItemHighlightOverlayColor MenuItemHighlightOverlayColor2 MenuItemBorderHighlight MenuItemBorderHighlight2 MenuIconAreaBorderLight MenuIconAreaBorderDark ScrollbarBorderColor ScrollBarTrackBackColor ScrollbarTrackPressedBackColor ToolBorderHighlight2 ToolBorderMouseDown MenuItemCheckmarkBorder SplitButtonExtraHightlightOverlayColor TreeNodeHotTrackBackColorLight TreeNodeHotTrackBackColorDark TreeNodeHotTrackBorderColorOuter TreeNodeHotTrackBorderColorInner TreeNodeSelectedBackColorLight TreeNodeSelectedBackColorDark TreeNodeSelectedBorderColorOuter TreeNodeSelectedBorderColorInner TreeNodeHotTrackSelectedBackColorLight TreeNodeHotTrackSelectedBackColorDark TreeNodeHotTrackSelectedBorderColorOuter TreeNodeHotTrackSelectedBorderColorInner TreeNodeSelectedNoFocusBackColorLight TreeNodeSelectedNoFocusBackColorDark TreeNodeSelectedNoFocusBorderColorOuter TreeNodeSelectedNoFocusBorderColorInner Class containing color properties representing the colors used by Visual Studio 2008. Colors: Returns singleton instance of VisualStudio2008ColorTable class DockManagerCaptionActiveGradientLight DockManagerCaptionActiveGradientDark DockManagerCaptionInactiveGradientLight DockManagerCaptionInactiveGradientDark DockManagerCaptionTextActive DockManagerCaptionTextInactive DockManagerTabAreaGradientLight DockManagerTabAreaGradientDark MenuIconAreaGradientDark MenuIconAreaGradientLight MenuItemCheckmark MenuItemCheckmarkHighlight ContextMenuForeColor ContextMenuHighlightForeColor DockManagerActiveCaptionButtonActive DockManagerActiveCaptionButtonActiveBorder DockManagerActiveCaptionButtonPressed DockManagerActiveCaptionButtonPressedBorder DockManagerCaptionButtonActive DockManagerCaptionButtonActiveBorder MenuIconAreaSeparator MenuItemHighlightGradientLight MenuItemHighlightGradientDark MenuItemHighlightBorder MenuItemCheckmarkBorder MenuItemCheckmarkHighlightBorder Class containing static color properties representing the colors used by the Microsoft Office 2003 products. is the new way to retrieve the Office2003 color scheme. Office2003Colors is maintained for backward compatability. AddRemoveHighlight AddRemoveHighlight DockAreaGradientLight DockAreaGradientDark FloatingControlContainerToolbar FloatingToolbarCaption FloatingToolbarCaptionText GrabHandleDarkSquare HighlightMouseDownGradientLight HighlightMouseDownGradientDark HighlightNotPressedGradientLight HighlightNotPressedGradientDark HighlightPopupMenuItem HighlightPressedGradientLight HighlightPressedGradientDark HighlightQuickCustomizeFloating HighlightQuickCustomizeGradientLight HighlightQuickCustomizeGradientDark MainMenuBarGradientLight MainMenuBarGradientDark MenuExpandButtonGradientLight MenuExpandButtonGradientDark MenuIconAreaGradientLight MenuIconAreaGradientDark MenuIconAreaExpandedGradientLight MenuIconAreaExpandedGradientDark MenuItemCheckmark MenuItemCheckmarkHighlight MenuDroppedBackColor OutlookNavPaneBorder OutlookNavPaneCurrentGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneCurrentGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneCurrentGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneHotGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneHotGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneHotGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneHotOverflowButtonGradientLight OutlookNavPaneHotOverflowButtonGradientDark OutlookNavPaneItemAreaBackcolor OutlookNavPaneOverflowButtonBackcolor OutlookNavPanePressedGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPanePressedGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPanePressedGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPanePressedOverflowButtonGradientLight OutlookNavPanePressedOverflowButtonGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSelectedGroupHeaderGradientLight OutlookNavPaneSelectedGroupHeaderGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSelectedGroupHeaderForecolor OutlookNavPaneSelectedOverflowButtonGradientLight OutlookNavPaneSelectedOverflowButtonGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSplitterGradientLight OutlookNavPaneSplitterGradientDark OutlookNavPaneSplitterDarkSquare OutlookNavPaneSplitterLightSquare OutlookNavPaneSplitterMiddleSquare OutlookNavPaneLabelItemGradientLight OutlookNavPaneLabelItemGradientDark OutlookNavPaneItemWithNoImageForeColor PopupMenuBorder PopupMenuToolOpenGradientLight PopupMenuToolOpenGradientDark PressedGradientLight PressedGradientDark QuickCustomizeGradientLight QuickCustomizeGradientDark QuickCustomizeOpenGradientLight QuickCustomizeOpenGradientDark QuickCustomizeOpen SeparatorLight SeparatorDark TearawayStrip ToolbarCornerShadowDark ToolbarCornerShadowLight ToolbarCornerShadowMedium ToolbarGradientLight ToolbarGradientDark ToolbarUnderline ToolBorder ToolBorderMouseDown OptionButtonIndicatorUIElement Constructor, initializes a new instance of the OptionButtonIndicatorUIElement class. Parent UIElement The of the element. Override DrawBackColor and do nothing The used to provide rendering information. Override DrawImageBackground and do nothing The used to provide rendering information. Override DrawBorders and do nothing The used to provide rendering information. Override DrawForeground to draw the check box The used to provide rendering information. Handles the rendering of the element using the system themes. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element was able to successfully render with the system theme. Used to determine whether the remaining draw methods are invoked. OptionButtonUIElement Constructor, intializes a new instance of the OptionButtonUIElement class. The parent element Creates and positions child elements Invalidates just the check indicator ButtonClick True if button was clicked, false otherwise. Returns information regarding the mouse in relation to the element. Returns the checkstate of the element. Returns the state of the button. Returns the buttonstate used for drawing the check box The size of the check image in pixels (read-only) The indentation of the text from the actual option element Returns the rectangle for the text element (read-only) Returns the rectangle for the text element The checked state of the btn element Controls where the check mark is placed in relation to the element rect Gets the button style for the element. Indicates if the button style requires invalidation of the element on the mouse enter and exit. OptionButtonWithImageUIElement, option button element that also supports an image. Constructor, initializes a new instance of OptionButtonWithImageUIElement. parent UIElement Constructor, initializes a new instance of OptionButtonWithImageUIElement. parent UIElement This is the standard winforms behavior. Setting this to false will position the image outside of the optionbutton+text element rect. Clean up resources used Handles the position of the child UIElements Calculates the size of a single line text string for use by an ImageAndTextUIElement Size of font. element needs to properly render Calculates the size of a single line text string for use by an ImageAndTextUIElement Size of font. Determines whether or not image height is taken into account. element needs to properly render Calculates the size of a single line text string for use by an ImageAndTextUIElement Size of font. Determines whether or not image height is taken into account. The largest width for the item (if applicable) or 0. The smallest width of the item (if applicable) or 0. element needs to properly render Returns the imageElement, creating it if necessary Determines if image should be positioned inside of the text rect. This is the standard winforms behavior. Setting this to false will position the image outside of the optionbutton+text element rect. Set/Get the image to be displayed by the control Sets the alignment of the image that will be displayed in the face of the element Option Set Editor is an editor that binds to a value list. It renders selection by showing the selected item as checked Constructor, initializes a new instance of the OptionSetEditor class. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the OptionSetEditor class. Fired when the value list is closed Fired when selected item is changed Fired when Selection change has been committed Resolve Appearance Called when the list receives input focus. used to determine if type can be edited true if type can be edited, false otherwise Used to determine if type can be edited The to check. true if type can be rendered, false otherwise Called when focus is set to the control Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Called from inside the method of the parent element to create and position the embedded element or elements. The element that will contain the embedded element. An object that derives from the class. Context information that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. The element returned the prior time the parent element's method was called. An instance of a class derived from EmbeddableUIElementBase.

The owner and ownerContext values are saved by the added element to get value and state information later.

 Used to determine the size preferred/required by the editor. Structure that provides information regarding the size calculation including the owner for which the size calculation is occuring, whether to exclude edit elements, whether to include borders, etc. The size needed to render the value by the editor based upon the specified options. Returns whether the key is used by the editor. The object indicating which keys were pressed. True only if the editor is in edit mode and the key is used by the editor. Internal. New editor value. Invoked before the enters edit mode. By reference boolean indicating whether the enter should be canceled. OnAfterEnterEditMode Called after edit mode has been exited Invoked before the exits edit mode. By reference boolean indicating whether the exit should be canceled. True if the editor is being forced out of edit mode. True to apply changes. OnOwnerKeyDown The Helper used to determine if item should be serialized True if item should be serialized, false otherwise. Helper to reset the property Helper used to determine if item should be serialized True if item should be serialized, false otherwise. Helper to reset the property Helper used to determine if item should be serialized True if item should be serialized, false otherwise. Helper to reset the property Helper used to determine if item should be serialized True if item should be serialized, false otherwise. Helper to reset the property Creates a copy of the embeddable editor with the specified default owner. An instance of the default EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class from which to obtain owner-specific information A copy of the editor Initializes the state of this object from a source object of the same type Object whose properties should be copied Used by an editor owner to create an accessible object for a specific object managed by an editor. Parent accessible object for the accessible object to create Editor owner Owner context that can be supplied to the editor owner to obtain information about the object represented by the accessible instance. An accessible object that represents the specified owner context for the editor. Override this in specific editor to provide editor value. Editor value. Override this in specific editor to provide automatic conversions for that editor. Type of conversion. Value to convert. Type of converted value True if conversion was valid. Owner. OwnerContext. Converted value. ValueList owner Returns the IUltraControl associated with the owner. Value list edit control ImageList Determines if item is drop down list Size of images Collection of value lists Returns the ScrollBarLook for this editor. Returns the preferred scrollbar viewstyle for this editor. Returns the preferred displaystyle for this editor. Determines if item can recieve focus Determines if editor has focus Determines if value is valid Returns the Selected item Returns the current text being edited without doing any validation. This will return the text currently typed in. If the editor does not have an textbox-like control, it will return the current edit value in form of text. Accessing this property when the editor is not in edit mode will throw an exception. WantsOwnerKeyEvents Specifies whether the editor supports value list (read-only).

If the editor makes use of value list returned by EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase, it returns true.

The default implemenation returns false.

 Sets/Gets the focused index Controls the horizontal spacing between item columns Controls the vertical spacing between item columns Controls the space between the option button and the text. Determines the origin of the option buttons relative to the top/left of the control. Determines the largest possible width that a column of items can have. Determines the smallest possible width of a columns of items. Accessible object representing an progress bar editor instance. Initializes a new Parent accessible object Associated optionset editor Associated owner Owner context that identifies the object which the accessible instance represents Retrieves the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. The zero-based index of the accessible child. An AccessibleObject that represents the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Returns the UIElement associated with a particular child accessible object. Accessible object representing the child whose uielement should be returned. The uielement used to display the child or null if the element is not available. Processes the navigation request of the child accessible object. Child accessible object whose navigate method is being invoked. Indicates the direction of the navigation. The accessible object based on the navigation direction. Returns the index of the specified child accessible object. Child accessible object to evaluate -1 if the child was not found. Otherwise the index of the child is returned. Returns the object that has the keyboard focus. An AccessibleObject that specifies the currently focused child. This method returns the calling object if the object itself is focused. Returns a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no object has focus. Returns the object that has the keyboard focus. An AccessibleObject that specifies the currently focused child. This method returns the calling object if the object itself is focused. Returns a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no object has focus. Returns the role of the accessible object. Accessible object representing an option item in the optionset editor Initializes a new Index of the item Parent accessible object Performs the default action associated with this accessible object. Returns the index of the option set item. Returns the role of the accessible object. Returns the state of the accessible object. Returns the name of the accessible object. Gets a string that describes the default action of the object. Indicates if the default action can be performed. Summary Description for OptionSetEmbeddableUIElement Constructor, initializes a new instance of OptionSetEmbeddableUIElement The parent element. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditorOwner interface. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditor interface. Context information used by the owner to identify the value. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. Gets the value list associated with this elements parent Sets the selected value list item and de-selects all previous options Shifts the focus to the next element Shifts the focus to the prev element Toggles the checkstate of the selected item Initialize the appearance structure for this element The appearance structure to initialize. The properties that are needed OnMouseDown Mouse event arguments True if the mouse button was pressed while the cursor was positioned over the adjustable area If not null, contains a reference to the element that has captured the mouse True if the event was handled. Default drawfocus method draws a focus rect inside the element's borders The used to provide rendering information. Position Child Elements, the option buttons are based off the editors valuelist. Each item equates to one option. The selected option is the current VALUE of the editor Returns element at this index casted to OptionButtonWithImageUIElement Called before the element draw process starts. Returns parent editor as OptionSetEditor Returns the focused index Returns true so that this element does not draw outside itself Returns true so that this element does not draw outside itself Summary Description for OptionSetOptionButtonUIElement Constructor, initializes a new instance of the OptionSetOptionButtonUIElement class. Parent UIElement Index into value list. Initialize the appearance structure for this element The appearance structure to initialize. The properties that are needed Called when the mouse is clicked on this element. The default implementatiun just walks up the parent element chain. Sets the selected item Called when the mouse down message is received over the element. Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Draws a focus rectangle around the . The used to provide rendering information. Initializes the element Index of associated value list item. Called when the mouse is released over an element Mouse event arguments Returning true will ignore the next click event Returns an object of requested type that relates to the element or null. The requested type or null to pick up default context object. If true will walk up the parent chain looking for the context. Returns the parent element Only Draw the focus rect if our index matches the focused index Returns the ui role for the element. OriginMarker class Derives from System.Windows.Forms.Form This class is basically a non-activatable form with a transparent background that simply displays the appropriate origin marker bitmap based on which types of mouse panning operations are supported OriginMarker class constructor The control that is using this instance of the OriginMarker Determines whether vertical panning is supported Determines whether horizontal panning is supported Shows the OriginMarker at the specified location The screen coordinates at which to display the OriginMarker Describes the type of properties used when saving/loading presets Properties that relate primarily to appearances Properties that relate primarily to behavior All preset properties This interface is used for objects which support Presets Get the properties on this object which can be preset Specifies which group of properties to return An array of property names as strings. A unique type name for the object used to determine if the Preset data is valid for a particular object A unique type name for the object Class for serializing and deserializing the properties of an object implementing the interface Serializes the specified preset properties of the target to a stream The stream to write to The target ISupportPresets object whose properties will be saved. Serializes the specified preset properties of the target to a file The name of the file to write to The target ISupportPresets object whose properties will be saved. Serializes the specified preset properties of the target to a stream The stream to write to The target ISupportPresets object whose properties will be saved. Serializes the specified preset properties of the target to a file The name of the file to write to The target ISupportPresets object whose properties will be saved. Applies the current Preset data to the target object. The object to apply the setting to. Determines whether to clear all settings before applying the new settings. Applies the current Preset data to the target object. The object to apply the setting to. Creates a new instance of a PresetSerializer based on a target object The ISupportPresets object from which the data will be taken Specifies which properties of the object to read A new PresetSerializer instance Creates a new instance of a PresetSerializer based on a previously saved stream The stream from which the data will be read A new PresetSerializer instance Creates a new instance of a PresetSerializer based on a previously saved file The stream from which the data will be read A new PresetSerializer instance Creates a new instance of a PresetSerializer based on a previously saved stream The stream from which the data will be read A new PresetSerializer instance Creates a new instance of a PresetSerializer based on a previously saved file The stream from which the data will be read A new PresetSerializer instance Get the Preset properties for the target ISupportPresets object and resets all of them A ISupportPresets object whose preset properties will be cleared Get the Preset properties for the target ISupportPresets object and resets some of them, based on the PresetType A ISupportPresets object whose preset properties will be cleared Determines which preset properties are cleared The type name of the target object to which the stored data applies The PresetType defines which type of preset data is stored by this object. A display name for the preset A display Description for the preset Object used to filter the properties of an object based on the interface Initializes a new Object whose properties will be returned True to include IPreset "Look" properties True to include IPreset "Behavior" properties True to include all other properties Returns the string representation of the underlying object. A string representation of the Used to determine which properties should be returned from the base implementation PropertyDecriptor to be evaluated Array of attributes passed into the GetProperties method or null if none were specified. Return true by default to include the specified property. Invoked when the value of the custom property descriptor is requested so the property value may be wrapped by a custom type descriptor if necessary. The value of the property descriptor By default, is returned. Returns the actual object represented by the wrapper. Enumeration of property identifications for the and classes. property property property property property property property property property property property property property property Base class for an event involving a Initializes a new Associated document that is being printed Graphics object into which the page should be rendered Object that provides information about the settings for the current page Area available for the section Section that is being rendered Returns the document that is being rendered. Returns the graphics object into which the page should be rendered Returns the associated with the current page being printed. Returns the area available for the section. Returns the area of the section within its borders Returns the area of the section within its margins Returns the area of the section inside the borders. Returns the area within the available area that represents the section. Returns the area available for rendering. Event arguments class for the event. Initializes a new Associated document that is being printed Graphics object into which the page should be rendered Object that provides information about the settings for the current page Area available for the section Section that is being rendered Returns or sets whether the print operation should be cancelled. Returns or sets whether the default rendering should occur for the page background and border. Event arguments class for the event. Initializes a new Associated document that is being printed Graphics object into which the page should be rendered Object that provides information about the settings for the current page The of the header area. The Rectangle of the footer area. The Rectangle of the page body area. Returns the document that is being rendered. Returns the graphics object into which the page should be rendered Returns the associated with the current page being printed. Returns the area of the page containing the header. Returns the area of the page containing the footer. Returns the area of the page containing the page body. Returns or sets whether there are more pages to print. Returns or sets whether the current page should be reprinted.

This is usually only set true if the Handled property of the was set to true. In this way, a page may be inserted into the print operation.

The class that derives from or utilizes the to render is responsible for supporting this capability and as such may not be available in all cases.

 Returns or sets whether the print operation should be cancelled. Event arguments class for the printing events involving a that occur before a section has been printed. Initializes a new Associated document that is being printed Graphics object into which the page should be rendered Object that provides information about the settings for the current page Area available for the section Section that is being rendered Returns or sets whether the default rendering should occur for the page background and border. Returns the header or footer section being rendered. Returns the area within the available area that represents the section. Event arguments class for the print events involving a that occur after the section has been printed. Initializes a new Associated document that is being printed Graphics object into which the page should be rendered Object that provides information about the settings for the current page Area available for the section Section that is being rendered The area where the section was rendered. Returns the header or footer section being rendered. Returns the area within the available area that represents the section. Event arguments class for the UltraPrintDocument event. Initializes a new Associated document that is being printed Graphics object into which the page should be rendered Object that provides information about the settings for the current page Area available for the section Section that is being rendered Returns the section representing the page body. Returns or sets whether the default rendering should occur for the page background and border. Event arguments class for the UltraPrintDocument event. Initializes a new Associated document that is being printed Graphics object into which the page should be rendered Object that provides information about the settings for the current page Area available for the section Section that is being rendered Returns the section representing the page body. Delegate for handling the event Delegate for handling the event Delegate for handling the and events Delegate for handling the and events Delegate for handling the event Delegate for handling the event Print document section representing a header or footer. Represents an area of the print document. Initializes a new Owning print document Constructor used during deserialization to initialize a new object with the serialized property values. SerializationInfo StreamingContext

Returns a Boolean value that determines whether the property is set to its default value.

 True if the property is set to a non-default value. Resets the property to its default value. Indicates if any of the properties of the have been changed. Returns true if any properties of the have been changed. Resets the properties of the to their default values. Indicates if any of the properties of the have been changed. Returns true if any properties of the have been changed. Resets the properties of the to their default values. Invoked when a property on a subobject of the instance has changed. A structure containing the property change information. Prints the section into the specified graphics object. Graphics object into which the section should be rendered Area where the section should be rendered Containing client area Indicates if any of the properties of the section differ from their default values. True if any of the properties of the section have been changed. Resets the properties of the section to their default values. Returns a string representation of the object. A string representation of the object. Resolves the appearance for the section. AppearanceData structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Invoked during the serialization of the object. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Invoked after the entire object graph has been deserialized. The object that initiated the callback. The functionality for the this parameter is not currently implemented. Initializes the object with the settings of the specified object. Section whose properties should be copied Invoked when the Dispose method of the object is invoked. Returns or sets the appearance used to render the section. Returns a Boolean value that indicates whether an object has been created. Returns or sets the borderstyle rendered around the section. Returns or sets which sides of the section border will be rendered. Returns or sets the amount of space between the border and the sections contents. Indicates if the object has been allocated. Returns the owning print document. Returns or sets the amount of space between the containing area and the border. Indicates if the object has been allocated. Initializes a new Owning print document True if this is a header section; otherwise false to indicate this is a footer section Constructor used during deserialization to initialize a new object with the serialized property values. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Indicates if any of the properties of the section differ from their default values. True if any of the properties of the section have been changed. Resets the properties of the section to their default values. Prints the section into the specified graphics object. Graphics object into which the section should be rendered Area where the section should be rendered Containing client area The area where the section was rendered. Invoked during the serialization of the object. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Initializes the object with the settings of the specified object. Section whose properties should be copied Returns or sets whether the header and footer text is reversed when even pages are printed. Returns or sets the string displayed on the left side of the section.

The TextLeft is used to provide a custom header or footer text on the left side of the page.

Replaceable Escape Tags: [Page #]Inserts the current page number [Date Printed]Inserts the date when the print operation began. [User Name]Inserts the user name as available from [Time Printed]Inserts the time when the print operation began

Note: If the is set to true, this string will be rendered on the opposite side when the is an even value.

 Returns or sets the string displayed in the middle of the section.

The TextCenter is used to provide custom centered header or footer text.

Replaceable Escape Tags: [Page #]Inserts the current page number [Date Printed]Inserts the date when the print operation began. [User Name]Inserts the user name as available from [Time Printed]Inserts the time when the print operation began Returns or sets the string displayed on the right side of the section.

The TextRight is used to provide a custom header or footer text on the right side of the page.

Replaceable Escape Tags: [Page #]Inserts the current page number [Date Printed]Inserts the date when the print operation began. [User Name]Inserts the user name as available from [Time Printed]Inserts the time when the print operation began

Note: If the is set to true, this string will be rendered on the opposite side when the is an even value.

 Returns or sets the fixed height of the section.

Note, when left to its default value of -1, the height will be based on the height required to show the section text and border.

 Base class for rendering a print document with a page header and/or footer.

The UltraPrintDocument is a specialized that adds built-in support for custom page headers and footers (see the and ).

Property settings may be saved using the and methods. These serialized settings may then be loaded using the and methods respectively.

Property settings of the base PrintDocument class, including the are not serialized when using the SaveAsXml and SaveAsBinary methods.

 Initializes a new Initializes a new An IContainer representing the container of the UltraPrintDocument Indicates if any of the properties of the have been set. True if any of the properties of the have been set. Resets the properties of the to their default values. Indicates if any of the properties of the have been set. True if any of the properties of the have been set. Resets the properties of the to their default values. Indicates if any of the properties of the have been set. True if any of the properties of the have been set. Resets the properties of the to their default values. Indicates if any of the properties of the have been set. True if any of the properties of the have been set. Resets the properties of the to their default values.

Returns a Boolean value that determines whether the property is set to its default value.

 Resets the property to its default value. Invoked when a property on a subobject has changed. A structure containing the property change information.

In design mode notifies the that the component has changed so that it can mark the component dirty.

At runtime this method does nothing.

 Notifies any listeners when the state of an object has changed Notifies any listeners when the state of an object has changed An ID that denotes the property. Optional. Used during a prop change notification to create a complete context chain of what triggered the change. Invoked when the print operation has ended. Invokes the PropertyChanged event. This event is fired to notify listeners of a property changes on the component or a subobject. The . Raises the event. A that provides data for the event.

Raising an event invokes the event handler through a delegate.

The OnPagePrinting method also allows derived classes to handle the event without attaching a delegate. This is the preferred technique for handling the event in a derived class.

Notes to Inheritors: When overriding OnPagePrinting in a derived class, be sure to call the base class's OnPagePrinting method so that registered delegates receive the event.

 Raises the event. A that provides data for the event.

Raising an event invokes the event handler through a delegate.

The OnPagePrinted method also allows derived classes to handle the event without attaching a delegate. This is the preferred technique for handling the event in a derived class.

Notes to Inheritors: When overriding OnPagePrinted in a derived class, be sure to call the base class's OnPagePrinted method so that registered delegates receive the event.

 Raises the event. A that provides data for the event.

Raising an event invokes the event handler through a delegate.

The OnPageBodyPrinting method also allows derived classes to handle the event without attaching a delegate. This is the preferred technique for handling the event in a derived class.

Notes to Inheritors: When overriding OnPageBodyPrinting in a derived class, be sure to call the base class's OnPageBodyPrinting method so that registered delegates receive the event.

 Raises the event. A that provides data for the event.

Raising an event invokes the event handler through a delegate.

The OnPageBodyPrinted method also allows derived classes to handle the event without attaching a delegate. This is the preferred technique for handling the event in a derived class.

Notes to Inheritors: When overriding OnPageBodyPrinted in a derived class, be sure to call the base class's OnPageBodyPrinted method so that registered delegates receive the event.

 Raises the event. A that provides data for the event.

Raising an event invokes the event handler through a delegate.

The OnPageHeaderPrinting method also allows derived classes to handle the event without attaching a delegate. This is the preferred technique for handling the event in a derived class.

Notes to Inheritors: When overriding OnPageHeaderPrinting in a derived class, be sure to call the base class's OnPageHeaderPrinting method so that registered delegates receive the event.

 Raises the event. A that provides data for the event.

Raising an event invokes the event handler through a delegate.

The OnPageHeaderPrinted method also allows derived classes to handle the event without attaching a delegate. This is the preferred technique for handling the event in a derived class.

Notes to Inheritors: When overriding OnPageHeaderPrinted in a derived class, be sure to call the base class's OnPageHeaderPrinted method so that registered delegates receive the event.

 Raises the event. A that provides data for the event.

Raising an event invokes the event handler through a delegate.

The OnPageFooterPrinting method also allows derived classes to handle the event without attaching a delegate. This is the preferred technique for handling the event in a derived class.

Notes to Inheritors: When overriding OnPageFooterPrinting in a derived class, be sure to call the base class's OnPageFooterPrinting method so that registered delegates receive the event.

 Raises the event. A that provides data for the event.

Raising an event invokes the event handler through a delegate.

The OnPageFooterPrinted method also allows derived classes to handle the event without attaching a delegate. This is the preferred technique for handling the event in a derived class.

Notes to Inheritors: When overriding OnPageFooterPrinted in a derived class, be sure to call the base class's OnPageFooterPrinted method so that registered delegates receive the event.

 This method is invoked by the to allow derived classes to handle rendering of the page body. This method is not called if the property of the event is set to true. Event arguments Loads saved layout information from a stream containing the binary layout.

The LoadFromBinary method is used in conjunction with the method to persist the property settings and layout of the print document.

 Stream containing the serialized print document information Loads saved layout information from a stream containing the binary layout.

The LoadFromBinary method is used in conjunction with the method to persist the property settings and layout of the print document.

 The name of the file containing the serialized print document information. Loads saved layout information from a stream containing the xml/soap layout.

The LoadFromXml method is used in conjunction with the method to persist the property settings and layout of the print document.

 Stream containing the serialized print document information Loads saved layout information from a stream containing the xml/soap layout.

The LoadFromXml method is used in conjunction with the method to persist the property settings and layout of the print document.

 File containing the serialized print document information Saves property information to a file in binary format. The to save the property information to.

The SaveAsBinary method is used in conjunction with the method to persist the property settings of the print document.

 Saves property information to a file in binary format.

The SaveAsBinary method is used in conjunction with the method to persist the property settings of the print document.

 The file to receive the serialized print document information Saves property information to an xml/soap stream.

The SaveAsXml method is used in conjunction with the method to persist the property settings of the print document.

 Stream to receive the serialized print document information Saves property information to a file in xml/soap format.

The SaveAsXml method is used in conjunction with the method to persist the property settings of the print document.

 The file to receive the serialized print document information Serializes the properties and subobjects of the print document into the specified Object into which the properties should be serialized Invoked during runtime deserialization when deserializing from a stream using the and methods. Serialization entry containing the serialized property value Resets the properties of the component to their default values. Invoked when the properties of the component should be reset to their default values. True if the component is being deserialized from a stream. Calculates the inner bounds available for the page body. The maximum page size available. A Size indicating the amount of space available for the page contents. Calculates the inner bounds available for the page body. The available for the entire page. A Size indicating the amount of space available for the page contents. Invoked when the component must release the resources it is using. True if managed resources should be released. Used to invoke the BeginPrint event when a print operation has started. Event arguments Used to invoke the EndPrint event when a print operation has completed. Event arguments Used to invoke the PrintPage event when a page is to be printed.

The UltraPrintDocument overrides this member to invoke the various print events (e.g. , , etc.). It is recommended that derived classes override the methods of the respective event(s) (e.g. ) instead of overriding OnPrintPage. After the header and footer area, as well as any additional page or have been removed the method is invoked with a new that represents the body area of the page. Derived classes may override that method in lieu of overriding OnPrintPage to handle rendering of the page body.

 Event arguments Used to invoke the QueryPageSettings event to allow the PageSettings to be altered before each page is printed. Event arguments Loads the user configuration settings for this component.

Note: The location where the settings are stored varies depending on the configuration of the system running the application. Information about where these locations are is currently unavailable in Microsoft's MSDN Library.

Resets the user configuration settings for this component.

Note: The location where the settings are stored varies depending on the configuration of the system running the application. Information about where these locations are is currently unavailable in Microsoft's MSDN Library.

Saves the user configuration settings for this component.

Note: The location where the settings are stored varies depending on the configuration of the system running the application. Information about where these locations are is currently unavailable in Microsoft's MSDN Library.

Returns the current page number. Indicates if we are in the process of a print operation. Returns an object used to define the appearance of the page. Returns an object used to define the appearance of the page header. Returns an object used to define the appearance of the page footer. Returns an object used to define the appearance of the body of the page. Returns or sets how colors and images are rendered.

Note, this does not automatically affect the output of the print operation.

 Handler for a SubObjectPropChange event Returns or sets the appearance used to render the pages printed by the document. Returns a Boolean value that indicates whether an object has been created. Gets or sets the format in which the user customizations settings will be saved and loaded Gets the UltraToolbarsManagerApplicationSettings instance which saves and loads user customizations from the default store Returns a boolean indicating if the print document supports having variable sizes for the page sections (i.e. variable header height, footer height, etc.). Gets the total number of pages to be printed or null if that value cannot be determined. Fired after a property has changed. Fired before the page is rendered Fired after the page is rendered Fired before the is rendered Fired after the has been rendered Fired before the is rendered Fired after the has been rendered Fired before the is rendered Fired after the has been rendered Display the about dialog Returns the cached license for the control Indicates whether this component should automatically save its user configuration settings.

Note: The location where the settings are stored varies depending on the configuration of the system running the application. Information about where these locations are is currently unavailable in Microsoft's MSDN Library.

A unique string that distinguishes this UltraPrintDocument form others in the solution it is being used in. This is needed to store user configuration settings.

Note: The location where the settings are stored varies depending on the configuration of the system running the application. Information about where these locations are is currently unavailable in Microsoft's MSDN Library.

Helps with the saving and loading of data from the default store Base class for settings wrapper classes for Infragistics controls. Creates a new instance. The component which owns the settings. The unique key identifiying this instance of the settings in the application. Saves the current settings values to the settings file. Constructor The owner of this settings instance The settingsKey of the owner Gets or sets the binary data which contains the print document configuration settings Gets or sets the xml string which contains the print document configuration settings Provides design-time support for the component. Initializes component values first time component is created. A name/value dictionary of default values to apply to properties. May be null if no default values are specified. Gets the for this designer's control/component. Provides DesignerActionItems for the SmartTag associated with the UltraPrintDocument. Constructor Overrides CreateActionItems. The list to populate. Used by SmartTag Panel. Object for associating an appearance with a specific percent value. Creates a new instance of the class. Initial value for the property. Creates a new instance of the class. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Compares this instance to the specified object. Object to compare to this instance A signed number indicating the relative values of this instance and value. Invoked when a subobject provides a notification. Object providing information about the property change notification. Returns a string representation of the object. A string representation of the object. Returns or sets the minimum percentage at which the appearances will be applied. Default appearance for the control.

The Appearance property is used to determine appearance of the non-filled area of the ProgressBar.

 Indicates whether an object has been created. Returns true when the Appearance object for the property has been created.

Use this property to determine if an object has been created. Appearance objects in general are not created until the properties associated with them are accessed.

 Default appearance for the filled area of the progress bar.

The FillAppearance property is used to determine appearance of the filled area of the ProgressBar.

 Indicates whether an object has been created. Returns true when the Appearance object for the property has been created.

Use this property to determine if an object has been created. Appearance objects in general are not created until the properties associated with them are accessed.

 Returns or sets the collection that provides appearance information for the appearance properties TypeConverter for the class. Returns true if the object can convert to that type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert to. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the object to the requested type. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. A that represents the type you want to convert to. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. Collection of instances used to apply appearances to a progress bar based on the current percent being displayed. Adds a to the collection Item to add The index of the item Creates a new in the collection with the specified value. Maximum percentage at which the associated appearances will be applied The new PercentSetting Inserts the specified item at the specified index. The index at which the item is to be inserted The item to insert into the collection Gets the index of the item in the collection. The item to check. The index in the collection. Sees if the item is in the collection. The item to check. True if the item is in the collection. Copies the items of the collection into the array. The array to receive the items. The array index to begin inserting the items. Removes the specified item from the collection Item to remove Removes the specified item at the specified index Index of the item to remove Clears the contents of the collection Virtual method used by the All 'get' method to create the array it returns. The newly created object array This is normally overridden in a derived class to allocate a type safe array. Invoked when a subobject provides a notification. Object providing information about the property change notification. Collection of instances used to apply appearances to a progress bar based on the current percent being displayed. Returns or sets the collection that provides appearance information for the item's appearance properties Returns the at the specified index Returns the whose used to format the specified percent. The collection as an array of objects Returns the initial capacity for the collection Indicates if the collection may be modified. The main UIElement for the control.

The ProgressBarControlUIElement is the main for the control. The element encompasses the entire visible area of the control and contains only one child element - the .

 Initializes a new ProgressBarControlUIElement with the specified control. Owning progress bar control Overriden. Handles the creation and positioning of the child elements.

The ProgressBarControlUIElement contains only one child element - a .

 Returns the associated control. Returns the ui role for the element. ProgressBarEditor Initializes a new instance Initializes a new instance An instance of the default EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class from which to obtain owner-specific information Indicates if the specified data type can be edited Type to check True if the type may be edited Indicates if the specified data type can be rendered Type to check True if the type is a numeric type Attempts to put focus in the editor False. The progress bar does not take focus Returns an embeddable element for the specified parameters Parent uielement Editor owner Context to identify the value to be rendered by the element True if edit element are to be displayed True if space should be left for edit elements True if the outer borders should be displayed True if the element will be used for display in a tooltip Previous element or null if there was no previous embeddable element A ProgressBarEmbeddableElement Returns the type for the embeddable element to be returned. A ProgressBarEmbeddableUIElement type Indicates if the specified key is used for input by the editor Key to check False. The progress bar does not use keyboard input Internal. New editor value. Used to determine the size preferred/required by the editor. Structure that provides information regarding the size calculation including the owner for which the size calculation is occuring, whether to exclude edit elements, whether to include borders, etc. The size needed to render the value by the editor based upon the specified options. Used to initialize the state of the object based on another editor instance. Editor whose property values are to be copied Converts data value to text making use of any format provider and format strings that owner may provide. If unsuccessful, returns null. The value to be converted An object that derives from the class. An object that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method. Creates a new whose is set to the specified owner. Default owner for the new progress bar editor A new ProgressBarEditor whose default owner is the specified owner but whose properties are initialized based on the property settings of this instance of the ProgressBarEditor. Creates a copy of the embeddable editor with the specified default owner. An instance of the default EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class from which to obtain owner-specific information A copy of the editor Used by an editor owner to create an accessible object for a specific object managed by an editor. Parent accessible object for the accessible object to create Editor owner Owner context that can be supplied to the editor owner to obtain information about the object represented by the accessible instance. An accessible object that represents the specified owner context for the editor. Override this in specific editor to provide editor value. Editor value. Indicates if the element can take focus Returns the current edited text - null since the progress bar does not enter edit mode Indicates if the progress bar has focus Indicates if the current value is valid Gets or sets the current value Minimum value of the progress bar.

The Minimum and values determine the range used to calculate the percentage of the flood fill. The Minimum value must be less than or equal to the .

 Maximum value of the progress bar.

The and Maximum values determine the range used to calculate the percentage of the flood fill. The Maximum value must be greater than or equal to the .

 Determines the style of the progress bar.

The Style property determines the type of fill that is rendered. The fill may be a continuous block or be rendered in segments.

 Gets or sets the label displayed in the progress bar Indicates whether to display the label. Gets/sets the appearance used to resolve the appearance of the filled area. Gets/sets the width of the segments in a Segmented style progress bar. When set to UltraProgressBar.DefaultSegmentWidth (-1), the default segment width is used. The default segment width is equal to 2/3 the size relative to the orientation. e.g. The width of a progress bar segment in a horizontal progress bar is approximately 2/3 the height of the control. Returns a collection of value based appearances Accessible object representing an progress bar editor instance. Initializes a new Parent accessible object Associated progress editor Associated owner Owner context that identifies the object which the accessible instance represents Returns the role of the accessible object. Interface for defining a progress bar with value based appearances Interface for providing information to a progress bar uielement. Resolves the appearance for the progress bar background Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Resolves the appearance for the filled area of the progress bar Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Appearance for the progress bar. Appearance for the filled area of the progress bar. Minimum value of the progress bar. Maximum value of the progress bar. Current value of the progress bar. Display label for the progress bar.

The label may include special characters to insert the different values.

e.g.

[Percent]Unformatted percent completed [RemainingPercent]Unformatted percent remaining [Formatted]Formatted percent completed () [RemainingFormatted]Formatted percent remaining () [Remaining]Amount remaining ( - ) [Completed]Amount completed ( - ) [Minimum]Minimum value () [Maximum]Maximum value () [Value]Current value () [Range]Value Range ( - )

The format used to display the [Formatted] and [RemainingFormatted] can be specified using the .

 Format used when formatting the percent for the items [Formatted] and [FormattedRemaining] Indicates if the label should be displayed. Return true to indicate that the should be displayed. Orientation of the progress bar. BorderStyle of the progress bar. Style of the progress bar fill. Returns the culture specific information used to determine how values are formatted. Returns the width of the segments. If set to -1, the default segment width is used. The default segment width is approximately 2/3 the side opposite the orientation. e.g. If the progress bar has a horizontal orientation, the default segment width is approximately 2/3 the height of the progress bar. Returns the UIRole for the main area of the progress bar. Returns the UIRole for the fill area of the progress bar. Returns the resolution order to use when resolving the appearance. Returns a collection of instances used to apply appearances conditionally based on the current percent. Resolves the appearance for the progress bar background Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Resolves the appearance for the filled area of the progress bar Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Width of the segment bars Returns the owner's Appearance for the progress bar. Appearance for the filled area of the progress bar. Minimum value of the progress bar. Maximum value of the progress bar. Current value of the progress bar. Display label for the progress bar.

The label may include special characters to insert the different values.

e.g.

[Percent]Unformatted percent completed [RemainingPercent]Unformatted percent remaining [Formatted]Formatted percent completed () [RemainingFormatted]Formatted percent remaining () [Remaining]Amount remaining ( - ) [Completed]Amount completed ( - ) [Minimum]Minimum value () [Maximum]Maximum value () [Value]Current value () [Range]Value Range ( - )

The format used to display the [Formatted] and [RemainingFormatted] can be specified using the .

 Format used when formatting the percent for the items [Formatted] and [FormattedRemaining] Indicates if the label should be displayed. Return true to indicate that the should be displayed. Orientation of the progress bar. BorderStyle of the progress bar. Style of the progress bar fill. Returns the UIRole for the main area of the progress bar. Returns the UIRole for the fill area of the progress bar. Returns the resolution order to use when resolving the appearance. Embeddable uielement for a progress bar editor. Constructor for the embeddable progress bar uielement Parent uielement Owner Editor Context to identify the object that the element represents True to include edit elements True to reserve space for edit elements True to draw outer borders True if the element is being used for a tooltip Resolves the appearance for the progress bar background Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Resolves the appearance for the filled area of the progress bar Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Handles the positioning and creation of the child elements. Width of the segment bars Returns the owner's Appearance for the progress bar. Appearance for the filled area of the progress bar. Minimum value of the progress bar. Maximum value of the progress bar. Current value of the progress bar. Display label for the progress bar.

The label may include special characters to insert the different values.

e.g.

[Percent]Unformatted percent completed [RemainingPercent]Unformatted percent remaining [Formatted]Formatted percent completed () [RemainingFormatted]Formatted percent remaining () [Remaining]Amount remaining ( - ) [Completed]Amount completed ( - ) [Minimum]Minimum value () [Maximum]Maximum value () [Value]Current value () [Range]Value Range ( - )

The format used to display the [Formatted] and [RemainingFormatted] can be specified using the .

 Format used when formatting the percent for the items [Formatted] and [FormattedRemaining] Indicates if the label should be displayed. Return true to indicate that the should be displayed. Orientation of the progress bar. BorderStyle of the progress bar. Style of the progress bar fill. Returns the UIRole for the main area of the progress bar. Returns the UIRole for the fill area of the progress bar. Returns the resolution order to use when resolving the appearance. Indicates if the focus rect should be displayed by the element. A class for managing the values used by a ProgressBarEmbeddableUIElement for an UltraProgressBar Initializes a new progress bar embeddable owner Progress bar control Returns the maximum allowable value. The context that was passed into the method. The maximum value or null if there is no maximum. The default implementation returns 100. Returns the minimum allowable value. The context that was passed into the method. The minimum value or null if there is no minimum. The default implementation returns 0. Returns the associated control Context identifying the element Owner control that contains the element Returns the data type rendered/edited by the element Context identifying the element Type to be rendered Returns the format info used to render the text. Context identifying the element Out. Format string Out. Format provider used to format the output Returns the value rendered/edited Context identifying the element The current value Indicates if the element is enabled. Context identifying the element True if the element is enabled Indicates if the element may return a null value Context identifying the element False since the progress bar does not go into edit mode Resolves the appearance for the element Context identifying the element Appearance struct to update Appearance properties to resolve Area for which the appearance is being requested True if the mouse is over the element String describing the custom area to render - only used when area is Custom True if the specified appearance was resolved Indicates if the element should display focus Context identifying the element Returns the focused state of the control Returns the border style to be displayed by the element Context identifying the element Out. Borderstyle to render True if the border should be rendered Indicates if the element should be displayed vertically Context identifying the element True if the editor should be displayed vertically Returns the editor for the passed in ownerContext. This is used by the base implementation of EmbeddableOwnerBase. The context that was passed into the method. Returns the embeddable uielement associated with a particular object or null if none is available. Context used to identify the object to reference The embeddable uielement representing the specified owner context. Invoked by an editor to obtain the application style information. Context used to identify the object to reference An instance that should be used by the editor. Indicates if the owner is being used in design mode UIElement for displaying the filled area of a ProgressBar.

The ProgressBarFillUIElement has only one child element - a used to display the for the filled area of the element. The element is a child of the .

Depending upon the , the , and if provided in the , the will be displayed as either a continuous fill or as segments. The segments may either appear as complete blocks or filled in as the progress value increases.

The percentage of the area filled is based on the divided by the difference of the and . When displaying a Segmented fill, the area used may be less since only complete segments are rendered until the percentage reaches 100.

 Initializes a new ProgressBarFillUIElement with a reference to the specified ProgressBarUIElement parent. Parent element Overriden. Initializes the appearance for the flood fill area of the element. AppearanceData to update with the appearance information. Appearance properties to resolve.

The main source of information for resolving the information for the is the .

Since the child must be positioned exactly as that of the TextElement for the , the , , and properties cannot be honored on the FillAppearance. Instead, the resolved values of the are used.

 Overriden. Handles the positioning of the child elements.

The ProgressBarFillUIElement contains only one child element - a .

 Overriden. Handles rendering the themed version of the progress fill. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element could be rendered using themes. Checks if the point is over the element. This may be overridden in derived classes for specialized hit test logic. In client coordinates Specifieds if we should ignore clipping or not Returns true if the point is over the element. Overriden. Indicates if the element needs to be clipped. Returns true so that all drawing of this element is expicitly clipped to its . Overriden. Returns the region of this element.

The region is used to clip the filled area to the percentage of the parent's based on the , , and . The area of the region itself is created based on the of the progress bar.

 Overriden. Indicates if the child elements need to be clipped. Returns true to ensure that all drawing of this element's child elements be expicitly clipped based on the . Overriden. Returns the rect used to clip the child elements. Returns the associated with the element. Class used to render the text for the filled area of an . Initializes a new text element used when rendering the text for the filled area of the progress bar. Parent uielement. Initial text to display. Overriden. Overrides the rendering of the text so that it will not be clipped by the individual segments when rendering a segmented style fill. The used to provide rendering information. Enumeration of property Ids. These values can be used to identify the UltraProgressBar specific property changes passed along by the event. BorderStyle property TextVisible property Orientation property Minimum property Maximum property Value property Appearance property FillAppearance property Appearances property Text property Step property PercentFormat property Style property FormatInfo property SegmentWidth property object Percent property PercentSettingsCollection UIElement for displaying the unfilled area of a ProgressBar.

The ProgressBarUIElement can have two child elements - a used to display the and a used to render the filled area of the ProgressBar. The element may be a child of the .

 Initializes a new ProgressBarUIElement with the specified UIElement parent and object implementing the interface. Parent UIElement Class providing the progress bar state information.

The info parameter specifies the class that implements the interface. This object will be used to query for the information required to display the ProgressBar.

 Initializes the progress bar uielement to retreive its information from the specified object. An object implementing the IProgressBarInfo interface Overriden. Initializes the appearance of the element. AppearanceData to update with the Appearance information. Appearance properties to resolve. Overriden. Handles positioning the child elements.

The ProgressBarUIElement can only contain two elements - a and a .

 Overriden. Draws the themed background for a progress bar. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element could be rendered using the system themes. Invoked when the backcolor for the element should be rendered. The used to provide rendering information. Returns the class which provides the state information for the progress bar. Returns the current text for the progress bar. Returns the percent for the progress bar.

The percent is calculated using the , , and .

 Returns the associated with the element. Overriden. Border style of the progress bar.

The used for the border of the ProgressBarUIElement is based on the .

 Enumeration of progress bar styles. By default, the filled area of the progress bar will render as a continuous block. The filled area's and is rendered using a solid bar. The filled area's and is rendered using segments [bars]. The filled area's and is rendered using segments [bars]. This differs from Segmented in that the last bar may appear smaller than the previous bars even when the fill is not complete. The filled area's is rendered using a solid bar with the Office2007 look. Type converter for displaying a list of options for the label. Initializes a new Overriden. Returns true to indicate that the type converter can return a list of standard values. A that provides a format context. True if should be called to find a common set of values the object supports; otherwise, false. Overridden. Returns a list of the label format constants available. Type descriptor context A containing a list of the label format constants available. UITypeEditor which provides a list of common bindable property names for the given list of controls.. Get the items for the UITypeEditor list Returns the object whose properties will be used for the list, based on the specified context. Validates the currently selected edit item Get a list of properties common to the items in the array. UITypeEditor for the property of a .

This class is a UITypeEditor for the property of a . The dropdown list of properties includes Bindable properties on the control.

 Returns the of the UltraControlContainerEditor context. An UITypeEditor for the property of a .

This class is a UITypeEditor for the property of a . The dropdown list of properties includes Bindable properties on the control.

 Returns the of the UltraControlContainerEditor context. An UITypeEditor for regular expressions. Used to determine the type of UIEditor that will be displayed. ITypeDescriptorContext UITypeEditorEditStyle specifying the type of UIEditor. Used to edit the value and convert the value as needed. ITypeDescriptorContext IServiceProvider Current value Edited value. A Form used by the RegexUITypeEditor. Clean up any resources being used. Indicates whether managed and unmanaged resources should be cleaned up. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. Constructor. The initial regular expression to display. Gets the user's regular expression, assuming they closed the dialog via the 'OK' button. Exposes a instance for this assembly. Returns the resource string using the specified name and default culture. Name of the string resource to return. Arguments supplied to the string.Format method when formatting the string. Returns the resource string using the specified resource name and default culture. The string is then formatted using the arguments specified. Name of the string resource to return. Returns the resource object using the specified name. Name of the resource item An object containing the specified resource Returns the for this assembly. This element occupies the square area at the lower right corner where a verticaal and horizontal scrollbar meet Constructor, initializes a new instance of the ScrollbarIntersectionUIElement class. Parent UIElement Initialize the appearance structure for this element The appearance structure to initialize. The properties that are needed Returns the ui role for the element. The editor for a property of type . Used to edit the value and convert the value as needed. ITypeDescriptorContext IServiceProvider Current value Edited value. Used to determine the type of UIEditor that will be displayed. ITypeDescriptorContext UITypeEditorEditStyle specifying the type of UIEditor. Required designer variable. Clean up any resources being used. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. MouseMessageType is used in MouseMessageInfo structure to identify which type of mouse message was received MouseDown message MouseMove message MouseUp message MouseMessageInfo structure identifies the message type, buttons and point infoprmation received on a mousedown, mouseup or mousemove message Constructor The specifying which buttons were pressed. The of the message. The x-coordinate of the mouse. The y-coordinate of the mouse. The mouse buttons that are pressed (left, right and/or middle). Read-only The mouse message type (down, up or move). Read-only The x coordinate of the mouse The y coordinate of the mouse ISelectionStrategy is implemented by SelectionStrategyBase class Called when a mouse down, up or move message is received. Note: MouseMove and MouseUp message processing calls this method only if this method returned true on the MouseDown and thereby captured the mouse. The selectable item that the mouse is over (may be null) Struct with the mouse message data Returning true on a mouse down message will cause the mouse to be captured Processes selection based on the keyboard action and current selection The selectable item based on the keystroke True to behave as if the shift key is down True to behave as if the control key is down True if Processes selection based on the keyboard action and current selection The selectable item based on the keystroke True to behave as if the shift key is down True to behave as if the control key is down True to force a toggle True if the item was successfully processed. Called when a cancelMode message is received Determines if item can be navigated to. The selectable item true if shift key is depressed. true if Ctrl key is depressed. True if the itme can be navigated to. True if this strategy supports selecting more than one item at a time (read-only). True if this strategy supports selecting only one item at a time (read-only). Usually implemented by the control, this is called by the selection strategy to perform various actions. Activate the specified item. Returns true if action was canceled, false otherwise. The selectable item True if the action was cancelled. Select the specified item. Returns true if action was canceled, false otherwise. The selectable item True to force a toggle Unselect the specified item. Returns true if action was canceled, false otherwise. The selectable item True to force a toggle Select the range from the pivot item to the specified item. The selectable item True to force a toggle Unselect the range from the pivot item to the specified item. The selectable item True to force a toggle Set the specified item as the pivot item. The selectable item Specifies if this action is part of a range selection. Returns the ISelectableItem that is the pivot item based on the type of item passed-in. The whose type will be used. The ISelectableItem that is the pivot item based on the specified item. Returns true if MaxSelectedItems will be exceeded by selecting the item. The selectable item Clear the initial selection Sets the initial selection. The selectable item Potentially translates the passed-in item to a ISelectableItem of a different type. For instance, the grid translates a passed-in cell into its parent row if CellClickAction is CellClickActionRowSelect. A reference to the to translate. Called when a dragging operation is about to begin. The selectable item The position of the mouse at the start of the drag Returning true means that it was handled internally and no further action should be taken Called on a mouse move during a dragging operation Called at the end of a dragging operation True if drag cancelled, false otherwise. This is a MouseUp notification that occurs after selectionStartegy has processed the MouseUp msg. The control can do anything it needs to (if anything) in response to this. For example, the MonthViewSingle control enters edit mode. Returns the selection stratgey for a specific item. The items whose selection strategy should be determined. The of the specified item. Returns true if the item can be selected without first clearing the current selection Selected item True if Item is selectable with current selection, false otherwise. Returns the control implementing the interface. The control implementing the interface. Returns the ISelectableItem compatible with the specified item that is nearest to the specified point. The to use for compatibility checks. The used for reference. The ISelectableItem compatible with the specified item closest to the specified point. Do a vertical scroll operation. This is called during a drag operation based on the position of the mouse cursor The interval that was used in the timer. This is passed along to provide additional context to the method. Do a horizontal scroll operation. This is called during a drag operation based on the position of the mouse cursor The interval that was used in the timer. This is passed along to provide additional context to the method. Called to see if the mouse is in a location that would cause a timer to be started to trigger vertical scrolling operations. The location of the mouse The interval (in milliseconds) to use when starting the timer. Return true to start the timer Called to see if the mouse is in a location that would cause a timer to be started to trigger horizontal scrolling operations. The location of the mouse The interval (in milliseconds) to use when starting the timer. Return true to start the timer Used to tell the selection manager to enter snaking mode if appropriate for the item type being selected. Snaking refers to range selection where the items being selected form a snaking pattern instead of a rectangular pattern. For eample, if in a grid that contained 5 columns the user was selecting a range of cells from different rows, the selection could be either rectangular or snake from row to row in which case all cells from intervening rows would get selected. Abstract base class derived by a set of classes to handle None, Single and Extended selection strategies. The drag threshold. Dragging will start when this is exceeded. Time for scroll dragging vertically Time for scroll dragging horizontally The initial X position. The initial Y position. Flag to indicate ignoring the next MouseMove. flag to keep track of whther we are currently in drag mode so that we can tunnel messages to OnDragMode and OnDragEnd functions Determines if item can be navigated to. The to check. True if the Shift key is pressed. True if the Ctrl key is pressed. True if the itme can be navigated to. This method is called when the selection manager cancels OnDragStart. Default implementation releases the capture. Called when dragging is to be started. It calls OnDragStart off the SelectionManager. Called when dragging is to be started. It calls OnDragStart off the SelectionManager. Called when currently dragging and mouse has moved. It calls OnDragMove off the SelectionManager. The current selection state of the strategy. Set the current selection state of the strategy. The to assign to the strategy. Returns true if dragging should start (when we're in preDrag mode). The default implementation checks to see if the x or y coords exceed the drag threshold. x position y position True if should start drag, false otherwise. SelectionStrategyBase constructor Required (usually implemented by the control). Called when a mouse down, up or move message is received. Note: MouseMove and MouseUp message processing calls this method only if this method returned true on the MouseDown and thereby captured the mouse. The selectable item that the mouse is over (may be null) Struct with the mouse message data Returning true on a mouse down message will cause the mouse to be captured Abstract method that processes selection based on the keyboard action The selectable item based on the keyboard action True to behave as if the shift key is down True to behave as if the control key is down True if the keyboard action has been processed successfully. Abstract method that processes selection based on the keyboard action The selectable item based on the keyboard action True to behave as if the shift key is down True to behave as if the control key is down True to force a toggle True if the keyboard action has been processed successfully. Called when a cancel mode message is received First kill the timer then restarts it with a new interval time interval in milliseconds VerticalScrollTimer_Tick event listener If the drag scroll row timer is still active kill it First kill the timer then restarts it with a new interval interval in milliseconds HorizontalScrollTimer_Tick event listener If the drag scroll row timer is still active kill it Determines during a drag operation whether timers are required to generate horizontal or vertical scrolling. The current location of the cursor The current item. Returns the associated SelectionManager (read-only) Returns true if multiple items can be selected at one time Returns true if only a single item can be selected at any given time The potential selection states of the strategy. Currently in single selection state. Currently in extended selection state. Currently in pre-drag state. Currently in pre-edit state. The item has been control-clicked on. Currently in a potential pre-drag state, used for manual dragging. Selection strategy that only allows contiguous selection and does not allow unselecting an item by control-clicking on it. Strategy used for multiple selection of items. at any time. Flag to indicate whether we should select or unselect. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the SelectionStrategyExtended class. The associated . The constructor is used by the Infragistics framework and should not be used by your code. Called when a mouse down, up or move message is received. The selectable item that the mouse is over (may be null) Struct with the mouse message data Returning true on a mouse down message will cause the mouse to be captured

Note: MouseMove and MouseUp message processing calls this method only if this method returned true on the MouseDown and thereby captured the mouse.

Mouse down handler. The item clicked on A struct containing mouse message information. True to capture the mouse. Returns true if item can be selected. Selected item true if shift key is down true if shift key is down true if item can be selected Mouse down handler that is used by both SelectionStrategyExtended and SelectionStrategyExtendedAuoDrag. SelectionStrategyExtendedAutoDrag passes true for the forceDrag parameter which puts strategy in preDrag mode when selecting. The item clicked on A struct containing mouse message information. If true will always puts strategy in preDrag mode. True to capture the mouse. Mouse up handler selected item The True if the event has been handled. This method is called when the selection manager cancels OnDragStart. Default implementation releases the capture. MouseMove handler. Since we release capture on mouse up, this means they are dragging. See if we need to start drag on item or if a new item is being selected. selected item Overloaded method that takes a parameter that denotes whether the existing selection should be cleared item is obtained based on the keyboard action and current selection. For example if the right arrow key is depressed and a cell is selected, the default action is NEXTCELL. The grid gets the cell 'Next-to' the currently selected cell and passes that cell to this stragegy True to behave as if the shift key is down True to behave as if the control key is down True if the keyboard action has been processed successfully. Override method that selects/unselects and/or activates items based on what is currently selected and if the shift/control are down. item is obtained based on the keyboard action and current selection. For example if the right arrow key is depressed and a cell is selected, the default action is NEXTCELL. The grid gets the cell 'Next-to' the currently selected cell and passes that cell to this stragegy True to behave as if the shift key is down True to behave as if the control key is down True to force a toggle True if the keyboard action has been processed successfully. Returns true if only a single item can be selected at any given time Returns true if discontinuous selection is allowed Returns whether the SetPivotItem method is called when a MouseUp message is processed. Returns whether the OnMouseUp method is called after a drag operation has just ended when a MouseUp message is processed. Constructor, initializes a new instance of SelectionStrategyContiguous Returns false to disallow discontinuous selection Strategy used when multiple items can be selected but pressing the left button and dragging does not select other items but instead starts dragging the selected item immediately. This is how Windows Explorer works. Constructor, initializes a new instance of SelectionStrategyExtendedAutoDrag. The constructor is used by the Infragistics framework and should not be used by your code. Mouse down handler. selected item Strategy used when selection is not supported Constructor, initializes a new instance of the SelectionStrategyNone The associated . Called when a mouse down, up or move message is received. The selectable item that the mouse is over (may be null) Struct with the mouse message data Returning true on a mouse down message will cause the mouse to be captured

Note: MouseMove and MouseUp message processing calls this method only if this method returned true on the MouseDown and thereby captured the mouse.

Overloaded method that takes a parameter that denotes whether the the keystroke being processed includes the space bar item is obtained based on the keyboard action and current selection. For example if the right arrow key is depressed and a cell is selected, the default action is NEXTCELL. The grid gets the cell 'Next-to' the currently selected cell and passes that cell to this stragegy True to behave as if the shift key is down True to behave as if the control key is down True to force a toggle True if the keyboard action has been processed successfully. Override method that selects/unselects and/or activates items based on what is currently selected and if the shift/control are down. item is obtained based on the keyboard action and current selection. For example if the right arrow key is depressed and a cell is selected, the default action is NEXTCELL. The grid gets the cell 'Next-to' the currently selected cell and passes that cell to this stragegy True to behave as if the shift key is down True to behave as if the control key is down True if the keyboard action has been processed successfully. Mouse down handler. selected item The True if the event has been handled. MouseMove handler. Since we release capture on mouse up, this means they are dragging. See if we need to start drag on item. selected item Strategy used when only a single item can be selected at any time. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the SelectionStrategySingle class. Called when a mouse down, up or move message is received. The selectable item that the mouse is over (may be null) Struct with the mouse message data Returning true on a mouse down message will cause the mouse to be captured

Note: MouseMove and MouseUp message processing calls this method only if this method returned true on the MouseDown and thereby captured the mouse.

Fired on Mouse Down The The True if the event has been handled. OnMouseDown handler that takes a third parameter that specifies whether we are forcing a drag or not. SelectionStrategySingleAutoDrag passes true to this. The The true if drag should be forced True if the event has been handled. Called on a mouse move message Mouse event arguments Called on a mouse move message The selectable item the mouse is over Mouse releated data struct Selects the item at or nearest the mouse location The location of the mouse Called when the mouse is released over an element Mouse event arguments Returning true will ignore the next click event Overloaded method that takes a parameter that denotes whether the the keystroke being processed includes the space bar item is obtained based on the keyboard action and current selection. For example if the right arrow key is depressed and a cell is selected, the default action is NEXTCELL. The grid gets the cell 'Next-to' the currently selected cell and passes that cell to this stragegy True to behave as if the shift key is down True to behave as if the control key is down True to force a toggle Override method that selects/unselects and/or activates items based on what is currently selected and if the shift/control are down. item is obtained based on the keyboard action and current selection. For example if the right arrow key is depressed and a cell is selected, the default action is NEXTCELL. The grid gets the cell 'Next-to' the currently selected cell and passes that cell to this stragegy True to behave as if the shift key is down True to behave as if the control key is down True if the keyboard action has been processed successfully. Returns true if only a single item can be selected at any given time Returns whether selection should be modified when the cursor passes over a different item than the selected one. The default implementation returns true. Strategy used when only a single item can be selected and pressing the left button and dragging does not select other items but instead starts dragging the selected item immediately. Constructor, initializes a new instance of SelectionStrategySingleAutoDrag. Mouse down handler. selected item The True if the event has been handled. Returns whether selection should be modified when the cursor passes over a different item than the selected one. ShadowManager places shadows around a top level form a specified rectangle. This constructor will place drop shadows around a form. The form to place a drop shadow around. The rectangle, in screen coodinates, to exclude from the drop shadows. Constructor The form that will own the shadow windows. The rectangle, in screen coodinates, to place the drop shadow around. The rectangle, in screen coodinates, to exclude from the drop shadows. If true, will place a shadow window on the right of the rectangle. If true, will place a shadow window on the bottom of the rectangle. Hides the shadows Refreshes the shadows Shows the shadows Shows the shadows The to exclude from drop shadows. The Rectangle to place drop shadows around. Called when the object is disposed. Gets or sets the rectangle, in screen coodinates, to exclude from the drop shadows. Gets or sets the opacity of the shadows. This should be set to the opacity of the form being shadowed Gets or sets the rectangle, in screen coodinates, to place the drop shadows around. Returns the form around which this instance is placing the drop shadows. Clean up any resources being used. Returns true if the window was created in a full trust environment. Responds to the WM_GETMINMAXINFO message Returns true if the window was created in a full trust environment. This is an abstract base call used for either vertical or or horizontal splitter elements Constructor parent UIElement true if vertical, false otherwise. Returns true if the element can be moved or resized vertically by clicking on the passed in mouse point In client coordinates True if the element can be resized vertically from the specified point. Returns true if the element can be moved or resized horizontally by clicking on the passed in mouse point In client coordinates True if the element can be resized horizontally from the specified point. Returns the range limits for adjusting the element in either or both dimensions. It also returns the initial rects for the vertical and horizontal bars that will need to be inverted during the mouse drag operation. The location of the cursor Returned limits Returns true if the point is in the adjustable area The to check. True if the point is in the adjustable area. The cursor to use over the adjustable area of the element The where the mouse currently lies. The to use over the adjustable area, or null if the area is not adjustable. Called after a move/resize operation. The object providing the change in the x and y directions. the default implementation sets the backcolor to the system color for controls The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. The style of borders to draw around the element Flags indicating which sides of the element to draw borders. The element's bounding rectangle in client coordinates Default thickness of the splitter in pixels Returns the ui role for the element. An element at the intersection of a vertical and horizontal slippter element Constructor, initializes a new instance of SplitterIntersectionUIElement Parent UIElement The used for left-right adjustments. The SplitterUIElement used for up-down adjustments. Initializes the element with the splitters to intersect The used for left-right adjustments. The SplitterUIElement used for up-down adjustments. Called when one of the intersecting splitter element's has been adjusted Called after a move/resize operation. The object providing the change in the x and y directions. Initialize the appearance structure for this element The appearance structure to initialize. The properties that are needed Returns true if the element can be moved or resized vertically by clicking on the passed in mouse point In client coordinates True if the element can be resized vertically from the specified point. Returns true if the element can be moved or resized horizontally by clicking on the passed in mouse point In client coordinates True if the element can be resized horizontally from the specified point. Returns the range limits for adjusting the element in either or both dimensions. It also returns the initial rects for the vertical and horizontal bars that will need to be inverted during the mouse drag operation. The position of the cursor Returned limits Returns true if the point is in the adjustable area to check true if point is in adjustable area we need specialized border drawing logic for a splitter intersection The used to provide rendering information. The cursor to use over the adjustable area of the element The where the mouse currently lies. The to use over the adjustable area, or null if the area is not adjustable. Flags indicating which sides of the element to draw borders. Returns the ui role for the element. Serializes a certain type of sub object as well as ensures the original local name assigned to a sub object is always used while that sub object remains on the form or control being designed. The type of sub object being serialized. Deserializes the specified code object into a sub object instance. The serialization manager used during deserialization. The previously serialized code object. The deserialized sub object. Serializes the specified sub object into a code object. The serialization manager used during serialization. The sub object to serialize. The serialized code object. Summary description for TabbedColorPicker. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the TabbedColorPicker class. Clean up any resources being used. Required method for Designer support - do not modify the contents of this method with the code editor. The size of the TabbedColorPicker cannot be changed The new Left property value of the control. The new Top property value of the control. The new Width property value of the control. The new Height property value of the control. A bitwise combination of the BoundsSpecified values. Fires when color is changed or selected Fires when tabPane is clicked The default size of the control Returns an array of custom colors The currently selected color Class for managing the drag action for a Initializes a new Owning TabManager Invoked when a drag operation should begin Offset of the mouse into the tab being dragged Tab being dragged Associated element True if the drag operation began Invoked during the when a drag should be initiated. Amount of offset between the mouse location when pressed down on the tab and the upper left of the tab element Tab item to drag Element associated with the tab. This element should not be stored and may be reused. True if the drag operation was started Invoked when the interval has elapsed for the scroll timer Invoked during a drag operation as the mouse is repositioned Mouse event arguments Invoked if the drag operation was cancelled. Invoked when the drag has ended so resources can be released. Invoked during a drag operation when the mouse button has been released. Invoked when the object is disposed so that it may release any resources. Indicates if there is a drag operation in progress Returns the being dragged Returns the owning Returns the indicator manager used to manage the indicator positions during a drag operation. Returns the timer used to detect whether we should scroll the tabs Indicates if a scroll timer has been created. Returns the control whose element started the drag operation. Indicates if the drag operation may be cancelled when the user presses the escape key. Structure containing information about a tab hit test operation. Returns the tab at the specified point Returns the element associated with the tab Returns the scroll direction (if any) that should occur based on the specified location Returns the distance from the group area Positive values indicate that the point was outside the row area, while negative values indicate the delta within the row area. Returns the area containing the rows Enumeration of scroll directions No scroll operation should be performed. The tabs should be scrolled to show the previous items The tabs should be scrolled to show the next items Interface implemented by a class that manages a collection of ITabItems. Creates a font used for all tab text measurements. Gets the current state of the tab. The whose state should be determined. Resolves the appearance for the client area (not including the tab header area). Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Resolves the default appearance for the tab area. The appearance structure to initialize. The properties that are needed Resolves the appearance for scroll buttons. Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Resolves the appearance for the scroll track area. The appearance structure to initialize. The properties that are needed Gets the Accessible Object of that parent of the tabs. The of the tabs' parent. Returns the control used to synchronize accessibility calls. Determines if the user can drag tabs around. Determines if a tab should be selected automatically when the mouse pauses over it for milliseconds. Returns the delay (in milliseconds) before a tab is automatically selected when the mouse is paused over it and is true. Determines whether mnemonics will be displayed. Determines whether the a tab's appearance changes when the mouse passes over it. Returns the image list to use. Returns the size of images in the tab's text area. Returns the transparent color used when drawing tool images.

When set to a color other than Color.Transparent (the default), all occurrences of the color in the image will be made transparent.

If a tab image is supplied by setting an Appearance.Image property to an Imagelist index, the ImageList's TransparentColor property is looked at first. If the property is set to Color.TransparentColor, then the components ImageTransparentColor is used. If it is set to Color.TransparentColor, then no color masking is done.

If a tab image is supplied by setting the Appearance.Image property to an image, the component's ImageTransparentColor is used. If it is set to Color.TransparentColor, then no color masking is done.

 Determines the spacing between tab rows Applies only to 'MultiRow...' s Determines the spacing between tabs Returns the maximum available size for the tab area. Returns the maximum width of a tab. Returns the maximum number of tab rows to display. Returns the minimum width of a tab. Determines if tab rows are re-arranged when a tab is selected. Determines if images will be scaled to . Indicates the style of the arrows displayed by the scroll buttons. Determines if scroll buttons will be shown. Determines the visual style of the scroll buttons. Determines which scroll buttons will be shown. Determines the size of the scroll thumb track.

This value is ignored unless is set to Thumb.

A value of zero will result in a default size being applied.

 Determines whether separators are rendered between button style tabs. Determines whether a close button is displayed. Determines whether a focus rect will be drawn on the selected tab. Determines whether tooltips will be shown over the tab area. Determines the style of the tabs. Determines the style of tab buttons. Determines how the tabs will be laid out. Determines where the tabs are displayed in relation to the control. Returns the amount of extra padding around the tab text and image. Returns a list of objects that implement the interface. Returns the size of a tab. This is the functional equivalent of the inbox tab control’s ‘ItemSize’ property. Returns the number of tabs on each row. Applies only to s SingleRowTabsPerRow and MultiRowTabsPerRow settings. Returns the orientation of the tab text. Returns the total number of tabs whose property is true. Interface implemented by a class that represents a single tab. Resolves the appearance for this tab. Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Enum indicating the state that should be resolved Determines if the user can drag this tab around. Determines if the tab is enabled. The fixed width of the tab. If a value less than 1 is returned the width will be calulated based on Determines whether the tab's appearance changes when the mouse passes over it. Determines how much space is reserved for an image. This should return the largest image that will be used by the tab in any of its s. The zero-based index of the tab in the list. Returns/sets an object that is used by the caller. It is completely opague to the implementor of this interface. Returns the tab's caption text. Returns tooltip text (if any) for this tab. Determines if the tab is visible. Returns the accessible object representing the tab item. TabItemSeparatorUIElement UIElement used to display the separator between two tabs. Parent element Renders the foreground/borders for the separator. The used to provide rendering information. Overriden. Used to prevent the backcolor from rendering for the tab line The used to provide rendering information. Indicates if the separator is rendered vertically TabButtonSeparatorUIElement UIElement used to display the separator between two tab buttons. Parent element TabCloseButtonUIElement Initializes a new Parent element Initializes the appearance for the tab close button element. Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to initialize Invoked when the button has been clicked. True to prevent the base implementation from being invoked. Handles the rendering of the element using the system themes. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element was able to successfully render with the system theme. Used to determine whether the remaining draw methods are invoked. Overrides the rendering of the spin button arrow. The used to provide rendering information. Invoked during the to resolve any remaining appearance values after the style specific appearance information has been initialized. AppearanceData structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Creates a new accessibility object for the UIElement. A new for the UIElement. Returns the owning object Determines the button style of the spin buttons. Gets/sets the enabled state of the element. Returns the associated with this element. Returns the accessible object that represents the element or its associated object. Indicates if the element supports accessibility. Enumeration of locations used for the caption and tab locations. Located at the top Located at the bottom Located on the left. Located on the right. Enumeration of tab sizing modes. Default tab sizing The size of the tab is based on a specified size. The tabs are sized up to the autosize width. If there is not enough room to display all of the tabs then the space is divided evenly amongst the tabs. The tab caption is sized based on the caption and image. The text and image are displayed for the active tab only. All other tabs display only the image. The size of each tab is a percentage of the available space based on the TabsPerRow setting The tabs are sized up to the autosize width. If there is not enough room to display the all of the tabs then the space is divided evenly amongst the tabs. If there is space left over then it is divided evenly among all the tabs so that the entire row is always filled. Enumeration of scroll arrow styles Default Standard style scroll arrows Visual Studio style scroll arrows Windows XP style scroll arrows Enumeration of tab styles Default tab style Standard Property Page style tabs Property Page style tab for the selected tab and hot tracked tab when hot tracking is enabled. State button style tabs Visual Studio style tabs Flat tabs Wizard The tabs have straight outwardly sloping sides (in the shape of a rhombus). The right side of each tab overlaps its neighboring tab half way up except for the selected tab which overlaps its neighboring tabs on both sides. Rounded property page style tabs with a single pixel border Sloped leading edge Tightly rounded corners Office2007 Ribbon style tabs. Enumeration of possible tab states The tab appears in its normal state. The tab is selected. The mouse is over the tab. The tab is active (displays a focus rectangle). Enumeration of tab scroll styles Scroll buttons are never displayed Scroll buttons are always displayed Scroll buttons are only displayed when there is not enough room to display all the tabs Enumeration of the possible caption orientations Default orientation The caption is not rotated The caption is rotated 90 degrees The caption is rotated 180 degrees The caption is rotated 270 degrees The default caption orientation is rotated 90 degrees The default caption orientation is rotated 180 degrees The default caption orientation is rotated 270 degrees Enumeration used to indicate which tab should be selected Select first visible, enabled tab Select next visible, enabled tab Select previous visible, enabled tab Select last visible, enabled tab Enumeration of types of tab lines The line displayed before the selected tab The line displayed after the selected tab The selected tab is not visible so the line is displayed across the entire length of the tabs. Enumeration of the possible text orientations Default orientation The text is not rotated The text is rotated 90 degrees from horizontal. The text is rotated 180 degrees from horizontal. The text is rotated 270 degrees from horizontal. The text is rotated 90 degrees from its default. The text is rotated 180 degrees from its default. The text is rotated 270 degrees from its default. Enumerator used to specify if tab rows are re-arranged when a tab is selected. A of 'PropertyPage' defaults to ‘SwapRow’. All other styles default to ‘HighlightTab’. The row that contains the selected tab is swapped with the row currently adjacent to the tab page area. The selected tab appears normal while all the other tabs are partially alpha-blended out. The row that contains the selected tab is scrolled so that it is adjacent to the tab page area but the rows always maintain their relative positions. If the selected tab is on one of the last rows then empty space may be displayed after the last tab row. The row that contains the selected tab is scrolled so that it is adjacent to the tab page area but the rows always maintain their relative positions. If the selected tab is on one of the last rows then the rows wrap around to the beginning so that the first row is adjacent to the last row. Enumerator used to determine what sets of scroll buttons are displayed. No scroll buttons are displayed. Use appropriate defaults. A set of scroll buttons is shown to scroll one tab or tab row forward or back. A set of scroll buttons is shown to scroll one page of tabs forward or back. A set of scroll buttons is shown to scroll to the first/llast tab. A scroll thumb and track area is shown. Enumerator used to determine what type of scrolling to do. Scroll forward. Scroll backward. Scroll forward a full page. Scroll backward a full page. Scroll so the first tab is visible. Scroll so the last tab is visible. The displayed tabs were changed - e.g. using EnsureTabItemInView Enumerator used to specify how tabs are sized and laid out with respect to one another. Each tab is sized based on its text and image size. If the items can’t fit scroll buttons will be provided to scroll tabs. Each tab is sized based on the TabSize property setting. If the items can’t fit scroll buttons will be provided to scroll tabs. Each tab is sized based on its text and image size. If there is not enough space for all tabs then the tabs are shortened enough to fit (longer tabs are shortened first until they are the same size as the smaller tabs). If there is space left over then it is divided evenly among all the tabs so that the entire row is always filled. The tabs are sized up to the autosize width. If there is not enough room to display all of the tabs then the space is divided evenly amongst the tabs. The text and image are displayed for the active tab only. All other tabs display only the image. The size of each tab is a percentage of the available space based on the TabsPerRow property setting. Each tab is sized based on its text and image size. If the items can’t fit on a single row then additional rows will be added. If the number of rows exceeds the ‘MaxVisibleTabRows’ property then scroll buttons will be provided to scroll rows. Each tab is sized based on the TabSize property setting. If the items can’t fit on a single row then additional rows will be added. If the number of rows exceeds the ‘MaxVisibleTabRows’ property then scroll buttons will be provided to scroll rows. Each tab is sized based on its text and image size. If the items can’t fit on a single row then additional rows will be added. If the number of rows exceeds the ‘MaxVisibleTabRows’ property then scroll buttons will be provided to scroll rows. If there is space left over on a tab row then it is divided evenly among all the tabs on the row so that each row is always filled. The size of each tab is a percentage of the available space based on the TabsPerRow property setting. If the items can’t fit on a single row then additional rows will be added. If the number of rows exceeds the ‘MaxVisibleTabRows’ property then scroll buttons will be provided to scroll rows. Enumerator used to determine where the tab area is relative to the control's tab page area. Default The tabs appear along the top edge of the control aligned to the left side. The tabs appear along the top edge of the control aligned to the right side. The tabs appear along the bottom edge of the control aligned to the left side. The tabs appear along the bottom edge of the control aligned to the right side. The tabs appear along the left edge of the control vertically aligned to the top. The tabs appear along the left edge of the control vertically aligned to the bottom. The tabs appear along the right edge of the control vertically aligned to the top. The tabs appear along the right edge of the control vertically aligned to the bottom. Determines where the tab close button will be displayed. Use the default close button location. The close button is not shown. Middle clicking the mouse on a tab will not close the tab page. The close button is displayed in a fixed location within the tab header area adjacent to the scroll buttons. A close button is displayed in each tab. Determines how the close button is positioned within the tab item. Use the default close button alignment. The close button is positioned before the image and text of the tab item. The close button is positioned after the image and text of the tab item. Determines whether the close button is visible in a certain location. Use the default close button visibility. A close button is always shown in the tab. A close button is only shown in the tab when it is the selected tab. A close button is only shown in the tab when it is the selected tab or it is hot tracked. A close button is never shown in the tab. Represents the reason why a tab is closing or has closed. The close button was clicked. The Close method was called on the tab. The middle mouse button was clicked on the tab. TabGroupUIElement Initializes a new Parent element The controlling TabManager. Handles the creation and positioning of the child elements. Initializes the appearance of the element. Structure to update with the appearance information Appearance properties to resolve Invoked when the mouse is moved over the element. Mouse event arguments Called when mouse capture has been aborted, for example, when the 'escape' key is pressed during a drag operation. Invoked when the mouse is release over the element. Mouse event arguments True to prevent further processing. Called during a drawing operation to ensure that all child elements are created and positioned properly. If the ChildElementsDirty flag is true then the default implementation will call PositionChildElements and reset the flag The control's main UIElement If true will call this method on all descendant elements Read-only property that returns the associated TabManager Returns the associated with this element. Indicates if capture for this element should be terminated if the escape key is pressed. UIElement representing the highlight area around a tab Constructor, initializes a new instance of the TabHighlightUIElement class. The parent element. The tab that this element will highlight. The associated manager. Initializes the appearance of the element. Structure to update with the appearance information Appearance properties to resolve Invoked when the borders for the element should be rendered. The used to provide rendering information. Overriden. The tab highlight element does not respond to the mouse. The . The current . False. Gets/Sets the associated tab. Returns the associated manager. Class that manages a collection of tabs Object that manages the display for a set of tabs. The default value for the TabWidth setting The default value for the TabHeight setting The default value for the MaxTabWidth setting The default value for the MinTabWidth setting The default value for the ScrollTrackExtent setting The default value for the ScrollArrowStyle setting Constructor The tabProvider of the tabs. called when the object is disposed. Invoked when the drag operation has been ended so resources may be cleaned up Creates a new instance of the UIElement for the tab area. The parent element. The newly created tabe area UIElement Notifies the manager that some state has changed. True to invalidate the entire tab area. Indicates that tabs were added, removed or rearranged. True to mark all tab metrics dirty. Notifies the manager that the base font information has changed. Notifies the manager that a tab item's state has changed. The tab whose state has changed. True to invalidate the tab (if it is visible). True to mark the tab's tezt size metrics in need of recalculation. True to mark the tab's image size metrics in need of recalculation. Scrolls the tab item into view. The tab item to check.

If the tab item is already in view this method does nothing.

Otherwise the tab is scrolled into view but is not selected.

 Returns a corresponding object in the next row whose and properties are both true. The reference tab. A tab that is selectable. If no tab is found then null is returned. Returns a corresponding object in the next row whose and properties are both true. The reference tab. If true will wrap around to the end of the collection if no previous selectable tab was found. A tab that is selectable. If no tabis found then null is returned. Returns a corresponding object in the previous row whose and properties are both true. The reference tab. A tab that is selectable. If no tab is found then null is returned. Returns a corresponding object in the previous row whose and properties are both true. The reference tab. If true will wrap around to the end of the collection if no previous selectable tab was found. A tab that is selectable. If no tabis found then null is returned. Returns a corresponding object in the next page of tabs whose and properties are both true. The reference tab. A tab that is selectable. If no tab is found then null is returned. Returns a corresponding object in the next page of tabs whose and properties are both true. The reference tab. If true will wrap around to the end of the collection if no previous selectable tab was found. A tab that is selectable. If no tabis found then null is returned. Returns a corresponding object in the previous page of tabs whose and properties are both true. The reference tab. A tab that is selectable. If no tab is found then null is returned. Returns a corresponding object in the previous page of tabs whose and properties are both true. The reference tab. If true will wrap around to the end of the collection if no previous selectable tab was found. A tab that is selectable. If no tab is found then null is returned. Returns the first object in the row whose property is true. The 1-based row number. The first visible tab on that row. Returns the last object in the row whose property is true. The 1-based row number. The last visible tab on that row. Returns the next object in the collection whose and properties are both true. The reference tab. The next tab that is selectable. If no next tab has its and properties set to true then null is returned. Returns the next object in the collection whose and properties are both true. The reference tab. If true will wrap around to the beginning of the collection if no next selectable tab was found. The next tab that is selectable. If no next tab has its and properties set to true then null is returned. Returns the next object in the collection whose property is true. The reference tab. The next tab that is visible. Returns the next object in the collection whose property is true. The reference tab. If true will wrap around to the beginning of the collection if no next visible tab was found. The next tab that is visible. Returns the next object in the same row whose property is true. The reference tab. The next tab that is visible. Gets the tab's visible position within its row. The tab in question. The zero-based ordinal position of the tab within its row. Returns the previous object in the collection whose and properties are both true. The reference tab. The previous tab that is selectable. If no previous tab has its and properties set to true then null is returned. Returns the previous object in the collection whose and properties are both true. The reference tab. If true will wrap around to the end of the collection if no previous selectable tab was found. The previous tab that is selectable. If no previous tab has its and properties set to true then null is returned. Returns the previous object in the collection whose property is true. The reference tab. The previous tab that is visible. Returns the previous object in the collection whose property is true. The reference tab. If true will wrap around to the end of the collection if no previous visible tab was found. The previous tab that is visible. Returns the previous object in the same row whose property is true. The reference tab. The next tab that is visible. Returns the amount of space needed to show the tabs. The amount of space needed to show the tabs Returns the size that the element would need to be to display all the items. size that the element would need to be to display all the items Returns a tab at the specified visible position. The zero-based ordinal position within the row. The 1-based row number. Will only return an enabled tab or null. A tab at that position. If there is no visible tab at the specified postion the last visible tab on the row will be returned. Returns a tab at the specified visible position. The zero-based ordinal position within the row. The 1-based row number. A tab at that position. If there is no visible tab at the specified postion the last visible tab on the row will be returned. Returns the row number of the tab. The whose row number should be determined. The 1-based number of the row that includes this tab. For SingleRow... s this will always return 1. Returns the display size of the tab item. The whose display size should be determined. The of the specified tab item. Returns the state of the tab item The whose state should be determined. The of the specified tab item. Returns the UIElement associated with the specified tab item The whose UIElement should be retrieved. The associated of the specified tab item. If the tab in not in view this method will return null. Checks the specified client location Client coordinates to evaluate Returns a TabHitTestInfo including information about that tab at that point and whether a scroll operation should occur. Invalidates a tab item. The tab to invalidate. Determines if a tab item is currently in view. The tab in question. True if the tab in currently in view. Moves a tab's visible position. The tab to move. Relative tab Position that the tab will be moved to relative to the False if the operation was cancelled or true if it succeeded. Performs a scrolling operation The type of scrolling operation. The number or tabs (or rows of tabs) to scroll. False if the operation was cancelled or true if it succeeded. Returns the representing a tab at the specified location. The used to located a tab. The tab at the specified point, or null if no tab element was found. Adjusts the specified horizontal and vertical alignments based on how the items is rotated. Horizontal alignment to adjust Vertical alignment to adjust True if the item will be displayed vertically True if the item is rotated 180 degrees Invoked when the mouse is over a tab item for the specified Associated tab Used to determine if the close button for the specified tab is enabled. The tab whose close button state is being queried or null if the close button is displayed within the header area. Indicates if there are tabs to scroll into view. Direction of the scroll button. The type of spin button to evaluate True if there are more visible tabs to scroll into view Invoked when the close button is clicked. The tab for which the close button was clicked or null if the close button within the tab header area is clicked. The reason the tab is closing. Creates a new instance of the UIElement for the tab area. The parent element. The newly created tab area UIElement Invoked when a must be created to manage a drag operation A used to manage tab drag operations Invoked when a object is needed. Invoked when the borders for the element should be rendered. The used to provide rendering information. The whose borders should be drawn. True if the borders were rendered. Renders a property page style tab. Side where the tab is located Rectangle encompassing the tab The used to provide rendering information. Base color used to render the borders Tab item for which the border is being rendered Renders a VisualStudio2005 style tab. Side where the tab is located Rectangle encompassing the tab The used to provide rendering information. Base color used to render the borders Tab item for which the border is being rendered Renders a VisualStudio2005 style tab. Side where the tab is located Rectangle encompassing the tab The used to provide rendering information. Base color used to render the borders Tab item for which the border is being rendered Whether to draw rounded corners at the base, per Office2007 Ribbon tabs. Returns a value indicating whether a tab item's close button is visible in the tab. The tab for which the close button will be displayed. Returns a value indicating whether a tab item's close button is visible in the tab. The tab for which the close button will be displayed. Returns the imagelist used to retreive the image for the specified tab Tab whose associated imagelist should be returned The associated with the specified tab. Returns the color map used to remap colors in the tab images Tab item for which the image Image property returned from the resolved Appearance data for the tab A color map array of colors to remap or null Returns the image for the specified tab Tab whose associated image should be returned Gets a UIElement that will be used to render the tab. This is the tab to be rendered. The parent toolbar element. This is used for re-use purposes. It may be null but if not it should be re-used if possible. The state of the tab. An instance of a class derived from . Returns the type of element that will be used to render the tab. The type of a class derived from . Indicates if the tab item should be given a higher priority.

Note: This method is only used by certain layout styles.

 The tab to evaluate True if the tab should be given higher priority by the layout. Indicates whether a scroll button is needed based on the and the amount of space required to display the items. True if a scroll button should be displayed. Invoked when the mouse has entered the bounds of a tab item element Associated tab Invoked when the mouse has left the bounds of a tab item element. Associated tab Invoked when the mouse is pressed on the tab element. Element representing the tab item Associated tab Mouse event arguments True if the default processing has been handled. Invoked when the mouse is pressed on the tab element. Element representing the tab item Associated tab Mouse event arguments True if the default handling has been processed. Invoked when the mouse hovers over a tab item element. UIElement that mouse was over Associated tab True if the tab's text was rendered completely Invoked when the mouse moves over the tab element. Element representing the tab item Associated tab Mouse event arguments Invoked when the mouse is released on the tab element. Element representing the tab item Associated tab Mouse event arguments Invoked when the tab item element is double clicked. Element representing the tab item Associated tab Invoked when the mouse is pressed and released on the tab element. Element representing the tab item Associated tab Invoked when the group has capture and the mouse has been moved. MouseEventArgs Invoked when the group element has capture and the mouse is released. MouseEventArgs True to prevent further processing. Resolves the appearance for the tab close button. Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to resolve The tab which contains the close button or null if the close butotn is in the header area. Current state of the button element Resolves the appearance for the tab scroll buttons. Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Invoked when the appearance for the scroll track should be resolved. Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Invoked when the appearance for the scroll thumb should be resolved. Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Invoked when the appearance for the scroll bar should be resolved. Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Resolves the appearance for the tab list button. Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Current state of the button element Whether a glow effect should be drawn on the tab item. The tab in question. Set to true to draw the glow. The base color of the glow. The location of the glow. The percentage of the height/width, depending on the orientation, of the to draw the top of the glow. The percentage used to draw the inner glow, based on the distance from the edge of the tab, or the middle of the circle, whichever is closer, to the edge of the circle. The percentage used to draw the outer glow, based on the distance from the edge of the tab, or the middle of the circle, whichever is closer, to the edge of the circle. Whether to draw an ambient glow gradient with the glow color. Returning true will prevent the TabHighlightUIElement from drawing the glow effect as it normally would. The tab item associated with the True if the should not render the glow effect. Scrolls a tab into view based on the direction specified. Direction to scroll Type of spin operation to perform Invoked when the tab has been clicked Associated tab Verifies all currently displayed items. Recalculates metrics if necessary. Returns the amount of visible area available for the tabs. The size of the visible area based on the Returns the associated with the specified area. Enumeration indicating the type of uirole to obtain. The UIRole associated with the specified area Returns the associated with this element. The used to determine the role. The associated . Occurs before the is changed. Occurs after the has changed. Occurs before a tab is moved. Occurs after a tab has been moved. Occurs before tabs are scrolled. Occurs after tabs are scrolled. Returns/sets the first tab the is currently visible. Returns the first object in the collection whose and properties are both true. If no tab has its property set to true then the first tab whose property is true will be returned. If no tab has its property set to true then null is returned. Returns the first object in the collection whose property is true. Returns the current hot tracked tab. Indicates if a drag operation is in progress Returns the last object in the collection whose and properties are both true. If no tab has its property set to true then the last tab whose property is true will be returned. If no tab has its property set to true then null is returned. Returns the last object in the collection whose property is true. Returns the resolved multi row selection style. Will never return 'DefaultForStyle'. Returns the style of scroll buttons displayed Returns the size of the scroll button area. Returns the resolved value indicating which scroll buttons to display. Returns the resolved border style for scroll arrow and close button. Returns/sets the currently selected Tab. Returns the size of the tab area. Returns the resolved border style for button style tabs. Returns the resolved orientation for the tabs Returns the border style for the tab page area (based on the setting. Returns the resolved orientation of the tab text. Returns the number of tab rows Returns the height of a row of tabs Returns the number of tab rows that are actually visible Returns the resolved amount of space between tabs Returns the resolved style of the tabs Gets the value indicating whether the selected tab item should be brought to the top of the z-order. Determines close button element is enabled.

Clicking the close button element should hide/close the .

 Determines where the close button(s) will be shown when the returns true. Returns the to select when is null. Returns the instance that manages the drag operations for the TabManager Returns the alignment of the buttons with respect to the

By default, the buttons are aligned adjacent to the client area. e.g. If the TabOrientation is set to TopLeft, the scroll and close buttons are aligned at the bottom edge of the tabs.

 Returns the amount of extra padding to be put on the sides of the tab item when using a SingleRowSizeToFit or MultiRowSizeToFit tab layout style. Returns the resolved extent for the scroll track. Specifies whether partial tabs should be displayed. Indicates if separator elements should be positioned between the tab items. Returns a resolved value indicating whether tab separators will be included. Separators are only shown when ShowTabSepatarors returns true and there is at least 1 pixel of inter-tab spacing. Specifies whether the Visual Studio 2005 style Tab List Button should be displayed. Returns the border sides that need to be rendered for tab. Returns the border widths for a tab Returns the color used to draw the tab item separator.

Note:

Currently this is only used for the Office2007Ribbon tab style Returns the secondary color used to draw the tab item separator.

Note:

Currently this is only used for the Office2007Ribbon tab style The tabProvider of the tabs. Returns the text rendering mode for the tab items. Returns the class providing the tool tip information. Indicates if the tab is displayed vertically. Indicates if the tab caption is rendered vertically. Indicates if the tab caption is rotated 180 degrees. Returns the size of the scroll and close buttons Indicates if the line between the tabs and the tab client area should be rendered. Returns the extra height given to the selected tab. The amount before the tab that the selected tab extends The amount after the tab that the selected tab extends Returns the amount of space in the visible area before the tabs. Returns the amount of pixels on the left to leave before the tabs start Gets the resolved distance between the edge of the control and the first tab. Returns the amount of space in the visible area after the tabs. Returns the amount of pixels after the tabs Gets the resolved minimum distance between the edge of the control and the last tab. Returns a instance that indicates the amount of space between the edge of the tab area and the elements within it. Returns the height of the line rendered on the side of the tab opening. Returns the Menu Style tab list context menu. Should be overriden in derived class. Returns the associated with the tab area. Delegate for handling the event. Delegate for handling the event. Delegate for handling the event. Delegate for handling the event. Event parameters used for cancelable events that pass in an as an argument. Constructor The associated . The toolbar. Event parameters used for non-cancelable events that pass in an as an argument. Constructor The tab. Event parameters used for the event. Constructor The that was selected before the change. The newly-selected tab item. The tab that was selected previously. Event parameters used for the event. Constructor Event parameters used for the event. Initializes a new Tab that was repositioned Tab that the was repositioned relative to. Position relative to the that the was repositioned The tab that the tab being moved is adjacent to. The position relative to the that the repositioned tab was placed at. Event parameters used for the event. Initializes a new Tab being repositioned Tab that the will be repositioned relative to. Position relative to the that the will be repositioned The tab that the tab being moved will be adjacent to. The position relative to the that the tab will be moved to. The Accessible object for a tab. Constructor The associated . The of the specified tab item. Performs the default action associated with this accessible object. Retrieves the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. The zero-based index of the accessible child. An AccessibleObject that represents the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Retrieves the object that has the keyboard focus. An AccessibleObject that specifies the currently focused child. This method returns the calling object if the object itself is focused. Returns a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no object has focus. Returns the control used to synchronize accessibility calls. A control to be used to synchronize accessibility calls. Retrieves the currently selected child. An AccessibleObject that represents the currently selected child. This method returns the calling object if the object itself is selected. Returns a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic) if is no child is currently selected and the object itself does not have focus. Retrieves the child object at the specified screen coordinates. The horizontal screen coordinate. The vertical screen coordinate. An AccessibleObject that represents the child object at the given screen coordinates. This method returns the calling object if the object itself is at the location specified. Returns a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no object is at the tested location. Navigates to another accessible object. One of the values. The at the specified navigation direction. Modifies the selection or moves the keyboard focus of the accessible object. One of the values. Gets the location and size of the accessible object. Gets a string that describes the default action of the object. Gets a string that describes the visual appearance of the specified object. Not all objects have a description. Gets a description of what the object does or how the object is used. The accessible name for the data area. Gets the parent of an accessible object. Gets the role of this accessible object. Gets the state of this accessible object. Returns the tab's description Returns the associated tab. Returns the associated tab. Enumeration used to identify the used by elements in the tab manager. The client area including the tab line separator but excluding the tab item area. The area containing the tab items and scroll buttons The button used to close the selected tab item. The button used to display the tab item list. The close button which appears within the selected tab. Initializes a new instance Returns the state of the tab item Returns the control used to synchronize accessibility calls. A control to be used to synchronize accessibility calls. Gets the Accessible Object of that parent of the tabs. Returns the Accessible Object of that parent of the tabs. Determines if the property needs to be serialized. True if the needs to be serialized. Resets the contents of the object to their default values. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. True if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the contents of the tabs collection Returns the first visible tab in the collection. True if disabled tabs should be skipped The first visible tab or null if there are no visible tabs Returns the last visible tab in the collection. True if disabled tabs should be skipped The last visible tab or null if there are no visible tabs Returns the visible tab immediately following the specified tab. Tab to begin the search True if disabled tabs should be skipped The next visible tab or null if there are no visible tabs after the specified tab Returns the visible tab immediately preceeding the specified tab. Tab to begin the search True if disabled tabs should be skipped The previous visible tab or null if there are no visible tabs before the specified tab Resolves the appearance for the tab item area. Structure to update with the appearance information Appearance properties to resolve Resets the object to its default values. Indicates if the object needs to be serialized. True if any of the properties differ from their default values. Selects a tab based on the specified direction. Identifies which pane should be selected Sorts the items in the list using the specified comparer Invoked when a property has changed on a subobject. Object containing information about the change. Gets/sets the settings for the tab items collection. Returns the collection of tab items. Stores the size available for the tabs This member supports the and is not intended to be used directly from your code. This member supports the and is not intended to be used directly from your code. UIElement for a button style tab item. Initializes a new Parent element Associated tab The associated manager. Default drawfocus method draws a focus rect inside the element's borders The used to provide rendering information. Returns the widths of all four borders The of the borders. The of the borders. A instance describing the widths of all four borders. Initializes the appearance of the element. Structure to update with the appearance information Appearance properties to resolve Invoked when the mouse is moved over the element. Invoked when the mouse is moved out of the element. Invoked when element is being disposed. Invoked when the mouse has hovered over the element for a specified period of time. Invoked when the checked state of the button has been changed. Invoked when the borders for the element should be rendered. The used to provide rendering information. Invoked when the user double clicks on an element. True if the area of the element that was double clicked was an adjustable area. Invoked when the mouse is moved over the element. Mouse event arguments Invoked when the mouse is release over the element. Mouse event arguments True to prevent further processing. Invoked when the mouse is released over the element. Invoked when the mouse is pressed on the element. Mouse event arguments True if the area pressed is an adjustable area By ref argument used to set the element that will capture the mouse True if further processing should be prevented Handles the creation and positioning of the child elements. Called when mouse capture has been aborted, for example, when the 'escape' key is pressed during a drag operation. Invoked when the state of the button changes. Gets/sets the tab item associated with the element. Returns the owning object. Returns the button style for the element. Indicates if capture is cancelled when the escape key is pressed. Indicates if the element wants to receive mouse hover notifications. Gets/sets the enabled state of the element. Indicates if the button's state may be changed. Returns flags indicating which borders will be drawn Returns true if a focus rect should be drawn. Returns the associated with this element. Returns the rectangle to use when positioning the child elements Interface implemented by an object managing a group of tab items. Initializes a new Owning tab info object Initializes a new with the specified initial capacity Initial capacity for the collection Owning tab info object Clears the collection Gets the index of the item in the collection. The item to check. The index in the collection. Sees if the item is in the collection. The item to check. True if the item is in the collection. Copies the items of the collection into the array. The array to receive the items. The array index to begin inserting the items. Adds the specified tab item to the collection. Tab item to add to the collection Adds the specified tabs to the collection. Array of tabs to add to the collection Removes the specified item from the collection The to remove from the collection. Removes the item at the specified index. Index of the item to remove Inserts the item at the specified index. Item to insert into the collection Index at which the item should be inserted. Invoked when a property has changed on a subobject. Object containing information about the change. Interface implemented by an object managing a group of tab items. Returns the owning object Indicates if the collection is readonly. Returns the initial capacity for the colleciton. Returns the at the specified index. Returns the count of visible items in the collection. UIElement for displaying a single tab item. Initializes a new Parent element Tab item to be rendered. The associated manager. Default drawfocus method draws a focus rect inside the element's borders The used to provide rendering information. Returns the widths of all four borders The of the borders. The of the borders. A instance describing the widths of all four borders. Initializes the appearance of the element. Structure to update with the appearance information Appearance properties to resolve Invoked when the mouse is moved over the element. Invoked when the mouse is moved out of the element. Invoked when the mouse is pressed on the element. Mouse event arguments True if the area pressed is an adjustable area By ref argument used to set the element that will capture the mouse True if further processing should be prevented Invoked when the borders for the element should be rendered. The used to provide rendering information. Invoked when element is being disposed. Invoked when the mouse has hovered over the element for a specified period of time. Invoked when the mouse is released over the element. Invoked when the user double clicks on an element. True if the area of the element that was double clicked was an adjustable area. Invoked when the mouse is moved over the element. Mouse event arguments Invoked when the mouse is release over the element. Mouse event arguments True to prevent further processing. Overriden. Draws the themed background for a progress bar. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element could be rendered using the system themes. Checks if the point is over the element. This may be overridden in derived classes for specialized hit test logic. In client coordinates Specifieds if we should ignore clipping or not Returns true if the point is over the element. Invalidates this element True to force an immediate update Handles the creation and positioning of the child elements. Called when mouse capture has been aborted, for example, when the 'escape' key is pressed during a drag operation. Overriden. Renders the background for the tab item. The used to provide rendering information. Gets/sets the tab item associated with the element. Returns the owning object. Gets/sets the border style for the element. Indicates if capture is cancelled when the escape key is pressed. Indicates if the element wants to receive mouse hover notifications. Gets/sets the enabled state of the element. Returns flags indicating which borders will be drawn Returns true if a focus rect should be drawn. Returning true causes all drawing of this element to be expicitly clipped to its region Returns the region of this element. Returns the rectangle to use when positioning the child elements Returns the associated with this element. Gets the tab item state to use when drawing the tab item themed. UIElement used to display the line rendered between the tab items and the client area. Initializes a new TabLineUIElement Parent element TabManager object associated with the line being rendered Reinitializes the values of the tab info and line type TabManager object associated with the line being rendered Overriden. Used to render the lines for the edge of the tab client area. The used to provide rendering information. Draws the tab line using the specified color and location. The used to provide rendering information. Pen used to draw the line Location of the line Rectangle within which the line will be rendered Overriden. Used to prevent the backcolor from rendering for the tab line The used to provide rendering information. Overriden. Used to prevent the background image from rendering for the tab line The used to provide rendering information. Initializes the appearance of the element. Structure to update with the appearance information Appearance properties to resolve Overriden. Draws the themed background for a progress bar. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element could be rendered using the system themes. Returns the associated with this element. UIElement used to display the area between the tab line and the tab contents. Initializes a new TabClientAreaEdgeUIElement Parent element TabManager object associated with the line being rendered Initializes the appearance of the element. Structure to update with the appearance information Appearance properties to resolve Reinitializes the associated tab manager. TabManager object associated with the client area being rendered TabListButtonUIElement Initializes a new Parent element Initializes the appearance for the tab list button element. Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to initialize Invoked when the button has been clicked. True will prevent the base implementation from being invoked. Handles the rendering of the element using the system themes. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element was able to successfully render with the system theme. Used to determine whether the remaining draw methods are invoked. Overrides the rendering of the tab list button. The used to provide rendering information. Invoked during the to resolve any remaining appearance values after the style specific appearance information has been initialized. AppearanceData structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Creates a new accessibility object for the UIElement. A new for the UIElement. Returns the owning object Determines the button style of the tab list button. Gets/sets the enabled state of the element. Returns the associated with this element. Returns the accessible object that represents the element or its associated object. Indicates if the element supports accessibility. Delegate for handling the event. Delegate for handling the event. Event parameters used for the event. Constructor /// Returns the how much was scrolled. For single row s this is the number of tabs that were scrolled. For multi-row s this is the number of tab rows that were scrolled. Returns the type of scroll (next, previous, first, last etc.) Returns the type of scroll (next, previous, first, last etc.) Returns the how much was scrolled. For single row s this is the number of tabs that were scrolled. For multi-row s this is the number of tab rows that were scrolled. Event parameters used for the event. Constructor Returns the type of scroll operation that is being performed (e.g. next, previous, first, last etc.) Returns the number of increments that are being scrolled. For single row s this determines the number of tabs to scroll. For multi-row s this determines the number of tab rows to scroll. Enumeration of property ids for the tab related classes TabItem Text property Enabled property ToolTip property Appearance property HotTrackAppearance property SelectedAppearance property TabWidth property Appearances property HotTracking property TabAreaAppearance property TabSizing property SelectedTabIndex property FirstDisplayedTabIndex property FirstDisplayedTab property SelectedTab property Visible property Settings property Tabs property TabInfo property TabButtonStyle property TabStyle property ShowToolTips property AutoSelect property AutoSelectDelay property SelectedTabAppearance property HotTrackTabAppearance property TabAppearance property TabLocation property ShowCloseButton property ScrollButtons property ShowButtonSeparators property InterTabSpacing property CaptionOrientation property ButtonStyle property TabItemSize TabHeight property ImageSize property ScaleImages property HotkeyPrefix property ImageList property ScrollArrowStyle property Padding property TabsPerRow property property UIElement representing a row of tab items Initializes a new Parent element Checks if the point is over the element. This may be overridden in derived classes for specialized hit test logic. In client coordinates Specifieds if we should ignore clipping or not Returns true if the point is over the element. This method is called from as an optimization to prevent searching down element paths that can't possibly contain the element that is being searched for. The (or base class type) of the UIElement to look for. The contexts that must all match with the contexts of the UIElement. True if there is any possiblity that the element being sought is a descendant of this element. If this method returns false then descendant elements of this element will be excluded from the search. Handles the creation and positioning of the child elements. Renders the backcolor for the element. The used to provide rendering information. Returns the owning object Indicates if the child elements should be clipped to the parent element. Returns the first displayed in the row. TabScrollButtonUIElement Initializes a new Orientation of the spin buttons Parent element Initializes a new Orientation of the spin buttons Parent element Interval between click event when holding down the mouse button over the element. Interval before initiating the first autorepeat click. Used to notify that the spin button's click has fired. Direction of the spin button. The type of spin button clicked Used to determine whether a spin button should be disabled during a spin operation and when the elements are positioned. Direction of the spin button. The type of spin button to evaluate A boolean indicating whether the button should be enabled or disabled. Initializes the appearance for the scroll button elements. Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to initialize Invoked when the method is invoked to allow the spin button owner to render the individual buttons The used to provide rendering information. True if the draw operation was handled Invoked when the method is invoked to allow the spin button owner to render the individual buttons The used to provide rendering information. True if the draw operation was handled Handles the creation and positioning of the child elements. Returns the extent of the element to contain within the spin buttons The number of buttons. The total extend of the element. The extent of the element within the spin buttons. Creates a new accessibility object for the UIElement. A new for the UIElement. Returns the owning object Determines the button style of the spin buttons. Returns the element to contain within the spin buttons Returns the accessible object that represents the element or its associated object. Indicates if the element supports accessibility. Class representing the settings for a Default value for the Default value for the Initializes a new instance Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the Appearances collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the Appearances collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the Appearances collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the Appearances collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. True if the value of the property differs from the default value Resets the property to its default value. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. True if the value of the property differs from the default value Resets the property to its default value. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. True if the value of the property differs from the default value Resets the property to its default value. Invoked when a property has changed on a subobject. Object containing information about the change. Resets the object to its default values. Indicates if the object needs to be serialized. True if any of the properties differ from their default values. Gets/sets the appearances collection used by the collection and items. Gets/sets whether hot tracking is enabled. Gets/sets the appearance for the area behind the tabs. Indicates whether an object has been created. Returns true when the Appearance object for the property has been created.

Use this property to determine if an object has been created. Appearance objects in general are not created until the properties associated with them are accessed.

 Gets/sets the sizing used for the tab items. Returns the resolve sizing mode for the tabs Gets/sets the style of button to render for a Buttons style tab. Gets/sets the style of tab to render. Returns the resolved TabStyle Gets/sets if tooltips should be displayed. Gets/sets if the tab should be selected automatically when the mouse is over an item. Returns the resolved value Gets/sets the delay before a tab is automatically selected when the mouse is over the item. Gets/sets the default appearance for the selected tab Indicates whether an object has been created. Returns true when the Appearance object for the property has been created.

Use this property to determine if an object has been created. Appearance objects in general are not created until the properties associated with them are accessed.

 Gets/sets the default appearance for the selected tab Indicates whether an object has been created. Returns true when the Appearance object for the property has been created.

Use this property to determine if an object has been created. Appearance objects in general are not created until the properties associated with them are accessed.

 Gets/sets the default appearance for the tab item under the mouse. Indicates whether an object has been created. Returns true when the Appearance object for the property has been created.

Use this property to determine if an object has been created. Appearance objects in general are not created until the properties associated with them are accessed.

 Gets/sets the location of the tabs Gets/sets whether a close button is displayed. Gets/sets when scroll buttons are displayed. Gets/sets whether separators are rendered between button style tabs. Gets/sets the amount of spacing between tab items. Gets/sets the default fixed width size for the tab. Gets/sets the orientation of the tab caption. Returns the resolved orientation of the tab caption. Indicates if the tab is displayed vertically. Indicates if the tab caption is rendered vertically. Indicates if the tab caption is rotated 180 degrees. Gets/sets the style of button to render for the scroll arrows and close button. Gets/sets the height of the tabs. When set to -1, the value is based on the size of the tab items. Gets/sets when images should be scaled. Gets/sets the size of the images for the tab. Determines how mnemonics in the caption are displayed. Gets/sets the imagelist used to obtain images for the appearances. Gets/sets the style of scroll buttons displayed Gets/sets the amount of padding around the image and text of the tab. Gets/sets the number of tabs to be displayed in the visible area.

Note: This property is only used when the is set to TabsPerRow

 Returns or sets the maximum width for a tab item.

The MaxTabWidth determines the maximum width for a single tab item. When set to 0, the default value, the tab has no maximum size.

 Immutable class which defines the rotation and flow direction of text. Creates a new instance.

Note: If a vertical flow direction is specified, the value of the rotation angle must be 0 degrees. Rotating vertical flow text is not supported.

The angle of rotation of the text, in degrees, counter-clockwise from the horizontal line. The flow direction of the text. is a value which is not defined in the enumeration. is Vertical and is not 0. is not in the range of -90 to 90 degrees inclusive. Determines whether the specified value is equal to this . The value to compare to this . True if the value is equivalent to this . Serves as a hash function for a . A hash code for the this . Gets the string representation of this . A string representation of this . Gets the angle of rotation of the text, in degrees, counter-clockwise from the horizontal line. Gets the flow direction of the text. Gets a representing horizontal flow text. Gets a representing horizontal flow text which is rotated 45 degrees. Gets a representing horizontal flow text which is rotated 90 degrees. Gets a representing horizontal flow text which is rotated -45 degrees. Gets a representing horizontal flow text which is rotated -90 degrees. Gets a representing vertical flow text. Provides information about the transition Initializes a new A value between -100 and 100 that indicates how the transition should progress. A value of 10 or greater indicating the duration of the transition in milliseconds. Returns a value indicating how the transition should progress. Returns a value indicating the duration of the transition in milliseconds. Performs a transition from one image to another Graphics object into which the transition should be rendered Location where the transition should be rendered Original image of the area before the transition started Image to which the area is being transitioned Provides information about the transition. Current ease percentage By reference parameter that can be used to maintain information between the transition steps. If the object is disposable, it will be disposed when the transition is complete/cancelled. Performs a transition from one image to another Graphics object into which the transition should be rendered Location where the transition should be rendered Original image of the area before the transition started Image to which the area is being transitioned Provides information about the transition. Current ease percentage By reference parameter that can be used to maintain information between the transition steps. If the object is disposable, it will be disposed when the transition is complete/cancelled. Constants which describe a specific user interface action. No specific user interface action was taken, i.e., any change that took place was triggered by programmatic intervention by the developer. The user pressed a mouse button over the element. The user clicked on an element with the mouse. The user released a mouse button, ending the capture of the element. The user double-clicked on an element with the mouse. The user moved the mouse during a drag/resize operation while the element was captured. The user moved the mouse wheel by one or more detents. The user panned with the mouse. The user triggered an action by pressing a key. The user triggered an action by manipulating a scrollbar element. The user triggered an action via the section 508 (a.k.a. "accessibility") interface. Contains information about an event that was triggered by user interaction. Interface which is implemented by an EventArgs-derived class that can provide information about the user interaction that triggered the event. UIActionEventArgs class UIAction enumerationclass Returns the UIAction constant which describes the nature of the user interaction that triggered an event. Creates a new instance of the UIActionEventArgs class. The UIAction constant which describes the nature of the user interaction. Returns the UIAction constant which describes the nature of the user interaction that triggered an event. Returns the UIAction constant which describes the nature of the user interaction that triggered an event. Cancelable event arguments class which contains information about an event that was triggered by user interaction. Creates a new instance of the UIActionCancelableEventArgs class. The UIAction constant which describes the nature of the user interaction. Returns the UIAction constant which describes the nature of the user interaction that triggered an event. Returns the UIAction constant which describes the nature of the user interaction that triggered an event. The designer for Infragistics parent controls (i.e., controls that contain other controls but are not necessarily containers). The designer for Infragistics parent controls (i.e., controls that contain other controls but are not necessarily containers). Default Calculation of TextBaseline Override to provide textbaseline implementation Overriden. Allows the designer to change or remove the properties of the component being designed. Table of PropertyDescriptor instances Protected method that is called when the user double clicks on a point that is design time active.

The default implementation calls DoDefaultAction which will normally bring up the code window.

However, this method can be overridden to prevent this behavior. For example, button type elements would want a double click to generate 2 clicks instead of bringing up the code window.

Note: If the point is over a button or scrollbar element the default implementation does nothing.

 Initializes the designer with the specified component. Component the designer is working with. Cleans up the designer when it is being disposed. Boolean indicating whether managed and unmanaged clean up should occur. Determines if the point clicked upon should be handled by the control or the designer. Screen coordinates True if the control should handle the mousedown. Otherwise false to let the designer process the message. Handles the beginning a design time drag. X coordinate in screen coordinates. Y coordinate in screen coordinates. Handles the end of a design time drag. Boolean indicating if the drag was cancelled. Handles the design time dragging notification. i.e. The mouse was pressed and moved on part of the control at design time. X coordinate in screen coordinates. Y coordinate in screen coordinates. Get Default ParentControlDesigner SnapLine Implementation Overrides ControlDesigner SnapLines Add Text BaseLine SnapLine to default implementation Override to provide additional custom SnapLines Overridden to add verbs to the collection Allows derived classes to prevent the default verbs from being added to the Verbs collection. Return true to allow the designer's default context menu to be displayed, false to suppress it. Returns the control that should be used by the About Dialog and CustomPropertyDialog. If not overridden, it returns the control being designed. This is used by the DependentTextUIElement class to get necessary information for rendering text Gets the text to display The whose display text should be determined. The text to display. Returns true for multiline text The being checked. True if the text should be rendered on multiple lines. Resolves the padding around the text The being checked. The element to be intialized. Adjusts the text's rect for special cases (e.g. a button down shift) The being checked. The to adjust. Returns true if the text is to be displayed vertically The being checked. True if the text is to be displayed vertically. Determines how mnemonics in the text are rendered. The being checked. The indicating how mnemonics in the text are rendered. Returns true if the text is to be wrapped The being checked. True if the text should be wrapped. Abstract base class for text providers. Implements most methods with default implementations Contsructor, initializes a new instance of the TextProviderBase class. Parent UIElement Returns the border style none The whose border style should be retrieved. The of the specified element. Returns 0 The whose border sides should be retrieved. The of the specified element. Returns the parent element's cursor The whose cursor should be retrieved. A for the specified element. Does nothing The associated . The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. Returns false The being checked. True if the text should be rendered on multiple lines. Does nothing The being checked. The element to be intialized. Does nothing The being checked. The to adjust. Returns false The being checked. True if the text is to be displayed vertically. Returns true if the text is to be wrapped. The being checked. True if the text should be wrapped. The default implementation returns true for multi-line text and false for single-line text. Abstract method The whose display text should be determined. The text to display. Determines whether mnemonics in the text are rendered. Dependent uielement HotkeyPrefix.None by default to indicate that the text should be rendered as is. A text UIElement that gets the text related information from an object that implements the IUIElementTextProvider interface. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the DependentTextUIElement class. The parent element The text provider Initialize the provider The that the element should use to get text rendering information. Initialize the appearance structure for this element The appearance structure to initialize. The properties that are needed Calls the provider's implementation A reference to the that should be adjusted. Sets the ui role for this element. The provider of the text element The text string. The get calls the provider's GetText method. The set is not supported The get calls the provider's IsMultiLine method. The set is not supported The get calls the provider's WrapText method. The set is not supported The get calls the provider's IsVertical method. The set is not supported Number of pixels in the X dimension (left/right) and the Y dimension (above/below) of extra space to leave around the text The set is not supported The border style of the element (read-only) Bits flags that specify which borders to draw (read only) Indicates how mnemonics are rendered in the text. The get checks the provider's HotkeyPrefix method. The set is not supported Returns the associated with this element. TimeZoneEditor class implementation Creates a new instance of the TimeZoneEditor class Creates a new instance of the class The EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived associated with this editor Called when the TimeZoneEditor is disposed Drops down the dropdown. True if successful. InternalResolveValueListAppearance The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. Finds the object whose is equal to the specified standardName, or null if no object is found. The value to match The object whose matches, or null if no match was found. Finds the object whose is equal to the specified standardName, or null if no object is found. The value to match Specifies whether an exception should be thrown when the method fails to locate a TimeZoneInfo object whose StandardName property matches the value of the parameter. The object whose matches, or null if no match was found. Thrown if the value of the parameter fails to match the StandardName property of any instance in the time zone list obtained from the local machine's registry. Causes the list to be repopulated with the names of available time zones. Returns an IValueList from the specified embeddable element, or null if none is provided. The EmbeddableUIElementBase-derived element from which to obtain the owner info. Note that this parameter is ignored for the FontNameEditor. An IValueList interface implementor, or null if the owner does not provide one. Determines if the type can be edited. The data type to test Returns true if the type can be edited. Determines if the type can be rendered. The data type to test Returns true if the type can be edited. Clones the editor Used to initialize the state of the object based on another editor instance. Editor whose property values are to be copied Creates a copy of the embeddable editor with the specified default owner. An instance of the default EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class from which to obtain owner-specific information A copy of the editor Returns the internal ValueList object used by the editor Returns the IValueList to be used by this instance of the editor Contains information about the associated time zone. Returns the string representation () of this object Returns the date/time of the specified time for the time zone represented by this object. The translation is made using this computer's time zone information. The date/time to be translated. The translated date/time for this time zone.

If the Kind property of the specified is set to 'Local', the specified time is implied to already be expressed as a local time. This method returns the time unchanged in that case. If the Kind property is set to 'Utc' or 'Unspecified', the specified time is implied to be expressed as a Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). This method converts the specified time to the local time for this time zone, applying the to adjust for daylight saving time if applicable.

Note: If the caller is uncertain as to the value of the specified time's Kind property, use the overload of this method which allows the DateTimeKind to be expressed independently of the value of the specified time's Kind property.

Returns the date/time of the specified time for the time zone represented by this object. The translation is made using this computer's time zone information. The date/time to be translated. A DateTimeKind value which describes whether the specified should be interpreted as a local or universal time. Note that if this parameter is set to 'Unspecified', the time is interpreted as a universal time. The translated date/time for this time zone. Returns whether the specified date and time is within a daylight saving time period for the time zone represented by this object. The to check.

Note: Starting in the spring of 2007, daylight saving time (DST) start and end dates have changed for several time zones, including all time zones in the United States. As a result of this change, the IsDaylightSavingTime method now relies more heavily on the Windows Registry than it did previously in order to function. If the time zone entries in the registry of the local computer are not up to date, the IsDaylightSavingTime method might return invalid values.

Note: If no daylight saving information is available in the registry, this property returns false.

 Returns the TimeZoneInfo instance whose StandardName property matches the specified . The StandardName of the TimeZoneInfo instance to be returned. Specifies whether an exception should be thrown when no matching TimeZoneInfo instance with the specified StandardName is found. The TimeZoneInfo instance whose StandardName property matches the specified , or null if no matching value was found. Thrown if is true and no TimeZoneInfo with a matching StandardName could be located. Note that TimeZone information is obtained from the operating system running on the local machine. CurrentTimeZone property Returns the TimeZoneInfo instance whose StandardName property matches the specified . The StandardName of the TimeZoneInfo instance to be returned. The TimeZoneInfo instance whose StandardName property matches the specified . CurrentTimeZone property Returns the offset from UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) for the time zone represented by this object.

UtcOffset specifies the number of hours and minutes the current time differs from Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). This value should be added to the current time in order to obtain (GMT) Greenwich mean time.

Note that since the display name of a TimeZone is relative to GMT, the UtcOffset will appear with the opposite sign. For example, "(GMT-05:00) Eastern Time (US and Canada)" indicates that the Eastern Time zone is 5 hours prior to GMT. So the UtcOffset of Eastern Time is +5:00.

 Returns the additional offset from UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) for the time zone represented by this object for standard time.

This value is added to the value of the property to form the offset used during standard time. In most time zones, the value is TimeSpan.Zero.

 Returns the additional offset from UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) for the time zone represented by this object for daylight time.

This value is added to the value of the property to form the offset used during daylight time. In most time zones, the Hour component of the value is -1.

 The display name for this object. The visible index of this object; i.e., where it should appear in a list of time zones. Returns the date and time of transisition to standard time for the time zone represented by this object.

Note: If no information is available in the registry, this property returns the minimum value for the DateTime data type. When this is the case, the value returned from this property should be considered undefined.

The registry supports two date formats. Absolute format specifies an exact date and time when standard time begins. In this form, the year, month, day, hour, minute, second, and milliseconds parameters are used to specify an exact date.

"Day-in-month format" is specified by setting the year member to zero, setting the dayOfWeek member to an appropriate weekday, and using a day value in the range 1 through 5 to select the occurrence of that day of the week in the month. Using this notation, the first Sunday in April can be specified, as can the last Thursday in October (5 is equal to the last).

When the information contained in the registry is in "day-in-month" format, that information is used to calculate the date of transition for the current year.

remarks> Returns the date and time of transisition to daylight time for the time zone represented by this object.

Note: Starting in the spring of 2007, daylight saving time (DST) start and end dates have changed for several time zones, including all time zones in the United States. The DaylightDate property reflects the date and time of transisition to daylight time for the current year only; changing the system time to a different year than the actual one might cause the DaylightDate property to return an incorrect value. To determine whether a specific date falls within daylight saving time, use the method; this method allows the caller to specify a particular year.

Note: If no information is available in the registry, this property returns the minimum value for the DateTime data type. When this is the case, the value returned from this property should be considered undefined.

The registry supports two date formats. Absolute format specifies an exact date and time when daylight time begins. In this form, the year, month, day, hour, minute, second, and milliseconds parameters are used to specify an exact date.

"Day-in-month format" is specified by setting the year member to zero, setting the dayOfWeek member to an appropriate weekday, and using a day value in the range 1 through 5 to select the occurrence of that day of the week in the month. Using this notation, the first Sunday in April can be specified, as can the last Thursday in October (5 is equal to the last).

When the information contained in the registry is in "day-in-month" format, that information is used to calculate the date of transition for the current year.

Returns the current time, as obtained for the current time zone for this computer, translated to local time for the time zone represented by this object. Returns the current date, as obtained for the current time zone for this computer, translated to local time for the time zone represented by this object. Returns the standard name for for the time zone represented by this object Returns the daylight saving time name for for the time zone represented by this object Returns the TimeZoneInfo instance which corresponds to the TimeZone returned from the System.CurrentTimeZone property.

Time zone information is obtained from the Windows Registry. If the caller does not have permission to read the registry of the local machine, or if the registry contains incomplete or incorrect time zone information, the CurrentTimeZone can return null (Nothing in VB).

FromStandardName method Creates a new instance of the TZI struct. If greater than zero, specifies the year to which this time zone information applies. The byte array from which the time zone information is obtained. Creates a new instance of the TZI struct. If greater than zero, specifies the year to which this time zone information applies. The existing TZI instance from which to initialize this instance. Returns whether this instance contains valid information, i.e., has a non-zero value for the standardMonth, standardDay, daylightMonth and daylightDay members. Returns whether this instance can calculate the date. If the standardYear or daylightYear members are non-zero, it can't. Returns the standard (not daylight) date for this instance, or DateTime.MinValue if no valid date could be calculated. Returns the daylight date for this instance, or DateTime.MinValue if no valid date could be calculated. since background painting is done in OnPaint(), we should do nothing here Process the mousedown action and hide the tooltip. draws border and the background and call the tooltip's OnPaint Invoked when the Handle for the form is created. EventArgs Clean up any resources being used. Returns the owning control for this tooltip or null if there is no specific control associated. Returns true if the window was created in a full trust environment. Determines if a drop shadow is displayed beneath the tooltip.

Note The shadow is displayed by default when available. The shadow is only available on operating systems that support shadows and when unmanaged code rights have been assigned to the assembly.

 Invoked when the Handle for the form is created. EventArgs Overriden. Receives message notifications for the tooltip form. By reference message Returns true if the window was created in a full trust environment. Overridden method. Applies solid border to the month calendar. Determines if a drop shadow is displayed beneath the tooltip.

Note The shadow is displayed by default when available. The shadow is only available on operating systems that support shadows and when unmanaged code rights have been assigned to the assembly.

 An enumerator for specifying the border style of a tooltip Default is resolved to Solid. Solid border Raised No border A class used to display tool tips at a desired location and with a specified delay Initializes a new instance of the ToolTip class. Control which owns the tooltip. Initializes a new instance of the ToolTip class. Control which owns the tooltip. ComponentRole used to obtain the style information. Sets margins around the tool tip text in the tool tip window indentation from left of tip window indentation from right of tip window indentation from top of tip window indentation from bottom of tip window calculates the size of the tool tip window required to display text assigned to ToolTipText property A size structure specifying the dimensions necessary to display the tooltip text Adjusts the tool tip window's location and size according to the tool tip text set and displays the tool tip window. It will not decrease the size of the tool tip window if already set but increase it if necessary to display the full tool tip text. It displays the tool tip window at cursor postion Adjusts the tool tip window's location and size according to the tool tip text set and displays the tool tip window. It will not decrease the size of the tool tip window if already set but increase it if necessary to display the full tool tip text. It displays the tool tip window at cursor postion Determines if the tooltip will be right aligned with respect to the point. Displays the tooltip rendered with editor. If calculateEmbeddableEditorSize is true then it will calculate the size and use that size if it's smaller than displayRect's size. adjustX, adjustY dictate whether to adjust the x and y coordinates to fit the desktop. excludeX and excludeY indicate whether to use excluseionRect. NOTE: This is the only method that shows embeddable editors. Calling any other Show overloads subsequently will display the tooltip text, and not the embeddable editos. preferred rectangle to display the tool tip in Specifies whether we should calculate the size and use that size if it's smaller than displayRect's size dictate whether to adjust the x coordinates to fit the desktop dictate whether to adjust the x coordinates to fit the desktop A rect (in screen coordinates) which will be avoided when positioning the tooltip. Whenever possible, the tooltip will be positioned so that it does not obscure any part of the rect. excludeX indicate whether to use excluseionRect excludeY indicate whether to use excluseionRect owning editor owner owner context Displays the tooltip rendered with editor. If calculateEmbeddableEditorSize is true then it will calcualte the size and use that size if it's smaller than displayRect's size. adjustX, adjustY dictate whether to adjust the x and y coordinates to fit the desktop. excludeX and excludeY indicate whether to use excluseionRect. NOTE: This is the only method that shows embeddable editors. Calling any other Show overloads subsequently will display the tooltip text, and not the embeddable editos. preferred rectangle to display the tool tip in Specifies whether we should calculate the size and use that size if it's smaller than displayRect's size dictate whether to adjust the x coordinates to fit the desktop dictate whether to adjust the x coordinates to fit the desktop A rect (in screen coordinates) which will be avoided when positioning the tooltip. Whenever possible, the tooltip will be positioned so that it does not obscure any part of the rect. excludeX indicate whether to use excluseionRect excludeY indicate whether to use excluseionRect owning editor owner owner context Determines if the tooltip will be right aligned with respect to the point. Displays the tooltip rendered with editor. If calculateEmbeddableEditorSize is true then it will calcualte the size and use that size if it's smaller than displayRect's size. adjustX, adjustY dictate whether to adjust the x and y coordinates to fit the desktop. excludeX and excludeY indicate whether to use excluseionRect. NOTE: This is the only method that shows embeddable editors. Calling any other Show overloads subsequently will display the tooltip text, and not the embeddable editos. preferred rectangle to display the tool tip in Specifies whether we should calculate the size and use that size if it's smaller than displayRect's size dictate whether to adjust the x coordinates to fit the desktop dictate whether to adjust the x coordinates to fit the desktop A rect (in screen coordinates) which will be avoided when positioning the tooltip. Whenever possible, the tooltip will be positioned so that it does not obscure any part of the rect. excludeX indicate whether to use excluseionRect excludeY indicate whether to use excluseionRect owning editor owner owner context Determines if the tooltip will be right aligned with respect to the point. Restrict's the width for editor's that support multi-line text. Adjusts the tool tip window's location and size according to the tool tip text set and displays the tool tip window. It will not decrease the size of the tool tip window if already set but increase it if necessary to display the full tool tip text. It display the tool tip window at specified point. preferred rectangle to display the tool tip in The constraining width. dictate whether to adjust the x coordinates to fit the desktop dictate whether to adjust the x coordinates to fit the desktop Specifies whether to adjust the width of the tooltip to fit the contents. A rect (in screen coordinates) which will be avoided when positioning the tooltip. Whenever possible, the tooltip will be positioned so that it does not obscure any part of the rect. excludeX indicate whether to use excluseionRect excludeY indicate whether to use excluseionRect Adjusts the tool tip window's location and size according to the tool tip text set and displays the tool tip window. It will not decrease the size of the tool tip window if already set but increase it if necessary to display the full tool tip text. It display the tool tip window at specified point. preferred rectangle to display the tool tip in The constraining width. dictate whether to adjust the x coordinates to fit the desktop dictate whether to adjust the x coordinates to fit the desktop Specifies whether to adjust the width to fit the contents. A rect (in screen coordinates) which will be avoided when positioning the tooltip. Whenever possible, the tooltip will be positioned so that it does not obscure any part of the rect. excludeX indicates whether to use excluseionRect excludeY indicate swhether to use excluseionRect point in screen coordinates indicates whether to right align the toolip Adjusts the tool tip window's location and size according to the tool tip text set and displays the tool tip window. It will not decrease the size of the tool tip window if already set but increase it if necessary to display the full tool tip text. It display the tool tip window at specified point. preferred location to display the tool tip in The constraining width. dictate whether to adjust the x coordinates to fit the desktop dictate whether to adjust the x coordinates to fit the desktop Specifies whether to adjust the width of the tooltip to fit the contents. A rect (in screen coordinates) which will be avoided when positioning the tooltip. Whenever possible, the tooltip will be positioned so that it does not obscure any part of the rect. excludeX indicate whether to use excluseionRect excludeY indicate whether to use excluseionRect Adjusts the tool tip window's location and size according to the tool tip text set and displays the tool tip window. It will not decrease the size of the tool tip window if already set but increase it if necessary to display the full tool tip text. It display the tool tip window at specified point. preferred location to display the tool tip in The constraining width. dictate whether to adjust the x coordinates to fit the desktop dictate whether to adjust the x coordinates to fit the desktop Specifies whether to adjust the width of the tooltip to fit the contents. A rect (in screen coordinates) which will be avoided when positioning the tooltip. Whenever possible, the tooltip will be positioned so that it does not obscure any part of the rect. excludeX indicate whether to use excluseionRect excludeY indicate whether to use excluseionRect indicates whether to right align the tooltip Displays the tool tip in the desired rectangle. Note: it may move and resize the tool tip window to fit the tool tip text and to fit within the desktop The rectangle within which to display the tooltip Displays the tool tip in the desired rectangle. Note: it may move and resize the tool tip window to fit the tool tip text and to fit within the desktop The rectangle within which to display the tooltip Specifies whether or not the height should be adjusted based on the size of the text or images in the tooltip. displays the tool tip at desired location. Note: it may move and resize the tool tip window to fit the tool tip text and to fit within the desktop. The point at which to display the tooltip displays the tool tip at desired location. Note: it may move and resize the tool tip window to fit the tool tip text and to fit within the desktop. The point at which to display the tooltip Determines if the tooltip will be right aligned with respect to the point. Ensures that embeddable editor control used for rendering an embeddable editor is removed from the form's controls collection so that regular text tooltips can be displayed with it. hides the tool tip window disposes the allocated resources Fires the event. The event args. Determines if a drop shadow is displayed beneath the tooltip when available.

Note The drop shadow is only displayed on systems that support a drop shadow (e.g. Windows XP) and when unmanaged code rights are assigned to the assembly.

 returns the control that this tool tip is implemented with gets or sets the tool tip text that is displayed in the tool tip You can use '\n' characters to display multiline tool tips and ' ' (space) characters to insert spaces (for indentations for example) Gets/sets the form that owns the tooltip form Gets the owning control that was passed into the constructor Gets/sets the BackColor of the tooltip Gets/sets the ForeColor of the tooltip Gets/sets whether the tooltip is a topmost window left margin between tool tip windows' border and the tool tip text right margin between tool tip windows' border and the tool tip text top margin between tool tip windows' border and the tool tip text bottom margin between tool tip windows' border and the tool tip text Returns/sets the time interval (in milliseconds) before the tooltip initially appears. Returns/sets the border style used to draw the tooltip. Returns/sets the font used to draw the tooltip text. amount of time in milliseconds that the tool tip window stays visible before disappearing. Set it to 0 to disable auto pop. Returns true if the tool tip is currently visible. Gets / sets an enumerated value that determines which image (if any) to display in the tooltip title. The title of the Balloontip. Only appears when the tooltip is a balloon tip. Image displayed when is set to ToolTipImage.Custom. ; Returns/sets the font used to draw the ToolTip Title. If no font is set, then the Font property will be used in Bold (if possible). Sets the display style of the tooltip. Default is resolved to Standard. Resolved display style. Gets whether the tooltip will display as a Balloontip. The Resolved LeftMargin to use. The Resolved RightMargin to use. The Resolved TopMargin to use. The Resolved BottomMargin to use. Resolves the ToolTipImage based on the ToolTipImage abd CustomToolTipImage properties. ToolTipMetrics object which keeps track of all sizing and positioning calculations needed to paint a balloontip. Fired when a tooltip is actually displayed.

The tooltip may not display immediately when the Show method is called because of the InitialDelay. This even fires when the tooltip is actuall displayed, after the delay has elapsed.

 Returns or sets a boolean indicating whether the tooltip should use application styling.

By default, the tooltip will attempt to obtain a from the if a ComponentRole was not passed into the constructor. This property can be used to prevent the tooltip from using the owning control's ComponentRole to style the tooltip.

 Indicates whether to check if the form is active before showing tooltips. Default value is Default which is resolved to True. You can set this property to False to prevent the tooltip from checking to see if there is an active form before showing the tooltip. Determines whether the tooltip the tooltip text should be formatted. A setting of ToolTipTextStyle.Default will resolve to ToolTipTextStyle.Raw. Gets whether the tooltip will display as an Office 2007 tooltip. Gets whether the tooltip will display as a Windows Vista tooltip. Gets / sets the opacity of the tooltip form. Returns the editor for the passed in ownerContext. This is used by the base implementation of EmbeddableOwnerBase. The context that was passed into the method. Returns the embeddable uielement associated with a particular object or null if none is available. Context used to identify the object to reference The embeddable uielement representing the specified owner context. Returns the value that should be rendered. The context that was passed into the method. Returns whether the text is multiline. The context that was passed into the method. A boolean indicating whether the text is multiline The default implementation returns false. Returns true if in design mode, false otherwise. Overridden. Called when the font of the control changes. Overridden. Fires Resize event. Overridden. Fires SizeChanged event. Clean up any resources being used. Abstract property for getting the control's main UI element Constructor Makes sure that the child elements for this element are in the ChildElements array and that they are positioned properly. This needs to be overridden if the element has any child elements. Called when a mouse down message is received. Returning true will cause normal mouse down processing to be skipped The element's bounding rectangle in client coordinates Overriden. Receives message notifications for the control used for embedding embeddable ui elements. By reference message UITypeEditor for selecting the data type of unbound columns. Used to determine the type of UIEditor that will be displayed. ITypeDescriptorContext UITypeEditorEditStyle specifying the type of UIEditor. Used to edit the value and convert the value as needed. ITypeDescriptorContext IServiceProvider Current value Edited value. A list of types to display on the DropDown UITypeEditor class for editing flags enum that have non-zero Default enum member. Called whenever an item is checked or unchecked in the checked list box used for editing the flagged enum. The type of the flagged enum. The associated list of items. The bit representation of the value that should be checked. Specifies whether to check an item if its bits are checked. UITypeEditor-derived class which provides designer support for properties of type ICondition. Used to determine the type of UIEditor that will be displayed. ITypeDescriptorContext UITypeEditorEditStyle specifying the type of UIEditor. Used to edit the value and convert the value as needed. ITypeDescriptorContext IServiceProvider Current value Edited value. CollectionEditor derived class which provides designer support for the List property of the ContainedInListCondition class. Creates a new instance of the class. Used to determine the type of UIEditor that will be displayed. ITypeDescriptorContext UITypeEditorEditStyle specifying the type of UIEditor. Used to edit the value and convert the value as needed. ITypeDescriptorContext IServiceProvider Current value Edited value. Enumeration of UltraComponent property ids. Visible property Enabled property Abstract base class for a component that supports application styling. Initializes a new Factory method used to create the component role that provides the style information for the component. The of the component. Handles disposing the compoenent's resources. Boolean indicating if managed and unmanaged resources should be released. Returns or sets the name of the styleset in the that should be used by the control. Returns the that the control uses to provide its style information. Returns or sets whether the component should use application styling. Returns or sets the name of the styleset library in the that should be used by the control.

By default, this property defaults to an empty string and as such will obtain its style information from the default style library that is loaded into memory using the method. However, there is also an overload of that method which will accept a string name which will be used to identify the library (). Any controls/components that have their StyleLibraryName set to that name will obtain their style information from that library.

Note: If this property is set and the name does not match up with the name of a loaded style library, the control/component will not have any style information.

 Abstract base component class for managing multiple controls. This method is invoked when the controls should be invalidated. A control should only be invalidated if its IsHandleCreated property returns true. This method is invoked when the uielements for the managed controls should be dirtied. A control should only be dirtied if its IsHandleCreated property returns true. This method is invoked when the visible property of the managed controls should be changed. A control should only be shown/hidden if its IsHandleCreated property returns true. This method is invoked when the enabled property of the managed controls should be changed. Returns the ISelectionManager. The default implementation tries to cast this object to an ISelectionManager. Called when an element is entered (the mouse is moved over the element) The UIElement event args. Called when an element is left (the mouse is moved off the element) The UIElement event args. Sets the IsUpdating flag to true which prevents painting. This is used to optimize performanance while setting a number of properties or adding a number of items (e.g. nodes in a tree control) so that all paint messages are ignored until EndUpdate is called. Resets the IsUpdating flag to false and invalidates the control

This method must be called after . If BeginUpdate was called without a subsequent call to EndUpdate the control will not draw itself.

 Resets the flag to false and optionally invalidates the control. True to invalidate the control and dirty the child elements; otherwise false.

This method must be called after . If BeginUpdate was called without a subsequent call to EndUpdate the control will not draw itself.

Note: Calling this method passing in false should only be done when it is known that the changes made between the and EndUpdate calls did not require invalidation or dirtying of the elements or when the invalidation is being handled by the programmer.

 Invoked by a ManagedControlBase when its owning component has been set. Control whose owner was set. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. True if the needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. Called when an element is entered (the mouse is moved over the element) Called when an element is entered (the mouse is moved over the element) Fired when the mouse enters a UIElement Fired when the mouse leaves a UIElement Returns true between BeginUpdate and EndUpdate method calls. Indicates whether the control has a flat appearance. Indicates whether the control has a flat appearance. Indicates whether the elements of a control may be rendered using system themes. Indicates whether the elements of a control may be rendered using system themes. Indicates whether the elements of a control may be rendered using the operating system theme rendering. Indicates whether the elements of a control may be rendered using system themes. Gets/sets the default cursor for the component. Determines whether alpha blending is enabled Returns or sets how alpha blending is performed. Gets/sets whether the component is displayed. Gets/set whether the component is enabled. Specifies the text rendering mode that will be used by this control.

Note that not all user interface entities may use the specified text rendering mode. For example, if the user interface entity happens to make use some .NET control that doesn't support the specified text rendering mode.

Also note that when printing GDIPlus will be used, even if this property is set otherwise. This is because .NET printing infrastructure does not support drawing text using GDI.

Gets/sets the draw filter property Gets/sets the creation filter property Gets/sets the cursor filter property Gets the selection manager (read-only) Returns true if borders should be displayed as flat. Returns true if the system themes should be used to render elements when possible. Returns the cursor that should be used when the mouse is over the element and that element (and all of the elements in its parent chain) don't supply their own. Note: this is normally supplied by returning the Control's cursor property. Abstract base control class for controls managed by an component. Constructor Invoked when the property has been changed. Calls the ControlUIElement's draw method The . Used to invoke the KeyDown event. KeyEventArgs Invoked when a subobject's property has been changed. Information regarding the chain of property change notification Invoked when the control is created. Handles disposing the control's resources. Boolean indicating if managed and unmanaged resources should be released. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Abstract property for getting the control's main UI element Overrides the Cursor to return the cursor from the UIElement Gets/sets the owning component. Handler for a SubObjectPropChange event Returns the main uielement representing the control Abstract base control class for container controls managed by an component. Initializes a new ManagedContainerControlBase Invoked when the property has been changed. Calls the ControlUIElement's draw method The . Used to invoke the KeyDown event. KeyEventArgs Invoked when a subobject's property has been changed. Information regarding the chain of property change notification Invoked when the control is created. Handles disposing the control's resources. Boolean indicating if managed and unmanaged resources should be released. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Raises the event. An that contains the event data. Abstract property for getting the control's main UI element Overrides the Cursor to return the cursor from the UIElement Gets/sets the owning component. Handler for a SubObjectPropChange event Returns the main uielement representing the control Base designer for derived components Used to filter and/or shadow properties that appear for the component at design time. Collection of properties The base designer used for Infragistics controls The base designer used for Infragistics controls Shows the about box Determines if the point clicked upon should be handled by the control or the designer. Screen coordinates True if the control should handle the mousedown. Otherwise false to let the designer process the message. Handles the beginning a design time drag. X coordinate in screen coordinates. Y coordinate in screen coordinates. Handles the end of a design time drag. Boolean indicating if the drag was cancelled. Handles the design time dragging notification. i.e. The mouse was pressed and moved on part of the control at design time. X coordinate in screen coordinates. Y coordinate in screen coordinates. Protected method that is called when the user double clicks on a point that is design time active.

The default implementation calls DoDefaultAction which will normally bring up the code window.

However, this method can be overridden to prevent this behavior. For example, button type elements would want a double click to generate 2 clicks instead of bringing up the code window.

Note: If the point is over a button or scrollbar element the default implementation does nothing.

 Initializes the designer with the specified component. Component the designer is working with. Cleans up the designer when it is being disposed. Boolean indicating whether managed and unmanaged clean up should occur. Default Calculation of TextBaseline Override to provide textbaseline implementation Overriden. Allows the designer to change or remove the properties of the component being designed. Table of PropertyDescriptor instances Adds the about verb to the collection Return true to allow the designer's default context menu to be displayed, false to suppress it. Setting the property to true will cause the control to not fire any designer change notifications. If a designer change notification was suppressed after setting this property to true, then it will be fired when this property is set back to false again. Determines whether the Custom Property Pages verb will be displayed on the context menu. Get Default ControlDesigner SnapLine Implementation Overrides ControlDesigner SnapLines Add Text BaseLine SnapLine to default implementation Override to provide additional custom SnapLines UltraImageEditor class Creates an UltraImageEditor instance Clean up any resources being used. Determines whether the specified key is a regular input key or a special key that requires preprocessing. One of the values. True if the specified key is a regular input key; otherwise, false. OnKeyDown OnKeyPress OnKeyUp OnMouseDown OnMouseLeave OnMouseMove OnMouseUp OnResize Redraws the magnified view of the image Resets the edit image to the real image (used when a drawing operation is cancelled) Combines the new color to be drawn with the existing color The new color to draw The existing color in the position to draw the new color The combination of the colors Draws a selection rectangle with the given graphics The selection rectangle to draw The Graphics object with which to draw the selection rectangle Gets the current state of the editor in an edit info object Sets the approriate primary and secondary colors for a drawing operation The type of color to use as the primary color The primary color The secondary color Changes all pixels in the current selection with the existing color to the new color. If no selection is made, this acts on the entire image The existing color to search the image for The new color to changes those pixels to Clears the entire image with the speicified color The color to clear the image with If an area is currently selected on the image, it will be deselected Clears the undo stack so all operations done before this point cannot be undone Copies the current selection to the clipboard. If no selection is made, the entire image is copied to the clipboard Cuts the current selection to the clipboard. If no selection is made, the entire image is cut to the clipboard Flips the current selection horizontally. If no selection is made, the entire image is flipped Flips the current selection vertically. If no selection is made, the entire image is flipped Gets the current image being edited (must be disposed after use) The current being edited. Gets the color of the pixel at the specified point in the image The pixel position where to get the color The of the pixel at the specified point in the image. Gets the color of the pixel at the specified point in the image The x position of the pixel The y position of the pixel The of the pixel at the specified point in the image. Inverts the colors of the current selection vertically. If no selection is made, the entire image's colors are inverted OffsetImage The amount to offset the image along the x-axis. The amount to offset the image along the y-axis. Specifies whether the offset should be delayed until a key up message is received. OffsetImage A describing how to offset the image along the x and y axis. Specifies whether the offset should be delayed until a key up message is received. If the data on the clipboard is a bitmap, it is pasted to the image. Does a redo operation if one is available Rotates the current selection left 90 degrees. If there is no selection, the entire image is roated left 90 degrees. Rotates the current selection right 90 degrees. If there is no selection, the entire image is roated right 90 degrees. Sets the diensions of the image The new width of the image The new height of the image True if the image was resized successfully, false otherwise Sets the diensions of the image The new width of the image The new height of the image True if this function should present a message box warning the user when data will be lost True if the image was resized successfully, false otherwise Sets the current image being editted to an icon instance The icon to allow the user to edit with this control Sets the current image being editted to an image instance The image to allow the user to edit with this control Does an undo operation if one is avaialable Resets the modified flag, effectively marking the control as not dirty. ResetDrawingBackColor Returns whether the property requires serialization. Resets the property to its default value. ResetDrawingFont ResetDrawingForeColor Occurs after the changes made by the user are commited to the Bitmap Occurs before the changes made by the user are commited to the Bitmap Occurs when a color has been selected from the magified view of the image Occurs when the drawing font has changed internally as a result of an undo or redo operation Occurs when the image is being editted Occurs when the edit mode changes internally as a result of an undo, redo, or paste operation Occurs when the hot spot position for the cursor has changed Occurs when the magnification level of the magnified image view has changed Occurs when the mouse's virtual pixel position in the magnified image view changes Gets or sets the boolean value indicating if the magnified view of the image is fit to the control's size Gets or sets the value idicating whether the control will allow the user to scroll to any controls placed outside of its boudaries Gets or sets the width of the brush to be used in the DrawBrush edit mode Gets or sets the type of brush to use in the DrawBrush edit mode Gets the boolean value indicating if this control can do a redo operation Gets the boolean value indicating if this control can do an undo operation Gets or sets the number of virtual pixels between darker grid lines (0 for no dark grid lines) Gets or sets the back color used by the current drawing state (also the right click color) Gets/sets the color used to create the hatch brush that is drawn to represent the transparent color. DrawingFont Gets or sets the fore color used by the current drawing state (also the left click color) Gets or sets the type of gradient to use when drawing Gets or set the boolean value indicating if the magnified view draws grid lines to seperate virtual pixels Gets or sets the edit mode this editor is currently in (some type of select or drawing operation) Gets or sets the threshold value for the erase color edit mode. A value of 0 will require existing colors to be identical to the primary color to be erased, while a value of 255 will erase any color, regardless of the primary color Gets or sets the virtual size to draw the erase area Gets the current hot spot choosen by the user Gets or sets the number of times to magnify the image (a value of 10 will cause each virtual pixel in the magnified view to be 10 pixels wide) Gets or sets the maximum number of changes to save in the undo stack (-1 for infinite) Returns the size of the current image. Returns whether the control's image has been modified. Returns the rectangle representing the current selection or if nothing is selected. Clean up any resources being used. Inverts the colors of the selection Inverts the colors of the selection BrushType Circle Square ImageEditColorType BackColor ForeColor Enumeration used to specify the editing mode of an image editor ChooseHotSpot ColorSelect DrawAirbrush DrawArc DrawBrush DrawEllipseOutline DrawFilledEllipse DrawFilledEllipseWithOutline DrawFilledRectangle DrawFilledRectangleWithOutline DrawLine DrawPoint DrawRectangleOutline DrawText Erase EraseColor Fill SelectRectangle Enumerator used to specify the type of operation that caused a change in an image Undo Redo NewChange Event handler for the event Event handler for the event Event handler for the event Event handler for the event Event handler for the event Event handler for the event Event handler for the event Event parameters for the UltraWinImageEditor.AfterImageEdited event Creates a new AfterImageEditedEventArgs instance The new image after being edited Gets the new image after being edited Event parameters for the UltraWinImageEditor.BeforeImageEdited event Creates a new BeforeImageEditedEventArgs instance The new image after being edited The old image The type of change that caused this event Gets or sets the boolean value indicating if the old image should not be updated to the new image Gets the new image after being edited Gets the old image Gets the type of change that caused this event Event parameters for the ColorSelected event Constructor The that has been selected. The specifying the type of color that was selected. Returns the color that was selected. Returns the type of the color that was selected. Event parameters for the DrawingFontChanged event Constructor Returns the font that was changed Event parameters for the UltraWinImageEditor.DuringImageEdit event Creates a new DuringImageEditEventArgs instance The image being edited Gets the image after edited Event parameters for the MouseVirtualPositionChanged event Creates a new MouseVirtualPositionChangedEventArgs instance The virtual x position of the mouse over the magnified view of the image The virtual y position of the mouse over the magnified view of the image The boolean value indicating if the mouse is currently over the visible part of the image Gets the boolean value indicating if the mouse is currently over the visible part of the image Gets the virtual x position of the mouse over the magnified view of the image Gets the virtual y position of the mouse over the magnified view of the image Return the list of products that this control can be licensed with Control for displaying the status of an activity.

The UltraProgressBar can be used to indicate the percent that a process has completed and also provides an indication during a long process that the process is progressing.

The type of flood fill that is rendered can be determined via the property. When rendering the filled area, the is used to resolve the appearance for the filled area of the progress bar. The fill may be a solid color, gradient or even a background image that is uncovered as the percentange increases and depending upon the will either be a solid or segmented area.

The UltraProgressBar can also displayed a label () within the control. The can include special escape tags that will be replaced by the current values of the control to provide dynamic labels.

 Default percent format. "P0" is used to render a rounded percent. The percent is displayed as a value rounded to zero decimal places. The percent remaining is displayed as a value rounded to zero decimal places. The percent is displayed as a formatted value using the property. The percent remaining is displayed as a formatted value using the property. The remaining value is displayed. The amount displayed is equal to the Maximum minus the Value. The amount completed is displayed. The amount displayed is equal to the Value minus the Minimum. The value is displayed. The value is displayed. The current is displayed. The total range value is displayed. The total range value is the result of the minus the . Default segment width for the progress bar. Initializes a new UltraProgressBar control. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Determines if the collection needs to be serialized. Clears the collection Indicates if the property needs to be serialized True if the PercentSettings collection contains any items Clears the contents of the property Factory method used to create the component role that provides the style information for the control. Increments the value of the control by the amount. Increments the value of the control by the specified amount. Amount to change the value.

The IncrementStep is analogous to adding a particular amount to the property. However, the property must be set to a value within the and values or an exception will be generated. The IncrementValue method takes the and values into account as it adjusts the and therefore may be more convenient to use.

 Returns the formatted text label for the specified object that implements . Class used to obtain the information. Label to use when formatting. If null, uses the label from the specified IProgressBarInfo. Formatted string based on the values of the specified IProgressBarInfo.

The FormatText method provides a way to determine the text that is or would be displayed based on the label and data from the class implementing the interface.

The UltraProgressBar control implements the interface.

 Static method for resolving the appearance for the filled area of the element. Object implementing the IProgressBarInfo. AppearanceData to update with the Appearance information. Appearance properties to resolve.

The main source for the resolved values of the filled appearance is the . However, since the text from the filled and unfilled area must be sized and positioned exactly the same, the , , , and are resolved using the corresponding values of the .

 Static method for resolving the appearance for the unfilled area of the element. Object implementing the IProgressBarInfo. AppearanceData to update with the Appearance information. Appearance properties to resolve.

The main source for the resolved values of the unfilled appearance is the . Values that are not explicitly set are resolved to default values determined by the class.

 Resolves the appearance for the filled area of the element. AppearanceData to update with the Appearance information. Appearance properties to resolve.

The main source for the resolved values of the filled appearance is the . However, since the text from the filled and unfilled area must be sized and positioned exactly the same, the , , , and are resolved using the corresponding values of the .

 Resolves the appearance for the unfilled area of the element. AppearanceData to update with the Appearance information. Appearance properties to resolve.

The main source for the resolved values of the unfilled appearance is the . Values that are not explicitly set are resolved to default values determined by the class.

 Creates a new accessibility object for the control. A new accessibility object for the control. Raises the event when the property changes. An that provides data for the event.

Raising an event invokes the event handler through a delegate.

The OnValueChanged method also allows derived classes to handle the event without attaching a delegate. This is the preferred technique for handling the event in a derived class.

Notes to Inheritors: When overriding OnValueChanged in a derived class, be sure to call the base class's OnValueChanged method so that registered delegates receive the event.

 Handles disposing the control's resources. Boolean indicating if managed resources should be released. Handles passing along notifications when a property has changed. Event arguments providing information about the property change. Resolves the appearance for the progress bar background Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Resolves the appearance for the filled area of the progress bar Appearance structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Display the about dialog Returns the cached license for the control Border style for the control. Returns the resolved for the control.

When the control is not rendering themes, the default value is Inset. When themes are supported, the default BorderStyle is none.

 Indicates whether to display the label. Determines the orientation of the UltraProgressBar.

The UltraProgressBar can be oriented vertically or horizontally. When rendering horizontally, the fill increases from left to right as the percent increases. When oriented vertically, the fill increases from bottom to top as the percent increases. The default value for the Orientation is horizontal.

 Minimum value of the progress bar.

The Minimum and values determine the range used to calculate the percentage of the flood fill. The Minimum value must be less than or equal to the .

 Maximum value of the progress bar.

The and Maximum values determine the range used to calculate the percentage of the flood fill. The Maximum value must be greater than or equal to the .

 Current value.

The Value must be a value within the and range. If the or value is changed so that the Value is no longer in the range, the Value will return the closest value within the range to its previous value and will not result in an exception. However, when the property is set, the new Value must be within the range or an will be generated. When the Value is changed, the property is fired.

 Default appearance for the control.

The Appearance property is used to determine appearance of the non-filled area of the ProgressBar.

 Indicates whether an object has been created. Returns true when the Appearance object for the property has been created.

Use this property to determine if an object has been created. Appearance objects in general are not created until the properties associated with them are accessed.

 Default appearance for the filled area of the progress bar.

The FillAppearance property is used to determine appearance of the filled area of the ProgressBar.

Note:

Indicates whether an object has been created. Returns true when the Appearance object for the property has been created.

Use this property to determine if an object has been created. Appearance objects in general are not created until the properties associated with them are accessed.

 Returns the a collection of user created objects. Returns the main UIElement which occupies the client area of the control. String used to format the percent.

This string is used to format the percent when replacing a [Formatted] or [FormattedRemaining] value in the .

 Determines the label displayed for the progress bar.

The Text is used to provide a for the progress bar. The string can include special escape tags that will be replaced by values from the control. The string will only be displayed if the propert is set to true.

Replaceable Escape Tags: [Percent]Unformatted percent completed [RemainingPercent]Unformatted percent remaining [Formatted]Formatted percent completed () [RemainingFormatted]Formatted percent remaining () [Remaining]Amount remaining ( - ) [Completed]Amount completed ( - ) [Minimum]Minimum value () [Maximum]Maximum value () [Value]Current value () [Range]Value Range ( - ) Amount to increment the value when invoking the method. Determines the style of the progress bar.

The Style property determines the type of fill that is rendered. The fill may be a continuous block or be rendered in segments.

 Returns the resolved value for the property Gets or sets the culture specific information used to determine how values are formatted. Gets/sets the width of the segments in a Segmented style progress bar. When set to UltraProgressBar.DefaultSegmentWidth (-1), the default segment width is used. The default segment width is equal to 2/3 the size relative to the orientation. e.g. The width of a progress bar segment in a horizontal progress bar is approximately 2/3 the height of the control. Returns a collection of value based appearances Event that occurs when the property changes. Overriden. The BackColor for the control should be set via the property. Overriden. The BackgroundImage for the control should be set via the property. Overriden. The Font property should be used to initialize a default font for the control. Overiden. The ForeColor for the control should be set via the property. Overriden. The Cursor property should be used to initialize a default cursor for the control. Overriden. Determines whether the control will receive focus when tabbing through the controls.

The UltraProgressBar control does not receive focus so changing this property will not affect the control.

 Overriden. Determines the default ImeMode for the control.

Since the UltraProgressBar control does not receive focus and does not use the key messages, the default ImeMode is disabled.

 Returns the control's main uielement. Appearance for the progress bar. Appearance for the filled area of the progress bar. Minimum value of the progress bar. Maximum value of the progress bar. Current value of the progress bar. Display label for the progress bar. Indicates if the label should be displayed. Orientation of the progress bar. BorderStyle of the progress bar. Format used when formatting the percent for the label. Determines the style of the progress bar's filled backcolor. Returns the culture specific information used to determine how values are formatted. Returns the width of the segments in a segmented progress bar. Returns the UIRole for the main area of the progress bar. Returns the UIRole for the fill area of the progress bar. Returns the resolution order to use when resolving the appearance. If different than null, specifies custom data filter used by the editor. Accessible object representing an Initializes a new Control which is represented by the accessible object Retrieves the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. The zero-based index of the accessible child. An AccessibleObject that represents the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Returns the role of the accessible object. Gets or sets the value of an accessible object. Component role for an Initializes a new Associated control Used by the associated to determine which instances should be cached. An array of strings containing the names of the role names that should be cached. Control Designer for the control. Initialize the default values for the control. Gets the for this designer's control/component. Provides DesignerActionItems for the SmartTag associated with the UltraProgressBar. Constructor The associated . Overrides CreateActionItems. The list to populate. Used by SmartTag Panel. Used by SmartTag Panel. Used by SmartTag Panel. UIType editor for an property Invoked when the trackbar is created so that minimum and maximum values can be initialized. TrackBar control to be displayed Used to indicate if a preview window should be displayed An abstract class for a control that will act as a proxy to an editor. Initializes a new instance of the class. Sets input focus to the control. true if the input focus request was successful; otherwise, false. For internal infrastructure use only. Determines if a character is an input character that the control recognizes. The character to test. true if the character should be sent directly to the control and not preprocessed; otherwise, false. Raises the System.Windows.Forms.Control.EnabledChanged event. An that contains the event data. Called after the control is entered Called after the control receives focus Called when a key is pressed down while the control has input focus An that contains the event data. Called when a key is pressed while the control has input focus An that contains the event data. The OnKeyUp event. An that contains the event data. Called after the control loses focus EventArgs Raises the event. A that contains the event data Returns the underlying owner of the editor that is being proxied. Returns the editor for which this control is acting as a proxy. Returns the proxy owner used to communicate between the control and the underlying owner. Returns the owner context of the underlying editor. Returns the main control uielement. Returns the default size of the control Overriden. Indicates if the editor or its contained textbox currently has the input focus. The main UIElement for the UltraEditorProxyBase control. The last embeddable element that was positioned. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the element. Owning control Called when the mouse enters this element Called when the mouse leaves this element Handles positioning and creation of the child elements. A helper method to position additional elements after this class has positioned its embeddable element. The collection of the old child elements from the previous positining call. A base class providing most logic between a proxy and the underlying editor's owner. Initializes a new instance of the class. The proxy editor with which this should be associated. Notifies the owner that an accessible event has occurred. Context used to identify the object to reference Enumeration indicating the event that occurred. This method indicates whether editor buttons should always fire editor button events even if the editor is not in edit mode. Default implementation returns false. Object used to identify the object represented by the editor True if editor buttons should always fire their events. Indicates whether the editor should respond to the mouse wheel. Object used to identify the object represented by the editor True if the editor should respond to the mouse wheel. Returns whether the element should be drawn as if it were in its "active" state. Only applicable if the return from the DisplayStyle property is not Standard. The context that was passed into the method. True if the element should be drawn as active. Returns whether an editor's value must correspond to an item in its ValueList The context that was passed into the method. True if an editor's value must correspond to an item in its ValueList. If true is returned, the editor will enter edit mode on either MouseDown or MouseUp, depending on the nature of the editor. The owner context. True if the editor will enter edit mode on being clicked. Indicates whether AutoEdit should enabled. The context that was passed into the method. Indicates whether AutoEdit should enabled. Returns the AutoSizeEdit information to be used by editors that support AutoSizing The context that was passed into the method. (out) Indicates whether the owner supports AutoSizeEditing. (out) A Size struct containing the starting width and height to which the editor should be set. (out) A Size struct containing the maximum width and height to which the editor should be allowed to grow. A boolean indicating whether AutoSizeEdit functionality is supported by the owner. Returns the BorderStyle to be used by the editor's embeddable element The context that was passed into the method. The BorderStyle to be used by the editor's embeddable element The border style to be used by the editor's embeddable element. Returns the ButtonStyle to be used by the embeddable element's button The context that was passed into the method. The ButtonStyle to be used by the embeddable element's buttons True if a non-default value is returned. Called to get a graphics object suitable for doing metrics calculations only. A graphics object suitable for doing metrics calculations only. This graphics object shouldn't be rendered on. The owner context which will be used to get the Control this owner is associated with.

Do NOT call the Dispose method on the graphics object returned from this method.

Instead, each call to this method should be paired with a call to .

During graphics caching calls to will return a single cached graphics object and calls to will be ignored.

 Determines how the text will be cased. The context that was passed into the method. The CharacterCasing to be applied to the text Invoked by an editor to obtain the application style information. Context used to identify the object to reference An instance that should be used by the editor. Returns a object associated with the owner context, if any. An object which represents the context for which the constraints should be returned. A object. Returns the ContextMenu that will be displayed by the editor The context that was passed into the method. A ContextMenu Returns the ContextMenuStrip that will be displayed by the editor The context that was passed into the method. A ContextMenuStrip Returns the owner's control. The context that was passed into the method. The owner's control. This is used e.g. to re-parent the edit control. Returns the data type. The context that was passed into the method. The of the owner. Returns the DisplayStyle to be used by the embeddable element The context that was passed into the method. The DisplayStyle to be used by the embeddable element Returns the number of pixels by which to increase the dropdown list's width to compensate for borders, etc. The context that was passed into the method. The additional width to apply to the dropdown Returns the horizontal and vertical offset to apply to the DropDown's list The context that was passed into the method. The additional offset to apply to the dropdown Returns the editor for the passed in ownerContext. This is used by the base implementation of EmbeddableOwnerBase. The context that was passed into the method. The associated editor. Gets the editor context that was set with SetEditorContext method. Editor context that was last set with SetEditorContext for the passed in ownerContext. Returns the embeddable UIElement associated with a particular object or null if none is available. Context used to identify the object to reference The embeddable UIElement representing the specified owner context. Returns owner-specific information to an editor The context that was passed into the method. The information requested by the editor and returned from the owner. A boolean indicating whether the specified information is supported by the owner. Returns an object that may be provided to the programmer using an editor. The context that was passed into the method. An object that the programmer may use to determine which object was associated with an action. Returns information needed to format a string. The context that was passed into the method. Returns the format string or null. Returns the IFormatProvider or null. Returns a GlyphInfo object which assists in the drawing of glyphs such as CheckBoxes and Radio buttons. The type of glyph (Checkbox, radio button, etc.) An object which represents the context for which the constraints should be returned. A variable into which the glyphInfo is returned. True if a glyph has been provided. Returns the image list to be used by the editor's ValueList, or null The context that was passed into the method. An ImageList, or null if not supported Returns the color that is used as the transparent color for images displayed by the editor The context that was passed into the method. The color that is used as the transparent color for images displayed by the editor Determines the IME mode for the editor. The context that was passed into the method. The IME mode value of type System.Windows.Forms.ImeMode for the editor. Returns masking information. This is only of interest to a editor that supports masking. The context that was passed into the method. The string used for masking the value or null if there is no mask. Determines whether literals and prompt characters are included in Value property of the Editor. Determines whether literals and prompt characters are displayed when not in edit mode. Determines whether literals and prompt characters are included when the editor copyies text to the clipboard. True only if masking info is available. Returns the maximum length for a string. The context that was passed into the method. (out) The maximum value or 0 if there is no maximum. A boolean indicating whether a meaningful value was returned. Returns the maximum number of text lines displayed. The context that was passed into the method. (out) The maximum value or 0 if there is no maximum. A boolean indicating whether a meaningful value was returned. Returns the maximum allowable value. The context that was passed into the method. The maximum value or null if there is no maximum. Returns the minimum allowable value. The context that was passed into the method. The minimum value or null if there is no minimum. The string to display for a null value. The context that was passed into the method. (out) The string that should be used if the value is null or DB_Null. A boolean indicating whether a meaningful value was returned. Returns character used as a substitute for spaces. The context that was passed into the method. Pad character. True only if pad character info is available. The padding to place around the value to display. The context that was passed into the method. (out) The padding to place around the value to display. A boolean indicating whether a meaningful value was returned. Returns the character used to mask characters. The context that was passed into the method. The character to display when entering a password. True only if passwordChar character info is available. Returns the character used as prompt during editing (e.g. '_'). The context that was passed into the method. Prompt character. True only if prompt character info is available. Returns the to be used by the scrollbars displayed by the embeddable editor. Context used to identify the object to reference A instance. Returns the that the editor should utilize for any scrollbars that it displays. Object used to identify the object represented by the editor A ScrolBarViewStyle that the editor should use as its default view style for the scrollbars it displays. Determines when to show the Ink Button on the editor. The context that was passed into the method. A ShowInkButton value indicating when the InkButton will be shown. Returns the size of images to be used by the editor's ValueList The context that was passed into the method. The size of the images A boolean indicating whether a meaningful value was supplied Gets the spell checker A compoment that implements the inteface or null. interface or null. Returns which scrollbars should appear in an editor's multiline TextBox. The context that was passed into the method. A boolean indicating which scrollbars should appear in an editor's multiline TextBox. Returns the text rendering mode to use. Default implementation returns Default value. Object used to identify the object represented by the editor The to use. Returns the type converter to use to convert values. The default implementation returns the type converter associated with the data type of the owner. The owner context Specifies whether to ignore type converters associated with the data types and only use the one, if any, returned by this method. Returns the value that should be rendered. The context that was passed into the method. The to be rendered. Returns a list of predefined values. The context that was passed into the method. Returns a list of predefined values or null. The default implementation returns null. Returns the image list to be used by the editor's ValueList, or null The context that was passed into the method. An ValueListsCollection, or null if not supported Invoked by an editor to determine if an area of the element that performs an action is supported. Context used to identify the object to reference Enum indicating the type of actionable area Returns true by default. Returns whether this editor is always in edit mode The EmbeddableEditorBase-derived instance True if the editor never leaves edit mode. Returns whether the value is enabled for editing. The context that was passed into the method. True if the value is enabled for editing. Returns whether "hot tracking" effects should be enabled The context that was passed into the method. The default implementation returns true. Returns whether the key is used by the owner. The EmbeddableUIElementBase-derived element True if the key is used by the owner (e.g. an arrow or tab key used for internal navigation). Returns whether the text is multiline. The context that was passed into the method. A boolean indicating whether the text is multiline Returns whether the value can be set to null. The context that was passed into the method. True if the value can be set to null. Returns true if the editor is being used in printing. The default is false. Object used to identify the object represented by the editor True if the editor is being used in printing. Returns true is the value is read-only The context that was passed into the method. A boolean indicating whether the value is read only Returns whether the element should display vertical. The context that was passed into the method. A boolean indicating whether the display is vertical Returns whether the text an element displays must correspond to the text of an item in a list The context that was passed into the method. If true and the editor's Value does not match an item in the list, an empty string will be displayed. Returns whether a selection can only be made from the value list. The context that was passed into the method. If true will act as a combo with a style of DropDownList. Called before edit mode has been entered. The editor about to enter edit mode. The element entering edit mode. False to cancel the operation. The editor calls this method whenever any of its embeddable elements gets a double click. The that was clicked. The . Called when the editor gets focus. The editor who is getting focus. Called when the editor loses focus. The editor who is losing focus. The editor calls this method whenever any of its embeddable elements gets a mouse down. The that received the mouse down. The . The editor calls this method whenever any of its embeddable elements gets a mouse up. The that received the mouse up. The . Called when focus is entering the editor. The editor who is getting focus. Called when focus is leaving the editor. The editor who is losing focus. Called to release a graphics object that was returned from a prior call to . The graphics object to release.

Do NOT call the Dispose method on the graphics object returned from . Use this method instead.

During graphics caching calls to will return a single cached graphics object and calls to will be ignored.

 Resolves the appearance for an element. The context that was passed into the method. The appearance structure to initialize. The appearance properties to resolve. Enumeration of type describing the area of the embeddable element to which the appearance will be applied Boolean indicating whether the owner should apply its 'HotTrackingAppearance' A string that denotes which appearance to resolve. Applicable only when the 'area' parameter is set to Custom. True if the owner recognizes and supports the named appearance. Resolves the default appearance for an element. The context that was passed into the method. The appearance structure to initialize. The appearance properties to resolve. Enumeration of type describing the area of the embeddable element to which the appearance will be applied Boolean indicating whether the owner should apply its 'HotTrackingAppearance' A string that denotes which appearance to resolve. Applicable only when the 'area' parameter is set to Custom. True if the owner recognizes and supports the named appearance. Sets the editor context for the passed in ownerContext. The owner context, used to provide additional information. The editor context to assign. Determines if a focus rect should be drawn. The context that was passed into the method. Returns true if a focus rect should be drawn. Sets the out parameters to values relating to the overflow indicator's existence and if it should show a tooltip. Not used in this override. Will be set to true if the overflow indicator should be shown. Will be set to true if the overflow indicator should show a tooltip. Set to null by default. Returns whether the ampersand character is interpreted as a hotkey prefix. The context that was passed into the method. A boolean indicating whether the ampersand character is interpreted as a hotkey prefix. Returns whether the UI is in a proper state to show keyboard accelerators. Context used to identify the object to reference. A boolean indicating if keyboard accelerators should be shown. By default the editors will invalidate the embeddable editor elements as the mouse enters and leaves them. This method can be used to suppress this behavior. Default implementation returns false. The owner context, used to provide additional information. True if the editor's enter/leave notification should be suppressed. Returns whether the editor should use its default cursor

By default, an editor might display a custom cursor, appropriate to the type of editor it is; for example, the editor displays an "I-Beam" cursor when it is enabled to indicate that it supports selection of text.

If the editor's owner does not want the editor to display its default cursor, it must return false from this method.



The default implementation returns true.

The context that was passed into the method. A boolean indicating whether the editor should use its default cursor. Returns whether the text should be wrapped if it doesn't fit. The context that was passed into the method. A boolean indicating whether the text should be wrapped Gets the associated UltraEditorProxyBase. Gets the UIElement of the associated editor proxy. Returns whether the associated control is currently in design mode. The designer for Infragistics scrollable controls. Cleans up the designer when it is being disposed. Boolean indicating whether managed and unmanaged clean up should occur. Initializes the designer with the specified component. Component the designer is working with. Overridden to add verbs to the collection Returns the control that should be used by the About Dialog and CustomPropertyDialog. If not overridden, it returns the control being designed. UltraScrollBar control.

The UltraScrollBar control provides all the functionality of the intrinsic ScrollBar plus several other features. In addition to the benefits of the Presentation Layer Framework (including the ability to owner draw an aspect of the control, one property settings, alphablending support, and keyboard mappings), the control exposes additional properties to customize the look and feel of the UltraScrollBar. There are 4 Appearance properties for controlling the appearance of the entire scrollbar, scroll thumb, scroll buttons and scroll track. The allows the ability to provide buttons to move to the and values. The number and placement of the scroll buttons can be controlled using the .

The UltraScrollBar also provides some additional properties and methods to make the control easier to use. The property can be used to have the control maintain the same size as the system scroll bar settings. The property can be used to have the control render disabled when the scroll thumb cannot be moved. The can be used to provide a context menu for the scroll bar similar to that of the Windows system ScrollBar.

To make setup of the control easier, the and methods, as well as the property have been added.

 Initializes a new UltraScrollBar control. Initializes a new UltraScrollBar control with the specified and owning control. Owning UltraControlBase derived control Initial orientation of the control

This constructor was designed to be used when the control was a child control of an derived control. It hooks into the notifications and initializes the properties (FlatMode, filters, etc.) to the values of that control.

 Determines if the control should receive mouse notifications at design time for the specified point. Point in client coordinates. True if the control should receive any mouse notifications for the specified point. Factory method used to create the component role that provides the style information for the control. Indicates whether the needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. True if the property value differs from the default value. Resets the value of the property to its default value. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the Appearances collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the Appearances collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the Appearances collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the Appearances collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Determines if the collection needs to be serialized. Clears the collection Determines if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. Boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized Determines if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. Resets the property to its default value. Resolves the button appearance. Structure to receive the updated appearance info. Flag enumeration indicating which properties need to be resolved. Resolves the scroll thumb appearance. Structure to receive the updated appearance info. Flag enumeration indicating which properties need to be resolved. Resolves the scroll track appearance. Structure to receive the updated appearance info. Flag enumeration indicating which properties need to be resolved. Resolves the control appearance. Structure to receive the updated appearance info. Flag enumeration indicating which properties need to be resolved. Indicates if the control needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the control needs to be serialized. Resets the control's properties to their default values. Performs the action specified. Action to perform. A boolean indicating if the action was performed. Performs the action specified based on the key state provided. Enumeration indicating the action to take. Indicates if the control key is depressed Indicates if the shift key is depressed A boolean indicating if the action was performed. Initializes the properties of the Infragistics.Win.UltraWinScrollBar.ScrollBarInfo with the specified values. Minimum value the user can drag to. Maximum value the user can drag to. How much the control scrolls when using the scroll arrows. How much the control scrolls when clicking in the scroll track.

Since the actual maximum value that can be achieved by using the interface may be less than the property, this method provides a way to specify the actual maximum value that the user should be able to get to.

 Returns the maximum drag value for the specified values of the control. Minimum value Maximum value Large change The maximum value that the user can achieve when using the UltraScrollBar interface. Creates a new accessibility object for the control. A new accessibility object for the control. Fired after a property has changed Event arguments containing information about the property change Raises the event when the property changes. An that provides data for the event.

Raising an event invokes the event handler through a delegate.

The OnScroll method also allows derived classes to handle the event without attaching a delegate. This is the preferred technique for handling the event in a derived class.

Notes to Inheritors: When overriding OnScroll in a derived class, be sure to call the base class's OnScroll method so that registered delegates receive the event.

 Raises the event when the property changes. An that provides data for the event.

Raising an event invokes the event handler through a delegate.

The OnValueChanged method also allows derived classes to handle the event without attaching a delegate. This is the preferred technique for handling the event in a derived class.

Notes to Inheritors: When overriding OnValueChanged in a derived class, be sure to call the base class's OnValueChanged method so that registered delegates receive the event.

 Raises the event when an element is entered (the mouse is moved over the element). An that provides data for the event.

Raising an event invokes the event handler through a delegate.

The OnMouseEnterElement method also allows derived classes to handle the event without attaching a delegate. This is the preferred technique for handling the event in a derived class.

Notes to Inheritors: When overriding OnMouseEnterElement in a derived class, be sure to call the base class's OnMouseEnterElement method so that registered delegates receive the event.

 Raises the event when an element is left (the mouse is moved out of an element). An that provides data for the event.

Raising an event invokes the event handler through a delegate.

The OnMouseLeaveElement method also allows derived classes to handle the event without attaching a delegate. This is the preferred technique for handling the event in a derived class.

Notes to Inheritors: When overriding OnMouseLeaveElement in a derived class, be sure to call the base class's OnMouseLeaveElement method so that registered delegates receive the event.

 Overrides the control's determination of what is considered an input key. Key A boolean indicating if this key is an input key for the control. Initializes the control upon creation. Override the sizing of the control when autosized. The new height of the control. A bitwise combination of the values. The new width of the control. The new property value of the control. The new property value of the control. Handles disposing the control's resources. Boolean indicating if managed and unmanaged resources should be released. Handles the resize of the control. System.EventArgs Handles the changing of the tabstop property. EventArgs Handles the message notification when releasing a key. KeyEventArgs Handles the notification when the control receives focus. EventArgs Handles the notification when the control loses focus. EventArgs Invokes the MouseUp event when the mouse button is released. MouseEventArgs Called when the control's initialization process begins. Called when the control's initialization process has been completed. Called when the control's initialization process begins. Called when the control's initialization process has been completed. Display the about dialog Returns the cached license for the control Returns the main control uielement. ScrollBarInfo

The ScrollBarInfo object is used to maintain the state information for the ScrollBar. The control delegates many of its properties to the ScrollBarInfo.

 Determines if the Min and Max buttons are displayed. Determines if the Min and Max buttons are displayed. Returns the resolved value for whether the minimum and maximum buttons will be displayed. Determines the orientation of the ScrollBar. Determines the number and positioning of the scroll bar arrow buttons. Minimum position of the scroll thumb.

If the Minimum is set to a value greater than the , the will be updated to the same value. If the is less than the new Minimum, the will be set to the new Minimum.

 Maximum position of the scroll thumb.

If the new Maximum is less than the , the will be set to the new Maximum. If the is greater than the new Maximum, the will be set to the new Maximum.

 Current position of the scroll thumb.

When set, the new Value must be within the and .

 Amount that the scroll thumb will reposition when clicking the scroll arrow buttons.

The value returned is the minimum of the and the stored SmallChange.

 Amount that the scroll thumb will reposition when clicking in the scroll track.

The value returned is the minimum of the LargeChange and the current range. The current range is determined by subtracting the from the and adding 1 to the result.

 Returns or sets whether the ScrollBar will appear disabled when the scroll thumb cannot be moved.

The intrinsic ScrollBar displays a scroll thumb that encompasses the entire scroll track when the scroll thumb cannot be moved. When AutoDisable is set to true, the ScrollBar will appear disabled when the thumb cannot be scrolled. This occurs when the minus the plus 1 is greater than the .

 Default appearance for the ScrollBar. Default appearance for the ScrollBar buttons. Default appearance for the scroll thumb. Default appearance for the scroll track. Returns the a collection of user created Appearance objects. Determines whether the control automatically sizes based on the orientation and system ScrollBar size settings. Determines the height/width of the control when autosize is false. Returns the which occupies the client area of the control. Determines the style of buttons used in the control. Returns the resolved .

When the is set to Default, the resolved button style used when rendering the buttons and scroll thumb is Button3D.

 Determines if the default scroll context menu is displayed when the context menu is to be displayed.

The default will not be displayed if the control's ContextMenu has been set.

 Returns the default scroll context menu.

The ScrollContextMenu is only used if the has been set to true. This context menu is similar to the context menu displayed when clicking on a windows system scrollbar.

Menu Structure: Scroll Here (requires point in scroll track) -sep- Top (or Left Edge) Bottom (or Right Edge) -sep- Page Up (or Page Left) Page Down (or Page Right) -sep- Scroll Up (or Scroll Left) Scroll Down (or Scroll Right)

This property is read-only

 Returns or sets the owning UltraControlBase. When set, the scroll bar will use the owner's FlatMode, AlphaBlendEnabled and filter properties as it's own values. The object that enables, disables and controls firing of UltraScrollBar specific events. Returns bit flags that signify the state of the control The mappings collection that relates key strokes with actions.

The following table lists the default key mappings for the control:

KeyCode ActionCode StateRequired StateDisallowed SpecialKeysRequired SpecialKeysDisallowed
LeftSmallDecrementThumbDragAlt
RightSmallIncrementThumbDragAlt
UpSmallDecrementThumbDragAlt
DownSmallIncrementThumbDragAlt
PriorLargeDecrementThumbDragAlt
NextLargeIncrementThumbDragAlt
HomeFirstThumbDragAlt
EndLastThumbDragAlt

Maximum value that can be reached when using the interface to change the value.

The Infragistics ScrollBar was designed to duplicate the functionality and behavior of the intrinsic ScrollBar but utilize the Presentation Layer Framework. In the intrinsic ScrollBar, the large change value is taken into consideration when determining the maximum value that you can drag the scroll thumb, use the scroll arrows or click in the scroll track. Specifically, the maximum value is a result of Maximum minus the LargeChange plus 1. The MaximumDragValue property has been exposed to make it easier to determine this value.

 Returns/sets the style of the control. Event that occurs when the scroll thumb is repositioned. Event that occurs when the property changes. Overriden. The BackColor for the control should be set via the property. Overriden. The BackgroundImage for the control should be set via the property. Overriden. The Font property should be used to initialize a default font for the control. Overiden. The ForeColor for the control should be set via the property. Overriden. The Cursor property should be used to initialize a default cursor for the control. Returns the default size for the control. Determines whether the control will receive focus when tabbing through the controls. Determines the default ImeMode for the control. Determines the ImeMode for the control. Text property - Not supported. DoubleClick event is not used for a scroll bar control. Accessible object representing an Initializes a new Control which is represented by the accessible object Retrieves the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. The zero-based index of the accessible child. An AccessibleObject that represents the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Returns the object that has the keyboard focus. An AccessibleObject that specifies the currently focused child. This method returns the calling object if the object itself is focused. Returns a null reference (Nothing in Visual Basic) if no object has focus. Returns the role of the accessible object. Designer for UltraScrollBar control. Returns the allowable design time selection rules. Gets the for this designer's control/component. Provides DesignerActionItems for the SmartTag associated with the UltraScrollBar. Constructor The associated . Overrides CreateActionItems. The list to populate. Used by SmartTag Panel. Used by SmartTag Panel. Used by SmartTag Panel. Used by SmartTag Panel. Used by SmartTag Panel. Used by SmartTag Panel. Enumeration of scroll arrow orientations. The default scroll arrow style - one scroll button at each end of the scroll track. One scroll button at each end of the scroll track. Both scroll arrow buttons are at the left or top end of the scroll track depending on orientation. Both scroll arrow buttons are at the right or bottom end of the scroll track depending on orientation. Each end of the scroll track has both scroll arrow buttons. The scroll arrow buttons are not displayed. Determines if a scrollbar will be shown. The scrollbar is displayed when needed. The scrollbar is always visible The scrollbar is never displayed. Enumeration indicating how the display is updated while the scroll bar thumb is being dragged. Default scroll mode The page area will scroll as the scroll thumb is dragged. Scrolling does not occur until the scroll thumb is released. Used to determine when scroll tips should be displayed as the thumb is dragged. Default tip style Show tool tips Do not show tool tips Used to determine the style of Default view style. Standard scrollbar style. Office2007 scrollbar style. Outlook2007 scrollbar style. Windows Vista scrollbar style. Enumerates the possible actions for the control. Set the value to the minimum value. Set the value to the maximum value. Increment the value by the SmallChange. Decrement the value by the SmallChange. Increment the value by the LargeChange Decrement the value by the LargeChange Bit flags that describe the state of the control. The scroll thumb is being dragged. The ScrollBar is oriented vertically. The ScrollBar is oriented horizontally. ScrollBarKeyActionMapping Constructor, initializes a new instance of ScrollBarKeyActionMapping Keys Action to take State that the control cannot be in. State that the control must be in. Special keys (ctrl, etc.) not allowed to be pressed. Special keys (ctrl, etc.) required to be held down. Determines the action to take. State that the control cannot be in for the action to be allowed. State that the control must be in for the action to be allowed. ScrollBarKeyActionMappings Constructor, initializes a new instance of ScrollBarKeyActionMappings Called the first time GetActionMapping is called (enables lazy loading of mappings) Copies the items of the collection into the array. The array to receive the items. The array index to begin inserting the items. IEnumerable Interface Implementation returns a type safe enumerator A user to enumerate through the collection. Creates an instance of an ActionStateMappingsCollection derived class A . indexer Summary description for KeyActionMappingEnumerator Constructor non-IEnumerator version: type-safe UIElement class for Min/Max (First/Last) scroll buttons.

The MinMaxButtonUIElement contain no child elements and are contained within a .

 Constructor, initializes a new instance of MinMaxButtonUIElement Parent element Direction of the min max indicator. Resets the direction of the min max arrow. The describing the direction of the scroll arrow. Handles rendering the min/max arrow indicator. The used to provide rendering information. Initializes the button appearance. AppearanceData AppearancePropFlags Called when the button is clicked Handles rendering a themed min/max button. The used to provide rendering information. True if the themed element could be rendered. Invoked during the to resolve any remaining appearance values after the style specific appearance information has been initialized. AppearanceData structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Called to give control focus control to give focus to Renders a custom scroll button image if one is specified. Returns the direction of the scroll arrow. Returns the button style for the element. Returns the associated with this element. UIElement class for scroll arrows for a ScrollBar.

The ScrollArrowUIElement contain no child elements and are contained within a .

 Constructor, initializes a new instance of the ScrollArrowUIElement Parent element ScrollButton direction Initializes the appearance of the element. AppearanceData AppearancePropFlags Called when the button is released The . Returning true will ignore the next click event Called when mouse capture has been aborted, for example, when the 'escape' key is pressed during a drag operation. Renders a custom scroll button image if one is specified. Handles rendering the min/max arrow indicator. The used to provide rendering information. Handles the rendering of the element using the system themes. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element was able to successfully render with the system theme. Used to determine whether the remaining draw methods are invoked. Invoked during the to resolve any remaining appearance values after the style specific appearance information has been initialized. AppearanceData structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Called to give control focus control to give focus to Returns the direction of the scroll button. Returns the button style for the element. Determines whether the element can render an image background. Returns the associated with this element. Indicates if the button style requires invalidation of the element on the mouse enter and exit. Object used to maintain the state information for a ScrollBar. Minimum size for the scroll thumb in pixels. Initializes a new ScrollBarInfo object with the specified , owning control and appearances collection. Orientation of the ScrollBar. Control which owns/contains the ScrollBar. Appearances collection of the owning control. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Determines if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. Determines if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. True if the property value differs from the default value. Resets the value of the property to its default value. Determines if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. Initialize the ScrollBarInfo The owning control Catches subobject property changes. A structure containing the property change information. Initializes the properties of the ScrollBarInfo with the specified values. Minimum value the user can drag to. Maximum value the user can drag to. How much the control scrolls when using the scroll arrows. How much the control scrolls when clicking in the scroll track.

Since the actual maximum value that can be achieved by using the interface may be less than the property, this method provides a way to specify the actual maximum value that the user should be able to get to.

 Returns the maximum drag value for the specified values of the control. Minimum value Maximum value Large change The maximum value that the user can achieve when using the UltraScrollBar interface. Indicates if the needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the control needs to be serialized. Resets the properties to their default values. Handles the disposing of the object's resources. Notify the listening scrollbar elements that the scrollbar should be visible. Notify the listening scrollbar elements that the scrollbar should be hidden. Cancels the current scroll operation. Cancels the current scroll operation. True if any further notifications up to the next EndScroll should be prevented. Creates an accessible object representing the scrollbar. Parent accessible object for the accessible object to create UIElement associated with the accessibility object. The element will provide location and other information about the scrollbar. An accessible object that represents the scrollbar. Creates an accessible object representing the scrollbar. Parent accessible object for the accessible object to create An accessible object that represents the scrollbar. Creates an accessible object representing the scrollbar. An accessible object that represents the scrollbar. Used to programatically invoke a scroll action. Enumeration indicating the action to take. A boolean indicating if the action was performed. Returns the resolved used by the elements associated with the scrollbarinfo instance. Control using the scrollbar info Raises the event when the property changes. An that provides data for the event.

Raising an event invokes the event handler through a delegate.

The OnScroll method also allows derived classes to handle the event without attaching a delegate. This is the preferred technique for handling the event in a derived class.

Notes to Inheritors: When overriding OnScroll in a derived class, be sure to call the base class's OnScroll method so that registered delegates receive the event.

 Raises the event when the property changes. An that provides data for the event.

Raising an event invokes the event handler through a delegate.

The OnValueChanged method also allows derived classes to handle the event without attaching a delegate. This is the preferred technique for handling the event in a derived class.

Notes to Inheritors: When overriding OnValueChanged in a derived class, be sure to call the base class's OnValueChanged method so that registered delegates receive the event.

 Returns the control that owns the ScrollBarInfo. Determines the orientation of the ScrollBar. Minimum position of the scroll thumb.

If the Minimum is set to a value greater than the , the will be updated to the same value. If the is less than the new Minimum, the will be set to the new Minimum.

 Maximum position of the scroll thumb.

If the new Maximum is less than the , the will be set to the new Maximum. If the is greater than the new Maximum, the will be set to the new Maximum.

 Current position of the scroll thumb.

When set, the new Value must be within the and .

 Amount that the scroll thumb will reposition when clicking the scroll arrow buttons.

The value returned is the minimum of the and the stored SmallChange.

 Amount that the scroll thumb will reposition when clicking in the scroll track.

The value returned is the minimum of the LargeChange and the current range. The current range is determined by subtracting the from the and adding 1 to the result.

 Determines the appearance of the ScrollBar Determines the style of buttons used in the control. Returns the resolved .

When the is set to Default, the resolved button style used when rendering the buttons and scroll thumb is Button3D.

 Indicates if the scroll thumb is currently being dragged. Indicates if the scroll thumb should toggle its state to indicate focus.

The is used to indicate that the scroll bar has focus. Normally, scrollbar controls do not take focus but when it is indicated that the control should display a focus indication, the backcolor of the scroll thumb is changed from solid to hatched intermittently.

 Indicates the visibility of the elements listening to the ScrollBarInfo. Maximum value that can be reached when using the interface to change the value.

The Infragistics ScrollBar was designed to duplicate the functionality and behavior of the intrinsic ScrollBar but utilize the Presentation Layer Framework. In the intrinsic ScrollBar, the large change value is taken into consideration when determining the maximum value that you can drag the scroll thumb, use the scroll arrows or click in the scroll track. Specifically, the maximum value is a result of Maximum minus the LargeChange plus 1. The MaximumDragValue property has been exposed to make it easier to determine this value.

 Determines the enabled state of the scroll bar. Indicates if the ScrollBar appears disabled based on the and properties. Returns or sets whether the ScrollBar will appear disabled when the scroll thumb cannot be moved.

The intrinsic ScrollBar displays a scroll thumb that encompasses the entire scroll track when the scroll thumb cannot be moved. When AutoDisable is set to true, the ScrollBar will appear disabled when the thumb cannot be scrolled. This occurs when the minus the plus 1 is greater than the .

 Indicates if the scroll operation has been cancelled. Indicates if a scroll operation is currently in progress. Determines the amount of milliseconds between scroll notifications when using the scroll arrows or scroll track. Gets/sets whether callbacks made during a scroll operation occur synchronously or asynchronously. When true, scroll notifications as a result of a scroll arrow or scroll track click will occur synchronously. Returns or sets the name of the scrollbar displayed by accessibility clients. Returns or sets the description of the scrollbar displayed by accessibility clients. Returns or sets whether clicking on the scrollbar buttons will force focus to the containing control.

By default, the Focus method of the containing control is invoked when the scroll buttons are pressed. This property can be used to prevent that behavior if necessary.

 Returns/sets the style of the control. Event that occurs when the scroll thumb is repositioned. Event that occurs when the property changes. An accessible object representing a scrollbar. Initializes a new Owning scrollbar info Parent accessible object Initializes a new Owning scrollbar info Parent accessible object Scrollbar element Returns the control used to synchronize accessibility calls. The used to synchronize accessibility calls. Navigates to another accessible object One of the AccessibleNavigation values An AccessibleObject that represents one of the AccessibleNavigation values Retrieves the accessible child corresponding to the specified index The zero-based index of the accessible child An AccessibleObject that represents the accessible child corresponding to the specified index Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Gets the location and size of the accessible object. The accessible name for the data area. Gets the parent of an accessible object. Gets the role of this accessible object. Gets the state of this accessible object. Gets a string that describes the visual appearance of the specified object. Not all objects have a description Gets or sets the value of an accessible object. Returns the control used to synchronize accessibility calls. Performs the default action associated with this accessible object. Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Navigates to another accessible object One of the AccessibleNavigation values An AccessibleObject that represents one of the AccessibleNavigation values Gets the location and size of the accessible object. The accessible name for the data area. Gets the parent of an accessible object. Gets the role of this accessible object. Gets a string that describes the default action of the object. Not all objects have a default action. Gets a string that describes the visual appearance of the specified object. Not all objects have a description Returns the state of the accessible object. Object used to maintain the Appearance information for a ScrollBar. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the ScrollBarLook class Constructor, initializes a new instance of the ScrollBarLook class The used to initialize the collection. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the ScrollBarLook class SerializationInfo StreamingContext Serialize the collection Initializes the object after deserialization. object Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. Indicates if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Resets the property to its default value. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the Appearances collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the Appearances collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the Appearances collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the Appearances collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the Appearances collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the Appearances collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the Appearances collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the Appearances collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the Appearances collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the Appearances collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the Appearances collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property. If the property was set to an Appearance from the Appearances collection, the properties on the object in the collection will remain the same but the property will no longer be attached to that . To reset the properties of the associated Appearance object, the method of the Appearance object itself should be invoked instead.

 Determines if the property needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the property needs to be serialized. Initializes the for the ScrollBar appearance objects. The list of appearances used to initialize the appearance objects of the ScrollBar. Resets the properties of the ScrollBarLook object to their default values. Indicates if the ScrollBarLook object needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the object needs to be serialized. Handles the disposing of the object's resources. Receives subobject change notifications. A structure containing the property change information. Resolves the button appearance. Structure to receive the updated appearance info. Flag enumeration indicating which properties need to be resolved. Resolves the button appearance. Structure to receive the updated appearance info. Flag enumeration indicating which properties need to be resolved. enumeration indicating the orientation of the UltraScrollbar Resolves the scroll thumb appearance. Structure to receive the updated appearance info. Flag enumeration indicating which properties need to be resolved. Resolves the scroll thumb appearance. Structure to receive the updated appearance info. Flag enumeration indicating which properties need to be resolved. enumeration indicating the orientation of the UltraScrollbar Resolves the scroll track appearance. Structure to receive the updated appearance info. Flag enumeration indicating which properties need to be resolved. Resolves the scroll track appearance. Structure to receive the updated appearance info. Flag enumeration indicating which properties need to be resolved. enumeration indicating the orientation of the UltraScrollbar Resolves the ScrollBar's appearance. Structure to receive the updated appearance info. Flag enumeration indicating which properties need to be resolved. Resolves the ScrollBar's appearance. Structure to receive the updated appearance info. Flag enumeration indicating which properties need to be resolved. enumeration indicating the orientation of the UltraScrollbar Returns a copy of this ScrollBarLook object. Invoked during the serialization of the object. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Invoked after the entire object graph has been deserialized. The object that initiated the callback. The functionality for the this parameter is not currently implemented. Returns a list of properties which can be used in a Preset Determines which type(s) of properties are returned An array of strings indicating property names Returns the TypeName of the Preset target Returns "ScrollBarLook" Returns the resolved for the scrollbar look used by a specific component. Control using the scrollbar info The for the scrollbar. Returns the resolved for the scrollbar look used by a specific component. Control using the scrollbar info The resolved for the specified control. Returns the resolved for the scrollbar look used by a specific component. Control using the scrollbar info Returns the resolved for the scrollbar look used by a specific component. Control using the scrollbar info Determines if the Min and Max buttons are displayed. Determines if the Min and Max buttons are displayed. Determines the number and positioning of the scroll bar arrow buttons. Default appearance for the ScrollBar. Indicates whether an object has been created. Returns true when the Appearance object for the property has been created.

Use this property to determine if an object has been created. Appearance objects in general are not created until the properties associated with them are accessed.

 Default horizontal appearance for the ScrollBar. Indicates whether an object has been created. Returns true when the Appearance object for the property has been created.

Use this property to determine if an object has been created. Appearance objects in general are not created until the properties associated with them are accessed.

 Default vertical appearance for the ScrollBar. Indicates whether an object has been created. Returns true when the Appearance object for the property has been created.

Use this property to determine if an object has been created. Appearance objects in general are not created until the properties associated with them are accessed.

 Default appearance for the ScrollBar buttons. Indicates whether an object has been created. Returns true when the Appearance object for the property has been created.

Use this property to determine if an object has been created. Appearance objects in general are not created until the properties associated with them are accessed.

 Default appearance for the horizontal ScrollBar buttons. Indicates whether an object has been created. Returns true when the Appearance object for the property has been created.

Use this property to determine if an object has been created. Appearance objects in general are not created until the properties associated with them are accessed.

 Default appearance for the vertical ScrollBar buttons. Indicates whether an object has been created. Returns true when the Appearance object for the property has been created.

Use this property to determine if an object has been created. Appearance objects in general are not created until the properties associated with them are accessed.

 Default appearance for the scroll thumb. Indicates whether an object has been created. Returns true when the Appearance object for the property has been created.

Use this property to determine if an object has been created. Appearance objects in general are not created until the properties associated with them are accessed.

 Default appearance for the horizontal scroll thumb. Indicates whether an object has been created. Returns true when the Appearance object for the property has been created.

Use this property to determine if an object has been created. Appearance objects in general are not created until the properties associated with them are accessed.

 Default appearance for the vertical scroll thumb. Indicates whether an object has been created. Returns true when the Appearance object for the property has been created.

Use this property to determine if an object has been created. Appearance objects in general are not created until the properties associated with them are accessed.

 Default appearance for the scroll track. Indicates whether an object has been created. Returns true when the Appearance object for the property has been created.

Use this property to determine if an object has been created. Appearance objects in general are not created until the properties associated with them are accessed.

 Default appearance for the horizontal scroll track. Indicates whether an object has been created. Returns true when the Appearance object for the property has been created.

Use this property to determine if an object has been created. Appearance objects in general are not created until the properties associated with them are accessed.

 Default appearance for the vertical scroll track. Indicates whether an object has been created. Returns true when the Appearance object for the property has been created.

Use this property to determine if an object has been created. Appearance objects in general are not created until the properties associated with them are accessed.

 Returns or sets the delegate used during the appearance resolution process to resolve the default appearance. Returns or sets the delegate used during the appearance resolution process to resolve the button appearance. Returns or sets the delegate used during the appearance resolution process to resolve the thumb appearance. Returns or sets the delegate used during the appearance resolution process to resolve the track appearance. Determines the minimum width of a horizontal scroll bar thumb. Determines the minimum height of a vertical scroll bar thumb. Returns/sets the style of the control. TypeConverter for the class. Returns true if the object can convert to that type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert to. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the object to the requested type. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. A that represents the type you want to convert to. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. Main UIElement class for a ScrollBar

The ScrollBarUIElement can contain 0,2 or 4 and objects and one .

 Initializes a new ScrollBarUIElement with the specified parent element and ScrollBarInfo object. Parent element ScrollBarInfo class containing state information for the ScrollBar. Called when the element is disposed.. Handles the positioning and creation of the child elements. Initializes the appearance. AppearanceData to update with the appearance information Flags indicating the appearance properties to resolve Called when the mouse enters this element Called when the mouse leaves this element Returns an object of requested type that relates to the element or null. The requested type or null to pick up default context object. If true will walk up the parent chain looking for the context. Classes that override this method normally need to override the method as well. Provides a mechanism to reset the scroll info object that the uielement listens to. ScrollBarInfo Returns the orientation of the scroll bar element. Gets/sets whether this element is enabled.

Note: this will return false if the element, the associated ScrollBarInfo, or any of its ancestors are disabled.

 Indicates if the element supports accessibility Returns the accessible object that represents the element or its associated object. Returns the ui role for the element. BorderStyle of the element. Returns the resolved value of the property. If the property has been set to a non-default value, that value is returned; otherwise, the return value is based on the property. Context menu control used by the Handles displaying the popup menu. EventArgs Maintains if the context menu has already been disposed. Boolean indicating if any unmanaged resources need to be released. Determines whether the context menu is aligned right to left. Returns a flag indicating if the context menu has been disposed. Returns the owning control. UIElement used to render a scroll thumb. Initializes a new ScrollThumbUIElement with the specified parent. The parent . Initializes the appearance of the element. AppearanceData Appearance properties that need to be resolved. Invoked during the to resolve any remaining appearance values after the style specific appearance information has been initialized. AppearanceData structure to update Appearance properties to resolve Handles rendering the borders for the element. The used to provide rendering information. Overrides the default mouse down behavior to capture the mouse on a left mouse button down. Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Called on a mouse move message Mouse event arguments Clear internal flags and invalidate the button The . Returning true will ignore the next click event Called when mouse capture has been aborted, for example, when the 'escape' key is pressed during a drag operation. Handles the rendering of the element using the system themes. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element was able to successfully render with the system theme. Used to determine whether the remaining draw methods are invoked. Handles drawing the backcolor for the ScrollThumb. The used to provide rendering information. Called when element is disposed of Called to give control focus control to give focus to Renders a custom scroll button image if one is specified. Returns the button style for the scroll thumb. Returns the ui role for the element. Indicates if the button style requires invalidation of the element on the mouse enter and exit. UIElement class for the area above or below the in a Constructor, initializes new instance of the ScrollTrackSubAreaUIElement class. Parent element Direction traversed when clicked upon. Boolean indicating if this element is the upper track in the scrollbar. Initializes the appearance of the element. The appearance structure to initialize. The properties that are needed Called when the button is released The . Returning true will ignore the next click event Called when mouse capture has been aborted, for example, when the 'escape' key is pressed during a drag operation. Called when the button is clicked Handles rendering the foreground. The used to provide rendering information. Handles the rendering of the element using the system themes. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element was able to successfully render with the system theme. Used to determine whether the remaining draw methods are invoked. Handles rendering the background. The used to provide rendering information. Called to give control focus control to give focus to ButtonStyle for the element. Indicates if the button style requires invalidation of the element on the mouse enter and exit. Returns the ui role for the element. Returns the direction traversed when the area is clicked. Indicates if this ScrollBar subtrack is the upper (top for vertical, left for horizontal) area of the scrollbar. Determines whether the element can render an image background. UIElement class for the scroll track area of a ScrollBar.

The ScrollTrackUIElement is contained in a and can contain one and 0 - 2 objects depending upon the position of the scroll thumb and the enabled state of the ScrollBar.

 Constructor, initializes a new instance of ScrollTrackUIElement Parent element. Handles creation/positioning of the child elements. Initializes the appearance of the element. AppearanceData Appearance properties that need to be resolved. Handles drawing the backcolor for the scroll track area. The used to provide rendering information. Handles the rendering of the element using the system themes. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element was able to successfully render with the system theme. Used to determine whether the remaining draw methods are invoked. Returns the ui role for the element. Main UIElement for the control.

The UltraScrollBarControlUIElement only contains a .

 Constructor, initializes new instance of UltraScrollBarControlUIElement Owning control Handles positioning and creation of the child elements. Performs the action and returns true if message was handled The action to perform true if shift key down true if control key down True if the action was performed successfully Overriden. When the control can receive focus and does not have focus, set focus to the control. Information regarding the mouse message. True if the mouse message should not be handled by the elements. Returns the UltraScrollBar's mappings collection Returns bit flags indicating the current state of the control (used to get appropriate key action on keyDown) Returns the owning UltraScrollBar control. UltraScrollBarEventManager Constructor, initializes new instance of UltraScrollBarEventManager UltraScrollBar control associated witht the event manager Returns true if the event is in progress (in progress count > 0 True if in progress, false otherwise Returns true if the event is enabled True if in enabled, false otherwise Sets a specific event enabled or disabled The to enable or disable. Whether the specified event should be disabled or enabled. True if in enabled, false otherwise Returns true if all events in the group are enabled The to enable or disable. True if in enabled, false otherwise Sets all events in the group enabled or disabled The to enable or disable. Whether the specified event should be disabled or enabled. True if in enabled, false otherwise Increments the in progress count Decrements the in progress count Returns true if the event can be fired true if event can fire, false otherwise The associated UltraScrollBar Returns a lazily loaded array of indexes for all the 'After' events Returns a lazily loaded array of indexes for all the 'After' events Enumerations that uniquely identify the events. Event id that identifies the MouseEnterElement event Event id that identifies the MouseLeaveElement event Event id that identifies the ValueChanged event. Event id that identifies the Scroll event. Identifies groups of events All Events All Before Events All After Events Enumeration of Property identifiers for the , and classes. MinMaxButtonsVisible Orientation ScrollBarArrowStyle Minimum Maximum Value SmallChange LargeChange Appearance NonAutoSize AutoSize ScrollThumbAppearance ScrollButtonAppearance ScrollTrackAppearance ButtonStyle UseDefaultContextMenu Owner ScrollBarLook ScrollBarInfo ScrollButtonSize RightToLeft Appearances Enabled ShowsFocus Visible ThumbReposition AutoDisable CancelScroll AutoRepeatDelay property PriorityScrolling property ThumbRect AppearanceHorizontal property AppearanceVertical property ThumbAppearanceHorizontal property ThumbAppearanceVertical property ButtonAppearanceHorizontal property ButtonAppearanceVertical property TrackAppearanceHorizontal property TrackAppearanceVertical property property property property A class containing several different options for customizing the appearance and location of buttons on a TrackBar. Returns a Boolean value that determines whether the ButtonLocation property is set to its default value. True if the value should be serialized. Resets the ButtonLocation property to its default value. Returns a Boolean value that determines whether the ButtonSize property is set to its default value. True if the value should be serialized. Resets the ButtonSize property to its default value. Returns a Boolean value that determines whether the ButtonSpacing property is set to its default value. True if the value should be serialized. Resets the ButtonSpacing property to its default value. Returns true if the DecrementButtonAppearance is not the default True if the appearance is set to a non-default value. Resets the DecrementButtonAppearance property to its default value. Returns true if the DecrementButtonHotTrackAppearance is not the default True if the appearance is set to a non-default value. Resets the DecrementButtonHotTrackAppearance property to its default value. Returns true if the DecrementButtonPressedAppearance is not the default True if the appearance is set to a non-default value. Resets the DecrementButtonPressedAppearance property to its default value. Returns true if the IncrementButtonAppearance is not the default True if the appearance is set to a non-default value. Resets the IncrementButtonAppearance property to its default value. Returns true if the IncrementButtonHotTrackAppearance is not the default True if the appearance is set to a non-default value. Resets the IncrementButtonHotTrackAppearance property to its default value. Returns true if the IncrementButtonPressedAppearance is not the default True if the appearance is set to a non-default value. Resets the IncrementButtonPressedAppearance property to its default value. Returns true if the MaxButtonAppearance is not the default True if the appearance is set to a non-default value. Resets the MaxButtonAppearance property to its default value. Returns true if the MaxButtonHotTrackAppearance is not the default True if the appearance is set to a non-default value. Resets the MaxButtonHotTrackAppearance property to its default value. Returns true if the MaxButtonPressedAppearance is not the default True if the appearance is set to a non-default value. Resets the MaxButtonPressedAppearance property to its default value. Returns true if the MinButtonAppearance is not the default True if the appearance is set to a non-default value. Resets the MinButtonAppearance property to its default value. Returns true if the MinButtonHotTrackAppearance is not the default True if the appearance is set to a non-default value. Resets the MinButtonHotTrackAppearance property to its default value. Returns true if the MinButtonPressedAppearance is not the default True if the appearance is set to a non-default value. Resets the MinButtonPressedAppearance property to its default value. Returns a Boolean value that determines whether the ShowIncrementButtons property is set to its default value. True if the value should be serialized. Resets the ShowIncrementButtons property to its default value. Returns a Boolean value that determines whether the ShowMinMaxButtons property is set to its default value. True if the value should be serialized. Resets the ShowMinMaxButtons property to its default value. Resets all properties back to their defaults Resolves the appearance of a button. Structure to receive the updated appearance info. Flag enumeration indicating which properties need to be resolved. The state of the button. The type of button that needs to be resolved. Indicates if the ButtonSettings object needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the object needs to be serialized. Called when the object is being disposed. Invoked when a property on a subobject has changed. Provides information about the change Returns an empty string. An empty string. Gets or set where any buttons are placed relative to the axis of the TrackBar. Gets the resolved TrackBarButtonLocation of the TrackBar. Gets or sets the size of the buttons on the track bar. By default this value will be resolved based on the ViewStyle of the editor. Gets the resolved button size. Gets or sets how much space is between button elements, as well as the space between the button and the track. Gets or sets the appearance of the decrement button. Returns whether the DecrementButtonAppearance property has been created. Gets or sets the hot-tracked appearance of the decrement button. Returns whether the DecrementButtonHotTrackAppearance property has been created. Gets or sets the pressed appearance of the decrement button. Returns whether the DecrementButtonPressedAppearance property has been created. Gets or sets the appearance of the increment button. Returns whether the IncrementButtonAppearance property has been created. Gets or sets the hot-tracked appearance of the increment button. Returns whether the IncrementButtonHotTrackAppearance property has been created. Gets or sets the pressed appearance of the increment button. Returns whether the IncrementButtonPressedAppearance property has been created. Gets or sets the appearance of the max button. Returns whether the MaxButtonAppearance property has been created. Gets or sets the hot-tracked appearance of the max button. Returns whether the MaxButtonHotTrackAppearance property has been created. Gets or sets the pressed appearance of the max button. Returns whether the MaxButtonPressedAppearance property has been created. Gets or sets the appearance of the min button. Returns whether the MinButtonAppearance property has been created. Gets or sets the hot-tracked appearance of the min button. Returns whether the MinButtonHotTrackAppearance property has been created. Gets or sets the pressed appearance of the min button. Returns whether the MinButtonPressedAppearance property has been created. Gets or sets whether the +/- buttons are visible. Gets the resolved ShowIncrementButtons value. Gets or sets whether the minimum and maximum buttons are visible. Gets the resolved value of ShowMinMaxButtons. Returns or sets an object value that is stored on the settings.

Note: The Tag property is not saved with the settings information.

 An enumeration for specifying where tickmarks should be displayed on a TrackBar. Tickmarks will be displayed in the default location, which is dependant on the ViewStyle and type of tickmark. Tickmarks will be displayed below a horizontal TrackBar or to the right of a veritcal TrackBar. Tickmarks will be displayed above a horizontal TrackBar or to the left of a vertical TrackBar. Tickmarks will be displayed on both sides of the track area of a TrackBar. Tickmarks will be centered on the track. The TrackOffset property is ignored. An enumeration for specifying the type of tickmark. Represents a major tickmark. Represents a minor tickmark. Represents the tickmark shown when the midpoint is set. An enumeration for specifying the cause of an action on the TrackBar. The action is triggered by the decrement button. The action is triggered by the increment button. The action is triggered by the minimum button. The action is triggered by the maximum button. The action is triggered by the user dragging the thumb. The action is triggered by clicking on the track area. The action is triggered by keyboard navigation. The action is triggered by the user scrolling the mouse wheel. The action has been explicitly caused by the user. An enumeration for specifying where buttons on a TrackBar are positioned, relative to the track area. Buttons are placed in the default location, which is dependant on the ViewStyle. Buttons are placed on the MinValue side of the TrackBar. Buttons are placed on the MaxValue side of the TrackBar. Buttons that decrement the value will be placed on the MinValue side while buttons that increment the value will be placed on the MaxValue side. An enumeration that determines the behavior of a button of the TrackBar. The button will decrement the value of the TrackBar. The button will increment the value of the TrackBar. The button will set the TrackBar to MinValue. The button will set the TrackBar to the MaxValue. An enumeration for specifying the default appearance and behavior of a TrackBar. The TrackBar will be rendered with the default appearance and behavior. The TrackBar will have the default appearances of a .NET TrackBar. No buttons are visible by default and tickmarks will be shown. The TrackBar will be rendered similarly to the TrackBar seen in the StatusBar in Office2007. The increment buttons are shown by default but no tickmarks are visible. The TrackBar will be rendered similarly to the TrackBar see in the Explorer window of Windows Vista. No tickmarks or buttons are shown by default. An enumeration for specifying how the TrackBar should adjust the value when the user clicks on the track area outside of the Thumb. The default action should be taken, based on the ViewStyle. The TrackBar should adjust to the value closest to where the user clicked. The TrackBar should increment or decrement the value based on the LargeChange property. The TrackBar should increment or decrement the value based on the SmallChange property. Enumerates the possible actions for the UltraTrackBar control. Set the value to the minimum value. Set the value to the maximum value. Increment the value by the SmallChange. Decrement the value by the SmallChange. Increment the value by the LargeChange Decrement the value by the LargeChange Bit flags that describe the state of the UltraTrackBar control. The track thumb is being dragged. The TrackBar is oriented vertically. The TrackBar is oriented horizontally. The value of the TrackBar is null. The class mapping a keystroke to an action on a TrackBar. Constructor, initializes a new instance of the class. Keys Action to take State that the control cannot be in. State that the control must be in. Special keys (ctrl, etc.) not allowed to be pressed. Special keys (ctrl, etc.) required to be held down. Determines the action to take. State that the control cannot be in for the action to be allowed. State that the control must be in for the action to be allowed. A class representing a collection of TrackBarKeyActionMapping objects. Initializes a new instance of the class. Creates an instance of an ActionStateMappingsCollection derived class A . Called the first time GetActionMapping is called (enables lazy loading of mappings) Copies the items of the collection into the array. The array to receive the items. The array index to begin inserting the items. Gets or sets the value at the specified index. The index of the item in the collection. A . The UIElement used to render the thumb of a TrackBar. Instantiates a new instance of the class. The parent . Overriden to prevent the rendering of the back color if we're using a default, unthemed image. The used to provide rendering information. Overriden to draw the specified image into the rect of the element. The used to provide rendering information. Handles the rendering of the element using the system themes. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element was able to successfully render with the system theme. Used to determine whether the remaining draw methods are invoked. Initializes the appearance of the element. AppearanceData Appearance properties that need to be resolved. Called when mouse capture has been aborted, for example, when the 'escape' key is pressed during a drag operation. Overrides the default mouse down behavior to capture the mouse on a left mouse button down. Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Called on a mouse move message Mouse event arguments Called on a mouse up message. The . Returning true will ignore the next click event Gets or sets the information regarding the mouse in relation to the element. Gets the button style for the element. Overriden to use a borderless style. Overriden to return true. Indicates that buttons need to be invalidated on a mouse enter or leave message. Returns the UI role for the thumb. A base class for providing appearance and positioning options for tickmarks. The default thickness of tickmarks on a TrackBar. The default offset from the track area of a TrackBar, for major or minor tickmarks. The default extent for major tickmarks. The default extent for minor tickmarks. The default extent for a midpoint tickmark. The default value of the extent property. Returns true if the Appearance is not the default True if the appearance is set to a non-default value. Resets the Appearance property to its default value. Returns true if the value is not the default True if the extent is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the Location property is not the default True if the Location property is set to a non-default value. Resets the Location property to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the thickness is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the track offset is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Returns true if the value is not the default True if the visible property is set to a non-default value. Resets the Visible property to its default value Resets all properties back to their defaults Indicates if the object needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the object needs to be serialized. Called when the object is being disposed. Invoked when a property on a subobject has changed. Provides information about the change Returns an empty string. An empty string. Gets or sets the appearance of the tickmarks. Returns whether the Appearance property has been created. Gets or sets the height or width of the tickmarks, depending on if the orientation of the TrackBar is horizontal or vertical, respectively. Gets the resolved extent of the associated tickmarks. Gets or sets where the tickmarks are shown relative to the track area. Gets the resolved location of the tickmarks. Gets or sets the width or height of the tickmarks, depending on if the orientation of the TrackBar is horizontal or vertical, respectively. Gets the resolved thickness of the associated tickmarks. Gets the associated TrackBarEditor Gets or sets the distance between the track and the tickmarks. Must be at least 0. Gets the type of the tickmark that this object controls. Gets or sets whether the tickmarks are visible. The default value is dependant on the ViewStyle of the TrackBar. Gets the resolved visibility of the tickmarks. Returns or sets an object value that is stored on the settings.

Note: The Tag property is not saved with the settings information.

 A class providing various options for controlling the positioning and appearance of major or minor tickmarks. Returns true if the value is not the default True if the frequency is set to a non-default value. Resets the property back to its default value Resets all properties back to their defaults Indicates if the object needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the object needs to be serialized. Creates a copy of the settings. A copy of the settings object. Gets or sets the number of positions between tickmarks.

Note: The default value of -1 will cause the frequency to be resolved to the LargeChange property for major tickmarks or the SmallChange property for minor tickmarks.

A class providing options to control the appearance and position of the tickmark at the midpoint of the TrackBar. Returns whether the Value property has been set to a non-default value. True if the Value property is set to a non-default value. Resets the Value back to the default. Resets all properties back to their defaults Indicates if the object needs to be serialized. A boolean indicating if the object needs to be serialized. Creates a copy of the settings. A copy of the settings object. Gets or sets the value that should be represented at the midpoint of the TrackBar.

Note: Setting this property to a value that is not the midpoint of the range of the TrackBar will cause there to be a different number of values on either half of the track; this will take effect even if the midpoint tickmark is not visible.

A class for rendering tickmarks of a TrackBar. Initializes a new instance of the class. The parent . The type of tickmarks this element will render. Overriden to prevent a background from rendering. The used to provide rendering information. Overriden to render tickmarks. The used to provide rendering information. Initializes the appearance of the element. AppearanceData Appearance properties that need to be resolved. Called when the mouse down message is received over the element. Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Gets the type of tickmarks that this element renders. Returns the UI role for the tickmarks. A class used to represent the various buttons of a TrackBar. Initializes a new instance of the class. The type used to determine the behavior of the button. The parent element. Overriden. Prevents the base scrollbar button logic from executing. Overriden to draw the specified image into the rect of the element. The used to provide rendering information. Handles the rendering of the element using the system themes. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element was able to successfully render with the system theme. Used to determine whether the remaining draw methods are invoked. Merges the appearance object into the passed in structure The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. Called when the button is clicked Overrides the default mouse down behavior to capture the mouse on a left mouse button down. Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Gets the button style for the element. Overriden to use a borderless button in non-standard styles. Overriden to return true. Indicates that buttons need to be invalidated on a mouse enter or leave message. Gets the UI role of the button. The editor used to provide TrackBar functionality. The default value for the TrackThickness property of a TrackBar. The default value for the MaxValue property of a TrackBar. The default value for the MinValue property of a TrackBar. The default value for the LargeChange property of a TrackBar. The default value for the SmallChange property of a TrackBar. The default value for the ButtonSpacing property of a TrackBar. Initializes a new instance of the class. Instantiates a new instance of the class. An instance of the default EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class from which to obtain owner-specific information Resets the ThumbAppearance property to its default value Resets the ThumbHotTrackAppearance property to its default value Resets the ThumbPressedAppearance property to its default value Resets the TrackAppearance property to its default value. For Infragistics Internal Infrastructure purposes only. The preferred thickness of the editor, including any owner-provided padding. Performs the action specified. Action to perform. A boolean indicating if the action was performed. Performs the action specified. Action to perform. Specifies whether the Shift key was pressed. Specifies whether the Ctrl key was pressed. A boolean indicating if the action was performed. Gets whether the specified type can be edited. The to check. True if type can be edited, false otherwise Used to determine if type can be edited The to check. true if type can be rendered, false otherwise Creates a copy of the embeddable editor with the specified default owner. An instance of the default EmbeddableEditorOwnerBase-derived class from which to obtain owner-specific information A copy of the editor Used by an editor owner to create an accessible object for a specific object managed by an editor. Parent accessible object for the accessible object to create Editor owner Owner context that can be supplied to the editor owner to obtain information about the object represented by the accessible instance. An accessible object that represents the specified owner context for the editor. Sets input focus to the editor. Returns true if the editor successfully took focus. Override this in specific editor to provide editor value. Editor value. Called from inside the method of the parent element to create and position the embedded element or elements. The element that will contain the embedded element. An object that derives from the class. Context information that is used to get the value to render via a call to the method. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. The element returned the prior time the parent element's method was called. An instance of a class derived from EmbeddableUIElementBase.

The owner and ownerContext values are saved by the added element to get value and state information later.

 Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Returns the type of the EmbeddableUIElementBase derived class that this editor uses as it's embeddable element. Used to determine the size preferred/required by the editor. Structure that provides information regarding the size calculation including the owner for which the size calculation is occuring, whether to exclude edit elements, whether to include borders, etc. The size needed to render the value by the editor based upon the specified options. Initializes the state of this object from a source object of the same type Object whose properties should be copied Overrides the control's determination of what is considered an input key. Key A boolean indicating if this key is an input key for the control. Returns true if the edited value is valid (read-only). If the value is invalid, the 'errorMessage' out parameter can contain an error message. If the value is invalid, this out parameter can contain an error message. Accessing this property when the editor is not in edit mode will throw an exception. True if the editor's value is valid, else false. Fired after the control exits edit mode. Fired before the control enters edit mode. Called when the object is disposed of Occurs when the owner gets a key down while in edit mode. The key event args describing which key was pressed. Invoked when a property on a subobject has changed. Provides information about the change Internal method for Infragistics infrastructure purposes only. New editor value. Fired when the thumb position is being moved with the mouse. Returns a group of properties used to determine various aspects of the buttons. Returns whether the ButtonSettings object has been created. Returns bit flags that signify the current editing state of the control. Gives you the ability to reconfigure the way the control responds to user keystrokes.

The KeyActionMappings property provides access to the control's mechanism for handling keyboard input from users. All keystrokes for actions such as selection, navigation and editing are stored in a table-based system that you can examine and modify using this property. Through the KeyActionsMappings property, you can customize the keyboard layout of the control to match your own standards for application interactivity.

For example, if you wanted users to be able to change the value by pressing the F8 key, you could add this behavior. You can specify the key code and any special modifier keys associated with an action, as well as determine whether a key mapping applies in a given context.

KeyCode ActionCode StateRequired StateDisallowed SpecialKeysRequired SpecialKeysDisallowed
LeftLastHorizontal, NullValueAlt
UpLastHorizontal, NullValueAlt
RightFirstHorizontal, NullValueAlt
DownFirstHorizontal, NullValueAlt
NextFirstHorizontal, NullValueAlt
PageUpLastHorizontal, NullValueAlt
HomeFirstHorizontal, NullValueAlt
EndLastHorizontal, NullValueAlt
LeftFirstVertical, NullValueAlt
UpFirstVertical, NullValueAlt
RightLastVertical, NullValueAlt
DownLastVertical, NullValueAlt
NextLastVertical, NullValueAlt
PageUpFirstVertical, NullValueAlt
HomeLastVertical, NullValueAlt
EndFirstVertical, NullValueAlt
LeftSmallDecrementHorizontalNullValueAlt
UpSmallDecrementHorizontalNullValueAlt
RightSmallIncrementHorizontalNullValueAlt
DownSmallIncrementHorizontalNullValueAlt
NextLargeIncrementHorizontalNullValueAlt
PageUpLargeDecrementHorizontalNullValueAlt
HomeFirstHorizontalNullValueAlt
EndLastHorizontalNullValueAlt
LeftSmallIncrementVerticalNullValueAlt
UpSmallIncrementVerticalNullValueAlt
RightSmallDecrementVerticalNullValueAlt
DownSmallDecrementVerticalNullValueAlt
NextLargeDecrementVerticalNullValueAlt
PageUpLargeIncrementVerticalNullValueAlt
HomeLastVerticalNullValueAlt
EndFirstVerticalNullValueAlt

Gets or sets the number of positions the thumb moves in response to mouse clicks or the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys.

Note: This property only affects thumb movement triggered by mouse clicks when the is set to UseLargeChange.

 Gets or sets the maximum allowable value of the control. Gets the object used to control the appearance and value of the midpoint tickmark. Returns true if the MidpointSettings object has been created. Gets or sets the minimum allowable value of the control. Gets or sets the orientation of the control. Gets or sets the number of positions the thumb moves in response to mouse clicks or the arrow keys.

Note: This property only affects thumb movement triggered by mouse clicks when the is set to UseSmallChange.

 Gets or sets the appearance for the thumb of the TrackBar. Returns true if a thumb apperance has been defined. Gets or sets the hot-tracked appearance for the thumb of the TrackBar. Returns true if a hot-tracked thumb apperance has been defined. Gets or sets the pressed appearance for the thumb of the TrackBar. Returns true if a pressed thumb apperance has been defined. Gets or sets how far the thumb should be from being centered on the track and the value.

Note: This property is useful when the thumb image being used should not be centered over the associated tickmark; an example would be a right triangle whose flat edge should be aligned along the tickmark.

Gets the resolved size of the thumb.

The size of the thumb is automatically calculated based on the largest image that is assigned to either , , or .

 Gets the object used to control the position and appearances of major tickmarks. Returns true if a TickmarkSettingsMajor object has been created. Gets the object used to control the position and appearance of minor tickmarks. Returns true if a TickmarkSettingsMinor object has been created. Gets or sets the appearance of the track along which a thumb moves. Returns true if a track apperance has been defined. Gets or sets how the thumb will move when the user clicks in the track area. Gets the resolved action when the track area is clicked. Gets or sets the height or width of the track, depending on whether the orientation is horizontal or vertical, respectively.

Note: This property is not honored in the Office2007 or Vista ViewStyles.

Gets the resolved thickness of the track. Gets or sets the style of the control, which affects default appearances and behavior. Gets the resolved ViewStyle of the control. Determines if item can recieve focus Returns the current text being edited without doing any validation. This will return the text currently typed in. If the editor does not have an textbox-like control, it will return the current edit value in form of text. Accessing this property when the editor is not in edit mode will throw an exception. Default type used by the editor in the case of data filter. Null means that editor supports multiple data types and expects type to be set or provided by the owner. Gets whether editor has focus. Gets/sets the value of the editor. Accessible object representing a TrackBar editor instance. Initializes a new Parent accessible object Associated TrackBar editor. Associated owner Owner context that identifies the object which the accessible instance represents Retrieves the accessible child corresponding to the specified index The zero-based index of the accessible child An AccessibleObject that represents the accessible child corresponding to the specified index Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Navigates to another accessible object One of the AccessibleNavigation values An AccessibleObject that represents one of the AccessibleNavigation values Gets the location and size of the accessible object. Gets a string that describes the visual appearance of the specified object. Not all objects have a description The accessible name for the data area. Gets the parent of an accessible object. Returns the role of the accessible object. Gets the state of this accessible object. Accessible object representing a button in the TrackBar editor Initializes a new instance of the class. The index of the item in the parent collection The parent accessible object. Performs the default action associated with this accessible object. Navigates to another accessible object One of the AccessibleNavigation values An AccessibleObject that represents one of the AccessibleNavigation values Gets the location and size of the accessible object. Gets a string that describes the default action of the object. Not all objects have a default action. Gets a string that describes the visual appearance of the specified object. Not all objects have a description The accessible name for the data area. Returns the role of the accessible object. Gets the state of this accessible object. Gets or sets the value of an accessible object. A class used to provide information through the event. Initializes a new instance of the class. The new proposed value. The current value. The trigger that caused the value to change. Gets the proposed value. Gets the current value. Gets the trigger that caused the value to change. The event handler used for the ValueObjectChanging event. The source of the event. The event args providing additional information to any listeners. The EmbeddableUIElementBase implementation for the TrackBarEditor. Constructor The parent element. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditorOwner interface. An object that implements to EmbeddableEditor interface. Context information used by the owner to identify the value. If true will add associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true will reserve space for associated elements (e.g. editing elements like spin buttons). If true the element is expected to draw the outer borders If true the element should draw as a tooltip, i.e., use SystemColors.Info as a BackColor, and not draw gradients. Gets the value along the track axis (i.e. x-axis or y-axis) that is closest to the specified value The value whose point should be determined. The integer value closest to the specified point on the TrackBar. Gets the value closest to the specific location. Only the point on the same axis as the track is used. The location of the point to check, in client coordinates. An integer representing the closest value to the specified point. Resolves the appearance of a button on the TrackBar. Structure to receive the updated appearance info. Flag enumeration indicating which properties need to be resolved. The current state of the button. The UI role of the button. The type of button to resolve. Resolves the appearance of the thumb of a TrackBar. Structure to receive the updated appearance info. Flag enumeration indicating which properties need to be resolved. The current state of the button, used to determine which appearances should be used. The UI role of the thumb. Resolves the appearance of the specified type of tickmark. Structure to receive the updated appearance info. Flag enumeration indicating which properties need to be resolved. The UI role of the tickmark to be resolved. The type of tickmark to resolve. Resolves the appearance of the track of a TrackBar. Structure to receive the updated appearance info. Flag enumeration indicating which properties need to be resolved. The UI role of the track. Initialize the appearance structure for this element The appearance structure to initialize. The properties that are needed Called when element is disposed of. Handles the creation and positioning of the child elements. Gets the logical track rectangle. The element's bounding rectangle in client coordinates An enumeration of property IDs used with the TrackBarEditor and the associated UltraTrackBar. Appearance AutoSize ButtonLocation ButtonSettings ButtonSize ButtonSpacing ButtonStyle DecrementButtonAppearance DecrementButtonHotTrackAppearance DecrementButtonPressedAppearance IncrementButtonAppearance IncrementButtonHotTrackAppearance IncrementButtonPressedAppearance LargeChange MaxButtonAppearance MaxButtonHotTrackAppearance MaxButtonPressedAppearance MaxValue MidpointSettings MidpointValue MinButtonAppearance MinButtonHotTrackAppearance MinButtonPressedAppearance MinValue Orientation Padding ShowIncrementButtons ShowMinMaxButtons SmallChange ThumbAppearance ThumbHotTrackAppearance ThumbOffset ThumbPressedAppearance TickmarkAppearance TickmarkExtent TickmarkFrequency TickmarkLocation TickmarkSettingsMajor TickmarkSettingsMinor TickmarkThickness TickmarkVisible TrackAppearance TrackClickAction TrackOffset TrackThickness Value ValueObject ViewStyle The UIElement representing the area along which the thumb of a TrackBar moves. Initializes a new instance of the class. The parent . Draws the back color in the logical track area. The used to provide rendering information. Handles the rendering of the element using the system themes. The used to provide rendering information. A boolean indicating if the element was able to successfully render with the system theme. Used to determine whether the remaining draw methods are invoked. Initializes the appearance of the element. AppearanceData Appearance properties that need to be resolved. Overrides the default mouse down behavior to handle adjusting of the value of the TrackBar. Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Returning true causes all drawing of this element to be expicitly clipped to its region Gets the UI role for the element. A class that contains the track and surrounding clickable region of a TrackBar. Initializes a new instance of the class. The parent . Overriden. This element does not render a background. The used to provide rendering information. Overrides the default mouse down behavior to handle adjusting of the value of the TrackBar. Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Handles the creation and positioning of the child elements. IUltraDataRowsCollection interface. IUltraDataColumn interface. Specifies whether the column allows empty cell values. List changed event args used by the UltraDataSource. Initializes a new instance of the class given the type of change and the old and new index of the item that was moved. A value indicating the type of change. The new index of the item that was moved. The old index of the item that was moved. Initializes a new instance of the class given the type of change and the old and new index of the item that was moved. A value indicating the type of change. The that was added, removed, or changed. Initializes a new instance of the class given the type of change and the old and new index of the item that was moved. A value indicating the type of change. The new index of the item that was moved. Initializes a new instance of the class given the type of change and the old and new index of the item that was moved. A value indicating the type of change. The new index of the item that was moved. The that was added, removed, or changed. Event handler for the event. Event args for the event. Creates a new instance. The orientation of the scrolling. The value indicating whether scrolling has ended. Creates a new instance. The orientation of the scrolling. The value indicating whether scrolling has ended. The thumb position of the scrolling. Gets the value indicating whether scrolling has ended. Gets the orientation of the scrolling. Gets the thumb position of the scrolling. Interface implemented by a class which supports spell checking by a component that implements the IUltraSpellChecker interface and uses a -derived instance as its editor. Gets the text editor used for spell checking. Interface for the UltraSpellChecker component Should be called when a spell checked goes into edit mode. The which has gone into edit mode. Should be called when a spell checked is about to exit edit mode. The which is exiting edit mode. If true will force an exit even if exit event is cancelled. If true any changes made while in edit mode will be applied. Shows the spell checking dialog non-modally for the specified object and returns a reference to the spell check dialog shown. The object being spell checked. This must be of a type supported by the spell checker. A reference to the spell check dialog or null if the showing of the dialog was cancelled. Shows the spell checking dialog for the specified object and returns the of the dialog box. The object being spell checked. This must be of a type supported by the spell checker. The dialog result of dialog box, or if the showing of the dialog was cancelled. Shows the spell checking dialog for the specified object and returns the of the dialog box. The top-level object that will own the dialog box. The object being spell checked. This must be of a type supported by the spell checker. The dialog result of dialog box, or if the showing of the dialog was cancelled. Draws the errors associated with a target onto the object on the specified . The spell check target containing the errors. The used to provide rendering information. Gets the spellchecker related context menu items to be displayed at the specified location in the specified target. The spell checker target object. Location of the context menu click. If there is a misspelled word at the location, this will return menu items that represent suggestions for correcting the misspelled words. It may also contain items for other spellchecker related actions. This method will return null if there are no spellchecker related actions (for example there are no misspelled words) at the specified location. A collection of definitions of items which should be placed in the context menu for the target at the specified location. Type converter used to provide a list of components on a form at design that implement the interface. Creates a new instance of the class. Component which allows the display of an UltraToolTip on controls.

The UltraToolTip has several advantages over the standard inbox tooltip. It has properties to control it's appearance like BackColor and ForeColor. It can even display using Gradient or Hatch style or use an ImageBackGround. It can also display in BalloonTip style and display Title information as well as an Image.

 Constructor for the UltraToolTipManager component.

The UltraToolTipManager has several advantages over the standard inbox tooltip. It has properties to control it's appearance like BackColor and ForeColor. It can even display using Gradient or Hatch style or use an ImageBackGround. It can also display in BalloonTip style and display Title information as well as an Image.

 Constructor for the UltraToolTipManager component.

The UltraToolTipManager has several advantages over the standard inbox tooltip. It has properties to control it's appearance like BackColor and ForeColor. It can even display using Gradient or Hatch style or use an ImageBackGround. It can also display in BalloonTip style and display Title information as well as an Image.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if a AutoPopDelay object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the AutoPopDelay property. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if a DisplayStyle object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the DisplayStyle property. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if a Enabled object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the Enabled property. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an ToolTipTitleAppearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if a ToolTipImage object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the ToolTipImage property. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if a ToolTipTitle object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the ToolTipTitle property. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if a InitialDelay object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the InitialDelay property. Indicates which controls can have a tooltip extender property. Object to check if it can be extended. True for controls. Invoked when the component must release the resources it is using. True if managed resources should be released. Invokes the PropertyChanged event. This event is fired to notify listeners of a property changes on the component or a subobject. The . Overridden. Factory method used to create the component role that provides the style information for the component. Gets a ToolTipInfo object for the specified control. The whose tooltip should be retrieved.

If a ToolTipInfo already exists for the control, it is returned. If not, a new ToolTipInfo is created.

 Sets the ToolTipInfo object for the specified control. The to assign the ToolTipInfo to. The describing the tool tip.

If a ToolTipInfo already exists for the control, it is removed and replaced by the new one.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if a TipInfo object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the UltraToolTipInfo size of the passed in control. Gets the value which determines whether a tool tip is currently visible for the tool tip manager. True if the toop tip is currently visible for any control; False otherwise. Gets the value which determines whether a tool tip is currently visible for the specified control. A control which has tool tips information set on it in this tool tip manager. True if the toop tip is currently visible for the specified control; False otherwise. Invoked when a property has changed on a sub object PropChangeInfo object containing information about the property change Shows the UltraToolTip for the specified control.

If there is no ToolTipInfo for the specified control, an is raised.

Note: An UltraToolTip will automatically hide when the AutoPopDelay expires, when a mouse button is clicked, or when the Method is called. It will also automatically hide when the mouse leaves the control for which it is shown. So if the mouse is not currently within the control passed into this method, it may cause unexpected results, as a MouseLeave will not occur unless the mouse enters and then leaves the control.

 The control whose tooltip will be displayed. Shows the UltraToolTip for the specified control.

If there is no ToolTipInfo for the specified control, an is raised.

Note: An UltraToolTip will automatically hide when the AutoPopDelay expires, when a mouse button is clicked, or when the Method is called. It will also automatically hide when the mouse leaves the control for which it is shown. So if the mouse is not currently within the control passed into this method, it may cause unexpected results, as a MouseLeave will not occur unless the mouse enters and then leaves the control.

 The control whose tooltip will be displayed. When true, the tooltip will avoid displaying on top of the control. The tooltip will be repositioned so that it does not obscure any part of the control. Shows the UltraToolTip for the specified control.

If there is no ToolTipInfo for the specified control, an is raised.

Note: An UltraToolTip will automatically hide when the AutoPopDelay expires, when a mouse button is clicked, or when the Method is called. It will also automatically hide when the mouse leaves the control for which it is shown. So if the mouse is not currently within the control passed into this method, it may cause unexpected results, as a MouseLeave will not occur unless the mouse enters and then leaves the control.

 The control whose tooltip will be displayed. When true, the tooltip will avoid displaying on top of the control. The tooltip will be repositioned so that it does not obscure any part of the control. The target point (in screen coordinates) at which the tooltip will be shows. For a standard tooltip, this indicates the upper left corner of the tooltip window. For a BalloonTip, this indicates the point to which the callout will point. Shows the UltraToolTip for the specified control.

If there is no ToolTipInfo for the specified control, an is raised.

Note: An UltraToolTip will automatically hide when the AutoPopDelay expires, when a mouse button is clicked, or when the Method is called. It will also automatically hide when the mouse leaves the control for which it is shown. So if the mouse is not currently within the control passed into this method, it may cause unexpected results, as a MouseLeave will not occur unless the mouse enters and then leaves the control.

 The control whose tooltip will be displayed. The target point (in screen coordinates) at which the tooltip will be shows. For a standard tooltip, this indicates the upper left corner of the tooltip window. For a BalloonTip, this indicates the point to which the callout will point. Shows the UltraToolTip for the specified control.

If there is no ToolTipInfo for the specified control, an is raised.

Note: An UltraToolTip will automatically hide when the AutoPopDelay expires, when a mouse button is clicked, or when the Method is called. It will also automatically hide when the mouse leaves the control for which it is shown. So if the mouse is not currently within the control passed into this method, it may cause unexpected results, as a MouseLeave will not occur unless the mouse enters and then leaves the control.

 The control whose tooltip will be displayed. A rect (in screen coordinates) which will be avoided when positioning the tooltip. Whenever possible, the tooltip will be positioned so that it does not obscure any part of the rect. The target point (in screen coordinates) at which the tooltip will be shows. For a standard tooltip, this indicates the upper left corner of the tooltip window. For a BalloonTip, this indicates the point to which the callout will point. Shows the UltraToolTip for the specified control.

If there is no ToolTipInfo for the specified control, an is raised.

Note: An UltraToolTip will automatically hide when the AutoPopDelay expires, when a mouse button is clicked, or when the Method is called. It will also automatically hide when the mouse leaves the control for which it is shown. So if the mouse is not currently within the control passed into this method, it may cause unexpected results, as a MouseLeave will not occur unless the mouse enters and then leaves the control.

 The control whose tooltip will be displayed. A rect (in screen coordinates) which will be avoided when positioning the tooltip. Whenever possible, the tooltip will be positioned so that it does not obscure any part of the rect. Hides the currently displayed tooltip, if there is one. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if a ToolTipTextStyle object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the ToolTipTextStyle property. The Appearance of the Tooltips.

This appearance applies to all ToolTips displayed by this component. It may be overriden by the on the . Also, when applied to the tooltip title, this will be overridden by the property.

The tooltips will only honor the following appearance properties:

- The BackColor of the tooltip. The default is SystemColors.Info.

- The Color of the ToolTipText and ToolTipTitle. The default is SystemColors.InfoText.

- The horizontal alignment of the ToolTipText and the ToolTipTitle. The default is HAlign.Left.

- The vertical alignment of the ToolTipTitle. This has no effect on ToolTipText; it only affects the ToolTipTitle and only when the image (if one exists) is taller than the title text. The Default is VAlign.Middle.

and related - The image used to draw the background of the tooltip. All related properties such as ImageBackGroundStyle are honored.

, , and related - The background of the tooltip can be drawn with a gradient or hatch. Properties such as BackColor2, BackGradientStyle, BackHatchStyle, etc. are all honored.

- The Image property can be used to display an image in the title of the tooltip. This may be overriden by the property.

- Determines the horizontal position of the image relative to the ToolTipTitle text.

- The vertical alignment of the image within the title area of the tooltip. This will have no effect if the Image is taller than the ToolTipTitle text.

 Returns whether or not the control has an appearance Gets / sets the length of time (in milliseconds) that the tooltip will display before automatically closing.

The tooltip will automatically close when the control displaying it receives a MouseLeave message or when the AutoPopDelay has expired. If AutoPopDelay is 0, the tooltip will never time out.

 Determines in what style tooltips are displayed (standard or balloontip). Resolved display style. Gets / sets whether tooltips are displayed by the component.

When set to false, all tooltip are disabled (not shown).

 The Appearance of the tooltip title.

This appearance applies to the title of all ToolTips displayed by this component. Any settings on this appearance may be overriden by the property.

The tooltips will only honor the following appearance properties:

- The Color of the ToolTipText and ToolTipTitle. The default is SystemColors.InfoText.

- The horizontal alignment of the ToolTipText and the ToolTipTitle. The default is HAlign.Left.

- The vertical alignment of the ToolTipTitle. This has no effect on ToolTipText; it only affects the ToolTipTitle and only when the image (if one exists) is taller than the title text. The Default is VAlign.Middle.

- The Image property can be used to display an image in the title of the tooltip. This may be overriden by the property.

- Determines the horizontal position of the image relative to the ToolTipTitle text.

- The vertical alignment of the image within the title area of the tooltip. This will have no effect if the Image is taller than the ToolTipTitle text.

 Returns whether or not the control has an toolTipTitleAppearance Gets / sets an enumerated value that determines which image (if any) to display in the tooltip title.

Note that in order for the Appearance.Image or ToolTipAppearance.Image setting to apply, this property must be set to Custom or Default.

 Gets / sets the title to display on the tooltip.

The tooltip title appears above the tooltip text. By default, it will use the same Font as the tooltip. The font will be made bold, if possible. To specify a different font, use the .

 Gets / sets the initial delay (in milliseconds) before the tooltip is displayed.

When the mouse enters the control and remains stationary for the amount of time specified by InitialDelay, the tooltip is automatically shown.

 Gets or sets the that this component is servicing. The component's site (set at design time only). Gets whether the tooltip will display as a Balloontip. Returns the event handler that notifies OnSubObjectPropChanged Display the about dialog Returns the cached license for the control Determines whether the tooltip the tooltip text should be formatted.

When set to ToolTipTextStyle.Default, the property will be resolved based on the or properties as follows:

If is set and is not, the property resolves to ToolTipTextStyle.Raw.

If is set and is not, the property resolves to ToolTipTextStyle.Formatted.

If both properties are set, ToolTipTextStyle.Formatted will be used.

 Overridden. Overridden. Returns an object that can be used to synchronize calls to the associated component's thread. Class which describes UltraToolTip information. Constructor for the UltraToolTipInfo object

UltraToolTipInfo defines a set of properties that describe how a UltraToolTip is displayed. The component manages the UltraToolTipInfo objects and uses them to determine when to show tooltips and the appearance and content of those tooltips when they are shown.

 Constructor for the UltraToolTipInfo object

UltraToolTipInfo defines a set of properties that describe how an UltraToolTip is displayed. The component manages the UltraToolTipInfo objects and uses them to determine when to show tooltips and the appearance and content of those tooltips when they are shown.

 The text of the tooltip to be displayed. An enumerated value which determines which image (if any) to show in the tooltip title. The title text of the tooltip. Determines whether the tooltip is currently enabled. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an Appearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if a Enabled object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the Enabled property. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if an ToolTipTitleAppearance object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the property to its default value.

Use this method to reset the property.

 Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if a ToolTipImage object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the ToolTipImage property. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if a ToolTipTitle object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the ToolTipTitle property. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if a ToolTipText object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the ToolTipText property. Invoked when a property has changed on a sub object PropChangeInfo object containing information about the property change Returns true if any of the ToolTipInfo properties have changed and need to be serialized. Resets all ToolTipInfo properties to their default settings. Returns a string representation of the object. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if a ToolTipTextFormatted object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the ToolTipTextFormatted property. Indicates whether the property contains data that needs to be serialized. Returns true if the property needs to be serialized.

Use this method to determine if a ToolTipTextStyle object has been created and contains data that needs to be serialized.

 Resets the ToolTipTextStyle property. The Appearance of the Tooltips.

This appearance applies only to the control associated with this UltraToolTipInfo object. When applied to the tooltip title, this will be overridden by the property.

The tooltips will only honor the following appearance properties:

- The BackColor of the tooltip. The default is SystemColors.Info.

- The Color of the ToolTipText and ToolTipTitle. The default is SystemColors.InfoText.

- The horizontal alignment of the ToolTipText and the ToolTipTitle. The default is HAlign.Left.

- The vertical alignment of the ToolTipTitle. This has no effect on ToolTipText; it only affects the ToolTipTitle and only when the image (if one exists) is taller than the title text. The Default is VAlign.Middle.

and related - The image used to draw the background of the tooltip. All related properties such as ImageBackGroundStyle are honored.

, , and related - The background of the tooltip can be drawn with a gradient or hatch. Properties such as BackColor2, BackGradientStyle, BackHatchStyle, etc. are all honored.

- The Image property can be used to display an image in the title of the tooltip. This may be overriden by the property.

- Determines the horizontal position of the image relative to the ToolTipTitle text.

- The vertical alignment of the image within the title area of the tooltip. This will have no effect if the Image is taller than the ToolTipTitle text.

 Returns whether or not the control has an appearance Gets / sets whether the tooltip will be shown when the mouse is over the control.

The default setting of this property is DefaultableBoolean.Default. By default, the tooltip will display when the mouse is over the control in the same position and the amount of time specified by the propety has expired. A tooltip will only display by default if the has been set.

A setting of DefaultableBoolean.False will prevent the tooltip from displaying.

A setting of DefaultableBoolean.True will allow the tooltip to display even when ToolTipText has not been set. This is user if, for example, it is neccessary to show a tooltip with just an image or an image and title with no text.

Note that regardless of the setting of this property, no tooltips will be displayed if the property of the component is set to false.

 The Appearance of the tooltip title.

This appearance applies only to the control associated with this UltraToolTipInfo object.

The tooltips will only honor the following appearance properties:

- The Color of the ToolTipText and ToolTipTitle. The default is SystemColors.InfoText.

- The horizontal alignment of the ToolTipText and the ToolTipTitle. The default is HAlign.Left.

- The vertical alignment of the ToolTipTitle. This has no effect on ToolTipText; it only affects the ToolTipTitle and only when the image (if one exists) is taller than the title text. The Default is VAlign.Middle.

- The Image property can be used to display an image in the title of the tooltip. This may be overriden by the property.

- Determines the horizontal position of the image relative to the ToolTipTitle text.

- The vertical alignment of the image within the title area of the tooltip. This will have no effect if the Image is taller than the ToolTipTitle text.

All properties not listed here are ignored.

 Returns whether or not the control has an toolTipTitleAppearance Gets / sets an enumerated value that determines which image (if any) to display in the tooltip title.

Note that in order for the Appearance.Image or ToolTipAppearance.Image setting to apply, this property must be set to Custom or Default.

 Gets / sets the title to display on the tooltip.

The tooltip title appears above the tooltip text. By default, it will use the same Font as the tooltip. The font will be made bold, if possible. To specify a different font, use the .

 Gets / sets the text to be displayed in the tooltip.

ToolTipText is only used when is set to ToolTipTextStyle.Raw or when the when is set to ToolTipTextStyle.Default and the property is blank.

 Gets / sets the formatted text to be displayed in the tooltip.

ToolTipTextFormatted is only used when is set to ToolTipTextStyle.Formatted or when the when is set to ToolTipTextStyle.Default and the property is blank.

 Determines whether the tooltip the tooltip text should be formatted.

When set to ToolTipTextStyle.Default, the property will be resolved based on the or properties as follows:

If is set and is not, the property resolves to ToolTipTextStyle.Raw.

If is set and is not, the property resolves to ToolTipTextStyle.Formatted.

If both properties are set, ToolTipTextStyle.Formatted will be used.

 UltraToolTipInfoConverter Returns true if the object can convert to that type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert to. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the object to the requested type. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. A that represents the type you want to convert to. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. Utility class containing static helper functions Parses a localized string and returns the corresponding Shortcut enumeration. A string containing the localized description of the shortcut based on the currently mapped keyboard layout. The corrsponding Shortcut enumeration value

Note: The default separator (+) will be used to segment the string.

 Parses a localized string and returns the corresponding Shortcut enumeration. A string containing the localized description of the shortcut based on the currently mapped keyboard layout. Character used to separate multiple keys in the shortcut The corrsponding Shortcut enumeration value Returns the localized Shortcut to localize A string containing the localized description of the shortcut based on the currently mapped keyboard layout

Note:If the contains multiple keys, the keys will be separated using the default character separator (+).

 Returns the localized string for the specified Shortcut Shortcut to localize Character used to separate multiple keys in the shortcut A string containing the localized description of the shortcut based on the currently mapped keyboard layout Returns the localized string for the specified Keys Keys to localize A string containing the localized description of the keys based on the currently mapped keyboard layout

Note:If the is made up of multiple keys, the keys will be separated using the default character separated (+).

 Returns the localized string for the specified Keys Keys to localize Character used to separate multiple keys A string containing the localized description of the keys based on the currently mapped keyboard layout Copies the contents of one graphics object to another based on the supplied source rectangle and destination point. The graphics object to which the contents will be copied The location within the destination graphics where the contents will be copied. The graphics object whose contents will be copied The rectangle within the source graphics object from which the contents will be copied Returns true if the copy was successfull. Captures a snapshot of portion of the screen. Center point at which the snapshot will be taken Size of the rect to capture A Bitmap containing the portion of the screen or null. Captures a snapshot of portion of the screen. Rectangle in screen coordinates indicating the area to capture A Bitmap containing the portion of the screen or null. Creates a A that represents the container for the timer. A new . Creates a A new . Returns the screen containing the largest portion or closest to the specified Rectangle in screen coordinates The screen that contains or is closest to the specified rect Returns the screen containing the largest portion or closest to the specified Point in screen coordinates The screen that contains or is closest to the specified rect Returns the distance between two points. The first . The second Point. The distance between the two points. Sorts the passed in array list based on the passed in comparer using a modified merge-sort algorithm. The list to be sorted. The comparer (must not be null). Sorts the passed in array based on the passed in comparer using a modified merge-sort algorithm. It requires allocation of an array equal in size to the array to be sorted. Merge sort should be used if the operation of comparing items is expensive. Array to be sorted. Comparer. Sorts the passed in array based on the passed in comparer using a modified merge-sort algorithm. Optionally you can pass in a temporary array equal (or greater) in size to arr. The method will make use of that array instead of allocating one. If null is passed in, then it will allocate one. Merge sort should be used if the operation of comparing items is expensive. Array to be sorted. Null or a temporary array equal (or greater) in size to arr. Comparer. Sorts the passed in array based on the passed in comparer using a modified merge-sort algorithm. Optionally you can pass in a temporary array equal (or greater) in size to arr. The method will make use of that array instead of allocating one. If null is passed in, then it will allocate one. Merge sort should be used if the operation of comparing items is expensive. Array to be sorted. Null or a temporary array equal (or greater) in size to arr. Comparer. Start index in the array. End index in the array. Sorts the passed in list based on the passed in comparer using a modified merge-sort algorithm. The list to be sorted. The comparer (must not be null). Sorts the passed in array based on the passed in comparer using a modified merge-sort algorithm. It requires allocation of an array equal in size to the array to be sorted. Merge sort should be used if the operation of comparing items is expensive. Sorts the passed in array based on the passed in comparer using a modified merge-sort algorithm. Optionally you can pass in a temporary array equal (or greater) in size to arr. The method will make use of that array instead of allocating one. If null is passed in, then it will allocate one. Merge sort should be used if the operation of comparing items is expensive. Array to be sorted. Null or a temporary array equal (or greater) in size to arr. Comparer. Sorts the passed in array based on the passed in comparer using a modified merge-sort algorithm. Optionally you can pass in a temporary array equal (or greater) in size to arr. The method will make use of that array instead of allocating one. If null is passed in, then it will allocate one. Merge sort should be used if the operation of comparing items is expensive. Array to be sorted. Null or a temporary array equal (or greater) in size to arr. Comparer. Start index in the array. End index in the array. Gets the InheritanceAttribute of an object. The component in question. The object's InheritanceAttribute or null if not found or if insufficient security. Determines if the current active form is related to a control. The control to check for. True if the current active form is in the ownership chain of the passed in control. Determines if the current active form is related to a control. The control to check for. Boolean indicating whether the control may be considered to be on the active form if there is no active form but the control contains focus. True if the current active form is in the ownership chain of the passed in control. Does a recursive search through the container's descendant controls and returns the control with the specified name. The container control. The name of the control. The first control whose Name property matches or null. Does a recursive search through the container's descendant controls and components and returns the component with the specified name. The container control. The name of the component or control. The first component whose Name property matches or null. Determines if the control is on the active form. The control in question. True if the control is on the active form. Determines if the control is on the active form. The control in question. Boolean indicating whether the control may be considered to be on the active form if there is no active form but the control contains focus. True if the control is on the active form. Adds a message filter to monitor Windows messages as they are routed to their destinations. The implementation of the IMessageFilter interface you want to install. Removes a message filter from the message pump of the application. The implementation of the IMessageFilter to remove from the application. This method is used to force all Infragistics objects using the methods to receive their notifications from a native windows operating system hook instead of attempting to use the .Net Application messagefilter infrastructure.

Once this method has been invoked, all subsequent calls to the will be added a native windows hook that will provide the message information.

This method cannot be reversed and should only be used when it is known that the .Net Application MessageFilter will not be invoked (e.g. when using Application.AddMessageFilter while in the Visual Studio IDE.

 This method is used to request that all Infragistics objects using the methods receive their notifications from a native windows operating system hook instead of attempting to use the .Net Application messagefilter infrastructure.

Note: The should be called for each time this method is called when the native message filter is no longer required.

 This method is used to remove a request placed by a call to . When all of the requests have been removed, the default calculation will be used to determine whether a native or .net message filter implemenation will be used.

Note: This method should be called the same number of times as when the native message filter is no longer required.

 Returns an array list of objects. An array of objects.

Note: To ensure that an up-to-date list is returned, the caller must have permission to read the registry keys that contain the time zone information. If the caller does not have such permission, a static list is returned, which cannot be guaranteed to contain current information.

 Returns the first mnemonic character found in a string. A string that may contain one or more mnemonic characters. The first mnemonic character found, converted to uppercase based on the current UI culture. A mnemonic, or accelerator, character is defined as a character that has a single ampersand preceding it. Returns the first mnemonic character found in a string. A string that may contain one or more mnemonic characters. The culture to use to convert the character to uppercase, null will return the character as is. The first mnemonic character found, converted to uppercase based on the passed in culture. A mnemonic, or accelerator, character is defined as a character that has a single ampersand preceding it. Strips mnemonics from a string. A string that may contain one or more mnemonic characters. A new string with those mnemonics stripped out or the passed in string if it didn't contain any. A mnemonic, or accelerator, character is defined as a character that has a single ampersand preceding it. Returns the first line of text from the specified string, omitting newline characters as well as all text following the first occurrence of the newline character. The string whose first line of text is to be returned. Returns a representing the color. The desired color. A new . If the color's IsSystemColor property returns true will create a brush from the color's ARGB equivalent. This prevents a memory leak in the .NET framework. Returns a representing the color. The desired color. A new . If the color's IsSystemColor property returns true will create a brush from the color's ARGB equivalent. This prevents a memory leak in the .NET framework. Returns a representing the color. The desired color. The width of the new pen. A new . If the color's IsSystemColor property returns true will create a brush from the color's ARGB equivalent. This prevents a memory leak in the .NET framework. Returns a color that is not flagged as a system color. The source color. A color that is not a system color. If the color's IsSystemColor property is true returns an ARGB equivalent color. Gets the localized string from the win assembly. The name of the localized string to get. The localized string based on the specified name. Support For Whidbey SnapLines Gets the height of text used to calculate a Text BaseLine SnapLine The control from which to create a graphics object. The of the control. The that should be used for measuring. The height of text used to calculate a Text BaseLine SnapLine. Determines if a given System.Type is a numeric type. The System.Type to test. True if the type is a numeric type. Checks the parent chain of IContainerControls to ensure that the specified control is the resolved active control. In other words, that the control is the active control of its container control which is the active control of its container control, etc. Control to evaluate True if the control is the resolved active control Creates the largest of the fonts among the specified appearances. The list of appearances used to determine the largest font. The default font to use when a font is not specified on an appearance. A object representing the largest font among the specified appearances. Creates the largest of the fonts among the specified appearances. The list of appearances used to determine the largest font. The default font to use when a font is not specified on an appearance. The used to render the font. A object representing the largest font among the specified appearances. Helper method to invoke the Clipboard.SetDataObject method. The object to be placed on the clipboard Boolean indicating whether the data should remain on the clipboard after the application exits Takes a Type and returns the underlying (non-nullable) type, if the Type is nullable. If the specified type is not nullable, then the passed-in type is returned. Indicates if a button using the specified state should be considered as pressed. Button state to evaluate True if the button should be considered as pressed; otherwise false. Indicates if a button using the specified state should be considered as hottracked. Button state to evaluate True if the button should be considered as hottracked; otherwise false. Gets the back color that should be set on a control based on the appearance of the control The ui role of the control. The resolution order of the control. The appearance set on the control. This can be null if no appearance is set on the control. The original back color set on the color. If the properties affecting the back color have not been set on the appearance object, this will be returned. The resolved . Gets the back color that should be set on a control based on the appearance of the control The resolved appearance to be set on the control, not including the Control.BackColor value. The original back color set on the color. If the properties affecting the back color have not been set on the appearance object, this will be returned. The resolved . Focuses a control without scrolling it into view if it is contained in a ScrollableControl. The control to focus. This will only work properly in CLR version 2.0 or later. Otherwise, it will just focus the control. Compares the two specified objects, if possible. The first object to compare. The object to compare against the first object. Determines whether the comparison should be done case-sensitively. A 32-bit signed integer that indicates the relative order of the objects being compared. The return value has these meanings: Value Meaning Less than zero This instance is less than obj. Zero This instance is equal to obj. Greater than zero This instance is greater than obj. Compares the two specified objects, if possible. The first object to compare. The object to compare against the first object. True if the method is called during sort, false otherwise. Determines whether the comparison should be done case-sensitively. A 32-bit signed integer that indicates the relative order of the objects being compared. The return value has these meanings: Value Meaning Less than zero This instance is less than obj. Zero This instance is equal to obj. Greater than zero This instance is greater than obj. Gets the parent of the specified control. The control whose parent should be located. The parent control, if any. Determines if the form is the active form. This will also return true if any owned forms are active. Refreshes any message filters in use by Infragistics controls. MessageFilters are managed at the thread static level. But the filters are applied to a specific application. Since there is no way to determine the current application on the thread, when an application exits and a new application runs on the same thread, there is no way to detect that the existing message filters are now being applied to an application which is no longer active. To alleviate this, call RefreshMessageFilters after the application exits and before the new application is run. This method should only be called when no application is currently running. I can be safely called before of after a call to Application.Run, but should never be called during an Application.Run call. Returns the next CheckState value for the specified , based on whether the returned value can include the indeterminate state. The CheckState constant on which to base the returned value. Boolean indicating whether the indeterminate state is supported. Gets the value which indicates whether the specified form or any forms owned by the specified form are active. Returns true if the specified type is a generic nullable type; otherwise false. Checks the parent chain of IContainerControls to ensure that the specified control is the resolved active control. In other words, that the control is the active control of its container control which is the active control of its container control, etc. This method differs from IsActiveControl in that it will always check the parent container. For example, if 'control' is an IContainerControl, IsActiveControl will always return false, since the container can't be it's own ActiveControl. In this method, the parent container is checked, so an IContainerControl can be the ActiveControl of it's parent container. Control to evaluate True if the control is the resolved active control Returns true if setting Enabled of a winforms timer created using the method of this class is currently being processed. Gets whether the system should render controls with high contrast. The conditions to determine this are consistant with Office2007. Provides support for the registration of UltraValidator components, and for accessing registered UltraValidator components. Returns the UltraValidator component registered for the specified control. The Control whose associated UltraValidator component is to be returned. Registers the specified control and UltraValidator component with this ValidatorManager. The IUltraValidator implementor to be registered; typically an Infragistics.Win.Misc.UltraValidator component. The Control to be registered. True if the validator was successfully registered. Removes the specified UltraValidator component from the list of registered instances. The Control to be removed from the registration list. True if the Validator was successfully unregistered. This member supports the Infragistics infrastructure and is not intended to be called externally. Returns the version of the ValidatorList. Interface implemented by the Infragistics.Win.Misc.UltraValidator component for the purpose of providing validator-related information to an embeddable editor. Returns a boolean which specifies whether validation is enabled for the specified embeddable element. The embeddable element to test. [out] If true is returned, contains a reference to the Control to which the Infragistics.Win.Misc.ValidationSettings instance which determines validity has been extended. This reference can be used by other methods defined in this interface. [out] Upon return, specifies whether the is associated with an editor that was provided via the interface. Applicable only when true is returned from this method. True if the specified editor should be validated by its associated validator. Returns a boolean which specifies whether the current embeddable editor value is valid. The Control to which the Infragistics.Win.Misc.ValidationSettings instance which determines validity has been extended. The value to be evaluated. Specifies whether the is being provided by an editor that was provided via the interface. True if the value passes validation, false otherwise. Resolves the error appearance for an embeddable editor associated with the specified Control. The Control to to which the Infragistics.Win.Misc.ValidationSettings instance which provides the error appearance has been extended. Specifies whether the error appearance is to be resolved for an editor that was provided via the interface. Implementors might provide different ultimate default property values based on the value of this parameter. [ref] A reference to the AppearanceData struct to be resolved. [ref] A reference to the AppearancePropFlags value which defines the properties to be resolved. Interface which identifies an -derived control as supporting validation by an implementor through an embeddable editor. Returns whether validation is supported through embeddable editors. Contains various constraints that can be applied to a data value. Sets the property to null. Resets the property. Resets the property. Resets the property. Resets the property. Resets the property. Resets the property. Resets the property. Resets the property. Resets the property. Returns the System.Type object which corresponds to the argument. The psuedo-data type for which the corresponding CLR Type is needed. The corresponding to the specified ValidateAsType. Returns a value that represents the argument. A Type object for which the corresponding ValidateAsType is needed. The ValidateAsType that represents the specified type. Copies the state of the argument into this object. The ValueConstraint to copy the state of. Pass false if the 'enumeration' field should not be copied. Copies the state of the argument into this object. The ValueConstraint to copy the state of. Copies constraint settings from the source ValueConstraint to the target (i.e. the instance on which this method was invoked). Only constraint settings which have default values on the target will be assigned values from the source. Only constraint settings specified by the 'constraintFlags' flags argument will be copied. Note, this method does not copy the ValidateAsType property. A ValueConstraint object which contains constraint settings to be copied. A bit flag which specifies the constraint settings to be copied. Copies constraint settings from the source ValueConstraint to the target (i.e. the instance on which this method was invoked). Only constraint settings which have default values on the target will be assigned values from the source. Note, this method does not copy the ValidateAsType property. A ValueConstraint object which contains constraint settings to be copied. Resets all of the constraint settings in this object to their initial (not set) state which are specified in the 'constraintFlags' bit flag argument. Note, this method does not reset the ValidateAsType property. A bit flag which specifies which constraint settings to reset. Resets all of the constraint settings in this object to their initial (not set) state. Note, this method does not reset the ValidateAsType property. Returns true if the argument is considered valid with regards to the current constraint settings. The data value to validate. A Type object representing the data type which the 'dataValue' should be validated as. A bit flag which indicates which constraints to apply during validation. An IFormatProvider used when converting values to and from strings. A format string to use when converting values to and from strings. If the data value is invalid, this out param will reference an error message. Returns true if the input value satisfies all of the applicable constraints set on this object, else false. Returns true if the argument is considered valid with regards to the current constraint settings. The data value to validate. A Type object representing the data type which the 'dataValue' should be validated as. A bit flag which indicates which constraints to apply during validation. Returns true if the input value satisfies all of the applicable constraints set on this object, else false. Returns true if the argument is considered valid with regards to the current constraint settings. This overload uses All. The data value to validate. A Type object representing the data type which the 'dataValue' should be validated as. Returns true if the input value satisfies all of the applicable constraints set on this object, else false. Converts 'valueToConvert' to an object of the type 'convertToType'. If it cannot perform the conversion it returns null. It makes use of any formatting information provided passed in. The to which the specified value should be converted. The format that should be used. The . The value to try to convert. Converted value, null if unsuccessful. Converts 'valueToConvert' to an object of the type 'convertToType'. If it cannot perform the conversion it returns null. It makes use of any formatting information provided passed in. Converted value, null if unsuccessful. Gets/sets an object implementing which contains a list of value options. Note, this property defaults to a null (Nothing) value. Returns true if the list is not null. Gets/sets the value which the constrained value must be equal to. Returns true if the property is not null (Nothing). Gets/sets the value which is one greater than the maximum allowed for the constrained value. Returns true if the property is not null (Nothing). Gets/sets the maximum value which the constrained value is allowed to be. Returns true if the property is not null (Nothing). Gets/sets the maximum length (inclusive) allowed for the constrained value. This constraint applies to values of type 'string'. The default value is 0, which means that there is no limit. Returns true if the property has a value greater than 0. Gets/sets the value which is one less than the minimum allowed for the constrained value. Returns true if the property is not null (Nothing). Gets/sets the minimum value which the constrained value is allowed to be. Returns true if the property is not null (Nothing). Gets/sets the minimum length (inclusive) allowed for the constrained value. This constraint applies to values of type 'string'. The default value is 0. Returns true if the property has a value greater than 0. Gets/sets a flag which indicates if the constrained value is allowed to be null (Nothing). Returns true if the property returns a non-default value. Gets/sets the regular expression to which the constrained value must adhere. Returns true if the is not null (Nothing). Returns true if any of the constraint properties are set on this object or if the ValidateAsType property is set to something other than 'Unknown'. Gets/sets the value which the method should use to constrain the input value. By default this value is set to Unknown. Specifies whether the embeddable editors should use underlying TypeConverters for converting data values. Default is False.

By default embeddable editors do not use type converters to convert values. Setting this property to True will convert the values using underlying type converters.

This will affect all the embeddable editor owners including standalone editor controls and embeddable editor owner controls like UltraGrid, UltraWinTree etc... For example the cells in UltraGrid will display values converted using underlying type converter. If the underlying field (property descriptor associated with the column) in the data source has a type converter then it will be used. Otherwise the type converter of the data type will be used.

Also note that type conversions done using ValueConstraint's method and EmbeddableEditorBase' methods will be affected by this property as well.

delegate for handling the DrawValueListItem event delegate for handling the MeasureValueListItem event delegate for handling the ValueListChanged event Contains a list of s, which can used to populate dropdown lists.

Each exposes a property, which corresponds to the underlying value, and a property, which corresponds to the string that is displayed to represent the item in the user interface.

Note: The ValueList class handles population of the dropdown list displayed by the embeddable editor. The items in the editor's dropdown are of type .

 Interface used to genericize access to a class that supplies list items with Filtering. Interface used to genericize access to a class that supplies list items. Closes up the list Attaches a new owner control and hooks up ItemSelected and CloseUp event handlers. If the list is dropped down by another owner this will cause its closeup event to fire first. Note: Only one owner can be activated at a time. However, it is safe to call this method multiple times with the same owner since it shouldn't do anything in that case The to attach to. Detaches the owner from the value list and also the closeup and ItemSelected even handlers. Note: if the list is dropped down by this owner then this will cause its closeup event to fire. The to detach from. Drops down the list. Returns true if successful The of the edit area, in screen coordinates. The initial selected index. The text of the initially selected index. True if the list was successfully dropped down. Searches for the value and returns the associcated text. Note: it also returns the index which should be used on the next call to optimize the search. The item at that index should be checked first for a match. The underlying data value of the item whose text should be returned. A reference to an index that will be updated with the index of the found item. The text associated with the . Returns the display text at the given index. The index of the item. The display text of the item at the specified index. Searches the display text and returns the associcated value. Note: it also returns the index which should be used on the next call to optimize the search The display text used to located the list item. A reference to an index that will be updated with the index of the found item. The underlying data value of the item with the specified text. Same as GetValueFromText but allows for a partial string match and the ability to start the search from a specific index. The display text used to located the list item. A reference to an index that will be updated with the index of the found item. The index to begin the search at. Specifies whether to allow partial string matches. The underlying data value of the item with the specified text. Returns the value at the given index. The index of the list item. The underlying data value of the list item at the specified index. Scrolls the list by the number of currently visible items If true, behaves as if the PageUp key was pressed Resolves appearance for individual items in the value list. Index of the item to resolve the appearance for. AppearanceData structure where resolved appearance data is stored. Properties to resolve. Component role. Moves to the next or previous item in the list If true, moves to the previous item Moves to the first or last item in the list If true, moves to the last item Fired when a ValueListItem is changed True if the list is dropped down. This is a readonly property True if the list is dropped down. Returns the index of the selected item. The index of the selected item. Returns number of items Returns whether the text should be displayed Returns whether the image should be displayed Returns whether the owner should sort by values or display text. If it returns true, the owner should sort by value. Otherwise by display text. Returns whether an item in the list is visible (not filtered out or hidden) for the purposes of AutoEdit functionality. The index of the item. True if an item in the list is visible. Filters list items out based on whether they meet the filter criteria defined by the specified value. The value which defines the filter criteria. The number of items that exist in the filtered list. A return value of less than zero implies that no filtering was performed. Removes any filters that might have been applied by the implementor when the method was called. Implemented by an IValueList implementor that supports multi-selection through checkboxes. Returns the string representation of the checked item list, with each item separated by the specified . A list of the values whose string representation is to be returned. Elements which do not match the DataValue of any item in the associated ValueListItems collection are not included in the returned string. The string that separates each entry in the list. Returns the check state for the item at the specified ordinal position. The index of the item on which to set the check state. Sets the check state for the item at the specified ordinal position to the specified value. The index of the item on which to set the check state. The check state to which the item is to be set. Returns or sets a list containing the value of each item that is checked. Returns whether the implementation currently supports the displaying of checkboxes, and if so, whether they support an indeterminate state. Fired when the CheckState of one or more items has changed. For Infragistics internal use only This interface is used as a supplement to IValueList for improved performance. This allows IValueList implementors to cache the largest image size instead of re-calculating in every time a cell in the grid paints. Returns the size of images on a list. Constructor used to add a valuelist within the properties table Constructor used to add a valuelist during de-serialization Constructor used during deserialization. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Overridden to return the valuelist's key The key of the ValueList. handles certain property change events Clones the value list. Bump's the contents version number Returns true if the property is not set to its default value Resets to its default value (OnlyWhenNeeded). Returns true if the value is not the default Resets the property to its default value Always returns true for groups Called when the object is disposed of Resets DisplayStyle to its default value. Resets SortStyle to its default value (none). Returns true if this property is not set to its default value Returns true if this property is not set to its default value Resets ContentsVersion to its default value(0) Resets all properties When using the Serialization constructor, appearances is set to null, so set it here The list of appearances that should be used to initialize the ValueList. Resolves appearance for individual items in the value list. Index of the item to resolve the appearance for. AppearanceData structure where resolved appearance data is stored. Properties to resolve. Component role. Moves to the next or previous item in the list If true, moves to the previous item Moves to the first or last item in the list If true, moves to the last item Returns whether the item at the specified ordinal position is visible in the user interface. The ordinal position of the item to be tested. A boolean value which indicates whether the item is visible. Filters list items out based on whether they meet the filter criteria defined by the specified value. The value which defines the filter criteria. The number of items that exist in the filtered list. A return value of less than zero implies that no filtering was performed. Returns true if the property has been changed from its default value Sets the property to its default value Sets the property to its default value Returns true if the property has been changed from its default value Sets the property to its default value Returns true if the property has been changed from its default value Returns true if the property has been changed from its default value Sets the property to its default value Sets the DrawMode property to its default value Resets the property to its default value. Resets the property to its default value. Returns true if there are any items in the list Clears the list of ValueListItems Sets the ItemHeight property to its default value Returns whether the property requires serialization Resets the property to its default value. Returns whether the property requires serialization Resets the property to its default value. FindString method:Finds the first item which starts with the given string. The search is not case-sensitive. Returns -1 if no match found. The string to search for The index of the first item that contains a match for the specified string. FindString method:Finds the first item after the given index which starts with the given string. Search is not case-sensitive. The string to search for The zero-based index of the item before the first item to be searched. Set to -1 to search from the beginning of the collection. The index of the first item that contains a match for the specified string. Returns the the whose property is equal to the specified , or null (Nothing in VB) if no item was found. The of the item being searched for. The matching or null (Nothing in VB) if no item was found. FindStringExact method: Finds the first item that contains the exact match for the specified string. The search is not case-sensitive.Returns -1 if no match is found. The string to search for The index of the first item that contains an exact match for the specified string FindStringExact method:Finds the first item after the given index that matches the specified string. The string to search for The zero-based index of the item before the first item to be searched. Set to -1 to search from the beginning of the collection. The index of the first item that contains an exact match for the specified string Returns the height of the item at the specified index The index of the item The height of the item in pixels Returns the text of the item at the specified index The index of the item A string containing the item's text Re-synchronizes the contents of the internal valuelist with the internal combo For internal use. Sends a WM_MOUSEWHEEL message to the ValueListDropDown. Derived classes can override this method to ensure that the valuelist items in the list are up-to-date. For Infragistics Internal Use Only. Sets the value of the CheckState property for each ValueListItem in this collection. The new value for the CheckState property. Sets the value of the CheckState property for each ValueListItem in the specified list. A generic list of the ValueListItem instances whose check state is to be modified. The new value for the CheckState property. If the value of the parameter is null, or any item therein contains a null reference. If any item in the specified list is associated with a different ValueListitems collection, or does not belong to any collection. Sets the value of the CheckState property for each ValueListItem in the specified list. An array of the ValueListItem instances whose check state is to be modified. The new value for the CheckState property. If the value of the parameter is null, or any item therein contains a null reference. If any item in the specified array is associated with a different ValueListitems collection, or does not belong to any collection. Returns whether the specified index represents an MRU item An integer corresponding to the index of the ComboBox item to be evaluated A boolean indicating whether the specified index represents an MRU item Returns the index of the first ValueListItem that textually matches the specified text, or -1 if no match is made The index of the ValueListItem that corresponds to the specified text, or -1 if no match is made Note that this method will return the index of the ValueListItem that (textually) matches the specified MRU item.

The search begins at the first ValueListItem, so MRU items are not included in the search. Invoked during the serialization of the object. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Invoked after the entire object graph has been deserialized. The object that initiated the callback. The functionality for the this parameter is not currently implemented. Handles a SelectionChangeCommitted notification. Fired when a ValueListItem is drawn Fired when a ValueListItem is changed Fired when a ValueListItem is measured Returns or sets a value that determines how valuelistitems will be sorted in a valuelist.

This property is used to alphabetically sort the valuelistitems in a valuelist.

Valuelistitems are sorted based on their display text, which is set by the DisplayText property, not their data value.

When valuelistitems are sorted, their order in the ValueListItems collection does not actually change, only the order in which they are displayed to the user.

 Determines what information will be displayed in the drop down and edit area of a cell in a drop down style column, and how the information will be formatted.

If ValueListDisplayStyle is set to any of the settings that make use of a picture, the picture will be resolved using:

  • The Picture property of the Appearance object of the ValueListItem object whose value matches the value for that cell.
  • The Picture property of the Appearance object of the ValueList object.

If no ValueListItem object in the ValueList matches the cell's value, or if a ValueListItem is matched to the cell's value, but its Picture property is not set, then the Picture property of the ValueList's Appearance object will be used. If the Picture property of the ValueList's Appearance object is not set, no picture will be used.

 Specifies how ValueListItem images will be scaled. The important thing that this property can be used to control is how the height of a value list item is calculated. When this property is set to its default value of OnlyWhenNeeded it always uses the font height and scales down (never up) the image on the value list item. When set to Never it uses the max of the font and the image for the height of the item. When set to always it uses the font height (like OnlyWhenNeeded) except that it scales up as well. Returns or sets the Appearance object that controls the object's formatting.

The Appearance property of an object is used to associate the object with an Appearance object that will determine its appearance. The Appearance object has properties that control settings such as color, borders, font, transparency, etc. For many of the objects in the UltraWinGrid, you do not set formatting properties directly. Instead, you set the properties of an Appearance object, which controls the formatting of the object it is attached to.

There are two ways of working with the Appearance property and assigning the attributes of an SSAppearance object to other objects. One way is to create a new Appearance object, adding it directly to the Appearances collection. Then you assign the new Appearance object to the Appearance property of the object you want to format. This method uses a "named" Appearance object that you must explicitly create (and to which you must assign property settings) before it can be used. For instance, you could create an object in the grid's Appearances collection and assign it some values as follows:

UltraWinGrid1.Appearances.Add "New1"

UltraWinGrid1.Appearances("New1").BorderColor = vbBlue

UltraWinGrid1.Appearances("New1").ForeColor = vbRed

Creating the object in this way does not apply formatting to any visible part of the grid. The object simply exists in the collection with its property values, waiting to be used. To actually use the object, you must assign it to the grid's (or another object's) Appearance property:

UltraWinGrid1.Appearance = UltraWinGrid1.Appearances("New1")

In this case, only one Appearance object exists. The grid's appearance is governed by the settings of the "New1" object in the collection. Any changes you make to the object in the collection will immediately be reflected in the grid.

The second way of working with the Appearance property is to use it to set property values directly, such as:

UltraWinGrid1.Appearance.ForeColor = vbBlue

In this case, an Appearance object is automatically created by the control. This Appearance object is not a member of an Appearances collection and it does not have a name. It is specific to the object for which it was created; it is an "intrinsic" Appearance object. Changes to the properties of an intrinsic Appearance object are reflected only in the object to which it is attached.

Note that you can assign properties from a named Appearance object to an intrinsic Appearance object without creating a dependency relationship. For example, the following code...

UltraWinGrid1.Appearance.ForeColor = UltraWinGrid1.Appearances("New1").ForeColor

...does not establish a relationship between the foreground color of the intrinsic object and that of the named object. It is simply a one-time assignment of the named object's value to that of the intrinsic object. In this case, two Appearance objects exist - one in the collection and one attached to the grid - and they operate independently of one another.

If you wish to assign all the properties of a named object to an intrinsic object at once without creating a dependency relationship, you can use the Clone method of the Appearance object to duplicate its settings and apply them. So if you wanted to apply all the property settings of the named Appearance object "New1" to the grid's intrinsic Appearance object, but you did not want changes made to "New1" automatically reflected in the grid, you would use the following code:

UltraWinGrid1.Appearance = UltraWinGrid1.Appearances("New1").Clone

Note that the properties of an Appearance object can also operate in a hierarchical fashion. Certain properties can be set to a "use default" value, which indicates to the control that the property should take its setting from the object's parent. This functionality is enabled by default, so that unless you specify otherwise, child objects resemble their parents, and formatting set at higher levels of the grid hierarchy is inherited by objects lower in the hierarchy.

 Appearance's collection True if an appearance object has been allocated Returns whether the owner should sort by values or display text. If it returns true, the owner should sort by value. Otherwise by display text. The Value List's owner ShouldDisplayText property ShouldDisplayImage property returns an internal id used during serialization/de-serialization Gets/sets the maximum number of items that will be displayed in the dropdown. Gets/sets the width of the dropdownlist When set to 0, the width will be the same as the edit portion. When set to -1, the width will automatically adjust to accommodate the longest item text. Gets/sets the minimum width of the dropdown list.

When set to 0, the dropdown list has no minimum width restriction.

 Gets/sets the alignment of the dropdown list. Available only at runtime. Gets/sets the currently selected item. Available only at runtime. Gets/sets the index of the currently selected item. Available only at runtime. Gets/sets DrawMode used by the dropdown list Gets/sets the format string that is used when converting a ValueListItem's DataValue into a string when no value is specified for the DisplayText property. Gets/sets the formatting information that is used when converting a ValueListItem's DataValue into a string when no value is specified for the DisplayText property. The Value List's MRUList provider Returns a reference to a ValueListItems collection, containing the valustlistitems of a ValueList object. This property is read-only at run-time. This property is not available at design-time.

This property returns a reference to a ValueList collection that can be used to retrieve references to the ValueListItem objects that are contained by the valuelist. You can use this reference to access any of the returned collection's properties or methods, as well as the properties or methods of the objects within the collection.

A reference to a ValueList object for a column can be obtained from the column's ValueList property. Valuelistitems can be added to or removed from a ValueList object by invoking its Add and Remove methods, respectively.

 The base implementation always returns false. The override may return true. Gets/sets ItemHeight used by the dropdown list Returns a collection which contains the ValueListItem instances whose CheckState property returns 'Checked'.

Items whose CheckState property returns 'Indeterminate' are not included in the CheckedItems collection.

The CheckedItems property is similar to the property of the same name exposed by the .NET CheckedListBox control.

When the EditorWithCombo's EditorValueSource property is set to 'CheckedItems', the editor's value consists of a list containing the DataValue of each checked item; the CheckedItems collection returns a list of the same size, but which includes references to those items as opposed to their values.

CheckState property ValueListItem class Returns whether checkboxes appear next to each item in the dropdown list, and whether they support the 'Indeterminate' setting.

The EditorWithCombo embeddable editor uses the checkbox support provided by the ValueList class to return a value that consists of the DataValues of multiple items, effectively enabling "multiple selection" of items. Checkboxes can be displayed within a ValueList, however, independently of the EditorWithCombo feature, simply by setting the CheckBoxStyle property to 'CheckBox' or 'TriState'. This causes a checkbox to be displayed next to each item, which provides a user interface for changing the value of the item's CheckState property. A collection containing only the items whose CheckState is set to 'Checked' is returned by the CheckedItems collection.

Setting the CheckBoxStyle property to 'CheckBox' or 'TriState' in and of itself does not affect selection behavior, except in that clicking on the checkbox does not cause the dropdown to close, and by extension does not cause the EditorWithCombo's SelectionChangeCommitted event to fire.

CheckState property (ValueListItem class) CheckedItems collection CheckBoxAlignment EditorCheckedListSettings class Returns or sets the alignment of the checkbox with respect to the remaining item content, i.e., the text and/or the image. Fires when the CheckState of a ValueListItem has changed. ValueList type converter. Returns true if the object can convert to that type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert to. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the object to the requested type. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. A that represents the type you want to convert to. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. This attribute is used to identify those classes that should be added to a ValueListEditor's drop down list.

This attribute only has meaning for those System.Windows.Forms.Control derived classes that implement the IValueList interface.

Note: If a System.Windows.Forms.Control derived classes implements the IValueList interface but does not has this attribute it will be considered bindable by default and added to a ValueListEditor's drop down list.

 Constructor, initializes a new instance of ValueListBindableAttribute True to add the class to a ValueListEditor's drop down list. Returns true if the class should be added to a ValueListEditor's drop down list (read-only). A type converter used for value lists. Used to determine what data types the converter can convert. ITypeDescriptorContext Type being checked for possible conversion. Boolean indicating if the converter can convert to the destinationType. Converts the value to the destination type specified. ITypeDescriptorContext CultureInfo Object to be converted. Type that the object should be converted to. New object of the destination type or null if the conversion failed. Interface used by ValueListEditor to gain access to the value lists collection associated with the passed in context. Returns a ValueListsCollection or null. Returns the control associated. UIEditor for properties of type IValueList. Displays a dropdown of objects that implement IValueList and are ValueListBindable. The determines if a class that supports IValuList is added to the dropdown. Used to determine the type of UIEditor that will be displayed. ITypeDescriptorContext UITypeEditorEditStyle specifying the type of UIEditor. Used to edit the value and convert the value as needed. ITypeDescriptorContext IServiceProvider Current value Edited value. DrawValueListItemEventArgs Creates a new instance of the DrawValueListItemEventArgs class Draw item event arguments The ValueListItem to be drawn The resolved Appearance to apply to the ValueListItem Gets/sets whether the ValueListItem is being custom drawn

When the DrawValueListItem event fires, the DoDefaultDrawing parameter of the event arguments is true. If it is set to false, default drawing will not occur, and the listener will be able to draw the item.

Gets/sets the resolved Appearance that will be applied to the ValueListItem when it is custom drawn. The DrawItemEventArgs associated with this draw operation The ValueListItem that will be drawn Returns a Rectangle which defines the area in which the item's text and image should be drawn.

When checkboxes are displayed by the items, the rectangle returned by the TextAndImageAreaBounds property will be different than that of the Bounds property of the DrawValueListItemEventArgs; otherwise, they return the same value.

Returns a Rectangle which defines the area in which the item's text and image should be drawn

When checkboxes are displayed by the items, the rectangle returned by the CheckBoxBounds represents the area in which the checkbox is drawn; otherwise, this property returns an empty rectangle.

Class which contains information relating to the event. Creates a new instance of the class. Creates a new instance of the class. The constant which describes the type of change. The which triggered the change. Returns the constant which describes the type of change. Returns the which triggered the change.

Note: In the case where the contents of the entire collection was modified in one atomic operation, the ValueListItem property will return null (Nothing in VB).

 Enumeration which describes the manner in which the contents of a object's collection has changed. No change; represents the unitialized state. A was added to the collection. A was removed from the collection. The contents of the collection was emptied. The contents of the collection was repopulated as the result of being bound to a data source. Several instances were added to the collection in one atomic operation. A has been updated. MeasureValueListItemEventArgs Creates a new instance of the MeasureValueListItemEventArgs class Measure item event arguments The ValueListItem to be drawn The resolved Appearance to apply to the ValueListItem Gets/sets whether the ValueListItem is being custom measured

When the MeasureValueListItem event fires, the DoDefaultMeasuring parameter of the event arguments is true. If it is set to false, default drawing will not occur, and the listener will be able to draw the item.

Gets/sets the resolved Appearance that will be applied to the ValueListItem when it is custom drawn. The DrawItemEventArgs associated with this draw operation The ValueListItem that will be drawn Represents a ValueList with support for databinding. A string constant which can be user to set the ValueMember property so that the ValueList will use the entire ListObject of an item as the item's DataValue, rather than any individual field of the ListObject. Use this constructor if the BindableValueList is not to be immediately bound to a data source. Constructor. Throws an ArgumentNullException if either of the arguments are null (Nothing). The control used for retrieving the . The source for populating the list of items. Constructor. Throws an ArgumentNullException if any of the arguments are null (Nothing). The control used for retrieving the . The source for populating the list of items. The name of a specific data member in a multitier data source. Constructor. Throws an ArgumentNullException if any of the arguments are null (Nothing). The control used for retrieving the . The source for populating the list of items. The name of a specific data member in a multitier data source. The name of the property in the data source whose contents are to be displayed. The name of the property in the data source from which to retrieve the value. Constructor used to add a valuelist during de-serialization The id of the valuelist. Constructor used during deserialization. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Updates the ValueItems with the current values in the data source. This method is used when the data source does not implement IBindingList (such as an array or ArrayList). After modifying the values in the data source, call this method so that the items are synchronized. If the data source or binding context has not been specified an InvalidOperationException will be thrown. Sets the DataSource and DataMember properties in one atomic operation. Note: a BindingContext or BindingContextControl must be specified for data binding to occur, otherwise an InvalidOperationException will be thrown. The source of data. Indicates a sub-list of the DataSource. Sets the DataSource and DataMember properties in one atomic operation. Note: a BindingContext or BindingContextControl must be specified for data binding to occur, otherwise an InvalidOperationException will be thrown. The source of data. Indicates a sub-list of the DataSource. The BindingContext to use during the databinding process. Sets the DataSource and DataMember properties in one atomic operation. Note: a BindingContext or BindingContextControl must be specified for data binding to occur, otherwise an InvalidOperationException will be thrown. The source of data. Indicates a sub-list of the DataSource. The Control to get a BindingContext from during the databinding process. Overridden. Clones the value list. A clone of the object. Overrides OnDispose. Fires the event. Event argument to pass to any listeners. Ensures that the items are synchronized with those found in the data source, assuming one exists. Invoked during the serialization of the object. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Returns true if the property is set to a non-default value. Resets the property to its default value. Returns true if the property is set to a non-default value. Resets the property to its default value. Returns true if the property is set to a non-default value. Resets the property to its default value. Fires when a ValueListItem is created to represent a value found in the data source. Gets/sets the BindingContext that will be used. This setting takes precedence over the BindingContext provided by the BindingContextControl property. Gets/sets the Control used for retrieving a BindingContext. This property has no effect if the BindingContext property has been assigned a non-null value. Gets/sets the specific data member in a multimember data source to bind to. Gets/sets the object used for populating the list of items. Gets/sets the name of the property in the data source whose contents are to be displayed. Returns true if the valuelist items are retrieved from a data source. Gets/sets the name of the property in the data source from which to retrieve the value. To specify that the value of the control should return the entire ListObject of the item, instead of any individual field on that item, set ValueMember to Returns the CurrencyManager to use during the databinding process. Note, returns null if a CurrencyManager is not available. Constructor Element type in the list objects. Event argument class used when a databound item is created. Creates a new InitializeDataItemEventArgs object. The newly created item. Returns the newly created . This item represents an entity found in the data source. Event handler used when a databound item is created. Exposes properties which control the behavior of the checkboxes displayed in the dropdown list used by the EditorWithCombo embeddable editor. Default value is ItemCheckArea.CheckBox Default value is EditorWithComboValueSource.SelectedItem Creates a new instance of the class. Returns whether the property requires serialization. Restores the value of the property to its default. Returns whether the property requires serialization. Restores the value of the property to its default. Returns whether the property requires serialization. Restores the value of the property to its default. Returns whether this EditorCheckedListSettings instance requires serialization. Restores all property values for this EditorCheckedListSettings instance to their respective defaults. Returns an empty string. Creates a new instance of the class from deserialized data. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Persists the state of this instance to the specified SerializationInfo. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Returns or sets how clicking on an item affects the item’s checked state, and also whether clicking on an item closes the dropdown list.

The ItemCheckArea property determines which part of the item must be clicked to change its CheckState. When set to 'CheckBox', the user must click directly on the checkbox to change the checked state of the item. When set to 'Item', clicking anywhere on the item changes the checked state. In either case, when the user's click results in a change in the checked state, the dropdown is not automatically closed.

When clicking on the item causes the checked state to change, the SelectionChangeCommitted event is not fired. When MRU (Most Recently Used) functionality is enabled, the item is also not added to the MRU list in this case.

Returns or sets the string which separates the text of each item that appears in the edit portion. This string is typically one character wide, and is used as the delimiter. When multiple items are checked, the edit portion of EditorWithCombo shows the string representation of each checked item, separated by this character.

The character or characters assigned to the ListSeparator determine which characters are used to separate the display text of each item whose value is included in the editor's value when the EditorValueSource property is set to 'CheckedItems'. These characters are also used when parsing string values into multiple item values.

When the ListSeparator property is not explicitly set, the value of the current culture's ListSeparator property, followed by one space character (ASCII character 34), is used.

Returns the resolved value of the ListSeparator property.

The ListSeparator is used to separate the display string of each member of the CheckedItems collection when building the string representation that is displayed by the embeddable editor.

In the absence of an explicit setting, the current culture's list separator, followed by a single space character, is used. This string is appended to all items except for the last one.

 Returns or sets the source of the Value property, i.e., whether the value is obtained from the selected item or the ICheckedItemList implementation.

When the EditorValueSource property is set to 'CheckedItems', alpha-numeric keyboard entry is effectively disabled, i.e., the editor portion does not accept keystrokes. In this case the editor's value is changed by checking items, which can be done by clicking on the checkbox (or anywhere on the item depending on the value of the ItemCheckArea property), or by pressing the spacebar.

The EditorValueSource property is only applicable to the EditorWithCombo embeddable editor, and editors that derive from it.

When set to 'SelectedItem' (default), the editor's value is determined by the selected item, as was the case in previous versions. Items are selected by clicking on or navigating to an entry in the dropdown list. Doing this typically triggers a selection changed notification, which is by and large the equivalent of a change in value.

When set to 'CheckedItems', the editor's value is then determined by multiple items, namely those that are checked. Exactly what constitutes "checked" can vary between the different standalone controls that use/provide the embeddable editor. In the case of the UltraComboEditor control (which uses an EditorWithCombo embeddable editor and a ValueList), an item is "checked" if its CheckState property returns 'Checked'. A change in the value coincides with a change in the item's checked state.

The data type of the entity using the editor (for example, an UltraGrid cell) must be a type that handles arrays of simple object values, i.e., object or object[]. Additionally, the string data type is also supported. In the case where the string data type is used, the DisplayText of each item is used to build a string, and strings built in such a manner are then parsed into the individual item values (by obtaining the DataValue for each string value therein).

Contains information about the ICheckedItemList.CheckStateChanged event. Creates a new instance of the class. The value of the property. Returns the item that triggered the change in check state, or null if the change was not triggered by an individual item. Handler for the ICheckedItemList.CheckStateChanged event. The object that sent the notification. The instance that contains information about the event. Identifies the properties of the EditorCheckedListSettings class. Undefined; used for variable initialization. The ItemCheckArea property. The ListSeparator property. The EditorValueSource property. Enumeration which contains constants that identify the actions that can be performed on the ValueListDropDown control. The first in the list is selected. The last in the list is selected. The whose index is one greater than the currently selected item is selected. The whose index is one less than the currently selected item is selected. The that is one logical page before the currently selected item is selected. The that is one logical page after the currently selected item is selected. The current selection is committed. The dropdown is closed. Sets the next CheckState for the SelectedItem. Enumeration which contains constants that identify the various states of the ValueListDropDown control. The control is currently not in any of the defined states. The dropdown list is currently open. The SelectedIndex property returns a value that is greater than or equal to zero, i.e., an item is currently selected. The SelectedIndex property returns zero, i.e., the first item is currently selected. The SelectedIndex property returns a value that is one less than the number of items in the control's Items collection, i.e., the last item is currently selected. The dropdown displays checkboxes next to each item in the list. Creates a new instance of the class. The with which this instance is associated. Brings the ValueListItem referenced by the specified index into view. The index into the control's Items collection which identifies the item to be selected. The ValueListDropDownAction constant which identifies the keystroke that triggered the selection change. Closes the dropdown. Closes the dropdown. Boolean specifying whether to call the DropDownManager's CloseUp method. Displays the dropdown at a location defined by the specified editRect and the value of the associated object's and properties. Rectangle which defines the point at which to display the dropdown, and the exclusion rectangle for the DropDownManager, expressed in screen coordinates. The initial value for the property. A boolean indicating whether the dropdown was successfully opened. Note that if this method is called while already dropped down, true is returned but no further action is taken. Displays the dropdown list at the location specified by the 'editRect' parameter. Rectangle which defines the point at which to display the dropdown, and the exclusion rectangle for the DropDownManager, expressed in screen coordinates. The initial value for the property. Specifies whether the method is to behave as if being called from the DoDropDown method. A boolean indicating whether the operation was successful. Note that if this method is called while already dropped down, and the 'isDroppingDown' parameter is set to true, true is returned but no further action is taken. Returns whether the ValueListItem referenced by the specified index is completely within the viewable area of the control. The index into the control's Items collection which identifies the item to be selected. Called when the dropdown list closes. Boolean which specifies whether the DropDownManager's CloseUp method is to be called. Handles a change in an editor's text Invokes the control's MouseEnterElement event. Invokes the control's MouseDown event. MouseEventArgs Invokes the control's MouseMove event. MouseEventArgs Invokes the control's MouseUp event. MouseEventArgs Invokes the control's MouseWheel event. MouseEventArgs Called when the value of the property has changed. Called when a change in selection has been committed. Performs the specified action. The constant which identifies the action to perform. A boolean indicating whether the action was successfully performed; a return value of true signifies success. Performs the specified action. The constant which identifies the action to perform. Specifies whether the Shift key was pressed at the time this method was called. Specifies whether the Control key was pressed at the time this method was called. A boolean indicating whether the action was successfully performed; a return value of true signifies success. Returns the at the specified point, or null if no item exists at the specified point. The horizontal component of the Point to test, expressed in client coordinates. The vertical component of the Point to test, expressed in client coordinates. Returns the at the specified point, or null if no item exists at the specified point. The Point to test, expressed in client coordinates. Clean up any resources being used. Used to invoke the KeyDown event Determines whether the specified key is a regular input key or a special key that requires preprocessing. Keys Returns the instance which represents this control in the user interface. Returns a value which represents the current state of the control Returns whether the IMRUListProvider has items to display. Returns whether the control is currently being displayed. Returns the maximum number of entries to display in the list. Gets/sets the index specifying the currently selected . Gets/sets the currently selected . Gets/sets the text associated with this instance.

The Text property returns the value of the property of the current ; in the case where no item is selected, an empty string is returned.

Setting the Text property to the same value as the of a which belongs to the collection results in that item becoming selected.

 Returns the instance which represents this control in the user interface. Gets/sets the value associated with this instance.

The Value property returns the value of the property of the current ; in the case where no item is selected, null (Nothing in VB) is returned.

Setting the Value property to the same value as the of a which belongs to the collection results in that item becoming selected.

 Returns the with which this instance is associated. Returns a reference to the the collection with which this instance is associated. Accessibility object representing a . Initializes a new Associated ValueListDropDown control Retrieves the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. The zero-based index of the accessible child. An AccessibleObject that represents the accessible child corresponding to the specified index. Retrieves the number of children belonging to an accessible object. The number of children belonging to an accessible object. Returns the role of the accessible object. Returns the associated ValueListDropDown control. Creates a new instance of the ValueListDropDownItems class. The ValueListDropDown control to which this instance is associated. This method does nothing, so don't call it. Returns the index of the first occurrence of the specified ValueListItem, or -1 if the ValueListItem is not found in the list. Note that if the specified ValueListitem is in the MRU list, the index that corresponds to that MRU item is returned. The ValueListItem to be located. Returns the combined count of the MRU items and ValueListItems. Returns the ValueListItem at the specified ordinal position. Note that the index is implied to be relative to this collection, not the associated ValueListItems collection. Creates a new instance of the FilteredValueListDropDownItems class. The ValueListDropDown control to which this instance is associated. Returns the number of items in this collection. Returns the ValueListItem at the specified ordinal position. Resolves the appearance for the specified ValueListItem. Resolves the appearance for the ValueList associated with this ValueListDropDown control. Returns the AppearancePropFlags which represent the Appearance properties that relate to the background. Returns the AppearancePropFlags which represent the Appearance properties that relate to the foreground Returns the AppearancePropFlags which represent the Appearance properties that relate to the background image. Returns the AppearancePropFlags which represent the Appearance properties that relate to the foreground image. Returns the AppearancePropFlags which represent the Appearance properties that relate to text. Returns the AppearancePropFlags which represent the Appearance properties that relate to the border. -derived element which represents the ValueListDropDown control in the user interface. Overridden to render the themed border for the ValueListDropDown control. The used to provide rendering information. Returning true will prevent the invocation of the DrawBackColor, DrawImageBackground, DrawBorders, DrawImage and DrawForeground. Return false when themes are not supported by the element or if unable to render using the system theme. Initializes the appearance for this . The AppearanceData struct whose properties are to be set. The AppearancePropFlags value which defines the proeprties to be resolved. Handles positioning of descendant UIElements for this . Draws the background for this UIElement. Draws the background image for this UIElement. Called when the user pans vertically with the mouse. The number of pixels between the cursor position and the origin mark. This value is positive when the cursor is below the origin mark, negative when it is above the origin mark, and zero if it is within the origin mark threshold Called when the mouse capture is aborted (e.g. if the user presses escape) Returns the style for the associated ValueListDropDown control's border. Returns whether this element clips its child elements. Returns whether vertical mouse panning is supported. Returns the ui role for the element. UIElement which contains instances. Creates a new instance of the class. The to which this element belongs. Draws the background for this UIElement. The used to provide rendering information. Initializes the appearance for this . The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. Positions the child UIElements for this . Returns the associated with this instance. UIElement which represents the separator between the last MRU item and the first member of the ValueListItems collection. Defines the height for the . Creates a new instance of the class. The to which this element belongs. Draws the foreground for this . The used to provide rendering information. Draws the background for this UIElement. The used to provide rendering information. Draws the background image for this UIElement. The used to provide rendering information. Represents the object in the user interface. Creates a new instance of the class. The to which this element belongs. The which this element represents. Specifies whether this represents an MRU item Specifies the index of this item as relative to the list which contains both the MRU items and ValueListItems collection members. This index coincides with the item's scroll position. Initializes this instance for use by a new . The which this element represents. Specifies whether this represents an MRU Specifies the index of this item as relative to the list which contains both the MRU items and ValueListItems collection members. This index coincides with the item's scroll position. Invoked when the borders for the element should be rendered. Initializes the appearance for this . The object into which the appearance object should be merged. The specifying which properties should be merged. Positions the child UIElements for this . Called when the cursor passes within the bounds of this element. Called when the cursor passes outside the bounds of this element. Called when a mouse button is pressed while the cursor is positioned over this . Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Called when the mouse is released over an element. Draws the background for this UIElement. Default background picture drawing The used to provide rendering information. Draws the foreground for this UIElement. Invoked when the accessible object that represents the accessible object is to be created. An accessible object that represents the wrapper Returns the associated with this instance. Returns the associated with this instance. Returns whether the cursor is currently positioned over this . Returns whether this represents an MRU item. Returns the index of this item as relative to the list which contains both the MRU items and ValueListItems collection members. This index coincides with the item's scroll position. Returns which border sides are rendered for this . Returns the border style for this . Returns the ui role for the element. Returns the accessible object that represents the element or its associated object. Accessibility object representing a . Initializes a new Associated ValueListDropDown control The ValueListItemUIElement that this AccessibleObject represents. The ValueListItem that this AccessibleObject represents. Returns the name of the accessible object. Gets the state of this accessible object. -derived class which handles the rendering of images for the . Creates a new instance of the class. The which contains this instance. The that this element renders. Initializes this for use by a new . The that this element renders. -derived class which handles the rendering of checkboxes for the . Creates a new instance of the class. The owning . Called when the check state changes. Called when a mouse button is pressed while the cursor is positioned over this element. Mouse event arguments True if left clicked over adjustable area of element. If not null on return will capture the mouse and forward all mouse messages to this element. If true then bypass default processing Called to give control focus control to give focus to Creates a new instance of the ValueListItemMetrics class. The ValueList instance with which this instance is associated. Returns the size required to display the ValueListItem. The whose size is to be returned.. Returns the size to use for images based on the specified itemHeight and initial imageSize Returns whether all items in the list have the same height. Returns a Size struct which contains the total number of pixels required to display the borders. The ValueListDropDown control to test. A Size struct whose Width represents the combined width of the left and right borders, and whose Height represents the combined height of the top and bottom borders. Returns the height of the Mru divider line, or zero if none is being displayed. The ValueListDropDown control to test. Returns the size of the dropdown's "client area", i.e., the area in which items are displayed (no scrollbars, borders, mru divider) The ValueListDropDown control to test. Returns the Hashtable which contains the cached sizes of the ValueListItems which are associated with this instance. Handles the Scroll event for the vertical scrollbar. Sets the number of lines by which to scroll during a drag scroll operation, based on the specified magnitude and sign The number of pixels between the cursor and the scroll area of interest. Defines the direction for scrolling; a negative number implies upward scrolling. Handles scrolling by wheel, panning, or dragging. MouseEventArgs instance containing information about the scroll operation. Releases any resources in use by this object. Returns the size of the scroll universe. Gets/sets the ScrollBarLook for the vertical scrollbar Gets/sets the ScrollBarLook for the vertical scrollbar Returns the resolved value of the control's MaxDropDownItems property. ValueListItem type objects are stored in ValueList to represent the itmes in the ValueList The default value for the CheckState property (Unchecked) Constructor used to add a valuelistitem within the properties window Creates a new instance of the class. The initial value for this instance's property. Creates a new instance of the class. The initial value for this instance's property. The initial value for this instance's property. Constructor used during deserialization. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Returns true if this property is not set to its default value True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets DataValue to its default setting (null). Returns true if this property is not set to its default value True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets DisplayText to its default value (null). Returns true if this property is not set to its default value True if the is set to a non-default value. Resets appearance Always returns true for groups True if any properties are set to non-default values. Resets all properties to their default values. overridden method that is called whenever a sub object property changes that Called when the Item is disposed Overridden to facilitate easy lookup of items (when finding a match for a text) Depending on the valuelist's , a string representation of the or Invoked during the serialization of the object. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Sets the value of the CheckState property, optionally issuing a property change notification. Returns whether the CheckState property requires serialization. Sets the value of the CheckState property to its default (Unchecked). Returns a reference to a ValueList object containing the list of values used by a column. This property is read-only at run-time. This property is not available at design-time.

This property returns a reference to a ValueList object that can be used to set properties of, and invoke methods on, the valuelist that is associated with a column. You can use this reference to access any of the returned valuelist's properties or methods.

This property is also used to assign a particular ValueList object to a column. Once assigned, the valuelist enables a column to use the dropdown list styles and intelligent data entry, specified by the Style and AutoEdit properties, respectively, of the column for which this property is set.

 Returns or sets a value that determines the text to be displayed instead of the cell data.

This property, in conjunction with the DataValue property, provides a way to store one value in the data source while displaying another. In this manner, the user can be presented with a list of states, for example, and if he or she selects "New York," the value "NY" could be stored in the data source. In this example, this property is set to "New York" while "NY" is the value of the DataValue property.

Values for this property do not have to be unique within the ValueListItems collection.

The Find method can be invoked to search for a valuelistitem by its display text.

Note: When the DisplayText property is not explicity set, a ValueListItem will display the string representation of its property.

Also note that it is possible for a ValueListItem to have its DisplayText property set while no value has been specified for the property; it this scenario, the DataValue will not be set, as it is possible that specifying a null DataValue for the item was intentional.

Returns or sets the data value associated with this item.

This property, in conjunction with the DisplayText property, provides a way to store one value in the datasource while displaying another. In this manner, the user can be presented with a list of states, for example, and if he or she selects "New York," the value "NY" could be stored in the data source. In this example, "New York" is the value of the DisplayText property while "NY" is the value of the DataValue property.

When data from the data source matches the data value for a particular valuelistitem, that valuelistitem's display text will be shown in the cell.

Values for this property do not have to be unique within the ValueListItems collection.

The Find method can be invoked to search for a valuelistitem by its data value.

 Returns or sets the Appearance object that controls the object's formatting.

The Appearance property of an object is used to associate the object with an Appearance object that will determine its appearance. The Appearance object has properties that control settings such as color, borders, font, transparency, etc. For many of the objects in the UltraWinGrid, you do not set formatting properties directly. Instead, you set the properties of an Appearance object, which controls the formatting of the object it is attached to.

There are two ways of working with the Appearance property and assigning the attributes of an SSAppearance object to other objects. One way is to create a new Appearance object, adding it directly to the Appearances collection. Then you assign the new Appearance object to the Appearance property of the object you want to format. This method uses a "named" Appearance object that you must explicitly create (and to which you must assign property settings) before it can be used. For instance, you could create an object in the grid's Appearances collection and assign it some values as follows:

UltraWinGrid1.Appearances.Add "New1"

UltraWinGrid1.Appearances("New1").BorderColor = vbBlue

UltraWinGrid1.Appearances("New1").ForeColor = vbRed

Creating the object in this way does not apply formatting to any visible part of the grid. The object simply exists in the collection with its property values, waiting to be used. To actually use the object, you must assign it to the grid's (or another object's) Appearance property:

UltraWinGrid1.Appearance = UltraWinGrid1.Appearances("New1")

In this case, only one Appearance object exists. The grid's appearance is governed by the settings of the "New1" object in the collection. Any changes you make to the object in the collection will immediately be reflected in the grid.

The second way of working with the Appearance property is to use it to set property values directly, such as:

UltraWinGrid1.Appearance.ForeColor = vbBlue

In this case, an Appearance object is automatically created by the control. This Appearance object is not a member of an Appearances collection and it does not have a name. It is specific to the object for which it was created; it is an "intrinsic" Appearance object. Changes to the properties of an intrinsic Appearance object are reflected only in the object to which it is attached.

Note that you can assign properties from a named Appearance object to an intrinsic Appearance object without creating a dependency relationship. For example, the following code...

UltraWinGrid1.Appearance.ForeColor = UltraWinGrid1.Appearances("New1").ForeColor

...does not establish a relationship between the foreground color of the intrinsic object and that of the named object. It is simply a one-time assignment of the named object's value to that of the intrinsic object. In this case, two Appearance objects exist - one in the collection and one attached to the grid - and they operate independently of one another.

If you wish to assign all the properties of a named object to an intrinsic object at once without creating a dependency relationship, you can use the Clone method of the Appearance object to duplicate its settings and apply them. So if you wanted to apply all the property settings of the named Appearance object "New1" to the grid's intrinsic Appearance object, but you did not want changes made to "New1" automatically reflected in the grid, you would use the following code:

UltraWinGrid1.Appearance = UltraWinGrid1.Appearances("New1").Clone

Note that the properties of an Appearance object can also operate in a hierarchical fashion. Certain properties can be set to a "use default" value, which indicates to the control that the property should take its setting from the object's parent. This functionality is enabled by default, so that unless you specify otherwise, child objects resemble their parents, and formatting set at higher levels of the grid hierarchy is inherited by objects lower in the hierarchy.

 returns true if an appearance object has been allocated for this ValueListItem Returns true if this ValueListItem belongs to a bound BindableValueList. Returns the corresponding entity in the data source, if bound. Returns the index corresponding to this item from the IList that the ValueLIst is bound to. Return value of -1 indicates that an item has been deleted or doesn't exist anymore. Returns or sets the value displayed by the check box associated with this item.

Checkboxes are only displayed by the standard dropdown used by the EditorWithCombo embeddable editor. Other representations of a ValueListItem, such as when used by the OptionSetEditor, do not provide a user interface through which this property can be modified. The value of the CheckState property will be maintained and serialized in all cases, but user interface support for displaying and changing the value is only extended by the standard dropdown used by the EditorWithCombo.

The EditorWithCombo embeddable editor uses the checkbox support provided by the ValueList class to return a value that consists of the DataValues of multiple items, effectively enabling "multiple selection" of items.

A collection containing only the items whose CheckState is set to 'Checked' is returned by the ValueList's CheckedItems collection.

CheckBoxStyle property (ValueList class) CheckBoxAlignment property (ValueList class) CheckedItems collection EditorCheckedListSettings class ValueListItem type converter. Returns true if the object can convert to that type. An that provides a format context. A that represents the type you want to convert to. True if this converter can perform the conversion; otherwise, false. Converts the object to the requested type. An that provides a format context. A object. If null is passed, the current culture is assumed. A that represents the type you want to convert to. The object to convert. An object that represents the converted value. value list items collection class Adds a valuelist item to the collection must be a valuelist item object Index in collection Constructor used during deserialization. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Sees if the item is in the collection. The item to check. True if the item is in the collection. Adds an item to the collection The item to add. The index of the newly added item. Inserts an item into the collection Index in collection The item to insert. Inserts a value list item to the collection Index in collection Must be a value list item object Remove a value list item from the collection Must be a value list item object Remove a value list item from the collection Index to be removed called when the object is being disposed. disposes of any allocated resources Copies the items of the collection into the array. The array to receive the items. The array index to begin inserting the items. Called when a property has changed on a sub object The . Called when an item is removed. The that has been removed. Whether the item has been removed internally. Whether the item was removed in the destructor. Whether the item has been removed as part of a clearing of the item collection. Adds an item to the collection The value to compare The display text The newly added item Adds an item to the collection The value to compare and the display text. The newly added item

Note: When ValueListItems are added via this overload, the item's property will be automatically set to the string representation of the dataValue parameter. Also note that if the dataValue parameter contains a , and the item's property was not explitly set, it will remain null. If two or more items have the same , your application may behave unexpectedly, since the items are not unique.

Insert an item into the collection Where to insert the item The value to compare The display text The newly inserted item Remove valuelist at specified index from collection Remove valueList from collection Clears the collection IEnumerable Interface Implementation returns a type safe enumerator returns the index of valueListItem in the collection The item in the collection. The index of the specified item, or -1 if the item couldn't be located. Returns the index of the valueListItem in the collection The whose index should be determined. The index of the specified item, or -1 if the item couldn't be located. Invoked during the serialization of the object. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Adds each instance in the specified array to this collection. An array of instances to be added to the collection. value list items collection class Returns false overriden property that indicates whether the collection can be modified by adding or removing items indexer Abstract property that specifies the initial capacity of the collection The collection as an array of objects Returns a reference to a ValueList object containing the list of values used by a column. This property is read-only at run-time. This property is not available at design-time.

This property returns a reference to a ValueList object that can be used to set properties of, and invoke methods on, the valuelist that is associated with a column. You can use this reference to access any of the returned valuelist's properties or methods.

This property is also used to assign a particular ValueList object to a column. Once assigned, the valuelist enables a column to use the dropdown list styles and intelligent data entry, specified by the Style and AutoEdit properties, respectively, of the column for which this property is set.

 Callback method called by qsort. Comapres the items based on their respective display text strings Enumerator for the ValueListCollection constructor The to enumerate through. Type-safe version of Current Collection class for ValueListItems whose CheckState property returns 'Checked'. CheckedItems collection (ValueList class) Returns the DisplayText of each ValueListItem in this collection, with each entry except for the last followed by the specified . The string to be appended after each entry, except for the last one. The string representation of this instance, based on the contents of the collection.

This overload returns the same string that is built by the EditorWithCombo embeddable editor to depict its value when the EditorValueSource property is set to 'CheckedItems'.

Releases any resources used by this instance. Returns the item at the specified ordinal position within this collection. The ordinal position of the item within this collection.

The elements of this collection can be indexed by their associated DataValue. If that value is of type integer, however, the integer must be boxed into a variable of type object in order to access that indexer overload; passing an integer directly will cause execution to route through this overload, and the parameter value will be interpreted as an index within this collection, not a data value.

Returns the ValueListItem whose DataValue is equal to the specified , or null if no item's value matches.

This indexer provides a way to access an item by its DataValue. A standard indexer is also exposed, the 'index' parameter of which is implied to be the ordinal position of the item within this collection. Use that overload when that index is already available.

The DataValue of the ValueListItem to return, or null if no item with the specified dataValue exists. Returns the number of ValueListItems contained within this collection. Returns the contents of this collection as an array. Returns the inital size of this collection. Returns true since this collection cannot be modified. Collection of ValueLists constructor The list of appearances that should be used to initialize the collection. overridden method that is called whenever the object is disposed It does the necessary cleanup of allocated resources Constructor used during deserialization. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Adds a valuelist to the collection must be a valuelist object Index in collection For use in design time serialization/deserialization. A list of objects. Gets the index of the value list in the collection. The valuelist to check. The zero-based index into the collection. Sees if the valuelist is in the collection. The valuelist to check. True if the valuelist is in the collection. Insert a value list into the collection Index in collection The valuelist to insert. Inserts a value list to the collection Index in collection Must be a value list object Remove a value list from the collection The valuelist to remove. Remove a value list from the collection Must be a value list object Remove a value list from the collection Index to be removed When using the Serialization constructor, appearances is set to null, so set it here after calling this constructor Called when a property has changed on a sub object Adds a to the collection. The argument was . Creates a new ValueList object with specified key and adds it to the collection The key to assign to the new . returns the new value list Remove valuelist at specified index from collection Remove valueList with specified key from collection Clears the collection IEnumerable Interface Implementation returns a type safe enumerator Called when an item is removed. The that has been removed. Whether the item has been removed internally. Whether the item was removed in the destructor. Whether the item has been removed as part of a clearing of the item collection. Initializes the state of this object from a source object of the same type The collection of ValueLists to initialize this instance from. Sets the appearance holders collection references to the layout's appearances collection Finds the valuelist object with an id The id to match The ValueList object with the id Invoked during the serialization of the object. SerializationInfo StreamingContext Collection of ValueLists overriden property that indicates whether the collection can be modified by adding or removeing items indexer indexer by string Returns false Abstract property that specifies the initial capacity of the collection The collection as an array of objects Enumerator for the ValueListCollection constructor The to enumerate through. Type-safe version of Current Represents an 'xs:attribute' node. Represents an 'xs:attributeGroup' node. Represents an 'xs:complexType' node. Represents an 'xs:element' node. Represents an 'xs:extension' node. Represents an 'xs:group' node. Represents an 'xs:restriction' node. Represents an 'xs:simpleType' node. This abstract class provides common functionality needed by a class which extracts constraint information from an XSD.

This class requires that:

  • the XSD namespace ("http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema") has a prefix associated with it.
  • the schema's target namespace is the default namespace (i.e. has no prefix).
  • each valueset in the schema has a unique name.

The term valueset refers to a complex type in an XSD. For example, a table in a grid is considered a 'valueset' because it contains multiple columns. The term value refers to a simple type in an XSD. For example, a column in a grid is considered a 'value' because it contains only single data objects (each cell contains one piece of data).

For internal use only. For internal use only. Constructor used by . The name of the valueset (i.e. complex type) from which the constraints are extracted. An XPathDocument which contains the XSD to read from.

This is the constructor overload used to initialize the partial of an .

Constructor used by . The name of the target value, as specified by XSD 'name' attribute. An XsdValueSetConstraint object which has located the valueset (i.e. complex type) in which the target value (i.e. simple type) resides.

This is the constructor overload used to initialize the partial of an .

This method is called from the constructor of XsdRestrictionBase. Overrides of this method contain constraint extraction code. Returns the name of the valueset (i.e. complex type) from which the constraints are extracted.

This is the string passed into the constructor used by the class.

This class retrieves the constraints placed on a value as declared by an XSD schema. Objects of this type can be instantiated via the GetConstraintsOnXsdValue method of the class.

This class requires that:

  • the XSD namespace ("http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema") has a prefix associated with it.
  • the schema's target namespace is the default namespace (i.e. has no prefix).
  • each valueset in the schema has a unique name.

The term valueset refers to a complex type in an XSD. For example, a table in a grid is considered a 'valueset' because it contains multiple columns. The term value refers to a simple type in an XSD. For example, a column in a grid is considered a 'value' because it contains only single data objects (each cell contains one piece of data).

Extracts all constraints placed on the value (i.e. simple type) found in the XSD. Returns the object which contains all of the constraints found for the specified XSD value.

If the property returns true, this property returns a object which contains the constraints placed on the target XSD value. If returns false then the returned object's property will return false.

Returns the default value for the target value.

Setting this property to null (Nothing) indicates that there is no default value.

Returns true if the property has a non-null value.

This is a convenience property used to determine whether the XSD value has a default value specified.

Returns true if the target value was located in the XSD schema, else false.

If the target entity could not be located in the schema this property returns false. The target entity is specified via the GetConstraintsOnXsdValue method of the class.

Returns the name of the target value.

The target value is specified via the GetConstraintsOnXsdValue method of the class.

This class retrieves the constraints placed on a set of data as declared by an XSD schema.

This class requires that:

  • the XSD namespace ("http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema") has a prefix associated with it.
  • the schema's target namespace is the default namespace (i.e. has no prefix).
  • each valueset in the schema has a unique name.

The term valueset refers to a complex type in an XSD. For example, a table in a grid is considered a 'valueset' because it contains multiple columns. The term value refers to a simple type in an XSD. For example, a column in a grid is considered a 'value' because it contains only single data objects (each cell contains one piece of data).

Creates an and initializes it with the constraint information found in in the 'xpathDoc' argument. The name of the target valueset (ex. the name of a DataTable in a DataSet). An XPathDocument containing the XSD to extract constraint information from.

Creates an and initializes it with the constraint information found in in the 'xpathDoc' argument.

Returns the constraints placed on an XSD value (i.e. an 'xs:simpleType'). If the target valueset was not found in the XSD schema, this property will return null. The name of the value, as specified by the 'name' attribute in the XSD schema.

Returns a containing the constraint information for the specified XSD value. If the valueset specified in this object's constructor does not exist, this returns null. In other words, if the property returns false, this method returns null.

Determines the values for MinOccurrences and MaxOccurrences. Returns true if the target valueset was found, else false.

If the valueset whose name was specified in the constructor does not exist in the schema then this property will return false. If this property returns false, the method will return null.

Returns the minimum number of times that instances of this valueset can occur (inclusive).

For example, if the target valueset corresponds to a DataTable in a DataSet this value indicates the minimal row count allowed in that table.

Returns true if the property has a meaningful value.

This property will return false if the valueset does not have a meaningful value for the setting.

Returns the maximum number of times that instances of this valueset can occur (inclusive).

For example, if the target valueset corresponds to a DataTable in a DataSet this value indicates the maximal row count allowed in that table.

Returns true if the property has a meaningful value.

This property will return false if the valueset does not have a meaningful value for the setting.

Returns true if the target valueset can occur an infinte number of times.

Returns true if the target valueset can occur an infinte number of times.

XPThemes Event that fires when the system's theme has changed. Indicates if the themes are supported by the operating system. Indicates if the current application supports themes. Indicates if a system theme is active. Indicates if the current application has an active theme. This checks to see if the system supports themes and if the current application supports themes. Determines if the non client area of the application is themed. Determines if the controls of the application are themed. Determines if the web content of an application is themed. ComboBox ScrollBar Button SpinButton TreeView Header Progress Window Rebar ThemedStatusBar ThemedTab ThemedPage ThemedExplorer ThemedEdit ThemedToolbar ListView TrackBar Returns the name of the current color scheme. Used to receive notifications about windows messages. Message information Invokes a notification when the XP theme changes. EventArgs NativeWindowMethods Rectangle structure Left Top Right Bottom Constructor Left Top Right Bottom Constructor Rectangle Specifies that the nonclient areas of application windows have visual styles applied. Specifies that controls in application windows have visual styles applied. Specifies that all web content displayed in an application is rendered using visual styles. ThemeItemBase Class name used to obtain the theme handle. Constructor ClassList used to obtain the theme handle Returns a representing the themed system color for the specified SystemColor A Color structure representing the themed system color or if the theme information is not available, the current system color. Invoked when the theme has been changed. Asserts that the specified VisualStyleElement is defined, only when in DEBUG mode. The VisualStyleElement to test. The name of the method that called this method. Writes the Message of the exception to the output window when in DEBUG mode. The exception that was thrown. The method in which the exception was thrown. ThemedScrollBar Renders a themed scroll button if the os supports it. Direction of the scroll button. The used to provide rendering information. Rect of the scroll button. Cliprect State of the scroll button. A boolean indicating whether the method was able to render the theme item. Draws a themed scroll thumb. Orientation of the scroll bar the thumb belongs to. The used to provide rendering information. Rect Clip rect State of the thumb. A boolean indicating whether the method was able to render the theme item. Draws a themed scroll thumb. Orientation of the scroll bar the thumb belongs to. The used to provide rendering information. Rect Clip rect State of the thumb. True if the thumb grip should be rendered if space allows. A boolean indicating whether the method was able to render the theme item. Draws the scroll track area for a ScrollBar. Orientation of the ScrollBar. Boolean indicating if the top/left part of the scroll track is being rendered or the bottom/right. The used to provide rendering information. Rectangle Clip rect. State of the scroll track. A boolean indicating whether the method was able to render the theme item. Draw the size box. Boolean indicating whether the size box is aligned to the left. The used to provide rendering information. Rectangle Clip rect A boolean indicating whether the method was able to render the theme item. Minimum size of the scroll thumb before the grip is no longer rendered. ThemedButton Renders a themed push button. The used to provide rendering information. Rect for the button. Clip rect Button state. Boolean indicating if this is the default button. A boolean indicating whether the method was able to render the theme item. Renders a themed push button. The used to provide rendering information. Rect for the button. Clip rect Button state. Boolean indicating if this is the default button. A boolean indicating whether the method was able to render the theme item. Renders a themed radio button. The used to provide rendering information. Rect of the radio button. Clip rect. Button state. A boolean indicating whether the method was able to render the theme item. Renders a themed radio button. The used to provide rendering information. Rect of the radio button. Clip rect. Button state. A boolean indicating whether the method was able to render the theme item. Renders a themed checkbox. The used to provide rendering information. Rect for the checkbox. Clip rect. Button state. State of the checkbox. A boolean indicating whether the method was able to render the theme item. Renders a themed checkbox. The used to provide rendering information. Rect for the checkbox. Clip rect. Button state. State of the checkbox. A boolean indicating whether the method was able to render the theme item. Renders the frame for a group by box. The used to provide rendering information. Rectangle Clip rect. Boolean indicating if the element is enabled. A boolean indicating whether the method was able to render the theme item. Color used to display the interior highlight on a button. Color used to display the caption of a group box. Color used to display the border of a group box. Color used to display the foreground of a scroll button. Color used to display the foreground of a disabled scroll button. ThemedComboBox Renders a themed ComboBox button. The used to provide rendering information. Rect for the element. Clip rect State of the dropdown button. A boolean indicating whether the method was able to render the theme item. Renders a themed ComboBox button. The used to provide rendering information. Rect for the element. Clip rect State of the dropdown button. A boolean indicating whether the method was able to render the theme item. ThemedTreeView Draws an expansion indicator. Boolean indicating if the indicator is rendered as opened or closed. The used to provide rendering information. Rect of the element. Clip rect. A boolean indicating whether the method was able to render the theme item. Renders the themed treeview border. True to render only the border area. Otherwise the backcolor and border are rendered. The used to provide rendering information. Rect of the element. Clip rect. A boolean indicating whether the method was able to render the theme item. Returns the themed tree border color or the system window frame color if themes are not supported and active. Returns the themed tree backcolor or the system Window color if themes are not supported and active. ThemedSpinButton Renders a themed spin button. Direction of the spin button. The used to provide rendering information. Rect of the spin button. Clip rect. State of the button. A boolean indicating whether the method was able to render the theme item. Renders a themed spin button. Direction of the spin button. The used to provide rendering information. Rect of the spin button. Clip rect. State of the button. A boolean indicating whether the method was able to render the theme item. ThemedHeader Renders a themed header element. Type of header item. The used to provide rendering information. Rectangle Clip rect. State of the header item. A boolean indicating if the theme could be rendered. Draws a themed sort arrow indicator. True if ascending, false is descending. The used to provide rendering information. Rectangle of the element. Clip rect. A boolean indicating if the themed item could be rendered. Enumeration of header types. HeaderItem HeaderItemLeft HeaderItemRight ThemedProgress Renders a themed progress bar. Orientation of the progress bar. The used to provide rendering information. Rectangle of the element. Clip rect. A value from 0 to 100 indicating the percentage filled. A boolean indicating if the themed element could be rendered. Renders a themed progress bar border. Orientation of the progress bar. The used to provide rendering information. Rectangle of the element. Clip rect. A boolean indicating if the themed element could be rendered. Renders the filled area of a themed progress bar. Orientation of the progress bar. The used to provide rendering information. Rectangle of the element. Clip rect. A value from 0 to 100 indicating the percentage filled. A boolean indicating if the rect supplied is that of the progress bar itself. When set to true, the rect to which the fill is rendered is offset based on the space needed to render the progress bar border. A boolean indicating if the themed element could be rendered. ThemedWindow Draws a themed window button. Type of system button to render State of the button. True if the button is for a maximized mdi child window. The used to provide rendering information. Rect of the element Clip rect. A boolean indicating if the themed element could be rendered. Draws a themed window button. Type of system button to render State of the button. True if the button is for a maximized mdi child window. The used to provide rendering information. Rect of the element Clip rect. A boolean indicating if the themed element could be rendered. Draws a themed window button. Type of system button to render State of the button. True if the button is for a maximized mdi child window. The used to provide rendering information. Rect of the element Clip rect. A boolean indicating if the form is currently active A boolean indicating if the themed element could be rendered. Renders a themed window caption background. True if this is a small caption - e.g. ToolWindow State of the window. Enabled state of the window. The used to provide rendering information. Rectangle of the element. Clip rectangle A boolean indicating if the themed element was rendered. Renders a themed window frame area. True if this is the frame for a small caption window - e.g. ToolWindow. Which area of the frame to render. True if the frame is for an active window. The used to provide rendering information. Rectangle of the frame element. Clip rectangle A boolean indicating if the themed element was rendered. Renders a themed close button for a small window caption. State of the button. The used to provide rendering information. Rect of the element. Clip rect. A boolean indicating if the themed item could be rendered. Gets the size of a Windows Themed button. Type of system button to render True if the button is for a maximized mdi child window. The size of the button. Invoked when the theme has been changed. Enumeration of System button types. SystemButton Minimize Maximize Restore Help Close Enumeration of window state. Normal Minimized Maximized Enabled state of a window. Active Inactive Disabled Enumeration of frame parts. Left Right Bottom ThemedRebar Renders the grip area of a rebar band. True if a vertical gripper is to be rendered. The used to provide rendering information. Rect of the element. Clip rect. True if the themed element was able to be rendered. Renders a themed chevron button. True if a vertical chevron is to be rendered. State of the button. The used to provide rendering information. Rect of the element. Clip rect. True if the themed element was rendered. Renders a themed band background. The used to provide rendering information. Rectangle of the element. Clip rect. A boolean indicating if the themed element could be rendered. ThemedStatusBar Renders a themed status bar item. Type of item to render. The used to provide rendering information. Rectangle of the element. Clip rect. True if the themed element was able to be rendered. Enumeration of status bar items. Pane GripperPane Gripper StatusBar background Left aligned gripper ThemedTab Renders the themed tab pane. The used to provide rendering information. Rectangle of the element. Clip rect True if the element could be rendered using the system theme. Renders the themed tab body. The used to provide rendering information. Rectangle of the element. Clip rect True if the element could be rendered using the system theme. Renders a themed tab item. True if the tab item has a complete left edge. True if the tab item has a complete right edge. True if the tab item has focus. True if the tab item is selected. State of the tab item. The used to provide rendering information. Rect of the element. Clip rect. True if the element could be rendered using themes. Renders a themed tab item. True if the tab item has a complete left edge. True if the tab item has a complete right edge. True if the tab item has focus. True if the tab item is selected. State of the tab item. The used to provide rendering information. Rect of the element. Clip rect. Alignment of the tab items True if the element could be rendered using themes. ThemedPage Renders a themed page arrow. Orientation of the element. True if the element is the up (vertical) or left (horizontal) element. State of the button. The used to provide rendering information. Rectangle of the element. Clip rect True if the element is able to render the themed item. ThemedExplorer Renders a themed pin button. True if the pin button is set. State of the button. The used to provide rendering information. Rectangle of the element. Clip rect True to scale the image based on the specified rect True if the element is able to render the themed item. Renders a themed explorer button. Type of button to render State of the button The used to provide rendering information. Rectangle of the element. Clip rect True if the element is able to render the themed item. Returns the preferred size for the specified button Button type Button state The used to provide rendering information. The preferred size of the button Returns the preferred size for the specified button Button type Button state Graphics object whose hdc is used to determine the size of the button The preferred size of the button Renders a themed explorer background area. Type of background to render The used to provide rendering information. Rectangle of the element. Clip rect True if the element is able to render the themed item. Renders a themed explorer background area. The used to provide rendering information. Rectangle of the element. Clip rect True if the element is able to render the themed item. Invoked when the theme has been changed. Gets the border thickness on all sides of the header The type of header to get the border thicknesses for. A instance. Gets the padding around the header The type of header to get the padding for. A instance. Color used to display the text for an explorer bar header. Color used to display the text for an explorer bar item. Color used to display the text for an explorer bar header when the mouse is over the header. Color used to display the text for an explorer bar item when the mouse is over the header. Color used to display the text for a "special" explorer bar header. Color used to display the text for a "special" explorer bar header when the mouse is over the header. The primary color used to fill the background The second color used in a gradient fill of the background. The gradient style used in a gradient fill of the background. The color used to render the background of a standard explorer bar group. Color used to display the border color for an explorer bar group. Enumeration of the button state for an explorer style button The button is displayed in its normal state The mouse is over the button The button is pressed Enumeration of explorer button style Close button Group button displayed when the group is closed Group button displayed when the group is opened/expanded Group button displayed when a special group is closed Group button displayed when a special group is opened/expanded IE menu arrow BackgroundType Header background Normal explorer group Special explorer group Normal explorer group header Special explorer group header The type of group header Represents a normal group header Represents a special group header Unloads the style library for the themed explorer bar examples: sysmetric(-18), underline examples: ninebottom, nineright, nineclient examples: argb(0,0,0,0), rgb(64,105,179), gradient(argb(0,129,204,255), argb(0,92,125,198), 1), rcbmp(110,6,#FF00FF,0,0,1,0), dtb(handlemap(1), 3, 1), examples: rectanglev | s | fast, alpha | rectanglev | s | fast, examples: rgb(238,238,238), white, examples: rcbmp(106,2,255,0,0,0,0), dtb(handlemap(1), 9, 1), examples: rect (10rp,0rp,0rp,0rp), rect(10,0,0,0), examples: rect(0rp,20rp,0rp,0rp), examples: rgb(223,229,247), white, examples: sysmetric(2), examples: 0, 255 examples: sysmetric(-16), rcint(18)pt, examples: sysmetricstr(6), rcstr(2) examples: hand, examples: middlecenter, bottomright, wrapleft, focusrect, middleleft examples: rect(5rp,5rp,5rp,5rp), rect(2,2,2,0) examples: sysmetric(20) examples: sysmetric(-17), rcint(11) ThemedEdit Renders a themed edit area State of the edit area The used to provide rendering information. Rectangle of the element. Clip rect True if the element is able to render the themed item. Color used to display the fill color for edit controls. Color used to display the fill color for read-only edit controls. Color used to display the text color for edit controls. Color used to display the text color for read-only edit controls. XPThemes Edit control states Normal state The mouse is over the edit area Selected - Undocumented windows theme setting The edit control is disabled The edit control has focus. The edit control is read-only Assist - Undocumented windows theme setting ThemedToolbar Renders a themed toolbar button True if the button is split button True if the button is a dropdown button State of the button The used to provide rendering information. Rectangle of the element. Clip rect True if the element is able to render the themed item. ThemedListView Returns the color for the line drawn at the bottom of a group header. A class for rendering themes for a TrackBar. Draws a themed thumb of a TrackBar. Orientation of the TrackBar the thumb belongs to. The used to provide rendering information. Rect Clip rect State of the thumb. A boolean indicating whether the method was able to render the theme item. Draws the themed track of a TrackBar. Orientation of the TrackBar the thumb belongs to. The used to provide rendering information. Rect Clip rect A boolean indicating whether the method was able to render the theme item.